help 445452

1. At the beginning of 2011, Margarets adjusted basis in her 30 percent interest in MP Partnership, a general partnership, was $3,000. During 2011, Margaret did not make any additional contributions to MP Partnership, and Margarets share of MP Partnership liabilities did not change. During 2011, MP Partnership distributed $5,000 to Margaret, and MP Partnership had the following items of partnership income, deduction, gain and loss for 2011:

Taxable income $15,000

Tax exempt interest $6,000

Section 1231 loss ($10,000)

What is Margarets adjusted basis in her partnership interest in MP Partnership at the end of 2011?

2. Facts for Questions 2 and 3. Mr. Grey died on January 1, 2012. Mr. Grey made no gifts during his life. Under his will, Mr. Grey devised all of his probate assets to his wife. Mr. Grey owned the following assets, probate and nonprobate, at the date of his death:

Asset 1. Home in Mr. Grey’s and Mrs. Grey’s (his surviving spouse) names as tenants by the entireties that was purchased in 2006. The home was had a fair market value of $2,000,000 both at the date of Mr. Grey’s death and six months after the Mr. Grey’s death.

Asset 2. Publicly traded stocks and bonds solely in , Mr. Greys name that had a fair market value of $3,000,000 on the date of Mr. Greys death and a fair market value of $2,000,000 six months after Mr. Grey’s death.

Asset 3. Undeveloped real estate in Mr. Grey’s name and the name of his daughter, Sue Smith, jointly with right of survivorship that Mr. Grey purchased in 2006 for $100,000. The property had a fair market value of $2,500,000 at the date of Mr. Greys death and a fair market value of $1,000,000 six months after the date of Mr. Grey’s death.

Asset 4. A condominium in the decedent’s name alone purchased in 2002 and used as a vacation home that had a fair market value of $500,000 on the date of Mr. Greys death. The condominium was sold by the personal representative of the decedent’s estate for $250,000 four months after Mr. Greys death.

Based on the facts for questions 2 and 3, which of the following options are available to Mr. Greys estate for valuation of the assets includible in the gross estate?

a. The estate may use date of death values or it may elect alternate valuation.

b. The estate must use date of death values.

c. The estate must elect alternate valuation.

d. Valuation is not required as no Federal Estate Tax Return is required to be filed.

3. Facts for Questions 2 and 3. Mr. Grey died on January 1, 2012. Mr. Grey made no gifts during his life. Under his will, Mr. Grey devised all of his probate assets to his wife. Mr. Grey owned the following assets, probate and nonprobate, at the date of his death:

Asset 1. Home in Mr. Grey’s and Mrs. Grey’s (his surviving spouse) names as tenants by the entireties that was purchased in 2006. The home was had a fair market value of $2,000,000 both at the date of Mr. Grey’s death and six months after the Mr. Grey’s death.

Asset 2. Publicly traded stocks and bonds solely in , Mr. Greys name that had a fair market value of $3,000,000 on the date of Mr. Greys death and a fair market value of $2,000,000 six months after Mr. Grey’s death.

Asset 3. Undeveloped real estate in Mr. Grey’s name and the name of his daughter, Sue Smith, jointly with right of survivorship that Mr. Grey purchased in 2006 for $100,000. The property had a fair market value of $2,500,000 at the date of Mr. Greys death and a fair market value of $1,000,000 six months after the date of Mr. Grey’s death.

Asset 4. A condominium in the decedent’s name alone purchased in 2002 and used as a vacation home that had a fair market value of $500,000 on the date of Mr. Greys death. The condominium was sold by the personal representative of the decedent’s estate for $250,000 four months after Mr. Greys death.

Based upon the facts presented in the fact pattern for questions 2 and 3, what is the amount of Mr. Greys gross estate for federal estate tax purposes?

a. 0.

b. $2,500,000.

c. $3,500,000.

d. $4,250,000.

e. $7,000,000.

accounting 2 445457

1) A company borrowed cash from the bank by signing a 6 year, 8% installment note. The present value of an annuity at 8% for 6 years is 4.6229. Each annuity payment equals $84,362.63. The present value of the note is (closest to):

A $287,810.00.
B $84,362.63.
C $390,000.00.
D $474,362.63.
E $103,238.63.

2) Sam Kay deposits $7,200 in an account that earns interest at an annual rate of 12%, compounded quarterly. The $7,200 plus earned interest must remain in the account 3 years before it can be withdrawn. How much money will be in the account at the end of 3 years? (Use Table B.2) (Round “FV factor” to 4 decimal places and final answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

3) Which interest rate column would you use from a present value table or a future value table for 8% compounded quarterly?

12%.
6%.
3%.
2%.
1%.

accounting 202 question 445460

1. A company owns 8% bonds with a par value of $114,000 that pay interest on october 1 and april 1. The bonds were purchased on october 1st. The amount of interest accrued on december 31 (the company’s year end) would be ( do not round your intermediate calculations):

a) 9120

B) 760

c) 4560

D) 2280

E) 1520

2. All of the following statements regarding accounting for noninfluential securities under U.S GAAP and IFRS are True except:

a) Trading securities are accounted for using fair values with unrealized gains and losses reported in other comprehensive income.

b) Held to maturity securities are accounted for using amortized cost.

c) Trading securities are accounted for using fair values with unrealized gains and losses reported in net income.

d) Available for sale securities are accounted for using fair values with unrealized gains and losses reported in other comprehensive income.

e) Both systems examine held to maturity securities for impairment.

tvm appendix c answers only please 445463

1. You are considering an investment opportunity that would give you $20,000 per year at the end of each of the next 5 years. Assuming you desire to earn 9% interest, how much would you have to pay for the investment today? (Round to the nearest dollar.)

2. You are considering buying an investment that pays you $20,000 at the end of every year for 6 years. If you desire a 9% rate of return on your investment, what price would you be willing to pay for this today? (Round to the nearest whole number.)

3. You deposit $1000 at the end of the year for 5 years in an account that is paying 5% interest. How much have you earned in INTEREST at the end of the 5 years? (Round to the nearest whole dollar.)

4. You are building a yacht. It will be done in 5 years. You have 3 choices regarding payment. 1) You can pay for it now and pay $1,200,000; 2) you can pay for it when it is complete and pay $1,543,000; or 3) you can pay for it with end of the year installments of $250,000 per year for 5 years. Assume an interest rate of 7%.

Based upon time value of money considerations, what is the best payment choice for you?

5. You are building a yacht. It will be done in 5 years. You have 3 choices regarding payment. 1) You can pay for it now and pay $1,200,000; 2) you can pay for it when it is complete and pay $1,543,000; or 3) you can pay for it with end of the year installments of $250,000 per year for 5 years. Assume an interest rate of 7%.

In order to consider the value of choice 3, what time value of money variable should you solve for in order to compare it against the other choices?

PV=1,025,049
PMT=1,437,685
FV=1,250,000

6. You are building a yacht. It will be done in 5 years. You have 3 choices regarding payment. 1) You can pay for it now and pay $1,200,000; 2) you can pay for it when it is complete and pay $1,543,000; or 3) you can pay for it with end of the year installments of $250,000 per year for 5 years. Assume an interest rate of 7%.

In order to consider the value of choice 1,
what time value of money variable should you solve for in order to compare it against the other choices?

PV=1,200,000
FV=1,683,062
FV=1,200,000

7. You are building a yacht. It will be done in 5 years. You have 3 choices regarding payment. 1) You can pay for it now and pay $1,200,000; 2) you can pay for it when it is complete and pay $1,543,000; or 3) you can pay for it with end of the year installments of $250,000 per year for 5 years. Assume an interest rate of 7%.

In order to consider the value of choice 2,
what time value of money variable should you solve for in order to compare it against the other choices?

PV=1,543,000
PV=1,100,138
PMT=308,600

8. You want to purchase a boat in 5 years. You will need $15,000 to buy the boat you want. How much do you have to put in your savings account today assuming you can earn 4% interest? (Round to the nearest dollar.)

9. You want to purchase a boat in 5 years. You will need $15,000 to buy the boat you want. How much do you have to save each year assuming you can earn 3% interest? (Round to the nearest dollar.)

10. You give your dad $500 at the end of every year for the next 10 years to save for you. At the end of the 10 years, he gives you $8,000! What rate of interest did your dad pay you? (Round to the nearest whole number.)

11.You have $2000 to put in the stock market today. Assuming you can earn an 8% return, how many years must you wait until you have accumulated $4000? (Round to the nearest whole number.)

12. Your 6 year old daughter Martha inherits $50,000 cash from her grandparents. If you invest the money and receive a 10% return, how much will be available in 12 years when Martha starts college? (Round to the nearest whole number.)

managerial accounting favorable unfavorable 445464

1) The cost formula for its materials and supplies is $1,990 per month plus $8 per vehicle. For the month of November, the company planned for activity of 92 vehicles, but the actual level of activity was 52 vehicles. The actual materials and supplies for the month was $2,440.

The activity variance for materials and supplies in November would be closest to:

Answer options:

320 F or U

286 U or F

2)The cost formula for its materials and supplies is $1,990 per month plus $8 per vehicle. For the month of November, the company planned for activity of 92 vehicles, but the actual level of activity was 52 vehicles. The actual materials and supplies for the month was $2,440.

The materials and supplies in the planning budget for November would be closest to:

The materials and supplies in the flexible budget for November would be closest to:

Answer Options:

2,406

2,726

2,440

4,137

abc and process 445466

1)crawford company has the following equivalent units for july: materials 20,000 and conversion costs 18,000. Production cost data are:

MATERIALS CONVERSION

work in process, july 1 $3,200 $1,500

costs added in july $25,200 $21,000

The unit production costs for july are

M C

A) 1.42 1.25

B) 1.26 1.17

C) 1.42 1.17

D) 1.26 1.25

2) one of hatch company’s activity cost pools is machine setups, with estimated overhead of $300,000. Hatch produces sparklers(400 setups) and lighters(600 setups). How much of the machine setup cost pool should be assigned to sparklers?

A) 120,000

B)150,000

C)300,000

D)180,000

3)sparate work in process accounts are maintained for each production department or manufacturing process in a process cost sysytem

A) True

B)False

4) One similarity of process cost accounting with job order cost accounting is that both determine total manufacturing costs after each job

A) True

B)False

accounting questions 445469

1. What is the difference between inventory and cost of goods sold? Cost of goods sold and sales revenue?

2. Is gross profit an account?

3. Comstock Company counted their inventory at the end of the year and had 220 units. Included in that amount were 20 units Comstock held on consignment from Davidson Inc. Comstock purchased 50 units of inventory on December 27, FOB shipping point. How many units of inventory should Comstock report on its year end balance sheet?

4. Assume Comstock was unable to count its ending inventory because it was destroyed in a fire. Use the gross profit method to estimate the ending inventory. The gross profit rate is 52%.

Beginning inventory

Ending inventory

Net purchases

Net sales

$ 10,000

?

110,000

175,000

intermediate accounting questions pt2 445471

1.The distinction between operating and non operating income relates to:

continuity of income.
principal activities of the reporting entity.
consistency of income stream.
reliability of measurements.

2. On June 1, 2013, Romano Inc. changed the estimated useful life of its office equipment from 20 to 12 years. This change would be accounted for:

prospectively.
retrospectively.
as an accounting error.
none of the above.

3. Cash flows from investing activities do not include:

proceeds from issuing bonds.
payment for the purchase of equipment.
proceeds from the sale of marketable securities.
cash outflows from acquiring land.

4. Each of the following would be reported as items of other comprehensive income except:

foreign currency translation gains.
unrealized gains on investments accounted for as securities available for sale.
deferred gains from derivatives.
gains from the sale of equipment.

5. Reporting comprehensive income according to International Financial Reporting Standards can be accomplished by each of the following methods except:

in the statement of shareholders’ equity.
a combined statement of income and comprehensive income.
a separate statement of comprehensive income.
the entity may choose either (b) or (c).

6. The balance sheet reports:

net income at a point in time.
cash flows for a period of time.
assets and equities at a point in time.
assets and liabilities for a period of time.

taxation what is the earliest date on which bob can dispose of the building and qual 444730

Bob is notified by the city public housing authority on May 3, 2012, that his apartment building is going to be condemned as part of an urban renewal project. On June 1, 2012, Carol offers to buy the building from Bob. Bob sells the building to Carol on June 30, 2012. Condemnation occurs on September 1, 2012, and Carol receives the condemnation proceeds from the city. Assume that both Bob and Carol are calendar year taxpayers.

a. What is the earliest date on which Bob can dispose of the building and qualify for § 1033 postponement treatment?

b. Does the sale to Carol qualify as a § 1033 involuntary conversion? Why or why not?

c. What is the latest date on which Carol can acquire qualifying replacement property and qualify for postponement of the realized gain?

d. What type of property will be qualifying replacement property?

taxation roberto has received various gifts over the years he has decided to dispose 444748

Roberto has received various gifts over the years. He has decided to dispose of the following assets he received as gifts:

a. In 1951, he received land worth $32,000. The donor’s adjusted basis was $35,000. Roberto sells the land for $95,000 in 2012.

b. In 1956, he received stock in Gold Company. The donor’s adjusted basis was $19,000. The fair market value on the date of the gift was $34,000. Roberto sells the stock for $40,000 in 2012.

c. In 1962, he received land worth $15,000. The donor’s adjusted basis was $20,000. Roberto sells the land for $9,000 in 2012.

d. In 2003, he received stock worth $30,000. The donor’s adjusted basis was $42,000. Roberto sells the stock for $38,000 in 2012. What is the recognized gain or loss from each of the preceding transactions? Assume for each of the gift transactions that no gift tax was paid.

taxation ira cook is planning to make a charitable contribution to the boy scouts of 444752

Ira Cook is planning to make a charitable contribution to the Boy Scouts of Crystal, Inc. stock worth $20,000. The stock has an adjusted basis of $15,000. A friend has suggested that Ira sell the stock and contribute the $20,000 in proceeds rather than contribute the stock.

a. Should Ira follow the friend’s advice? Why or why not?

b. Assume that the fair market value is only $13,000. In this case, should Ira follow the friend’s advice? Why or why not?

c. Rather than make a charitable contribution to the Boy Scouts, Ira is going to make a gift to Nancy, his niece. Advise Ira regarding (a) and (b).

d. Write a letter to Ira regarding whether in (a) he should sell the stock and contribute the cash or contribute the stock. He has informed you that he purchased the stock six years ago. Ira’s address is 500 Ireland Avenue, DeKalb, IL 60115.

taxation what is tyneka s basis for the 1 000 shares purchased on august 20 2013 444759

Tyneka inherited 1,000 shares of Aqua, Inc. stock from Joe. Joe’s basis was $35,000, and the fair market value on July 1, 2012 (the date of death) was $45,000. The shares were distributed to Tyneka on July 15, 2012. Tyneka sold the stock on July 30, 2013, for $33,000. After giving the matter more thought, she decides that Aqua is a good investment and purchases 1,000 shares for $30,000 on August 20, 2013.

a. What is Tyneka’s basis for the 1,000 shares purchased on August 20, 2013?

b. What would be Tyneka’s basis for the 1,000 Aqua shares inherited from Joe if she had given 1,000 Aqua shares to Joe on March 1, 2012 (assuming that no gift tax was paid)? Her basis at the date of the gift was $35,000, and the fair market value was $45,000.

c. Could Tyneka have obtained different tax consequences in (a) if she had sold the 1,000 shares on December 27, 2012, and purchased the 1,000 shares on January 5, 2013? Explain.

taxation calculate abby s basis for gain loss and cost recovery for the portion of h 444760

Abby’s home had a basis of $360,000 ($160,000 attributable to the land) and a fair market value of $340,000 ($155,000 attributable to the land) when she converted 70% of it to business use by opening a bed and breakfast. Four years after the conversion, Abby sells the home for $500,000 ($165,000 attributable to the land).

a. Calculate Abby’s basis for gain, loss, and cost recovery for the portion of her personal residence that was converted to business use.

b. Calculate the cost recovery deducted by Abby during the four year period of business use, assuming that the bed and breakfast is opened on January 1 of year 1 and the house is sold on December 31 of year 4.

c. What is Abby’s recognized gain or loss on the sale of the business use portion?

taxation tanya fletcher owns undeveloped land adjusted basis of 80 000 and fair mark 444764

Tanya Fletcher owns undeveloped land (adjusted basis of $80,000 and fair market value of $92,000) on the East Coast. On January 4, 2012, she exchanges it with her sister, Lisa, for undeveloped land on the West Coast and $3,000 cash. Lisa has an adjusted basis of $72,000 for her land, and its fair market value is $89,000. As the real estate market on the East Coast is thriving, on September 1, 2013, Lisa sells the land she acquired for $120,000.

a. What are Tanya’s recognized gain or loss and adjusted basis for the West Coast land on January 4, 2012?

b. What are Lisa’s recognized gain or loss and adjusted basis for the East Coast land on January 4, 2012?

c. What is Lisa’s recognized gain or loss from the September 1, 2013 sale?

d. What effect does Lisa’s 2013 sale have on Tanya? e. Write a letter to Tanya advising her on how she could avoid any recognition of gain associated with the January 4, 2012 exchange prior to her actual sale of the land. Her address is The Corral, El Paso, TX 79968.

taxation tom and frank are brothers each owns investment property in the other s hom 444771

Tom and Frank are brothers. Each owns investment property in the other’s hometown. To make their lives easier, they decide to legally exchange the investment properties. Under the terms of the exchange, Frank will transfer realty (adjusted basis of $52,000; fair market value of $80,000) and Tom will exchange realty (adjusted basis of $60,000; fair market value of $92,000). Tom’s property is subject to a mortgage of $12,000 that will be assumed by Frank.

a. What are Frank’s and Tom’s recognized gains?

b. What are their adjusted bases?

c. As an alternative, Frank has proposed that rather than assuming the mortgage, he will transfer cash of $12,000 to Tom. Tom would use the cash to pay off the mortgage. Advise Tom on whether this alternative would be beneficial to him from a tax perspective.

taxation nell nina and nora sanders who are sisters sell their principal residence 444784

Nell, Nina, and Nora Sanders, who are sisters, sell their principal residence (owned as tenants in common) in which they have lived for the past 25 years. The youngest of the sisters is age 60. The selling price is $960,000, selling expenses and legal fees are $63,000, and the adjusted basis is $60,000 (the fair market value of the residence when inherited from their parents 25 years ago). Because the sisters are going to live in rental housing, they do not plan to acquire another residence. Nell has contacted you on behalf of the three sisters regarding the tax consequences of the sale.

a. Write a letter to Nell advising her of the tax consequences and how taxes can be minimize

d. Nell’s address is 100 Oak Avenue, Billings, MT 59101.

b. Prepare a memo for the tax files.

taxation lo 2 11 heather wants to invest 40 000 in a relatively safe venture 444822

LO.2, 11 Heather wants to invest $40,000 in a relatively safe venture and has discovered two alternatives that would produce the following reportable ordinary income and loss over the next three years: Year Alternative 1 Income (Loss) Alternative 2 Income (Loss) 1 ($20,000) ($48,000) 2 (28,000) 32,000 3 72,000 40,000 She is interested in the after tax effects of these alternatives over a three year horizon. Assume that Heather’s investment portfolio produces sufficient passive income to offset any potential passive loss that may arise from these alternatives, that her cost of capital is 6% (the present value factors are 0.9434, 0.8900, and 0.8396), that she is in the 25% tax bracket, that each investment alternative possesses equal growth potential, and that each alternative exposes her to comparable financial risk. In addition, assume that in the loss years for each alternative, there is no cash flow from or to the investment (i.e., the loss is due to depreciation), while in those years when the income is positive, cash flows to Heather equal the amount of the income. Based on these facts, compute the present value of these two investment alternatives and determine which option Heather should choose.

taxation lo 2 3 7 11 kristin graf 123 baskerville mill road jamison pa 18929 is tryi 444833

LO.2, 3, 7, 11 Kristin Graf (123 Baskerville Mill Road, Jamison, PA 18929) is trying to decide how to invest a $10,000 inheritance. One option is to make an additional investment in Rocky Road Excursions in which she has an at risk basis of $0, suspended losses under the at risk rules of $7,000, and suspended passive losses of $1,000. If Kristin makes this investment, her share of the expected profits this year would be $8,000. If her investment stays the same, her share of profits from Rocky Road Excursions would be $1,000. Another option is to invest $10,000 as a limited partner in the Ragged Mountain Winery; this investment would produce passive income of $9,000. Write a letter to Kristin to review the tax consequences of each alternative. Kristin is in the 28% tax bracket.

taxation lo 2 3 7 11 the end of the year is approaching and maxine has begun to focu 444835

LO.2, 3, 7, 11 The end of the year is approaching, and Maxine has begun to focus on ways of minimizing her income tax liability. Several years ago she purchased an investment in Teal Limited Partnership, which is subject to the at risk and the passive activity loss rules. (Last year Maxine sold a different investment that was subject to these rules but produced passive income.) She believes that her investment in Teal has good long term economic prospects. However, it has been generating tax losses for several years in a row. In fact, when she was discussing last year’s income tax return with her tax accountant, he said that unless “things change” with respect to her investments, she would not be able to deduct losses this year. a. What was the accountant referring to in his comment? b. You learn that Maxine’s current at risk basis in her investment is $1,000 and that her share of the current loss is expected to be $13,000. Based on these facts, how will her loss be treated?

c. After reviewing her situation, Maxine’s financial adviser suggests that she invest at least an additional $12,000 in Teal to ensure a full loss deduction in the current year. How do you react to his suggestion? d. What would you suggest Maxine consider as she attempts to maximize her currentyear deductible loss?

lavor produces lamps and home lighting fixtures its most popular product is a brushe 444945

Lavor produces lamps and home lighting fixtures. Its most popular product is a brushed aluminum desk lamp. This lamp is made from components shaped in the fabricating department and assembled in its implementation department. Information related to the 35,000 desk lamps produced annually follow.

Direct materials

$280,000

Direct labor

Fabricating department (7,00 DLH x $20 per DLH)

$140, 000

Implementation department (16,000 DLH x $29 per DLH)

$464, 000

Machine hours

Fabricating department

15,040 MH

Implementation department

21,000 MH

Expected overhead cost and related data for the two production departments follow.

Direct labor hours

75,000 DLH

125, 000 DLH

Machine hours

80,000 MH

62,5000 MH

Overhead cost

$300,000

$200,000

Required

  1. Determine the plantwide overhead rate for Lavor using direct labor hours as a base.
  2. Determine the total manufacturing cost per unit for the aluminum desk lamp using the plantwide overhead rate.
  3. Compute departmental overhead rates based on machine hours in the fabricating department and direct labor hours in the implementation department.

three exercises job costing abc overhead allocation and keep or drop decision 444979

The questions have been detailed in the attachment.

Document Preview:

TransTutors.com  Assignment     Exercise  1:  Job  Costing     • Exercise  5 ­ 41.  Do  required  parts  2,  4,  and  5  only.   • Journal  entries  are  NOT  required.   • Note  that  work ­ in ­ process  inventory  consists  of  jobs  not  completed  at  the   end  of  the  month  and  finished  goods  inventory  consists  of  jobs  compelted  but   not  sold  at  the  end  of  the  month.Exercise  2:  ABC  Overhead  Allocation     • Exercise  7 ­ 39.  Answer  all  required  parts.Exercise  3:  Keep  or  Drop  Decision     • Case  13 ­ 52.  Using  the  information  in  the  case,  answer  the  following   questions:   o Identify  each  of  the  following  items  as  relevant  or  irrelevant  for  the   decision  whether  to  keep  or  drop  the  division.  Briefly  explain  why   each  item  is  revenant  or  irrelevant.   ! Sales  revenue   ! Purchase  of  the  part  from  an  external  supplier   ! Fixed  overhead  to  produce  the  product   ! Fixed  selling  and  administrative  expenses   ! Prime  cost  to  produce  the  product   o Prepare  an  analysis  to  help  the  president  decide  whether  to  show   down  the  division.  Show  your  calculations.

Attachments:

lump sum purchase 444989

Lump Sum Purchase Garrett Corporation paid $200,000 to acquire land, buildings, and equipment. At the timeof acquisition, Garrett paid $20,000 for an appraisal, which revealed the following values: land, $100,000; buildings, $125,000; and equipment, $25,000.

Use the attached Excel Spreadsheet for your answers.

1. What cost should the company assign to the land, buildings, and equipment, respectively?

2. Assume that Garrett uses IFRS and chooses to use the revaluation model to value its property, plant, and equip ment. At the end of the year, the book value of the land, buildings, and equipment are $88,000, $104,000,and $18,000, respectively. The company determines that the fair value of the land, buildings, and equipment at the end of year is $110,000, $106,000, and $15,000, respectively.

Prepare the journal entries in that Garrett should make to value its property, plant, and equipment.

ryder company which began operations in 2011 invests its idle cash in trading securi 444990

Ryder Company, which began operations in 2011, invests its idle cash in trading securities. The following transactions are from its short term investments in its trading securities.

2011
Jan. 20 Purchased 900 shares of Ford Motor Co. at $26 per share plus a $125 commission.
Feb. 9 Purchased 2,800 shares of Lucent at $34 per share plus a $195 commission.
Oct. 12 Purchased 760 shares of Z Seven at $7.60 per share plus a $95 commission.

2012
Apr. 15 Sold 900 shares of Ford Motor Co. at $31 per share less a $295 commission.
July 5 Sold 760 shares of Z Seven at $10.50 per share less a $100 commission.
July 22 Purchased 1,900 shares of Hunt Corp. at $32 per share plus a $220 commission.
Aug. 19 Purchased 1,800 shares of Donna Karan at $14 per share plus a $105 commission.
2013
Feb. 27 Purchased 3,900 shares of HCA at $35 per share plus a $410 commission.
Mar. 3 Sold 1,900 shares of Hunt at $27 per share less a $125 commission.
June 21 Sold 2,800 shares of Lucent at $31.75 per share less a $37 commission.
June 30 Purchased 1,300 shares of Black & Decker at $47.50 per share plus a $595 commission.
Nov. 1 Sold 1,800 shares of Donna Karan at $24.00 per share less a $124 commission.

Prepare journal entries to record these short term investment activities for the years shown. (Ignore any year end adjusting entries.)(Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Date General Journal Debit Credit
Jan. 20, 2011 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Short term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Fair value adjustment tradingShort term investments trading (Z Seven)CashGain on sale of short term investmentsLoss on sale of short term investments
(Click to select)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Lucent)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Z Seven)CashShort term investments trading (Ford)Fair value adjustment trading
Feb. 9, 2011 (Click to select)Gain on sale of short term investmentsCashShort term investments trading (Lucent)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Fair value adjustment tradingShort term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Loss on sale of short term investments
(Click to select)Short term investments trading (Ford)Fair value adjustment tradingShort term investments trading (Hunt)CashGain on sale of short term investmentsLoss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Lucent)
Oct. 12, 2011 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Fair value adjustment tradingShort term investments trading (Z Seven)CashLoss on sale of short term investmentsGain on sale of short term investments
(Click to select)Short term investments trading (Lucent)CashFair value adjustment tradingShort term investments trading (Ford)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Gain on sale of short term investments
Apr. 15, 2012 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Hunt)CashShort term investments trading (Ford)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (D.Karan)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Lucent)
(Click to select)Short term investments trading (Lucent)CashShort term investments trading (D.Karan)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Gain on sale of short term investmentsLoss on sale of short term investments
(Click to select)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)CashShort term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)Loss on sale of short term investments
July 5, 2012 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Loss on sale of short term investmentsCashShort term investments trading (D.Karan)Gain on sale of short term investments
(Click to select)CashShort term investments trading (Ford)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Lucent)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (D.Karan)
(Click to select)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)CashShort term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Loss on sale of short term investmentsGain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Hunt)
July 22, 2012 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Z Seven)CashGain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)
(Click to select)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (D.Karan)CashShort term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Ford)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Lucent)Short term investments trading (Hunt)
Aug. 19, 2012 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)CashShort term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Loss on sale of short term investmentsGain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Z Seven)
(Click to select)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)Gain on sale of short term investmentsLoss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Cash
Feb. 27, 2013 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (HCA)Short term investments trading (Ford)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)Loss on sale of short term investmentsCashShort term investments trading (B&D)
(Click to select)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (HCA)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Ford)CashShort term investments trading (B&D)
Mar. 3, 2013 (Click to select)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (B&D)Short term investments trading (Hunt)CashShort term investments trading (HCA)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)
(Click to select)Short term investments trading (HCA)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (D.Karan)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (B&D)CashShort term investments trading (Ford)
(Click to select)Short term investments trading (B&D)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Ford)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (D.Karan)CashShort term investments trading (HCA)
June 21, 2013 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (HCA)Short term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (B&D)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Lucent)CashGain on sale of short term investmentsLoss on sale of short term investments
(Click to select)Short term investments trading (HCA)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Ford)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (B&D)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Lucent)Cash
(Click to select)Short term investments trading (Ford)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Hunt)CashShort term investments trading (Lucent)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (HCA)
June 30, 2013 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (HCA)Short term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (B&D)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (D.Karan)Cash
(Click to select)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)Short term investments trading (B&D)Short term investments trading (Hunt)CashShort term investments trading (HCA)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)
Nov. 1, 2013 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (HCA)CashLoss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (B&D)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)
(Click to select)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Ford)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (HCA)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (B&D)
(Click to select)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (HCA)Gain on sale of short term investmentsLoss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (B&D)Short term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)

discuss the similarities and differences between assurance services provided by audi 445029

1 Discuss the similarities and differences between assurance services provided by auditors on ‘historical financial information’ and those relating to ‘reliability of subject matter’. About ¾ of a page Please include reference at the bottom of each solution About ¾ of a page 2 What do you think are the important issues that auditors will face in the next five years? About ¾ of a page Please include reference at the bottom of each solution 3 In your own words, please summarize the following sections of the Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002 and explain their impact on auditing. Please submit your paper following APA format on maximum of one page, not counting the cover and reference pages. SEC. 302. CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINANCIAL REPORTS. SEC. 404. MANAGEMENT ASSESSMENT OF INTERNAL CONTROLS. SEC. 406. CODE OF ETHICS FOR SENIOR FINANCIAL OFFICERS. SEC. 409. REAL TIME ISSUER DISCLOSURES. Please include reference at the bottom of each solution 4 Part 1: Review PCAOB Accounting Standard 5 (AS 5). Discuss the key provisions of AS 5 in your own words and a maximum of one page, following APA format. AS 5 Standard URL:?http://pcaobus.org/Standards/Auditing/Pages/Auditing_Standard_5.aspx Part 2: a. What are the seven parts of an audit report??b. What are the contents of each part. About ¾ of a page Please include reference at the bottom of each solution

Document Preview:

1 Discuss the similarities and differences between assurance services provided by auditors on ‘historical financial information’ and those relating to ‘reliability of subject matter’. About ¾ of a page Please include reference at the bottom of each solution About ¾ of a page 2 What do you think are the important issues that auditors will face in the next five years? About ¾ of a page Please include reference at the bottom of each solution 3 In your own words, please summarize the following sections of the Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002 and explain their impact on auditing. Please submit your paper following APA format on maximum of one page, not counting the cover and reference pages. SEC. 302. CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINANCIAL REPORTS. SEC. 404. MANAGEMENT ASSESSMENT OF INTERNAL CONTROLS. SEC. 406. CODE OF ETHICS FOR SENIOR FINANCIAL OFFICERS. SEC. 409. REAL TIME ISSUER DISCLOSURES. Please include reference at the bottom of each solution 4 Part 1: Review PCAOB Accounting Standard 5 (AS 5). Discuss the key provisions of AS 5 in your own words and a maximum of one page, following APA format. AS 5 Standard URL:?http://pcaobus.org/Standards/Auditing/Pages/Auditing_Standard_5.aspx Part 2: a. What are the seven parts of an audit report??b. What are the contents of each part. About ¾ of a page Please include reference at the bottom of each solution ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

comprehensive problem 5 445101

Comprehensive Problem
Part A:

The following is the comprehensive problem in the textbook which encompasses all of the elements learned in previous chapters. Refer to the objectives for each chapter covered as a review of concepts.

Note: You must complete part A before completing parts B and C.

Essence of Persia, Inc., began operations on January 1, 2010. The company produces a hand and body lotion in an eight ounce bottle called Eternal Beauty. The lotion is sold wholesale in 12 bottle cases for $80 per case. There is a selling commission of $16 per case. The January direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead costs are as follows:

Part A Break Even Analysis

The management of Essence of Persia, Inc., wishes to determine the number of cases required to break even per month. The utilities cost, which is part of factory overhead, is a mixed cost. The following information was gathered from the first six months of operation regarding this cost:

Instructions:

1. Determine the fixed and variable portion of the utility cost using the high low method. Round the per unit cost to the nearest cent.

At High Point At Low Point
Variable Cost (per unit) $__________ $__________
Total Fixed Cost $__________ $__________
Total Cost $__________ $__________

2. Determine the contribution margin per case. Enter your answer to the nearest cent. For example, 89.458 would be entered as 89.46

Contribution margin per case: $_________

3. Determine the fixed costs per month, including the utility fixed cost from part (1). Enter your answers to the nearest whole number. For example, 89.45 would be entered as 89 and 89.56 would be entered as 90.

Utilities Cost (from part 1) $ __________
Facility Lease $ __________
Equipment Depreciation $ __________
Supplies $ __________
Total Fixed Costs $ __________

4. Determine the break even number of cases per month. Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

__________ Cases

Comprehensive Problem
Part B:

Note: This section is a continuation from Part A of the comprehensive problem. Be sure you have completed Part A before attempting Part B. You may have to refer back to data presented in Part A and use answers from Part A when completing this section.

Essence of Persia, Inc., began operations on January 1, 2010. The company produces a hand and body lotion in an eight ounce bottle called Eternal Beauty. The lotion is sold wholesale in 12 bottle cases for $80 per case. There is a selling commission of $16 per case. The January direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead costs are as follows:

Part B August Budgets

During July of the current year, the management of Essence of Persia, Inc., asked the controller to prepare August manufacturing and income statement budgets. Demand was expected to be 1,400 cases at $80 per case for August. Inventory planning information is provided as follows:

There was negligible work in process inventory assumed for either the beginning or end of the month; thus, none was assumed. In addition, there was no change in the cost per unit or estimated units per case operating data from January.

5. Prepare the August production budget. Enter all amounts as positive numbers.
ESSENCE OF PERSIA, INC.
Production Budget
For the Month Ended August 31, 2010
                                                             Cases
Expected cases to be sold                      __________
Plus desired ending inventory                 __________
Total                                                     __________

Less estimated beginning inventory        __________
Total units to be produced                     __________

6. Prepare the August direct materials purchases budget. Enter the unit price as dollars and cents but carry out to three decimal places. For example, enter .2357 as 0.236 and enter 3.61 as 3.610. Enter all amounts as positive numbers.
ESSENCE OF PERSIA, INC.
Direct Materials Purchases Budget
For the Month Ended August 31, 2010                                  Natural
                                                            Cream Base              Oils                Bottles                 Total
                                                                (ozs.)                  (ozs.)              (bottles)

Units required for production
Plus desired ending inventory
Less estimated beginning inventory
Direct materials to be purchased
Unit price X X X
Total direct materials to be purchased

7. Prepare the August direct labor budget. For hours required, round to nearest whole hour. For hourly rate, enter the amount as rounded to nearest whole dollar.
ESSENCE OF PERSIA, INC.
Direct Labor Budget
For the Month Ended August 31, 2010
                                                                 Mixing                   Filling                    Total
Hours required for production:
Hand and body lotion
Hourly rate X X
Total direct labor cost

8. Prepare the August factory overhead budget. If an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank.
ESSENCE OF PERSIA, INC.
Factory Overhead Budget
For the Month Ended August 31, 2010
Factory overhead Fixed Variable Total
Utilities
Facility Lease
Equipment Depreciation
Supplies
Total

9. On your own paper, a spreadsheet or working papers, prepare the August budgeted income statement, including selling expenses. Provide the following amounts:
Sales: $
Cost of direct materials for production: $
Cost of goods sold: $
Gross profit: $
Selling expenses: $
Income before income tax: $

Comprehensive Problem
Part C:

Note: This section is a continuation from Parts A and B of the comprehensive problem. Be sure you have completed Parts A and B before attempting Part C. You may have to refer back to data presented in Parts A and B as well as use answers from those parts when completing this section.

Essence of Persia, Inc., began operations on January 1, 2010. The company produces a hand and body lotion in an eight ounce bottle called Eternal Beauty. The lotion is sold wholesale in 12 bottle cases for $80 per case. There is a selling commission of $16 per case. The January direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead costs are as follows:

Part C August Variance Analysis

During September of the current year, the controller was asked to perform variance analyses for August. The January operating data provided the standard prices, rates, times, and quantities per case. There were 1,500 actual cases produced during August, which was 200 more cases than planned at the beginning of the month. Actual data for August were as follows:

The prices of the materials were different than standard due to fluctuations in market prices. The standard quantity of materials used per case was an ideal standard. The Mixing Department used a higher grade labor classification during the month, thus causing the actual labor rate to exceed standard. The Filling Department used a lower grade labor classification during the month, thus causing the actual labor rate to be less than standard.

10. Determine and interpret the direct materials price and quantity variances for the three materials. Enter the costs in dollars and cents (unless otherwise instructed). Enter all amounts as positive numbers.
Direct Materials Price Variance:
                                                     Cream Base                 Natural Oils                 Bottles
Actual price                                   $                                $                                 $
Standard price
Difference                                     $                                $                                 $
Actual quantity (cases)                  X                                X                                 X
Direct materials price variance      $                                $                                 $
Indicate if favorable or unfavorable

Enter the standard price to three decimal places. For example, $1.3458 would be entered as 1.346.
Direct Materials Quantity Variance:
                                                                 Cream Base             Natural Oils            Bottles
Actual quantity   
Standard quantity
Difference
Standard price
Direct materials quantity variance
Indicate if favorable or unfavorable

Interpret your results.

The input in the box below will not be graded, but may be reviewed and considered by your instructor.

11. Determine and interpret the direct labor rate and time variances for the two departments. Enter the costs in dollars and cents. Enter all amounts as positive numbers.
Direct Labor Rate Variance:
                                              Mixing Department                   Filling Department
Actual rate
Standard rate
Difference
Actual time (hours)
Direct labor rate variance
Indicate if favorable
or unfavorable

Direct Labor Time Variance:
                                           Mixing Department              Filling Department
Actual time (hours)
Standard time (hours)
Difference
Standard rate
Direct labor time variance
Indicate if favorable
or unfavorable

Interpret your results.

12. Determine and interpret the factory overhead controllable variance. Enter all amounts as positive numbers.
Actual variable overhead $
Variable overhead at standard cost
Factory overhead controllable variance $
Indicate if favorable or unfavorable SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 66

Interpret your results.

13. Determine and interpret the factory overhead volume variance. When determining the fixed factory overhead rate, round your answer to two decimal places. Enter all amounts as positive numbers.

Normal volume (cases)
Actual volume (cases)
Difference
Fixed factory overhead rate $
Factory overhead volume variance $
Indicate if favorable or unfavorable SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 73

Interpret your results.

14. Why are the standard direct labor and direct materials costs in the calculations for parts (10) and (11) based on the actual 1,500 case production volume rather than the planned 1,300 cases of production used in the budgets for parts (6) and (7)?

below a comparative balance sheet for 1996 and 1995 are reprinted as at dece 445109

Below, a comparative balance sheet for 1996 and 1995 are reprinted as at December 31 year end. The Parent and the 70% stake Subsidiary are shown in the Balance Sheet.

Q Ltd.

Comparative Balance Sheet

Consolidated 1996 Consolidated 1995
Assets
Cash $ 790 $ 840
Accounts receivable 620 710
Inventory 990 490
Plant and Equipment 4,800 5,100
Accumulated depreciation (1,800) (1,980)
Goodwill 360 396
Total assets $ 5,760 $ 5,556
Liabilities
Current liabilities $ 1,250 $ 1,780
Accrued liabilities $ 288.4 $ 120
Long term liabilities $ 2,160 $ 2,100
Total liabilities 3,698.4 4,000
Non controlling interest 345.6 336
Common shares 1,000 900
Retained earnings 716 320
Total equities 2,061.6 1,556
Total Liabilities and equities $ 5,760 $ 5,556

Details:

  • In 1996 the subsidiary company paid dividends totaling $96,000
  • Net income for 1996 was $480,000
  • There was no change in Parent’s 70% interest during the year.
  • Equipment that was worn out and obsolete was sold for $10,000 at the end of the year. The equipment originally cost $600,000 and had a net book value of $65,000 on the date it was retired.

Using the information above, produce a consolidated cash flow statement (IFRS, Canada).

Attachments:

compute the materials quantity variance b compute the materials price variance 445110

PROBLEM # 1 Silmon Corporation makes a product with the following standard costs: In June the company produced 4,200 units using 21,830 grams of the direct material and 2,580 direct labor hours. During the month the company purchased 24,100 grams of the direct material at a price of $6.80 per gram. The actual direct labor rate was $14.60 per hour and the actual variable overhead rate was $3.90 per hour. The materials price variance is computed when materials are purchased. Variable overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours.

Required: a. Compute the materials quantity variance. b. Compute the materials price variance. c. Compute the labor efficiency variance. d. Compute the direct labor rate variance. e. Compute the variable overhead efficiency variance. f. Compute the variable overhead rate variance.

PROBLEM # 2 Walkenhorst Corporation’s manufacturing overhead includes $7.80 per machine hour for supplies; $7.30 per machinehour for indirect labor; $21,210 per period for salaries; and $19,950 per period for depreciation.

Required: Determine the predetermined overhead rate if the denominator level of activity is 1,500 machine hours.

Document Preview:

CHAPTER 10 and 10A ASSIGNMENT No credit will be assigned for answers without back up work. Back up work may be on accompanying Excel sheet. PROBLEM # 1 Silmon Corporation makes a product with the following standard costs: In June the company produced 4,200 units using 21,830 grams of the direct material and 2,580 direct labor hours. During the month the company purchased 24,100 grams of the direct material at a price of $6.80 per gram. The actual direct labor rate was $14.60 per hour and the actual variable overhead rate was $3.90 per hour. The materials price variance is computed when materials are purchased. Variable overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. Required: a. Compute the materials quantity variance. b. Compute the materials price variance. c. Compute the labor efficiency variance. d. Compute the direct labor rate variance. e. Compute the variable overhead efficiency variance. f. Compute the variable overhead rate variance. PROBLEM # 2 Walkenhorst Corporation’s manufacturing overhead includes $7.80 per machine hour for supplies; $7.30 per machine hour for indirect labor; $21,210 per period for salaries; and $19,950 per period for depreciation. Required: Determine the predetermined overhead rate if the denominator level of activity is 1,500 machine hours.

accounting 445135

The BakFirn Corporation, a publicly traded firm, has contracted with YOUCPA,your public accounting firm, for an audit. The BakFirn Corporation manufactures specialty construction tools. The tools are used in the unique construction of homes, warehouses, and multiunit dwellings. The prices range from $1,000 to $5,000 per unit.

During the audit, the audit team has determined the risk assessment of the client. Consequently, the audit has to respond to the assessed risks of material misstatement at the financial statement and assertion levels. The YOUCPA audit team has asked you, the auditor, to prepare a list of actions that you will take to assess the audit risk.

The following information is available in the year just finished:

  • The BakFirn Corporation end of year is 12/31/20XX.
  • Sales for the previous year were $10,000,000. Sales this year are coming in at $9,500,000.
  • The firm is in the construction machine industry, making specialty tools.
  • Account receivable days sales outstanding (DSO) has been averaging 90–120 days. The year before, it was80–90 days.
  • Inventory turns have decreased from 3 to 2 per year.
  • Account receivable and inventory make up 80% of total assets.
  • Internal auditing has been reduced by one person to reduce costs.
  • An initial test of controls in cash receipt indicated a lack of following procedures.
  • The construction industry is in the third year of a downturn. It is forecasted to last two more years.
  • The audit team has defined materiality to be focused on account receivable and inventory with $3,000 being the initial threshold. Net income for last year was $1,000,000.
  • Inventory at the end of the year was $2,500,000.
  • Account receivable at the end of the year was $2,740,000, or 100 DSO.
  • The previous auditors did not disclose any fraud or any management issues at the meeting with BakFirn and YOUCPA. The reason for the auditor change was explained as a costs reduction program.

Assignment Guidelines:

  1. Audit Assessment Steps:
    1. What is the initial audit risk? High, medium or low?
    2. What factors made you decide on this level?

ravsten company uses a job order costing system on january 1 281401

Ravsten Company uses a job order costing system. On January 1, the beginning of the current year, the company’s inventory balances were as follows:

Raw materials . . . . . . . . . $16,000

Work in process . . . . . . . . $10,000

Finished goods . . . . . . . . $30,000

The company applies overhead cost to jobs on the basis of machine hours. For the current year, the company estimated that it would work 36,000 machine hours and incur $153,000 in manufacturing overhead cost. The following transactions were recorded for the year:

a. Raw materials purchased on account, $200,000.

b. Raw materials requisitioned for use in production, $190,000 (80% direct and 20% indirect).

c. The following costs were incurred for employee services:

Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $160,000

Indirect labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $27,000

Sales commissions . . . . . . . . . . $36,000

Administrative salaries . . . . . . . $80,000

d. Heat, power, and water costs incurred in the factory, $42,000.

e. Prepaid insurance expired during the year, $10,000 (90% relates to factory operations, and 10% relates to selling and administrative activities).

f. Advertising costs incurred, $50,000.

g. Depreciation recorded for the year, $60,000 (85% relates to factory operations, and 15% relates to selling and administrative activities).

h. Manufacturing overhead cost was applied to production. The company recorded 40,000 machine hours for the year.

i. Goods that cost $480,000 to manufacture according to their job cost sheets were transferred to the finished goods warehouse.

j. Sales for the year totaled $700,000 and were all on account. The total cost to manufacture these goods according to their job cost sheets was $475,000.

Required:

1. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions given above.

2. Prepare T accounts for inventories, Manufacturing Overhead, and Cost of Goods Sold. Post relevant data from your journal entries to these T accounts (don’t forget to enter the opening balances in your inventory accounts). Compute an ending balance in each account.

3. Is Manufacturing Overhead underapplied or overapplied for the year? Prepare a journal entry to close any balance in the Manufacturing Overhead account to Cost of Goods Sold.

4. Prepare an income statement for the year. (Do not prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured; all of the information needed for the income statement is available in the journal entries and T accounts you have prepared.)

rhile industries inc produces colorful and stylish nursing un 281433

Rhile Industries, Inc., produces colorful and stylish nursing uniforms. During September, Rhile Industries completed the following transactions:

Sept.1Purchased direct materials on account, $59,400.

3Requested direct materials costing $26,850 for production (all for Job A).

4Purchased indirect materials costing, $22,830.

8Issued checks for the following overhead costs: utilities, $4,310; manufacturing insurance, $1,925; and repairs, $4,640.

10Requested direct materials costing $29,510 (all used on Job A) and indirect materials costing $6,480 for production.

15Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor, $62,900 (all for Job A); indirect labor, $31,610; manufacturing supervision, $26,900; and sales commissions, $32,980.

15Applied overhead to production at a rate of 120 percent of direct labor cost.

Sept22Paid the following overhead costs: utilities, $4,270; maintenance, $3,380; and rent, $3,250.

23Recorded the purchase on account and receipt of $31,940 of direct materials and $9,260 of indirect materials.

27Requested $28,870 of direct materials (Job A, $2,660; Job B, $8,400; Job C, $17,810) and $7,640 of indirect materials for production.

30Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor, $64,220 (Job A, $44,000; Job B, $9,000; Job C, $11,220); indirect labor, $30,290; manufacturing supervision, $28,520; and sales commissions, $36,200.

30Applied overhead to production at a rate of 120 percent of direct labor cost.

30completed and transferred Job A (58,840 units) and Job B (3,525 units) to finished goods inventory; total cost was $322,400.

30Shipped Job A to the customer; total production cost was $294,200, and sales price was $418,240.

30Recorded the following adjusting entries: $2,680 for depreciation manufacturing equipment; and $ 1,230 for property taxes, manufacturing, payable at month end.

Required

1. Record the entries for all Rhile’s transactions in September using T accounts for the following: Materials Inventory, Work in process Inventory, Finished Goods Inventory, Overhead, Cash, Accounts Receivable, Accumulated Depreciation Manufacturing Equipment, Accounts Payable, Payroll payable, Property Taxes Payable, Sales, cost of Goods Sold, and Selling and Administrative Expenses. Use job order cost cards for Job A, Job B, and Job C. Determine the partial account balances. Assume no beginning inventory balances. Assume also that when payroll was recorded, entries were made to the payroll payable account. (Round your answers to the nearest whole dollar.)

2. Computer the amount of underapplied or overapplied overhead for September and transfer it to the Cost of Goods Sold account.

3. Why should the Overhead account’s underapplied or overapplied overhead be transferred to the Cost of Goods Sold account?

riveredge manufacturing company realized too late that it had ma 281434

Riveredge Manufacturing Company realized too late that it had made a mistake locating its controller’s office and its electronic data processing system in the basement. Because of the spring thaw, the Mississippi River overflowed its banks on May 2 and flooded the company’s basement. Electronic data storage was destroyed, and the company had not provided off site storage of data. Some of the paper printouts were located but were badly faded and only partially legible. On May 3, when the flooding subsided, company accountants were able to assemble the following factory related data from the debris and from discussions with various knowledgeable personnel. Data about the following accounts were found:

?c Raw Material (includes indirect material) Inventory: Balance April 1 was $9,600.

?c Work in Process Inventory: Balance April 1 was $15,400.

?c Finished Goods Inventory: Balance April 30 was $13,200.

?c Total company payroll cost for April was $58,400.

?c Accounts payable balance April 30 was $36,000.

?c Indirect material used in April cost $11,600.

?c Other nonmaterial and nonlabor overhead items for April totaled $5,000.

Payroll records, kept at an across town service center that processes the company’s payroll, showed that April’s direct labor amounted to $36,400 and represented 8,800 labor hours. Indirect factory labor amounted to $10,800 in April.

The president’s office had a file copy of the production budget for the current year. It revealed that the predetermined overhead application rate is based on planned annual direct labor hours of 100,800 and expected factory overhead of $302,400.

Discussion with the factory superintendent indicated that only two jobs remained unfinished on April 30. Fortunately, the superintendent also had copies of the job cost sheets that showed a combined total of $4,800 of direct material and $9,000 of direct labor. The direct labor hours on these jobs totaled 2,144. Both of these jobs had been started during April.

A badly faded copy of April’s Cost of Goods Manufactured and Sold Schedule showed cost of goods manufactured was $96,000, and the April 1 Finished Goods Inventory was $16,800.

The treasurer’s office files copies of paid invoices chronologically. All invoices are for raw material purchased on account. Examination of these files revealed that unpaid invoices on April 1 amounted to $12,200; $56,000 of purchases had been made during April; and $36,000 of unpaid invoices existed on April 30.

a. Calculate the cost of direct material used in April.

b. Calculate the cost of raw material issued in April.

c. Calculate the April 30 balance of Raw Material Inventory.

d. Determine the amount of underapplied or overapplied overhead for April.

e. What is the Cost of Goods Sold for April?

robinson parts co uses a job order cost system the 281435

Robinson Parts Co. uses a job order cost system. The following data summarize the operations related to production for June:

a. Materials purchased on account, $705,000.

b. Materials requisitioned, $527,000, of which $45,000 was for general factory use.

c. Factory labor used, $417,800, of which $95,000 was indirect.

d. Other costs incurred on account were for factory overhead, $340,500; selling expenses, $215,000; and administrative expenses, $128,500.

e. Prepaid expenses expired for factory overhead were $23,000; for selling expenses, $15,000; and for administrative expenses, $9,000.

f. Depreciation of office building was $39,000; of office equipment, $19,700; and of warehouse equipment, $12,300.

g. Factory overhead costs applied to jobs, $579,600.

h. Jobs completed, $1,643,700.

i. Cost of goods sold, $1,650,000.

Instructions

Journalize the entries to record the summarized operations.

rockwall plastic products company makes a plastic toy using two 281436

Rockwall Plastic Products Company makes a plastic toy using two departments, parts and assembly. The following data pertain to the parts department’s transactions in 2011.

1. The beginning balance in the Work in Process Inventory account was $11,400. This inventory consisted of parts for 1,000 toys. The beginning balances in the Raw Materials Inventory, Production Supplies, and Cash accounts were $128,000, $2,000, and $400,000, respectively.

2. Direct materials costing $104,000 were issued to the parts department. The materials were sufficient to make 5,000 additional toys.

3. Direct labor cost was $94,000, and indirect labor costs are $9,200. All labor costs were paid in cash.

4. The predetermined overhead rate was $0.30 per direct labor dollar.

5. Actual overhead costs other than indirect materials and indirect labor for the year were $19,000, which was paid in cash.

6. The parts department completed work for 4,500 toys. The remaining toy parts were 20 percent complete. The completed parts were transferred to the assembly department.

7. All of the production supplies had been used by the end of 2011.

8. Over or underapplied overhead was closed to the Cost of Goods Sold account.

Required

a. Determine the number of equivalent units of production.

b. Determine the product cost per equivalent unit.

c. Allocate the total cost between the ending work in process inventory and parts transferred to the assembly department.

d. Record the transactions in a partial set of T accounts.

salem corp contracted for a specialized production machine from 281440

Salem Corp. contracted for a specialized production machine from Quindo Industries, a tool company. The contract specified a price equal to ?oproduction cost plus 15% of production cost.?? A sales executive at Quindo told Salem’s management that the machine’s approximate price would be $1,725,000 based on the following estimates:

Direct material cost ………………………………………………………$500,000

Direct labor cost …………………………………………………………. 400,000

Manufacturing overhead (applied based on machine time) ……………… 600,000

Markup …………………………………………………………………… 225,000

Estimated price to Salem …………………………………………… $1,725,000

Two months later, Quindo Industries delivered the completed machinery, configured and manufactured as per the contract. However, the accompanying invoice caught Salem’s executives by surprise. The invoice provided the following:

Direct material cost ……………………………………………………..$658,000

Direct labor cost ………………………………………………………… 625,000

Manufacturing overhead (applied based on machine time) …………….. 640,000

Markup ………………………………………………………………… 288,450

Estimated price to Salem …………………………………………….. $2,211,450

Upon receiving the invoice, Salem executives requested an audit of the direct material charges because they were more than 30 percent higher than the original estimate. Quindo Industries granted the request and Salem hired your firm to conduct the audit.

a. Describe your strategy for validating the $658,000 charge for direct material and discuss specific documents you will request from Quindo Industries as part of the audit.

b. Describe your strategy for validating the $625,000 charge for direct labor and discuss specific documents you will request from Quindo Industries as part of the audit.

c. How might Quindo Industries have manipulated the predetermined overhead rate?

d. Even if all of the charges are validated, do you perceive the tool company’s behavior in this case as ethical? Explain.

san angelo corp uses a job order costing system for 281444

San Angelo Corp. uses a job order costing system for client contracts related to custom manufactured pulley systems. Elmore Mechanical recently ordered 20,000 pulleys, and the job was assigned #BA468. Information for Job #BA468 revealed the following:

Direct material ……………….$40,800

Direct labor …………………… 49,200

Overhead ……………………… 36,800

Final inspection of the pulleys revealed that 230 were defective. In correcting the defects, an additional $1,150 of cost was incurred ($250 for direct material and $900 for direct labor). After the defects were corrected, the pulleys were included with the other good units and shipped to the customer.

a. Journalize the entry to record incurrence of the rework costs if San Angelo Corp.’s predetermined overhead rate includes normal rework costs.

b. Journalize the entry to record incurrence of the rework costs if rework is normal but specific to this job. If San Angelo Corp. prices jobs on a cost plus basis, should the rework costs be considered in determining the markup?

c. Journalize the entry to record incurrence of the rework costs, assuming that all rework is abnormal.

savallas company is highly automated and uses computers to contr 281449

Savallas Company is highly automated and uses computers to control manufacturing operations. The company uses a job order costing system and applies manufacturing overhead cost to products on the basis of computer hours. The following estimates were used in preparing the predetermined overhead rate at the beginning of the year:

Computer hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,000

Manufacturing overhead cost . . . . . . . . $1,530,000

During the year, a severe economic recession resulted in cutting back production and a buildup of inventory in the company’s warehouse. The company’s cost records revealed the following actual cost and operating data for the year:

Computer hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,000

Manufacturing overhead cost . . . . . . . . $1,350,000

Inventories at year end:

Raw materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 400,000

Work in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 160,000

Finished goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1,040,000

Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 2,800,000

Required:

1. Compute the company’s predetermined overhead rate for the year.

2. Compute the underapplied or overapplied overhead for the year.

3. Assume the company closes any underapplied or overapplied overhead directly to Cost of Goods Sold. Prepare the appropriate entry.

4. Assume that the company allocates any underapplied or overapplied overhead to Work in Process, Finished Goods, and Cost of Goods Sold on the basis of the amount of overhead applied during the year that remains in each account at the end of the year. These amounts are $43,200 for Work in Process, $280,800 for Finished Goods, and $756,000 for Cost of Goods Sold. Prepare the journal entry to show the allocation.

5. How much higher or lower will net operating income be for the year if the underapplied or overapplied overhead is allocated rather than closed directly to Cost of Goods Sold?

sharpton fabricators corporation manufactures a variety of parts 281454

Sharpton Fabricators Corporation manufactures a variety of parts for the automotive industry. The company uses a job order costing system with a plantwide predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor hours. On December 10, 2006, the company’s controller made a preliminary estimate of the predetermined overhead rate for 2007. The new rate was based on the estimated total manufacturing overhead cost of $2,475,000 and the estimated 52,000 total direct labor hours for 2007

Predetermined overhead rate = $2,475,000

52,000 hours

= $47.60 per direct labor hour

This new predetermined overhead rate was communicated to top managers in a meeting on December 11. The rate did not cause any comment because it was within a few pennies of the overhead rate that had been used during 2006. One of the subjects discussed at the meeting was a proposal by the production manager to purchase an automated milling machine center built by Central Robotics. The president of Sharpton Fabricators, Kevin Reynolds, agreed to meet with the regional sales representative from Central Robotics to discuss the proposal. On the day following the meeting, Mr. Reynolds met with Jay Warner, Central Robotics’ sales representative. The following discussion took place:

Reynolds: Larry Winter, our production manager, asked me to meet with you since he is interested in installing an automated milling machine center. Frankly, I am skeptical. You’re going to have to show me this isn’t just another expensive toy for Larry’s people to play with.

Warner: That shouldn’t be too difficult, Mr. Reynolds. The automated milling machine center has three major advantages. First, it is much faster than the manual methods you are using. It can process about twice as many parts per hour as your present milling machines. Second, it is much more flexible. There are some up front programming costs, but once those have been incurred, almost no setup is required on the machines for standard operations. You just punch in the code of the standard operation, load the machine’s hopper with raw material, and the machine does the rest.

Reynolds: Yeah, but what about cost? Having twice the capacity in the milling machine area won’t do us much good. That center is idle much of the time anyway.

Warner: I was getting there. The third advantage of the automated milling machine center is lower cost. Larry Winters and I looked over your present operations, and we estimated that the automated equipment would eliminate the need for about 6,000 direct labor hours a year. What is your direct labor cost per hour?

Reynolds: The wage rate in the milling area averages about $21 per hour. Fringe benefits raise that figure to about $30 per hour.

Warner: Don’t forget your overhead.

Reynolds: Next year the overhead rate will be about $48 per hour.

Warner: So including fringe benefits and overhead, the cost per direct labor hour is about $78.

Reynolds: That’s right.

Warner: Since you can save 6,000 direct labor hours per year, the cost savings would amount to about $468,000 a year.

Reynolds: That’s pretty impressive, but you aren’t giving away this equipment are you?

Warner: Several options are available, including leasing and outright purchase. Just for comparison purposes, our 60 month lease plan would require payments of only $300,000 per year.

Reynolds: Sold! When can you install the equipment?

Shortly after this meeting, Mr. Reynolds informed the company’s controller of the decision to lease the new equipment, which would be installed over the Christmas vacation period. The controller realized that this decision would require a recomputation of the predetermined overhead rate for the year 2007 since the decision would affect both the manufacturing overhead and the direct labor hours for the year. After talking with both the production manager and the sales representative from Central Robotics, the controller discovered that in addition to the annual lease cost of $300,000, the new machine would also require a skilled technician/programmer who would have to be hired at a cost of $45,000 per year to maintain and program the equipment. Both of these costs would be included in factory overhead. There would be no other changes in total manufacturing overhead cost, which is almost entirely fixed. The controller assumed that the new machine would result in a reduction of 6,000 direct labor hours for the year from the levels that had initially been planned.

When the revised predetermined overhead rate for the year 2007 was circulated among the company’s top managers, there was considerable dismay.

Required:

1. Recompute the predetermined rate assuming that the new machine will be installed. Explain why the new predetermined overhead rate is higher (or lower) than the rate that was originally estimated for the year 2007.

2. What effect (if any) would this new rate have on the cost of jobs that do not use the new automated milling machine?

3. Why would managers be concerned about the new overhead rate?

4. After seeing the new predetermined overhead rate, the production manager admitted that he probably wouldn’t be able to eliminate all of the 6,000 direct labor hours. He had been hoping to accomplish the reduction by not replacing workers who retire or quit, but that would not be possible. As a result, the real labor savings would be only about 2,000 hours—one worker. In the light of this additional information, evaluate the original decision to acquire the automated milling machine from Central Robotics.

shown below are the job cost related accounts for barnes king 281456

Shown below are the job cost related accounts for the law firm of Barnes, King, and

Morton and their manufacturing company equivalents:

?



Cost data for the month of March follow.

1. Purchased supplies on account $1,500.

2. Issued supplies $1,200 (60% direct and 40% indirect).

3. Time cards for the month indicated labor costs of $50,000 (80% direct and 20% indirect).

4. Operating overhead costs incurred for cash totaled $40,000.

5. Operating overhead is applied at a rate of 90% of direct attorney cost.

6. Work completed totaled $70,000.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions for March. Omit explanations.

(b) Determine the balance of the Work in Process account. Use a Taccount.

sovereign millwork ltd produces reproductions of antique resi 281468

Sovereign Millwork, Ltd., produces reproductions of antique residential moldings at a plant located in Manchester, England. Since there are hundreds of products, some of which are made only to order, the company uses a job order costing system. On July 1, the start of the company’s fiscal year, inventory account balances were as follows:

Raw Materials . . . . . . . . . ?L10,000

Work in Process . . . . . . . . ?L4,000

Finished Goods . . . . . . . . ?L8,000

The company applies overhead cost to jobs on the basis of machine hours. For the fi scal year starting July 1, it was estimated that the plant would operate 45,000 machine hours and incur ?L99,000 in manufacturing overhead cost. During the year, the following transactions were completed:

a. Raw materials purchased on account, ?L160,000.

b. Raw materials requisitioned for use in production, ?L140,000 (materials costing ?L120,000 were chargeable directly to jobs; the remaining materials were indirect).

c. Costs for employee services were incurred as follows:

Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ?L90,000

Indirect labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ?L60,000

Sales commissions . . . . . . . . . . ?L20,000

Administrative salaries. . . . . . . . ?L50,000

d. Prepaid insurance expired during the year, ?L18,000 (?L13,000 of this amount related to factory operations, and the remainder related to selling and administrative activities).

e. Utility costs incurred in the factory, ?L10,000.

f. Advertising costs incurred, ?L15,000.

g. Depreciation recorded on equipment, ?L25,000. (?L20,000 of this amount was on equipment used in factory operations; the remaining ?L5,000 was on equipment used in selling and administrative activities.)

h. Manufacturing overhead cost was applied to jobs, ?L?. (The company recorded 50,000 machine hours of operating time during the year.)

i. Goods that had cost ?L310,000 to manufacture according to their job cost sheets were completed.

j. Sales (all on account) to customers during the year totaled ?L498,000. These goods had cost

?L308,000 to manufacture according to their job cost sheets.

Required:

1. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions for the year.

2. Prepare T accounts for inventories, Manufacturing Overhead, and Cost of Goods Sold. Post relevant data from your journal entries to these T accounts (don’t forget to enter the opening balances in your inventory accounts). Compute an ending balance in each account.

3. Is Manufacturing Overhead underapplied or overapplied for the year? Prepare a journal entry to close any balance in the Manufacturing Overhead account to Cost of Goods Sold.

4. Prepare an income statement for the year. (Do not prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured; all of the information needed for the income statement is available in the journal entries and T accounts you have prepared.)

spade millhone detective agency performs investigative work for 281469

Spade Millhone Detective Agency performs investigative work for a variety of clients. Recently, Alban Insurance Company asked Spade Millhone to investigate a series of suspicious claims for whiplash. In each case, the claimant was driving on a freeway and was suddenly rear ended by an Alban insured client. The claimants were all driving old, uninsured automobiles. The Alban clients reported that the claimants suddenly changed lanes in front of them, and the accidents were unavoidable. Alban suspected that these ?~?~accidents’’ were the result of insurance fraud. Basically, the claimants cruised the freeways in virtually worthless cars, attempting to cut in front of expensive late model cars that would surely be insured. Alban believed that the injuries were faked.

Rex Spade spent 37 hours shadowing the claimants and taking pictures as necessary. His surveillance methods located the office of a doctor used by all claimants. He also took pictures of claimants performing tasks that they had sworn were now impossible to perform due to whiplash injuries. Victoria Millhone spent 48 hours using the Internet to research court records in surrounding states to locate the names of the claimants and their doctor. She found a pattern of similar insurance claims for each of the claimants.

Spade Millhone Detective Agency bills clients for detective time at $120 per hour. Mileage is charged at $0.50 per mile. The agency logged in 510 miles on the Alban job. The film and developing amounted to $120.

Required:

1. Prepare a job order cost sheet for the Alban job.

2. Why is overhead not specified in the charges? How does Spade Millhone charge clients for the use of overhead (e.g., the ongoing costs of their office—supplies, paper for notes and reports, telephone, utilities)?

3. The mileage is tallied from a source document. Design a source document for this use, and make up data for it that would total the 510 miles driven on the Alban job.

sven olaf just began working as a cost accountant for 281477

Sven Olaf just began working as a cost accountant for COLD industries Inc., which manufactures gift items. Sven is preparing to record summary journal entries for the month. Sven begins by recording the factory wages as follows:

Wages Expense ……………………………. 50,000

Wages payable …………………………….. 50,000

Then the factory depreciation:

Depreciation Expense Factory Machinery …………. 15,000

Accumulated Depreciation factory Machinery ………. 15,000

Sven’s supervisor, Boris Gingrich, walks by and notices the entries. The following conversation takes place:

Boris: That’s a very unusual way to record our factory wages and depreciation for the month.

Sven: What do you mean? This is exactly the way we were taught to recode wages and depreciation in school. You know, debit an expense and credit Cash or payables, or in the case of depreciation, credit Accumulated Depreciation.

Boris: Well, it’s not the credits I’m concerned about. It’s the debits I don’t think you’ve recorded the debits correctly. I wouldn’t mind if you were recording the administrative wages of office equipment depreciation this way, but I’ve got real questions about recording factory wages and factory machinery depreciation this way.

Sven: Now I’m really confused. You mean this is correct for administrative cost, but nor for factory costs? Well, what am I supposed to do and why?

1. Play the role of Boris and answer Sven’s questions.

2. Why would Boris accept the journal entries if they were for administrative costs?

the consulting firm of reznick and fedder accumulates costs asso 281489

The consulting firm of Reznick and Fedder accumulates costs associated with individual cases, using a job order cost system. The following transactions occurred during May:

May 7 Charged 440 hours of professional (lawyer) time to the Daley Co. breech of contract suit to prepare for the trial, at a rate of $175 per hour.

11 Reimbursed travel costs to employees for depositions related to the Daley case, $24,000.

22 Charged 225 hours of professional time for the Daley trial at a rate of $250 per hour.

25Received invoice from consultants Rucker and Putnam for $47,000 for expert testimony related to the Daley trial.

30 Applied office overhead at a rate of $45 per professional hour charged to the Daley case.

31 Paid secretarial and administrative salaries of $20,000 for the month.

31 Used office supplies for the month, $6,000.

31 Paid professional salaries of $55,000 for the month.

31 Billed Daley $260,000 for successful defense of the case.

a. Provide the journal entries for each of the above transactions.

b. How much office overhead is over or underapplied?

c. Determine the gross profit on the Daley case, assuming that over or underapplied office overhead is closed annually to cost of services.

strategi1 sunderland business school module titlec management accounting 281496

: Strategi1 SUNDERLAND BUSINESS SCHOOL Module Titlec Management Accounting Module Code: APC309 Individual assignment Hand in Date: 8 th April 2013 General Information Weighting – 100% of the marks for this module This is an individual assignment of 3,000 words (+/ 10%), excluding appendices and bibliography. The word count MUST be shown on the front of the assignment. There are TWO questions to be answered in this assignment. Each question carries a maximum mark of 50%. All of the learning outcomes for the module are being assessed in this assignment. The learning outcomes are shown in the section entitled “Marking Guide”, which is further on in this document. The University’s policy on cheating collusion and plagiarism will be applied to this piece of work. You are required to produce a report which answers the following TWO questions: Question 1 You have been asked to advise two entirely different businesses about the benefits and problems associated with what is termed the “traditional approach to budgeting and budgetary control”. One of the businesses operates in a very stable and static market place, where there is little change in either products or demand year on year, whereas the other business operates in a very dynamic, rapidly changing, innovative environment. If your findings suggest that the traditional approach is inappropriate for one or both of the businesses, please suggest and discuss some alternative approaches. The “traditional approach” typically involves the following processes: a) Development of assumptions and plans about the factors influencing next year’s budget in advance of the budget year starting; b) Approval of the budget before the commencement of the budget year; c) Once the budget year has started, there are monthly comparison reports which compares budget and actual performance on both a monthly and cumulative basis; d) Action being taken (where necessary) to correct large variances or differences. Question 2 XYZ Limited is a medium sized manufacturing business which makes and sells products to a range of industrial customers who use XYZ’s products in their own products. The working capital of XYZ is typical of a manufacturing organisation in that at any point in time they have cash, trade receivables, inventories of raw materials, 2 work in progress and finished goods and trade payables. The Managing Director of XYZ Limited believes that all parts of the working capital cycle could be improved and has asked you to produce a report which discusses how each part of the working capital cycle could be improved and which critically evaluates the implications of the improvements on XYZ and other connected parties (for example trade receivables and trade payables). 3 Guidance: Students are encouraged to be inquisitive and innovative in their approach as to what should be included in this report. The following may be of some use in providing guidance as to what could possibly be included, although this is in no way meant to be prescriptive. The aim of the assignment is to help you understand how key areas of strategic management accounting are applied in practice. This will include investigating topics from throughout the course linked to the above issues. Some of the principles, concepts ad models will be more relevant to your chosen approach than others and so it is likely that different students will formulate different approaches to the problems. This is normal it is not expected that all of the course content will be used in the analysis concentrate on that which you feel is most important. As part of your work you might find it helpful to briefly explore the underlying theory behind the key areas of investigation that you identify before applying them to report. With a total of 3,000 words you do not have a lot of room for long introductions so assume you are writing to a sophisticated audience who has a working knowledge of strategic management accounting and is well versed in business theory. Numerical example for illustrative purposes may be of use but should not be the main thrust of the work. If used they should be to provide evidence to support your findings from your other analysis of position and policies. If other sources are used remember to reference everything! Please avoid relying too heavily on descriptive sections reproducing information available from course material or the set text. It is your own logical, evaluation of the situation, the interpretation of course material and presentation, with critical analysis, of a coherent strategic plan that will attract high marks. 4 Marking Guide The learning outcomes for this module assessed by this piece of work are Knowledge 1. Critically evaluate a range of key strategic management accounting models and concepts. 2. Critically understand of specific analytical skills in key areas within management accounting at local and international level 3. Critically understand of the role and limitations of management accounting theory. Skills 4. Applied the key management accounting concepts and methodologies in order to contribute to successful decision making in an organisation. In light of this the assessment criteria in the grid below will be used when assessing your work. 5 ASSESSMENT CRITERIA Criteria Fail (

Attachments:

earnings per share diluted earnings and headline earnings per share 281501

Additional information 1. On 1 October 2012 the company issued 2 000 000 ordinary shares at full value. 2. On 1 November 2012 Zenith Ltd had a capitalisation issue of 1 ordinary share for every 4 shares held. 3. The profit for the year ended 31 December 2012 was R630 000(2011: R540 000). 4. Included in total comprehensive income for the year ended 31 Desember 2012 is:

Impairment on equipment Revaluation of a patent Depreciation on equipment

5. The SA normal tax rate is 28%.

R20 000 (before tax) R15 000 (before tax) R 5 000 (before tax)

6. On 31 December 2012 Zenith Ltd paid an ordinary dividend of R200 000 and cumulative preference dividend of R50 ooa No ordinary or preference dividends were declared or paid in 2011.

REQUIRED:

Calculate the basic. the diluted and the headline earnings per ordinary share for the year ended 31 December 2012.

Attachments:

the office mart store in south beach experienced the following 281515

The Office Mart store in South Beach experienced the following events during the current year:

1. Incurred $200,000 in marketing costs.

2. Purchased $600,000 of merchandise.

3. Paid $20,000 for transportation in costs.

4. Incurred $200,000 of administrative costs.

5. Took an inventory at year end and learned that goods costing $100,000 were on hand. This compared with a beginning inventory of $150,000 on January 1.

6. Determined that sales revenue during the year was $1,500,000.

7. Debited all costs incurred to the appropriate account and credited to Accounts Payable. All sales were for cash.

Required

Give the amounts for the following items in the Merchandise Inventory account:

a. Beginning balance (BB).

b. Transfers in (TI).

c. Ending balance (EB).

d. Transfers out (TO).

the questions in this exercise are based on toll brothers 281517

The questions in this exercise are based on Toll Brothers, Inc. one of the largest home builders in the United States. To answer the questions, you will need to download Toll Brothers’ 2004 annual report (www.tollbrothers.com/homesearch/servlet/HomeSearch?app=IRannual) and Form 10 K (www.tollbrothers.com/homesearch/servlet/HomeSearch?app=IR10K). You do not need to print these documents to answer the questions.

Required:

1. What is Toll Brothers’ strategy for success in the marketplace? Does the company rely primarily on a customer intimacy, operational excellence, or product leadership customer value proposition? What evidence supports your conclusion?

2. What business risks does Toll Brothers face that may threaten the company’s ability to satisfy stockholder expectations? What are some examples of control activities that the company could use to reduce these risks?

3. Would Toll Brothers be more likely to use process costing or job order costing? Why?

4. What are some examples of Toll Brothers’ direct material costs? Would you expect the bill of materials for each of Toll Brothers’ homes to be the same or different? Why?

5. Describe the types of direct labor costs incurred by Toll Brothers. Would Toll Brothers use employee time tickets at their home sites under construction? Why or why not?

6. What are some examples of overhead costs that are incurred by Toll Brothers?

7. Some companies establish prices for their products by marking up their full manufacturing cost (i.e., the sum of direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead costs). For example, a company may set prices at 150% of each product’s full manufacturing cost. Does Toll Brothers price its houses using this approach?

8. How does Toll Brothers assign manufacturing overhead costs to cost objects? From a financial reporting standpoint, why does the company need to assign manufacturing overhead costs to cost objects?

tonya martin cma and controller of the parts division of 281531

Tonya Martin, CMA and controller of the Parts Division of Gunderson Inc., was meeting with Doug Adams, manager of the division. The topic of discussion was the assignment of overhead costs to jobs and their impact on the division’s pricing decisions. Their conversation was as follows:

Tonya: Doug, as you know, about 25 percent of our business is based on government contracts, with the other 75 percent based on jobs from private sources won through bidding. During the last several years, our private business has declined. We have been losing more bids than usual. After some careful investigation, I have concluded that we are overpricing some jobs because of improper assignment of overhead costs. Some jobs are also being underpriced. Unfortunately, the jobs being overpriced are coming from our higher volume, labor intensive products; thus, we are losing business.

Doug: I think I understand. Jobs associated with our high volume products are being assigned more overhead than they should be receiving. Then, when we add our standard 40 percent markup, we end up with a higher price than our competitors, who assign costs more accurately.

Tonya: Exactly. We have two producing departments, one labor intensive and the other machine intensive. The labor intensive department generates much less overhead than the machine intensive department. Furthermore, virtually all of our high volume jobs are labor intensive. We have been using a plantwide rate based on direct labor hours to assign overhead to all jobs. As a result, the high volume, labor intensive jobs receive a greater share of the machine intensive department’s overhead than they deserve. This problem can be greatly alleviated by switching to departmental overhead rates. For example, an average high volume job would be assigned $100,000 of overhead using a plantwide rate and only $70,000 using departmental rates. The change would lower our bidding price on high volume jobs by an average of $42,000 per job. By increasing the accuracy of our product costing, we can make better pricing decisions and win back much of our private sector business.

Doug: Sounds good. When can you implement the change in overhead rates? Tonya: It won’t take long. I can have the new system working within four to six weeks—certainly by the start of the new fiscal year.

Doug: Hold it. I just thought of a possible complication. As I recall, most of our government contract work is done in the labor intensive department. This new overhead assignment scheme will push down the cost on the government jobs, and we will lose revenues. They pay us full cost plus our standard markup. This business is not threatened by our current costing procedures, but we can’t switch our rates for only the private business. Government auditors would question the lack of consistency in our costing procedures.

Tonya: You do have a point. I thought of this issue also. According to my estimates, we will gain more revenues from the private sector than we will lose from our government contracts. Besides, the costs of our government jobs are distorted; in effect, we are overcharging the government.

Doug: They don’t know that and never will unless we switch our overhead assignment procedures. I think I have the solution. Officially, let’s keep our plantwide overhead rate. All of the official records will reflect this overhead costing approach for both our private and government business. Unofficially, I want you to develop a separate set of books that can be used to generate the information we need to prepare competitive bids for our private sector business.

Required:

1. Do you believe that the solution proposed by Doug is ethical? Explain.

2. Suppose that Tonya decides that Doug’s solution is not right and objects strongly.

Further suppose that, despite Tonya’s objections, Doug insists strongly on implementing the action. What should Tonya do?

two types of contracts are commonly used when private firms 281536

Two types of contracts are commonly used when private firms contract to provide services to governmental agencies: cost plus and fixed price contracts. The cost plus contract allows the contracting firm to recover the costs associated with providing the product or service plus a reasonable profit. The fixed price contract provides for a fixed payment to the contractor. When a fixed price contract is used, the contractor’s profits are based on its ability to control costs relative to the price received.

In recent years, a number of contractors have either been accused, or found guilty, of improper accounting or fraud in accounting for contracts with the government. One deceptive accounting technique that is sometimes the subject of audit investigations involves cases in which a contractor is suspected of shifting costs from fixed priced contracts to cost plus contracts. In shifting costs from the fixed priced contract, the contractor not only influences costs assigned to that contract but also receives a reimbursement plus an additional amount on the costs shifted to the cost plus contract.

a. Why would a company that conducts work under both cost plus and fixed price contracts have an incentive to shift costs from the fixed price to the cost plus contracts?

b. From an ethical perspective, do you believe such cost shifting is ever justified? Explain.

job order costing transactions d k enterprises makes wicker 281253

JOB ORDER COSTING TRANSACTIONS D & K Enterprises makes wicker baskets.

During the month of August, the company had four job orders: 501, 502, 503, and 504. Overhead was applied at predetermined rates, while actual factory overhead was recorded as incurred. All four jobs were completed.

(a) Purchased raw materials on account, $44,000.

(b) Issued direct materials to production:

Job No. 501: $8,200

Job No. 502: 9,100

Job No. 503: 7,300

Job No. 504: 8,500

(c) Issued indirect materials to production, $5,000.

(d) Incurred direct labor costs:

Job No. 501: $4,800

Job No. 502: 4,100

Job No. 503: 4,800

Job No. 504: 5,000

(e) Charged indirect labor to production, $3,300.

(f) Paid electricity, heating oil, and repair bills for the factory and charged to production, $5,200.

(g) Applied factory overhead to each of the jobs using a predetermined factory overhead rate as follows:

Job No. 501: $3,100

Job No. 502: 3,300

Job No. 503: 3,300

Job No. 504: 3,800

(h) Finished Job Nos. 501–504 and transferred to the finished goods inventory account as products W, X, Y, and Z.

(i) Sold products W, X, Y, and Z for $17,500, $18,000, $16,900, and $19,000, respectively.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare general journal entries to record transactions (a) through (i).

2. Post the entries to the work in process and finished goods T accounts only.

job order costing with under and overapplied factory overhead m 281256

JOB ORDER COSTING WITH UNDER AND OVERAPPLIED FACTORY OVERHEAD M. Evans & Sons manufactures parts for radios. For each job order, it maintains ledger sheets on which it records direct labor, direct materials, and factory overhead applied. The factory overhead control account contains postings of actual overhead costs. At the end of the month, the under or overapplied factory overhead is charged to the cost of goods sold account.

Factory overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. For Job Nos. 101,

102, 103, and 104, direct labor hours are 12,000, 10,000, 11,000, and 18,000, respectively.

The overhead application rate is $1.20/direct labor hour.

(a) Purchased raw materials on account, $50,000.

(b) Issued direct materials:

Job No. 101: $10,000

Job No. 102: 8,000

Job No. 103: 9,000

Job No. 104: 15,000

(c) Issued indirect materials to production, $8,000.

(d) Incurred direct labor costs:

Job No. 101: $22,000

Job No. 102: 19,000

Job No. 103: 20,500

Job No. 104: 30,000

(e) Charged indirect labor to production, $15,000.

(f) Paid electricity bill, taxes, and repair fees for the factory and charged to production, $8,000.

(g) Depreciation expense on factory equipment, $30,000.

(h) Applied factory overhead to Job Nos. 101–104 using the predetermined factory overhead rate (see above).

(i) Finished Job Nos. 101–103 and transferred to the finished goods inventory account as products N, O, and P.

(j) Sold products N and O for $50,000 and $45,400, respectively.

(k) Transferred under or overapplied factory overhead balance to the cost of goods sold account.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare general journal entries to record transactions (a) through (k).

2. Post the entries to the work in process and finished goods T accounts only and determine the ending balances in these accounts.

3. Compute the balance in the job cost ledger and make certain this balance agrees with that in the work in process control account.

journal entries for factory overhead bandy company manufactures 281263

JOURNAL ENTRIES FOR FACTORY OVERHEAD Bandy Company manufactures toys. It keeps a factory overhead account where actual factory overhead costs are recorded as a debit and factory overhead applied is recorded as a credit. At the end of the month, under or overapplied factory overhead is calculated and transferred to the cost of goods sold account. For the month of January, Bandy had the following overhead transactions. Make appropriate general journal entries to record factory overhead and factory overhead applied, and to close the under or overapplied factory overhead to the cost of goods sold account.

Jan. 1 Paid rent, $2,000.

10 Paid electricity bill, $500.

15 Paid repair expense, $3,000.

21 Vacation pay for machine operator, $500 (Wages Payable).

31 Depreciation expense for the month, $500.

31 Factory overhead applied was $6,000.

what are some ways that customers affect a firm s costs 281280

What are some ways that customers affect a firm’s costs?

2. What is the objective of joint cost allocation?

3. When would you advise a firm to use direct intervention to set transfer prices?

Document Preview:

Name:___________________ Cost Accounting Exam III Week Seven I. Theory Questions. For each of the questions listed below, provide a response within the body of the test itself. Be thorough, yet concise. 1. What are some ways that customers affect a firm’s costs? 2. What is the objective of joint cost allocation? 3. When would you advise a firm to use direct intervention to set transfer prices? II. Problem Material. 1. The following represents the financial information of Trovatore Corporation, a manufacturer of electronic components, for two months: ??  ??Required?a. Classify these items into prevention, appraisal, internal failure, or external failure costs.?b. Calculate the ratio of the prevention, appraisal, internal failure, and external failure costs to sales for March and April.  2.  Computer Information Services is a computer software consulting company. Its three major functional areas are computer programming, information systems consulting, and software training. Carol Birch, a pricing analyst in the Accounting Department, has been asked to develop total costs for the functional areas. These costs will be used as a guide in pricing a new contract. Birch assembled the following data on overhead from its two service departments, the Information Systems Department and the Facilities Department.? ?      ?Required: Allocate the service department costs to the user departments using the step method.    ? 3. Meredith Motor Works has just acquired a new Battery Division. The Battery Division produces a standard 12volt battery that it sells to retail outlets at a competitive price of $20. The retail outlets purchase about 600,000 batteries a year. Since the Battery Division has a capacity of 1,000,000 batteries a year, top management is thinking that it might be wise for the company’s Automotive…

Attachments:

i total units produced ii purchases of materials iii gross machine hours base your c 281285

The managing director of SIGAR plc has recently attended a seminar on Total Quality Management and has

expressed interest in implementing a quality initiative aimed at reducing quality costs within the company. As management accountant, you have been asked to prepare a report detailing the potential gains from the

implementation of a quality programme.

The information gathered is shown below:

Pre Quality Programme Post Quality Programme
Material loss due to storage 5% 3%
Material loss during processing 4% 2.5%
Product and equipment inspection €25,000 €15,000
Product rejected at final inspection 12.5% 7.5%
Product returned by customers 5% 2.5%
Product liability claims 3%of sales revenue 1% of sales revenue
Machine idle time 20% of gross hours 12.5% of gross hours
Selling and distribution costs €60,000 €50,000
Machine time per unit produced 36 minutes 30 minutes

The company budgets to produce and sell 5,000 units in the third quarter of 2013. Each ceiling sells for € 100

and requires 8 square metres of plastic sheeting per ceiling which costs € 4 per square metre. Machine operating

costs are € 40 per hour.

The units which are rejected at the final production stage and the units which are returned by customers are both

sold as “seconds” at a discount of 40% on the standard selling price. The units returned by customers are replaced

free of charge and incur additional delivery costs of € 10 per ceiling unit.

It is anticipated that the quality programme would cost € 50,000 to implement.

Requirement

(a) The managing director has asked you to prepare calculations for the third quarter of 2013 showing the

following, both before and after implementation of the quality programme:

(i) Total units produced (pre inspection).

(ii) Purchases of materials.

(iii) Gross machine hours.

Base your calculations on the assumption that budgeted sales will be achieved.

(b) On the basis of the estimated cost savings for the third quarter of 2013,

should the company implement the quality program? Explain your answer

fully and include appropriate calculations

Attachments:

krall company uses a job order cost system the following 281287

Krall Company uses a job order cost system. The following data summarize the operations related to production for June 2012, the first month of operations:

a. Materials purchased on account, $105,000.

b. Materials requisitioned and factory labor used:

?

c. Factory overhead costs incurred on account, $4, 125.

d. Depreciation of machinery and equipment, $2,800.

e. The factory overhead rate is $38 per machine hour. Machine hours used:

Job Machine Hours

101 …………… 110

102 …………… 114

103 …………… 90

104 …………… 170

105 …………… 114

106 …………… 124

Total …………. 722

f. Jobs completed: 101, 102, 103, and 105.

g. Jobs were shipped and customers were billed as follows: Job 101, $39,200; Job 102, $50,400; Job 105, $35,400.

Instructions

1. Journalize the entries to record the summarized operations.

2. Post the appropriate entries to T accounts for Work in process and Finished Goods, using the identifying letters as dates. Insert memo account balances as of the end of the month.

3. Prepare a schedule of unfinished jobs to support the balance in the work in process account.

4. Prepare a schedule of completed jobs on hand to support the balance in the finished goods account.

the xyz company uses a standard cost accounting system and 281290

c0,000 units. At this volume, the company’s variable overhead costs are $.50 per direct labor hour.

The company’s single product has a standard cost of $30.00 per unit. Included in the $30.00 is $13.20 for direct materials (3 yards) and $12.00 of direct labor (2 hours). Production information for the month of March 2007 follows:

Required: (Be sure to indicate whether the variances are favorable or unfavorable.)

a. Prepare the standard cost sheet for the company.

b. Compute the direct material price variance, assuming the material price variance is the responsibility of the company’s purchasing agent.

c. Prepare the journal entry to record the purchase of direct materials.

d. Compute the direct labor efficiency variance.

e. Compute the budgeted fixed overhead costs for the month and for the year.

f. Compute the fixed overhead volume variance.

Document Preview:

Name:___________________ Cost Accounting Exam III Week Seven I. Theory Questions. For each of the questions listed below, provide a response within the body of the test itself. Be thorough, yet concise. 1. What are some ways that customers affect a firm’s costs? 2. What is the objective of joint cost allocation? 3. When would you advise a firm to use direct intervention to set transfer prices? II. Problem Material. 1. The following represents the financial information of Trovatore Corporation, a manufacturer of electronic components, for two months: ??  ??Required?a. Classify these items into prevention, appraisal, internal failure, or external failure costs.?b. Calculate the ratio of the prevention, appraisal, internal failure, and external failure costs to sales for March and April.  2.  Computer Information Services is a computer software consulting company. Its three major functional areas are computer programming, information systems consulting, and software training. Carol Birch, a pricing analyst in the Accounting Department, has been asked to develop total costs for the functional areas. These costs will be used as a guide in pricing a new contract. Birch assembled the following data on overhead from its two service departments, the Information Systems Department and the Facilities Department.? ?      ?Required: Allocate the service department costs to the user departments using the step method.    ? 3. Meredith Motor Works has just acquired a new Battery Division. The Battery Division produces a standard 12volt battery that it sells to retail outlets at a competitive price of $20. The retail outlets purchase about 600,000 batteries a year. Since the Battery Division has a capacity of 1,000,000 batteries a year, top management is thinking that it might be wise for the company’s Automotive…

Attachments:

lincoln construction company builds bridges in october and nove 281293

Lincoln Construction Company builds bridges. In October and November 2010, the firm worked exclusively on a bridge spanning the Calamus River in northern Nebraska. Lincoln Construction’s Precast Department builds structural elements of the bridges in temporary plants located near the construction sites. The Construction Department operates at the bridge site and assembles the precast structural elements. Estimated costs for the Calamus River bridge for the Precast Department were $1,550,000 for direct material, $220,000 for direct labor, and $275,000 for overhead. For the Construction Department, estimated costs for the Calamus River bridge were $350,000 for direct material, $130,000 for direct labor, and $214,500 for overhead. Overhead is applied on the last day of each month. Overhead application rates for the Precast and Construction departments are $25 per machine hour and 165 percent of direct labor cost, respectively.

TRANSACTIONS FOR OCTOBER

1 Purchased $1,150,000 of material (on account) for the Precast Department to begin building structural elements. All of the material was issued to production; of the issuances, $650,000 was considered direct.

5 Installed utilities at the bridge site at a total cost of $25,000. This amount will be paid at a later date.

8 Paid rent for the temporary construction site housing the Precast Department, $5,000.

15 Completed bridge support pillars by the Precast Department and transferred to the construction site.

20 Paid machine rental expense of $60,000 incurred by the Construction Department for clearing the bridge site and digging foundations for bridge supports.

24 Purchased additional material costing $1,485,000 on account.

31 Paid the following bills for the Precast Department: utilities, $7,000; direct labor, $45,000; insurance, $6,220; and supervision and other indirect labor costs, $7,900. Departmental depreciation was recorded, $15,200. The company also paid bills for the Construction Department: utilities, $2,300; direct labor, $16,300; indirect labor, $5,700; and insurance, $1,900. Departmental depreciation was recorded on equipment, $8,750.

31 Issued a check to pay for the material purchased on October 1 and October 24.

31 Applied overhead to production in each department; 6,000 machine hours were worked in the Precast Department in October.

TRANSACTIONS FOR NOVEMBER

1 Transferred additional structural elements from the Precast Department to the construction site. The Construction Department incurred a cash cost of $5,000 to rent a crane.

4 Issued $1,000,000 of material to the Precast Department. Of this amount, $825,000 was considered direct.

8 Paid rent of $5,000 in cash for the temporary site occupied by the Precast Department.

15 Issued $425,000 of material to the Construction Department. Of this amount, $200,000 was considered direct.

18 Transferred additional structural elements from the Precast Department to the construction site.

24 Transferred the final batch of structural elements from the Precast Department to the construction site.

29 Completed the bridge.

30 Paid final bills for the month in the Precast Department: utilities, $15,000; direct labor, $115,000; insurance, $9,350; and supervision and other indirect labor costs, $14,500. Depreciation was recorded, $15,200. The company also paid bills for the Construction Department: utilities, $4,900; direct labor, $134,300; indirect labor, $15,200; and insurance, $5,400. Depreciation was recorded on equipment, $18,350.

30 Applied overhead in each department. The Precast Department recorded 3,950 machine hours in November.

30 Billed the state of Nebraska for the completed bridge at the contract price of $3,450,000.

a. Journalize the entries for the preceding transactions. For purposes of this problem, it is not necessary to transfer direct material and direct labor from one department to the other.

b. Post all entries to T accounts.

c. Prepare a job order cost sheet, which includes estimated costs, for the construction of the bridge.

d. Discuss Lincoln Construction Company’s estimates relative to its actual costs.

long board company manufactures designer paddle boards in a wide 281297

Long Board Company Manufactures designer paddle boards in a wide variety of sizes and styles. The following incomplete ledger accounts refer to transactions that are summarized for May:

?

In addition, the following information is available:

a. Materials and direct labor were applied to six jobs in May:

?

b. Factory overhead is applied to each job at a rate of 150% of direct labor cost.

c. The May 1 work in process balance consisted of two jobs, as follows:

?



d. Customer jobs completed and units sold in May were as follows:

?

Instructions

1. Determine the missing amounts associated with each letter. Provide supporting calculations by completing a table with the following headings:

2. Determine the May 31 balances for each of the inventory accounts and factory overhead.

lrf printing provides printing services to many different corpor 281301

LRF Printing provides printing services to many different corporate clients. Although LRF bids most jobs, some jobs, particularly new ones, are negotiated on a ?ocost plus?? basis. Cost plus means that the buyer is willing to pay the actual cost plus a return (profit) on these costs to LRF. Alice Reiley, controller for LRF, has recently returned from a meeting where LRF’s president stated that he wanted her to find a way to charge more costs to any project that was on a costplus basis. The president noted that the company needed more profits to meet its stated goals this period. By charging more costs to the cost plus projects and therefore fewer costs to the jobs that were bid, the company should be able to increase its profit for the current year. Alice knew why the president wanted to take this action. Rumors were that he was looking for a new position and if the company reported strong profits, the president’s opportunities would be enhanced. Alice also recognized that she could probably increase the cost of certain jobs by changing the basis used to allocate manufacturing overhead.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What are the ethical issues in this situation?

(c) What would you do if you were Alice Reiley?

machine tech inc a specialized tool manufacturer uses a job o 281307

Machine Tech Inc., a specialized tool manufacturer, uses a job order costing system. The overhead is allocated to jobs on the basis of direct labor hours. The overhead rate is now $1,500 per direct labor hour. The design engineer thinks that this is illogical. The design engineer has stated the following:

Our accounting system doesn’t make any sense to me. It tells me that every labor hour carries an additional burden of $1,500. This means that direct labor makes up only 5% of our total product cost, yet it drives all our costs. In addition, these rates give my design engineers incentives to ?odesign out?? direct labor by using machine technology. Yet, over the past years as we have had less and less direct labor, the overhead rate keeps going up and up. I won’t be surprised if next year the rate is $2,000 per direct labor hour. I’m also concerned because small errors in our estimates of the direct labor content can have a large impact on our estimated costs. Just a 30 minute error in our estimate of assembly time is worth $750. Small mistakes in our direct labor time estimates really swing our bids around. I think this puts us at a disadvantage when we are going after business.

1. What is the engineer’s concern about the overhead rate going ?oup and up???

2. What did the engineer mean about the large overhead rate being a disadvantage when placing bids and seeking new business?

3. What do you think is a possible solution?

marcus lindsey has just started a new business building and inst 281318

Marcus Lindsey has just started a new business—building and installing custom garage organization systems. Marcus builds the cabinets and work benches in his workshop and then installs them in clients’ garages. Marcus figures his overhead for the coming year will be $9,000. Since his business is labor intensive, he plans to use direct labor hours as his overhead driver. For the coming year, he expects to complete 75 jobs, averaging 20 direct labor hours each. However, he has the capacity to complete 125 jobs averaging 20 direct labor hours each.

Required:

1. Four measures of activity level were mentioned in the text. Which two measures is Marcus considering in computing a predetermined overhead rate?

2. Compute the predetermined overhead rates using each of the measures in your answer to Requirement 1.

3. Which measure should Marcus use? Why?

michael ortiz is a contractor specializing in custom built jacuz 281338

Michael Ortiz is a contractor specializing in custom built jacuzzis. On May 1, 2010, his ledger contains the following data.

Raw Materials Inventory………………. $30,000

Work in Process Inventory……………….12,200

Manufacturing Overhead ………………….2,500 (dr.)

The Manufacturing Overhead account has debit totals of $12,500 and credit totals of $10,000.

Subsidiary data for Work in Process Inventory on May 1 include:

?

During May, the following costs were incurred: (a) raw materials purchased on account

$4,000, (b) labor paid $7,600, (c) manufacturing overhead paid $1,400.

A summary of materials requisition slips and time tickets for the month of May reveals the following.

?



Overhead was charged to jobs on the basis of $0.70 per dollar of direct labor cost.

The jacuzzis for customers Taylor, Baker, and Joiner were completed during May. Each

jacuzzi was sold for $12,000 cash.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries for the May transactions: (i) for purchase of raw materials, factory labor costs incurred, and manufacturing overhead costs incurred; (ii) assignment of raw materials, labor, and overhead to production; and (iii) completion of jobs and sale of goods.

(b) Post the entries to Work in Process Inventory.

(c) Reconcile the balance in Work in Process Inventory with the costs of unfinished jobs.

(d) Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule forMay.

miller construction inc is a privately held family founded c 281339

Miller Construction, Inc., is a privately held, family founded corporation that builds single and multiple unit housing. Most projects Miller Construction undertakes involve the construction of multiple units. Miller Construction has adopted a job order costing system for determining the cost of each unit. The costing system is fully computerized.

Each project’s costs are divided into the following five categories:

1. General conditions, including construction site utilities, project insurance permits and licenses, architect’s fees, decorating, field office salaries, and cleanup costs.

2. Hard costs, such as subcontractors, direct materials, and direct labor.

3. Finance costs, including title and recording fees, inspection fees, and taxes and discounts on mortgages.

4. Land costs, which refer to the purchase price of the construction site.

5. Marketing costs, such as advertising, sales commissions, and appraisal fees. Recently, Miller Construction purchased land for the purpose of developing 20 new single family houses. The cost of the land was $250,000. Lot sizes vary from 1/4 to ?1 acre. The 20 lots occupy a total of eight acres. General conditions costs for the project totaled $120,000. This $120,000 is common to all 20 units that were constructed on the building site. Job 5, the fifth house built in the project, occupied a 1/4 acre lot and had the following hard costs:

Direct materials ……………$ 8,000

Direct labor ……………….. 6,000

Subcontractor …………….. 14,000

For Job 5, finance costs totaled $4,765 and marketing costs, $800. General conditions costs are allocated on the basis of units produced. Each unit’s selling price is determined by adding 40 percent to the total of all costs.

Required:

1. Identify all production costs that are directly traceable to Job 5. Are all remaining production costs equivalent to overhead found in a manufacturing firm? Are there nonproduction costs that are directly traceable to the housing unit? Which ones?

2. Develop a job order cost sheet for Job 5. What is the cost of building this house? Did you include finance and marketing costs in computing the unit cost? Why or why not? How did you determine the cost of land for Job 5?

3. Which of the five cost categories corresponds to overhead? Do you agree with the way in which this cost is allocated to individual housing units? Can you suggest a different allocation method?

4. Calculate the selling price of Job 5. Calculate the profit made on the sale of this unit.

milner manufacturing uses a job order cost accounting system on 281340

Milner Manufacturing uses a job order cost accounting system. On May 1, the company has a balance in Work in Process Inventory of $3,200 and two jobs in process: Job No. 429 $2,000, and Job No. 430 $1,200. During May, a summary of source documents reveals the following.

?

Milner Manufacturing applies manufacturing overhead to jobs at an overhead rate of 80% of direct labor cost. Job No. 429 is completed during the month.

Instructions

(a) Prepare summary journal entries on May 31 to record: (i) the requisition slips, (ii) the time tickets, (iii) the assignment of manufacturing overhead to jobs, and (iv) the completion of Job No. 429.

(b) Post the entries to Work in Process Inventory, and prove the agreement of the control account with the job cost sheets of the unfinishedjobs.

nevin s sporting goods store sells a variety of sporting goods 281351

Nevin’s Sporting Goods Store sells a variety of sporting goods and clothing. In a back room, Nevin’s has set up heat transfer equipment to personalize T shirts for Little League teams. Typically, each team has the name of the individual player put on the back of the T shirt. Last week, Taffy Barnhart, coach of the Stingers, brought in a list of names for her team. Her team consisted of 12 players with the following names: Freda, Cara, Katie, Tara, Heather, Sarah, Kim, Jennifer, Mary Beth, Elizabeth, Kyle, and Wendy. Taffy was quoted a price of $0.50 per letter.

Chip Russell, Nevin’s newest employee, was assigned to Taffy’s job. He selected the appropriate letters, arranged the letters in each name carefully on a shirt, and heat pressed them on. When Taffy returned, she was appalled to see that the names were on the front of the shirts. Jim Nevin, owner of the sporting goods store, assured Taffy that the letters could easily be removed by applying more heat and lifting them off. This process ruins the old letters, so new letters must then be placed correctly on the shirt backs. He promised to correct the job immediately and have it ready in an hour and a half.

Costs for heat transferring are as follows:

Letters (each) …………………………..$0.15

Direct labor (per hour) ………………… 8.00

Overhead (per direct labor hour) ……… 4.00

Taffy’s job originally took one hour of direct labor time. The removal process goes more quickly and should take only 15 minutes.

Required:

1. What was the original cost of Taffy’s job?

2. What is the cost of rework on Taffy’s job? How should the rework cost be treated?

3. How much did Jim Nevin charge Taffy?

on june 30 new haven company s work in process inventory 281366

On June 30, New Haven Company’s work in Process inventory account showed a beginning balance of $29,400. The Materials Inventory account showed a beginning balance of $240,000. Production activity for July was as follows: Direct materials costing $238,820 were requested for production; total manufacturing payroll was $140,690, of which $52,490 was used to pay for indirect labor; indirect materials costing $28,400 were purchased and used; and overhead was applied at a rate of 150 percent of direct labor costs.

1. Record New Haven’s materials, labor, and overhead costs for July in T accounts.

2. Compute the ending balance in the Work in process Inventory account. Assume a transfer of $461,400 to the Finished Goods Inventory account during the period.

partial operating data for charing cross company are presented b 281377

Partial operating data for Charing Cross Company are presented below. Charing Cross Company’s management has set the predetermined overhead rate for the current year at 80 percent of direct labor costs.

Account/Transaction………………………………………………..December

Beginning Materials Inventory ……………………………………. $ 42,000

Beginning Work in Process Inventory…………………………….. 66,000

Beginning Finished Goods Inventory …………………………….. 29,000

Direct materials used ……………………………………………… 168,000

Direct materials purchased………………………………………… a

Direct materials purchased………………………………………… 382,000

Overhead applied …………………………………………………. b

Cost of units completed ………………………………………….. c

Cost of Goods Sold ……………………………………………… 808,000

Ending Materials Inventory………………………………………. 38,000

Ending Finished Goods Inventory……………………………….. d

Using T accounts and the data provided, compute the unknown values. Show all your computations.

plastico produces plastic pipe to customer specifications losse 281382

PlastiCo produces plastic pipe to customer specifications. Losses of less than 5 percent are considered normal because they are inherent in the production process. The company applies overhead to products using machine hours. PlastiCo used the following information in setting its predetermined OH rate for 2010:

Expected overhead other than rework ……………………$850,000

Expected rework costs …………………………………… 75,000

Total expected overhead …………………………………$925,000

Expected machine hours for 2010 ………………….…….. 100,000

During 2010, the following production and cost data were accumulated:

Total good production completed ……………………… 2,000,000 feet of pipe

Total defects ……………………………………………… 40,000 feet of pipe

Ending inventory ………………………………………… 75,000 feet of pipe

Total cost of direct material for Job #B316 ……………$687,100

Total cost of direct labor for Job #B316 …………………$157,750

Total machine hours for Job #B316 ……………………….. 3,080

Cost of reworking defects during 2010 …………………. $75,500

Total actual overhead cost for 2010 ……………………$862,000

a. Determine the overhead application rate for 2010.

b. Determine the cost for Job #B316 in 2010.

c. Assume that the rework is normal and those units can be sold for the regular selling price. How will PlastiCo account for the $75,500 of rework cost?

d. Assume that PlastiCo does not include rework costs in developing the overhead application rate because rework is related to specific jobs. Determine the cost of Job #B316.

e. Using the information from (d), assume that 20 percent of the rework cost was specifically related to 200 feet of pipe produced for Job #B316. The reworked pipe can be sold for $3.50 per foot. What is the total cost of Job #B316?

prudoe compounds produces a variety of chemicals that are used 281398

Prudoe Compounds produces a variety of chemicals that are used by auto manufacturers in their painting processes. With each batch of chemicals produced, some spoilage naturally occurs. Prudoe Compounds includes normal spoilage cost in its predetermined OH rate. For 2010, Prudoe Compounds estimated the following:

Overhead costs, other than spoilage ………………$600,000

Estimated spoilage cost ……………………………. 50,000

Estimated sales value of spoiled materials ………… 20,000

Estimated direct labor hours ………………………. 40,000

a. Prudoe Compounds applies overhead based on direct labor hours. Calculate the predetermined OH rate for 2010.

b. For a batch of chemicals mixed in May 2010, the firm experienced normal spoilage on Job #788. The cost of the spoiled material amounted to $1,730 and the company estimated the salvage value of those materials to be $496. Journalize the entry for the spoilage.

anderson international limited is evaluating a project in erewhon the project will c 442900

Anderson International Limited is evaluating a project in Erewhon. The project will create the following cash flows:

Year Cash Flow

0 –$ 1,330,000

1 505,000

2 570,000

3 465,000

4 420,000

All cash flows will occur in Erewhon and are expressed in dollars. In an attempt to improve its economy, the Erewhonian government has declared that all cash flows created by a foreign company are “blocked” and must be reinvested with the government for one year. The reinvestment rate for these funds is 5 percent.

If Anderson uses a required return of 15 percent on this project, what are the NPV and IRR of the project? (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Do not round intermediate calculations and round your final answers to 2 decimal places.

below is a payroll sheet for otis import company for the month of september 2014 442911

Below is a payroll sheet for Otis Import Company for the month of September 2014. The company is allowed a 1% unemployment compensation rate by the state; the federal unemployment tax rate is 0.8% and the maximum for both is $7,000. Assume a 10% federal income tax rate for all employees and a 7.65% FICA tax on employee and employer on a maximum of $113,700. In addition, 1,45% is charged both employer and employee for an employee’s wages in excess of $113,700 per employee.

Name

Earnings to Aug. 31

September Earnings

Income Tax Withholding

FiCA

Unemployment Tax

B.D. Williams

$6,800

$800

D. Raye

6,500

700

K. Baker

7,600

1,100

F. Lopez

13,600

1,900

A. Daniels

107,000

13,000

B. Kingston

112,000

16,000

Instructions

(a) Complete the payroll sheet and make the necessary entry to record the payment of the payroll.

(b) Make the entry to record the payroll tax expenses of Otis Import Company.

(c) Make the entry to record the payment of the payroll liabilities created. Assume that the company pays all payroll liabilities at the end of each month.

taxable income 443933

Dawn, a single, cash method taxpayer, paid the following in the current year:
Item Amount
Federal income tax (employer withheld) $ 5,400
State income tax (employer withheld) 2,000
FICA (employer withheld) 3,800
Sales tax on a new car 600
License for new car 70
Dawn’s new car has a FMV of $20,000 and it weighs 3,000 pounds. The county also assessed a property tax on the car. The tax was 2% of its FMV and $10 per hundred weight. The car is used 100% of the time for personal purposes. Dawn sold her house in the current tax year on April 15th. The county’s property tax on the home for the tax year was $1,850, payable on February 1st of the following year. The county’s property tax year is the calendar year. Dawn’s AGI for the current tax year is $50,000 and her other itemized deductions exclusive of taxes are $4,000.

Hospital bills 9,400

Legal fees in suit against ski resort 3,000

Angela is single and has no dependents. During the current year, her salary is $58,00…

financial statement analysis 443969

Read the requirement in ‘Assignment FSA’ file, then open annual report 2013 of the 2 companies chosen. Fill all the tables in excel file, using these to analyze 4 key features: profitablility, liquidity, gearing &shareholder’s interests. The structureof the paper is also given in a word file. Please remember the words limitation is 3500.

Document Preview:

Financial Statement Analysis Assignment – 2013/14 “The objective of financial statements is to provide information about the financial position, performance and changes in financial position of an entity that is useful to a wide range of users in making economic decisions” (IASB Framework) Do current published financial statements achieve this objective? The analysis should be well explained and cover: Profitability Liquidity Gearing Shareholder Interests 2 chosen FTSE companies: Tate & Lyle Plc. Dairy Crest Plc. Further Information: You are required to present well structured answers in the form of a report to a potential new investor who is looking to invest in one of the companies that you have analysed. The report should use approximately 3500 words (excluding calculations) and should make appropriate and justified conclusions that include an answer to the question above. Learning outcomes assessed: Understand the functioning of the financial reporting system Understand the components of financial statements and the relationships between them Evaluate the relevance of the information contained in a firm’s financial statements Use financial ratios to evaluate a company’s performance Assignments will be graded according to the following criteria: Evidence of critical judgement in selecting, ordering and analysing content in order to present a sound argument The demonstration and understanding of relevant concepts and models The demonstration of insight and originality in responding to the assignment The extent and level of research undertaken and the degree to which this research is appropriately referenced Some useful websites: ? HYPERLINK “http://www.londonstockexchange.com/home/homepage” ?http://www.londonstockexchange.com/home/homepage? ? HYPERLINK “http://www.ft.com/home/uk” ?http://www.ft.com/home/uk?

analyzing stockholders equity 443974

A portion of the stockholders’ equity section from the balance sheet of Walland Corporation appears as follows:

Stockholders’ equity:

Preferred stock, 9% cumulative, $50 par, 40,000 shares

Authorized, issued, and outstanding……………………………………… $2,000,000

Preferred stock, 12% noncumulative, $100 par, 8,000

Shares authorized, used, and outstanding……………………..…………… $800,000

Common Stock, $5 par, 400,000 shares authorized, issued

And outstand………………………………………………………………… $2,000,000

Total paid in capital……………………………………………………… $4,800,000

Assume that all the stock was issues on January 1 and that no dividends were paid during the first two years of operations. During the third year, Walland Corporation paid total cash dividends of $736,000.

A. compute the amount of cash dividends paid during the third year to each of the three classes of stock.

B. compute the dividends paid per sharing during the third year for each of the three classes of stock.

C. what was the average issue price of each type of preferred stock?

journalizing purchase and sale transactions 443990

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions
Journalize the following transactions that occurred in September 2015 for Aquamarines. No explanations
are needed. Identify each accounts payable and accounts receivable with the vendor or customer name. Sep. 10 Cash $4,455
Sep. 3 Purchased merchandise inventory on account from Shallin Wholesalers, $5,000.
Terms 1/15, n/EOM, FOB shipping point.
4 Paid freight bill of $80 on September 3 purchase.
4 Purchased merchandise inventory for cash of $1,700.
6 Returned $500 of inventory from September 3 purchase.
8 Sold merchandise inventory to Hermosa Company, $6,000, on account. Terms
2/15, n/35. Cost of goods, $2,640.
9 Purchased merchandise inventory on account from Thomas Wholesalers, $8,000.
Terms 2/10, n/30, FOB destination.
10 Made payment to Shallin Wholesalers for goods purchased on September 3, less return and
discount.
12 Received payment from Hermosa Company, less discount.
13 After negotiations, received a $200 allowance from Thomas Wholesalers.
15 Sold merchandise inventory to Jordan Company, $2,500, on account. Terms 1/10, n/EOM.
Cost of goods, $1,050.
22 Made payment, less allowance, to Thomas Wholesalers for goods purchased on September 9.
23 Jordan Company returned $400 of the merchandise sold on September 15. Cost of goods, $160.
25 Sold merchandise inventory to Smithsons for $1,100 on account that cost $400. Terms of 2/10,
n/30 were offered, FOB shipping point. As a courtesy to Smithsons, $75 of freight was added to
the invoice for which cash was paid by Aquamarines.
26 After negotiations, granted a $100 allowance to Smithsons for merchandise purchased on
September 25.
29 Received payment from Smithsons, less allowance and discount.
30 Received payment from Jordan Company, less return.

Document Preview:

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions Journalize the following transactions that occurred in September 2015 for Aquamarines. No explanations are needed. Identify each accounts payable and accounts receivable with the vendor or customer name. Sep. 10 Cash $4,455 Sep. 3 Purchased merchandise inventory on account from Shallin Wholesalers, $5,000. Terms 1/15, n/EOM, FOB shipping point. 4 Paid freight bill of $80 on September 3 purchase. 4 Purchased merchandise inventory for cash of $1,700. 6 Returned $500 of inventory from September 3 purchase. 8 Sold merchandise inventory to Hermosa Company, $6,000, on account. Terms 2/15, n/35. Cost of goods, $2,640. 9 Purchased merchandise inventory on account from Thomas Wholesalers, $8,000. Terms 2/10, n/30, FOB destination. 10 Made payment to Shallin Wholesalers for goods purchased on September 3, less return and discount. 12 Received payment from Hermosa Company, less discount. 13 After negotiations, received a $200 allowance from Thomas Wholesalers. 15 Sold merchandise inventory to Jordan Company, $2,500, on account. Terms 1/10, n/EOM. Cost of goods, $1,050. 22 Made payment, less allowance, to Thomas Wholesalers for goods purchased on September 9. 23 Jordan Company returned $400 of the merchandise sold on September 15. Cost of goods, $160. 25 Sold merchandise inventory to Smithsons for $1,100 on account that cost $400. Terms of 2/10, n/30 were offered, FOB shipping point. As a courtesy to Smithsons, $75 of freight was added to the invoice for which cash was paid by Aquamarines. 26 After negotiations, granted a $100 allowance to Smithsons for merchandise purchased on September 25. 29 Received payment from Smithsons, less allowance and discount. 30 Received payment from Jordan Company, less return.

Attachments:

pensions 443997

The assignment is to prepare a spreadsheet (please see attachment).

Below is professor’s requirement.

Turn in twoprintouts–one with numbers and one with formulas (you may need to adjust the column size of some columns tomake sure all formulas are printed out completely),

The spreadsheet you turn in should look like the one on the back of this sheet and should have the same numbers. The spreadsheet should be general enough so I could input new numbers in Cells F3 to F13 and automatically have theentire spreadsheet updated appropriately. Therefore, the numbers that appear in the gray shaded areas of theexample should be the result of formulas referring to other cells in the spreadsheet, NOT the result of simply typingnumbers into your spreadsheet cells.However, your spreadsheet does not have to have these areas shaded.Theportion of the example shaded with polka dots is for your reference information only and does not even need toappear on your spreadsheet.

1.The Service Cost for 1 Year of Service Period (Cell F17) will be a formula calculating the present value ofa deferred annuity. There are multiple ways this could be done, but I have accomplished the present valuecalculations with a PV formula embedded in another PV formula.I have given you the formula I used. Please make sure you understand what the formula is accomplishing.Don’t just take it for granted.

e22 7 change in estimate and error financial statements presented below are the comp 444229

E22 7 (Change in Estimate and Error; Financial Statements) Presented below are the comparative income statements for Pannebecker Inc. for the years 2011 and 2012.

2012 2011

Sales $340,000 $270,000

Cost of sales $200,000 $142,000

Gross profit $140,000 $128,000

Expenses $88,000 $50,000

Net income $52,000 $78,000

Retained earnings (Jan. 1) $125,000 $72,000

Net income $52,000 $78,000

Dividends ($30,000) ($25,000)

Retained earnings (Dec. 31) $147,000 $125,000

The following additional information is provided.

In 2012, Pannebecker Inc. decided to switch its depreciation method from sum of the years’ digits to the straight line method. The assets were purchased at the beginning of 2011 for $90,000 with an estimated useful life of 4 years and no salvage value. (The 2012 income statement contains depreciation expense of $27,000 on the assets purchased at the beginning of 2011.) In 2012, the company discovered that the ending inventory for 2011 was overstated by $20,000; ending inventory for 2012 is correctly stated.

Instructions

Prepare the revised retained earnings statement for 2011 and 2012, assuming comparative statements. (Ignore income taxes.)

derivatives exercise 1 7b product versus general selling and administrative costs 444333

Exercise 1 7B Product versus general, selling, and administrative costs

In reviewing Quartey Company’s September accounting records, Ken Helm, the chief accountant, noted the following depreciation costs.

  1. Factory buildings—$25,000.
  2. Computers used in manufacturing—$4,000.
  3. A building used to display finished products—$8,000.
  4. Trucks used to deliver merchandise to customers—$14,000.
  5. Forklifts used in the factory—$22,000.
  6. Furniture used in the president’s office—$9,000.
  7. Elevators in administrative buildings—$6,000.
  8. Factory machinery—$9,000.

Required

  1. What amount of depreciation cost would be classified as general, selling, and administrative expense?
  2. Assume that Quartey manufactured 3,000 units of product and sold 2,000 units of product during the month of September. Determine the amount of depreciation cost that would be included in cost of goods sold.

derivatives exercise 1 16b the fraud triangle 444339

Exercise 1 16B The fraud triangle

The accounting records of Masterson Manufacturing Company (MMC) revealed that the company incurred $3 million of materials, $5 million of production labor, $4 million of manufacturing overhead, and $6 million of general, selling, and administrative expense during 2008. It was discovered that MMC’s chief financial officer (CFO) included $2.6 million dollars of upstream research and development expense in the manufacturing overhead account when it should have been classified as general, selling, and administrative expense. MMC made 5,000 units of product and sold 4,000 units of product in 2008.

Required

  1. Indicate whether the elements on the 2008 financial statements (i.e., assets, liabilities, equity, revenue, expense, net income, and cash flow) would be overstated or understated as a result of the misclassification of the upstream research and development expense. Determine the amount of the overstatement or understatement for each element.
  2. Speculate as to what would cause the CFO to intentionally misclassify the research and development expense. (Hint: Review the chapter material regarding the fraud triangle.)

derivatives exercise 1 17b applications of the sarbanes oxley act 444340

Exercise 1 17B Applications of the Sarbanes Oxley Act

Greg Madrid, a HealthSouth billing clerk filed a suit under the False Claims Act charging that HealthSouth purchased computer equipment from a company owned by Richard Scrushy’s parents at prices two and three times the normal price. At the time, Richard Scrushy was the CEO of HealthSouth. The overcharges inflated HealthSouth’s expense ratios that the government used when calculating a Medicare reimbursement rate. As a result, the government was overcharged for services provided by HealthSouth. While refusing to recognize any wrongdoing, HealthSouth agreed to pay an $8 million settlement related to the lawsuit brought by the whistleblower.

Required

Explain how the provisions of Sarbanes Oxley would provide protection to a whistleblower such as Greg Madrid.

taxation depreciation on pollution control equipment in the plant 444473

Cost Item

Fixed (F)
Variable (V)

Period (P)
Product (M)

a.

Chief financial officer’s salary

F

P

b.

Depreciation on pollution control equipment in the plant

F

M

c.

Office supplies for the human resources manager

F

P

d.

Power to operate factory equipment

V

M

e.

Commissions paid to sales personnel

V

P

taxation in assessing the validity of a prior court decision discuss the significanc 444494

 LO.1, 4 In assessing the validity of a prior court decision, discuss the significance of the following on the taxpayer’s issue:

a. The decision was rendered by the U.S. District Court of Wyoming. Taxpayer lives in

Wyoming.

b. The decision was rendered by the U.S. Court of Federal Claims. Taxpayer lives in

Wyoming.

c. The decision was rendered by the Second Circuit Court of Appeals. Taxpayer lives in

California.

d. The decision was rendered by the U.S. Supreme Court.

e. The decision was rendered by the U.S. Tax Court. The IRS has acquiesced in the result.

f. Same as (e), except that the IRS has nonacquiesced in the result.

Issue ID

2 38 PART 1 Introduction and Basic Tax Model

landers company manufactures a number of products the standards relating to one of t 444560

Landers Company manufactures a number of products. The standards relating to one of these products are shown below, along with actual cost data for May.

Standard Cost per Unit Actual Cost per Unit

Direct materials:

Standard: 1.80 feet at $3.00 per foot $ 5.40

Actual: 1.75 feet at $3.20 per foot $ 5.60

Direct labor:

Standard: 0.90 hours at $18.00 per hour 16.20

Actual: 0.95 hours at $17.40 per hour 16.53

Variable overhead:

Standard: 0.90 hours at $5.00 per hour 4.50

Actual: 0.95 hours at $4.60 per hour 4.37

Total cost per unit $ 26.10 $ 26.50

Excess of actual cost over standard cost per unit $ 0.40

The production superintendent was pleased when he saw this report and commented: “This $0.40 excess cost is well within the 2 percent limit management has set for acceptable variances. It’s obvious that there’s not much to worry about with this product.”

Actual production for the month was 12,000 units. Variable overhead cost is assigned to products on the basis of direct labor hours. There were no beginning or ending inventories of materials.

Required:

1. Compute the Materials price and quantity variances.

presented below are the comparative income statements for pannebecker inc for the ye 444563

Presented below are the comparative income statements for Pannebecker Inc. for the years 2011 and 2012. 2012 2011 Sales $340,000 $270,000 Cost of sales 200,000 142,000 Gross profi t 140,000 128,000 Expenses 88,000 50,000 Net income $ 52,000 $ 78,000 Retained earnings (Jan. 1) $125,000 $ 72,000 Net income 52,000 78,000 Dividends (30,000) (25,000) Retained earnings (Dec. 31) $147,000 $125,000 The following additional information is provided.

1. In 2012, Pannebecker Inc. decided to switch its depreciation method from sum of the years’ digits to the straight line method. The assets were purchased at the beginning of 2011 for $90,000 with an estimated useful life of 4 years and no salvage value. (The 2012 income statement contains depreciation expense of $27,000 on the assets purchased at the beginning of 2011.)

2. In 2012, the company discovered that the ending inventory for 2011 was overstated by $20,000; ending inventory for 2012 is correctly stated.
Instructions Prepare the revised retained earnings statement for 2011 and 2012, assuming comparative statements. (Ignore income taxes.)

p6 following are financial statements for the genatron manufacturing corporation for 444588

P6. Following are financial statements for the Genatron Manufacturing Corporation for 2012 and 2011.

BALANCE SHEET

2012

2011

ASSETS

Cash

$40,000

$50,000

Accts. Receivable

$260,000

$200,000

Inventory

$500,000

$450,000

Total Current assets

$800,000

$700,000

Fixed Assets, Net

$400,000

$300,000

Total Assets

$1,200,000

$1,000,000

LIABILITIES AND EQUITY

Accts. Payable

$170,000

$130,000

Bank Loan

$90,000

$90,000

Accruals

$70,000

$50,000

Total Current Liabilities

$330,000

$270,000

Long term debt, 12%

$400,000

$300,000

Common Stock, $10 par

$300,000

$300,000

Capital Surplus

$50,000

$50,000

Retained earnings

$120,000

$80,000

Total Liabilities &equity

$1,200,000

$1,000,000

INCOME STATEMENT

2012

2011

Net Sales

$1,500,000

$1,300,000

Cost of Goods Sold

$900,000

$780,000

INCOME STATEMENT

2012

2011

Gross profit

$600,000

$520,000

Expenses: General and Administrative

$150,000

$150,000

Marketing

$150,000

$150,000

Depreciation

$53,000

$40,000

Interest

$57,000

$45,000

Earnings before taxes

$190,000

$155,000

Income Taxes

$76,000

$62,000

Net Income

$114,000

$93,000

a. Apply Du Pont analysis to both the 2012 and 2011 financial statements’ data.

b. Explain how financial performance differed between 2012 and 2011.

1 why has this deal attracted venture capital 2 can the founders optimize their 444691

1. Why has this deal attracted venture capital? 2. Can the founders optimize their personal financial returns and simultaneously ensure that SolidWorks has sufficient capital to optimize its chance of succeeding? What factors should the founders consider? 3. How can the venture capitalists optimize their return? What factors should they consider? 4. After you have answered questions 2 and 3, structure a deal that will serve the best interests of the founders, the company, and the venture capital firms.

Attachments:

us federal taxation personal perspectives and position what is your experience 444700

Personal perspectives and position: What is your experience and knowledge level regarding individual taxes? How did your personal tax experience and knowledge help you in completing this tax return?

  1. Other salient perspectives and positions: What resources did you use in preparing this tax return? Provide references to page numbers in your textbook and specific addresses within the IRS website.
  1. Key assumptions: How did you decide what filing status to use? How did you decide who the dependents were? How did you decide which income was includible or excluded? How did you decide which expenses were deductible? Please explain.
  1. Quality of evidence: Show your work in an Excel attachment for the following two line items: Schedule C Line 4 and Form 1040 Line 44. (When calculating the tax amount, make sure you consider the preferential tax rates for long term capital gains and qualified dividends. If your tax amount calculated in your Excel worksheet is slightly different from the tax amount calculated by the software, just make a note of it on the spreadsheet.)
  1. Conclusions, implications, and consequences: From your answers to the line items in this tax return, is this individual in a position to receive a refund from the IRS or to pay additional tax to the IRS?
  1. Identify criteria for assessing alternatives: Based on the amount owed or to be refunded, what are the key tax issues that should be considered during the next year? List at least two key tax issues and explain each.
  1. Applies criteria to alternatives: Based on these key tax issues, what are the taxpayer’s options for the next year? Identify options for each tax issue listed.
  1. Evaluates results: As a tax preparer, what would you recommend this client to do next year based on the options identified?

Attachments:

jeff boyer of rainking company designs and installs custom law 281244

Jeff Boyer, of Rainking Company, designs and installs custom lawn and garden irrigation systems for homes and businesses throughout the state. Each job is different, requiring different materials and labor for installing the systems. Rainking estimated the following for the year:

Number of installations …………………… 250

Number of direct labor hours …………….. 5,000

Direct materials cost ………………………$60,000

Direct labor cost …………………………..$75,000

Overhead cost ……………………………..$65,000

During the year, the following actual amounts were experienced:

Number of installations ………………… 245

Number of direct labor hours …………… 5,040

Direct materials used ……………………$59,350

Direct labor incurred ……………………$75,600

Overhead incurred ………………………$64,150

Required:

1. Should Rainking use process costing or job order costing? Explain.

2. If Rainking uses a normal costing system and overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours, what is the cost of an installation that takes $3,500 of direct materials and 50 direct labor hours?

3. Explain why Rainking would have difficulty using an actual costing system.

jester company uses a job order cost system the following 281246

Jester Company uses a job order cost system. The following data summarize the operations related to production for September:

a. Materials purchased on account, $550,000.

b. Materials requisitioned, $485,000, of which $54,200 was for general factory use.

c. Factory labor used, $540,000, of which $130,000 was indirect.

d. Other costs incurred on account were for factory overhead, $175,000; selling expenses, $122,500; and administrative expenses, $79,000.

e. Prepaid expenses expired for factory overhead were $17,500; for selling expenses, $20,300; and for administrative expenses, $11,900.

f. Depreciation of factory equipment was $35,400; of office equipment, $44,200; and of store equipment, $10,650.

g. Factory overhead costs applied to jobs, $385,000.

h. Jobs completed, $1,350,000.

i. Cost of goods sold, $1,325,000.

Instruction

Journalize the entries to record the summarized operations.

assume that the following events occurred at a division of 280893

Assume that the following events occurred at a division of Generic Electric for March of the current year.

1. Purchased $45 million in direct materials.

2. Incurred direct labor costs of $24 million.

3. Determined that manufacturing overhead was $40.5 million.

4. Transferred 80 percent of the materials purchased to work in process.

5. Completed work on 72 percent of the work in process. Costs are assigned equally across all work in process.

6. The inventory accounts have no beginning balances. All costs incurred were debited to the appropriate account and credited to Accounts Payable.

Required

Give the amounts for the following items in the Work in Process account:

a. Transfers in (TI).

b. Transfers out (TO).

c. Ending balance (EB).

assume that you are preparing for a second interview with 280894

Assume that you are preparing for a second interview with a manufacturing company. The company is impressed with your credentials but has indicated that it has several qualified applicants. You anticipate that in this second interview, you must show what you offer over other candidates. You learn the company currently uses a periodic inventory system and is not satisfied with the timeliness of its information and its inventory management. The company manufactures custom order holiday decorations and display items. To show your abilities, you plan to recommend that it use a cost accounting system.

Required

In preparation for the interview, prepare notes outlining the following:

1. Your cost accounting system recommendation and why it is suitable for this company.

2. A general description of the documents that the proposed cost accounting system requires.

3. How the documents in part 2 facilitate the operation of the cost accounting system.

at the beginning of the year paxton company budgeted overhead 280929

At the beginning of the year, Paxton Company budgeted overhead of $180,000 as well as 15,000 direct labor hours. During the year, Job K456 was completed with the following information: direct materials cost, $2,340; direct labor cost, $3,600. The average wage for Paxton Company employees is $10 per hour.

By the end of the year, 15,400 direct labor hours had actually been worked, and Paxton Company incurred the following actual overhead costs for the year:

Equipment lease ……………………………$ 5,000

Depreciation on building ……………………20,000

Indirect labor ………………………………100,000

Utilities ……………………………………..15,000

Other overhead ……………………………..45,000

Required:

1. Calculate the overhead rate for the year.

2. Calculate the total cost of Job K456.

3. Prepare the journal entries to record actual overhead and to apply overhead to production for the year.

4. Is overhead overapplied or underapplied? By how much?

5. Assuming that the normal cost of goods sold for the year is $700,000, what is the adjusted cost of goods sold?

attorney maria conroe uses a job order costing system to 280938

Attorney Maria Conroe uses a job order costing system to collect costs of client engagements. Conroe is currently working on a case for Stacie Olivgra. During the first three months of 2010, Conroe logged 95 hours on the Olivgra case.

In addition to direct hours spent by Conroe, her office assistant has worked 35 hours typing and copying 1,450 pages of documents related to the Olivgra case. Conroe’s assistant works 160 hours per month and is paid a salary of $4,800 per month. The average cost per copy is $0.06 for paper, toner, and machine rental. Telephone and fax charges for long distance calls on the case totaled $145. Last, Conroe has estimated that total office overhead for rent, utilities, parking, and so on amount to $9,600 per month and that, during a normal month, the office is open every hour that the assistant is at work. Overhead charges are allocated to clients based on the number of hours of assistant’s time.

a. Conroe desires to set the billing rate so that she earns, at a minimum, $190 per hour, and covers all direct and allocated indirect costs related to a case. What minimum charge per hour (rounded to the nearest $10) should Conroe charge Olivgra? (Hint: Be sure to include office overhead.) What would be the total billing to Olivgra?

b. All the hours that Conroe spends at the office are not necessarily billable hours. In addition Conroe did not consider certain other expenses such as license fees, country club dues, automobile costs, and other miscellaneous expenses when she determined the amount of overhead per month. Therefore, Conroe is considering billing clients for direct costs plus allocated indirect costs plus a 40 percent margin to cover nonbillable time as well as other costs. What will Conroe charge Olivgra in total for the time spent on her case?

c. Which billing method is more likely to be accepted by clients and why?

birmingham contractors uses a job order costing system in may 280954

Birmingham Contractors uses a job order costing system. In May 2010, the company made a $3,300,000 bid to build a pedestrian overpass over the beach highway at Gulf Shores, Alabama. Birmingham Contractors won the bid and assigned #515 to the project. Its completion date was set at December 15, 2010. The following costs were estimated for completion of the overpass: $1,240,000 for direct material, $670,000 for direct labor, and $402,000 for overhead.

During July, work began on job #515; direct material cost assigned to Job #515 was $121,800, and direct labor cost associated with it was $175,040. The firm uses a predetermined OH rate of 60 percent of direct labor cost. Birmingham Contractors also worked on several other jobs during July and incurred the following costs:

Direct material (including Job #515) issued …………….$579,300

Direct labor (including Job #515) accrued ……………… 584,000

Indirect labor accrued …………………………………… 55,800

Administrative salaries and wages accrued ……………… 39,600

Depreciation on construction equipment ………………… 26,400

Depreciation on office equipment ………………….……. 7,800

Client entertainment (on accounts payable) …………….. 11,100

Advertising for firm (paid in cash) ………………………. 6,600

Indirect material (from supplies inventory) …………….. 18,600

Miscellaneous expenses (design related; to be paid

in the following month) …………………………. 10,200

Accrued utilities (for office, $1,800;

for construction, $5,400)………………………… 7,200

During July, Birmingham Contractors completed several jobs that had been in process before the beginning of the month. These completed jobs sold for $1,224,000 and payment will be made to the company in August. The related job cost sheets showed costs associated with those jobs of $829,000. At the beginning of July, Birmingham Contractors had Work in Process Inventory of $871,800.

a. Prepare a job order cost sheet for Job #515, including all job details, and post the appropriate cost information for July.

b. Prepare journal entries for the preceding information.

c. Prepare a Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule for July for Birmingham Contractors.

d. Assuming that the company pays income tax at a 40 percent rate, prepare an income statement for Birmingham Contractors.

bonivo inc manufactures computers from commodity components to 280961

Bonivo Inc. manufactures computers from commodity components to client specifications. The company has historically tracked only the cost of components to computers, and computer selling prices, or bids, have been based solely on the cost of components plus a markup sufficient to cover the other operating costs. In recent years, the company has encountered increasing price pressure from customers and, as a result, computers have often been sold at less than the full markup price—causing continually decreasing profits for the firm.

As you have provided other financial services to Bonivo Inc. in the past, company management has asked you for guidance regarding approaches that could be taken to better manage the firm’s profits and prices. You decide that a job order costing system could be helpful to Bonivo.

a. Explain how a job order costing system could help Bonivo better control costs and profits.

b. Explain why Bonivo should not base computer prices only on component costs plus a markup.

canyon city co uses a job order costing system that 280972

Canyon City Co. uses a job order costing system that combines actual direct material and actual direct labor costs with a predetermined overhead charge based on machine hours. Expected overhead and machine hours of $1,421,000 and 145,000, respectively, were used in developing the predetermined rate for 2010.

During 2010, the company worked on Job #876 and incurred the following costs and machine hours:

Direct material ……………$47,500

Direct labor ……………… 21,800

Machine hours ……………. 325

a. What is the total cost of Job #876? What is the cost per unit if 1,500 units were made? (Round to the nearest cent.)

b. In completing Job #876, 30 units were defective and had to be reworked at a cost of $25 each. Assume that spoilage and rework costs were included in the original estimated overhead costs. Where does the $750 rework cost appear in the accounts of Canyon City Co.?

c. Disregard the facts in (b). Upon completing Job #876, the quality control inspector determined that 30 units were spoiled and would be unacceptable to the customer. Thirty additional good units were made at a total cost of $1,390. The spoiled units were sold for $240 as ?oseconds?? to an outlet store. What is the total cost of Job #876?

companies use time sheets for two primary reasons to know 280981

Companies use time sheets for two primary reasons: to know how many hours an employee works and, in a job order production situation, to trace work hours to products. An article (?oAltering of Worker Time Cards Spurs Growing Number of Suits?? by Steven Greenhouse) in the New York Times on April 4, 2004, described a recent corporate practice of deleting worker hours to increase organizational profitability. Use your library database to obtain this article and discuss the following:

a. What companies were mentioned as having been found to engage in this practice?

b. Why is it easier now than in the past to engage in this practice?

c. As a member of upper management, how would you respond to finding out that this practice was being used in some of your stores? Provide an answer that addresses both the short run and the long run.

custom metal works produces castings and other metal parts to 280994

Custom Metal Works produces castings and other metal parts to customer specifications. The company uses a job order costing system and applies overhead costs to jobs on the basis of machine hours. At the beginning of the year, the company estimated that it would work 576,000 machine hours and incur $4,320,000 in manufacturing overhead cost. The company had no work in process at the beginning of the year. The company spent the entire month of January working on one large order—Job 382, which was an order for 8,000 machined parts. Cost data for January follow:

a. Raw materials purchased on account, $315,000.

b. Raw materials requisitioned for production, $270,000 (80% direct and 20% indirect).

c. Labor cost incurred in the factory, $190,000, of which $80,000 was direct labor and $110,000 was indirect labor.

d. Depreciation recorded on factory equipment, $63,000.

e. Other manufacturing overhead costs incurred, $85,000 (credit Accounts Payable).

f. Manufacturing overhead cost was applied to production on the basis of 40,000 machine hours actually worked during January.

g. The completed job was moved into the finished goods warehouse on January 31 to await delivery to the customer. (In computing the dollar amount for this entry, remember that the cost of a completed job consists of direct materials, direct labor, and applied overhead.)

Required:

1. Prepare journal entries to record items (a) through (f) above. Ignore item (g) for the moment.

2. Prepare T accounts for Manufacturing Overhead and Work in Process. Post the relevant items from your journal entries to these T accounts.

3. Prepare a journal entry for item (g) above.

4. Compute the unit product cost that will appear on the job cost sheet for Job 382.

during september the following transactions were completed and 281045

During September, the following transactions were completed and reported by Golder Products, Inc.:

a. Purchased materials on account for $50,100.

b. Issued materials to production to fill job order requisitions: direct materials, $30,000; indirect materials, $15,000.

c. Accumulated payroll for the month: direct labor, $70,000; indirect labor, $32,000; administrative, $18,000; sales, $9,900.

d. Accrued depreciation on factory plant and equipment of $13,400.

e. Accrued property taxes during the month for $1,450 (on factory).

f. Recorded expired insurance with a credit to the prepaid insurance account of $6,200.

g. Incurred factory utilities costs of $6,000.

h. Paid advertising costs of $7,200.

i. Accrued depreciation: office equipment, $1,500; sales vehicles, $650.

j. Paid legal fees for preparation of lease agreements of $750.

k. Charged overhead to production at a rate of $9 per direct labor hour. Recorded 8,000 direct labor hours during the month.

l. Incurred cost of jobs completed during the month of $158,000.

The company also reported the following beginning balances in its inventory accounts:

Materials Inventory ………………………$ 5,000

Work in Process Inventory ……………… 30,000

Finished Goods Inventory ………………. 60,000

Required:

1. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions occurring in September.

2. Prepare T accounts for Materials Inventory, Overhead Control, Work in Process Inventory, and Finished Goods Inventory. Post all relevant entries to these accounts.

3. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured.

4. If the overhead variance is all allocated to Cost of Goods Sold, by how much will Cost of Goods Sold decrease or increase?

elliott manufacturing uses a job order cost system in each 281064

Elliott Manufacturing uses a job order cost system in each of its three manufacturing departments. Manufacturing overhead is applied to jobs on the basis of direct labor cost in Department A, direct labor hours in Department B, and machine hours in Department C. In establishing the predetermined overhead rates for 2010 the following estimates were made for the year.

?

During January, the job cost sheets showed the following costs and production data.

?

Instructions

(a) Compute the predetermined overhead rate for each department.

(b) Compute the total manufacturing costs assigned to jobs in January in each department.

(c) Compute the under or overapplied overhead for each department at January31.

enos inc is a construction company specializing in custom patio 281065

Enos Inc. is a construction company specializing in custom patios. The patios are constructed of concrete, brick, fiberglass, and lumber, depending upon customer preference. On June 1, 2010, the general ledger for Enos Inc. contains the following data.

Raw Materials Inventory $4,051 Manufacturing Overhead Applied $32,129
Work in Process Inventory $5,662 Manufacturing Overhead Incurred $31,140

Subsidiary data for Work in Process Inventory on June 1 are as follows.

Job Cost Sheets
Customer Job
Cost Element Fowler Haines Krantz
Direct materials $ 554 $ 884 $ 981
Direct labor 320 580 510
Manufacturing overhead 416 754 663
$1,290 $2,218 $2,154

During June, raw materials purchased on account were $4,047, and all wages were paid. Additional overhead costs consisted of depreciation on equipment $674 and miscellaneous costs of $322 incurred on account.
A summary of materials requisition slips and time tickets for June shows the following.

Customer Job Materials
Requisition Slips Time Tickets
Fowler $ 841 $ 390
Elgin 1,900 820
Haines 533 380
Krantz 1,294 1,700
Fowler 304 420
4,872 3,710
General use 1,207 1,600
$6,079 $5,310
Overhead was charged to jobs at the same rate of $1.3 per dollar of direct labor cost. The patios for customers Fowler, Haines, and Krantz were completed during June and sold for a total of $19,351. Each customer paid in full.

Journalize the June transactions: (i) for purchase of raw materials, factory labor costs incurred, and manufacturing overhead costs incurred; (ii) assignment of direct materials, labor, and overhead to production; and (iii) completion of jobs and sale of goods. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)

Account/Description Debit Credit

(Purchase of raw materials.)

(To record factory labor costs.)

(To record manufacturing overhead costs.)
(To assign raw materials to production.)

(To assign factory labor to production.)

(To assign manufacturing overhead to production.)

(To record completion of jobs.)

(To record sale of jobs.)

(To record cost of jobs.)

Post the entries to Work in Process Inventory.
Work in Process Inventory
6/1 Balance
June Completed Work

Direct materials

Direct labor

Overhead applied

6/30 Balance

Reconcile the balance in Work in Process Inventory with the costs of unfinished jobs.
Work in process inventory $

Job:
$

Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule for June. (List amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)
ENOS INC.
Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule
For the Month Ended June 30, 2010

$

$
Total manufacturing costs

Total cost of work in process

Less:

Cost of goods manufactured $

fancher company is a cosmetics manufacturer its assembly depart 281094

Fancher Company is a cosmetics manufacturer. Its assembly department receives raw cosmetics from the molding department. The assembly department places the raw cosmetics into decorative containers and transfers them to the packaging department. The assembly department’s Work in Process Inventory account had a $62,000 balance as of August

1. During August, the department incurred raw materials, labor, and overhead costs amounting to $72,000, $85,000, and $80,000, respectively. The department transferred products that cost $342,000 to the packaging department. The balance in the assembly department’s Work in Process Inventory account as of August 31 was $83,000.

Required

Determine the cost of raw cosmetics transferred from the molding department to the assembly department during August.

foley company uses a job order costing system the following dat 281098

Foley Company uses a job order costing system. The following data relate to the month of October, the first month of the company’s fiscal year:

a. Raw materials purchased on account, $210,000.

b. Raw materials issued to production, $190,000 (80% direct and 20% indirect).

c. Direct labor cost incurred, $49,000; and indirect labor cost incurred, $21,000.

d. Depreciation recorded on factory equipment, $105,000.

e. Other manufacturing overhead costs incurred during October, $130,000 (credit Accounts Payable).

f. The company applies manufacturing overhead cost to production on the basis of $4 per machine hour. There were 75,000 machine hours recorded for October.

g. Production orders costing $510,000 according to their job cost sheets were completed during October and transferred to Finished Goods.

h. Production orders that had cost $450,000 to complete according to their job cost sheets were shipped to customers during the month. These goods were sold on account at 50% above cost.

Required:

1. Prepare journal entries to record the information given above.

2. Prepare T accounts for Manufacturing Overhead and Work in Process. Post the relevant information above to each account. Compute the ending balance in each account, assuming that Work in Process has a beginning balance of $35,000.

for the year ended december 281122

For the year ended December 31, 2010, the job cost sheets of Moxie Company contained the following data.

?

Other data:

1. Raw materials inventory totaled $20,000 on January 1. During the year, $100,000 of raw materials were purchased on account.

2. Finished goods on January 1 consisted of Job No. 7648 for $93,000 and Job No. 7649 for $62,000.

3. Job No. 7650 and Job No. 7651 were completed during the year.

4. Job Nos. 7648, 7649, and 7650 were sold on account for $490,000.

5. Manufacturing overhead incurred on account totaled $135,000.

6. Other manufacturing overhead consisted of indirect materials $12,000, indirect labor $18,000 and depreciation on factory machinery $19,500.

Instructions

(a) Prove the agreement of Work in Process Inventory with job cost sheets pertaining to unfinished work. Calculate each of the following, then post each to the T account: (1) beginning balance, (2) direct materials, (3) direct labor, (4) manufacturing overhead, and (5) completed jobs.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entry for manufacturing overhead, assuming the balance is allocated entirely to cost of goods sold.

(c) Determine the gross profit to be reported for2010.

for the year ended december 31 2010 the job cost 281123

For the year ended December 31, 2010, the job cost sheets of DeVoe Company contained the following data.

?

Other data:

1. Raw materials inventory totaled $15,000 on January 1. During the year, $140,000 of raw materials were purchased on account.

2. Finished goods on January 1 consisted of Job No. 7638 for $87,000 and Job No. 7639 for $92,000.

3. Job No. 7640 and Job No. 7641 were completed during the year.

4. Job Nos. 7638, 7639, and 7641 were sold on account for $530,000.

5. Manufacturing overhead incurred on account totaled $120,000.

6. Other manufacturing overhead consisted of indirect materials $14,000, indirect labor $20,000, and depreciation on factory machinery $8,000.

Instructions

(a) Prove the agreement of Work in Process Inventory with job cost sheets pertaining to unfinished work. Use a single T account for Work in Process Inventory. Calculate each of the following, then post each to the T account: (1) beginning balance, (2) direct materials, (3) direct labor, (4) manufacturing overhead, and (5) completed jobs.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entry for manufacturing overhead, assuming the balance is allocated entirely to Cost of Goods Sold.

(c) Determine the gross profit to be reported for2010.

founded in 1970 parlex corporation is a world leader in 281130

Founded in 1970, Parlex Corporation is a world leader in the design and manufacture of flexible interconnect products. Utilizing proprietary and patented technologies, Parlex produces custom flexible interconnects including flexible circuits, polymer thick film, laminated cables, and value added assemblies for sophisticated electronics used in automotive, telecommunications, computer, diversified electronics, and aerospace applications. In addition to manufacturing sites in Methuen, Massachusetts; Salem, New Hampshire; Cranston, Rhode Island; San Jose, California; Shanghai, China; Isle of Wight, UK; and Empalme, Mexico, Parlex has logistic support centers and strategic alliances throughout North America, Asia, and Europe.

The following information was provided in the company’s annual report.

PARLEX COMPANY

Notes to the Financial Statements

The Company’s products are manufactured on a job order basis to customers’ specifications. Customers submit requests for quotations on each job, and the Company prepares bids based on its own cost estimates. The Company attempts to reflect the impact of changing costs when establishing prices. However, during the past several years, the market conditions for flexible circuits and the resulting price sensitivity haven’t always allowed this to transpire. Although still not satisfactory, the Company was able to reduce the cost of products sold as a percentage of sales to 85% this year versus 87% that was experienced in the two immediately preceding years. Management continues to focus on improving operational efficiency and further reducing costs.

Instructions

(a) Parlex management discusses the job order cost system employed by their company. What are several advantages of using the job order approach to costing?

(b) Contrast the products produced in a job order environment, like Parlex, to those produced when process cost systems are used.

granger products recorded the following transactions for the jus 281143

Granger Products recorded the following transactions for the just completed month. The company had no beginning inventories.

a. $75,000 in raw materials were purchased for cash.

b. $73,000 in raw materials were requisitioned for use in production. Of this amount, $67,000 was for direct materials and the remainder was for indirect materials.

c. Total labor wages of $152,000 were incurred and paid. Of this amount, $134,000 was for direct labor and the remainder was for indirect labor.

d. Additional manufacturing overhead costs of $126,000 were incurred and paid.

e. Manufacturing overhead costs of $178,000 were applied to jobs using the company’s predetermined overhead rate.

f. All of the jobs in progress at the end of the month were completed and shipped to customers.

g. The underapplied or overapplied overhead for the period was closed out to Cost of Goods Sold.

Required:

1. Post the above transactions to T accounts.

2. Determine the cost of goods sold for the period.

huegel hollow resort has ordered 20 rotomolded kayaks from curre 281177

Huegel Hollow Resort has ordered 20 rotomolded kayaks from Current Designs. Each kayak will be formed in the rotomolded oven, cooled, and then the excess plastic trimmed away. Then, the hatches, seat, ropes, and bungees will be attached to the kayak. Dave Thill, the kayak plant manager, knows that manufacturing each kayak requires 54 pounds of polyethylene powder and a finishing kit (rope, seat, hardware, etc.). The polyethylene powder used in these kayaks costs $1.50 per pound, and the finishing kits cost $170 each. Each kayak will use two kinds of labor: 2 hours of more skilled type I labor from people who run the oven and trim the plastic, and 3 hours of less skilled type II labor from people who attach the hatches and seat and other hardware. The type I employees are paid $15 per hour, and the type II employees are paid $12 per hour. For purposes of this problem, assume that overhead is allocated to all jobs at a rate of 150% of direct labor costs.

Instructions

Determine the total cost of the Huegel Hollow order and the cost of each individual kayak in the order. Identify costs as direct materials, direct labor, or manufacturing overhead.

insides an interior decorating firm uses a job order costing 281228

Insides, an interior decorating firm, uses a job order costing system and applies overhead to jobs using a predetermined rate of $17 per direct labor hour. On June 1, 2010, Job #918 was the only job in process. Its costs included direct material of $8,250 and direct labor of $500 (25 hours at $20 per hour). During June, the company began work on Jobs #919, #920, and #921. Direct material used for June totaled $21,650. June’s direct labor cost totaled $6,300. Job #920 had not been completed at the end of June, and its direct material and direct labor charges were $2,850 and $800, respectively. All other jobs were completed in June.

a. What was the total cost of Job #920 as of the end of June 2010?

b. What was the cost of goods manufactured for June 2010?

c. If actual overhead for June was $5,054, was the overhead underapplied or overapplied for the month? By how much?

see attachment 438615

Accounting – Partnership Assignment Business made up: Just Juice Bar so it’s a JUICE BUSINESS numbers have to be realistic. Partners are called: William, Christina, Ryan (3 Partners) PART 1 – Commencement of business PART 1 Commencement of business (Just Juice Bar) 1. What date did business commence? (Any date up to you) 2. Work out how much it will cost to commence business. 3. The capital to start business must come from the partners. Work out how much each partner is contributing (REALISTIC NUMBERS, REMEMBER IT’S A JUICE BAR BUSINESS).

Document Preview:

Accounting – Partnership Assignment Business made up: Just Juice Bar so it’s a JUICE BUSINESS numbers have to be realistic. Partners are called: William, Christina, Ryan (3 Partners) PART 1 – Commencement of business PART 1 Commencement of business (Just Juice Bar) 1. What date did business commence? (Any date up to you) 2. Work out how much it will cost to commence business. 3. The capital to start business must come from the partners. Work out how much each partner is contributing (REALISTIC NUMBERS, REMEMBER IT’S A JUICE BAR BUSINESS). Write the details of each partner’s contribution in narrative form. At least one of the partners must have contributed more than just cash. If other assets are introduced, they must be realistic. Explain where they came from if necessary. 2. Prepare general journal entries to account for the capital contributed by the partners. Include narrations. (Example of general journal entry attached) 3. Prepare a statement of financial position on the day of formation. (Example of statement of financial position attached) PART C continued Prepare a journal entry to share the profit among the partners. (Transfer to Current accounts). Include a narration. Prepare journal entries to close the Drawings accounts to the partners’ Current accounts. Include a single narration. Prepare a statement of comprehensive income, showing allocation of profit. Prepare a statement of changes in equity. Prepare a partnership statement of financial position. (Statement format). PART D You can choose whether to admit a new partner or have a partner retire. Include a narrative as described below. Admission of a new partner Include in the narrative: Who is the new partner? What was he/she doing before? Why was he/she invited to join the partnership? How much is the new partner contributing and what will be his or her share of partnership equity? What is the new profit sharing agreement? What was the equity of the partnership before admission of…

Attachments:

bulldog appliances uses the periodic inventory system details regarding the inventor 439394

Bulldog Appliances uses the periodic inventory system. Details regarding the inventory of appliances at September 1, 2011, purchases invoices during the next 12 months, and the inventory count at August 31, 2012, are summarized as follows:

1. Determine the cost of the inventory on August 31, 2012, by the first in, first out method.If the inventory of a particular model comprises one entire purchase plus a portion of another purchase acquired at a different unit cost, use a separate line for each purchase. Under FIFO, if a model is in inventory at more than one unit cost, enter the unit cost of the 3rd purchase first in the Unit Cost column.Bulldog AppliancesCost of the InventoryAugust 31, 2012Model Quantity Unit Cost Total CostAZ09 $ $ AZ09 GA85 GA85 HI71 KS32 MS17 ND52 ND52 WV63 WV63 Total $ 2. Determine the cost of the inventory on August 31, 2012, by the last in, first out method.If the inventory of a particular model comprises one entire purchase plus a portion of another purchase acquired at a different unit cost, use a separate line for each purchase.Bulldog AppliancesCost of the InventoryAugust 31, 2012Model Quantity Unit Cost Total CostAZ09 $ $ AZ09 GA85 HI71 HI71 KS32 KS32 MS17 MS17 ND52 ND52 ND52 WV63 WV63 Total $ 3. Determine the cost of the inventory on August 31, 2012, by the average cost method.Bulldog AppliancesCost of the InventoryAugust 31, 2012Model Quantity Unit Cost Total CostAZ09 $ $ GA85 HI71 KS32 MS17 ND52 WV63 Total $ 4. Discuss which method (FIFO or LIFO) would be preferred for income tax purposes in periods of (a) rising prices and (b) declining prices.

to prepare for this application assignment review the financial data for eleanor s c 439773

To preparefor this Application Assignment, review the financial data for Eleanor’s Computers, a retailer of computer products, provided in Chapter 5 of your course text (p. 238). Then complete the financial ratio calculations for 2013.

To completethis Application Assignment,
write a 1 to 2 page paperadvising management of any ratios that indicate potential problems and provide an explanation of possible causes of the problems.

Attachments:

kimm company has gathered the following information about its product direct materia 439861

Kimm Company has gathered the following information about its product.

Direct materials. Each unit of product contains4.40pounds of materials. The average waste and spoilage per unit produced under normal conditions is0.50pounds. Materials cost $4per pound, but Kimm always takes the4.94% cash discount all of its suppliers offer. Freight costs average $0.26per pound.

Direct labor. Each unit requires1.20hours of labor. Setup, cleanup, and downtime average0.23hours per unit. The average hourly pay rate of Kimm’s employees is $13.40. Payroll taxes and fringe benefits are an additional $3.30per hour.

Manufacturing overhead. Overhead is applied at a rate of $7.20per direct labor hour.

Compute Kimm’s total standard cost per unit.

big fish international bf11 has operations in several countries 440184

Big Fish International (BF11 has operations in several countries around the world. One of BFI’t. foreign subsidiaries. Little Trout Ltd. fL7L). provides the fol io…ins income statement covering its operations for the most recent year. h is stated in Pmaros (P). LTL’s local currency.

Sales revenue Cost of goods soh) Gross pupa( . Selling and athninisustive expenses Interest expense Premx income Inoune. lax expense Net income

P630.000 (319.000) P311.000 t234.0Gfq (15.1:00) P60.000 (34.0t:nq P26.00

P030 coo, C 311, 000) ?sit, 000 C2 004= _c is, 000)0 P‘o co 000) Paco, 00.0

You wish to prepare a performance report of LTL’s manager. reflecting those as pects under her control. Some of BR’s activities are coordinated across counties, and some inactions are centrally managed at BFI headquarters. You learn the fol lowing additional information: I. Financing decisions and tax planning are centralized at corporate headquarters. Each subsidiary is allocated a portion of BFI’s overall interest expense. 2. Similarly. each subsidiary L. charged an administrative fee for its “fair share” of BFI’s corporate overhead. LTL’s charge of P28.000 is included in selling and administrative expenses. C Pl3)C>0) 3. Included in LTL’s sales revenue is P120.000 worth of items sold to another of BFI’s subsidiaries. BR instructed UM to invoice the sale at 25 percent below market prices. 4. Local labor laws in LTL’s country require overtime payments when employees work more than 32 hours per week. Overtime charges amounting to P31,000 arc included in selling and administrative expenses.

Question 1. Which items are relevant in evaluating the performance of LTL’s manager? 2. Prepare a performance report for the manager of LTL. 3. How does your performanee report change if you are evaluating LTL as a sub sidiary operating unit of BR?

LP Z8, 000

Attachments:

accounting theory assignment discuss the fasb s standard setting process 441275

Please read both attached files and then answer the following questions:

1.Discuss the FASB’s standard setting process. You should summarize what the article discussed for the process, and then should provide your opinions

2.What is XBRL? Please discuss for the SEC’s position on the adoption of XBRL

3.Please discuss the roles of DCF in SEC

For question 1, one full page single space

for question 2 and 3, One full page single space

q4 mahugh company which has only one product has provided the following data concern 442115

Assignment #1 • There are 4 questions (below) that cover material from Units #1, #2 and #3. • You are required to prepare and/or complete and then submit the appropriate financial statements. • Clearly identify on the page footer your name and student number. • This paper will be marked out of 50 with your overall result counting towards 10% of your final grade. Please send me your assignment through the dropbox below. ________________________________________ 1. Delta Manufacturing Company has two Service Departments—Custodial Services and Maintenance—and three Production Departments—Cutting, Milling, and Assembly. Delta allocates the cost of Custodial Services on the basis of square metres and Maintenance on the basis of labour hours. Budgeted operating data for the year just completed follow: Required: a) Prepare a schedule to allocate Service Department costs to the Production Departments by the direct method, rounding all dollar amounts to the nearest whole dollar. (5 marks) b) Prepare a schedule to allocate Service Department costs to the Production Departments by the step down method, allocating Custodial Services first, and rounding all amounts to the nearest whole dollar. (5Marks) ________________________________________ 2. Mateo Company’s average cost per unit is $1.425 at the 16,000 unit level of activity and $1.38 at the 20,000 unit level of activity.Note: you need to calculate a total cost Assume that all of the activity levels mentioned in this problem are within the relevant range. Required: Predict the following items for Mateo Company: a) Variable cost per unit. (4 marks) b) Total fixed cost per period. (4 marks) c) Total expected costs at the 18,000 unit level of activity. (2 marks) ________________________________________ 3. The 4 x 4 Shop is a large retailer of equipment for pickup trucks. An income statement for the company’s Bed Liner Department for the most recent quarter is presented below: The liners sell, on average, for $350 each. The department’s variable selling expenses are $35 per liner sold. The remaining selling expenses are fixed. The administrative expenses are 25% variable and 75% fixed. The company purchases its liners from a supplier at a cost of $125 per liner. Required: Prepare an income statement for the quarter, using the contribution approach. (10 Marks) ________________________________________ Q4.) Mahugh Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations: For you to answer: a) What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing? (4 marks) b) What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing? (4 marks) c) Prepare an income statement for the month using the contribution format and the variable costing method. (4 marks) d) Prepare an income statement for the month using the absorption costing method. (4 marks) e) Reconcile the variable costing and absorption costing operating incomes for the month. (4 marks)

Attachments:

can this be done 280583

I want to know when this can be done by.

Document Preview:

UNIVERSITY OF BOLTON Faculty of Well Being and Social Sciences Business Management Programme Module Name and number: Financial Decision Making for Business Managers [BAM 2001] Tutors: Paul Bridge, Carl Bridge, Terry Elliot Assignment Number: One (S2, 2012 13) Assignment weighting: 50% Assignment Title: Diverse Management Consultants Assignment Length 2,500 words (or equivalent calculations) Issue Date: Week 3, in tutorial Submission Deadline: Week 9 (Programme Office by Friday 5pm) and copy into TurnitinUK via the link in Moodle Learning Outcomes This assessment satisfies the following learning outcomes as specified in your module guide. No.?Learning Outcomes?Assessment Criteria??1?Explain the principles of short term decision making including identification of relevant cash flows.?Explain the issues that arise in pricing decisions and the conflict between marginal costing and full cost recovery.?Appraise the usefulness of dividing costs into fixed and variable components when looking at break even analysis and constraint problems in a business ?be able to apply management accounting techniques to a variety of problems ??2?Explain the processes involved in making long term decisions.?Calculate project cash flows using investment appraisal techniques.?Compare, Contrast and evaluate the alternative techniques of investment appraisal.?be able to apply management accounting techniques to a variety of problems?? Please submit this form with the completed assessment. Ensure that each page of your piece of assessed work bears your student identification number, but not your name. I declare this submission to be my own work. Signed (student name)………………………………………………. Date……………………………………………………………………. Grade Description Mark Classification Work of Exceptional…

Attachments:

uncertain 280663

I have a my answers but a little uncertain and wanted clarity

Document Preview:

1.___ A customer ordered 12 boxes of your product (total of 144 items) express shipment. Your data entry clerk inadvertently entered 12 individual items. 2. ___You enter sales and accounts receivable data in batches at the end of each week. Several problems have resulted recently as a result of recording invoices to the wrong customer account. 3.___In an effort to boost sales, you obtain some of the stock of unissued shipping reports and create a dozen fictitious shipments. You submit these documents to the billing department for invoicing. 4.___Checks are received by the mailroom and then forwarded to the accounts receivable department for recording. The accounts receivable clerk holds the checks until the proper customer account has been identified and reconciled. 5.___Several shipping reports have been misplaced en route to the billing department from the shipping department. 6.___Several sales transactions were not invoiced within the same month as the related shipment. 7.___A sales clerk entered a non existent date in the computer system. The system rejected the data and the sales were not recorded. 8.___Upon entering sales orders in your new computer system, a sales clerk mistakenly omitted customer numbers from the entries. 9.___A computer programmer altered the electronic credit authorization function for a customer company owned by the programmer’s cousin. 10.___Customer orders were lost in the mail en route from the sales office to the accounting department (located at the company’s headquarters). Required: Select one internal control from the following list that would be most effective in the prevention of the failure. Indicate the letter of the control next to each failure above. Letters should not be used more than once and some letters may not be used at all. Pre formatted data entry screens Pre numbered documents Programmed edit checks 100% check for matching of customer orders and sales orders 100% check for matching of sales orders,…

Attachments:

wigs plus company supplies wigs and hair care products to 280733

Wigs Plus Company supplies wigs and hair care products to beauty salons throughout California and the Pacific Northwest. The accounts receivable clerk for Wigs Plus prepared the following aging of receivables schedule as of the end of business on December 31, 2010:

?

Wigs Plus Company has a past history of uncollectible accounts by age category, as follows:

Percent

Age ClassUncollectible

Not past due…………………………….. 2%

1–30 days past due……………………… 4

31–60 days past due……………………..10

61–90 days past due……………………. 15

91–120 days past due…………………… 35

Over 120 days past due………………… 80

Instructions

1. Estimate the allowance for doubtful accounts, based on the aging of receivables schedule.

2. Assume that the allowance for doubtful accounts for Wigs Plus Company has a negative balance of _$1,710 before adjustment on December 31, 2010. Illustrate the effect on the accounts and financial statements of the adjustment for uncollectible accounts.

3. Wigs Plus Company reported credit sales of $4,000,000 during 2010. Assume that instead of using the analysis of receivables method of estimating uncollectible accounts, Wigs Plus Company uses the percent of sales method and estimates that 1.75% of sales will be uncollectible. Illustrate the effect on the accounts and financial statements of the adjustment for uncollectible accounts using the percent of sales method.

4. Assume that on February 10, 2011, Wigs Plus wrote off the $3,500 account of Lasting Images as uncollectible. Illustrate the effect on the accounts and financial statements of the write off of the Lasting Images account.

5. Assume that on May 17, 2011, Lasting Images paid $3,500 on its account. Illustrate the effect on the accounts and financial statements of reinstating and collecting the Lasting Images account.

6. Assume that instead of using the allowance method, Wigs Plus uses the direct write off method. Illustrate the effect on the accounts and financial statements of the following:

a. The write off of the Lasting Images account on February 10, 2011.

b. The reinstatement and collection of the Lasting Images account on May 17, 2011.

7. Does Amazon.com use the direct write off or allowance method of accounting for uncollectible accounts receivable?Explain.

answer the following questions using appropriate business prose a what is the compan 280745

Analysis and Audit Plan

Spring 2013

(Mohawk Industries)

The objectives of this project are as follows:

1. To acquaint students with the annual report and Form 10 K of a publicly held company audited by a CPA firm.

2. To provide data for the practical application of different steps in the audit process.

3. To allow students to experience writing as is done in an actual business/audit setting.

Logistics:

1. The final paper should be professionally presented in a report binder.

2. Double space the paper

3. Use Times Roman 12 font

4. There is not a required length. However, most papers generally run about 8 pages in length. The paper should not exceed 10 pages.

Detailed Instructions:

  1. Obtain a copy of a recent annual report of your assigned publicly held company (Mohawk Industries) with stock actively traded on the New York, NASDAQ or other over the counter exchanges. Each student will have a company from the list provided by the instructor.
  2. Answer the following questions using appropriate business prose, i.e., answer the questions in the body of the report. Do not simply list the question and the corresponding answer.

a. What is the company’s industry?

b. What are its primary products?

c. What raw materials does the company use?

d. How large is the company:

  • Sales
  • Assets
  • Employees

e. Where is the company located?

f. What other people/companies are closely associated with this company?

g. Look at the annual report:

  • What image does it intend to convey?
  • What are the segments and functional contents of the report?

3. Obtain a copy of the Company’s 10 K report for the same date as the annual report. Answer the following questions:

a. How does the 10 K differ from the annual report?

b. Supplement the answers to the questions under 2 as appropriate.

4. Obtain outside information about the company and its industry. Answer the following questions:

a. What are the key economic factors about the industry?

b. Where is the company in its life cycle?

c. What are the five or six most important factors for success in this business?

d. How does this company stand with respect to these factors?

e. Describe four or five key business risks related to the client’s business and industry.

f. What notable accounting considerations are there for companies in this industry?

g. What legal or regulatory matters are of concern?

h. What social matters are of concern?

5. Analyze the company’s financial strength:

a. Assess the financial strength of the company?

b. How is the financial strength likely to change in the next year or so?

c. What are its sources of capital and what is the value of the company’s capital?

d. How have the capital markets responded to the company in the last year?

e. What is the quality of earnings?

f. How does the company compare with others in the industry?

6. Prepare a broad audit plan:

a. What material types of transactions and transaction cycles are involved?

b. What are the high risk areas?

c. What are the low risk areas?

d. If management faced tremendous pressure regarding the entity’s financial performance, what opportunities might exist for them to engage in fraudulent financial reporting?

e. To what extent do you believe it will be appropriate to reduce assessed control risk?

f. How will audit effort be allocated among geographical areas?

g. What form of auditors’ report do you expect will be issued; what does it mean?

Attachments:

write the letter of the method that is most applicable 280748

Write the letter of the method that is most applicable to each statement.

a. Specific identification

b. Average cost

c. First in, first out (FIFO)

d. Last in, first out (LIFO)

____________ 1. Is the most realistic ending inventory

____________ 2. Results in cost of goods sold being closest to current product costs

____________ 3. Results in highest income during periods of inflation

____________ 4. Results in highest ending inventory during periods of inflation

____________ 5. Smooths out costs during periods of inflation

____________ 6. Is not practical for most businesses

____________ 7. Puts more weight on the cost of the larger number of units purchased

____________ 8. Is an assumption that most closely reflects the physical flow of goods for most businesses

____________ 9. Is not an acceptable method under IFRS

you are the controller of a rapidly growing mass merchandiser 280773

You are the controller of a rapidly growing mass merchandiser. The company uses a periodic inventory system. As the company has grown and accounting systems have developed, errors have occurred in both the physical count of inventory and the valuation of inventory on the balance sheet. You have been able to identify the following errors as of December 2010:

In 2008, one of the retail sections was omitted from the physical count of inventory. The error resulted in inventory being understated on December 31, 2008, by approximately $28,700.

In 2008, one section of the warehouse was counted twice. The error resulted in inventory being overstated on December 31, 2008, by approximately $45,600.

In 2009, the replacement cost of some inventory was less than the FIFO value used ?c on the balance sheet. The inventory would have been $6,000 less on the balance sheet dated December 31, 2009.

Required

What, if anything, should you do to correct each of these errors? Explain your answers.

you have been hired as the accountant for christman company 280784

You have been hired as the accountant for Christman Company, which uses the periodic inventory method. In reviewing the firm’s records, you have noted what you think are several accounting errors made during the current year, 2012. These potential mistakes are listed as follows:

a. A $51,000 purchase of merchandise was properly recorded in the purchases account, but the related accounts payable account was credited for only $4,000.

b. A $4,400 shipment of merchandise received just before the end of the year was properly recorded in the purchases account but was not physically counted in the inventory and, hence, was excluded from the ending inventory balance.

c. A $5,600 purchase of merchandise was erroneously recorded as a $6,500 purchase.

d. A $1,200 purchase of merchandise was not recorded either as a purchase or as an account payable.

e. During the year, $3,100 of defective merchandise was sent back to a supplier. The original purchase had been recorded, but the merchandise return entry was not recorded.

f. During the physical inventory count, inventory that cost $800 was counted twice.

Required:

1. If the previous accountant had tentatively computed the 2012 gross margin to be $25,000, what would be the correct gross margin for the year?

2. If these mistakes are not corrected, by how much will the 2013 net income be in error?

you have the following information for gas saver plus gas 280795

You have the following information for Gas Saver Plus. Gas Saver Plus uses the periodic method of accounting for its inventory transactions.

March 1 Beginning inventory 1,500 litres at a cost of 40?c per litre.

March 3 Purchased 2,000 litres at a cost of 45?c per litre.

March 5 Sold 1,800 litres for 60?c per litre.

March 10 Purchased 3,500 litres at a cost of 49?c per litre.

March 20 Purchased 2,000 litres at a cost of 55?c per litre.

March 30 Sold 5,000 litres for 70?c per litre.

Instructions

(a) Prepare partial income statements through gross profit, and calculate the value of ending inventory that would be reported on the balance sheet, under each of the following cost flow assumptions.

(1) Specific identification method assuming:

(i) The March 5 sale consisted of 900 litres from the March 1 beginning inventory and 900 litres from the March 3 purchase; and

(ii) The March 30 sale consisted of the following number of units sold from each purchase: 400 litres from March 1; 500 litres from March 3; 2,600 litres from March 10; 1,500 litres from March 20.

(2) FIFO.

(3) LIFO.

(b) How can companies use a cost flow method to justify price increases? Which cost flow method would best support an argument to increase prices?

1 the costs of a job are accounted for on 280834

1. The costs of a job are accounted for on the

a. Materials requisition sheet.

b. Time ticket.

c. Requisition for overhead application.

d. Job order cost sheet.

e. Sales invoice.

2. Wilson Company has a predetermined overhead rate of $5 per direct labor hour. The job order cost sheet for Job 145 shows 1,000 direct labor hours costing $10,000 and materials requisitions totaling $7,500. Job 145 had 500 units completed and transferred to Finished Goods. What is the cost per unit for Job 145?

a. $35

b. $135

c. $30

d. $45

e. $22,500

3. When a job costing $2,000 is finished but not sold, the following journal entry is made: (Appendix 5A)

a. Cost of Goods Sold 2,000

Finished Goods 2,000

b. Finished Goods 2,000

Cost of Goods Sold 2,000

c. Finished Goods 2,000

Work in Process 2,000

d. Work in Process 2,000

Finished Goods 2,000

e. Cost of Goods Sold 2,000

Sales 2,000

4. Those departments responsible for creating products or services that are sold to customers are referred to as (Appendix 5B)

a. Profit making departments.

b. Support departments.

c. Cost centers.

d. Production departments.

e. None of the above.

5. Those departments that provide essential services to producing departments are referred to as (Appendix 5B)

a. Revenue generating departments.

b. Support departments.

c. Profit centers.

d. Production departments.

e. None of the above.

6. An example of a producing department is (Appendix 5B)

a. A materials storeroom.

b. The maintenance department.

c. Engineering design.

d. Assembly.

e. All of the above.

7. An example of a support department is (Appendix 5B)

a. Data processing.

b. Personnel.

c. A materials storeroom.

d. Payroll.

e. All of the above.

8. The method that assigns support department costs only to producing departments in proportion to each department’s usage of the service is known as (Appendix 5B)

a. The sequential method.

b. The proportional method.

c. The reciprocal method.

d. The direct method.

e. None of the above.

9. The method that assigns support department costs by giving partial recognition to support department interactions is known as (Appendix 5B)

a. The sequential method.

b. The proportional method.

c. The reciprocal method.

d. The direct method.

e. None of the above.

10. The method that assigns support department costs by giving full recognition to support department interactions is known as (Appendix 5B)

a. The sequential method.

b. The proportional method.

c. The reciprocal method.

d. The direct method.

e. None of the above.

alston corporation makes rocking chairs the chairs move through 280874

Alston Corporation makes rocking chairs. The chairs move through two departments during production. Lumber is cut into chair parts in the cutting department, which transfers the parts to the assembly department for completion. The company sells the unfinished chairs to hobby shops. The following transactions apply to Alston’s operations for its first year, 2011. (Assume that all transactions are for cash unless otherwise stated.)

1. The company was started when it acquired a $100,000 cash contribution from the owners.

2. The company purchased $30,000 of direct raw materials and $800 of indirect materials. Indirect materials are capitalized in the Production Supplies account.

3. Direct materials totaling $12,000 were issued to the cutting department.

4. Labor cost was $56,400. Direct labor for the cutting and assembly departments was $20,000 and $26,000, respectively. Indirect labor costs were $10,400.

5. The predetermined overhead rate was $0.50 per direct labor dollar in each department.

6. Actual overhead costs other than indirect materials and indirect labor were $12,800 for the year.

7. The cutting department transferred $24,000 of inventory to the assembly department.

8. The assembly department transferred $40,000 of inventory to finished goods.

9. The company sold inventory costing $36,000 for $60,000.

10. Selling and administrative expenses were $6,000.

11. A physical count revealed $200 of production supplies on hand at the end of 2011.

12. Assume that over or underapplied overhead is insignificant.

Required

a. Record the data in T accounts.

b. Record the closing entry for over or underapplied manufacturing overhead, assuming that the amount is insignificant.

c. Close the revenue and expense accounts.

d. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured and sold, an income statement, and a balance sheet for 2011.

an accounting professional requires at least two skill sets the 280881

An accounting professional requires at least two skill sets. The first is to be technically competent. Knowing how to capture, manage, and report information is a necessary skill. Second, the ability to assess manager and employee actions and biases for accounting analysis is another skill. For instance, knowing how a person is compensated helps anticipate information biases. Draw on these skills and write a one half page memo to the financial officer on the following practice of allocating overhead. Background: Assume that your company sells portable housing to both general contractors and the government. It sells jobs to contractors on a bid basis. A contractor asks for three bids from different manufacturers.

The combination of low bid and high quality wins the job. However, jobs sold to the government are bid on a cost plus basis. This means price is determined by adding all costs plus a profit based on cost at a specified percent, such as 10%. You observe that the amount of overhead allocated to government jobs is higher than that allocated to contract jobs. These allocations concern you and motivate your memo.

anselmo s kwik print provides a variety of photocopying and prin 280886

Anselmo’s Kwik Print provides a variety of photocopying and printing services. On June 5, Anselmo invested in some computer aided photography equipment that enables customers to reproduce a picture or illustration, input it digitally into the computer, enter text into the computer, and then print out a four color professional quality brochure. Prior to the purchase of this equipment, Kwik Print’s overhead averaged $35,000 per year. After the installation of the new equipment, the total overhead increased to $85,000 per year. Kwik Print has always costed jobs on the basis of actual materials and labor plus overhead assigned using a predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor hours. Budgeted direct labor hours for the year are 5,000, and the wage rate is $6 per hour.

Required:

1. What was the predetermined overhead rate prior to the purchase of the new equipment?

2. What was the predetermined overhead rate after the new equipment was purchased?

3. Suppose Kevin Bess brought in several items he wanted photocopied. The job required 100 sheets of paper at $0.015 each and 12 minutes of direct labor time. What would have been the cost of Kevin’s job on May 20? On June 20?

4. Suppose that Anselmo decides to calculate two overhead rates, one for the photocopying area based on direct labor hours as before, and one for the computeraided printing area based on machine time. Estimated overhead applicable to the computer aided printing area is $50,000, and forecasted usage of the machines is 2,000 hours. What are the two overhead rates? Which overhead rate system is better—one rate or two?

what are financial accounting management accounting and finance what are their simil 280391

DQ1. What are financial accounting, management accounting, and finance? What are their similarities and differences? (Chapter 1) Accounting can be defined as a systematic recording, reporting and analysis of transaction which has a monetary value in the books. There are many accounting standards which are issued by organization of repute and which are mandatorily required to be followed while preparing the books of accounts. Accounting in general is divided mainly into two main types: these are financial accounting and also cost accounting, which is a part of managerial accounting.

Document Preview:

DQ1. What are financial accounting, management accounting, and finance? What are their similarities and differences? (Chapter 1) Accounting can be defined as a systematic recording, reporting and analysis of transaction which has a monetary value in the books. There are many accounting standards which are issued by organization of repute and which are mandatorily required to be followed while preparing the books of accounts. Accounting in general is divided mainly into two main types: these are financial accounting and also cost accounting, which is a part of managerial accounting. Financial accounting is mainly for external purposes and consists of recording financial transactions according to generally accepted accounting principles, or GAAP and is prepared for the stakeholders of the organization. Managerial accounting is used internally for improving the company’s performance. While these two types of accounting are different in many aspects, they share several similarities. Financial Accounting The process of recording, summarizing and reporting the innumerable transactions from a business, so as to provide an accurate picture of its financial position and performance during a particular period of time. Importantly , the main objective of financial accounting is for the preparation of financial statements which includes the balance sheet, income statement and cash flow statement, statement of equity that encapsulates the company’s performance over a particular period, and financial position at a specific point in time. These statements which are generally prepared quarterly and annually, and in accordance with Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) are aimed at external parties including investors, creditors, regulators and tax authorities Managerial Accounting It can be defined as a process of identifying, recording, measuring, analyzing, interpreting, and communicating information for the quest of an organization’s goals. …

Attachments:

this problem continues the draper consulting situation from 5 4 280404

This problem continues the Draper Consulting, Inc., situation from Problem 5 43 in Chapter 5. Consider the January transactions for Draper Consulting that were presented in Chapter 5. (Cost data has been removed from the sale transactions.)

Jan 2 Completed a consulting engagement and received cash of $7,800.

2 Prepaid three months’ office rent, $1,650.

7 Purchased 80 units software inventory on account, $1,680, plus freight in, $80.

18 Sold 40 software units on account, $3,500.

19 Consulted with a client for a fee of $1,000 on account.

20 Paid employee salary, $2,055.

21 Paid on account, $1,760.

22 Purchased 240 units software inventory on account, $6,240.

24 Paid utilities, $250.

28 Sold 120 units of software for cash, $4,680.

31 Recorded the following adjusting entries:

Accrued salary expense, $685.

Depreciation, $100 (Equipment, $30; Furniture, $70).

Expiration of prepaid rent, $550.

Physical count of inventory, 145 units.

Requirements

1. Prepare perpetual inventory records for January for Draper using the LIFO perpetual method. (Note: You must figure cost on the 18th, 28th, and 31st.)

2. Journalize and post the January transactions using the perpetual inventory record created in requirement 1. Key all items by date. Compute each account balance, and denote the balance as Bal.

3. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Denote each adjusting amount as Adj. After posting all adjusting entries, prove the equality of debits and credits in the ledger.

at a recent meeting one of your coworkers stated that 280413

1Page

At a recent meeting, one of your coworkers stated that “Using the right analysis tool will compensate for inexperienced managers.”

How would you reply to your coworker? Consider the following itemsin your discussion:

  1. Do the tools help only in certain situations such as routine, daily or rather mundane decisions, like cost controls, quality controls or staffing questions (in term of number of people needed)?
  2. How can analysis tools help the finance or accounting arms of a company more so than operations managers? (For example, do computers really think? Do they learn from their mistakes? Can they manipulate or change their environment?)
  3. What happens if the data entered is wrong?
  4. Respond to another students’ post.
  5. If needed, cite references in APA format.
Document Preview:

1Page At a recent meeting, one of your coworkers stated that “Using the right analysis tool will compensate for inexperienced managers.” ??How would you reply to your coworker? Consider the following items in your discussion: Do the tools help only in certain situations such as routine, daily or rather mundane decisions, like cost controls, quality controls or staffing questions (in term of number of people needed)? How can analysis tools help the finance or accounting arms of a company more so than operations managers? (For example, do computers really think? Do they learn from their mistakes? Can they manipulate or change their environment?) What happens if the data entered is wrong? Respond to another students’ post. If needed, cite references in APA format.

Attachments:

tom landry owns a construction business landry supply co the 280423

Tom Landry owns a construction business, Landry Supply Co. The following cash information is available for the month of October 2012. As of October 31, the bank statement shows a balance of $13,800. The October 31 unadjusted balance in the Cash account of Landry Supply Co. is $12,700. A review of the bank statement revealed the following information.

1. A deposit of $1,600 on October 31, 2012, does not appear on the October 31 bank statement.

2. A debit memo for $250 was included in the bank statement for the purchase of a new supply of checks.

3. When checks written during the month were compared with those paid by the bank, three checks amounting to $4,450 were found to be outstanding.

4. It was discovered that a check to pay for repairs was correctly written and paid by the bank for $3,100 but was recorded on the books as $1,600.

Required

Prepare a bank reconciliation at the end of October showing the true cash balance.

two wheeler a bike shop opened for business on april 280436

Two Wheeler, a bike shop, opened for business on April 1. It uses a periodic inventory system. The following transactions occurred during the first month of business:

April 1: Purchased five units from Duhan Co. for $500 total, with terms 3/10, n/30, FOB destination.

April 10: Paid for the April 1 purchase.

April 15: Sold one unit for $200 cash.

April 18: Purchased ten units from Clinton Inc. for $900 total, with terms 3/10, n/30, FOB destination.

April 25: Sold three units for $200 each, cash.

April 28: Paid for the April 18 purchase.

Required

1. Identify and analyze each of the preceding transactions of Two Wheeler.

2. Determine net income for the month of April. Two Wheeler incurred and paid $100 for rent and $50 for miscellaneous expenses during April. Ending inventory is $967. (Ignore income taxes.)

3. Assuming that these are the only transactions during April (including rent and miscellaneous expenses), compute net cash flow from operating activities.

4. Explain why cash outflow is so much larger than expenses on the income statement.

you have just been assigned to manage the audit for a new large client of your firm 280449

You have just been assigned to manage the audit for a new large client of your firm, Cheap Music Downloads Inc. (CMD). CMD is a subsidiary of a client of your firm that manufactures audio and video equipment for international distribution. CMD has been in operation for two years, when its custom information systems were established. CMD runs a web site that allows customers to order songs using their credit card only. There are tens of thousands of small transactions daily. Once the credit card has been authorized by the credit card processing intermediary, CMD’s web sales system generates a 16 digit sequential code that the customer uses to access the song via the web site. CMD will then record both the sale and the royalty for the song. Quarterly, CMD remits royalties to artists based upon the number of copies of the song that has sold, if the accumulated royalty exceeds $25.00 for that artist. Artist royalties that do not exceed $25.00 will be paid every two years if there has not been a payment during that time. All contracted royalty rates, artist names and song titles are recorded in CMD’s database tables. Some of the content of the database tables is listed below: Sales Transaction Table Song Master Table Royalty Transaction Table Customer name Song code Song code 16 digit sales code Song title 16 digit sales code Transaction date Sales price Transaction date Amount Royalty rate Royalty amount Song code purchased Artist code 2 AP/ADMS 4552 Winter 2013, Hand in Case # 3: Cheap Music Downloads Inc. Required: (18 marks) A. Describe four computer assisted audit tests (CAATs) that you could run using generalized audit software (such as ACL) in order to audit royalty expenses. For each test, describe the audit assertion associated with the test. (6 marks, 1 mark for CAAT, ½ mark for assertion) No marks for cash disbursements or accounts payable tests. B. Describe three internal controls that should exist over sales or royalty transactions or over the database tables. For each control: (i) State the control (ii) Describe (not just state) the specific transaction related audit assertion associated with the control (or state the purpose of the control) (iii) Provide an audit test that you could use to test the control (9 marks) [Note that audit tests in column (iii) must be different from Part A to have marks awarded.] C. Use the concept of rotational testing to discuss whether (or not) you would be required to test specific automated controls at CMD this year. (3 marks) No marks for description of standards without application to case fact

Attachments:

vaughn company which uses a periodic inventory system had a 280491

Vaughn Company, which uses a periodic inventory system, had a beginning inventory on May 1, of 400 units of Product A at a cost of $7 per unit. During May, the following purchases and sales were made.

Purchases Sales

May 6 375 units at $9 May 4 275 units

14 250 units at $10 8 300 units

21 300 units at $11 22 400 units

28 425 units at $13 24 225 units

1,350 1,200

Instructions:

Compute the May 31 ending inventory and May cost of goods sold under (a) Average Cost, (b) FIFO, and (c) LIFO. Provide appropriate supporting calculations.

(a) Average – Ending Inventory = $_________; Cost of Goods Sold = $_________.

(b) FIFO – Ending Inventory = $_________; Cost of Goods Sold = $_________.

(c) LIFO – Ending Inventory = $_________; Cost of Goods Sold = $_________.

current e p computation 437508

Water Corporation reports $500,000 of taxable income for the current year. The following additional information is available:

for the current year, Water reports an $80,000 long term capital loss and no capital gains.

Taxable income includes $80,000 of dividends from a 10% owned domestic corporation.

Water paid fines and penalties for $6,000 that were not deducted in computing taxable income.

in computing this year’s taxable income, Water deducted a $20,000 NOL carryover from a prior tax year.

Water claimed a $10,000 U.S. production activities deduction.

Taxable income includes a deduction for $40,000 of depreciation that exceeds the depreciation allowed fro E&P purposes.

Assume a 34% corporate tax rate. What is Water’s current E&P for this year?

financial accounting 437574

Wickersham Brothers Inc. is developing its annual financial statements at December 31, 2011. The statements are complete except for the statement of cash flows. The completed comparative balance sheets and income statements are summarized.

2011 2010
Balance Sheet
Cash 50,000 72,000
Accounts receivable 80,000 70,000
Merchandise inventory 60,000 65,000
Property and equipment 110,000 60,000
Less: Accumulated depreciation (30,000 ) (15,000 )






270,000 252,000












Accounts payable $ 10,000 $ 12,000
Wages payable 2,000 1,000
Notes payable, long term 50,000 60,000
Contributed capital 100,000 80,000
Retained earnings 108,000 99,000






$ 270,000 $

252,000













Income Statement
Sales $ 200,000
Cost of good sold 110,000
Depreciation expense 15,000
Other expenses 50,000



Net income $ 25,000







Additional Data:
a. Bought equipment for cash, $50,000.
b. Paid $10,000 on long term note payable.
c. Issued new shares of stock for $20,000 cash.
d. Cash dividends of $16,000 were declared and paid.
e. Accounts payable are exclusively related to inventory purchases on credit.
f.

Tax expense ($4,000) and interest expense ($3,000) were paid in full at the end of both years and are included in other expenses.

(a)

Prepare the statement of cash flows for 2011 using the indirect method. (Negative amounts should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Wickersham Brothers Inc.
Statement of cash flows
For the year ended December 31, 2011
Cash flows from operating activities
(Click to select) Net loss Net income $
Adjustments
(Click to select) Change in accounts payable Change in accounts receivable Change in wages payable Change in inventories Change in prepaid expense Depreciation Change in salaries payable
(Click to select) Depreciation Change in accounts receivable Change in inventories Change in prepaid expense Change in accounts payable Change in wages payable Change in salaries payable
(Click to select) Change in salaries payable Change in accounts receivable Change in wages payable Depreciation Change in inventories Change in accounts payable Change in prepaid expense
(Click to select) Change in accounts payable Change in inventories Change in accounts receivable Change in prepaid expense Change in salaries payable Depreciation Change in wages payable
(Click to select) Change in inventories Change in salaries payable Depreciation Change in wages payable Change in prepaid expense Change in accounts receivable Change in accounts payable

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities $


Cash flows from investing activities
(Click to select) Change in accounts receivable Change in wages payable Proceeds from issuance of stock Additions to property, plant, and equipment Change in inventories Repaid principal on long term debt Change in accounts payable

Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities


Cash flows from financing activities
(Click to select) Repaid principal on long term debt Repaid principal on short term debt Cash collected from customers Cash paid for dividends Proceeds from issuance of stock Cash paid for expenses Cash paid for interest
(Click to select) Cash collected from customers Repaid principal on long term debt Cash paid for expenses Proceeds from issuance of stock Cash paid for dividends Repaid principal on short term debt Cash paid for interest
(Click to select) Cash paid for expenses Cash paid for dividends Repaid principal on short term debt Cash collected from customers Cash paid for interest Proceeds from issuance of stock Repaid principal on long term debt

Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities


(Click to select) Change in account receivable Change in inventory Increase in cash and cash equivalents Decrease in cash and cash equivalents Change in wages payable Change in account payable Cash paid for dividends
(Click to select) Cash and cash equivalents, January 1 Change in accounts receivable Cash and cash equivalents, December 31 Repaid principal on long term debt Change in wages payable Change in inventories Change in accounts payable

(Click to select) Change in wages payable Change in inventories Change in accounts receivable Repaid principal on long term debt Cash and cash equivalents, December 31 Change in accounts payable Cash and cash equivalents, January 1

accounting 437588

Williams Santana, Inc., is a manufacturer of high tech industrial parts that was started in 2001 by two talented engineers with little business training. In 2013, the company was acquired by one of its major customers. As part of an internal audit, the following facts were discovered. The audit occurred during 2013 before any adjusting entries or closing entries were prepared.

a.

A five year casualty insurance policy was purchased at the beginning of 2011 for $35,000. The full amount was debited to insurance expense at the time.

b.

Effective January 1, 2013, the company changed the salvage value used in calculating depreciation for its office building. The building cost $600,000 on December 29, 2002, and has been depreciated on a straight line basis assuming a useful life of 40 years and a salvage value of $100,000. Declining real estate values in the area indicate that the salvage value will be no more than $25,000.

c.

On December 31, 2012, merchandise inventory was overstated by $25,000 due to a mistake in the physical inventory count using the periodic inventory system.

d.

The company changed inventory cost methods to FIFO from LIFO at the end of 2013 for both financial statement and income tax purposes. The change will cause a $960,000 increase in the beginning inventory at January 1, 2014.

e. At the end of 2012, the company failed to accrue $15,500 of sales commissions earned by employees during 2012. The expense was recorded when the commissions were paid in early 2013.
f.

At the beginning of 2011, the company purchased a machine at a cost of $720,000. Its useful life was estimated to be 10 years with no salvage value. The machine has been depreciated by the double declining balance method. Its carrying amount on December 31, 2012, was $460,800. On January 1, 2013, the company changed to the straight line method.

g.

Warranty expense is determined each year as 1% of sales. Actual payment experience of recent years indicates that 0.75% is a better indication of the actual cost. Management effects the change in 2013. Credit sales for 2013 are $4,000,000; in 2012 they were $3,700,000.

Required:
For each situation:
1.

Identify whether it represents an accounting change or an error. If an accounting change, identify the type of change.

2.

Prepare any journal entry necessary as a direct result of the change or error correction as well as any adjusting entry for 2013 related to the situation described. (Ignore tax effects.)

accounting homework please help explain step by step 437616

Witchs brew company manufactures and sells three potions that all use gargoyle eyelashes as an Witch As an ingredient. The high demand for all three of these potions exceeds the supply of gargoyle eyelashes that witches brew is able to buy from its supplier. Information is as follows:

Beauty potion,: selling price $100, variable cost per bottle 70, Eyelashes required Per bottle 2, sales demand in units 1, 000.

Luck potion: selling price 120, vc per bottle 84, eyelashes required 3, sales demand in units 1, 500

Smart potion: selling price 200, vc per bottle 130, eyelashes 5, Sales demand 1800

A) how many eyelashes would be required to satisfy demand for all 3 products?

B) each year witches brew is only able to buy 14,000 gargoyle eyelashes. Using only the information above, basing the decision solely on maximizing net operating income, how many bottles, if any, of each potion should witches bre make?

C) a new supplier is found that has eyelashes available to sell. How many eyelashes would witches brew need to purchase? What is the maximum amount witches brew would be willing to pay per eyelash? Assume the normal cost of an eyelash is $10

net present value for 2 alternatives 437632

Woolrich Company’s market research division has projected a substantial increase in demand over the next several years for one of the company’s products. To meet this demand, the company will need to produce units as follows:

Year Production
in Units
1 20,000
2 30,000
3 40,000
4Af?cA?†’10 45,000

At present, the company is using a single model 2600 machine to manufacture this product. To increase its productive capacity, the company is considering two alternatives:

Alternative 1. The company could purchase another model 2600 machine that would operate along with the one it now owns. The following information is available on this alternative:

a.

The model 2600 machine now in use was purchased for $165,000 four years ago. Its present book value is $99,000, and its present market value is $90,000.

b.

A new model 2600 machine costs $180,000 now. The old model 2600 machine will have to be replaced in six years at a cost of $200,000. The replacement machine will have a market value of about $100,000 when it is four years old.

c. The variable cost required to produce one unit of product using the model 2600 machine is given under the Af?cAc‚¬A??ogeneral informationAf?cAc‚¬ on the below.
d. Repairs and maintenance costs each year on a single model 2600 machine total $3,000.

Alternative 2. The company could purchase a model 5200 machine and use the old model 2600 machine as standby equipment. The model 5200 machine is a high speed unit with double the capacity of the model 2600 machine. The following information is available on this alternative:

a. The cost of a new model 5200 machine is $250,000.
b. The variable cost required to produce one unit of product using the model 5200 machine is given under the Af?cAc‚¬A??ogeneral informationAf?cAc‚¬ on the below.
c. The model 5200 machine is more costly to maintain than the model 2600 machine. Repairs and maintenance on a model 5200 machine and on a model 2600 machine used as a standby would total $4,600 per year.
The following general information is available on the two alternatives:
a.

Both the model 2600 machine and the model 5200 machine have a 10 year life from the time they are first used in production. The scrap value of both machines is negligible and can be ignored. Straight line depreciation is used by the company.

b. The two machine models are not equally efficient. Comparative variable costs per unit of product are as follows:

Model
2600
Model
5200
Direct materials per unit $ 0.36 $ 0.40
Direct labor per unit 0.50 0.22
Supplies and lubricants per unit 0.04 0.08




Total variable cost per unit $ 0.90 $ 0.70









c.

No other factory costs would change as a result of the decision between the two machines.

d.

Woolrich Company uses an 18% discount rate. (Ignore income taxes.)

Click here to view Exhibit 11B 1 andExhibit 11B 2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.

Required:
1a.

What is the net present value of alternative 1? (Use the total cost approach.) (Round PV discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places. Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, other intermediate calculations and final answer to the nearest whole dollar.)

Net present value $

1b.

What is the net present value of alternative 2? (Use the total cost approach.) (Round PV discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places. Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, other intermediate calculations and final answer to the nearest whole dollar.)

Net present value $

accounting 437653

Please show the work or you will get no ratings.

(Ignore income taxes in this problem.) The management of Rouleau Corporation is investigating automating a process. Old equipment, with a current salvage value of $10,000, would be replaced by a new machine. The new machine would be purchased for $240,000 and would have a 6 year useful life and no salvage value. By automating the process, the company would save $64,000 per year in cash operating costs. The simple rate of return on the investment is closest to:

10.0%
26.7%
10.4%
16.7%

managerial accounting 437658

******PLEASE SHOW WORK IF YOU WANT YOUR ANSWER RATED*** Thanks in advance!

1. A company’s gross profit rate is 30% of sales. Expected January sales are $78,000 and desired January 31st inventory is $7,500. Assuming the December 31st inventory is $6,200 what amount of purchases should this company budget for the month of January?

A)24,700

(B)55,900

(C)53,300

(D)22,100

(E)79,300

2. A company’s data is presented below. Desired ending inventory is a consistent percentage of the next quarter’s sales and the previous year’s 4th quarter ending inventory of 560 units meets this requirement. Compute the expected production in the 3rd Quarter of the current year.

Quarter: 1 2 3 4

Expected Sales Units: 7,000 5,000 8,000 6,000

Units Produced: 6,840 ? ? ?

(A)8,000

(B)7,360

(C)7,840

(D)8,480

(E)8,160

3. Lara Company has budgeted the following credit sales during the current year: September, $25,000; October, $36,000; November, $30,000; December, $32,000. Experience has shown that payment for the credit sales is received as follows: 15% in the month of sale, 60% in the first month after sale, 20% in the second month after sale, and 5% is uncollectible. How much cash can Lara Company expect to collect in November as a result of current and past credit sales

(A)$28,500

(B)$31,100

(C)$19,700

(D) $33,900

(E)$30,000

4. To determine the production budget for an accounting period, consideration is not given to which of the following:

(A) Budgeted beginning inventory

(B) Budgeted overhead

(C) budgeted sales

(D) Required units of inventory available

(E) Budgeted ending inventory

5.Lingstat Company is trying to decide how many units of merchandise to order each month. The company’s policy is to have 15% of the next month’s sales in inventory at the end of each month. Projected sales for August, September, and October are 5,000 units, 6,000 units, and 4,000 units, respectively. How many units must be purchased in September?

(A) 6,300 (B)5,700 (C)5,850 (D)6,600 (E)6,150

6.A Company is preparing a cash budget for June. The company has $67,000 cash at the beginning of June and anticipates $82,330 in cash receipts and $93,520 in cash disbursements during June. This company has an agreement with its bank to maintain a cash balance of at least $65,000. As of May 31, the company owes $25,000 to the bank. To maintain the $65,000 required balance, during June the company must:

(A) Repay $13,190

(B) borrow $25,000

(C) Borrow $9,190

(D) Repay $9,190

(E) Repay $25,000

management accounting 437679

SHOW WORKING

Flinders

Company has two service departments, Factory Administration and

Maintenance, and two operating departments. Selected information

relating to these departments is given below:

Service Departments

Operating Departments

Factory
Administration
Maintenance X Y
Departmental costs $ 143,000 $ 69,674 $ 701,000 $ 601,000
Number of employees 4 4 50 50
Total labor hours 4,100 6,100 50,000 60,000

The

company allocates service department costs by the step down method.

Factory Administration costs are allocated first on the basis of number

of employees, and then Maintenance costs are allocated on the basis of

total labor hours.

Required:

Prepare a schedule showing the allocation of service department costs to other departments. (Leave

no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Negative

amounts should be indicated by a minus sign. Do not round intermediate

calculations. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Service Departments

Operating Departments

Factory Administration Maintenance X Y
Departmental costs
Allocations: ($)? ($)? ($)? ($)?
Factory Administration: ? ? ?
Maintenance: ? ? ? ?
Total costs after allocations: ($)? ($)? ($)? ($)?

management accounting budgeting 437684

SHOW WORKING

SHOW WORKING

SHOW WORKING

Diskind Corporation manufactures and sells a single product. The company uses units as the measure of activity in its budgets and performance reports. During October, the company budgeted for 7,200 units, but its actual level of activity was 7,150 units. The company has provided the following data concerning the formulas used in its budgeting and its actual results for October:

Data used in budgeting:

Fixed element
per month
Variable
element per tenant day
Revenue %u2014 $34.70
Direct labor $0 $6.70
Direct materials 0 13.20
Manufacturing overhead 42,000 2.20
Selling and administrative expenses 26,000 0.70
Total expenses

$68,000

$22.80

Actual results for October:

Revenue $249,300
Direct labor $48,110
Direct materials $95,680
Manufacturing overhead $46,000
Selling and administrative expenses $30,520

The revenue variance in October would be closest to:

$1,195 U
$540 F
$1,195 F
$540 U

accounting help 437716

Xu Company is considering replacing one of its manufacturing machines. The machine has a book value of $39,000 and a remaining useful life of 4 years, at which time its salvage value will be zero. It has a current market value of $49,000. Variable manufacturing costs are $33,200 per year for this machine. Information on two alternative replacement machines follows.

Alternative A

Alternative B

Cost

$

120,000

$

120,000

Variable manufacturing costs per year

22,200

10,700


Calculate the total change in net income if Alternative A is adopted. (Input all amounts as positive values, except cash outflows and any negative total change in net income which should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Alternative A: Increase or (Decrease) in Net Income

Cost to buy new machine

$

Cash received to trade in old machine

Reduction in variable manufacturing costs


Total change in net income

$




Calculate the total change in net income if Alternative B is adopted. (Input all amounts as positive values, except cash outflows and any negative total change in net income which should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Alternative B: Increase or (Decrease) in Net Income

Cost to buy new machine

$

Cash received to trade in old machine

Reduction in variable manufacturing costs


Total change in net income

$




Should Xu keep or replace its manufacturing machine? If the machine should be replaced, which alternative new machine should Xu purchase?

Alternative B

Keep the manufacturing machine

Alternative A

Home Decor Company’s management is trying to decide whether to eliminate Department 200, which has produced losses or low profits for several years. The company’s 2011 departmental income statement shows the following.

HOME DECOR COMPANY
Departmental Income Statements
For Year Ended December 31, 2011

Dept. 100

Dept. 200

Combined

Sales

$

443,000

$

281,000

$

724,000

Cost of goods sold

270,000

211,000

481,000








Gross profit

173,000

70,000

243,000

Operating expenses

Direct expenses

Advertising

17,500

12,500

30,000

Store supplies used

5,500

5,000

10,500

DepreciationAf?cAc‚¬”Store equipment

4,200

2,600

6,800








Total direct expenses

27,200

20,100

47,300

Allocated expenses

Sales salaries

78,000

46,800

124,800

Rent expense

9,430

4,780

14,210

Bad debts expense

9,800

7,800

17,600

Office salary

18,720

12,480

31,200

Insurance expense

1,900

1,100

3,000

Miscellaneous office expenses

2,600

2,000

4,600








Total allocated expenses

120,450

74,960

195,410








Total expenses

147,650

95,060

242,710








Net income (loss)

$

25,350

$

(25,060)

$

290
















In analyzing whether to eliminate Department 200, management considers the following:

a.

The company has one office worker who earns $600 per week, or $31,200 per year, and four sales clerks who each earn $600 per week, or $31,200 per year.

b.

The full salaries of two salesclerks are charged to Department 100. The full salary of one salesclerk is charged to Department 200. The salary of the fourth clerk, who works half-time in both departments, is divided evenly between the two departments.

c.

Eliminating Department 200 would avoid the sales salaries and the office salary currently allocated to it. However, management prefers another plan. Two salesclerks have indicated that they will be quitting soon. Management believes that their work can be done by the other two clerks if the one office worker works in sales half-time. Eliminating Department 200 will allow this shift of duties. If this change is implemented, half the office worker’s salary would be reported as sales salaries and half would be reported as office salary.

d.

The store building is rented under a long-term lease that cannot be changed. Therefore, Department 100 will use the space and equipment currently used by Department 200.

e.

Closing Department 200 will eliminate its expenses for advertising, bad debts, and store supplies; 71% of the insurance expense allocated to it to cover its merchandise inventory; and 19% of the miscellaneous office expenses presently allocated to it.

Part 1

Required:

1.

Complete the three-column report that lists items and amounts for (a) the company’s total expenses (including cost of goods sold)Af?cAc‚¬”in column 1, (b) the expenses that would be eliminated by closing Department 200Af?cAc‚¬”in column 2, and (c) the expenses that will continueAf?cAc‚¬”in column 3. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

HOME DECOR COMPANY
Analysis of Expenses under Elimination of Department 200

Total
Expenses

Eliminated
Expenses

Continuing
Expenses

$

$

$

Direct expenses

Allocated expenses




Total expenses

$

$

$








check my workeBook Linkrefere

Part 2

2.

Complete the forecasted annual income statement for the company reflecting the elimination of Department 200 assuming that it will not affect Department 100’s sales and gross profit. The statement should reflect the reassignment of the office worker to one-half time as a salesclerk. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

HOME DECOR COMPANY
Forecasted Annual Income Statement
Under Plan to Eliminate Department 200

$


Operating expenses


Total operating expenses


$


can t figure out steps please use my values so i can see steps 437793

Zoe Company Corporation manufactures a variety of liquid lawn fertilizers, including a very popular product called SuperFood. Data about SuperFood and XP, a major ingredient, follow.
Expected operations:

XP is purchased in 55 gallon drums at a cost of $65 per drum. A 2% cash discount is offered by XP’s manufacturer for prompt payment of invoices, and Vanderhaus takes advantage of all discounts offered.

Vanderhaus normally purchases 200 drums of XP at a time, paying shipping fees of $2,660 per shipment. Each gallon of SuperFood requires three quarts of XP; however, because of evaporation and spills, Zoe loses 4% of of all XP that enters production.
Actual operations:

For the period just ended, Zoe purchased 1,500 drums of XP at a total cost of $118,100, which reflects discounts and shipping. There was no beginning inventory, but an end of period inventory revealed that 30 drums were still on hand.

Manufacturing activity output totaled 104,000 gallons of SuperFood. Compute the material price standard

homework 437964

Your firm which has eight partners has been invited by Mr Smith, the managing director and majority shareholder of Battersby Co, to accept appointment as statutory auditor of the company. The present firm of auditors will not be re appointed when its term of expires.

The principal activity of Battersby Co is the manufacture and distribution of healthcare products. Your firm has several companies operating In the healthcare sector in its client portfolio.

Mr Smith has requested that your firm assists with the preparation of the company’s corporation tax computation, and provides consultancy services on and on going basis in connection with his plans to grow to the business. He has also suggested that a partner in your firm joins the board of Battersby Co as a non executive director.

Required

(a)Set out the matters, other than independence and objectivity, to be considered and the procedures to be performed in order to determine whether it is appropriate for your firm to accept appointment as statutory auditor of Battersby Co.

(b)Identify and explain the threats to independence and objectivity which may arise from the provision of the services requested by Mr Smith and state how these threats should be resolved.

Set out the benefits to audit firms and their clients of having audit and non audit services provided by the same firm of accountants

journal entries 438033

On June 30, 2004, Mendenhal Company issued 12% bonds with a par value of $622,100due in 20 years. They were issued at98and were callable at106at any date after June 30, 2012. Because of lower interest rates and a significant change in the company’s credit rating, it was decided to call the entire issue on June 30, 2013, and to issue new bonds. New10% bonds were sold in the amount of $824,800at102; they mature in 20 years. Mendenhal Company uses straight line amortization. Interest payment dates are December 31 and June 30.

(a) Prepare journal entries to record (1) the retirement of the old issue and (2) the sale of the new issue on June 30, 2013.
(b) Prepare the entry required on December 31, 2013, to record the payment of the first 6 months’ interest and the amortization of premium on the bonds.

jk w5 acc206 assignment 280348

See attached document. MUST answer all questions and all parts of each question.

Document Preview:

Chapter Eight Problems Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Chapter 8 Exercise 1: 1. Basic present value calculations Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar: A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at a 12% rate of return. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at a 12% rate of return. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 10% rate of return. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has a 12% rate of return. Chapter 8 Exercise 4: 4. Cash flow calculations and net present value On January 2, 20X1, Bruce Greene invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 20X1 and 20X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 20X3. On December 31, 20X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net present value method and desires a 16% return on investments. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note: Greene is entitled to the 20X3 dividend. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar. Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain. Chapter 8 exercise 5: 5. Straightforward net present value and internal rate of return The City of Bedford is studying a 600 acre site on Route 356 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows: Purchase cost: $450 per acre Site…

Attachments:

you ve just been hired onto abc company as the corporate controller 280354

You’ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities.

As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he’s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more time intensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC’s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide.

In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six to eight page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations.

See attached for excel spreadsheet.

I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.

II. Current company cash flow

a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method.

b. Once you’ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions:

i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company?

ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow?

iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not?

iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why?

III. Product cost: ABC Company believes that it has an additional 5,000 machine hours available in the current facility before it would need to expand. ABC Company uses machine hours to allocate the fixed factory overhead, and units sold to allocate the fixed sales expenses. ABC Company expects that it will take twice as long to produce the expansion product as it currently takes to produce its existing product.

a. What is the product cost for the expansion product?

b. By adding this new expansion product, it helps to absorb the fixed factory and sales expenses. How much cheaper does this expansion make the existing product?

c. Assuming ABC Company wants a 40% gross margin for the new product, what selling price should it set for the expansion product?

d. Assuming the same sales mix of these two products, what are the contribution margins and break even points by product?

IV. Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:

Year 1, $15,000

Year 2, $13,000

Year 3, $10,000

Year 4, $10,000

Year 5, $6,000

ABC Company uses the net present value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.

a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment ignore income taxes and depreciation?

b. Assuming a 5 year straight line depreciation, how will this impact the factory’s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?

c. Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not?

V. Conclusion:

a. What are the major risk factors that you see in this project?

b. As the controller and a management accountant, what is your responsibility to this project?

c. What do you recommend the CEO do?

Writing the Paper

1. Must be six to eight double spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.

4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.

5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.

6. Must document all sources in APA style

7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style

the webster store shows the following information relating to on 280382

The Webster Store shows the following information relating to one of its products.

Inventory, January 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 units @ $17.50

Sales, January 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 units

Purchases, January 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 units @ $18.00

Sales, January 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 units

Purchases, January 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,200 units @ $19.50

Sales, January 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,000 units

What are the values of ending inventory under a periodic inventory system assuming a

(1) FIFO,

(2) LIFO

(3) Average cost flow? (Round unit costs to three decimal places.)

accounting 437440

Vernon company has been offered a 7 year contract to supply a part for the military. After careful study, the company has developed the following estimated data relating to the contract:

Cost of equipment needed $300,000

Working capital needed $50,000

Annual cash receipts from the delivery of parts,

Less cash operating costs $70,000

Salvage value of equipment at termination of the contract $5,000

It is not expected that the contract would be extended beyond the initial contract period. The company’s discount rate is 10%.

Required:

Use the net present value method to determine if the contract should be accepted. Round all computations to the nearest dollar. (Please show all your works!)

tax payer liability 437462

Wade paid $7,000 for an automobile that needed substantial repairs. He worked nights and weekends to restore the car and spent $2,400 on parts for it. He knows he can sell the car for $13,000. His daughter’s college tuition is due in a few days. Wade wonders if it matters, after taxes, whether he sells the car and pays the tuition or whether he gives the car to his daughter and she sells it for $13,000 and pays her tuition. What should Wade do?

Select “Yes” or “No” whichever is applicable.

a. Wade should give the car to his daughter to sell. She will not have to pay taxes on the subsequent sale of the car, since it was acquired as a gift.

b. Wade should give the car to his daughter to sell because, although she would have to pay taxes on the sale of the car, she is likely in a lower tax bracket, resulting in tax savings for the family unit.

c. Wade should sell the car. If Wade gives his daughter the car, he will have to pay gift tax as well as income tax, since his daughter is considered a related party.

d. Wade should sell the car, since his taxable gain will be less due to the time he spent restoring the car than if his daughter sells the car.

help 437483

Waldrop Corporation’s comparative balance sheet appears below:
Ending
Balance
Beginning Balance
Asset:
Current assets:
Cash and cash equivalents $50,300 $35,300
Accounts receivable 15,600 18,800
Inventory

70,600

73,800

Total current assets

136,500

127,900

Property, plant and equipment 350,000 326,000
Less accumulated depreciation

219,000

191,000

Net property, plant, and equipment

131,000

135,000

Total assets

$267,500

$262,900

Liabilities and stockholders’ equity:
Current liabilities:
Accounts payable $10,800 $9,600
Accrued liabilities 60,900 56,600
Income taxes payable

61,600

62,800

Total current liabilities 133,300 129,000
Bonds payable

80,600

82,900

Total liabilities

213,900

211,900

Stockholders’ equity:
Common stock 38,500 40,500
Retained earnings

15,100

10,500

Total stockholders’ equity

53,600

51,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$267,500

$262,900

The company did not dispose of any property, plant, and equipment during the year. Its net income for the year was $4,600. The net cash provided by operating activities is:

$36,900
$45,700
$43,300
$15,300

help 437504

Warren Plastic, LLC complete these transactions in year 1 and year 2. Give general journal entries for them.
date yr
2/2 1 Purchased equipment for 55,000, signed a 4 month note, 7.5%.
2/28 1 Recorded the month’s sales of 175,000, one sixth cash, five sixth’s credit.
Sales tax rate is 4.6%
3/20 1 Sent Feb. sales tax to the state.
6/30 1 Borrowed $153,000 on a long term note, 8.75% note payable
Annual interest is to be paid each year on 6 30, starting yr. 2.
6/2 1 paid off the note dated 2 02 yr 1
10/31 1 bought inventory at a cost of 22,400. Signed a 5 month 4.5% note.
12/31 1 Accrued warranty expense, estimated at 1.5% of 550,000 of sales
12/31 1 Accrued Interest on ALL outstanding notes.
3/31 2 Paid off the inventory note at maturity, including interest.
6/30 2 Paid the annual interest on the 153,000 note.

story company s inventory records for the month of november reve 280159

Story Company’s inventory records for the month of November reveal the following:

Inventory, November 1 300 units @ $27.00

November 4, purchase 375 units @ $26.50

November 7, sale450 units @ $63.00

November 13, purchase 330 units @ $26.00

November 18, purchase 225 units @ $25.40

November 22, sale 570 units @ $63.75

November 24, purchase 300 units @ $25.00

November 28, sale 165 units @ $64.50

Selling and administrative expenses for the month were $16,200. Depreciation expense was $6,000. Story’s tax rate is 35%.

Required

1. Calculate the cost of goods sold and ending inventory under each of the following three methods assuming a periodic inventory system:

(a) FIFO,

(b) LIFO, and

(c) Weighted average.

2. Calculate the gross profit and net income under each costing assumption.

3. Under which costing method will Story pay the least taxes? Explain your answer.

stout company has gross sales of 250 of cost of 280160

Stout Company has gross sales of 250% of cost of goods sold. It has also provided the following information for the calendar year 2012:

Inventory balance, January 1, 2012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 22,000

Total cost of goods available for sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,000

Sales returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,200

Purchase returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,000

Freight in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

Sales (net of returns) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,800

Operating expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,500

Required:

Using the available information, compute the following. (Ignore income taxes.)

1. Gross sales for 2012

2. Net purchases and gross purchases for 2012

3. Cost of goods sold for 2012

4. Inventory balance at December 31, 2012

5. Gross margin for 2012

6. Net income for 2012

streuling inc is preparing its 2011 year end financial statemen 280161

Streuling Inc. is preparing its 2011 year end financial statements. Prior to any adjustments, inventory is valued at $76,050. The following information has been found relating to certain inventory transactions:

(a) Goods valued at $11,000 are on consignment with a customer. These goods are not included in the $76,050 inventory figure.

(b) Goods costing $2,700 were received from a vendor on January 5, 2012. The related invoice was received and recorded on January 12, 2012. The goods were shipped on December 31, 2011, terms FOB shipping point.

(c) Goods costing $8,500 were shipped on December 31, 2011, and were delivered to the customer on January 2, 2012. The terms of the invoice were FOB shipping point. The goods were included in ending inventory for 2011 even though the sale was recorded in 2011.

(d) A $3,500 shipment of goods to a customer on December 31, terms FOB destination, was not included in the year end inventory. The goods cost $2,600 and were delivered to the customer on January 8, 2012. The sale was properly recorded in 2012.

(e) An invoice for goods costing $3,500 was received and recorded as a purchase on December 31, 2011. The related goods, shipped FOB destination, were received on January 2, 2012, and thus were not included in the physical inventory.

(f) Goods valued at $6,500 are on consignment from a vendor. These goods are not included in the year end inventory figure.

(g) A $10,500 shipment of goods to a customer on December 30, 2011, terms FOB destination, was recorded as a sale in 2011. The goods, costing $8,200 and delivered to the customer on January 6, 2012, were not included in 2011 ending inventory.

Instructions:

1. Determine the appropriate accounting treatment for each of the preceding items. Justify your answers.

2. Compute the proper inventory amount to be reported on Streuling Inc.’s balance sheet for the year ended December 31, 2011.

3. By how much would net income have been misstated if no adjustments were made for the above transactions? Ignore income taxes.

the beginning inventory at keats office supplies and data 280202

The beginning inventory at Keats Office Supplies and data on purchases and sales for a three month period are as follows:



Instructions

1. Based the inventory, purchases, and cost of merchandise sold data in a perpetual inventory record similar to the one illustrated in Exhibit 3, using the first in, first out method.

2. Determine the total sales and the total cost of merchandise sold for the period. Journalize the entries in the sales and cost of merchandise sold accounts. Assume that all sales were on account.

3. Determine the gross profit from sales for the period.

4. Determine the ending inventory cost.

5. Based upon the preceding data, would you expect the inventory using the last in, first out method to be higher orlower?

leeann and pat have been discussing the introduction of an improved gizmo 280233

Midwest Fan, Inc.

Internal Memorandum

To: You

From: Sandy Walker

Date: March 7, 2013

Re: Improved product offering

LeeAnn and Pat have been discussing the introduction of an improved Gizmo to replace our current model. LeeAnn wants to keep the selling price the same to avoid losing any customers. Pat has projected the costs to produce the improved Gizmo (see below). The higher costs are due to better materials used in the manufacturing process of the improved Gizmo and the higher labor time per unit needed to produce the improved Gizmo.

Current Gizmo Improved Gizmo

Selling price

$75.00

$75.00

Manufacturing costs:

Direct materials 21.00 $25.00

Direct Labor 3.75 5.00

Fixed Manufacturing overhead 10.63 14.17

Total manufacturing costs 35.38 44.17

Profit per unit $39.62 $30.83

Total fixed manufacturing overhead $850,000

Total fixed operating expenses $800,000

I will be meeting to discuss this with LeeAnn and Pat. I need your assistance to prepare for this meeting. Please provide me with the answers to the following questions:

? What level of sales do we need in units and dollars to breakeven on the current Gizmo? The improved Gizmo?

? How much would we have to raise the selling price to maintain our current operating income? We sell 80,000 Gizmos and expect volume of the improved Gizmos would be the same.

? Because demand is relatively inelastic, does LeeAnn’s recommendation to keep the price the same make sense? Which pricing strategy would you recommend and why?

Midwest Fan, Inc.

Internal Memorandum

To: You

From: LeeAnn Brown, Marketing Manager

Date: March 8, 2013

Re: New product offering

The marketing and production teams will be meeting to discuss the introduction of a new product to our product line next year. It’s called the Thermogizmo. Our current Gizmo is a high volume mature product with an established customer base. Customers tend to process their repeat orders through our online ordering system resulting in a relatively low cost to serve. We have been considering improving the current model but a better strategy may be to introduce the Thermogizmo, a specialty product customized to each customer’s specific need. Here is the most recent data related to our current Gizmo and the new Thermogizmo.

Current Gizmo

Thermogizmo

Selling price $75.00 $90.00

Manufacturing costs:

Direct materials 21.00 28.00

Direct labor 3.75 7.50

Fixed manufacturing overhead 10.63 21.25

Total manufacturing costs 35.38 56.75

Profit per unit $39.62 $33.25

Annual production/sales (units) 50,000 15,000

Direct labor hours per unit .25 .50

Average direct labor hour rate $15.00 $15.00

Manufacturing overhead budget $850,000

Fixed operating expenses $800,000

Based on the above projected product mix for next year, Kelly put together the following operating income projection.

Gizmo Thermogizmo Total

Sales $3,750,000 $1,350,000 $5,100,000

Variable costs 1,237,500 532,500 1,770,000

Contribution margin $2,512,500 $817,500 $3,330,000

Fixed costs 1,650,000

Operating income $1,680,000

We hope you can provide us with your input to our strategy meeting. Here are our questions:

? What level of sales do we need to breakeven assuming my product mix?

? We’ve discussed the possibility of reallocating some of our marketing dollars from the Gizmo to the Thermogizmo to better promote this higher margin product. With this plan, we project the product mix will change Gizmo sales of 30,000 units and Thermogizmo sales of 25,000 units. What impact would this have on our operating income and breakeven point in sales dollars?

? What do you recommend we do?

Attachments:

the following characteristics may be related to either periodic 280245

The following characteristics may be related to either periodic inventory or perpetual inventory systems or both.

a. Purchases of inventory are journalized to an asset account at the time of purchase.

b. Purchases of inventory are journalized to an expense account at the time of purchase.

c. Inventory records are constantly updated.

d. Sales made require a second entry to be journalized to record cost of goods sold.

e. Bar code scanners that record sales transactions are most often associated with this inventory system.

f. A physical count of goods on hand at year end is required.

Requirement

1. Identify each characteristic as one of the following:

a. Periodic inventory

b. Perpetual inventory

c. Both periodic and perpetual inventory

d. Neither periodic nor perpetual inventory

the following data were extracted from the accounting records of 280249

The following data were extracted from the accounting records of Meniscus Company for the year ended June 30, 2008:

Merchandise inventory, July 1, 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 183,250

Merchandise inventory, June 30, 2008 . . . . . . . . . . 200,100

Purchases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,279,600

Purchases returns and allowances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,200

Purchases discounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,500

Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,800,000

Transportation in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,250

a. Prepare the cost of merchandise sold section of the income statement for the year ended June 30, 2008, using the periodic inventory system.

b. Determine the gross profit to be reported on the income statement for the year ended June 30, 2008.

the following transactions occurred between belvidere pharmaceut 280273

The following transactions occurred between Belvidere Pharmaceuticals and D & S, the pharmacy chain, during July of the current year:

Jul 6 D & S purchased $12,000 of merchandise from Belvidere on credit terms of 3/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. Separately, D & S paid a $200 bill for freight in. These goods cost Belvidere $3,600.

10 D & S returned $3,000 of the merchandise purchased on July 6. Belvidere accounted for the sales return and placed the goods back in inventory (Belvidere’s cost, $1,200).

15 D & S paid $6,000 of the invoice amount owed to Belvidere for the July 6 purchase, less the discount.

27 D & S paid the remaining amount owed to Belvidere for the July 6 purchase.

Requirements

1. Journalize these transactions on the books of D & S.

2. Journalize these transactions on the books of Belvidere Pharmaceuticals.

the inventory accounting records for lee enterprises contained t 280292

The inventory accounting records for Lee Enterprises contained the following data:

Beginning inventory …………………… 400 units at $12 each

Purchase 1, Feb. 26 …………………….2,300 units at $14 each

Sale, March 9 …………………………..2,500 units at $27 each

Purchase 2, June 14 …………………….2,200 units at $15 each

Sale, Sept. 22 …………………………..2,100 units at $29 each

Required:

1. Calculate the cost of ending inventory and the cost of goods sold using the FIFO, LIFO, and average cost methods. (Use four decimal places for per unit calculations and round all other numbers to the nearest dollar.)

2. Compare the ending inventory and cost of goods sold computed under all three methods. What can you conclude about the effects of the inventory costing methods on the balance sheet and the income statement?

the jarmen cabinet company sold 2 200 cabinets during 2010 at 280301

The Jarmen Cabinet Company sold 2,200 cabinets during 2010 at $80 per cabinet. Its beginning inventory on January 1 was 130 cabinets at $28. Purchases made during the year were as follows:

February ……………………..225 cabinets @ $31.00

April …………………………350 cabinets @ $32.50

June ………………………….700 cabinets @ $35.00

August ……………………….300 cabinets @ $33.00

October ………………………400 cabinets @ $34.00

November ……………………250 cabinets @ $36.00

The company’s selling and administrative expenses for the year were $50,500. The company uses the periodic inventory system.

Required

1. Prepare a schedule to compute the cost of goods available for sale.

2. Compute income before income taxes under each of the following inventory cost flow assumption:

(a) The average cost method,

(b) The FIFO method, and

(c) The LIFO method.

3. Compute inventory turnover and days inventory on hand under each of the inventory cost flow assumptions in requirement 2. What conclusion can you draw from this comparison?

the management of howland is reevaluating the appropriateness of 280323

The management of Howland is reevaluating the appropriateness of using its present inventory cost flow method, which is average cost. The company requests your help in determining the results of operations for 2012 if either the FIFO or the LIFO method had been used. For 2012, the accounting records show these data:

?



Purchases were made quarterly as follows.

?

Operating expenses were $147,000, and the company’s income tax rate is 32%.

Instructions

(a) Prepare comparative condensed income statements for 2012 under FIFO and LIFO.

(Show computations of ending inventory.)

(b) Answer the following questions for management in business letter form.

(1) Which cost flow method (FIFO or LIFO) produces the inventory amount that most closely approximates the amount that would have to be paid to replace the inventory? Why?

(2) Which cost flow method (FIFO or LIFO) produces the net income amount that is a more likely indicator of next period’s net income? Why?

(3) Which cost flow method (FIFO or LIFO) is more likely to approximate the actual physical flow of goods? Why?

(4) How much more cash will be available for management under LIFO than under FIFO? Why?

(5) Will gross profit under the average cost method be higher or lower than FIFO? Than LIFO?

first problem requires journal entries on the books of the parent company 280337

First problem requires journal entries on the books of the parent company. Create an extended D&D schedule, prepare cost method entries for year 2012 and 2013. Prepare consolidated balance sheet and income statement work paper. Second problem requires balance sheet & income statement workpaper and prepare a formal income statement and balance sheet for the year 2014

Document Preview:

PROBLEM 1 PROBLEM 2

Attachments:

the marketing department at cleveland furniture mfg has an idea 280340

The marketing department at Cleveland Furniture Mfg. has an idea for a new product that is expected to have a 6 year life cycle. After conducting market research, the company found that the product could sell for $800 per unit in the first 4 years of life and for $650 per unit for the last 2 years. Unit sales are expected to be as follows:

Year 1 ……………….4,000

Year 2 ……………….3,600

Year 3 ……………….4,700

Year 4 ……………….5,000

Year 5 ……………….1,500

Year 6 ……………….1,000

Per unit variable selling costs are estimated at $140 throughout the product’s life; total fixed selling and administrative costs over the 6 years are expected to be $3,700,000.

Cleveland Furniture Mfg. desires a profit margin of 15 percent of selling price per unit.

a. Compute the life cycle target cost to manufacture the product. (Round to the nearest cent.)

b. If the company expects the product to cost $430 to manufacture in the first year, what is the upper bound for manufacturing cost in the following five years? (Round to the nearest cent.)

c. Refer to the original information. Assume that Cleveland Furniture Mfg. engineers indicate that the expected manufacturing cost per unit is $340. What actions might the company take to reduce this cost?

statement 436932

Superior Carpet Cleaning provided $76,000 of services during 2013 its first year of operations. all customers paid for the services with major credit cards. Superior submitted the credit card receipts to the credit card company immediately. The credit card company paid superior cash in the amount of face value less a 3 percent service charge.

What is the amount of total assets at the end of the accounting period

What is the amount of revenue reported on the income statement

What is the amount of cash flow from operating activities reported on the statement of cash flows?

Why would superior carpet cleaning accept credit cards instead of providing credit directly to its customers? In other words, why would superior be willing to pay 3 percent of sales to have the credit card company handle it sales on account?

superior seats corporation case plant closing decision 436937

Superior Seats Corporation Case

(Plant Closing Decision)

Superior Seats Corporation manufactures seats for automobiles, vans and trucks, and various recreational vehicles. The company has a number of plants around the world, including the Logger Plant (located in La Crosse, Wisconsin) that makes seat covers.

Jimmy Jones is the plant manager of the Logger Plant but also serves as the mid west regional production manager for the company. His budget as the mid west regional manager is charged to the Logger Plant.

Jones just heard that Superior Seats received a bid from an outside vendor to supply the equivalent of the entire annual output of the Logger Plant for $35 million. Jones was astonished at the extremely low outside bid because the budget for the Logger Plant’s operating costs for the upcoming year is set at $52 million. If this bid is accepted, the Logger Plant will be closed.

The budget for the Logger Plant’s operating costs for the coming year is presented below. Additional facts regarding plant operations are as follows:

a.)

Due to Logger Plant’s commitment to use high quality fabrics in all its products, the purchasing department was instructed to place blanket purchase orders with major suppliers to ensure the receipt of sufficient materials for the coming year. If these orders were canceled as a consequence of the plant closing, termination charges would amount to 20% of the cost of direct materials.

b.)

Approximately 400 plant employees will lose their jobs if the plant is closed. This includes all of the direct laborers and supervisors as well as the plumbers, electricians, and other skilled workers classified as indirect plant workers. Some would be able to find new jobs while many others would have difficulty. All employees would have difficulty matching Logger Plant’s base pay of $18.80 per hour which is the highest in the area. A clause in Logger Plant’s contract with the union may help some employees; the company must provide employment assistance to its former employees for 12 months after a plant closing. The estimated cost to administer this service would be $1.5 million for the year.

c.)

Some employees would probably choose early retirement because Superior Seats Corporation has an excellent pension plan. In fact, $3 million of the annual pension expense would continue whether the Logger Plant is open or not.

d.)

Jimmy Jones and his staff would not be affected by the closing of the Logger Plant, as they would still be responsible for administering three other area plants.

e.)

If the Logger Plant were closed, the company would realize about $3.2 million salvage value for the equipment and building. If the plant remains open, there are no plans to make any significant investments in new equipment or buildings. The old equipment is adequate and should last into the near future.

LOGGER PLANT

Annual Budget for Operating Costs

Materials $14,000,000

Labor:

Direct $13,100,000

Supervision 900,000

Indirect plant 4,000,000 18,000,000

Overhead:

Depreciation equipment 3,200,000

Depreciation building 7,000,000

Pension expense 5,000,000

Plant manager and staff 800,000

Corporate expenses* 4,000,000 20,000,000

Total budget costs $52,000,000

*Fixed corporate expenses allocated to plants and other operation units based on total budgeted wage and salary costs.

REQUIRED:

1.)

Superior Seats Corporation management desires to prepare a financial analysis that will be used in deciding whether or not to close the Logger Plant. Management has asked you to identify:

a.)

The recurring annual budgeted costs that are relevant to the decision regarding closing the plant (show the dollar amounts).

b.)

The recurring annual budgeted costs that are NOT relevant to the decision regarding closing the plant, and explain why they are NOT relevant (again show the dollar amounts).

c.)

Any nonrecurring costs that would arise due to the closing of the plant, and explain how they would affect the decision (again show any dollar amounts).

2.)

Looking at the data you have prepared in (1), should the plant be closed? Show computations, and explain your answer.

3.)

Identify any revenues or costs not specifically mentioned in the problem that Superior Seats Corporation should consider before making a decision.

management accounting 436969

Sweater Division manufactures sweaters. The buttons used in production are purchased from an outside supplier at a cost of $4.50 per sweater. The buttons can also be purchased in house from Supply Division for $4.00 per sweater. The cost data for the buttons produced by Supply Division are as follows:

Direct material $1.30
Direct labor 0.90
Variable indirect production 0.35
Fixed indirect production 0.30
Variable selling expenses 0.50
Fixed selling expenses 0.45

Variable selling expenses are not incurred on inside transfers. Assume Supply Division has excess capacity.

Required:
A) What is the minimum transfer price that Supply Division should charge Sweater Division for the transferred buttons?
B) What is the maximum transfer price that Sweater Division should pay Supply Division for the transferred buttons?

managerial accounting 436995

Swisher, Incorporated reports the following annual cost data for its single product.

This product is normally sold for $48 per unit. If Swisher increases its production to 50,000 units, while sales remain at the current 30,000 unit level, by how much would the company’s gross margin increase or decrease under variable costing

$60,000 increase.
$90,000 increase.
There is no change in gross margin.
$90,000 decrease.

$60,000 decrease

Sea Company reports the following information regarding its production cost.

Units Produced 42,000 Units

Direct Labor $35 per unit

Direct materials $28 per unit

Variable Overhead $17 per unit

Fixed overhead $105,000 in total

Compute production cost per unit under variable costing.

$82.50
$28.00
$35.00
$63.00
$80.00

managerial accounting show working 437006

Tajiri Corporation uses customers served as its measure of activity. The following report compares the planning budget to the actual operating results for the month of May:

Tajiri Corporation
Comparison of Planning Budget to Actual Results
For the Month Ended May 31
Planning
Budget
Actual
Results
Variances
Customers served 45,000 46,000
Revenue (3.60q) $ 162,000 $ 165,300 $ 3,300 F







Expenses:
Wages and salaries ($24,500 + $1.35q) 85,250 86,600 1,350 U
Supplies ($0.75q) 33,750 31,950 1,800 F
Insurance ($6,400) 6,400 6,400 0
Miscellaneous ($5,400 + $.44q) 25,200 23,400 1,800 F







Total expense 150,600 148,350 2,250 F







Net operating income $ 11,400 $ 16,950 $ 5,550 F















Required:
1.

Complete the company’s flexible budget performance report for May. Label each variance as favorable (F) or unfavorable (U). (Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Tajiri Corporation
Flexible Budget Performance Report Part 1 & 2
For the Month Ended May 31
Planning Budget Activity Variances Flexible Budget Revenue and Spending Variances Actual Results
Customers served 45,000 46,000
Revenue $ 162,000 $ $ $ $ 165,300









Expenses:
Wages and salaries 85,250 86,600
Supplies 33,750 31,950
Insurance 6,400 6,400
Miscellaneous 25,200 23,400









Total expense 150,600 148,350









Net operating income $ 11,400 $ $ $ $ 16,950












advanced financial accounting 260 shareholders equity quiz questions 437013

ADVANCED FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING 260 SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY QUIZ QUESTIONS 1. What is a share? (1 mark) 2. Identify two advantages of a private placement of shares as compared with a public issue. (1 mark) 3. The shareholders of Quinninup Ltd hold 25 000 A class ordinary shares, fully paid at $4.50 each. On 17 April 2012, the company directors voted to make a 1 for 5 rights offer to these shareholders. The additional shares were offered at $1.75 each, payable in full one month after acceptance. The offer closed on 31 May 2012 with 90% of the shareholders accepting.

Document Preview:

ADVANCED FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING 260 SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY QUIZ QUESTIONS 1. What is a share? (1 mark) 2. Identify two advantages of a private placement of shares as compared with a public issue. (1 mark) 3. The shareholders of Quinninup Ltd hold 25 000 A class ordinary shares, fully paid at $4.50 each. On 17 April 2012, the company directors voted to make a 1 for 5 rights offer to these shareholders. The additional shares were offered at $1.75 each, payable in full one month after acceptance. The offer closed on 31 May 2012 with 90% of the shareholders accepting. Shares were duly allotted on that date and all monies were received when due. Required Prepare journal entries to record these events, show all workings. (2 marks) 4. Forrest Ltd has issued 10 000 5% cumulative preference shares. Explain the meaning of the term “cumulative”. (1 mark) 5. The share capital of Murdoch Ltd consists of: 52 000 Ordinary A shares @ $2.50, fully paid $130 000 15 000 Ordinary B shares @ $1.50, paid to 80c 11 000 On 28 June 2012, the directors declared a 7c per share final dividend. Shareholder approval is not required to pay dividends. Required Prepare the journal entries to record the dividend, show all workings. (2 marks) 6. Eyre Ltd’s share capital consists of 65 000 ordinary shares of $2.30 each, fully paid. On 17 February 2012 the directors offered these shareholders the right to acquire one new share for each five held at a price of $2.52 each, payable on acceptance. The offer closed on 17 March 2012 by which date acceptances had been received from the holders of 48 000 shares. The new shares were allotted on that day. Required Prepare journal entries to record the above events. Show all workings (2 marks)7. Esperance Ltd issued a prospectus offering 100 000 ordinary shares at $3.00 each, payable in full on application. The issue was underwritten by Staysure Insurance Co. for a commission fee…

Attachments:

target costing 437016

Target costing: manufacturer

suppose you have just started a business to manufacture your latest invention, the Glammaglob gadget. you estimate that after a few tears on the market these gadgets will sell for about $250. this estimate takes account of the introduction of similar devices by your compeitors. furthermore, let’s say you want to make a profit of $50 on each gadget sold.

required:

1. what is the target cost for the Glammaglob gadget?

2. what is the target profit?

3. what is the target price?

4. suppose your engineers and management accountants conclude that your design of the Glammaglob gadget will result in a unit cost of $230. how can you use the concept of the target costing to help achieve your object?

comprehensive problem 1 the accounting cycle 437078

Thanks so much for the quick reponses. Please break them down in the following and I will put answer in a chart when answer rae broken down.

1. (general journal from April 1 5 on page 1) (April 7 18 on page 2, April 21 29 and the first two entries for April 30 on page 3) (and the remaining entires for April 30 on page 4.)

2. general ledger.

3. trial balance on a work sheet

4. complete the work sheet.

5. prepare the income statement.

6. prepare the statement of owner’s equity.

7. prepare the balance sheet.

8. journalize the adjusting entries (page5)

9.adjusting entries to the general ledger.

10. journalize the closing entries (pages 5 and 6).

11. closing entries to the general ledger

12. cost closing trail balance.

accounting 437111

The Tolar Company has 1,000 obsolete desk calculators that are carried in inventory at a total cost of $67,600. If these calculators are upgraded at a total cost of $25,600, they can be sold for a total of $76,200. As an alternative, the calculators can be sold in their present condition for $28,600.

What is the net advantage or disadvantage to the company from upgrading the calculators?

rev: 02 12 201

$22,000 disadvantage
$50,600 advantage
$22,000 advantage

Assume that Tolar decides to upgrade the calculators. At what selling price per unit would the company be as well off as if it just sold the calculators in their present condition?

rev: 02 12 2011

$54.20
$67.60
$31.20
$8.60
$45,000 disadvantage

activity based costing managerial accounting 437128

Topline Surf Boards manufactures a single product. The standard cost of one unit of this product is as follows:

Direct materials: 5 feet at $1.00 per foot $ 5.00
Direct labor: 1 hour at $5.30 per hour 5.30
Variable manufacturing overhead: 1 hour at $2.80 per hour 2.80


Total standard variable cost per unit $ 13.10





During October, 5,800 units were produced. Selected data relating to the month’s production follow:

Material purchased: 64,000 feet at $0.95 per foot $ 60,800
Material used in production: 38,200 feet Af?cAc‚¬”
Direct labor: ? hours at $ ? per hour $ 26,460
Variable manufacturing overhead cost incurred $ 20,430
Variable manufacturing overhead efficiency variance $ 1,400 U

There was no beginning inventory of raw materials. The variable manufacturing overhead rate is based on direct labor hours.

Required:
1.

For direct materials:

a.

Compute the price and quantity variances for October. (Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Material price variance $ (Click to select)FNoneU
Material quantity variance $ (Click to select)FNoneU

b.

Prepare journal entries to record activity for October. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

General Journal Debit Credit
(Click to select)Work in processLabor efficiency varianceRaw materialsAccounts payableMaterials quantity varianceWages PayableLabor rate varianceMaterials price variance
(Click to select)Labor efficiency varianceWages PayableRaw materialsAccounts payableLabor rate varianceMaterials price varianceMaterials quantity varianceWork in process
(Click to select)Labor rate varianceMaterials quantity varianceWages PayableAccounts payableRaw materialsWork in processMaterials price varianceLabor efficiency variance
(Click to select)Work in processRaw materialsWages PayableAccounts payableLabor efficiency varianceMaterials quantity varianceLabor rate varianceMaterials price variance
(Click to select)Materials quantity varianceRaw materialsWages PayableLabor rate varianceLabor efficiency varianceMaterials price varianceAccounts payableWork in process
(Click to select)Work in processMaterials quantity varianceLabor rate varianceRaw materialsMaterials price varianceLabor efficiency varianceAccounts payableWages Payable

2.

For direct labor:

a.

Compute the rate and efficiency variances for October. (Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Labor rate variance $ (Click to select)FUNone
Labor efficiency variance $ (Click to select)FUNone

b.

Prepare a journal entry to record labor activity for October. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

General Journal Debit Credit
(Click to select)Raw materialsWages payableLabor rate varianceMaterials quantity varianceLabor efficiency varianceMaterials price varianceAccounts payableWork in process
(Click to select)Accounts payableRaw materialsLabor rate varianceWork in processMaterials price varianceLabor efficiency varianceWages payableMaterials quantity variance
(Click to select)Labor rate varianceWages PayableAccounts payableLabor efficiency varianceMaterials quantity varianceRaw materialsWork in processMaterials price variance
(Click to select)Labor rate varianceLabor efficiency varianceMaterials quantity varianceRaw materialsMaterials price varianceWork in processAccounts payableWages Payable

3.

For variable manufacturing overhead:

a.

For variable manufacturing overhead. (Input the amount as a positive value. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Variable overhead spending variance $ (Click to select)FUNone

financial accounting acg 2021 437132

What is total for the debits on the Trial Balance for Shiver Ice House?

Common Stock $124,500
Cash $118,440
Supplies $2,400
Prepaid Rent $4,100
Revenue $20,900
Retained Earnings $30,900
Accounts Payable $25,900
Accounts Receivable $24,250
Office Equipment $25,100
Unearned Revenue $5,961
Utilities Expense $431
Shaving Equipment $33,440
$201,230
$208,161
$214,122
$301,240
$115,082

accounting please only answer only if you know how to do it on excel thank you 437147

Toy Box Inc. is contemplating expanding their sales of their children%u2019s toys. The have an opportunity to stock and sell the X toy that has been a big hit with children everywhere. They need to order the X toys from the manufacturer in a minimum order of 100 at a cost of $12 each. They could resell the X toy in their store for $22 each.

Due to anticipated demand, Toy Box Inc. will need to hire an additional part time cashier at $600 a month which will be classified as a fixed cost attributable to the X toy. Also, they have offered a $1 sales commission per toy to their floor sales representative. They will also include a package of trading cards with every purchase of an X toy, which will cost them an additional $2 each.

Required:

  1. To make the project worthwhile, Toy Box Inc. would require a $5,000 profit per month. What level of sales in units and in dollars would be required to reach this target profit? Show all computations.
  2. Assume that the venture is undertaken and an order is placed for 100 X toys. What would be Toy Box%u2019s break even point in units and in sales dollars? Show computations and explain the reasoning behind your answer. You can ignore the fixed cost of $600 for this part.

    find net present value internal rate of return etc accounting 437184

    Tranter, Inc., is considering a project that would have a seven year life and would require a $1,260,000 investment in equipment. At the end of seven years, the project would terminate and the equipment would have no salvage value. The project would provide net operating income each year as follows: (Ignore income taxes.)

    Sales $ 2,000,000
    Variable expenses 1,350,000


    Contribution margin 650,000
    Fixed expenses:
    Fixed out of pocket cash expenses $ 300,000
    Depreciation 130,000 430,000




    Net operating income $ 220,000





    Click here to view Exhibit 13B 2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.

    All of the above items, except for depreciation, represent cash flows. The company’s required rate of return is 11%.

    Required:
    a.

    Compute the project’s net present value. (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, intermediate and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Net present value $

    b.

    Compute the project’s internal rate of return. (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places and final answer to the closest interest rate. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    Internal rate of return %

    c. Compute the project’s payback period. (Round your answer to 1 decimal place.)

    Payback period years

    d. Compute the project’s simple rate of return. (Round your final answer to the closest interest rate. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    Simple rate of return %

    accounting help 437196

    Tranter, Inc., is considering a project that would have a five year life and would require a $750,000 investment in equipment. At the end of five years, the project would terminate and the equipment would have no salvage value. The project would provide net operating income each year as follows: (Ignore income taxes.)

    Sales $ 1,900,000
    Variable expenses 1,300,000


    Contribution margin 600,000
    Fixed expenses:
    Fixed out of pocket cash expenses $ 350,000
    Depreciation 140,000 490,000




    Net operating income $ 110,000





    Click here to view Exhibit 13B 2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.

    All of the above items, except for depreciation, represent cash flows. The company’s required rate of return is 7%.

    Required:
    a.

    Compute the project’s net present value.

    b. Compute the project’s internal rate of return.

    c. Compute the project’s payback period.

    d. Compute the project’s simple rate of return.

    accounting question with different variances please help 437232

    Tuna Company set the following standard unit costs for it’s single product

    Direct Materials (25lbs @ $4 per lb) $100

    Direct Labor (6hrs@ $8 per hour) $48

    Factory Overhead variable(6hrs@$5perhour) $30.00

    Factory Overhead Fixed(6hrs@$7perhour) 42.00

    Total Standard Cost $220.00

    The predetermined overhead rate is based on a planned operating volume of 80% of the productive capacity of 60,000 units per quarter. The following flexible budget information is available:

    Production in units 42,000@70%/48,000@80%/54,000@90%

    Standard Direct labor hours 252000@70%/288000@80%/324000@90%

    Budgeted Overhead:

    Fixed Factory Overhead $2016000@70%/$2016000@80%/$2016000@90%

    Variable Factory Overhead $1260@70%/ $1440000@80%/ $1620000@90%

    During the current quarter the company operated at 70% of capacity and produced 42,000 units of product; actual direct labor totaled 250,000 hours. Units produced were assigned the following standard costs:

    Direct materials (1050000lbs @$4 per lb $4200000

    Direct Labor(252000hrs @$8 per hour) $2016000

    Factory Overhead(252000hrs@$12perhr) $3024000

    Total Standard Cost $9240000

    Actual Costs incurred during the current quarter follow:

    Direct Materials(1000000lbs @ $4.25) $4250000

    Direct Labor(250000hrs @ $7.75per hr) 1937500

    Fixed Factory Overhead Costs $1960000

    Variable Factory Overhead Costs $1200000

    Total Actual Costs $9347500

    1. Compute the direct materials cost variance, including it’s price and quantity variances

    Direct Materials Cost Variance $?????

    Price Variance $????

    Quantity Variance $????

    2.Compute the direct labor variance, including it’s rate and efficiency variances:

    Direct Labor Cost Variance $???

    Rate Variance $????

    Efficiency Variance $????

    3. Compute the overhead controllable and volume variances

    Controllable Variance $??

    Fixed Overhead Volume Variance $???

    4. Compute the direct Materials cost variance including it’s price and quantity variances

    Direct materials cost variance $?????

    Price Variance $????

    Quantity Variance $????

    5. Compute the direct labor Variance including it’s rate and efficiency variances:

    Direct labor cost variance $???

    Rate Variance $????

    Efficiency Variance $???

    6. Compute the overhead controllable and volume variances

    Controllable Variance $???

    Fixed overhead volume variance $????

    accounting help please 437268

    Type your question here

    The western company is considering the addition of a new product to its current product lines. The expected cost and revenue data for the new product are as follows:

    Expected annual sales 3,000 units

    Selling price per unit $309

    Variable costs per unit

    Production $130

    Selling $50

    Additional fixed costs for the new product line, per year

    production $51,000

    Selling $75,000

    Current fixed corporate costs that would be allocated to the new product line, per year $54,000

    If the new product is added to the existing product line, then sales of existing products are expected to decline. As a consequence, the contribution margin of the other existing product lines is expected to drop by $78,000 per year. No other changes are expected.

    a) What would be the net increase or decrease in net operating income for the company if they added the new product?

    b) What is the lowest selling price per unit that could be charged for the new product and still make it possible, economically, to add the new product?

    acc 330 437285

    During its %uFB01scal year ending August 31, 2012, the

    Eaton School District engaged in the following

    transactions:

    It established a purchasing department, to be

    accounted for in a new internal service fund to

    purchase supplies and distribute them to oper

    ating units. To provide working capital for the

    new department, it transferred $1.7 million from

    its general fund to the internal service fund.

    During the year, operating departments that are

    accounted for in the general fund acquired sup

    plies from the internal service fund, for which

    they were billed $300,000. Of this amount, the

    government transferred $200,000 from the gen

    eral fund to the internal service fund, expecting

    to transfer the balance in the following %uFB01scal

    year. The supplies had cost the purchasing de

    partment $190,000. During 2012, the operating

    departments used only $220,000 of the supplies

    for which they were billed. They had no supplies

    on hand at the start of the year.

    The school district transferred $150,000 from its

    general fund to its debt service fund to make its

    required March 31, 2012, interest payment. This

    amount was paid from the debt service fund

    when due. It represented interest on $8 million

    of bonds that were issued, at par, on September

    30, 2011. The next interest payment of$1 50,000

    is due on September 30, 2012. The district also

    transferred $75,000 from the general fund to the

    debt service fund to provide for the eventual

    repayment of principal.

    The district transferred $4.5 million from the

    general fund to its pension fund (a %uFB01duciary

    fund) in partial payment of its actuarially re

    quired contribution of $5.0 million for the year.

    On August 31 , the district acquired school buses

    at a cost of $900,000. The district gave the

    supplier installment notes that required the dis

    trict to make three annual payments of$361 ,903.

    The %uFB01rst payment is due in August 201 3. The

    buses have a useful life of 10 years, with no

    salvage value.

    Select an answer to the following questions from

    the amounts listed after them. An amount may be

    selected once, more than once, or not at all. ___ 1. Amount that the general fund should rec

    ognize as supplies expense, assuming that

    inventory is accounted for on a purchases

    basis.

    ___ 2. Amount that the district should recognize

    as a pension expenditure in its general

    fund

    ___ 3. Amount that the district should recognize

    as a pension expense in its government

    wide statements

    ___ 4. Amount that the general fund should rec

    ognize as nonreciprocal transfers out

    ___ 5. Amount that the district should recognize

    as total debt service expenditures in its

    governmental funds.

    ___ 6. Amount that the government should rec

    ognized as total debt service expense in its

    government wide statements

    ___ 7. Amount that the district should recognize

    as other %uFB01nancing sources in its general

    fund %uFB01nancial statements

    ___ 8. Amount that the district should recog

    nize as capital related expenditures (in

    cluding depreciation) pertaining to its

    buses in its governmental fund %uFB01nancial

    statements. The district recognizes a full

    year%u2019s depreciation on all capital assets in

    the year of acquisition.

    ___ 9. Amount that the district should recognize

    as capital related expenses (including de

    preciation) pertaining to its buses in its

    government wide %uFB01nancial statements.

    The district recognizes a full year%u2019s de

    preciation on all capital assets in the year

    of acquisition.

    ___ 10. Amount that the district should recognize

    as nonspendable fund balance in its gov

    ernmental fund statements.

    0

    b. 75,000

    c. 80,000

    d. 90,000

    e. 137,500

    f. 150,000

    g. 220,000

    h. 275,000 i. 300,000

    j. 900,000

    k. 1,925,000

    l. 4,500,000

    m. 5,000,000

    n. 8,000,000

    o. 8,900,000

    accounting 45 minutes to answer multiple questions 437345

    Use the following information to answer questions 1 5.

    Determine the due date and amount of interest due at maturity on the following notes:

    Note 1 Dated March 1, $5,000, 60 day note, 9% interest
    Note 2 Dated May 15, $9,000, 120 day note, 8% interest
    Note 3 Dated May 30, $12,000, 90 day note, 12% interest

    1. What is the Maturity Date for Note 1? (Points : 3)

    May 1
    April 30
    April 29
    May 5

    2. What is the amount of interest due at maturity for Note 1? (Points : 3)

    $75
    $450
    $37.50
    $100

    3. What is the Maturity Date for Note 2? (Points : 3)

    September 11
    September 13
    September 12
    August 30

    4. What is the amount of interest due at maturity for Note 2? (Points : 3)

    $72
    $720
    $60
    $240

    5. What is the amount of interest due at maturity for Note 3? (Points : 3)

    $300
    $360
    $1440
    $120

    velazques jeep tours 437416

    Velazques Jeep Tours operates jeep tours in the heart of the Colorado Rockies. The company bases its budgets on two measures of activity (i.e., cost drivers), namely guests and jeeps. One vehicle used in one tour on one day counts as a jeep. Each jeep has one tour guide. The company uses the following data in its budgeting:

    Fixed element
    per month
    Variable element
    per guest
    Variable element
    per jeep
    Revenue $ 0 $ 92 $ 0
    Tour guide wages $ 0 $ 0 $ 101
    Vehicle expenses $ 4,000 $ 9 $ 53
    Administrative expenses $ 1,000 $ 1 $ 0

    In March, the company budgeted for 356 guests and 129 jeeps. The company’s income statement showing the actual results for the month appears below:

    Velazques Jeep Tours
    Income Statement
    For the Month Ended March 31
    Actual guests 346
    Actual jeeps 131
    Revenue $ 31,772


    Expenses:
    Tour guide wages 12,981
    Vehicle expenses 14,177
    Administrative expenses 1,346


    Total expense 28,504


    Net operating income $ 3,268





    Required:

    Prepare a report showing the company’s activity variances for March. (Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Velazques Jeep Tours
    Activity Variances
    For the Month Ended March 31
    Revenue $ (Click to select) U F None

    Expenses:
    Tour guide wages (Click to select) F None U
    Vehicle expenses (Click to select) U None F
    Administrative expenses (Click to select) U F None

    Total expense (Click to select) U F None

    Net operating income $ (Click to select) None U F


    managerial accounting transfer prices 437420

    Venetian Corporation manufactures car stereos. It is a division of Berna Motors, which manufactures vehicles. Venetian sells car stereos to Berna, as well as to other vehicle manufacturers and retail stores. The following information is available for Venetian’s standard unit: variable cost per unit $35.19; fixed cost per unit $23.09; and selling price to outside customer $86.13. Berna currently purchases a standard unit from an outside supplier for $79.58. Because of quality concerns and to ensure a reliable supply, the top management of Berna has ordered Venetian to provide 210,000 units per year at a transfer price of $35.19 per unit. Venetian is already operating at full capacity. Venetian can avoid $3.87 per unit of variable selling costs by selling the unit internally.

    What is the potential loss to the corporation as a whole resulting from this forced transfer? (Round answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)

    advanced accounting 436329

    Ristoni Company is in the process of emerging from a Chapter 11 bankruptcy. It will apply fresh start accounting as of December 31, 2013. The company currently has 33,000 shares of common stock outstanding with a $231,000 par value. As part of the reorganization, the owners will contribute 22,000 shares of this stock back to the company. A retained earnings deficit balance of $349,000 exists at the time of this reorganization.

    The company has the following asset accounts:
    Book Value Fair Value
    Accounts receivable $ 106,000 $ 83,000
    Inventory 100,000 75,000
    Land and buildings 448,000 500,000
    Equipment 77,000 65,000

    The company%u2019s liabilities will be settled as follows. Assume that all notes will be issued at reasonable interest rates.

    %u2022

    Accounts payable of $83,000 will be settled with a note for $8,000. These creditors will also get 1,000 shares of the stock contributed by the owners.

    %u2022

    Accrued expenses of $38,000 will be settled with a note for $7,000.

    %u2022

    Note payable of $103,000 (due 2017) was fully secured and has not been renegotiated.

    %u2022

    Note payable of $225,000 (due 2016) will be settled with a note for $53,000 and 12,000 shares of the stock contributed by the owners.

    %u2022

    Note payable of $215,000 (due 2014) will be settled with a note for $74,000 and 9,000 shares of the stock contributed by the owners.

    %u2022

    Note payable of $185,000 (due 2015) will be settled with a note for $113,000.

    The company has a reorganization value of $754,000.

    Prepare all journal entries for Ristoni so that the company can emerge from the bankruptcy proceeding. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount.)

    cash flows cost of capital 436340

    Riverlea Swine is considering a proposal to manufacture high protein pig feed. The project would make

    use of an existing warehouse, which is currently rented out to a neighbouring firm. The next year’s rental charge

    on the warehouse is $100,000, and thereafter the rent is expected to grow in line with inflation at 4 percent a

    year. In addition to using the warehouse, the proposal envisages an investment in plant and equipment of

    $1.2 million.

    This could be depreciated for tax purposes straight line over 10 years. However, Riverlea Swine expects

    to terminate the project at the end of eight years and to resell the plant and equipment in year 8 for $400,000.

    Finally, the project requires an initial investment in working capital of $350,000.

    Year 1 sales of pig feed are expected to be $4.2 million, and thereafter sales are forecast to grow by

    5 percent a year, slightly faster than the inflation rate. Manufacturing costs are expected to be 90 percent of

    sales, and projects are subject to tax at 30 percent. The cost of capital is 12 percent.

    Create a table of cash flows

    please help accounting question 436361

    Roland Company uses special strapping equipment in its packaging business. The equipment was purchased in January 2011 for $10,100,000 and had an estimated useful life of 8 years with no salvage value. At December 31, 2012, new technology was introduced that would accelerate the obsolescence of Roland’s equipment. Roland’s controller estimates that expected future net cash flows on the equipment will be $6,300,000 and that the fair value of the equipment is $5,600,000. Roland intends to continue using the equipment, but it is estimated that the remaining useful life is 4 years. Roland uses straight line depreciation. (a) Prepare the journal entry (if any) to record the impairment at December 31, 2012. (b) Prepare the journal entry for the equipment at December 31, 2013. The fair value of the equipment at December 31, 2013, is estimated to be $5,900,000.(c) repeat the requirements for (a) and (b), assuming that Roland intends to dispose of the equipment and that it has not been disposed of as of December 31, 2013.

    acc 211 436448

    Samson and Sons purchased a 6 month insurance policy for $1,200 which covers the months July through December. Initially the entire cost of the insurance policy was recorded in prepaid insurance. What is the adjusting journal entry required at the end of July? Answer

    Debit prepaid insurance $1,200; Credit cash $1,200.
    Debit insurance expense $1,200; Credit prepaid insurance $1,200.
    Debit prepaid insurance $200; Credit insurance expense $200.
    Debit insurance expense $200; Credit prepaid insurance $200.

    intermediate accounting 436453

    Samuelson and Messenger (S&M) began 2013 with 270 units of its one product. These units were purchased near the end of 2012 for $24 each. During the month of January, 135 units were purchased on January 8 for $27 each and another 270 units were purchased on January 19 for $29 each. Sales of 130 units and 170 units were made on January 10 and January 25, respectively. There were 375 units on hand at the end of the month. S&M uses a perpetual inventory system. Complete the below table to calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold for January using FIFO method.

    And

    Complete the below table to calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold for January using average cost method. (Round your cost per unit to 2 decimal places and other answers to nearest whole number.)

    Perpetual Average Inventory on hand Cost of Goods Sold
    # of units Cost per unit Inventory Value # of units sold Avg.Cost per unit Cost of Goods Sold
    Beginning Inventory
    Purchase January 8
    Subtotal Average Cost 0
    Sale January 10
    Subtotal Average Cost 0
    Purchase January 19
    Subtotal Average Cost 0
    Sale January 25
    Total $0 0 $0

    sandstorm manufacturing inc makes two types of industrial component parts 436463

    Sandstorm Manufacturing Inc. makes two types of industrial component parts%u2014the LE100 and the UL600. It annually produces 120,000 units of LE100 and 25,000 units of UL600. The company%u2019s conventional cost system allocates manufacturing overhead to products using a plantwide overhead rate and direct labor dollars as the allocation base. Additional information relating to the company%u2019s two product lines is shown below:

    LE100 UL600 Total
    Direct materials $ 720,000 $ 357,000 $ 1,077,000
    Direct labor $ 240,000 $ 100,000 $ 340,000

    The company is considering implementing an activity based costing system that distributes all of its manufacturing overhead to four activities as shown below:

    Activity Cost Pool
    (and Activity Measure)
    Manufacturing Overhead Activity

    LE100 UL600 Total
    Machining (machine hours) $ 400,000 36,000 135,000 171,000
    Setups (setup hours) 300,000 150 600 750
    Product level (number of products) 200,500 2 2 4
    General factory (direct labor dollars) 120,000 $ 240,000 $ 100,000 $ 340,000


    Total manufacturing overhead cost $ 1,020,500





    Required:
    1 a. Compute the plantwide overhead rate that would be used in the company%u2019s conventional cost system.

    Predetermined overhead rate $ per DL$
    1 b. Using the plantwide rate, compute the unit product cost for each product.

    LE100 UL600
    Unit product cost

    i’m looking for the unit product cost using the plantwide rate. i have no clue how to get it and i’ve been trying for quite some time. help please and show how you got it would be great.

    accounting salvage and journal entries 436484

    Saturn Co. purchases a used machine for $144,000 cash on January

    2 and readies it for use the next day at an $8,000 cost. On January

    3, it is installed on a required operating platform costing $1,600,

    and it is further readied for operations. The company predicts the

    machine will be used for six years and have a $17,280 salvage

    value. Depreciation is to be charged on a straight line basis. On

    December 31, at the end of its fifth year in operations, it is

    disposed of.

    1.)

    Prepare journal entries to record

    the machine’s purchase and the costs to ready and install it. Cash

    is paid for all costs incurred

    2.)

    Prepare journal entries to record

    depreciation of the machine at December 31.

    3.)

    Prepare journal entries to record

    the machineAfA?A??cAf?cAc€A!A?¬Af?cAc€A3A??cs disposal under each of the

    following separate assumptions

    u08a2 436489

    Saturn Co purchases a used machine for $167,000 cash on January 2 and readies it for use the next day at an $3,420 cost. On January 3, it is installed on a required operating platform costing $1,080, and it is further readied for operations. The company predicts the machine will be used for six years and have a $14,600 salvage value. Depreciation to be charged on a straight line basis. On December 31, at the end of the fifth year in operations, it is disposed of.

    1). Prepare journal entires to record the machine’s purchase and the costs to ready and install it. Cash is paid for all costs incurred.

    2). Prepare journal entires to record depreciation of the machine at December 31 of (a) it first year in operations and (b) the year of its disposal.

    3). Prepare journal entires to record the machine’s disposal under each of the following separate assumptions: (a) it is sold for $13,500 cash; (b) it is sold for $45,000 cash; and (c) it is destroyed in a fire and the insurance company pays $24,000 cash to settle the loss claim.

    piano 436520

    Scottsdale Fine Piano%u2019s purchases pianos from a well known manufacturer and sells them through their retail store. The Baby Grand Pianos sell, on average, for $2,500 each. The average cost of a piano from the manufacturer is $1,500. The costs that the Company incurs in a typical month are presented below.

    Selling Costs:

    Advertising $ 950 Per Month

    Delivery of Pianos $ 60 Per Piano Sold

    Sales Salaries and Commissions $ 4,800 Per Month, plus 4% of Sales

    Utilities $ 650 Per Month

    Depreciation on Sales Facilities $ 5,000 Per Month

    Administrative Costs:

    Executive Salaries $13,500 Per Month

    Depreciation of Office Equipment $ 900 Per Month

    Clerical $ 2,500 Per Month, plus $40 Piano Sold

    Insurance $ 700 Per Month

    During August, the Company sold and delivered 60 pianos

    prepare traditional income statement

    prepare a conttibuted income statement

    the grand company has budgeted departmental costs and operating activity in its four 436554

    Service Department Operating Department
    Custodial Repair Production Finishing
    Departmental costs $ 5,124 $ 7,252 $ 52,000 $ 62,000
    Square feet 200 2,200 3,700
    Number of repair requests 250 100

    The company does not distinguish between fixed and variable service department costs. Custodial costs are allocated on the basis of square feet occupied. Repair costs are allocated on the basis of the number of repair requests. Assume Custodial costs are allocated first.

    Assume Grand uses the step down allocation method. After all allocations, how much of the company’s total overhead cost will be charged to the Finishing Department for the coming year? (Round your answer to the nearest dollar amount.)

    $73,947
    $65,108
    $67,228
    $69,586

    Plz show the working. otherewise, no points

    accounting question 436579

    Sheela Dairy Corporation buys unprocessed cows’ milk from local farmers. At the dairy, this unprocessed milk is broken down into cream and low fat milk. The cream can be sold at this point or can be further processed into butter. Which of the following would be relevant in the decision to further process the cream into butter?

    Question 3 options:

    a. the amount paid to the farmers to purchase the unprocessed milk.
    b. the cost of breaking down the unprocessed milk into cream and low fat milk.
    c. the portion of corporate fixed expenses that are currently being allocated to cream.
    d. none of these

    finance 436594

    Signature Scents has two divisions: the Cologne Division and the Bottle Division. The Bottle Division produces containers that can be used by the Cologne Division. The Bottle Division’s variable manufacturing cost is $2.00, shipping cost is $0.10, and the external sales price is $3.00. No shipping costs are incurred on sales to the Cologne Division, and the Cologne Division can purchase similar containers in the external market for $2.60.

    1. The Bottle Division has sufficient capacity to meet all external market demands in addition to meeting the demands of the Cologne Division. Using the general rule, the transfer price from the Bottle Division to the Cologne Division would be

    2. Assume the Bottle Division has no excess capacity and could sell everything it produced externally. Using the general rule, the transfer price from the Bottle Division to the Cologne Division would be:

    4 year journal entry 436615

    Simons Company leased a machine from an established machine dealer, Machine Guarantee Limited. The dealer acquired the machine at a cost of $180,000. The cost of repairing the machine to make it suitable for another owners will be $40,000. Simons Company plans to keep the machine after the lease but has not made any commitment to the lessor to purchase it. The terms of the lease are as follows:

    A?· Date of entering lease: July 1, 2011

    A?· Duration of lease: 4 years

    A?· Life of leased asset: 5 years, after which it will have no salvage value

    A?· Lease payments: $100,000 at the end of each year

    A?· Interest rate implicit in the lease: 10%

    A?· Unguaranteed residual: $50,000

    A?· Fair value of truck at inception of the lease: $351, 140

    Required:

    (i) Prepare the journal entries to account for the lease transaction in the books of the lessor, Machine Guarantee Limited.

    (ii) Prepare the journal entries to account for the lease transaction in the books of the lessee, Simons Limited.

    I NEED JOURNAL ENTRIES AND TABLE FOR 4 YEARS

    I NEED JOURNAL ENTRIES AND TABLE FOR 4 YEARS

    I NEED JOURNAL ENTRIES AND TABLE FOR 4 YEARS

    smiegel corporation accounting help please 436623

    Smigel Corporation’s balance sheet and income statement appear below:

    Smigel Corporation’s
    Balance Sheet

    Ending Balance

    Beginning
    Balance

    Assets

    Cash and cash equivalents

    $

    24

    $

    25

    Accounts receivable

    58

    51

    Inventory

    61

    62

    Property, plant and equipment

    452

    430

    Less accumulated depreciation

    218

    185

    Total assets

    $

    377

    $

    383

    Liabilities and stockholders’ equity:

    Accounts payable

    $

    63

    $

    56

    Accrued liabilities

    27

    23

    Income taxes payable

    39

    35

    Bonds payable

    59

    60

    Common stock

    53

    50

    Retained earnings

    136

    159

    Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

    $

    377

    $

    383

    Smigel Corporation’s
    Income Statement

    Sales

    $

    317

    Cost of goods sold

    210

    Gross margin

    107

    Selling and administrative expense

    144

    Net operating income

    (37)

    Gain on sale of equipment

    15

    Income before taxes

    (22)

    Income taxes

    0

    Net income

    $

    (22)

    Cash dividends were $1. The company sold equipment for $15 that was originally purchased for $5 and that had accumulated depreciation of $5.

    Required:

    Determine the net cash provided by (used in) operating activities for the year using the indirect method

    intermediate accounting 436638

    Smith Distributors, Inc., supplies ice cream shops with various toppings for making sundaes. On November 17, 2013, a fire resulted in the loss of all of the toppings stored in one section of the warehouse. The company must provide its insurance company with an estimate of the amount of inventory lost. The following information is available from the company’s accounting records:

    Fruit
    Toppings
    Marshmallow
    Toppings
    Chocolate
    Toppings
    Inventory, January 1, 2013 $ 27,000 $ 7,700 $ 3,700
    Net purchases through Nov. 17 185,000 43,000 12,700
    Net sales through Nov. 17 235,000 62,000 20,700
    Historical gross profit ratio 15 % 30 % 30 %

    Required:
    1.

    Calculate the estimated cost of each of the toppings lost in the fire.

    partnerships 436723

    Spalding, Dane, and Manson are partners, sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 30, 40, and 30 percent respectively. Their partnership agreement provides that if one of them withdraws from the partnership, the assets and liabilities are to be revalued, the gain or loss allocated to the partners, and the retiring partner paid the balance of his account. Manson withdraws from the partnership on December 31, 2013. The capital account balances before recording revaluation are Spalding, $230,000; Dane, $250,000; and Manson, $220,000. The effect of the revaluation is to increase Merchandise Inventory by $21,000 and the Building account balance by $41,000. How much cash will be paid to Manson? Remember to show your work and explain your reasoning behind how you arrived at the answer

    cost accounting 436785

    The Stamping Department accepted Job 051507A on May 15th to make 1,000 funnels. To complete the job they drew 1,100 sheets at $1.20 per sheet and 1,150 grommets at $0.15 per set. The driver that the Stamping Department uses is drop forge strokes which are counted on a machine mounted counter. $375.00 is applied to each job as overhead due to setup and teardown and $2.25 is applied as overhead for each drop forge stroke. Direct labor is applied at $22.50 per hour for the machine operator and $11.10 for the machine loader. The job required 6 1/2 hours of labor by the team. When the job was complete Job 051507A was transferred to SFGI (Semi finished Goods Inventory). When the job was transferred, 20 sheets were returned unused to raw material inventory, 75 grommet sets were returned, and there were 1,115 strokes on the counter. Journalize all events depicted as of May 15th. Show all journal entries and calculations.

    the standard costs and actual costs for direct materials direct labor and factory ov 436825

    The standard costs and actual costs for direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead for the manufacture of 2,500 units of product are as follows:

    Standard Costs

    Direct materials 2,500 kilograms @ $8
    Direct labor 7,500 hours @ $12

    Actual Costs
    Direct materials 2,600 kilograms @ $8.75
    Direct labor 7,400 hours @ $11.40
    Factory overhead (100% capacity Af?cAc‚¬” 10,000 hrs.):

    Variable cost @ $2 per hour
    Total variable cost, $18,000
    Fixed cost @ $0.80 per hour
    Total fixed cost, $8,000

    The following data relate to direct materials costs for November:

    Actual costs 4,500 pounds at $6.00
    Standard costs 4,600 pounds at $5.50

    What is the direct materials price variance?

    a. $2,250 favorable
    b. $2,250 unfavorable
    c. $2,300 unfavorable
    d. $1,700 unfavorable

    (Use above question information) What is the direct materials quantity variance?

    a. $550 unfavorable
    b. $600 favorable
    c. $550 favorable
    d. $600 unfavorable

    SHOW YOUR WORK IN ORDER TO EARN THE POINTS

    income statement 436855

    Standford Corporation has provided the following data for the month of February:

    Sales $280,000
    Raw materials purchases $76,000
    Direct labor cost $42,000
    Manufacturing overhead $77,000
    Selling expense $20,000
    Administrative expense $35,000
    Inventories: Beginning Ending
    Raw materials $22,000 $33,000
    Work in process $15,000 $23,000
    Finished goods $52,000 $43,000

    a. Prepare a Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured in good form for February. (6 points)

    b. Prepare an Income Statement in good form for February. (6 points)

    acct 2302 436860

    Stein Company makes carpets. A customer wants to place a special order for 1,000 carpets in navy blue with the company logo woven in the middle, to be priced at $30 each. Normally, Stein would charge $60 per carpet for this type of order. Stein figures that yarn and backing will cost $12 per carpet, variable overhead (machining, electricity) is $6 per carpet, direct labor is $10 per carpet, and for one setup the labor will be required at $800 per setup. The set up charge costs are 100% labor. Currently, the workers needed to set up for and make the carpets are working at Stein. Their wages will be paid whether or not the special order is accepted. Stein’s policy is to avoid layoffs to the extent possible.

    Refer to Figure 12 1. If Stein accepts the special order, by how much will operating income increase or decrease?

    a. $12,000 decrease
    b. $12,000 increase
    c. $2,000 decrease
    d. $2,000 increase
    e. there will be no effect on operating income

    accounting homework help 435821

    PROBLEM #1: CAPITAL INVESTMENT ANALYSIS

    Arroyo Company is considering investing in a second manufacturing plant, due its recent growth in sales.

    The proposed plant would require an initial cash investment of $600,000.

    The plant would have a two year life. Forecasted cash revenues and cash costs are:

    Cash revenues

    Year 1: 235,000 units to be sold at $2.10 each

    Year 2: 250,000 units to be sold at $2.25 each

    Cash costs

    Fixed costs: $120,000 in year #1 and $125,000 in year #2

    Variable costs: $.25 per unit in year #1 and $.30 per unit in year #2

    Additionally, the project will provide salvage value of $25,000 at the end of year #2. Arroyo Company requires a 10% return on investment.

    Required:

    1. Calculate the net cash flows for year #1 and year #2. Include the salvage value as a cash receipt at the end of year #2.

    2. Compute the present value of net cash flows. Should Arroyo invest in the project?

    3. Now, suppose interest rates rise as the Federal Reserve Board raises interest rates to combat inflation. The company now requires a 12% return. Using net present value techniques recalculate the net present value of the project, using a discount rate of 12%. Should Arroyo invest in the project?

    4. What do the results of this problem tell you about the effects of rising interest rates on capital investments?

    accouting 435831

    Problem 10 26A Effect of an installment note on financial statements [LO 1]

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    On January 1, 2013, Mixon Co. borrowed cash from First City Bank by issuing a $90,000 face value, three year term note that had a 7 percent annual interest rate. The note is to be repaid by making annual payments of $34,295 that include both interest and principal on December 31. Mixon invested the proceeds from the loan in land that generated lease revenues of $45,000 cash per year.

    references

    Section Break Problem 10 26A Effect of an installment note on financial statements [LO 1]

    Problem 10 26A Part a

    Required:
    a.

    Prepare an amortization schedule for the three year period. (Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Apply an amount of principal that results in Net Liability equal “0” in the last period.)

    MIXON CO.
    Amortization Schedule
    $90,000, 3 Yr. Term Note, 7% Interest Rate
    Year Prin. Bal.
    on Jan 1
    Cash Pay.
    Dec. 31
    Applied to
    Interest
    Applied to
    Principal
    Prin. Bal.
    End of Period
    2013 $ $ $ $ $
    2014
    2015

    adjusting entries for subsequent journal entries 435866

    Problem 3 2A Preparing adjusting and subsequent journal entries LO C1, A1, P1

    Arnez Co. follows the practice of recording prepaid expenses and unearned revenues in balance sheet accounts. The company’s annual accounting period ends on December 31, 2013. The following information concerns the adjusting entries to be recorded as of that date.

    a.

    The Office Supplies account started the year with a $4,000 balance. During 2013, the company purchased supplies for $13,400, which was added to the Office Supplies account. The inventory of supplies available at December 31, 2013, totaled $2,554.

    b.

    An analysis of the company’s insurance policies provided the following facts.

    Policy Date of Purchase Months of Coverage Cost
    A April 1, 2012 24 $ 14,400
    B April 1, 2013 36 12,960
    C August 1, 2013 12 2,400

    The total premium for each policy was paid in full (for all months) at the purchase date, and the Prepaid Insurance account was debited for the full cost. (Year end adjusting entries for Prepaid Insurance were properly recorded in all prior years.)

    c.

    The company has 15 employees, who earn a total of $1,960 in salaries each working day. They are paid each Monday for their work in the five day workweek ending on the previous Friday. Assume that December 31, 2013, is a Tuesday, and all 15 employees worked the first two days of that week. Because New Year%u2019s Day is a paid holiday, they will be paid salaries for five full days on Monday, January 6, 2014.

    d.

    The company purchased a building on January 1, 2013. It cost $960,000 and is expected to have a $45,000 salvage value at the end of its predicted 30 year life. Annual depreciation is $30,500.

    e.

    Since the company is not large enough to occupy the entire building it owns, it rented space to a tenant at $3,000 per month, starting on November 1, 2013. The rent was paid on time on November 1, and the amount received was credited to the Rent Earned account. However, the tenant has not paid the December rent. The company has worked out an agreement with the tenant, who has promised to pay both December and January rent in full on January 15. The tenant has agreed not to fall behind again.

    f.

    On November 1, the company rented space to another tenant for $2,800 per month. The tenant paid five months’ rent in advance on that date. The payment was recorded with a credit to the Unearned Rent account.

    adjusting accounts and preparing financial statements 435872

    Problem 3 3A Preparing adjusting entries, adjusted trial balance, and financial statements L.O. A1, P1, P2, P3

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    Watson Technical Institute (WTI), a school owned by Tom Watson, provides training to individuals who pay tuition directly to the school. WTI also offers training to groups in off site locations. Its unadjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2011, follows. WTI initially records prepaid expenses and unearned revenues in balance sheet accounts. Descriptions of items a through h that require adjusting entries on December 31, 2011, follow.

    Additional Information Items

    a. An analysis of WTI’s insurance policies shows that $3,335 of coverage has expired.

    b. An inventory count shows that teaching supplies costing $2,891 are available at year end 2011.

    c. Annual depreciation on the equipment is $13,342.

    d. Annual depreciation on the professional library is $6,671.

    e. On November 1, WTI agreed to do a special six month course (starting immediately) for a client. The contract calls for a monthly fee of $2,300, and the client paid the first five months’ fees in advance. When the cash was received, the Unearned Training Fees account was credited. The fee for the sixth month will be recorded when it is collected in 2012.

    f. On October 15, WTI agreed to teach a four month class (beginning immediately) for an individual for $4,261 tuition per month payable at the end of the class. The class started on October 15, but no payment has yet been received. (WTI’s accruals are applied to the nearest half month; for example, October recognizes one half month accrual.)

    g. WTI’s two employees are paid weekly. As of the end of the year, two days’ salaries have accrued at the rate of $100 per day for each employee.

    h. The balance in the Prepaid Rent account represents rent for December.

    WATSON TECHNICAL INSTITUTE

    Unadjusted Trial Balance

    December 31, 2011

    Debit Credit

    Cash $ 26,340

    Accounts receivable 0

    Teaching supplies 10,129

    Prepaid insurance 15,197

    Prepaid rent 2,027

    Professional library 30,391

    Accumulated depreciationAf?cAc‚¬”Professional library $ 9,119

    Equipment 70,903

    Accumulated depreciationAf?cAc‚¬”Equipment 16,210

    Accounts payable 36,112

    Salaries payable 0

    Unearned training fees 11,500

    T. Watson, Capital 64,431

    T. Watson, Withdrawals 40,523

    Tuition fees earned 103,332

    Training fees earned 38,496

    Depreciation expenseAf?cAc‚¬”Professional library 0

    Depreciation expenseAf?cAc‚¬”Equipment 0

    Salaries expense 48,628

    Insurance expense 0

    Rent expense 22,297

    Teaching supplies expense 0

    Advertising expense 7,092

    Utilities expense 5,673

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Totals $ 279,200 $ 279,200

    ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________

    ________________________________________

    references

    Section Break Problem 3 3A Preparing adjusting entries, adjusted trial balance, and financial statements L.O. A1, P1, P2, P3

    2.

    value:

    15.00 points

    Problem 3 3A Part 2

    Required:

    2. Prepare the necessary adjusting journal entries for items a through h. Assume that adjusting entries are made only at year end. (Round your answer to nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Adjusting entries (all dated Dec. 31, 2011).

    General Journal Debit Credit

    a.

    b.

    c.

    d.

    e.

    f.

    g.

    h.

    ________________________________________

    check my workeBook Links (4) references

    Worksheet Learning Objective: 03 A1 Explain how accounting adjustments link to financial statements. Learning Objective: 03 P3 Prepare financial statements from an adjusted trial balance.

    Problem 3 3A Part 2 Learning Objective: 03 P1 Prepare and explain adjusting entries.

    Difficulty: Hard Learning Objective: 03 P2 Explain and prepare an adjusted trial balance.

    3.

    value:

    10.00 points

    Problem 3 3A Part 3

    3.1 Post the balance from the unadjusted trial balance and the adjusting entries in to the T accounts. (Record the transactions in the given order. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Cash

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    Accounts Receivable

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Adj. bal.

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    Teaching Supplies

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Adj. bal.

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    Prepaid Insurance

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Adj. bal.

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    Prepaid Rent

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Adj. bal.

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    Professional Library

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    Accumulated DepreciationAf?cAc‚¬”Professional library

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Adj. bal.

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    Equipment

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. Bal.

    Accumulated DepreciationAf?cAc‚¬”Equipment

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Adj. bal.

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    Accounts Payable

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    Salaries Payable

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Adj. bal.

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    Unearned Training Fees

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Adj. bal.

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    T. Watson, Capital

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    T. Watson, Withdrawals

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    Tuition Fees Earned

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Adj. bal.

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    Training Fees Earned

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Adj. bal.

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    Depreciation ExpenseAf?cAc‚¬”Professional Library

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Adj. bal.

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    Depreciation ExpenseAf?cAc‚¬”Equipment

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Adj. bal.

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    Salaries Expense

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Adj. bal.

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    Insurance Expense

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Adj. bal.

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    Rent Expense

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Adj. bal.

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    Teaching Supplies Expense

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Adj. bal.

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    Advertising Expense

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    Utilities Expense

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Unadj. bal.

    ________________________________________

    3.2 Prepare an adjusted trial balance. (The items in the Trial Balance should be grouped as follows: Assets and Liabilities (in order of their liquidity) then Equity, Revenues, and Expenses. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Watson Technical Institute

    Adjusted Trial Balance

    December 31, 2011

    Debit Credit

    $

    $

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Totals $

    $

    ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________

    ________________________________________

    check my workeBook Links (4) references

    Worksheet Learning Objective: 03 A1 Explain how accounting adjustments link to financial statements. Learning Objective: 03 P3 Prepare financial statements from an adjusted trial balance.

    Problem 3 3A Part 3 Learning Objective: 03 P1 Prepare and explain adjusting entries.

    Difficulty: Hard Learning Objective: 03 P2 Explain and prepare an adjusted trial balance.

    4.

    value:

    10.00 points

    Problem 3 3A Part 4

    4.1 Prepare Watson technical institute’s income statement for the year 2011. (Round your answer to nearest dollar amount. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    WATSON TECHNICAL INSTITUTE

    Income Statement

    For Year Ended December 31, 2011

    Revenues

    $

    ________________________________________

    Total revenues $

    Expenses

    ________________________________________

    Total expenses

    ________________________________________

    $

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    ________________________________________

    4.2 Prepare Watson technical institute’s statement of owner’s equity for the year 2011. (Round your answer to nearest dollar amount. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    WATSON TECHNICAL INSTITUTE

    Statement of Owner’s Equity

    For Year Ended December 31, 2011

    $

    ________________________________________

    ________________________________________

    $

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    ________________________________________

    4.3 Prepare Watson technical institute’s balance sheet as of December 31, 2011. (Round your answer to nearest dollar amount. Be sure to list the assets and liabilities in order of their liquidity. Amounts to be deducted should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    WATSON TECHNICAL INSTITUTE

    Balance Sheet

    December 31, 2011

    Assets

    $

    $

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    ________________________________________ ________________________________________

    Total Assets $

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    Liabilities

    $

    ________________________________________

    Total Liabilities

    Equity

    ________________________________________

    Total Liabilities and Equity $

    ________________________________________________________________________________

    adjusting accounts and preparing financial statements 435899

    Problem 3 5A Preparing financial statements from the adjusted trial balance and calculating profit margin LO P3, A1, A2

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    The adjusted trial balance for Chiara Company as of December 31, 2013, follows.

    Debit Credit
    Cash $ 30,000
    Accounts receivable 52,000
    Interest receivable 18,000
    Notes receivable (due in 90 days) 168,000
    Office supplies 16,000
    Automobiles 168,000
    Accumulated depreciation%u2014Automobiles $ 50,000
    Equipment 138,000
    Accumulated depreciation%u2014Equipment 18,000
    Land 78,000
    Accounts payable 96,000
    Interest payable 20,000
    Salaries payable 19,000
    Unearned fees 30,000
    Long term notes payable 138,000
    R. Chiara, Capital 255,800
    R. Chiara, Withdrawals 46,000
    Fees earned 484,000
    Interest earned 24,000
    Depreciation expense%u2014Automobiles 26,000
    Depreciation expense%u2014Equipment 18,000
    Salaries expense 188,000
    Wages expense 40,000
    Interest expense 32,000
    Office supplies expense 34,000
    Advertising expense 58,000
    Repairs expense%u2014Automobiles 24,800




    Totals $ 1,134,800 $ 1,134,800









    references


    1(c)

    Prepare Chiara Company’s the balance sheet as of December 31, 2013.

    2. Calculate the profit margin for year 2013

    accounting homework 435909

    PROBLEM #3 %u2013 SPECIAL ORDER

    Wagner Company sells Product A for $21 per unit. If Wagner operates at full production capacity of 200,000 units, its manufacturing cost per unit are as follows:

    Direct materials $4.00

    Direct labor 5.00

    Overhead, 2/3 of which is fixed 6.00

    Total $15.00

    A special order for 20,000 units was received from a foreign distributor. The foreign distributor offered $14.50 per unit. The only selling costs on this order would be $3.00 per unit for shipping. Wagner has sufficient capacity to manufacture the additional units. Fixed overhead costs would not be affected if the special order is accepted.

    Required: (1) Compute the gain or loss if the customer%u2019s offer is accepted. (2) Calculate the price per unit at which the special order would generate a $20,000 profit before taxes.

    accounting 435915

    Problem 4 17 Comprehensive Problem; Second Production Department Weighted Average Method [LO2, LO3, LO4, LO5]

    Bohemian Links Inc. produces sausages in three production departmentsAf?cAc‚¬”Mixing, Casing and Curing, and Packaging. In the Mixing Department, meats are prepared and ground and then mixed with spices. The spiced meat mixture is then transferred to the Casing and Curing Department, where the mixture is force fed into casings and then hung and cured in climate controlled smoking chambers. In the Packaging Department, the cured sausages are sorted, packed, and labeled. The company uses the weighted average method in its process costing system. Data for April for the Casing and Curing Department follow:

    Percent Completed

    Units Mixing Materials Conversion
    Work in process inventory, April 1 3 100% 60% 50%
    Work in process inventory, April 30 3 100% 20% 10%

    Mixing Materials Conversion
    Work in process inventory, April 1 $ 5,544 $ 18 $ 423
    Cost added during April $ 165,956 $ 13,653 $ 107,266

    Mixing cost represents the costs of the spiced meat mixture transferred in from the Mixing Department. The spiced meat mixture is processed in the Casing and Curing Department in batches; each unit in the above table is a batch, and one batch of spiced meat mixture produces a set amount of sausages that are passed on to the Packaging Department. During April, 95 batches (i.e., units) were completed and transferred to the Packaging Department.

    accounting for managers 435936

    Problem 8 21 Schedule of Expected Cash Collections; Cash Budget [LO2, LO8]

    Natural Care Corp., a distributor of natural cosmetics, is ready to begin its third quarter, in which peak sales occur. The company has requested a $70,000, 90 day loan from its bank to help meet cash requirements during the quarter. Because Natural Care has experienced difficulty in paying off its loans in the past, the bank’s loan officer has asked the company to prepare a cash budget for the quarter. In response to this request, the following data have been assembled:

    a. On July 1, the beginning of the third quarter, the company will have a cash balance of $44,000.
    b. Actual sales for the last two months and budgeted sales for the third quarter follow (all sales are on account):
    May (actual) $ 430,000
    June (actual) $ 390,000
    July (budgeted) $ 440,000
    August (budgeted) $ 520,000
    September (budgeted) $ 517,000

    Past experience shows that 25% of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale, 70% in the month following sale, and 2% in the second month following sale. The remainder is uncollectible.
    c. Budgeted merchandise purchases and budgeted expenses for the third quarter are given below:

    July August September
    Merchandise purchases $ 264,000 $ 260,000 $ 310,200
    Salaries and wages $ 78,000 $ 78,000 $ 63,000
    Advertising $ 88,000 $ 98,000 $ 99,000
    Rent payments $ 28,000 $ 28,000 $ 28,000
    Depreciation $ 43,000 $ 43,000 $ 43,000

    Merchandise purchases are paid in full during the month following purchase. Accounts payable for merchandise purchases on June 30, which will be paid during July, total $234,000.
    d.

    Equipment costing $25,000 will be purchased for cash during July.

    e.

    In preparing the cash budget, assume that the $70,000 loan will be made in July and repaid in September. Interest on the loan will total $2,600.

    financial accounting problem 9 11 435941

    Problem 9 11
    Time Value of Money Concept

    The following situations involve the application of the time value of money concept. Use the appropriate present or future value table that may be found by clicking on the Present & Future Values button. Use the full factor when calculating your results.

    1. Janelle Carter deposited $9,750 in the bank on January 1, 1995, at an interest rate of 12% compounded annually. How much has accumulated in the account by January 1, 2012? Round to the nearest whole dollar.
    $

    2. Mike Smith deposited $21,600 in the bank on January 1, 2002. On January 2, 2012, this deposit has accumulated to $42,486. Interest is compounded annually on the account. What rate of interest did Mike earn on the deposit? Round to the nearest whole percent.
    %

    3. Lee Spony made a deposit in the bank on January 1, 2005. The bank pays interest at the rate of 8% compounded annually. On January 1, 2012, the deposit has accumulated to $15,000. How much money did Lee originally deposit on January 1, 2005? Round to the nearest whole dollar.
    $

    4. Nancy Holmes deposited $5,800 in the bank on January 1 a few years ago. The bank pays an interest rate of 10% compounded annually, and the deposit is now worth $15,026. How many years has the deposit been invested? Round to the nearest whole year.
    years

    accounting 230 435957

    This problem has two parts. In Part A, you are asked to do account analysis based on cost and activity information that you are given for one particular month. Account analysis is illustrated in the lecture on cost function parameter estimation and in study problem 3 36.

    In Part B, you are asked to do the high low method based on cost and activity information that you are given for two particular months. The high low method is illustrated in the same lecture on estimating cost function parameters and in study problems 3 47, 3 44, and Extra #3.

    NOTE that the data that you must use to get the cost function parameters for Part A are completely different than the data you must use for Part B. However, for both parts, you must make predictions for the same month. Also, be sure to read each question very carefully.

    Each part of the problem is worth five points and has two questions. There is no partial credit within a part, so to get the five points for a part, you must answer both questions correctly. You get six tries per part (not per individual question).
    ______________________________________________________

    Lorenzo operates a brushless car wash. Incoming cars are put on an automatic, continuously moving conveyor belt. A car is washed as the conveyor belt carries it from the start station to the finish station. After the car moves off the conveyor belt, workers dry it and clean and vacuum the inside. Workers are managed by a single supervisor.

    Lorenzo’s accountant wants to estimate costs in December, when 9,750 cars are expected to be washed. She uses two different methods to estimate December costs, account analysis and high low, with number of cars washed as the independent variable for both methods.

    To develop the cost functions, she collected the following cost and activity data for June, July, and August:

    June July August
    Cost item
    Soap, cloths, and supplies $2,400 $1,660 $2,300
    Water $4,000 $4,980 $6,900
    Car wash labor $25,350 $22,090 $29,450
    Power for conveyor $10,200 $9,770 $12,650
    Supervisor and cashier $3,000 $4,250 $4,250
    Total $44,950 $42,750 $55,550
    Cars washed 8,000 8,300 11,500

    For the account analysis method, she developed cost function parameter estimates by analyzing actual costs in June. Her analysis revealed the following variable cost components for each cost item:

    Soap, cloths, and supplies $2,400
    Water $4,000
    Car wash labor $22,400
    Power for conveyor $8,000
    Supervisor and cashier $0
    Total $36,800

    For the high low method, she developed cost function parameter estimates using the July and August data.

    REQUIRED [ROUND PER UNIT COSTS TO TWO DECIMAL PLACES AND TOTAL COSTS TO THE NEAREST DOLLAR.]

    Part A (6 tries; 5 points)

    1. Using account analysis, what is the accountant’s estimate of total fixed costs for December?

    Incorrect on #1

    2. Using account analysis, what is the accountant’s estimate of total variable costs for December?

    Incorrect on #2
    Incorrect. Tries 2/6 Previous Tries


    Part B (6 tries; 5 points)

    1. Using the high low method, what is the accountant’s estimate of total fixed costs for December?

    2. Using the high low method, what is the accountant’s estimate of variable costs per unit for December?

    accounting 125 ex 25 5 435987

    Project A requires an original investment of $112,000. The project will yield cash flows of $22,000 per year for nine years. Project B has a calculated net present value of $2,400 over a six year life. Project A could be sold at the end of six years for a price of $50,000.

    Use the Present Value of $1 at Compound Interest and the Present Value of an Annuity of $1 at Compound Interest tables shown below.

    Present Value of $1 at Compound Interest

    Year 6% 10% 12% 15% 20%

    1 0.943 0.909 0.893 0.870 0.833

    2 0.890 0.826 0.797 0.756 0.694

    3 0.840 0.751 0.712 0.658 0.579

    4 0.792 0.683 0.636 0.572 0.482

    5 0.747 0.621 0.567 0.497 0.402

    6 0.705 0.564 0.507 0.432 0.335

    7 0.665 0.513 0.452 0.376 0.279

    8 0.627 0.467 0.404 0.327 0.233

    9 0.592 0.424 0.361 0.284 0.194

    10 0.558 0.386 0.322 0.247 0.162

    Present Value of an Annuity of $1 at Compound Interest

    Year 6% 10% 12% 15% 20%

    1 0.943 0.909 0.893 0.870 0.833

    2 1.833 1.736 1.690 1.626 1.528

    3 2.673 2.487 2.402 2.283 2.106

    4 3.465 3.170 3.037 2.855 2.589

    5 4.212 3.791 3.605 3.353 2.991

    6 4.917 4.355 4.111 3.785 3.326

    7 5.582 4.868 4.564 4.160 3.605

    8 6.210 5.335 4.968 4.487 3.837

    9 6.802 5.759 5.328 4.772 4.031

    10 7.360 6.145 5.650 5.019 4.192

    a. Determine the net present value of Project A over a six year life with residual value, assuming a minimum rate of return of 12%. If required, round to the nearest dollar.

    please help 436043

    QS 25 7 Analysis of incremental costs L.O. A1

    Mo Kan Company incurs a $6 per unit cost for Product A, which it currently manufactures and sells for $9 per unit. Instead of manufacturing and selling this product, the company can purchase Product B for $5 per unit and sell it for $8 per unit. If it does so, unit sales would remain unchanged and $5 of the $6 per unit costs assigned to Product A would be eliminated.

    1.

    Prepare Incremental cost analysis. (Input all amounts as positive values. Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Incremental cost analysis

    Costs of purchasing:

    Cost to purchase Product B $

    Revenue loss from reduced price

    Total cost of purchasing Product B

    Costs eliminated if Product B purchased

    Net incremental cost of purchasing Product B $

    2. Should the company continue to manufacture Product A or purchase Product B for resale?

    QS 25 8 Selection of sales mix L.O A1

    Memory Lane Company can sell all units of computer memory X and Y that it can produce, but it has limited production capacity. It can produce four units of X per hour or three units of Y per hour, and it has 8,000 production hours available. Contribution margin is $10 for product X and $8 for product Y.

    1.

    Calculate contribution margin per production hour. (Do not round intermediate calculations and round your final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    X Y
    Contribution margin per unit $ $
    Production hours per unit
    Contribution margin per production hour $ $

    2. What is the most profitable sales mix for this Company?
    Allocate 40% its production capacity to Product X
    Allocate 24% its production capacity to Product Y
    Allocate all of its production capacity to Product X
    Allocate all of its production capacity to Product Y

    QS 25 9 Decision to accept additional business L.O. A1

    Kirk Company sells bikes for $600 each. The company currently sells 7,500 bikes per year and could make as many as 10,000 bikes per year. The bikes cost $450 each to make; $300 in variable costs per bike and $150 of fixed costs per bike. Kirk received an offer from a potential customer who wants to buy 1,500 bikes for $500 each. Incremental fixed costs to make this order are $100,000. No other costs will change if this order is accepted.

    Compute Kirk’s additional income (ignore taxes) if it accepts this order. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Incremental income from new business $

    QS 25 4 Computation of accounting rate of return L.O. P2

    Cardinal Company is considering an investment expected to generate an average net income after taxes of $1,300 for three years. The investment costs $30,000 and has an estimated $4,000 salvage value. Compute the accounting rate of return for this investment; assume the company uses straight line depreciation. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    finding the value 436059

    Part One: Quantitative Exercises
    Questions Answers
    1. Future Value. What is the future value of
    a. $800 invested for 14 years at 11 percent compounded annually?
    b. $210 invested for 8 years at 9 percent compounded annually?
    c. $650 invested for 12 years at 8 percent compounded annually?
    2. Present Value. What is the present value of
    a. $803 to be received 18 years from now at a 10 percent discount rate?
    b. $406 to be received 7 years from now at a 5 percent discount rate?
    c. $400 to be received 10 years from now at a 9 percent discount rate?
    3. Future Value of an Annuity. What is the future value of
    a. $557 a year for 12 years at 5 percent compounded annually?
    b. $748 a year for 9 years at 12 percent compounded annually?
    c. $442 a year for 7 years at 11 percent compounded annually?
    4. Present Value of an Annuity. What is the present value of
    a. $1,163 a year for 12 years at an 7 percent discount rate?
    b. $329 a year for 6years at a 12 percent discount rate?
    c. $365 a year for 20 years at a 14 percent discount rate?
    5. How many years will it take to grow
    a. $765 to a value of 2,028.19 at a compound rate of 14 percent?
    b. $321 to a value of 450.22 at a compound rate of 12 percent?
    c. $881 to a value of 1,305.78 at a compound rate of 7 percent?
    6. Interest Rate. At what interest rate will it take to grow
    a. $800to a value of 1,017.13 over 6 years?
    b. $600 to a value of 1,082.08 over 5 years?
    c. $401 to a value of 1,311.16 over 6 years?
    7. Car Loans (Hint: P/Y=12). How much is a car loan with a payment of
    a. $453 per month for 3 years at 6% interest per year?
    b. $466 per month for 5 years at 15% interest per year?
    c. $301 per month for 6 years at 7% interest per year?
    8. Mortgages (Hint: P/Y=12).
    What was the initial mortgage on the house?
    a. $4,369.66 per month for 30 years at 8 percent interest?
    b. $1,626.83 per month for 15 years at 4 percent interest?
    c. $3,724.21 per month for 30 years at 18 percent interest?
    9. Mortgages (Hint: P/Y=12). What is the payoff on a 30 year, 6% mortgage of
    a. $255,413 with a payment of 1,321.33 with 8 years remaining?
    b. $530,493 with a payment of 3,180.57 with 12 years remaining?
    c. $297,266 with a payment of 1,782.26 with 11 years remaining?

    accounting help 436076

    Question 1

    If an equipment replacement decision would not affect revenue, its benefits could still be measured by analyzing its Answer

    a. net cash flows.

    b. cost savings.

    c. net cash outflows.

    d. effect on net income.

    2 points

    Question 2

    Depreciation is a unique expense because it Answer

    a. does not affect income taxes.

    b. has to be calculated.

    c. does not require a cash outlay.

    d. is the same amount every accounting period.

    2 points

    Question 3

    Capital investment analysis involves all of the following except Answer

    a. preparing reports for management.

    b. analyzing the sales mix.

    c. dividing available capital investment funds.

    d. selecting the best alternative.

    2 points

    Question 4

    Smile Industries capital structure consists of $1,000,000 of debt at 6 percent interest and 1,500,000 of stockholders equity at 2 percent.The proportion of Equity in the total capital structure is Answer

    a. 100%

    b. 60%

    c. 40%

    d. 15%

    2 points

    Question 5

    In developing performance measures, management must consider which of the following? Answer

    a. How should we measure?

    b. How can managers monitor financial performance?

    c. What should we measure?

    d. All of these choices

    2 points

    Question 6

    The balanced scorecard links the perspectives of an organization’s stakeholders with the organization’s Answer

    a. mission and overall plan, performance measures, departmental plans, and resources.

    b. goals and vision, performance goals, strategic plan, and financial resources.

    c. mission and vision, performance measures, strategic plan, and resources.

    d. mission and vision, performance goals, overall plan, and resources.

    2 points

    Question 7

    For purposes of computing EVA, the minimum desired rate or return on an investment is known as Answer

    a. residual income.

    b. ROI.

    c. cost of capital.

    d. profit margin.

    2 points

    Question 8

    The manager of Center A is responsible for generating cash inflows and incurring costs with the goal of making money for the company. The manager has no responsibility for assets. What type of responsibility center is Center A? Answer

    a. Revenue center

    b. Profit center

    c. Discretionary cost center

    d. Cost center

    2 points

    Question 9

    W and X are partners who have agreed to admit Y, who will invest $15,000 for a 20 percent interest. The previous capital balances were $15,000 and $30,000 for W and X, respectively. W and X had shared profits and losses equally. What amount will be recorded in Y’s Capital account? Answer

    a. $9,000 credit

    b. $12,000 credit

    c. $6,000 credit

    d. $15,000 credit

    2 points

    Question 10

    Joan pays Eva $60,000 for her $40,000 interest in a partnership. The entry to record the sale on the partnership books is: Answer

    a. Eva, Capital 60,000 Joan, Capital 60,000

    b. Eva, Capital 40,000 Joan, Capital 40,000

    c. Joan, Capital 60,000 Eva, Capital 60,000

    d. Eva, Capital 60,000 Cash 60,000

    2 points

    Question 11

    Which of the following will not result in dissolution of a partnership? Answer

    a. Bankruptcy of a partner

    b. Admission of a new partner

    c. Negative capital balance of a partner

    d. Incapacitation of a partner

    2 points

    Question 12

    W and X are partners who have agreed to admit Y, who will invest $15,000 for a 20 percent interest. The previous capital balances were $15,000 and $30,000 for W and X, respectively. W and X had shared profits and losses equally. The entry that records Y%u2019s admission to the partnership is: Answer

    a. Cash 12,000 Y, Capital 12,000

    b. Cash 15,000 W, Capital 1,500 X, Capital 1,500 Y, Capital 12,000

    c. Y, Capital 3,000 Cash 3,000

    d. Cash 15,000 Y, Capital 15,000

    2 points

    Question 13

    Which of the following documents would be prepared (by a buyer of goods) after the others? Answer

    a. Purchase order

    b. Check

    c. Receiving report

    d. Purchase requisition

    2 points

    Question 14

    Which of the following documents would be sent to the treasurer? Answer

    a. Purchase order

    b. Invoice

    c. Bank statement

    d. Check authorization

    2 points

    Question 15

    Each of the following is a feature of internal control, except Answer

    a. separation of duties.

    b. a sound marketing plan.

    c. sound personnel policies.

    d. recording of all transactions.

    2 points

    Question 16

    The Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002 requires all of the following to certify a public company’s system of internal control, except for the Answer

    a. auditors.

    b. chief executive officer.

    c. stockholders.

    d. chief financial officer.

    2 points

    Question 17

    In a proposal to increase the production of clock radios, the sales managers of Rinaldo Electronics reported the total additional cost required to meet the increased production level. The increase in total cost is known as the Answer

    a. opportunity cost.

    b. controllable cost.

    c. out of pocket cost.

    d. incremental cost.

    2 points

    Question 18

    California Chemical Co. produces several chemical compounds. Each compound can be sold at the split off point or processed further. The following results apply to May:

    Compound

    Sales Value at Split off Point

    Costs of Additional Processing

    Sales Value After Additional Processing

    Chem I

    $59,600

    $7,300

    $74,400

    Chem II

    70,700

    17,500

    82,600

    Chem III

    46,700

    6,200

    55,500

    1. After determining which products should be sold at the split off point and which should be processed further, the total revenue provided by these three products would be Answer

    a. $200,600.

    b. $172,500.

    c. $212,500.

    d. $199,000.

    2 points

    Question 19

    2. Irrelevant costs are costs that are Answer

    a. opportunity costs.

    b. sunk costs.

    c. different among alternatives.

    d. avoidable costs.

    2 points

    Question 20

    3. Which of the following techniques is most useful for a special order decision? Answer

    a. Accounting rate of return method

    b. Incremental analysis

    c. Present value method

    d. Payback method

    2 points

    Question 21

    4. If standard costing is not economically feasible for a company, predetermined overhead rates should not be used. Answer True False

    1 points

    Question 22

    5. The direct materials price variance is the difference between the actual price and the standard price, multiplied by the standard quantity. Answer True False

    1 points

    Question 23

    6. Variance analysis includes all of the following except Answer

    a. identification of the cause.

    b. taking corrective action.

    c. developing performance measures to track activities causing the variance.

    d. investigating all variances.

    2 points

    Question 24

    Ewing Corporation’s controller has developed the cost and usage data listed below in preparation of standard unit cost information for the coming year.

    Direct materials quantity standard

    3 pounds per product

    Direct labor time standard

    5 hours per product

    Direct materials price standard

    $10 per pound

    Direct labor rate standard

    $ 9 per hour

    Standard variable overhead rate

    $ 5 per labor hour

    Standard fixed overhead rate

    $10 per labor hour

    1. The standard unit cost for direct materials is Answer

    $50.

    $10.

    $27.

    $30.

    2 points

    Question 25

    1. Sweet Dreams manufactures candy. Its records revealed the following data:

    Number of units produced

    4,000

    Standard direct labor hours per unit

    2

    Standard variable overhead rate

    $2.50 per hour

    Standard fixed overhead rate

    $5.00 per hour

    Budgeted fixed overhead costs

    $40,800

    Actual variable overhead costs

    $16,800

    Actual fixed overhead costs

    $40,400

    Actual labor hours

    8,000 direct labor hours

    Total actual overhead

    $57,200

    1. The total overhead variance is Answer

    $2,800 (F).

    $800 (F).

    $300 (F).

    $800 (U).

    2 points

    Question 26

    1. A(n) ________ cost is synonymous with the product cost calculated in a conventional standard cost accounting system. Answer

    joint

    expected

    direct

    fixed

    cost accounting 436085

    Question 2

    Rapid Auto has over 200 auto maintenance service outlets nationwide. It provides primarily two lines of service: oil changes and brake repair. Oil change related services represent 65% of its sales and provide a contribution margin ratio of 20%. Brake repair represents 35% of its sales and provides a 60% contribution margin ratio. The company’s fixed costs are $16,000,000 (that is, $80,000 per service outlet).

    Calculate the dollar amount of each type of service that the company must provide in order to break even. (Round computations for weighted average contribution margin to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50, and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.) Oil changes $ Break repairs $

    The company has a desired net income of $60,000 per service outlet. What is the dollar amount of each type of service that must be provided by each service outlet to meet its target net income per outlet? (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.) Oil changes $ Break repairs $

    Question 3

    Mega Electronix sells television sets and DVD players. The business is divided into two divisions along product lines. CVP income statements for a recent quarter’s activity are presented below.

    TV Division DVD Division Total Sales $600,000 $400,000 $1,000,000 Variable costs 450,000 240,000 690,000 Contribution margin $150,000 $160,000 310,000 Fixed costs 124,000 Net income $186,000

    Determine sales mix percentage and contribution margin ratio for each division. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. .50.) Sales Mix Percentage TV Division DVD Division

    Contribution margin ratio

    TV Division DVD Division

    Calculate the company’s weighted average contribution margin ratio. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. .50.)

    Calculate the company’s break even point in dollars. (Use the rounded amount from the previous question when calculating the answer for this question.) $

    Determine the sales level in dollars for each division at the break even point. TV Division $ DVD Division $

    how many units would be sold at the break even point 436140

    Ramirez Corporation sells two types of computer chips. The sales mix is 30% (Q Chip) and 70% (Q Chip Plus). Q Chip has variable costs per unit of $36 and a selling price of $60. Q Chip Plus has variable costs per unit of $42 and a selling price of $78. Ramirez’s fixed costs are $540,000. How many units of Q Chip would be sold at the break even point?

    11,813

    5,063

    9,000

    5,869

    The weighted average unit contribution margin for Ramirez is

    $28.

    $32.

    $60.

    $30.

    cash budget 436145

    Randall Company is a merchandising company that sells a single product. The company’s inventories, production, and sales in units for the next three months have been forecasted as follows:

    October

    Beginning Inventory 10,000

    Merchandise Purchases 60,000

    Sales 60,000

    Ending Inventory 10,000

    November

    Beginning Inventory 10,000

    Merchandise Purchases 70,000

    Sales 70,000

    Ending Inventory 10,000

    December

    Beginning Inventory 10,000

    Merchandise Purchases 35,000

    Sales 40,000

    Ending Inventory 5,000

    Units are sold for $12 each. One fourth of all sales are paid for in the month of sale and the balance are paid for in the following month. Accounts receivable at September 30 totaled $450,000. Assume it will collected in full. Merchandise is purchased for $7 per unit. Half of the purchases are paid for in the month of the purchase and the remainder are paid for in the month following purchase. Selling and administrative expenses are expected to total $120,000 each month. One half of these expenses will be paid in the month in which they are incurred and the balance will be paid in the following month. There is no depreciation. Accounts payable at September 30 totaled $290,000. Cash at September 30 totaled $80,000. A payment of $300,000 for purchase of equipment is scheduled for November, and a dividend of $200,000 is to be paid in December. Minimum Cash Balance required is $10,000. If financing in required, company has a line of credit with their bank. Borrowing is done in $1,000 increments. Annual interest rate is 6%. Borrowing is done at the beginning of the month and paid back at end of month.


    Required:


    a. Prepare a Excel schedule of expected cash collections for each of the months of October, November, and December.


    b. Prepare a Excel schedule showing expected cash disbursements for merchandise purchases and selling and administrative expenses for each of the months October, November, and December.


    c. Prepare a cash budget for each of the months October, November, and December. Include a column for the Total 3 months ended Dec 31.



    cost accounting 436227

    Refer to the data from Butler Company’s Finishing Department.

    Butler Company’s Finishing Department

    Quantity

    Work in Process Beginning

    50

    Transferred In From Assembling Department

    1420

    Transferred Out to Finished Goods

    Work in Process Ending

    400

    Stage of Completion of Ending Work in Process

    Materials

    complete

    Labor

    70%

    Factory Overhead

    80%

    How many units were transferred to Finished Goods?

    What are the equivalent production units for materials, labor, and factory overhead, respectively, in the ending Work in Process?

    advanced accounting 436262

    How do we Report This?

    Southwestern Corporation operates throughout Texas buying and selling widgets. To expand into more profitable markets, the company recently decided to open a small subsidiary in the nearby country of Gualos. The currency in Gualos is the vilsek. For some time, the government of that country held the exchange rate constant: 1 vilsek equaled $0.20 (or 5 vilseks equaled $1,00). Initially Southwestern invested cash in this new operation; its $90,000 was converted into 450,000 vilseks ($90,000 x 5). Southwestern used one third of this money (150,000 vilseks, or $30,000) to purchase land to hold for the possible construction of a plant, invested one third in short term marketable securities, and spent one third in acquiring inventory for future resale.

    Shortly thereafter, the Gualos government officially revalued the currency so that 1 vilsek was worth $0.23. Because of the strength of the local economy, the viklsek gained buying power in relation to the U.S. dollar. The vilsek then was considered more valuable than in the past. Southwestern%u2019s accountants realized that a change had occurred; each of the assets was now worth more in U.S. dollars than the original $30,000 investment: 150,000 vilseks x $0.23 = $34,000. Two of the company%u2019s top officers met to determine the appropriate method for reporting this change in currency values.

    Controller: Nothing has changed. Our cost is still $30,000 for each item. That%u2019s what we spent. Accounting uses historical cost wherever possible. Thus, we should do nothing.

    Finance director: Yes, but the old rates are meaningless now. We would be foolish to report figures based on a rate that no longer exists. The cost is still 150,000 vilseks for each item. You are right, the cost has not changed. However, the vilsek is now worth $0.23, so our reported value must change.

    Controller: The new rate affects us only if we take money out of the country. We don%u2019t plan to do that for many years. The rate will probably change 20 more times before we remove money from Gualos. We%u2019ve got to stick to our $30,000 historical cost. That%u2019s our cost and that%u2019s good, basic accounting.

    Finance director: You mean that for the next 20 years we will be translating balances for external reporting purposes using an exchange rate that has not existed for years? That doesn%u2019t make sense. I have a real problem using an antiquated rate for the investments and inventory. They will be sold for cash when the new rate is in effect. These balances have no remaining relation to the original exchange rate.

    Controller: You misunderstand the impact of an exchange rate fluctuation. Within Gualos, no impact occurs. One vilsek is still one vilsek. The effect is realized only when an actual conversion takes place into U.S. dollars at a new rate. At that point, we will properly measure and report the gain or loss. That is when realization takes place. Until then our cost has not changed.

    Finance director: I simply see no value at all in producing financial information based entirely on an exchange rate that does not exist. I don%u2019t care when realization takes place.

    Controller: You%u2019ve got to stick with historical cost, believe me. The exchange rate today isn%u2019t important unless we actually convert vilseks to dollars.

    How should Southwestern report each of these three assets on its current balance sheet? Chose a position and defend it. Perhaps you are a banker, or a stockholder, or a member of management. In the role you choose, what figure would you consider the fairest representation of each of the three assets? What figure is the best conveyor of information to an outside party? There is no single best answer to these questions. Do not assume the current pronouncement is correct. Consider the objectives of financial reporting in formulating your answer.

    transaction analysis using t accounts 436300

    Requirement 2:

    “font

    PLEASE SHOW WORK FOR THIS PROBLEM AND A,B,C THANKS

    During the month of April, Simpson Co. had cash receipts from customers of $110,600. Expenses totaled $72,800, and accrual basis net income was $19,600. There were no gains or losses during the month.

    Required:
    Calculate the revenues for Simpson Co. for April.

    Part 2

    (a)

    Accounts Receivable had a balance of $840 at the beginning of the month and $630 at the end of the month. Credit sales totaled $8,400 during the month. Calculate the cash collected from customers during the month, assuming that all sales were made on account. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Cash collected from customers $
    (b)

    The Supplies account had a balance of $378 at the beginning of the month and $511 at the end of the month. The cost of supplies used during the month was $1,638. Calculate the cost of supplies purchased during the month. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Cost of supplies purchased $
    (c)

    Wages Payable had a balance of $287 at the beginning of the month. During the month, $2,660 of wages were paid to employees. Wages Expense accrued during the month totaled $2,870. Calculate the balance of Wages Payable at the end of the month. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Wages payable $

    Requirement 2:
    Prepare the journal entries for the above transactions.

    General Journal Debit Credit
    a. (Click to select)Accounts receivable Unearned revenue Supplies expense Sales revenue Accounts payable Salaries expense Merchandise inventory Wages payable
    (Click to select)Sales revenue Supplies expense Accounts payable Merchandise inventory Accounts receivable Salaries expense Wages expense Unearned revenue
    (Click to select)Merchandise inventoryWages expenseAccounts payableWages payableCashSales revenueUnearned revenueSupplies expense
    (Click to select)Sales revenue Supplies on hand Accounts payable Unearned revenue Accounts receivable Supplies expense Cash Wages expense
    b. (Click to select)Salaries expense Supplies Merchandise inventory Sales revenue Accounts receivable Cash or accounts payable Wages expense Wages payable
    (Click to select)Cash or accounts payable Wages expense Salaries expense Merchandise inventory Wages payable Sales revenue Accounts receivable Supplies
    (Click to select)Supplies expense Sales revenue Wages payable Wages expense Merchandise inventory Accounts receivable Salaries expense Supplies
    (Click to select)Merchandise inventory Supplies Accounts receivable Salaries expense Sales revenue Wages payable Wages expense Supplies expense
    c. (Click to select)Supplies expense Salaries expense Wages payable Accounts receivable Supplies on hand Wages expense Accounts payable Merchandise inventory
    (Click to select)Accounts payable Merchandise inventory Wages expense Salaries expense Supplies on hand Supplies expense Accounts receivable Wages payable
    (Click to select)Merchandise inventory Wages payable Accounts receivable Sales revenue Accounts payable Salaries expense Supplies expense Cash
    (Click to select)Merchandise inventory Accounts payable Supplies on hand Salaries expense Wages payable Supplies expense Accounts receivable Cash

    Accounting Comment A?» reply with an actual answer no solicitation..i already reported abuse twice for this question and another.

    j j technology company which operates a chain of 30 279783

    J. J. Technology Company, which operates a chain of 30 electronics supply stores, has just completed its fourth year of operations. The direct write off method of recording bad debt expense has been used during the entire period. Because of substantial increases in sales volume and the amount of uncollectible accounts, the firm is considering changing to the allowance method. Information is requested as to the effect that an annual provision of ?1% of sales would have had on the amount of bad debt expense reported for each of the past four years. It is also considered desirable to know what the balance of Allowance for Doubtful Accounts would have been at the end of each year. The following data have been obtained from the accounts:

    ?



    Instructions

    Assemble the desired data, using the following column headings:

    ?



    2. Experience during the first four years of operations indicated that the receivables were either collected within two years or had to be written off as uncollectible. Does the estimate of ?1% of sales appear to be reasonably close to the actual experience with uncollectible accounts originating during the first two years?Explain.

    jordan footwear sells athletic shoes and uses the perpetual inve 279820

    Jordan Footwear sells athletic shoes and uses the perpetual inventory system. During June, Jordan engaged in the following transactions its first month of operations:

    a. On June 1, Jordan purchased, on credit, 100 pairs of basketball shoes and 210 pairs of running shoes with credit terms of 2/10, n/30. The basketball shoes were purchased at a cost of $75 per pair, and the running shoes were purchased at a cost of $55 per pair. Jordan paid Mole Trucking $250 cash to transport the shoes from the manufacturer to Jordan’s warehouse, shipping terms were F.O.B. shipping point, and the items were shipped on June 1 and arrived on June 4.

    b. On June 2, Jordan purchased 80 pairs of cross training shoes for cash. The shoes cost Jordan $60 per pair.

    c. On June 6, Jordan purchased 120 pairs of tennis shoes on credit. Credit terms were 2/10, n/25. The shoes were purchased at a cost of $40 per pair.

    d. On June 10, Jordan paid for the purchase of the basketball shoes and the running shoes in (a).

    e. On June 12, Jordan determined that $480 of the tennis shoes were defective. Jordan returned the defective merchandise to the manufacturer.

    f. On June 18, Jordan sold 50 pairs of basketball shoes at $110 per pair, 100 pairs of running shoes for $85 per pair, 18 pairs of cross training shoes for $100 per pair, and 35 pairs of tennis shoes for $65 per pair. All sales were for cash. The cost of the merchandise sold was $11,850.

    g. On June 21, customers returned 10 pairs of the basketball shoes purchased on June 18. The cost of the merchandise returned was $750.

    h. On June 23, Jordan sold another 20 pairs of basketball shoes, on credit, for $110 per pair and 15 pairs of cross training shoes for $100 cash per pair. The cost of the merchandise sold was $2,400.

    i. On June 30, Jordan paid for the June 6 purchase of tennis shoes less the return on June 12.

    j. On June 30, Jordan purchased 60 pairs of basketball shoes, on credit, for $75 each.

    The shoes were shipped F.O.B. destination and arrived at Jordan on July 3.

    Required:

    1. Prepare the journal entries to record the sale and purchase transactions for Jordan during June 2009.

    2. Assuming operating expenses of $5,300, prepare Jordan’s income statement for June 2009. (Ignore income tax expense.)

    kyoto manufacturing produces automobile mufflers which are then 279839

    Kyoto Manufacturing produces automobile mufflers, which are then sent to the United States where they are installed in domestically built cars. Truck Inc., a U.S. auto company, received a shipment of mufflers on December 15, 2010. The mufflers were subsequently paid for on January 30, 2011. The invoice was denominated in Korean won and totaled 4,500,000 won. The number of Korean won required to purchase 1 U.S. dollar fluctuated as follows:

    Exchange Rates

    December 15, 2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,000

    December 31, 2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900

    January 30, 2011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

    Provide the necessary journal entries for Truck Inc. to record the above transactions assuming Truck Inc.’s fiscal year end is December 31.

    mathis company and reece company use the perpetual inventory sys 279874

    Mathis Company and Reece Company use the perpetual inventory system. The following transactions occurred during the month of April:

    a. On April 1, Mathis Company purchased merchandise on account from Reece Company with credit terms of 2/10, n/30. The selling price of the merchandise was $3,500 and the cost of the merchandise sold was $2,450.

    b. On April 1, Mathis paid freight charges of $100 cash to have the goods delivered to its warehouse.

    c. On April 8, Mathis returned $1,000 of the merchandise. The cost of the merchandise returned was $700.

    d. On April 10, Mathis paid Reece the balance due.

    Required:

    1. Prepare the journal entry to record the April 1 purchase (ignore any freight charges) of merchandise by Mathis Company.

    2. Prepare the journal entry to record the payment of freight on April 1.

    3. Prepare the journal entry to record the April 8 return of merchandise.

    4. Prepare the journal entry to record the April 10 payment to Reece Company.

    james company 279921

    James Company purchases pipes and fittings from a variety of vendors, both wholesalers and manufacturers. All vendorsmust be approved before a purchase order can be placed with a particular vendor. Only employees classified as purchase agents have authority to place purchase orders.James tracks inventory by a unique inventory item number.When merchandise received at the receiving dock is processed, only one receiving clerk counts the inventory items and records which items were received and enters quantities on the receiving report.

    Create an REA diagram for James Corporation’s expenditure cycle as described above. Be sure to include all relevant entities, relationships, attributes, key attributes, and car dinalities (no need to do participation cardinalities).

    on august 15 2011 a hurricane damaged a warehouse of 279930

    On August 15, 2011, a hurricane damaged a warehouse of Rheinhart Merchandise Company. The entire inventory and many accounting records stored in the warehouse were completely destroyed. Although the inventory was not insured, a portion could be sold for scrap. Through the use of the remaining records, the following data are assembled:

    Inventory, January 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 375,000

    Purchases, January 1–August 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,385,000

    Cash sales, January 1–August 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225,000

    Collection of accounts receivable, January 1–August 15 . . . . . . . . . 2,115,000

    Accounts receivable, January 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175,000

    Accounts receivable, August 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,000

    Salvage value of inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,000

    Gross profit percentage on sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32%

    Compute the inventory loss as a result of the hurricane.

    on december 1 2012 ruggiero company had the account balances 279933

    On December 1, 2012, Ruggiero Company had the account balances shown below.

    ?



    The following transactions occurred during December.

    Dec. 3 Purchased 4,000 units of inventory on account at a cost of $0.72 per unit.

    5 Sold 4,400 units of inventory on account for $0.90 per unit. (It sold

    3,000 of the $0.60 units and 1,400 of the $0.72.)

    7 Granted the December 5 customer $180 credit for 200 units of inventory returned costing $150. These units were returned to inventory.

    17 Purchased 2,200 units of inventory for cash at $0.80 each.

    22 Sold 2,000 units of inventory on account for $0.95 per unit. (It sold 2,000 of the $0.72 units.)

    Adjustment data:

    1. Accrued salaries payable $400.

    2. Depreciation $200 per month.

    3. Income tax expense was $215, to be paid next year.

    Instructions

    (a) Journalize the December transactions and adjusting entries, assuming Ruggiero uses the perpetual inventory method.

    (b) Enter the December 1 balances in the ledger T accounts and post the December transactions. In addition to the accounts mentioned above, use the following additional accounts: Cost of Goods Sold, Depreciation Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense, Salaries and Wages Payable, Sales Revenue, Sales Returns and Allowances, Income Tax Expense, and Income Taxes Payable.

    (c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2012.

    (d) Prepare an income statement for December 2012 and a classified balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

    (e) Compute ending inventory and cost of goods sold under FIFO, assuming Ruggiero Company uses the periodic inventory system.

    (f) Compute ending inventory and cost of goods sold under LIFO, assuming Ruggiero Company uses the periodic inventorysystem.

    on june 30 2011 a flash flood damaged the warehouse 279957

    On June 30, 2011, a flash flood damaged the warehouse and factory of Magna Corporation, completely destroying the work in process inventory. There was no damage to either the raw materials or finished goods inventories. A physical inventory taken after the flood revealed the following valuations:

    Finished goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $123,000

    Work in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

    Raw materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,100

    The inventory on January 1, 2011, consisted of the following:

    Finished goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $109,000

    Work in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103,000

    Raw materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,300

    $261,300

    A review of the books and records disclosed that the gross profit margin historically approximated 42% of sales. The sales for the first six months of 2011 were $584,000. Raw materials purchases were $88,000. Direct labor costs for this period were $130,000, and manufacturing overhead has historically been applied at 70% of direct labor. Compute the value of the work in process inventory lost on June 30, 2011.

    orser furniture purchases and sells dining room furniture its m 279991

    Orser Furniture purchases and sells dining room furniture. Its management uses the perpetual method of inventory accounting. Journalize the following transactions that occurred during October 2012:

    Oct. 2 Purchased on account $27,000 of inventory with payment terms 2/10, n/30, and paid $650 in cash to have it shipped from the vendor’s warehouse to the Orser showroom.

    5 Sold inventory costing $4,900 for $8,250 on account.

    10 Paid $13,950 of accounts payable (from October 2 purchase) and received the cash discount.

    14 Returned two damaged tables purchased on October 2 (costing $550 each) to the vendor.

    19 Received payment of $4,560 from customers.

    20 Paid the balance of the account from October 2 purchase.

    22 Sold inventory costing $3,800 for $5,200 on account.

    24 A customer returned a dining room set that she decided didn’t match her home. She paid $3,250 for it, and its cost to Orser was $1,800.

    Assuming the balance in the inventory account is $12,000 on October 1, and no other transactions relating to inventory occurred during the month, what is the inventory balance at the end of October?

    oxendine company s inventory records for the month of november r 279993

    Oxendine Company’s inventory records for the month of November reveal the following:

    Inventory, November 1 200 units @ $18.00

    November 4, purchase 250 units @ $18.50

    November 7, sale 300 units @ $42.00

    November 13, purchase 220 units @ $18.90

    November 18, purchase 150 units @ $19.00

    November 22, sale 380 units @ $42.50

    November 24, purchase 200 units @ $19.20

    November 28, sale 110 units @ $43.00

    Selling and administrative expenses for the month were $10,800. Depreciation expense was $4,000. Oxendine’s tax rate is 35%.

    Required

    1. Calculate the cost of goods sold and ending inventory under each of the following three methods assuming a periodic inventory system:

    (a) FIFO,

    (b) LIFO, and

    (c) Weighted average.

    2. Calculate the gross profit and net income under each costing assumption.

    3. Under which costing method will Oxendine pay the least taxes? Explain your answer.

    4. Assume that Oxendine prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS. Which costing method should the company use to pay the least amount of taxes? Explain your answer.

    rae philippe was a warehouse manager for atkins oilfield supply 280023

    Rae Philippe was a warehouse manager for Atkins Oilfield Supply, Co., a business that operated across eight Western states. She was an old pro and had known most of the other warehouse managers for many years. Around December each year, auditors would come to do a physical count of the inventory at each warehouse. Recently, Rae’s brother started his own drilling company, and persuaded Rae to ?oloan?? him 80 joints of 5 inch drill pipe to use for his first well. He promised to have it back to Rae by December, but the well encountered problems and the pipe was still in the ground. Rae knew the auditors were on the way, so she called her friend Andy, who ran another Atkins warehouse. ?oSend me over 80 joints of 5 inch pipe tomorrow and I’ll get them back to you ASAP?? said Rae. When the auditors came, all the pipe on the books was accounted for, and they filed a ?ono exception?? report.

    Requirements

    1. Is there anything the company or the auditors could do in future to detect this kind of fraudulent practice?

    2. How would this kind of action impact the financial performance of the company?

    records of the swain new products co show the following 280036

    Records of the Swain New Products Co. show the following data relative to Product M:

    March 2 Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 units at $26.00

    3 Sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 units at $33.00

    6 Purchase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 units at $27.50

    13 Purchase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 units at $28.00

    20 Sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 units at $34.50

    25 Purchase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 units at $27.00

    28 Sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 units at $35.00

    Instructions: Calculate the inventory balance and the gross profit on sales for the month on each of the following bases.

    1. Perpetual FIFO

    2. Periodic FIFO

    refer to the financial information for kellogg s and general mil 280075

    Refer to the financial information for Kellogg’s and General Mills reproduced at the end of this book and answer the following questions:

    Required

    1. Are Kellogg’s and General Mills merchandisers, manufacturers, or service providers?

    2. What is the dollar amount of inventories that each company reports on its balance sheet at the end of the most recent year? What percentage of total assets do inventories represent for each company?

    3. Refer to Note 1 in Kellogg’s annual report. What inventory valuation method does the company use? What is the advantage to the company of using this method?

    4. Refer to Note 1 in General Mills’s annual report. What inventory valuation method(s) does the company use? Does the fact that Kellogg’s and General Mills use different methods make it difficult to compare the two companies?

    5. Given the nature of their businesses, which inventory system, periodic or perpetual, would you expect both Kellogg’s and General Mills to use? Explain your answer.

    refer to the financial statements of abercrombie fitch and 280077

    Refer to the financial statements of Abercrombie & Fitch and Aeropostale that are supplied with this text.

    Required:

    1. What amounts do Abercrombie & Fitch and Aeropostale report for inventories in its Consolidated Balance Sheets at February 3, 2007 and January 28, 2006?

    2. Do Abercrombie & Fitch and Aeropostale use the same method to value its inventories?

    3. What amount does Abercrombie & Fitch report for cost of goods sold for the years ending February 3, 2007, January 28, 2006, and January 29, 2005 (fiscal 2006, 2005, and 2004)? What amount does Aeropostale report for cost of goods sold for the years ending February 3, 2007, January 28, 2006, and January 29, 2005?

    4. Compute the gross profit and inventory turnover ratios for fiscal year ending February 3, 2007, for each company? What do these ratios tell you about the success of each company in managing and controlling its inventory?

    5. Do Abercrombie & Fitch and Aeropostale use the lower of cost market method to account for their inventories? By what amount have they written inventories down in the fiscal year ending February 3, 2007?

    shine king cleaning has decided that in addition to providing 280138

    Shine King Cleaning has decided that, in addition to providing cleaning services, it will sell cleaning products. During December, Shine King completed the following transactions:

    Dec 2 Purchased 600 units of inventory for $3,600 from Sparkle, Co., on terms, 3/10, n/20.

    5 Purchased 400 units of inventory from Borax on terms 4/5, n/30. The total invoice was for $3,200, which included a $200 freight charge.

    7 Returned 100 units of inventory to Sparkle from the December 2 purchase (cost $600).

    9 Paid Borax.

    11 Sold 350 units of goods to Happy Maids for $4,900 on terms 5/10, n/30. Shine King’s cost of the goods was $2,100.

    12 Paid Sparkle.

    15 Received 30 units with a retail price of $420 of goods back from customer Happy Maids. The goods cost Shine King $180.

    21 Received payment from Happy Maids, settling the amount due in full.

    28 Sold 200 units of goods to Bridget, Inc., for cash of $3,000 (cost $1,144).

    29 Paid cash for Utilities of $350.

    30 Paid cash for Sales commission expense of $225.

    31 Recorded the following adjusting entries:

    Physical count of Inventory on December 31 showed 330 units of goods on hand, $2,541

    Depreciation, $170

    Accrued salary expense of $700

    Prepared all other adjustments necessary for December

    Requirements

    1. Add any needed accounts to Shine King’s existing chart of accounts.

    2. Journalize and post the December transactions. Key all items by date. Compute each account balance, and denote the balance as Bal.

    3. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Denote each adjusting amount as Adj. After posting all adjusting entries, prove the equality of debits and credits in the ledger.

    4. Prepare the December multi step income statement, statement of retained earnings, and balance sheet for the company.

    5. Journalize the December closing entries for the company.

    soul patrol distribution markets cds of the performing artist ta 280150

    Soul Patrol Distribution markets CDs of the performing artist Taylor Hicks. At the beginning of October, Soul Patrol had in beginning inventory 2,000 of Hicks’s CDs with a unit cost of $7. During October Soul Patrol made the following purchases of Hicks’s CDs.



    During October, 11,400 units were sold. Soul Patrol uses a periodic inventory system.

    Instructions

    (a) Determine the cost of goods available for sale.

    (b) Determine (1) the ending inventory and (2) the cost of goods sold under each of the assumed cost flow methods (FIFO, LIFO, and average cost). Prove the accuracy of the cost of goods sold under the FIFO and LIFO methods.

    (c) Which cost flow method results in (1) the highest inventory amount for the balance sheet and (2) the highest cost of goods sold for the incomestatement?

    accounting 435597

    Pilgrim Products, Inc., buys a controlling interest in the common stock of Crestwood Corporation. Shortly after the acquisition, a meeting of Pilgrim’s accounting department is convened to discuss the internal reporting procedures required by the ownership of this subsidiary. Each member of the staff has a definite opinion as to whether the equity method, initial value method, or partial equity method should be adopted. To resolve this issue, Pilgrim’s chief financial officer outlines several of her concerns about the decision.

    I already understand how each method works. I know the general advantages and disadvantages of all three. I realize, for example, that the equity method provides more detailed information whereas the initial value method is much easier to apply. What I need to know are the factors specific to our situation that should be considered in deciding which method to adopt. I must make a recommendation to the president on this matter, and he will want firm reasons for my favoring a particular approach. I don’t want us to select a method and then find out in six months that the

    information is not adequate for our needs or that the cost of adapting our system to monitor Crestwood outweighs the benefits derived from the data.

    What are the factors that Pilgrim’s officials should evaluate when making this decision? Be sure to discuss at least three (3) factors.

    journal entry for general fund 435670

    1. Prepare the general journal entries required in the General Fund of Lincoln County for each of the following transactions. Also, use transaction analysis to show any effects on the GCA GLTL accounts.
      1. The county levied property taxes of $5,000,000. Two percent are expected to prove uncollectible. The rest of the taxes are expected to be collected by year end or soon enough thereafter to be considered available at year end.
      2. The county collected $4,300,000 of the taxes receivable before the due date and the balance of taxes became delinquent.
      3. The county collected another $540,000 of the taxes receivable by the end of the fiscal year.
      4. The county paid salaries and wages of $3,500,000 to General Fund employees during the year. Accrued salaries at the beginning of the year were $180,000, and accrued salaries at year end were $200,000.
      5. $800,000 was loaned from the county General Fund (from resources available for general purposes) to the Lincoln County Inland Port Authority Enterprise Fund. The loan is to be repaid in three years.
      6. The county purchased materials and supplies for various General Fund departments. The actual cost of $398,000 was vouchered.
      7. The county purchased road maintenance equipment at an actual cost of $40,000, which was vouchered.
      8. The county contributed $500,000 of General Fund money to a CPF to provide partial financing for construction of its recently approved sports center. The balance of the cost will be financed by grants and borrowings.

    financial accounting 435805

    Prior to recording adjusting entries, the Office Supplies account had a $390 debit balance. A physical count of the supplies showed $140 of unused supplies available. The required adjusting entry is:

    rev: 10_04_2012

    Debit Office Supplies Expense $250 and credit Office Supplies $250.
    Debit Office Supplies Expense $140 and credit Office Supplies $140.
    Debit Office Supplies $140 and credit Office Supplies Expense $250.
    Debit Office Supplies $140 and credit Office Supplies Expense $140.
    Debit Office Supplies $250 and credit Supplies Expense $250.

    he move of retail banking to use atms after citibank unveiled its first atms 435815

    BAC41 Management Information Systems (Sample Exam)

    Semester 1/2013

    Part I : Multiple choices (20 marks, 1 mark each)

    Note : Multiple choices questions are from every chapter that posted through Moodle, the numbers of question per each chapter are 2 or 3 questions.

    Sample questions

    1. The move of retail banking to use ATMs after Citibank unveiled its first ATMs

    illustrates the use of information systems to achieve which business objective?

    A) improved efficiency

    B) customer and supplier intimacy

    C) survival

    D) competitive advantage

    2. The average number of tickets sold daily online is an example of

    A) input.

    B) raw data.

    C) meaningful information.

    D) feedback.

    3. What is the most important function of an enterprise application?

    A) increasing speed of communicating

    B) enabling business functions and departments to share information

    C) enabling a company to work collaboratively with customers and suppliers

    D) enabling cost effective e business processes

    4. A(n) ________ system collects data from various key business processes and stores

    the data in a single, comprehensive data repository, usable by other parts of the

    business.

    A) transaction

    B) enterprise

    C) automatic reporting

    D) management information

    5. Which of the following statements is not true about information technology’s impacts

    on business firms?

    A) It helps firms expand in size.

    B) It helps firms lower the cost of market participation.

    C) It helps reduce transaction costs.

    D) All statements are true 2

    6. Which of the following is the competitive force?

    A) suppliers

    B) organization politics

    C) external environment

    D) internal environment

    7. A rival of your company, AutoTown, is going to implement analytic software that mines customer data with a goal of enabling the building of automobiles that customers actually want. This can be categorized as using information systems for which competitive strategy?

    A) low cost leadership

    B) product differentiation

    C) focus on market niche

    D) customer intimacy

    8. To what competitive force did the printed encyclopedia industry succumb?

    A) positioning and rivalry among competitors

    B) low cost of entry

    C) substitute products or services

    D) customer’s bargaining power

    9. In the information age, the obligations that individuals and organizations have

    concerning rights to intellectual property fall within the moral dimension of

    A) property rights and obligations.

    B) system quality.

    C) accountability and control.

    D) information rights and obligations.

    10. Which of the following is not one of the five steps discussed in the chapter as a

    process for analyzing an ethical issue?

    A) Identify the responsible persons.

    B) Identify the stakeholders.

    C) Identify the options you can reasonably take.

    D) Identify and clearly describe the facts. 3

    11. The network standard for connecting desktop computers into local area networks

    that enabled the widespread adoption of client/server computing and local area networks and further stimulated the adoption of personal computers is

    A) TCP/IP

    B) COBOL

    C) Ethernet

    D) ASCII

    12. Which of the following is NOT an example of the emerging mobile computing platforms?

    A) netbooks

    B) the Kindle

    C) cell phones

    D) All are the example of the emerging mobile computing platforms

    13. Duplicate data in multiple data files is called data ________.

    A) redundancy

    B) repetition

    C) independence

    D) partitions

    14. The type of database management approach that represented with two dimensional

    tables is the

    A) hierarchical DBMS.

    B) relational DBMS.

    C) network DBMS.

    D) object oriented DBMS.

    15. Which is one of the layers in TCP/IP reference model?

    A) hardware

    B) physical

    C) network interface

    D) software

    16. The Internet is based on which three key technologies?

    A) TCP/IP, HTML, and HTTP

    B) TCP/IP, HTTP, and packet switching

    C) client/server computing, packet switching, and the development of communications

    standards for linking networks and computers

    D) client/server computing, packet switching, and HTTP 4

    17. The six important business objectives of information technology are new products, services, and business models; customer and supplier intimacy; survival; competitive

    advantage; operational excellence; and

    A) improved flexibility.

    B) improved decision making.

    C) improved business practices.

    D) improved efficiency.

    18. The business value of an effective supply chain management system includes all of

    the following except

    A) faster time to market.

    B) cost reduction.

    C) supply matched to demand.

    D) increased inventory levels.

    19. A company’s suppliers and the processes for managing relationships with them is the

    A) supplier’s internal supply chain.

    B) external supply chain.

    C) upstream portion of the supply chain.

    D) downstream portion of the supply chain.

    20. A suite of integrated software modules for finance and accounting, human resources,

    manufacturing and production, and sales and marketing best describes

    A) SCM software.

    B) ERP systems.

    C) ERM software.

    D) CRM modules. 5

    Part II: Essay Questions

    Instruction : Answer 4 questions.

    The essay questions are from Ch1(Information System in business today), Ch3

    (Information Systems, organisation and strategy) , Ch4 (Ethical and social issues in

    Information Systems) and Ch9 (Achieving operational excellence and customer intimacy:

    enterprise applications).

    Sample questions

    1. You work as a manager to operate the show at the Opera House. How could you use

    information systems to achieve greater customer intimacy?

    2. Discuss Porter’s competitive forces model and how does it help company to

    implement the strategies and use of Information Systems?

    3. For the use of employee monitoring system, discuss the impacts of using this system

    on the ethical, social and political issues.

    4. What is ERP (SCM, CRM)? Why do companies invest in ERP (SCM, CRM)? What

    are the concerns of implementing an ERP (SCM, CRM)?

    6 MIS Sample Essay Exam Semester 2/2013

    (Note : There will be 4 questions in the formal exam)

    Part II: Essay Questions (30 marks). In each question, you are expected to

    write the answer between one to two pages.

    1. Kmart’s Inc., operating for more than 30 retail stores in New South Wales , sell a

    range of merchandise, including accessories, home furnishings, and housewares. Senior management has decided that Kmart’s needs to tailor merchandise more to local tastes.

    For example, stores in Sydney might stock more trendy style of clothes than

    outside’s Sydney retail stores. Based on the above scenario, which competitive strategy Kmart is using? How could information systems help Kmart to implement this new strategy? (5 marks)

    How does the implemented Information System can improve the value chain of

    Kmart? (5 marks)

    What data need to be collected in order to implement the Information System

    to add value to Kmart? (5 marks)

    Discuss decisions need to be made prior to implementing information

    system. (5 marks)

    2. Ever get the feeling somebody is trailing you on the Web, watching your every click? Wonder why you start seeing display ads and pop ups just after you’ve been scouring the Web for a car, a dress, or cosmetic product? Well, you are right: your behaviour is being tracked, and you are being targeted on the Web so that you are exposed to certain ads and not others. The Web sites you visit track the search engine queries you enter, pages visited, Web content viewed, ads clicked, videos watched, content shared, and the products you purchase. Google is the largest Web tracker, monitoring thousands of Websites. It is noted that Google knows more than about you you’re your mother does. Which of the five moral dimensions of information system identified in the above case? Discuss them. (5 marks)

    3. Brisbane based Toyota Australia, with a network of 30 dealers, did not know enough

    to operate efficiently with their own main business functions (e.g. accounting, sales,

    marketing, inventory, human resources). How could ERP system help solve this problem?

    (5 marks)

    Note: this question can also ask SCM, CRM

    Attachments:

    prepare the journal entry to set up the required allowance 279398

    After analyzing the current accounts receivable, your company decides that the allowance for doubtful accounts should have an ending normal balance of $6,880. There is a $1,130 debit balance in the account. Prepare the journal entry to set up the required allowance.

    Do not enter dollar signs or commas in the input boxes.

    Date Account Title and Explanation Debit Credit
    Dec 31

    Correct

    Marks for this submission: 4/4.

    Question 2

    Marks: 2/2

    Take me to the text

    Scapegoat Company has net accounts receivable opening balance of $291,000 and ending balance of $265,000. The total sales amount for the year is $1,700,000, of which 84% are on credit. Normal credit terms are 30 days. Calculate the day sales outstanding ratio and the accounts receivable turnover.

    Do not enter dollar signs or commas in the input boxes.

    Round your answers to 2 decimal places.

    Day sales outstanding: days

    Accounts Receivable Turnover: times

    Correct

    Marks for this submission: 2/2.

    Question 3

    Marks: 5/5

    Take me to the text

    The following chart is prepared by the accountant of Happy Shoes Inc. The percentages are based on historical performance. Happy Shoes Inc. uses the balance sheet approach to estimate uncollectible receivables.

    Do not enter dollar signs or commas in the input boxes.

    a) Calculate the company’s bad debt.

    Aging Category Bad Debt % Balance Estimated Bad Debt
    30 days 1.5% $86,000
    31 60 days 3% $45,000
    over 60 days 5.5% $17,000
    Total $148,000

    b) Assume that allowance for doubtful accounts has a debit balance of $1,100. Calculate the amount of bad debt expense the company will record.

    Bad Debt Expense: $

    Correct

    Marks for this submission: 5/5.

    Question 4

    Marks: 11/11

    Take me to the text

    Williams Canada operates in an industry that has a high rate of bad debts. Before the year end adjustments on November 30, Williams Canada’s accounts receivable has a debit balance of $592,000 and the allowance for doubtful accounts has a credit balance of $16,800. The year end balance reported on the balance sheet for the allowance for doubtful accounts will be based on the aging schedule shown below:

    Do not enter dollar signs or commas in the input boxes.

    a) Fill in the table to calculate the balance for the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.

    Aging Category Bad Debt % Balance Estimated Bad Debt
    Less than 16 days 2% $333,000
    16 30 days 3.5% $127,000
    31 45 days 5% $62,000
    46 60 days 12% $31,000
    61 75 days 21% $28,000
    Over 75 days 41% $11,000
    Total $592,000

    b) Prepare the journal entry to record bad debt expense for the year.

    Date Account Title and Explanation Debit Credit
    Nov 30

    Correct

    Marks for this submission: 11/11.

    Question 5

    Marks: 4/4

    Take me to the text

    On February 19, you discover that your customer, Melvin Binger, has gone bankrupt. He owes you $1,440. Prepare the appropriate journal entry assuming the direct method is used.

    Do not enter dollar signs or commas in the input boxes.

    Date Account Title and Explanation Debit Credit
    Feb 19

    Correct

    Marks for this submission: 4/4.

    Question 6

    Marks: /31

    Take me to the text

    Tim Barry owns a toy shop called Tim’s Toys. The total accounts receivable balance of Tim’s Toys on January 31 was $81,000. On February 1, Mr. L. Smith who owes the company $12,000 informs that he will be unable to pay the amount owing in the present year. However, he agrees to sign a two year note to be paid in semi annual installments, plus 2% interest on the balance outstanding. The company’s year end is December 31.

    Calculate the interest revenue and payment amounts for each year.

    Do not enter dollar signs or commas in the input boxes.

    Round your answers to the nearest whole dollar.

    Date Opening Balance (a) Interest (b) Total (a+b) Payment Closing Balance
    Feb 1, 2011
    Aug 1, 2011
    Feb 1, 2012
    Aug 1, 2012
    Feb 1, 2013

    b) Prepare the journal entry on February 1, 2011 when the note is signed and on August 1, 2011 when the first payment is made.

    Enter the credit accounts in alphabetical order.

    Date Account Title and Explanation Debit Credit
    Feb 1
    Issue note receivable to replace accounts receivable
    Aug 1
    Record receipt of interest and principal

    Question 7

    Marks: /4

    Take me to the text

    B&B Inc. uses the allowance method to account for uncollectible receivables. During 2012, the company made total credit sales of $1,090,000, of which $211,000 was currently owed by customers. According to the company’s historical sales, 1.5% of total sales will be uncollected. B&B Inc. uses an income statement approach to estimate the amount of uncollectible receivables. The company’s year end is December 31.

    Prepare the journal entry to account for the amount deemed uncollectible.

    Do not enter dollar signs or commas in the input boxes.

    Date Account Title and Explanation Debit Credit
    Feb 28

    Question 8

    Marks: /8

    Take me to the text

    On May 31, 2011, Mann Company’s accounts receivable ledger showed an ending balance of $31,000. The company realized that $1,550 of accounts receivable was uncollectible because a customer went bankrupt. Prepare a journal entry to demonstrate the treatment of $1,550 uncollectible amount using (a) direct method and (b) allowance method.

    Do not enter dollar signs or commas in the input boxes.

    a) Direct Method

    Date Account Title and Explanation Debit Credit
    May 31

    Date Account Title and Explanation Debit Credit
    May 31

    Attachments:

    consider the following transactions that occurred in september 2 279415

    Consider the following transactions that occurred in September 2012 for Aquamarines, Inc.

    Sep 3 Purchased inventory on terms 1/15, n/eom, $5,000.

    4 Purchased inventory for cash of $1,700.

    6 Returned $500 of inventory from September 4 purchase.

    8 Sold goods on terms of 2/15, n/35 of $6,000 that cost $2,640.

    10 Paid for goods purchased September 3.

    12 Received goods from September 8 sale of $400 that cost $160.

    23 Received payment from September 8 customer.

    25 Sold goods to Smithsons for $1,100 that cost $400. Terms of n/30 were offered. As a courtesy to Smithsons, $75 of freight was added to the invoice for which cash was paid directly to UPS by Aquamarines, Inc.

    29 Received payment from Smithsons.

    Requirement

    1. Journalize September transactions for Aquamarines, Inc. No explanations are required.

    data on the physical inventory of winesap company as of 279438

    Data on the physical inventory of Winesap Company as of December 31, 2010, are presented below.

    ?



    Quantity and cost data from the last purchases invoice of the year and the next to the last purchases invoice are summarized as follows:

    ?



    Instructions

    Determine the inventory at cost and also at the lower of cost or market, using the first in, first out method. Record the appropriate unit costs on an inventory sheet and complete the pricing of the inventory. When there are two different unit costs applicable to an item, proceed as follows:

    1. Draw a line through the quantity, and insert the quantity and unit cost of the last purchase.

    2. On the following line, insert the quantity and unit cost of the next to the last purchase.

    3. Total the cost and market columns and insert the lower of the two totals in the Lower of C or M column. The first item on the inventory sheet has been completed below as anexample.

    diane delbert operates a health food bakery that uses a 279471

    Diane Delbert operates a health food bakery that uses a special type of ground fl our in one of its high margin products. The bakery operates 365 days a year. Delbert finds that she seems to order either too much or too little special fl our and asks for your help. After some discussion, you find that she has no idea of when or how much to order. An examination of her records and answers to further questions reveal the following information:

    Annual usage of special flour ………………………………………………..7,000 pounds

    Average number of days delay between initiating and receiving an order ….….12

    Estimated cost per order ……………………………………………………$32.00

    Estimated annual cost of carrying a pound of special fl our in inventory …..$0.50

    a. Calculate the economic order quantity for fl our.

    b. Assume that Delbert desires a safety stock cushion of seven days’ usage. Calculate the appropriate order point.

    dick haney is opening a new business that will sell 279473

    Dick Haney is opening a new business that will sell sporting goods. It will initially be a small operation, and he is concerned about the security of his assets. He will not be able to be at the business all of the time and will have to rely on his employees and internal control procedures to ensure that transactions are properly accounted for and assets are safeguarded. He will have a store manager and two other employees who will be sales personnel and stock personnel and who will also perform any other duties necessary. Dick will be in the business on a regular basis. He has come to you for advice.

    Required

    Write a memo to Dick outlining the procedures that he should implement to ensure that his store assets are protected and that the financial transactions are properly recorded.

    dobbs wholesale antiques makes all sales under terms of fob 279480

    Dobbs Wholesale Antiques makes all sales under terms of FOB shipping point. The company usually ships inventory to customers approximately one week after receiving the order. For orders received late in December, Kathy Dobbs, the owner, decides when to ship the goods. If profits are already at an acceptable level, Dobbs delays shipment until January. If profits for the current year are lagging behind expectations, Dobbs ships the goods during December.

    Requirements

    1. Under Dobbs’ FOB policy, when should the company record a sale?

    2. Do you approve or disapprove of Dobbs’ manner of deciding when to ship goods to customers and record the sales revenue? If you approve, give your reason. If you disapprove, identify a better way to decide when to ship goods. (There is no accounting rule against Dobbs’ practice.)

    durham denim uses backflush costing to account for production co 279489

    Durham Denim uses backflush costing to account for production costs of its clothing line. During August 2010, the firm produced 150,000 garments and sold 149,000. The standard cost for each garment is:

    Direct material ……………….$2

    Conversion costs ……………. 4

    Total cost …………………….$6

    The firm had no inventory on August 1. The following events took place in August:

    ?c Purchased $302,000 of direct material

    ?c Incurred $608,000 of conversion costs

    ?c Applied $600,000 of conversion costs to Raw and In Process Inventory

    ?c Finished 150,000 garments

    ?c Sold 149,000 garments for $10 each

    a. Prepare journal entries using backflush costing with a minimum number of entries.

    b. Post the amounts in (a) to T accounts.

    c. Explain any inventory account balances.

    el faro company merchandises a single product called smart the 279531

    El Faro Company merchandises a single product called Smart. The following date represent beginning inventory and purchases of Smart during the past year: January 1 inventory, 34,000 units at $11.00, February purchases, 40,000 units at $12.000; March purchases, 80,000 units at $12.40; May purchases, 60,000 units at $12.60; July purchases, 100,000 units at $12.80; September purchases, 80,000 units at 12.60; and November purchases, 30,000 units at $13.00. Sales of Smart totaled 393,000 units at $20.00 per unit. Selling and administrative expenses totaled $2,551,000 for the year. El Faro Company uses the periodic inventory system.

    Required

    1. Prepare a schedule to compute the cost of goods available for sale.

    2. Compute income before income taxes under each of the following inventory cost flow assumptions:

    (a) The average cost method;

    (b) The FIFO method; and

    (c) The LIFO method.

    3. Compute inventory turnover and days inventory on hand under each of the inventory cost flow assumptions listed in requirement 2. What conclusion can you draw?

    europa corporation is financing an ongoing construction project 279541

    Europa Corporation is financing an ongoing construction project. The firm will need $5,000,000 of new capital during each of the next three years. The firm has a choice of issuing new debt or equity each year as the funds are needed, or issue only debt now and equity later. Its target capital structure is 40 percent debt and 60 percent equity, and it wants to be at that structure in three years, when the project has been completed. Debt flotation costs for a single debt issue would be 1.6 percent of the gross debt proceeds. Yearly flotation costs for three separate issues of debt would be 3.0 percent of the gross amount. Ignoring time value effects, how much would the firm save by raising all of the debt now, in a single issue, rather than in three separate issues?

    ever since he was a kid carl montague wanted to 279544

    Ever since he was a kid, Carl Montague wanted to be a pro football player. When that didn’t work out, he found another way to channel his natural competitive spirit: He bought a small auto parts store in Kentucky that was deep in red ink (negative earnings). At the end of the year, he created ?oghost?? inventory by recording fake inventory purchases. He offset these transactions by ?oadjustments?? to Cost of goods sold, thereby boosting profit and strengthening the balance sheet. Fortified with great financials, he got bank loans that allowed him to build up a regional chain of stores, buy a local sports franchise, and take on the lifestyle of a celebrity. When the economy in the region tanked, he could no longer cover his losses with new debt or equity infusions, and the whole empire fell like a house of cards.

    Requirements

    1. Name several parties that could have been hurt by the actions of Carl Montague.

    2. What kind of adjustment to Cost of goods sold (debit or credit) would have the effect of boosting earnings?

    farooqui books uses the retail inventory method to estimate its 279577

    Farooqui Books uses the retail inventory method to estimate its monthly ending inventories. The following information is available for two of its departments at October 31, 2012.



    At December 31, Farooqui Books takes a physical inventory at retail. The actual retail values of the inventories in each department are Hardcovers $790,000 and Paperbacks $335,000.

    Instructions

    (a) Determine the estimated cost of the ending inventory for each department at October 31, 2012, using the retail inventory method.

    (b) Compute the ending inventory at cost for each department at December 31, assuming the cost to retail ratios for the year are 65% for hardcovers and 75% forpaperbacks.

    following is a partial list of account balances for two 279591

    Following is a partial list of account balances for two different merchandising companies. The amounts in the accounts represent the balances at the end of the year before any adjustments are made or the books are closed.

    Company A__________________________

    Sales Revenue $50,000

    Sales Discounts 3,000

    Merchandise Inventory 12,000

    Cost of Goods Sold 38,000

    Company B___________________________

    Sales Revenue $85,000

    Sales Discounts 2,000

    Merchandise Inventory 9,000

    Purchases 41,000

    Purchase Discounts 4,000

    Purchases Returns and Allowances 1,000

    Required

    1. Identify which inventory system, perpetual or periodic, each of the two companies uses. Explain how you know which system each company uses by looking at the types of accounts on its books.

    2. How much inventory does Company A have on hand at the end of the year? What is its cost of goods sold for the year?

    3. Explain why you cannot determine Company B’s cost of goods sold for the year from the information available.

    for each of the following transactions indicate which company s 279604

    For each of the following transactions, indicate which company should include the inventory on its December 31, 2010, balance sheet:

    1. Michelson Supplies Inc. shipped merchandise to PJ Sales on December 28, 2010, terms FOB destination. The merchandise arrives at PJ’s on January 4, 2011.

    2. Quarton Inc. shipped merchandise to Filbrandt on December 25, 2010, FOB destination. Filbrandt received the merchandise on December 31, 2010.

    3. James Bros. Inc. shipped merchandise to Randall Company on December 27, 2010, FOB shipping point. Randall Company received the merchandise on January 3, 2011.

    4. Hinz Company shipped merchandise to Barner Inc. on December 24, 2010, FOB shipping point. The merchandise arrived at Barner’s on December 29, 2010.

    health world began january with an inventory of 50 crates 279640

    Health World began January with an inventory of 50 crates of vitamins that cost a total of $1,000. During the month, Health World purchased and sold merchandise on account as follows:

    Purchase 1 . . . . . . . .100 crates @ $ 25

    Sale 1 . . . . . . . . . . . .130 crates @ $ 40

    Purchase 2 . . . . . . . . 90 crates @ $ 30

    Sale 2 . . . . . . . . . . . .100 crates @ $ 50

    Health World uses the LIFO method.

    Cash payments on account totaled $5,500. Operating expenses for the month were $3,000, with two thirds paid in cash and the rest accrued as Accounts payable.

    Requirements

    1. Which inventory method most likely mimics the physical flow of Health World’s inventory?

    2. Prepare a perpetual inventory record, using LIFO cost, for this merchandise.

    3. Journalize all transactions using LIFO.

    heinen wholesale corp uses the lifo cost flow method in 279646

    Heinen Wholesale Corp. uses the LIFO cost flow method. In the current year, profit at Heinen is running unusually high. The corporate tax rate is also high this year, but it is scheduled to decline significantly next year. In an effort to lower the current year’s net income and to take advantage of the changing income tax rate, the president of Heinen Wholesale instructs the plant accountant to recommend to the purchasing department a large purchase of inventory for delivery 3 days before the end of the year. The price of the inventory to be purchased has doubled during the year, and the purchase will represent a major portion of the ending inventory value.

    Instructions

    (a) What is the effect of this transaction on this year’s and next year’s income statement and income tax expense? Why?

    (b) If Heinen Wholesale had been using the FIFO method of inventory costing, would the president give the same directive?

    (c) Should the plant accountant order the inventory purchase to lower income? What are the ethical implications of this order?

    on the 31 may 2008 the end of the financial year speed deliveries has the following 279664

    On the 31 may 2008, the end of the financial year Speed deliveries has the following 3 delivery vehicles on their books. Speed deliveries deliver parcels and documents to the cities in the cape peninsula. The 3 delivery vehicles each service a different region i.e.the west coast, the east coast and inland. On an average the 3 vehicles should travel about the same mileage each month.

    Fixed asset register:

    Document Preview:

    Grade 11 Report On the 31 may 2008, the end of the financial year Speed deliveries has the following 3 delivery vehicles on their books. Speed deliveries deliver parcels and documents to the cities in the cape peninsula. The 3 delivery vehicles each service a different region i.e.the west coast, the east coast and inland. On an average the 3 vehicles should travel about the same mileage each month. Asset Vehicle 1 Date of purchase 1 June 2004 Cost price R120 000 Depreciation rate 20% p.a on cost Record of depreciation: Date depreciation Accumulated depreciation Book value 31 may 2005 24000 24000 96000 31 may 2006 24000 48000 72000 31 may 2007 24000 72000 48000 31 may 2008 24000 96000 24000Fixed asset register: asset Vehicle 2 Date of purchase 1 December 2006 Cost price R180000 Depreciation rate 20% p.a on cost Record of depreciation: date depreciation Accumulated depreciation Book value 31 may 2007 18000 18000 162000 31 may 2008 36000 54000 126000 asset Vehicle 3 Date of purchase 1 September 2007 Cost price R220 000 Depreciation rate 20% p.a on cost Record of depreciation: Date depreciation Accumulated depreciation Book value 31 may 2008 33000 33000 187 000 The local car dealer, Alpine Motors has approached Speed deliveries with a special promotion that they are offering. An identical vehicle to the 3 delivery vehicles above at a cost price of R220 000 plus the option of a maintenance plan for a period of 3 years at an additional cost of R15 000.T he owner of speed deliveries believes this is a good deal and is considering trading in one of the above mentioned vehicles against the new vehicle, but is ensure which vehicle to trade in. He has asked the accountant to give him details as to the running costs of the 3 vehicles for the past year and he has been given the following information: Vehicle 1 Vehicle 2 Vehicle 3 Mileage travelled 90 000 km 120 000km 70 000km Courier charges…

    Attachments:

    in a discussion of dramatic increases in coffee bean prices 279711

    In a discussion of dramatic increases in coffee bean prices, a Wall Street Journal article noted the following fact about Starbucks.

    Before this year’s bean price hike, Starbucks added several defenses that analysts say could help it maintain earnings and revenue. The company last year began accounting for its coffee bean purchases by taking the average price of all beans in inventory.

    Source: Aaron Lucchetti, ?oCrowded Coffee Market May Keep a Lid on Starbucks After Price Rise Hurt Stock,?? Wall Street Journal (June 4, 1997), p. C1. Prior to this change the company was using FIFO.

    Instructions

    Your client, the CEO of Supreme Coffee, Inc., read this article and sent you an e mail message requesting that you explain why Starbucks might have taken this action. Your response should explain what impact this change in accounting method has on earnings, why the company might want to do this, and any possible disadvantages of such a change.

    in august 1990 iraq invaded kuwait for gasoline distributors 279728

    In August 1990, Iraq invaded Kuwait. For gasoline distributors, this meant that the price they paid for oil in the future could increase dramatically. For consumers, the effect was more immediate. Within a week, gasoline prices had jumped by as much as 20 cents per gallon. The American public accused gasoline distributors of ripping off consumers by raising the price on gas that was purchased prior to the Gulf crisis. Distributors countered by stating that it is replacement cost, not historical cost that dictates selling price.

    1. Assuming FIFO costing of inventory, what would be the effect of an increased selling price on the income statement of a gasoline distributor?

    2. What would be the effect on the distributor’s statement of cash flows as the firm replaced the inventory with more expensive petroleum products?

    3. Was the American public correct in claiming that gasoline distributors used the Gulf crisis as an opportunity to increase profits?

    in your audit of jose oliva company you find that 279746

    In your audit of Jose Oliva Company, you find that a physical inventory on December 31, 2008, showed merchandise with a cost of $441,000 was on hand at that date. You also discover the following items were all excluded from the $441,000.

    1. Merchandise of $61,000 which is held by Oliva on consignment. The consignor is the Max Suzuki Company.

    2. Merchandise costing $38,000 which was shipped by Oliva f.o.b. destination to a customer on December 31, 2008. The customer was expected to receive the merchandise on January 6, 2009.

    3. Merchandise costing $46,000 which was shipped by Oliva f.o.b. shipping point to a customer on December 29, 2008. The customer was scheduled to receive the merchandise on January 2, 2009.

    4. Merchandise costing $83,000 shipped by a vendor f.o.b. destination on December 30, 2008, and received by Oliva on January 4, 2009.

    5. Merchandise costing $51,000 shipped by a vendor f.o.b. seller on December 31, 2008, and received by Oliva on January 5, 2009.

    Instructions

    Based on the above information, calculate the amount that should appear on Oliva’s balance sheet at December 31, 2008, for inventory.

    inventory information for part 311 of monique aaron corp disclo 279774

    Inventory information for Part 311 of Monique Aaron Corp. discloses the following information for the month of June.

    June 1 Balance 300 units ………. @ $10

    11 Purchased 800 units ………… @ $12

    20 Purchased 500 units ………… @ $13

    June 10 Sold 200 units ………… @ $24

    15 Sold 500 units @ ……………… $25

    27 Sold 300 units @ ……………… $27

    Instructions

    (a) Assuming that the periodic inventory method is used, compute the cost of goods sold and ending inventory under

    (1) LIFO and

    (2) FIFO.

    (b) Assuming that the perpetual inventory record is kept in dollars and costs are computed at the time of each withdrawal, what is the value of the ending inventory at LIFO?

    (c) Assuming that the perpetual inventory record is kept in dollars and costs are computed at the time of each withdrawal, what is the gross profit if the inventory is valued at FIFO?

    (d) Why is it stated that LIFO usually produces a lower gross profit than FIFO?

    accounting using a make or buy decision 435410

    Oxford Engineering manufactures small engines. The engines are sold to manufacturers who install them in such products as lawn mowers. The company currently manufactures all the parts used in these engines but is considering a proposal from an external supplier to supply the starter assembly used in these engines.

    The starter assembly is currently manufactured in Division 3 of Oxford Engineering. Last year, Division 3 manufactured 148,000 starter assemblies, but over the next several years, it is expected that 171,000 assemblies will be needed each year. Total costs related to the starter assembly for last year were as follows:

    Direct Material: $266,400

    Direct Labor: $227,920

    Total Overhead: $444,000

    Total: $938,320

    Further analysis of overhead revealed the following information:

    • 40% of total overhead was variable.
    • $118,000 of the fixed overhead were allocated costs that will continue even if the production of the starter assembly is discontinued.

    Tidnish Electronics, a reliable supplier, has offered to supply starter assembly units at $6.80 per unit. If the company buys the assembly from Tidnish, the vacated plant space could be used for storage and, in so doing, avoid $36,000 of outside storage charges currently incurred.

    Question: By how much will Oxford Engineering’s total profits change if they decide to buy the starter assembly from Tidnish Electronics instead of making it themselves? (Note: if the buy costs are less than the make costs, enter the difference as a positive number; if the make costs are less than the buy costs, enter the difference as a negative number.)

    My work:

    DM=$266000/148000=$1.79
    DL=$227,920/148,000=$1.54
    OH=$444,000/148,000=$3
    VCU=40%($3)=$1.20
    FCU=$3 $1.20=$1.80

    Make:
    DM=$1.79*171,000=$306,090
    DL=$1.54*171,000=$263,340
    VOH=171,000*$1.20=205,200
    FOH=171,000*$1.80=307,800
    Total Annual Cost=$1,082,430

    Buy:
    DM=$0
    DL=$0
    VOH=$0
    FOH=$118,000
    Purchase=171,000*$6.80=$1,162,800
    Total Annual Cost=$1,280,800

    $1,082,430+36,000 $1,280,800=($162,370)

    My solution is wrong, of course, I would really like some guidance as to where I’m thinking wrong and how to solve it correctly.

    environmental management accounting 435418

    Title: “Environmental managementaccounting”

    Word limit:3,000 words with 10% tolerance

    It must be plagiarism free and Harvard Referencing System must be followed if you using someone work citation must be done. The expectation is for students to investigate and prepare a detailed, yet succinct report, which demonstrates a thorough review of the extant literature. It should identify and assess the key contributions by scholars in that topic. The report requires (1) a theoretical discussion and (2) the application of the theory, where possible, as well as (3) the discussion of the expected future developments.

    Please use the following general format for the presentation of your report:

    Title page

    Abstract: 5%

    List of contents

    Introduction: 10%

    Background information importance

    Purpose

    Scope

    Body of the report: 80%

    Literature review

    Discussion

    Conclusions: 5%

    References

    Appendices

    Document Preview:

    Assignment 1instructions: Report Title: “Environmental management accounting” Word limit: 3,000 words with 10% tolerance It must be plagiarism free and Harvard Referencing System must be followed if you using someone work citation must be done. The expectation is for students to investigate and prepare a detailed, yet succinct report, which demonstrates a thorough review of the extant literature. It should identify and assess the key contributions by scholars in that topic. The report requires (1) a theoretical discussion and (2) the application of the theory, where possible, as well as (3) the discussion of the expected future developments. Please use the following general format for the presentation of your report: Title page Abstract: 5% List of contents Introduction: 10% Background information importance Purpose Scope Body of the report: 80% Literature review Discussion Conclusions: 5% References Appendices

    Attachments:

    accounting question 435487

    A patent was purchased for $670,000 with a legal life of 20 years. Management estimates that the patent has an 12 year economic life. The entry to record amortization would include:

    a. an increase in research and development expense for $670,000.
    b. a decrease in patent for $55,833.
    c. an increase in amortization expense for $33,500.
    d. an increase in accumulated amortization for $670,000.

    penna 435519

    Penna Corporation produces a single product and has the following cost structure:

    Number of units produced each year 1,000
    Variable costs per unit:
    Direct materials $40
    Direct labor $16
    Variable manufacturing overhead $1
    Variable selling and administrative expenses $1
    Fixed costs per year:
    Fixed manufacturing overhead $12,000
    Fixed selling and administrative expenses $34,000

    Required:

    a. Compute the unit product cost under absorption costing. Show your work! (5 points)

    b. Compute the unit product cost under variable costing. Show your work! (5 points)

    accounting help 435565

    Pete’s Pet Products is a sole proprietorship owned by Pete Thompson. The store provides a full line of pet products, including food, grooming materials, toys, leashes, etc. The company also sells hand made pet houses, including dog houses, bird cages, and cat castles. Each of the pet houses is being evaluated in terms of cost volume profit. See the relevant information below:

    Dog house Bird cage Cat castle
    Sales Price $140 $95 $160
    Variable cost $65 $34 $56
    Fixed monthly cost 30% 25% 45%

    When Pete uses a distributor to sell additional pet houses, he has to pay a sales commission of 8% of the sales price. On average, he sells 60% of each pet house through distributors. The fixed costs (shown above) are based on estimated design time for each product. Pete’s store averages $32,000 of fixed costs per month.

    1. Calculate the contribution margin for each pet house. Ignore the sales commission for this computation.
    2. Calculate the monthly break even units for each pet house. Ignore the sales commission for this computation.

    adjustments to the cash account based on the bank reconciliation 279218

    Adjustments to the cash account based on the bank reconciliation

    Required

    Determine whether the following items in Powers Imports’ bank reconciliation require adjusting or correcting entries on Powers Imports’ books.

    a. The bank collected $7,000 of Powers Imports’ accounts receivable. Powers Imports had instructed its customers to send their payments directly to the bank.

    b. The bank mistakenly gave Imports, Inc., credit for a $500 deposit made by Powers Imports.

    c. Deposits in transit were $5,600.

    d. Powers Imports’ bank statement contained a $750 NSF check. Powers Imports had received the check from a customer and had included it in one of its bank deposits.

    e. The bank statement indicated that Powers Imports earned $80 of interest revenue.

    f. Powers Imports’ accountant mistakenly recorded a $230 check that was written to purchase supplies as $370.

    g. Bank service charges for the month were $50.

    h. The bank reconciliation disclosed the fact that $600 had been stolen from Powers Imports’ business.

    i. Outstanding checks amounted to $1,700.

    alonzo spellman an inventory control specialist is interested 279226

    Alonzo Spellman, an inventory control specialist, is interested in better understanding the accounting for inventories. Although Alonzo understands the more sophisticated computer inventory control systems, he has little knowledge of how inventory cost is determined. In studying the records of Ditka Enterprises, which sells normal brand name goods from its own store and on consignment through Wannstedt Inc., he asks you to answer the following questions.

    Instructions

    (a) Should Ditka Enterprises include in its inventory normal brand name goods purchased from its suppliers but not yet received if the terms of purchase are f.o.b. shipping point (manufacturer’s plant)? Why?

    (b) Should Ditka Enterprises include freight in expenditures as an inventory cost? Why?

    (c) What are products on consignment? How should they be reported in the financial statements?

    alpharack company sells a line of tennis equipment to retailers 279228

    Alpharack Company sells a line of tennis equipment to retailers. Alpharack uses the perpetual inventory system and engaged in the following transactions during April 2009, its first month of operations:

    a. On April 2, Alpharack purchased, on credit, 320 Wilbur T 100 tennis rackets with credit terms of 2/10, n/30. The rackets were purchased at a cost of $30 each. Alpharack paid Barker Trucking $150 to transport the tennis rackets from the manufacturer to Alpharack’s warehouse, shipping terms were F.O.B. shipping point, and the items were shipped on April 2.

    b. On April 3, Alpharack purchased, for cash, 150 packs of tennis balls for $10 per pack.

    c. On April 4, Alpharack purchased tennis clothing, on credit, from Designer Tennis Wear. The cost of the clothing was $8,000. Credit terms were 2/10, n/25.

    d. On April 10, Alpharack paid for the purchase of the tennis rackets in (a).

    e. On April 15, Alpharack determined that $500 of the tennis clothing was defective. Alpharack returned the defective merchandise to Designer TennisWear.

    f. On April 20, Alpharack sold 100 tennis rackets at $90 each, 100 packs of tennis balls at $12 per pack, and $4,000 of tennis clothing. All sales were for cash. The cost of the merchandise sold was $5,450.

    g. On April 23, customers returned $575 of the merchandise purchased on April 20. The cost of the merchandise returned was $300.

    h. On April 25, Alpharack sold another 50 tennis rackets, on credit, for $90 each and 25 packs of tennis balls at $12 per pack, for cash. The cost of the merchandise sold was $2,000.

    i. On April 29, Alpharack paid Designer Tennis Wear for the clothing purchased on April 4 less the return on April 15.

    j. On April 30, Alpharack purchased 20 tennis bags, on credit, from Bag Designs for $320. The bags were shipped F.O.B. destination and arrived at Alpharack on May 3.

    Required:

    1. Prepare the journal entries to record the sale and purchase transactions for Alpharack during April 2009.

    2. Assuming operating expenses of $8,500, prepare Alpharack’s income statement for April 2009. (Ignore income tax expense.)

    analyzing items to be included in inventory walker company has 279239

    Analyzing Items to Be Included in Inventory

    Walker Company has just completed a physical inventory count at year end, December 31, 2011. Only the items on the shelves, in storage, and in the receiving area were counted and costed on a FIFO basis. The inventory amounted to $65,000. During the audit, the independent CPA developed the following additional information:

    a. Goods costing $750 were being used by a customer on a trial basis and were excluded from the inventory count at December 31, 2011.

    b. Goods in transit on December 31, 2011, from a supplier, with terms FOB destination (explained in the ?oRequired?? section), cost $900. Because these goods had not yet arrived, they were excluded from the physical inventory count.

    c. On December 31, 2011, goods in transit to customers, with terms FOB shipping point, amounted to $1,700 (expected delivery date January 10, 2012). Because the goods had been shipped, they were excluded from the physical inventory count.

    d. On December 28, 2011, a customer purchased goods for cash amounting to $2,650 and left them ?ofor pickup on January 3, 2012.?? Walker Company had paid $1,590 for the goods and, because they were on hand, included the latter amount in the physical inventory count.

    e. On the date of the inventory count, the company received notice from a supplier that goods ordered earlier at a cost of $3,550 had been delivered to the transportation company on December 27, 2011; the terms were FOB shipping point. Because the shipment had not arrived by December 31, 2011, it was excluded from the physical inventory count.

    f. On December 31, 2011, the company shipped $850 worth of goods to a customer, FOB destination. The goods are expected to arrive at their destination no earlier than January 8, 2012. Because the goods were not on hand, they were not included in the physical inventory count.

    g. One of the items sold by the company has such a low volume that management planned to drop it last year. To induce Walker Company to continue carrying the item, the manufacturer supplier provided the item on a ?oconsignment basis.?? This means that the manufacturer supplier retains ownership of the item, and Walker Company (the consignee) has no responsibility to pay for the items until they are sold to a customer. Each month, Walker Company sends a report to the manufacturer on the number sold and remits cash for the cost. At the end of December 2011, Walker Company had six of these items on hand; therefore, they were included in the physical inventory count at $950 each.

    Required:

    Assume that Walker’s accounting policy requires including in inventory all goods for which it has title. Note that the point where title (ownership) changes hands is determined by the shipping terms in the sales contract. When goods are shipped ?oFOB shipping point,?? title changes hands at shipment and the buyer normally pays for shipping. When they are shipped ?oFOB destination,?? title changes hands on delivery, and the seller normally pays for shipping. Begin with the $65,000 inventory amount and compute the correct amount for the ending inventory. Explain the basis for your treatment of each of the preceding items.

    andrea s boards sells a snowboard xpert that is popular with 279251

    Andrea’s Boards sells a snowboard Xpert, that is popular with snowboard enthusiasts. Below is information relating to Andrea’s purchases of Xpert snowboards during September. During the same month, 121 Xpert snowboards were sold. Andrea’s uses a periodic inventory system.

    Date Explanation Units Unit Cost Total Cost

    Sept 1 Inventory 26 $ 97 $2,522
    Sept 12 Purchases 45 105 4,725
    Sept 19 Purchases 20 108 2,160
    Sept 26 Purchases 50 109 5,450
    Totals 141 $14,857

    Compute the ending inventory at September 30 and cost of goods sold using the FIFO and LIFO methods.

    FIFO LIFO
    Ending Inventory $ $
    Cost of goods sold $ $

    For both FIFO and LIFO, compute the sum of cost of goods sold and ending inventory. What do you notice about the result for each method.

    (Which one is correct)
    the sums for FIFO and LIFO are equal

    the sum is greater for LIFO

    the sum is greater for FIFO

    week 3 a3 analysis of the financial statements and accounting policies 279259

    Week 3, A3 Analysis of the financial statements and accounting policies of “Panera” Bread company, in APA format (2 3 pages), containing: Financial Statements Discuss the major financial statements in detail. What formats are used? What significant trends (over three years) can you find? What is the future forecast, or what do the pro forma statements indicate? Accounting Policies What are the significant accounting policies relating to revenue recognition, short term investments, cash, inventories, and property and equipment? What are some of the major topics of the disclosure notes to the statements? Provide a brief summary of the Management Discussion and Announcement (MDA) section. Discuss key internal controls, business processes, and transactions. May use these references: http://sec.gov/edgar/searchedgar/webusers http://faculty.philau.edu/lermackh/financial_analysis http://www.investopedia.com/university/financialstatements/ http://academic.uofs.edu/faculty/gramborw/tufsal Use Excel worksheet to answer both questions, show all of the calculations, including the present value and resulting NPV calculations, required to answer this assignment. CT12.1 As of January 2, 2012, you have just completed a discounted cash flow analysis on a $250,000 investment. You calculated after tax cash flows (including the following tax shield). You then determined that the project has a positive net present value using the company’s cost of capital of 15 percent. You reported your findings to your supervisor and recommended that the company make the investment. To your surprise, the supervisor rejected the acquisition. He said that company policy was to not invest in any project in which the cash flows do not recover the initial investment in three years. He points out that of the $250,000 expended; only $190,000 would be recovered in three years. After Tax Cash Flows 2012 $ 20,000 2013 50,000 2014 120,000 2015 100,000 2016 100,000 2017 90,000 2018 80,000 Required: A. Complete the net present value analysis showing that the investment should be undertaken. B. Write a memo explaining why the company should make this investment and why the company should scrap its three year payback rule. CT12.2. Mercil Corporation is going to buy one of the following two machines. Each machine meets the specifications for a particular task in the company. Mercil’s tax rate is 30 percent and its cost of capital is 15 percent. Which machine should Mercil buy and why? Machine A: Costs $90,000 to acquire and $12,000 cash a year to operate in each year of its 10 year life. Annual depreciation is $9,000, and the machine has no salvage value. Machine B: Costs $50,000 to acquire and $24,600 a year to operate in each year of its 10 year life. Annual depreciation is $5,000, and the machine has no salvage value.

    Attachments:

    as a newly hired staff accountant you are assigned the 279260

    As a newly hired staff accountant, you are assigned the responsibility of physically counting inventory at the end of the year. The inventory count proceeds in a timely fashion. The inventory is outdated, however. You suggest that the inventory cannot be sold for the cost at which it is carried and that the inventory should be written down to a much lower level. The controller replies that experience has taught her how the market changes and she knows that the units in the warehouse will be more marketable again. The company plans to keep the goods until they are back in style.

    Required

    1. What effect will writing off the inventory have on the current year’s income?

    2. What effect does not writing off the inventory have on the year end balance sheet?

    3. What factors should you consider in deciding whether to persist in your argument that the inventory should be written down?

    4. If you fail to write down the inventory, do outside readers of the statements have reliable information? Explain your answer.

    5. Assume that the company prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS. Is it necessary that the inventory be written down?

    assume you are opening a bed bath beyond store 279286

    Assume you are opening a Bed Bath & Beyond store. To finance the business, you need a $500,000 loan, and your banker requires a set of forecasted financial statements. Assume you are preparing the statements and must make some decisions about how to do the accounting for the business.

    Requirements

    Answer the following questions (refer to Chapter 5 if necessary):

    1. Which type of inventory system will you use? Perpetual or Periodic? Give your reason.

    2. Show how to compute net purchases (see the vocabulary list in Chapter 5 for the definition of ?onet purchases??) and net sales. How will you treat the cost of freight in?

    3. How often do you plan to do a physical count of inventory on hand? What will the physical count accomplish?

    4. Inventory costs are rising. Which inventory costing method would have the effect of

    a. maximizing net income?

    b. paying the least amount of income tax?

    awards etc carries an inventory of trophies and ribbons for 279305

    Awards Etc. carries an inventory of trophies and ribbons for local sports teams and school clubs. The cost of trophies has dropped in the past year, which pleases the company except for the fact that it has on hand considerable inventory that was purchased at the higher prices. The president is not pleased with the lower profit margin the company is earning. ?oThe lower profit margin will continue until we sell all of this old inventory,?? he grumbled to the new staff accountant. ?oNot really,?? replied the accountant. ?oLet’s write down the inventory to the replacement cost this year, and then next year our profit margin will be in line with the competition.??

    Required

    Explain why the inventory can be carried at an amount less than its cost. Which accounts will be affected by the write down? What will be the effect on income in the current year and future years?

    bateman company produces helmets for motorcycle riders helmets 279320

    Bateman Company produces helmets for motorcycle riders. Helmets are produced in batches according to model and size. Although the setup and production time vary for each model, the smallest lead time is six days. The most popular model, Model HA2, takes two days for setup, and the production rate is 750 units per day. The expected annual demand for the model is 36,000 units. Demand for the model, however, can reach 45,000 units. The cost of carrying one HA2 helmet is $3 per unit. The setup cost is $6,000. Bateman chooses its batch size based on the economic order quantity criterion. Expected annual demand is used to compute the EOQ.

    Recently, Bateman has encountered some stiff competition—especially from foreign sources. Some of the foreign competitors have been able to produce and deliver the helmets to retailers in half the time it takes Bateman to produce. For example, a large retailer recently requested a delivery of 12,000 Model HA2 helmets with the stipulation that the helmets be delivered within seven working days. Bateman had 3,000 units of HA2 in stock. Bateman informed the potential customer that it could deliver 3,000 units immediately and the other 9,000 units in about 14 working days—with the possibility of interim partial orders being delivered. The customer declined the offer; the total order had to be delivered within seven working days so that its stores could take advantage of some special local conditions. The customer expressed regret and indicated that it would accept the order from another competitor who could satisfy the time requirements.

    Required:

    1. Calculate the optimal batch size for Model HA2 using the EOQ model. Was Bateman’s response to the customer right? Would it take the time indicated to produce the number of units wanted by the customer? Explain with supporting computations.

    2. Upon learning of the lost order, the marketing manager grumbled about Bateman’s inventory policy. ?oWe lost the order because we didn’t have sufficient inventory. We need to carry more units in inventory to deal with unexpected orders like these.?? Do you agree or disagree? How much additional inventory would have been needed to meet customer requirements? In the future, should Bateman carry more inventory? Can you think of other solutions?

    3. Fenton Gray, the head of industrial engineering, reacted differently to the lost order. ?oOur problem is more complex than insufficient inventory. I know that our foreign competitors carry much less inventory than we do. What we need to do is decrease the lead time. I have been studying this problem, and my staff have found a way to reduce setup time for Model HA2 from two days to 1.5 hours. Using this new procedure, setup cost can be reduced to about $94. Also, by rearranging the plant layout for this product—creating what are called manufacturing cells—we can increase the production rate from 750 units per day to about 2,000 units per day. This is done simply by eliminating a lot of move time and waiting time—both non value added activities.?? Assume that the engineer’s estimates are on target. Compute the new optimal batch size (using the EOQ formula). What is the new lead time? Given this new information, would Bateman have been able to meet the customer’s time requirements? Assume that there are eight hours available in each workday.

    4. Suppose that the setup time and cost are reduced to 0.5 hour and $10, respectively. What is the batch size now? As setup time approaches zero and the setup cost becomes negligible, what does this imply? Assume, for example, that it takes five minutes to set up, and costs are about $0.864 per setup.

    caroline s candy corner sells gourmet chocolates the company bu 279369

    Caroline’s Candy Corner sells gourmet chocolates. The company buys chocolates in bulk for $5 per pound plus 5% sales tax. Credit terms are 2/10, n/25, and the company always pays promptly to take advantage of the discount. The chocolates are shipped to Caroline FOB shipping point. Shipping costs are $0.05 per pound. When the chocolates arrive at the shop, Caroline’s Candy repackages them into one pound boxes labeled with the store name. Boxes cost $0.70 each. The company pays its employees an hourly wage of $5.25 plus a commission of $0.10 per pound.

    Required

    1. What is the cost per one pound box of chocolates?

    2. What price must Caroline’s Candy charge in order to have a 40% gross profit?

    3. Do you believe this is a sufficient gross profit for this kind of business? Explain. What other costs might the company still incur?

    chau company just took its physical inventory the count of 279377

    Chau Company just took its physical inventory. The count of inventory items on hand at the company’s business locations resulted in a total inventory cost of $300,000. In reviewing the details of the count and related inventory transactions, you have discovered the following.

    1. Chau has sent inventory costing $26,000 on consignment to Nikki Company. All of this inventory was at Nikki’s showrooms on December 31.

    2. The company did not include in the count inventory (cost, $20,000) that was sold on December 28, terms FOB shipping point. The goods were in transit on December 31.

    3. The company did not include in the count inventory (cost, $17,000) that was purchased with terms of FOB shipping point. The goods were in transit on December 31. Compute the correct December 31 inventory.

    chestnut corp a ski shop opened for business on october 279381

    Chestnut Corp., a ski shop, opened for business on October 1. It uses a periodic inventory system. The following transactions occurred during the first month of business:

    October 1: Purchased three units from Elm Inc. for $249 total, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB destination.

    October 10: Paid for the October 1 purchase.

    October 15: Sold one unit for $200 cash.

    October 18: Purchased ten units from Wausau Company for $800 total, with terms 2/10, n/30, FOB destination.

    October 25: Sold three units for $200 each, cash.

    October 30: Paid for the October 18 purchase.

    Required

    1. Identify and analyze each of the preceding transactions of Chestnut.

    2. Determine the number of units on hand on October 31.

    3. If Chestnut started the month with $2,000, determine its balance in cash at the end of the month assuming that these are the only transactions that occurred during October. Why has the cash balance decreased when the company reported net income?

    colin davis machine company maintains a general ledger account f 279386

    Colin Davis Machine Company maintains a general ledger account for each class of inventory, debiting such accounts for increases during the period and crediting them for decreases. The transactions below relate to the Raw Materials inventory account, which is debited for materials purchased and credited for materials requisitioned for use.

    1. An invoice for $8,100, terms f.o.b. destination, was received and entered January 2, 2008. The receiving report shows that the materials were received December 28, 2007.

    2. Materials costing $28,000, shipped f.o.b. destination, were not entered by December 31, 2007, ?obecause they were in a railroad car on the company’s siding on that date and had not been unloaded.??

    3. Materials costing $7,300 were returned to the creditor on December 29, 2007, and were shipped f.o.b. shipping point. The return was entered on that date, even though the materials are not expected to reach the creditor’s place of business until January 6, 2008.

    4. An invoice for $7,500, terms f.o.b. shipping point, was received and entered December 30, 2007. The receiving report shows that the materials were received January 4, 2008, and the bill of lading shows that they were shipped January 2, 2008.

    5. Materials costing $19,800 were received December 30, 2007, but no entry was made for them because ?othey were ordered with a specified delivery of no earlier than January 10, 2008.??

    Instructions

    Prepare correcting general journal entries required at December 31, 2007, assuming that the books have not been closed.

    company a has consignment arrangements with supplier b and with 279392

    Company A has consignment arrangements with Supplier B and with Customer C. In particular, Supplier B ships some of its goods to Company A on consignment, and Company A ships some of its goods to Customer C on consignment. At the end of 2012, Company A’s accounting records showed:

    Goods on consignment from Supplier B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 8,000

    Goods on consignment with Customer C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,000

    1. If a physical count of inventory reveals that $30,000 of goods are on hand, what amount of ending inventory should be reported?

    2. If the amount of the beginning inventory for the year was $27,000 and purchases during the year were $59,000, then what is the cost of goods sold for the year? [Assume the ending inventory from part (1).]

    3. If, instead of these facts, Company A had only $4,000 of goods on consignment with

    Customer C, but had $10,000 of consigned goods from Supplier B, and physical goods on hand totaled $36,000, what would the correct amount of the ending inventory be?

    4. With respect to part (3), if beginning inventory totaled $24,000 and the cost of goods sold was $47,500, what were the purchases?

    marston corporation 434868

    Marston Corporation manufactures disposable thermometers that are sold to hospitals through a network of independent sales agents located in the United States and Canada. These sales agents sell a variety of products to hospitals in addition to Marston’s disposable thermometer. The sales agents are currently paid an 18% commission on sales, and this commission rate was used when Marston’s management prepared the following budgeted absorption income statement for the upcoming year.

    Marston Corporation
    Budgeted Income Statement
    Sales $ 30,000,000
    Cost of goods sold:
    Variable $ 17,400,000
    Fixed 2,800,000 20,200,000




    Gross margin 9,800,000
    Selling and administrative expenses:
    Commissions 5,400,000
    Fixed advertising expense 800,000
    Fixed administrative expense 3,200,000 9,400,000




    Net operating income $ 400,000





    Since the completion of the above statement, Marston’s management has learned that the independent sales agents are demanding an increase in the commission rate to 20% of sales for the upcoming year. This would be the third increase in commissions demanded by the independent sales agents in five years. As a result, Marston’s management has decided to investigate the possibility of hiring its own sales staff to replace the independent sales agents.

    Marston’s controller estimates that the company will have to hire eight salespeople to cover the current market area, and the total annual payroll cost of these employees will be about $700,000, including fringe benefits. The salespeople will also be paid commissions of 10% of sales. Travel and entertainment expenses are expected to total about $400,000 for the year. The company will also have to hire a sales manager and support staff whose salaries and fringe benefits will come to $200,000 per year. To make up for the promotions that the independent sales agents had been running on behalf of Marston, management believes that the company’s budget for fixed advertising expenses should be increased by $500,000.

    Required:
    1. Assuming sales of $30,000,000, construct a budgeted contribution format income statement for the upcoming year for each of the following alternatives:

    a.

    The independent sales agents’ commission rate remains unchanged at 18%. (Input all amounts as positive values except losses which should be indicated by a minus sign. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Enter your answers in thousands.)

    Contribution format income statements
    (in thousands of dollars)
    $ %


    Variable expenses:
    $

    Total variable expense %


    %




    Fixed expenses:

    Total fixed expenses

    $



    b.

    The independent sales agents’ commission rate increases to 20%. (Input all amounts as positive values except losses which should be indicated by a minus sign. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Enter your answers in thousands.)

    $ %


    Variable expenses:
    $

    Total variable expense %


    %




    Fixed expenses:

    Total fixed expenses

    $



    c.

    The company employs its own sales force. (Input all amounts as positive values except losses which should be indicated by a minus sign. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Enter your answers in thousands.)

    $ %


    Variable expenses:
    $

    Total variable expense %


    %




    Fixed expenses:

    Total fixed expenses

    $



    accounting 434913

    Match the term with the appropriate definition.

    a. partnership

    b. articles of partnership

    c. distribution of remaining cash to partners d. mutual agency

    e.equally

    f.death of a partner

    g. liquidation

    h. unlimited liability

    When a partnership cannot pay its debts with business assets,[ answer here]

    the partners must use personal assets to meet the debt [ Answer here ]

    Agreement that is the contract between partners [ answer here ]

    A voluntary association of two or more persons who co own a business for profit [ answer here ]

    Every partner can bind the business to a contract within the scope of the partnership%u2019s regular business operations [ answer here ]

    The process of going out of business by selling the entity%u2019s assets and paying its liabilities [ answer here ]

    Without an agreement, the law will stipulate this method of sharing profits and losses [ answer here ]

    The final step in the liquidation of a partnership [ answer here ]

    Causes the dissolution of a partnership [ answer here ]

    <![cdata[ ” class=”_mp3rocket_overlay_style” style=”left: <%= overlayLeft %>; top: <%= overlayTop %>; width: <%= overlayWidth %>; height: <%= overlayHeight %>”> ]]>

    managerial accounting homework help 435011

    Miller Toy Company manufactures a plastic swimming pool at its Westwood Plant. The plant has
    been experiencing problems as shown by its June contribution format income statement below:
    Miller Toy Company
    Budgeted Actual
    Sales (15,000 pools) $450,000 $450,000
    Variable Expenses:
    Variable cost of goods sold* 180,000 196,290
    Variable selling expenses 20,000 20,000
    Total variable expenses 200,000 216,290
    Contribution margin 250,000 233,710
    Fixed Expenses:
    Manufacturing overhead 130,000 130,000
    Selling and administrative 84,000 84,000
    Total Fixed Expenses 214,000 214,000
    Net Operating income $36,000 $19,710
    *Contains direct materials, direct labor and variable
    manufacturing overhead.
    Janet Dunn, who has just been appointed general manager of the Westwood Plant, has been given
    instructions to “get things under control.” Upon reviewing the plant’s income statement, Ms. Dunn
    has concluded that the major problem lies in the variable cost of goods sold. She has been
    provided with the following standard cost per swimming pool:
    Standard Qty Standard Price Standard
    or Hours or Rate Cost
    Direct materials 3.0 Lbs. $2.00 Per Lb. $6.00
    Direct labor 0.8 hours $6.00 per hour 4.80
    Variable manufacturing overhead 0.4 hours* $3.00 per hour 1.20
    Total standard variable cost $12.00
    *Based upon machine hours.
    Ms. Dunn has determined that during June the plant produced 15,000 pools and incurred
    the following costs:
    a. Purchased 60,000 pounds of materials at a cost of $1.95 per pound. There were no raw materials
    in inventory at the beginning of the month.
    b. Used 49,200 pounds of materials in production. (Finished goods and work in process inventories
    are insignificant and can be ignored.
    c. Worked 11,800 direct labor hours at a cost of $7.00 per hour.
    d. Incurred a total variable manufacturing overhead cost of $18,290 for the month. A total of 5,900
    machine hours was recorded.
    It is the company’s policy to close all variances to cost of goods sold on a monthly basis.

    QUESTIONS:

    Material Price Variance:

    Material Quantity Variance:

    Labor Rate Variance:
    Labor Efficiency Variance:

    Variable Overhead Spending Variance:
    Variable Overhead Efficiency Variance:

    accounting 435016

    Miranda Right started Right Consulting, a new business, and completed the following transactions during its first year of operations.

    a. M. Right invests $61,000 cash and office equipment valued at $35,000 in the company.
    b.

    The company purchased a $309,000 building to use as an office. Right paid $42,000 in cash and signed a note payable promising to pay the $267,000 balance over the next ten years.

    c. The company purchased office equipment for $5,900 cash.
    d. The company purchased $3,900 of office supplies and $1,900 of office equipment on credit.
    e. The company paid a local newspaper $930 cash for printing an announcement of the office%u2019s opening.
    f. The company completed a financial plan for a client and billed that client $4,300 for the service.
    g. The company designed a financial plan for another client and immediately collected an $8,800 cash fee.
    h. M. Right withdrew $1,200 cash from the company for personal use.
    i. The company received $3,300 cash as partial payment from the client described in transaction f.
    j. The company made a partial payment of $950 cash on the equipment purchased in transaction d.
    k. The company paid $2,400 cash for the office secretary%u2019s wages for this period.

    accounting question 435026

    Miyamoto Jewelers is considering a special order for 10 handcrafted gold bracelets to be given as gifts to members of a wedding party. The normal selling price of a gold bracelet is $389.95 and its unit product cost is $264.00 as shown below:

    Direct materials $ 143.00
    Direct labor 86.00
    Manufacturing overhead 35.00


    Unit product cost $ 264.00





    Most of the manufacturing overhead is fixed and unaffected by variations in how much jewelry is produced in any given period. However, $7 of the overhead is variable with respect to the number of bracelets produced. The customer who is interested in the special bracelet order would like special filigree applied to the bracelets. This filigree would require additional materials costing $6 per bracelet and would also require acquisition of a special tool costing $465 that would have no other use once the special order is completed. This order would have no effect on the company%u2019s regular sales and the order could be fulfilled using the company%u2019s existing capacity without affecting any other order.

    Required:
    a.

    What effect would accepting this order have on the company’s net operating income if a special price of $349.95 is offered per bracelet for this order? (Input the amount as a positive value. Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)

    Net operating income (Click to select) increases decreases by $

    I’m not sure what the net operating incoming would be. Please submit the right answer.

    plant closing decision managerial accounting 435034

    Mobile Seating Corporation manufactures seats for automobiles, vans, trucks, and boats. The company has a number of plants, including the Greenville Cover Plant, which makes seat covers.

    Miriam Restin is the plant manager at the Greenville Cover Plant but also serves as the regional production manager for the company. Her budget as the regional manager is charged to the Greenville Cover Plant.

    Restin has just heard that Mobile Seating has received a bid from an outside vendor to supply the equivalent of the entire annual output of the Greenville Cover Plant for $20.31 million. Restin was astonished at the low outside bid because the budget for the Greenville Cover Plant’s operating costs for the coming year was set at $23.61 million. If this bid is accepted, the Greenville Cover Plant will be closed down.

    The budget for the Greenville Cover Plant’s operating costs for the coming year is presented on the following page. Additional facts regarding the plant’s operations are as follows:

    a.

    Due to the Greenville Cover Plant’s commitment to use high quality fabrics in all of its products, the Purchasing Department was instructed to place blanket purchase orders with major suppliers to ensure the receipt of sufficient materials for the coming year. If these orders are canceled as a consequence of the plant closing, termination charges would amount to 30% of the cost of direct materials.

    b.

    Approximately 380 employees will lose their jobs if the plant is closed. This includes all of the direct laborers and supervisors, management and staff, and the plumbers, electricians, and other skilled workers classified as indirect plant workers. Some of these workers would have difficulty finding new jobs. Nearly all the production workers would have difficulty matching the Greenville Cover Plant’s base pay of $13.00 per hour, which is the highest in the area. A clause in Greenville Cover’s contract with the union may help some employees; the company must provide employment assistance and job training to its former employees for 12 months after a plant closing. The estimated cost to administer this service would be $0.71 million.

    c.

    Some employees would probably choose early retirement because Mobile Seating Corporation has an excellent pension plan. In fact, $0.69 million of the annual pension expense would continue whether the Greenville Cover Plant is open or not.

    d.

    Restin and her regional staff would not be affected by the closing of the Greenville Cover Plant. They would still be responsible for running three other area plants.

    e.

    If the Greenville Cover Plant were closed, the company would realize about $2.16 million salvage value for the equipment in the plant. If the plant remains open, there are no plans to make any significant investments in new equipment or buildings. The old equipment is adequate for the job and should last indefinitely.

    Greenville Cover Plant
    Annual Budget for Operating Costs
    Materials $ 7,200,000
    Labor:
    Direct $ 6,800,000
    Supervision 480,000
    Indirect plant 1,600,000 8,880,000


    Overhead:
    DepreciationAf?cAc‚¬”equipment 1,500,000
    DepreciationAf?cAc‚¬”building 2,500,000
    Pension expense 1,600,000
    Plant manager and staff 530,000
    Corporate expenses* 1,400,000 7,530,000




    Total budgeted costs $ 23,610,000





    *Fixed corporate expenses allocated to plants and other operating units based on total budgeted wage and salary costs.

    Required:
    2.

    Mobile Seating Corporation plans to prepare a financial analysis that will be used in deciding whether or not to close the Greenville Cover Plant. Management has asked you to identify: (Enter your answers in dollars not in millions. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    a.

    The annual budgeted costs that are relevant to the decision regarding closing the plant.

    Annual relevant costs $

    b.

    The annual budgeted costs that are not relevant to the decision regarding closing the plant.

    Annual continuing costs $

    c.

    Any nonrecurring costs that would arise due to the closing of the plant.

    Nonrecurring costs $

    3.

    Looking at the data you have prepared in (2) above,

    a.

    Calculate the Net advantage (disadvantage) of closing the plant. (Enter your answers in dollars not in millions. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Net (Click to select)disadvantageadvantage of closing the plant Af?cA?†’ first year $
    Net (Click to select)disadvantageadvantage of closing the plant Af?cA?†’ other years $

    b.

    Should the plant be closed?

    Yes
    No

    managerial accounting homework 435048

    Monte Services, Inc. is trying to establish the standard labor cost of a typical oil change. The following data have been collected from time and motion studies conducted over the past month.

    Actual time spent on the oil change 4.00 hour
    Hourly wage rate $12
    Payroll taxes 13% of wage rate
    Setup and downtime 7% of actual labor time
    Cleanup and rest periods 26% of actual labor time
    Fringe benefits 24% of wage rate

    A Determine the standard direct labor hours per oil change.
    (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25.)

    (b) Determine the standard direct labor hourly rate. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25.)

    accounting 435074

    For the first nine months of 2006, the Anderson Company is experiencing significantly lower earnings than it had forecast due to unidentified reasons. Management begins to search for ways to increase earnings during the last quarter of the year and thereby calm the fears of their stakeholders.

    The Controller is called into a meeting of the top management team and submits the following plan:

    • Anderson should issue $1,000,000 of bonds and use the proceeds to acquire the outstanding 15 year, 10 percent bonds of its subsidiary.
    • The subsidiary bonds currently sell at 90.
    • Five years ago, the subsidiary bonds were issued at a premium that totaled $75,000.
    • Anderson’s borrowing rate is 12 percent.
    • This transaction creates a $150,000 gain that can be reported in 2006, thus bringing earnings up to the forecast amount.

    Prepare a brief essay that evaluates the validity, both practically and ethically, of the controller’s plan.

    multinatl inc 435125

    Multinatl Inc. has a manufacturing facility in Zolondia which incurs costs of $1,000,000 for goods it sells to its retail outlet in Aborla. The retailer resells these goods to consumers for $2,000,000. Operating expenses in Zolondia and Aborla are $100,000 and $150,000, respectively. Zolondia and Aborla levy a corporate income tax of 30 percent on taxable income in their jurisdictions. 31. If Multinatl Inc. raises its transfer price from $1,300,000 to $1,600,000 for these goods going from Zolondia to Aborla, what effect would this have on total consolidated taxes? 32. If the tax rate were different in each country: Zolondia tax rate = 20 percent and Aborla tax rate = 40 percent, what would be the tax effects of the transfer pricing action? MBA level, please be detailed. Thank you

    help 435130

    MULTIPLE CHOICE 12 71

    Bonner Milling Company purchases logs and mills them into various grades of lumber. During the sawing and planing process, a considerable amount of sawdust is generated. Currently, Bonner sells the sawdust to a particle board manufacturer for $50 per truckload. Bonner is considering processing the sawdust into particle board itself. One truckload of sawdust can be made into 20 sheets of particle board selling for $8 per sheet. Further processing costs are $7 per board.

    Assume that the cost of logs falls by half. Should Bonner sell the sawdust at split off or process it further?

    a. Sell at split off, the reduction in the cost of the logs is irrelevant
    b. Process further because the further processing costs are irrelevant.
    c. Process further, the reduction in the cost of the logs will lower further processing costs.
    d. Process further, the reduction in the cost of logs makes that option more profitable than it was before
    e. Sell at split off because the decrease in the cost of the logs makes that option more profitable than it was before.

    net present value method and present value index 435140

    MVP Sports Equipment Company, is considering an investment in one of two machines. The sewing machine will increase productivity from sewing 120 baseballs per hour to sewing 220 per hour. The contribution margin is $0.36 per baseball. Assume that any increased production of baseballs can be sold. The second machine is an automatic packing machine for the golf ball line. The packing machine will reduce packing labor cost. The labor cost saved is equivalent to $24 per hour. The sewing machine will cost $256,300, have a 10 year life, and will operate for 1,400 hours per year. The packing machine will cost $141,600, have a 10 year life, and will operate for 1,200 hours per year. MVP seeks a minimum rate of return of 12% on its investments.

    Present Value of an Annuity of $1 at Compound Interest
    Year 6% 10% 12% 15% 20%
    1 0.943 0.909 0.893 0.870 0.833
    2 1.833 1.736 1.690 1.626 1.528
    3 2.673 2.487 2.402 2.283 2.106
    4 3.465 3.170 3.037 2.855 2.589
    5 4.212 3.791 3.605 3.353 2.991
    6 4.917 4.355 4.111 3.785 3.326
    7 5.582 4.868 4.564 4.160 3.605
    8 6.210 5.335 4.968 4.487 3.837
    9 6.802 5.759 5.328 4.772 4.031
    10 7.360 6.145 5.650 5.019 4.192

    a. Determine the net present value for the two machines. Use the table of present values of an annuity of $1 above. Round to the nearest dollar.

    Sewing Machine Packing Machine
    Present value of annual net cash flows: $ $
    Less amount to be invested: $ $
    Net present value: $ $

    b. Determine the present value index for the two machines. If required, round your answers to two decimal places.

    Sewing Machine Packing Machine
    Present value index:

    c. If MVP has sufficient funds for only one of the machines and qualitative factors are equal between the two machines, in which machine should it invest? (If both present value indexes are the same, either machine will grade as correct.)
    SelectPacking MachineSewing MachineItem 9

    Can you please show your work so I can get a good understanding of how you got to your answers?

    how do i fugure the federal income tax for john matthew 435155

    The names of the employees of Hogan Thrift Shop are listed on the following

    payroll register. Employees are paid weekly. The marital status and the

    number of allowances claimed are shown on the payroll register, along

    with each employee’s weekly salary, which has remained the same all year.

    Complete the payroll register for the payroll period ending December 21,

    the 51st weekly payday. The state income tax rate is 2% of total earnings,

    the city income tax rate is 1.5% of the total gross earnings, and the wagebracket

    method is used for federal income taxes.

    MARITAL STATUS NO. OF W/H ALLOW.

    TOTAL EMPLOYEE NAME EARNINGS

    John, Matthew M 3 2,200.00

    Smith, Jennifer S 1 275.00

    Bullen, Catherine M 0 250.00

    Matthews, Mary S 3 320.25

    Hadt, Bonnie S 1 450.00

    Camp, Sean S 2 560.50

    Wilson, Helen S 1 475.50

    Gleason, Jose M 3 890.00

    Totals 5,421.25

    Compute the employer’s FICA taxes for the pay period ending December 21.

    OASDI Taxes

    A) OASDI taxable earnings $

    B) OASDI taxes $

    HI Taxes

    C) HI taxable earnings$

    D) HI taxes $

    manufacturing overhead cost was applied to jobs 435186

    Need help with J

    Southworth Company uses a job order costing system and applies manufacturing overhead cost to jobs on the basis of the cost of direct materials used in production. Its predetermined overhead rate was based on a cost formula that estimated $222,600 of manufacturing overhead for an estimated allocation base of $159,000 direct material dollars.

    The following transactions took place during the year (all purchases and services were acquired on account):

    a. Raw materials purchased, $151,000.
    b. Raw materials requisitioned for use in production (all direct materials), $142,000.
    c. Utility bills incurred in the factory, $22,000.
    d. Costs for salaries and wages were incurred as follows:

    Direct labor $ 224,000
    Indirect labor $ 61,800
    Selling and administrative salaries $ 144,000

    e. Maintenance costs incurred in the factory, $25,000.
    f. Advertising costs incurred, $120,000.
    g.

    Depreciation recorded for the year, $48,000 (70% relates to factory assets, and the remainder relates to selling and administrative assets).

    h.

    Rental cost incurred on buildings, $87,000 (70% of the space is occupied by the factory, and 30% is occupied by sales and administration).

    i. Miscellaneous selling and administrative costs incurred, $12,000.
    j. Manufacturing overhead cost was applied to jobs, $ ?
    k.

    Cost of goods manufactured for the year, $558,000.

    l.

    Sales for the year (all on account) totaled $1,300,000. These goods cost $530,000 according to their job cost sheets.

    The balances in the inventory accounts at the beginning of the year were as follows:

    Raw materials $ 25,000
    Work in process $ 21,000
    Finished Goods $

    34,000

    financial accounting acg 2021 435213

    What is net income for Shiver Ice House?

    Common Stock $129,000
    Cash $120,240
    Supplies $3,300
    Prepaid Rent $5,000
    Revenue $21,800
    Retained Earnings $31,800
    Accounts Payable $26,800
    Accounts Receivable $26,050
    Office Equipment $26,900
    Unearned Revenue $7,770
    Utilities Expense $440
    Shaving Equipment $35,240
    $22,330
    $26,360
    $53,160
    $29,130
    $21,360

    accounting treatments 435248

    For each of these nonrecurring items, give an example and indicate (match with) the appropriate accounting treatment.
    1. Extraordinary item
    2. Prior period adjustment
    3. Change in accounting estimate
    4. Change in accounting principle
    5. Comprehensive income items
    6. Change in reporting entity
    7. SEC Enforcement Releases

    A. Shown net as a separate line item between net income and comprehensive income, no restatement.
    B. Income statement line items adjusted as appropriate, gross or net, prior years restated.
    C. Gross amount is part of its regular income or expense line item in income from continuing operations, prior years restated.
    D. Gross amount is part of its regular income or expense line item in income from continuing operations, no restatement.
    E. Shown cumulative net as a separate line item between income from continuing operations and net income, no restatement.
    F. Shown net as a separate line item between income from continuing operations and net income, no restatement.
    G. Not in income statement, opening retained earnings is changed by net amount, no restatement.

    please help 435253

    North Star prepared the following unadjusted trail balance at the end of its second year of operation ending December 31, 2012

    Account Title Debit Credit

    Cash $12,000

    Account Receivable 6,000

    Prepaid Rent 2,400

    Equipment 21,000

    Accumulated Depreciation $1,000

    Account Payable 1,000

    Utilities payable 0

    Income tax payable 0

    Contributed Capital 24,800

    Retained earning 2,100

    Sale revenue 50,000

    Wage expense 25,000

    Utilities expense 12,500

    Rent expense 0

    Depreciation expense 0

    Income tax expense 0

    Total $78,900 $78,900

    Other data not yet record at December 31, 2012

    a) Rent expired during 2012, $1,200

    b) Depreciation expense for 2012, $1,000

    c) Utilities payable, $9,000

    d) Income tax expense, $390

    Required:

    1. Using the format show in the demonstrate case, indicate the accounting equation effects of each requirement adjustment.

    2. Prepare the adjusting journal entries require at December 31,2012

    3. Summarize the adjusting journal in T accounts. After entering the beginning balances and computing the adjusted ending balances, prepare an adjust trail balance as of December 31,2012

    4. Compute the amount of net income using (a) the preliminary (unadjusted) numbers, and (b) the final (adjusted) numbers. Has the adjusting entries not been recorded, Would net income have been overstated or understate, and be what amount?

    acct 212 435274

    On November 1, 2011, Leetch Ltd. borrows $430,000 cash from a bank by signing a five year installment note bearing 5% interest. The note requires equal total payments each year on October 31. (Use Table B.3)

    Required:
    1.

    Compute the total amount of each installment payment. (Round “PV Factor” to 4 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Installment payment $

    2.

    Complete an amortization table for this installment note. (Please calculate interest expense in the final period as the amount of cash minus the amount of the Beginning balance and make sure that the ending balance in the last period equals to “0”. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Round “PV Factor” to 4 decimal places and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Payments

    Period Ending Date (A)
    Beginning
    Balance
    (B)
    Debit
    Interest
    Expense
    (C)
    Debit
    Notes
    Payable
    (D)
    Credit
    Cash
    (E)
    Ending Balance
    10/31/2012 $ $ $ $ $
    10/31/2013
    10/31/2014
    10/31/2015
    10/31/2016



    Total $ $ $







    3. Prepare the journal entries in which Leetch records the following:

    (a)

    Accrued interest as of December 31, 2011 (the end of its annual reporting period). (Do not round intermediate calculations and round your final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Date General Journal Debit Credit
    Dec. 31

    (b)

    The first annual payment on the note. (Round “PV Factor” to 4 decimal places. Do not round intermediate calculations and round your final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Date General Journal Debit Credit
    Oct. 31

    accounting homework 435319

    On October 29, 2012, Lobo Co. began operations by purchasing razors for resale. Lobo uses the perpetual inventory method. The razors have a 90 day warranty that requires the company to replace any nonworking razor. When a razor is returned, the company discards it and mails a new one from Merchandise Inventory to the customer. The company’s cost per new razor is $14 and its retail selling price is $70 in both 2012 and 2013. The manufacturer has advised the company to expect warranty costs to equal 7% of dollar sales. The following transactions and events occurred.

    2012
    Nov. 11 Sold 80 razors for $5,600 cash.
    30 Recognized warranty expense related to November sales with an adjusting entry.
    Dec. 9 Replaced 16 razors that were returned under the warranty.
    16 Sold 240 razors for $16,800 cash.
    29 Replaced 32 razors that were returned under the warranty.
    31 Recognized warranty expense related to December sales with an adjusting entry.
    2013
    Jan. 5 Sold 160 razors for $11,200 cash.
    17 Replaced 37 razors that were returned under the warranty.
    31. Recognized warranty expense related to January sales with an adjusting entry.

    1. Prepare journal entries to record above transactions and adjustments for 2012.

    2.

    Prepare journal entries to record above transactions and adjustments for 2013

    3.

    How much warranty expense is reported for November 2012 and for December 2012?

    4. How much warranty expense is reported for January 2013?

    5. What is the balance of the Estimated Warranty Liability account as of December 31, 2012?

    6. What is the balance of the Estimated Warranty Liability account as of January 31, 2013?

    help with financial statement nineteen measures of solvency and profitability 435335

    Okay so I did half of it and the other half I can’t figure out so please help me with it. The ones that are blank are the ones I need helf with and the ones that are already answered please don’t worry about them because they are correct so please help me with the others.

    The comparative financial statements of Blige Inc. are as follows. The market price of Blige Inc. common stock was $60 on December 31, 2012.

    Here are the link to solve the problems. Please delete the space at the end before .gif to view properly

    Link 1

    http://east.cengagenow.com/ilrn/books/waac24h/images/ch17/waac24h_ch17_pr17_4a. gif

    Link 2

    http://east.cengagenow.com/ilrn/books/waac24h/images/ch17/waac24h_ch17_pr17_4a1. gif

    Determine the following measures for 2012, rounding to one decimal place, except for dollar amounts, which should be rounded to the nearest cent. Assume 365 days a year.

    1. Working capital: $ 1443000

    2. Current ratio: 3.0

    3. Quick ratio: 2.4

    4. Accounts receivable turnover: 5.3

    5. Number of days’ sales in receivables: 68.4

    6. Inventory turnover:

    7. Number of days’ sales in inventory:

    8. Ratio of fixed assets to long term liabilities:

    9. Ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity:

    10. Number of times interest charges earned:

    11. Number of times preferred dividends earned:

    12. Ratio of net sales to assets: %

    13. Rate earned on total assets: %

    14. Rate earned on stockholders’ equity: %

    15. Rate earned on common stockholders’ equity: %

    16. Earnings per share on common stock: $

    17. Price earnings ratio:

    18. Dividends per share of common stock: $ .5

    19. Dividend yield: .8%

    Please help!

    please show working 435372

    1. The Overdale plant has two categories of overhead: maintenance and inspection. Costs expected for these categories for the coming year are as follows:

    Maintenance

    A??L120,000

    Inspection

    A??L200,000

    The plant currently applies overhead during direct labour hours and expected capacity of 80,000 direct labour hours. The following data has been assembled for use in developing a bid for a proposed job:

    Direct materials

    A??L1,500

    Direct labour

    A??L5,000

    Machine hours

    400

    Number of inspections

    6

    Direct labour hours

    750

    Using direct labour hours to assign overhead, the total cost of the potential job would be:

    1. A??L9,500

    2. A??L6,000

    3. A??L3,000

    4. A??L1,600

    acc 557 434320

    On July 31, Tractor Supplies sold merchandise to J. Robson on account. The sales price was $8,400, and the cost of goods sold was $6,300. The sales revenue was recorded immediately, but the entry recording the cost of goods sold was dated August 2. As a result, net income for July was

    overstated by $2,100.
    overstated by $6,300.
    not affected, but the net income for August is understated.
    overstated by $8,400.

    post problem 1 merger 434346

    On June 30, 200X Carl Corporation purchased Lin Company by issuing 50,000 shares of stock. Stock has a market value of $15.00 per share. This acquisition is to be recorded as a statutory merger through asset acquisition. In this type of business combination Carl company acquires all the assets and liabilities of Lin Company. Lin Company is dissolved and goes out of business. Prepare the entries the purchase and combination on June 30, 200X.

    Following information is shown prior to the merger activity being recorded:

    Carl Company

    Assets Liabilities and Capital

    Cash $ 80,000 Current Liabilities $ 80,000
    Inventories 80,000
    Plant 300,000 Common Stock $5PV 10,000
    Land 20,000 Additional Paid in Capital 190,000 Retained Earnings 200,000
    Total $480,000 Total $480,000

    Lin Company

    Assets Liabilities and Capital

    Cash $200,000 Current Liabilities $100,000
    Accounts Receivable 20,000 Common Stock $10PV 150,000
    Plant Assets 530,000 Additional Paid in Capital 400,000 Retained Earnings 100,000
    Total $750,000 Total $750,000

    Other information:

    The Lin Company Plant Assets fair market value is $600,000.

    The out of pocket costs of the merger are:

    SEC Registration Statement fee $20,000
    Legal fees for the SEC Registration Statement $15,000
    Accounting fees for the SEC Registration Statement $ 5,000
    Finders Fee $ 6,000
    Legal fees for the merger $ 2,000
    Accounting fees for the merger $ 4,000

    1. Prepare and post the entries to record this as a statutory merger. In a statutory merger permanent dissolution of the subsidiary occurs at the combination date.

    2. Prepare an after merger balance sheet.

    will give full points to person who answers this correctly with my values very stuck 434362

    You have just been hired as a loan officer at Fairfield State Bank. Your supervisor has given you a file containing a request from Hedrick Company, a manufacturer of auto components, for a $1,000,000 five year loan. Financial statement data on the company for the last two years are given below:

    Hedrick Company
    Comparative Balance Sheet
    This Year Last Year
    Assets
    Current assets:
    Cash $ 320,000 $ 418,000
    Marketable securities 0 109,000
    Accounts receivable, net 900,000 607,000
    Inventory 1,380,000 890,000
    Prepaid expenses 88,000 65,000




    Total current assets 2,688,000 2,089,000
    Plant and equipment, net 3,481,300 3,136,900




    Total assets $ 6,169,300 $ 5,225,900








    Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
    Liabilities:
    Current liabilities $ 1,370,000 $ 900,000
    Bonds payable, 10% 1,280,000 1,130,000




    Total liabilities 2,650,000 2,030,000




    Stockholders equity:
    Preferred stock, 8%, $30 par value 600,000 600,000
    Common stock, $40 par value 2,000,000 2,000,000
    Retained earnings 919,300 595,900




    Total stockholders equity 3,519,300 3,195,900




    Total liabilities and stockholders equity $ 6,169,300 $ 5,225,900









    Hedrick Company
    Comparative Income Statement and Reconciliation
    This Year Last Year
    Sales (all on account) $ 5,420,000 $ 4,190,000
    Cost of goods sold 4,150,000 3,110,000




    Gross margin 1,270,000 1,080,000
    Selling and administrative expenses 520,000 510,000




    Net operating income 750,000 570,000
    Interest expense 128,000 113,000




    Net income before taxes 622,000 457,000
    Income taxes (30%) 186,600 137,100




    Net income 435,400 319,900




    Dividends paid:
    Preferred stock 48,000 48,000
    Common stock 64,000 32,000




    Total dividends paid 112,000 80,000




    Net income retained 323,400 239,900
    Retained earnings, beginning of year 595,900 356,000




    Retained earnings, end of year $ 919,300 $ 595,900









    Marva Rossen, who just two years ago was appointed president of Hedrick Company, admits that the company has been Af?cAc‚¬A??oinconsistentAf?cAc‚¬ in its performance over the past several years. But Rossen argues that the company has its costs under control and is now experiencing strong sales growth, as evidenced by the more than 28% increase in sales over the last year. Rossen also argues that investors have recognized the improving situation at Hedrick Company, as shown by the jump in the price of its common stock from $30 per share last year to $46 per share this year. Rossen believes that with strong leadership and with the modernized equipment that the $1,000,000 loan will enable the company to buy, profits will be even stronger in the future.

    Anxious to impress your supervisor, you decide to generate all the information you can about the company. You determine that the following ratios are typical of companies in Hedrick’sindustry:

    Current ratio 2.3
    Acid test ratio 1.2
    Average collection period 31.0 days
    Average sale period 60.0 days
    Return on assets 9.5 %
    Debt to equity ratio 0.65
    Times interest earned 5.7
    Price earnings ratio 10

    Required:
    1.

    You decide first to assess the rate of return that the company is generating. Compute the following for both this year and last year:

    a.

    The return on total assets. (Total assets at the beginning of last year were $4,380,000.) (Round your answers to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    This year Last year
    Return on total assets % %

    b.

    The return on common stockholders’ equity. (Stockholders’ equity at the beginning of last year totaled $4,684,690. There has been no change in preferred or common stock over the last two years.) (Round your intermediate calculations to the nearest whole number and final answers to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    This year Last year
    Return on common stockholders’ equity % %

    c.

    Is the company’s financial leverage positive or negative?

    This year (Click to select)PositiveNegative
    Last year (Click to select)PositiveNegative

    2.

    You decide next to assess the well being of the common stockholders. For both this year and last year, compute:

    a.

    The earnings per share. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    This year Last year
    Earnings per share $ $

    b.

    The dividend yield ratio for common stock. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answers to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    This year Last year
    Dividend yield ratio % %

    c. The dividend payout ratio for common stock. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answers to 1 decimal place.Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    This year Last year
    Dividend payout ratio % %

    d.

    The price earnings ratio. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answers to 1 decimal place.)

    This year Last year
    Price earnings ratio

    e.

    The book value per share of common stock. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    This year Last year
    Book value per share $ $

    f.

    The gross margin percentage. (Round your answers to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    This year Last year
    Gross margin percentage % %

    3.

    You decide, finally, to assess creditor ratios to determine both short term and long term debt paying ability. For both this year and last year, compute:

    a. Working capital. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    This year Last year
    Working capital $ $

    b. The current ratio. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places.)

    This year Last year
    Current ratio

    c. The acid test ratio. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places.)

    This year Last year
    Acid test ratio

    d.

    The average collection period. (The accounts receivable at the beginning of last year totaled $525,000.) (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answers to the nearest whole number. Use 365 days in a year.)

    This year Last year
    Average collection period days days

    e.

    The average sale period. (The inventory at the beginning of last year totaled $640,000.) (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answers to the nearest whole number. Use 365 days in a year.)

    This year Last year
    Average sale period days days

    f. The debt to equity ratio. (Round your answers to 2 decimal place.)

    This year Last year
    Debt to equity ratio

    g. The times interest earned. (Round your answers to 1 decimal place.)

    This year Last year
    Times interest earned

    accounting 434387

    Kalifo Company manufactures a line of electric garden tools that are sold in general hardware stores. The company’s controller, Sylvia Harlow, has just received the sales forecast for the coming year for Kalifo’s three products: weeders, hedge clippers, and leaf blowers. Kalifo has experienced considerable variations in sales volumes and variable costs over the past two years, and Harlow believes the forecast should be carefully evaluated from a cost volume profit viewpoint. The preliminary budget information for 1996 is presented below. Weeders Hedge Clippers Leaf Blowers Unit Sales 50,000 50,000 100,000 Unit Selling Price $28.00 $36.00 $48.00 Variable Manufacturing Cost/Unit 13.00 12.00 25.00 Variable Selling Cost per unit 5.00 4.00 6.00 For 1996, Kalifo’s fixed factory overhead is budgeted at $2 million, and the company’s fixed selling and administrative expenses are forecast to be $600,000. Kalifo has a tax rate of 40 percent. Required: Determine Kalifo Co.’s budgeted net income for 1996. Assuming that the sales mix remains as budgeted, determine how many units of each product Kalifo must sell in order to break even in 1996. Determine the total dollar sales Kalifo must sell in 1996 in order to earn an after tax net income of $450,000. After preparing the original estimates, Kalifo determines that its variable manufacturing cost of leaf blowers will increase 20 percent and the variable selling cost of hedge clippers can be expected to increase $1 per unit. However, Kalifo has decided not to change the selling price of either product. In addition, Kalifo learns that its leaf blower is perceived as the best value on the market, and it can expect to sell three times as many leaf blowers as any other product. Under these circumstances, determine how many units of each product Kalifo will have to sell to break even in 1996. Explain the limitations of cost volume profit analysis that Sylvia Harlow should consider when evaluating Kalifo’s 1996 budget.

    income statement 434392

    Kandon Enterprises, Inc., has two operating divisions; one manufactures machinery and the other breeds and sells horses. Both divisions are considered separate components as defined by generally accepted accounting principles. The horse division has been unprofitable, and on November 15, 2013, Kandon adopted a formal plan to sell the division. The sale was completed on April 30, 2014. At December 31, 2013, the component was considered held for sale.

    On December 31, 2013, the company’s fiscal year end, the book value of the assets of the horse division was $250,000. On that date, the fair value of the assets, less costs to sell, was $200,000. The before tax loss from operations of the division for the year was $140,000. The company’s effective tax rate is 40%. The after tax income from continuing operations for 2013 was $400,000.

    Required:
    1.

    Prepare a partial income statement for 2013 beginning with income from continuing operations. Ignore EPS disclosures.

    2.

    Prepare a partial income statement for 2013 beginning with income from continuing operations. Assuming that the estimated net fair value of the horse division’s assets was $400,000, instead of $200,000

    intermediate accounting 434413

    Kiddie World uses a periodic inventory system and the retail inventory method to estimate ending inventory and cost of goods sold. The following data are available for the quarter ending September 30, 2013:

    Cost Retail
    Beginning inventory $ 450,000 $ 580,000
    Net purchases 935,000 1,360,000
    Freight in 72,800
    Net markups 63,000
    Net markdowns 33,000
    Net sales 1,275,000

    Estimate ending inventory and cost of goods sold using the conventional method (average cost and the LCM approximation). (Round ratio calculation to 2 decimal places.)


    CostRetailCost to Retail RatioBeginning inventory Plus: Net purchases Freight inNet markupsGoods available for sale Less: Net markdowns Goods available for saleCost to retail percentageLess: Net sales Estimated ending inventory at retail Estimated ending inventory at cost Estimated cost of goods sold

    managerial accounting homework help 434424

    Kimm Company has gathered the following information about its product.

    Direct materials: Each unit of product contains 4.40 pounds of materials. The average waste and spoilage per unit produced under normal conditions is 0.20 pounds. Materials cost $3 per pound, but Kimm always takes the 3.65% cash discount all of its suppliers offer. Freight costs average $0.27 per pound.

    Direct labor. Each unit requires 1.30 hours of labor. Setup, cleanup, and downtime average 0.18 hours per unit. The average hourly pay rate of Kimm%u2019s employees is $13.30. Payroll taxes and fringe benefits are an additional $2.70 per hour.

    Manufacturing overhead. Overhead is applied at a rate of $6.00 per direct labor hour.

    Compute Kimm%u2019s total standard cost per unit. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25.)

    accounting help 434429

    Kindle, Inc. manufactures cosmetic products that are sold through a network of sales agents. The agents are paid a commission of 12.5% of sales. The income statement for the year ending December 31, 2013 is as follows.

    Sales $130,000

    Cost of goods sold

    Variable $58,500

    Fixed 14,350 72,850

    Gross margin 57,150

    Selling and marketing expenses

    Commissions $16,250

    Fixed costs 17,100 33,350

    Operating income 23,800

    The company is considering hiring its own sales staff to replace the network of agents. It will pay its salespeople a commission of 10% and incur additional fixed costs of $13 million.

    (A) Under the current policy of using a network of sales agents, calculate Kindle Inc%u2019s break %u2013even point in sales dollars for the year 2013.

    (B) Calculate the company%u2019s break even point in sales dollars for the year 2013 if it hires its own sales force to replace the network of agents.

    (C) Calculate the degree of operating leverage at sales of $ 130 million if (1) Kindle, Inc. uses sales agents and (2) Kindle inc. employs its own sales staff.

    cash budget 434466

    Lager Dental Clinic is a medium sized dental service specializing in family dental care. The clinic is currently preparing the master budget for the first 2 quarters of 2012. All that remains in this process is the cash budget. The following information has been collected from other portions of the master budget and elsewhere.

    Beginning cash balance $ 33,930
    Required minimum cash balance 28,275
    Payment of income taxes (2nd quarter) 4,524
    Professional salaries:
    1st quarter 158,340
    2nd quarter 158,340
    Interest from investments (2nd quarter) 5,655
    Overhead costs:
    1st quarter 84,825
    2nd quarter 113,100
    Selling and administrative costs, including
    $3,393 depreciation:
    1st quarter 56,550
    2nd quarter 79,170
    Purchase of equipment (2nd quarter) 56,550
    Sale of equipment (1st quarter) 16,965
    Collections from clients:
    1st quarter 260,130
    2nd quarter 429,780
    Interest payments (2nd quarter)

    Prepare a cash budget for each of the first two quarters of 2012. (List multiple entries from largest to smallest amounts, e.g. 10, 5, 1 for January. If answer is zero please enter 0, do not leave any fields blank.)

    My question is how do you find the borrowings and repayments.

    339

    managerial accounting 14th edition 434471

    Lamar Company is studying a project that would have an eight year life and require a $2,400,000 investment in equipment. At the end of eight years, the project would terminate and the equipment would have no salvage value. The project would provide net operating income each year as follows: Sales 3,000.000. Less Variable Expenses 1,800,000. Contribution Margin 1,200,000. Less fixed expenses: Advertising, salaries, and out of pocket costs: 700.000. Depreciation: 300,000. Total fixed Expenses 1,000,000. Net operating income: 200,000. A) compute the net annual cash inflow from the project B) Compute the project’s net present value. Is the project acceptable? C) find the project’s internal rate of return to the nearest whole percent D) compute the project’s payback period. E) comput the project’s simple rate of return.

    chapter 5 connect hmwk 434487

    Larned Corporation recorded the following transactions for the just completed month.
    a.

    $72,900 in raw materials were requisitioned for use in production. Of this amount, $61,100 was for direct materials and the remainder was for indirect materials.

    b.

    Total labor wages of $112,500 were incurred. Of this amount, $101,300 was for direct labor and the remainder was for indirect labor.

    c. Additional manufacturing overhead costs of $176,000 were incurred.
    d. A total of $187,000 in manufacturing overhead was applied to jobs.

    weighted average method 434547

    Lindex Company uses a process costing system. The following data are available for one department for October.

    Units Materials Conversion

    Work in Process, October 1 50,000 90% 60%

    Work in Process, October 31 30,000 70% 50%

    The department started 390,000 units into production during the month and transferred 410,000 completed units to the next department.

    Required:

    Compute the equivalent units of production for October, assuming that the company uses the weighted average method of accounting for units and cost.

    The table required is as such:

    Equivalent Units

    Materials

    Conversion

    Equivalent units of production…………………….

    431,000

    425,000

    chapter 13 lugano s pizza parlor is considering the purchase of a large oven and rel 434634

    Lugano%u2019s Pizza Parlor is considering the purchase of a large oven and related equipment for mixing and baking %u201Ccrazy bread.%u201D The oven and equipment would cost $284,800 delivered and installed. It would be usable for about 15 years, after which it would have a 10% scrap value. The following additional information is available:

    a.

    Mr. Lugano estimates that purchase of the oven and equipment would allow the pizza parlor to bake and sell 70,000 loaves of crazy bread each year. The bread sells for $1.40 per loaf.

    b.

    The cost of the ingredients in a loaf of bread is 30% of the selling price. Mr. Lugano estimates that other costs each year associated with the bread would be as follows: salaries, $22,000; utilities, $7,000; and insurance, $4,000.

    c.

    The pizza parlor uses straight line depreciation on all assets, deducting salvage value from original cost.

    (Ignore income taxes.)

    Required:
    1.

    Prepare a contribution format income statement showing the net operating income each year from production and sale of the crazy bread. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    (Click to select) Salaries Cost of ingredients Depreciation Utilities Insurance Sales revenue $
    Variable expenses:
    (Click to select) Add Deduct : (Click to select) Depreciation Utilities Salaries Sales revenue Cost of ingredients Insurance

    (Click to select) Insurance Utilities Net operating income (loss) Depreciation Contribution margin Salaries
    Selling and administrative expenses:
    (Click to select) Cost of ingredients Depreciation Insurance Utilities Sales revenue Salaries $
    (Click to select) Depreciation Insurance Salaries Utilities Sales revenue Cost of ingredients
    (Click to select) Salaries Utilities Sales revenue Cost of ingredients Insurance Depreciation
    (Click to select) Depreciation Insurance Sales revenue Salaries Utilities Cost of ingredients


    (Click to select) Net operating loss Contribution margin Net operating income Gross margin $



    2a.

    Compute the simple rate of return for the new oven and equipment. (Round your answer to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    Simple rate of return %

    2b.

    If Mr. Lugano accepts any project with a simple rate of return greater than 5%, will he acquire the franchise?

    Yes
    No

    3a.

    Compute the payback period on the oven and equipment.

    Payback period years

    3b.

    If Mr. Lugano accepts any investment with a payback period of less than nine years, will he acquire the franchise?

    No
    Yes

    accounting depreciation 434648

    A machine costing $212,200 with a four year life and an estimated $17,000 salvage value is installed in Calhoon Company’s factory on January 1. The factory manager estimates the machine will produce 488,000 units of product during its life. It actually produces the following units: year 1, 122,500; year 2, 122,900; year 3, 120,600; and year 4, 128,400. The total number of units produced by the end of year 4 exceeds the original estimateAf?cAc‚¬”this difference was not predicted.

    (The machine must not be depreciated below its estimated salvage value.)

    Year Straight Line Units of
    Production
    Double declining balance
    1 $ $ $
    2
    3
    4



    Totals $ $ $

    managerial accounting 434676

    Maga Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

    Selling price $ 187
    Units in beginning inventory 0
    Units produced 3,180
    Units sold 2,810
    Units in ending inventory 370
    Variable cost per unit:
    Direct materials $ 52
    Direct labor $ 58
    Variable manufacturing overhead $ 15
    Variable selling and administrative $ 17
    Fixed costs:
    Fixed manufacturing overhead $ 111,300
    Fixed selling and administrative $ 8,430

    Required:
    a.

    What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing? (Do not round intermediate calculations. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Cost per unit
    Variable costing $

    b.

    What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Cost per unit
    Absorption costing $

    c.

    Prepare a contribution format income statement for the month using variable costing. (Input all amounts as positive values except losses which should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Variable Costing Income Statement
    (Click to select) Sales Selling and administrative expenses Contribution margin Manufacturing overhead Net operating income (loss) Variable cost of goods sold Variable selling and administrative expenses $
    Variable expenses:
    (Click to select) Direct labor Net operating income Variable selling and administrative expenses Direct materials Contribution margin Variable cost of goods sold Sales $
    (Click to select) Direct materials Variable cost of goods sold Direct labor Sales Contribution margin Net operating income Variable selling and administrative expenses


    (Click to select) Contribution margin Sales Variable cost of goods sold Manufacturing overhead Selling and administrative expenses Net operating income (loss) Variable selling and administrative expenses
    Fixed expenses:
    (Click to select) Fixed selling and administrative expenses Variable selling and administrative expenses Contribution margin Variable cost of goods sold Net operating income Sales Fixed manufacturing overhead
    (Click to select) Variable cost of goods sold Fixed manufacturing overhead Net operating income Variable selling and administrative expenses Fixed selling and administrative expenses Contribution margin Sales


    (Click to select) Contribution margin Manufacturing overhead Variable selling and administrative expenses Variable cost of goods sold Selling and administrative expenses Sales Net operating income (loss) $



    d.

    Prepare an income statement for the month using absorption costing. (Input all amounts as positive values except losses which should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Absorption Costing Income Statement
    (Click to select) Sales Cost of goods sold Net operating income (loss) Fixed selling and administrative expenses Variable selling and administrative expenses Gross margin $
    (Click to select) Fixed selling and administrative expenses Cost of goods sold Sales Gross margin Net operating income (loss) Variable selling and administrative expenses

    (Click to select) Net operating income (loss) Fixed selling and administrative expenses Gross margin Variable selling and administrative expenses Sales Cost of goods sold
    Selling and administrative expenses:
    (Click to select) Sales Variable selling and administrative expenses Cost of goods sold Fixed selling and administrative expenses Gross margin Net operating income (loss) $
    (Click to select) Fixed selling and administrative expenses Variable selling and administrative expenses Sales Gross margin Net operating income (loss) Cost of goods sold


    (Click to select) Fixed selling and administrative expenses Net operating income (loss) Cost of goods sold Gross margin Sales Variable selling and administrative expenses $



    e.

    Reconcile the variable costing and absorption costing net operating incomes for the month. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Reconciliation of Variable Costing and Absorption Costing Net Operating Incomes
    Variable costing net operating income $
    (Click to select) Deduct Add : (Click to select) Fixed manufacturing overhead costs deferred in inventory under absorption costing Fixed manufacturing overhead costs released from inventory under absorption costing

    Absorption costing net operating income $



    references

    what is the best financial decision 434695

    Malik Properties has three separate investment choices with a 16% corporate hurdle rate and $60,000 to apply to capital investments. Choice 1 is to buy a lease on warehouse space for $30,000 that could be sublet to an already identified tenant generating net cash flows of $7,925 per year for 5 years paid at the start of each year. Choice 2 is to buy a lease on one or two fast food restaurants from an estate that is projected to settle in nine years. Each restaurant lease costs $20,000 and will generate net cash flows of $6,700 per year with all lease payments being made in arrears. Choice 3 is to buy units within a flexible space office building. There are currently 4 identical units available which can be acquired in any whole unit quantity for $10,000 per unit. Each unit is projected to generate net cash flows of $5,166.15 per year for seven years. How should Malik Properties proceed and why?

    contribution margin 434720

    Management of a company is evaluating two potential orders. Due to limited capacity only one of these orders can be accepted. Incremental fixed costs are the same for either option. Based on the information in the table below which of the following statements is true?

    Option A, Option B

    Number of Units: 30, 40

    Contribution Margin Ratio: 35%, 45%

    Selling Price Per unit: $400, $300

    A.Option B has the highest total contribution margin.

    B.Option B has the lowest contribution margin ratio.

    C.Option A has the highest total contribution margin.

    D.Option A has the highest amount per dollar of sales to contribute to contribution margin and profit.

    E.Option B has the highest contribution margin per unit.

    chapter 13 the management of opry company a wholesale distributor of suntan products 434731

    The management of Opry Company, a wholesale distributor of suntan products, is considering the purchase of a $42,000 machine that would reduce operating costs in its warehouse by $6,000 per year. At the end of the machine%u2019s 9 year useful life, it will have no scrap value. The company%u2019s required rate of return is 11%. (Ignore income taxes.)

    Click here to view Exhibit 13B 2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using table.

    Required:
    1.

    Determine the net present value of the investment in the machine. (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, intermediate and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Net present value $
    2.

    What is the difference between the total, undiscounted cash inflows and cash outflows over the entire life of the machine? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Net cash flow $

    anyone plz help need it asap 434755

    Manufacturing income statement, statement of cost of goods

    manufactured

    Several items are omitted from each of the following income statement and cost of goods

    manufactured statement data for the month of December 2012:

    Tom Jerry company

    Company

    Materials inventory, December 1 $ 1 87,200 $ 1 1 8,000

    Materials inventory, December 31 (a) 1 20,000

    Materials purchased 475,200 228,000

    Cost of direct materials used in production 501 ,600 (a)

    Direct labor 705,600 (b)

    Factory overhead 21 8,400 1 20,000

    Total manufacturing costs incurred during December (b) 690,000

    Total manufacturing costs 1 ,785,600 985,000

    Work in process inventory, December 1 360,000 295,000

    Work in process inventory, December 31 302,400 (c)

    Cost of goods manufactured (c) 683,000

    Finished goods inventory, December 1 31 6,800 1 36,000

    Finished goods inventory, December 31 331 ,200 (d)

    Sales 2,760,000 1 ,1 1 7,000

    Cost of goods sold (d) 701 ,000

    Gross prof t (e) (e)

    Operating expenses 360,000 (f)

    Net income (f) 256,000

    Instructions

    1. Determine the amounts of the missing items, identifying them by letter.

    2. Prepare a statement of cost of goods manufactured for Jerry Company.

    3. Prepare an income statement for Jerry Company.

    trial balance and closing entries 434811

    MARKEL CORPORATION

    Balance Sheet

    December 31, 2011

    Cash $ 30,000 Accounts payable $ 13,750

    Inventory 30,750 Interest payable 2,500

    Prepaid insurance 5,600 Bonds payable 50,000

    Equipment 38,000 Common stock 25,000

    $104,350

    Retained earnings $ 13,100

    $104,350

    During 2012, the following transactions occurred.

    1. Markel paid $2,500 interest on the bonds on January 1, 2012.

    2. Markel purchased $241,100 of inventory on account.

    3. Markel sold for $480,000 cash inventory which cost $265,000. Markel also collected

    $28,800 sales taxes.

    4. Markel paid $230,000 on accounts payable.

    5. Markel paid $2,500 interest on the bonds on July 1, 2012.

    6. The prepaid insurance ($5,600) expired on July 31.

    7. On August 1, Markel paid $10,200 for insurance coverage from August 1, 2012,

    through July 31, 2013.

    8. Markel paid $17,000 sales taxes to the state.

    9. Paid other operating expenses, $91,000.

    10. Retired the bonds on December 31, 2012, by paying $48,000 plus $2,500 interest.

    11. Issued $90,000 of 8% bonds on December 31, 2012, at 103. The bonds pay interest

    every June 30 and December 31.

    Adjustment data:

    1. Recorded the insurance expired from item 7.

    2. The equipment was acquired on December 31, 2011, and will be depreciated on a

    straight line basis over 5 years with a $3,000 salvage value.

    3. The income tax rate is 30%. (Hint: Prepare the income statement up to income before taxes and multiply by 30% to compute the amount.)

    Instructions:

    a) Prepare the 3rd Adjusted Entry (Hint: Income Statement before Income Tax is $104,150) and Trial Balance

    b) Prepare all necessary closing entries

    wolf broadcasting operated at the break even point of 2 250 000 279114

    Wolf Broadcasting operated at the break even point of $2,250,000 during Year 1 while incurring fixed costs of $1,000,000. Management is considering two alternatives to reduce the break even level. Alternative A trims fixed costs by $200,000 annually with no change in variable cost per unit; doing so, however, will reduce the quality of the product and result in a 10 percent decrease in selling price, but no change in the number of units sold. Alternative B substitutes automated equipment for certain operations now performed manually. Alternative B will result in an annual increase of $300,000 in fixed costs but a 5 percent decrease in variable costs per barrel produced, with no change in product quality, selling price, or sales volume.

    a. What was the total contribution margin (contribution margin per unit times number of units sold) during Year 1?

    b. What is the break even point in sales dollars under alternative A?

    c. What is the break even point in sales dollars under alternative B?

    d. What should the company do?

    zanda drug corporation buys three chemicals that are processed t 279124

    Zanda Drug Corporation buys three chemicals that are processed to produce two types of analgesics used as ingredients for popular over the counter drugs. The purchased chemicals are blended for two to three hours and then heated for 15 minutes. The results of the process are two separate analgesics, depryl and pencol, which are sent to a drying room until their moisture content is reduced to 6 to 8 percent. For every 1,300 pounds of chemicals used, 600 pounds of depryl and 600 pounds of pencol are produced. After drying, depryl and pencol are sold to companies that process them into their final form. The selling prices are $12 per pound for depryl and $30 per pound for pencol. The costs to produce 600 pounds of each analgesic are as follows:

    Chemicals …………$8,500

    Direct labor ……….. 6,735

    Overhead …………. 9,900

    The analgesics are packaged in 20 pound bags and shipped. The cost of each bag is $1.30. Shipping costs $0.10 per pound. Zanda could process depryl further by grinding it into a fine powder and then molding the powder into tablets. The tablets can be sold directly to retail drug stores as a generic brand. If this route were taken, the revenue received per bottle of tablets would be $4.00, with 10 bottles produced by every pound of depryl. The costs of grinding and tableting total $2.50 per pound of depryl. Bottles cost $0.40 each. Bottles are shipped in boxes that hold 25 bottles at a shipping cost of $1.60 per box.

    Required:

    1. Should Zanda sell depryl at split off, or should depryl be processed and sold as tablets?

    2. If Zanda normally sells 265,000 pounds of depryl per year, what will be the difference in profits if depryl is processed further?

    help creating a cash budget 279136

    Nemani Corporation is projecting a cash balance of $31,785 in its December 31, 2013, balance sheet. Nemani schedule of expected collections from customers for the first quarter of 2013 shows total collections of $180,885. The schedule of expected payments for direct materials for the first quarter of 2013 shows total payments of $40,200. Other information gathered for the first quarter of 2013 is: sale of equipment $3,392; direct labor $70,178, manufacturing overhead $34,583, and purchase of securities $12,372. Selling and administrative expenses are projected to be $45,117; this figure includes $1,117 in depreciation expense on the office equipment. All costs and expenses will be paid in cash. Nemani wants to maintain a balance of at least $25,000 cash at the end of each quarter.

    Instructions: Complete the cash budget for the first quarter.

    need help getting arranging a cost of goods manufacture schedule 279142

    Elias Corporation has the following cost records for February 2013.

    Indirect factory labor

    $ 4,612

    Factory utilities

    $ 401

    Direct materials used

    22,361

    Depreciation, factory equipment

    1,585

    Work in process, 6/1/12

    2,769

    Direct labor

    31,084

    Work in process, 6/30/12

    3,633

    Maintenance, factory equipment

    1,792

    Finished goods, 6/1/12

    4,609

    Indirect materials

    2,268

    Finished goods, 6/30/12

    7,429

    Factory manager’s salary

    3,315

    Instructions: Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule for February 2013.

    Elias Corporation

    Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule

    For the Month Ended June 30, 2013

    recording cash dividends 279148

    Problem 4: 4 points

    Willis Corporation has 72,615 shares of common stock outstanding. It declares a $2.20 per share cash dividend on August 1 to stockholders of record on September 15. The dividend is paid on October 31.

    Instructions: Prepare the entries on the appropriate dates to record the declaration and payment of the cash dividend.

    Date

    Account Description

    Debit

    Credit

    cost saving analysis 279150

    Problem 5: 10 points

    Caballero Manufacturing incurs unit costs of $7.90 ($6.10 variable and $1.80 fixed) in making a sub assembly part for its finished product. A supplier offers to make 12,500 of the assembly part at $5.75 per unit. If the offer is accepted, Caballero will save all variable costs but no fixed costs.

    Instructions: Prepare an analysis showing the total cost savings, if any, Caballero will realize by buying the part.

    Make

    Buy

    Total annual cost

    Caballero Company should _______________ the part because total annual costs to
    make are less than total costs to buy.

    different accounting entries 279154

    Problem 6: 5 points

    On July 1, Browning Corporation purchases 550,000 shares of its $6 par value common stock for the treasury at a cash price of $10 per share. On September 1, it sells 275,000 shares of the treasury stock for cash at $13 per share. The balance in the retained earnings account is $6,345,000.

    Instructions: Journalize the two treasury stock transactions.

    Date

    Account Description

    Debit

    Credit

    Problem 7: 4 points

    Johnson Company has a unit selling price of $450, variable costs per unit of $269, and fixed costs of $265,580.

    Instructions: Compute the break even point in units usingeither (a) the mathematical equationor (b) contribution margin per unit. Round answer up to the next whole unit.

    Problem 8: 10 points

    Holmes Company has a factory machine with a book value of $89,851 and a remaining useful life of 4 years. A new machine is available at a cost of $315,275. This machine will have a 4 year useful life with no salvage value. The new machine will lower annual variable manufacturing costs from $630,925 to $425,840.

    Instructions: Prepare an analysis showing whether the old machine should be retained or replaced.

    Retain Equipment

    Replace Equipment

    Total costs

    The equipment should be _______________ because total costs are lower than to retain the machine.

    Problem 9: 6 points

    For Perez Company, variable costs are 68% of sales, and fixed costs are $215,000. Management’s net income goal is $68,610.

    Instructions: Compute the required sales needed to achieve management’s target net income of $68,610.

    Essay Question: 6 points

    Keller Company requires its marketing managers to submit estimated cost volume profit data on all requests for new products, or expansions of a product line.

    Gina Lamb is a new manager. Her calculations show a fixed cost for a new project at $100,000 and a variable cost of $5. Since the selling price is only $15 for the proposed product, 10,000 would need to be sold to break even. That is approximately twice the volume estimate for the first year. She shares her dismay with Anne Smythe, another manager.

    Anne strongly advises her to revise her estimates. She points out that several of the costs that had been classified as fixed costs could be considered variable, since they are step costs and mixed costs. When the data has been revised classifying those costs as variable costs, the project appears viable.

    Required:

    1. Who are the stakeholders in this decision?

    2. Is it ethical for Gina to revise the costs as indicated? Briefly explain.

    3. What should Gina do?

    management accounting and control coursework assignment 279165

    Management Accounting and Control

    Coursework assignment: write a 2,500 word essay on the following topic:

    “The budget has historically played center stage in most organizations’ systems of management control (Otley, 1994). However, recently it has been the subject of considerable criticism (Hansen et al., 2003). Budgeting has beendeemed‘broken’ (Jensen, 2001), ‘a thing of the past’ (Gurton, 1999), or an ‘unnecessary evil’ (Wallander, 1999)”

    (Libby & Lindsay, 2010: 56).

    Required:

    Critically assess the arguments and the evidence for the claim thatorganizationsno longer need budgets.

    References

    You should consult
    academic journal articles for the coursework.
    Forget about the internet, other than to seek academic references.

    Plagiarism

    Plagiarism will be dealt with severely (see your Handbook for details, and see the University guidelines as to what constitutes plagiarism).

    Document Preview:

    Management Accounting and Control Coursework assignment: write a 2,500 word essay on the following topic: “The budget has historically played center stage in most organizations’ systems of management control (Otley, 1994). However, recently it has been the subject of considerable criticism (Hansen et al., 2003). Budgeting has been deemed ‘broken’ (Jensen, 2001), ‘a thing of the past’ (Gurton, 1999), or an ‘unnecessary evil’ (Wallander, 1999)”  (Libby & Lindsay, 2010: 56). Required: Critically assess the arguments and the evidence for the claim that organizations no longer need budgets.  References You should consult academic journal articles for the coursework. Forget about the internet, other than to seek academic references. Plagiarism Plagiarism will be dealt with severely (see your Handbook for details, and see the University guidelines as to what constitutes plagiarism). Referencing Remember to reference your sources using an appropriate citation system, such as Harvard. Essays will lose marks for poor referencing style. Grammar You are strongly advised to proof read your essay in order to correct grammatical errors, incorrect spelling, and poor sentence structuring. Seek help if you are unsure. There are university resources to help students improve their grammatical skills. These resources are available to both home and overseas students. Essays will lose marks for poor grammatical style. Do not use bullet points in your essay. Unsubstantiated assertions Do not make unsubstantiated assertions. Essays will lose marks if littered with unsubstantiated assertions. If you are unsure about what an unsubstantiated assertion is, do some research to find out about the issue, and, importantly, how to avoid making unsubstantiated assertions. Books & References Reading for management accounting and control is almost entirely journal based. The exceptions to this are : Merchant and Van der Stede (2007), Management Control Systems: performance…

    Attachments:

    1 a product has annual demand of 100 000 units the 279168

    1. A product has annual demand of 100,000 units. The plant manager wants production to follow a four hour cycle. Based on the following data, what setup cost will enable the desired production cycle? d=400 per day (250 days per year), p=4000 units per day, H=$40 per unit per year, and Q=200 (demand for four hours, half a day).

    A) $2.00

    B) $7.20

    C) $18.00

    D) $64.00

    E) $1,036.80

    2. Lead time for computers is 7 days with daily demand of 5 computers and a safety stock of 1 day. Each kanban holds 8 computers. What is the correct number of kanbans?

    A) Not enough information

    B) 1

    C) 5

    D) 7

    E) 8

    3. A grocery store is attempting to implement a kanban system. Which of the following would not be an application of kanbans?

    A) An empty doughnut tray signaling the bakery to produce 2 dozen glazed doughnuts.

    B) A line of 5 people in the Chinese department signaling the department to heat 5 Crab Rangoon.

    C) A red light on top of the cashier’s lane signals that the cashier needs additional change replenished.

    D) The meat department stocking up on turkeys before Thanksgiving.

    E) All of the above are kanban applications.

    4. A bakery uses 6 containers that each holds 4 cakes. If safety stock is 2 cakes and lead time is 11 days, determine daily demand. Answer = 2 cakes per day.

    A) True

    B) False

    5. Throughput measures the time

    A) That it takes to process one unit at a station

    B) Between the arrival of raw materials and the shipping of finished products

    C) To produce one whole product through an empty system (i.e., with no waiting)

    D) Required to move orders through the production process, from receipt to delivery

    E) None of the above

    6. The technique known as level schedules

    A) Requires that schedules be met without variation

    B) Processes many small batches rather than one large one

    C) Is known as “jelly bean” scheduling

    D) Is based on meeting one day’s demand with that day’s production

    E) All of the above are true regarding level scheduling.

    1 a product has demand of 4000 units per year 279170

    1. A product has demand of 4000 units per year. Ordering cost is $20 and holding cost is $4 per unit per year. The EOQ model is appropriate. The cost minimizing solution for this product will cost __________ per year in total annual inventory costs.

    A) $400

    B) $800

    C) $1200

    D) Zero; this is a class C item.

    E) Cannot be determined because unit price is not known.

    2. A production order quantity problem has daily demand rate = 10 and daily production rate = 50. The production order quantity for this problem is approximately 612 units. The average inventory for this problem is approximately

    A) 61

    B) 245

    C) 300

    D) 306

    E) 490

    3. If daily demand is normally distributed with a mean of 15 and standard deviation of 5, and lead time is constant at 4 days, a 90 percent service level will require safety stock of approximately

    A) 7 units

    B) 10 units

    C) 13 units

    D) 16 units

    E) 26 units

    4. Which of the following statements about the basic EOQ model is false?

    A) If the setup cost were to decrease, the EOQ would fall.

    B) If annual demand were to double, the number of orders per year would increase.

    C) If the ordering cost were to increase, the EOQ would rise.

    D) If annual demand were to double, the EOQ would also double.

    E) All of the above statements are true.

    5. Which of these statements about the production order quantity model is false?

    A) The production order quantity model is appropriate when the assumptions of the basic EOQ model are met, except that receipt is non instantaneous.

    B) Because receipt is non instantaneous, some units are used immediately, not stored in inventory.

    C) Average inventory is less than one half of the production order quantity.

    D) All else equal, the smaller the ratio of demand rate to production rate, the larger is the production order quantity.

    E) None of the above is false.

    6. If demand is not uniform and constant, then stock out risks can be controlled by

    A) Increasing the EOQ

    B) Placing an extra order

    C) Raising the selling price to reduce demand

    D) Adding safety stock

    E) Reducing the reorder point

    1 the process capability measures cp and cpk differ because 279174

    1. The process capability measures Cp and Cpk differ because

    A) Only one ensures the process mean is centered within the limits

    B) Cp values above 1 indicate a capable process; Cpk values above 2 indicate a capable process

    C) both are identical

    D) Cp values for a given process will always be greater than or equal to Cpk values

    E) both A and D

    2. A nationwide parcel delivery service keeps track of the number of late deliveries (more than 30 minutes past the time promised to clients) per day. They plan on using a control chart to plot their results. Which type of control chart(s) would you recommend?

    A) ? and R charts

    B) p charts

    C) c charts

    D) ? , but not R charts

    E) Both p and c charts

    3. The mean and standard deviation for a process for which we have a substantial history are µ = 120 and If = 2. For the x bar chart, a sample size of 16 will be used. What is the mean of the sampling distribution?

    A) 1/8 (0.125)

    B) 7.5

    C) 2

    D) 40

    E) 120

    4. A manager wants to build 3 sigma control limits for a process. The target value for the mean of the process is 10 units, and the standard deviation of the process is 6. If samples of size 9 are to be taken, the UCL and LCL will be

    A) 8 and 28

    B) 16 and 4

    C) 12 and 8

    D) 4 and 16

    E) 8 and 12

    5. A process that is assumed to be in control with limits of 89 +/ 2 had sample averages of the following? 87.1, 87, 87.2, 89, 90, 89.5, 88.5, and 88. Is the process in control?

    A) Yes

    B) No, one or more averages exceeded the limits.

    C) Not enough information to tell.

    D) No, there is a distinguishable trend.

    E) No, two or more consecutive points are very near the lower (or upper) limit.

    6. The specification for a plastic handle calls for a length of 6.0 inches ± .2 inches. The standard deviation of the process is estimated to be 0.05 inches. What are the upper and lower specification limits for this product? The process is known to operate at a mean thickness of 6.1 inches. What is the Cp and Cpk for this process? Answer: LSL = 5.8 inches, USL = 6.2 inches. Cp is 1.33, and Cpk is .67.

    A) True

    B) False

    1 the sequence of decisions that affect scheduling is a 279177

    1. The sequence of decisions that affect scheduling is

    A) Short term ? intermediate term ? long term

    B) Capacity planning ? aggregate planning ? master schedule ? short term schedules

    C) Strategic decisions ? tactical decisions ? operational decisions

    D) Forward decisions ? current decisions ? backward decisions

    E) None of the above

    2. The jobs listed below needed to be completed. Assume that it is now day 140. If the jobs are sequenced according to shortest processing time rule, what is the average completion time?

    Job

    ?Processing Time (days)

    ?Job due date (days)

    ?

    ?A

    ?20

    ?180

    ?

    ?B

    ?30

    ?200

    ?

    ?C

    ?10

    ?175

    ?

    ?D

    ?16

    ?230

    ?

    ?E

    ?18

    ?210

    ?

    ?A) 47.6 days

    B) 60.2 days

    C) 94.0 days

    D) 2.5 days

    E) 238.0 days

    3. Five jobs are waiting to be processed. Their processing times and due dates are given below. Using the earliest due date dispatching rule, in which order should the jobs be processed?

    Job

    ?Processing Time (days)

    ?Job due date (days)

    ?

    ?A

    ?4

    ?7

    ?

    ?B

    ?2

    ?4

    ?

    ?C

    ?8

    ?11

    ?

    ?D

    ?3

    ?5

    ?

    ?E

    ?5

    ?8

    ?

    ?A) C, E, A, D, B

    B) A, B, C, D, E

    C) B, D, A, E, C

    D) C, B, A, E, D

    E) None of the above

    4. If job 5 takes 3, 4, or 5 hours to be completed by workers A, B, and C, respectively, what would the row values for job 5 be after performing Step 1A of the assignment method?

    A) 3, 4, 5

    B) 8, 9, 10

    C) 0, 1, 2

    D) 6, 7, 8

    E) 1, 4/3, 5/3

    5. Five jobs are waiting for processing through two work centers. Their processing time (in minutes) at each work center is contained in the table below. Each job requires work center Sigma before work center Delta. According to Johnson’s rule, what sequence of jobs will minimize the completion time for all jobs?

    Job

    ?Sigma

    ?Delta

    ?

    ?R

    ?40

    ?10

    ?

    ?S

    ?25

    ?30

    ?

    ?T

    ?50

    ?20

    ?

    ?U

    ?35

    ?35

    ?

    ?V

    ?55

    ?15

    ?

    ?A) R S T U V

    B) S V T R U

    C) S U T V R

    D) V R U S T

    E) None of the above

    6. Which of the following statements regarding finite capacity scheduling (FCS) is false?

    A) Finite capacity scheduling is well suited for dynamic scheduling environments.

    B) Finite capacity scheduling overcomes the disadvantages of systems based exclusively on rules.

    C) Finite capacity scheduling is very powerful, but does not allow for rapid changes.

    D) Finite capacity scheduling often gets its data from the output of an MRP system.

    E) None; all of the above are true.

    1 which of the following statements is true regarding the 279179

    1. Which of the following statements is true regarding the leverage of supply chain savings?

    A) Supply chain leverage is about the same for all industries.

    B) Supply chain savings exert more leverage as the firm’s purchases are a smaller percent of sales.

    C) Supply chain savings exert more leverage as the firm has a lower net profit margin.

    D) Supply chain leverage depends only upon the percent of sales spent in the supply chain.

    E) None of the above is true.

    2. What term has been created to describe the return of business activity to the purchasing firm?

    A) Renewal

    B) Backsourcing

    C) Reversal

    D) Reversesourcing

    E) In sourcing

    3. A grocery store is trying to find a new vendor for carrots. Its three criteria are 1. Freshness, 2. Lot Size, and 3. Cost with factor weights of .6, .1, and .3 respectively. What would a vendor with ratings of 6, 8, and 10 in the three respective categories score as a weighted total?

    A) 24

    B) 1

    C) 7.4

    D) 9.8

    E) None of the above

    4. Which of the following is not a typical inspection point?

    A) Upon receipt of goods from your supplier

    B) When production or service is complete

    C) Before the product is shipped to the customer

    D) At the supplier’s plant while the supplier is producing

    E) After a costly process

    5. A production manager at a pottery factory has noticed that about 70 percent of defects result from impurities in raw materials, 15 percent result from human error, 10 percent from machine malfunctions, and 5 percent from a variety of other causes. This manager is most likely using

    A) a Pareto chart

    B) a scatter diagram

    C) a Taguchi loss function

    D) a cause and effect diagram

    E) a flowchart

    6. A Three Sigma program has how many defects per million?

    A) 34

    B) 3

    C) 3 times the standard deviation

    D) 2700

    E) 1500

    1 which of the following statements regarding aggregate plannin 279181

    1. Which of the following statements regarding aggregate planning is true?

    A) In a pure level strategy, production rates or work force levels are adjusted to match demand requirements over the planning horizon.

    B) A pure level strategy allows lower inventories when compared to pure chase and hybrid strategies.

    C) In a mixed strategy, there are changes in both inventory and in work force and production rate over the planning horizon.

    D) Because service firms have no inventory, the pure chase strategy does not apply.

    E) All of the above are true.

    2. The planning tasks associated with staffing, production, inventory, and sub contracting levels typically fall under

    A) Short range plans

    B) intermediate range plans

    C) Long range plans

    D) Demand options

    E) Strategic planning

    3. A firm’s demand in the next four quarters (its aggregate planning horizon) is forecast to be 80, 50, 40, and 90 units. Last quarter, the firm produced 60 units. If it uses level scheduling, the firm will

    A) Hire workers to permit production of 65 units per quarter for the next four quarters

    B) Hire 20 workers

    C) Have an increase in inventory of 20 units in the next quarter

    D) Have a decrease in inventory of 5 units in the next quarter

    E) Change its workforce each quarter so that inventory does not change

    4. A firm practices the pure chase strategy. Production last quarter was 1000. Demand over the next four quarters is estimated to be 900, 700, 1000, and 1000. Hiring cost is $20 per unit, and firing cost is $5 per unit. Over the next year, the sum of hiring and layoff costs will be

    A) $500

    B) $2,500

    C) $7,500

    D) $7,000

    E) $12,500

    5. A manager is applying the transportation model of linear programming to solve an aggregate planning problem. Demand in period 1 is 100 units and in period 2 demands are 150 units. The manager has 125 hours of regular employment available for $10/hour each period. In addition, 50 hours of overtime are available for $15/hour each period. If holding costs are $2 per unit each period, how many hours of regular employment should be used in period 1 (assume demand must be met in both periods 1 and 2 for the lowest possible cost and that production is 1 unit per hour)?

    A) 100

    B) 125

    C) 150

    D) 50

    E) None of the above

    6. Yield management is most likely to be used in which one of the following situations?

    A) A fast food restaurant with wide demand fluctuations during the day

    B) A dental clinic that wants to fill its appointment book

    C) A firm with a good counter seasonal product mix

    D) A shipping company that can change its fleet size easily

    E) An airline attempting to fill “perishable” seats at maximum revenue

    weller company s variable manufacturing overhead should be 1 05 per standard machine 434099

    Predetermined Overhead Rate; Overhead Variances

    Weller Company’s variable manufacturing overhead should be $1.05 per standard machine hour and its fixed manufacturing overhead should be $24,800 per month. The following information is available for a recent month:

    1. The denominator activity of 8,000 machine hours was chosen to compute the predetermined overhead rate.
    2. At the 8,000 standard machine hours level of activity, the company should produce 3,200 units of product.
    3. The company’s actual operating result were as follows:

    Number of units produced

    3,500

    Actual machine hours

    8,500

    Actual variable manufacturing overhead cost

    $9,860

    Actual fixed manufacturing overhead cost

    $25,100

    Required:

    1. Compute the predetermined overhead rate and break it down into variable and fixed cost elements.
    2. What were the standard hours allowed for the year’s actual output?

    Compute the variable overhead rate and efficiency variances and the fixed overhead budget and volume variances.

    acc 557 10 1a 434142

    On January 1, 2014, the ledger of Shumway Company contains the following liability accounts.

    Accounts Payable $52,000
    Sales Taxes Payable 5,800
    Unearned Service Revenue 14,000

    During January, the following selected transactions occurred.

    Jan. 5 Sold merchandise for cash totaling $22,470, which includes 7% sales taxes.
    12 Provided services for customers who had made advance payments of $10,000. (Credit Service Revenue.)
    14 Paid state revenue department for sales taxes collected in December 2013 ($5,800).
    20 Sold 600 units of a new product on credit at $50 per unit, plus 7% sales tax.
    21 Borrowed $14,000 from DeKalb Bank on a 3 month, 8%, $14,000 note.
    25 Sold merchandise for cash totaling $12,947, which includes 7% sales taxes

    accounting manufacting overhead 434191

    Jessie Manufacturing Company employs a job order cost accounting
    system and keeps perpetual inventory records. The following
    transactions occurred in the first month of operations:
    1. Direct materials requisitioned during the month:
    Job 101 $25,000
    Job 102 15,000
    Job 103 25,000
    $65,000

    2. Direct labor incurred and charged to jobs during the month was:
    Job 101 $32,000
    Job 102 28,000
    Job 103 24,000
    $84,000

    3. Manufacturing overhead was applied to jobs worked on using a
    predetermined overhead rate based on 75% of direct labor costs.

    4. Actual manufacturing overhead costs incurred during the month
    amounted to $66,000.

    5. Job 101 consisting of 1,000 units and Job 103 consisting of 200
    units were completed during the month.

    Instructions
    (a) Prepare journal entries to record the above transactions.
    (b) Answer the following questions:
    1. How much manufacturing overhead was applied to Job 103 during the month?
    2. Compute the unit cost of Jobs 101 and 103.
    3. What is the balance in Work In Process Inventory at the end of the month?
    4. Determine if manufacturing overhead was under or overapplied
    during the month. How much?

    accounting 434196

    Jim Bingham is considering starting a small catering business. He would need to purchase a delivery van and various equipment costing $125,000 to equip the business and another $60,000 for inventories and other working capital needs. Rent for the building used by the business will be $35,000 per year. Jim’s marketing studies indicate that the annual cash inflow from the business will amount to $120,000. In addition to the building rent, annual cash outflow for operating costs will amount to $40,000. Jim wants to operate the catering business for only six years. He estimates that the equipment could be sold at that time for 4% of its original cost. Jim uses a 16% discount rate.

    Would you advise Jim to make this investment? Why or why not? Please show your work!

    compute taxable income 434227

    John E.Owens and Sally A.Owens, each age 42 married on September 7,2011.John and Sally will file a joint return for 2011.
    John was divorced from Joyce in March 2010. Under the divorce agreement, John is to pay Joyce $ 1,000 per month for the next 10 years or until Joyce’s death, whichever occurs first. John pays Joyce $ 12,000 in 2011. in addition, in January 2011, John pays Joyce $ 50,000, which is designated as being for her share of the marital property. Also, John is responsible for all prior year’s income taxes.
    John’s total wage compensation for 2011 is $ 190,000. His employer withheld $ 12,000 for the Federal income taxes and $ 3,400 for state income taxes. The following amounts were withheld for FICA taxes:$4,485 ($106,800 X 4.2%)for Social Security and $2,755 ($190,000 X 1.45%)for Medicare.
    Sally recently graduated from law school and is employed by Legal Aid Society, Inc.,as a public defender.She received a salary of $40,000 in 2011.Her employer withheld $5,700 for the Federal income taxes and $2,300 for the state income taxes. The following amount were withheld for FICA taxes:$1,680.00 ($40,000 X 4.2%)for Social Security and $580($40,000 X 1.45%) for Medicare.
    Sally has $1,500 in dividends on Yellow Corporation stock she inherited. Sally receives an $850 refund on 2010 state income taxes. She used the standard deduction on her 2010 Federal income tax return. Alfred receives $1,300 refund on his 2010 state income taxes.He itemized deduction on his 2010 Federal income tax return. John and Sally pay $4,800 interest and $1,450 property taxes on their personal residence in 2011. Their charitable contribution total $2,600 (all to their church).
    COMPUTE JOHN AND SALLY’S TAXABLE INCOME FOR 2011

    addressing treatment of capital assets 434315

    In July of 2009, Mr. Mann, a sole proprietor who performs excavating services, purchased and put to use for business a piece of heavy equipment for $36,500. This piece of equipment was depreciated using the MACRS 150% DB method of depreciation over the useful period of 7 years. No salvage value was approximated and applied to the appreciable basis of this equipment. Freight and installation charges for this equipment totaled $1500. Mr. Mann sold this piece of equipment for $31,500 in June of 2011.

    For this task, define capital asset and discuss the purpose of depreciation of assets, and why depreciation directly affects valuation of the asset at disposal. Based on the information provided, determine the amount of capital gain or loss Mr. Mann incurred through this transaction. Be certain to detail your calculations for depreciating the equipment, and how this impacts the capital gain or loss associated with the disposal of this capital asset. Explain how any gain on this asset will impact the tax obligation for Mr. Mann as the proprietor.

    partnership liquidation safe payments 433833

    On January 1, 2011, the partners of Won, Cadel, and Dax (who shared profits and losses in the ratio of 5:3:2, respectively) decided to liquidate their partnership. The trial balance at this date was as follows:

    DEBITS

    CASH 23,400

    A/R 85,800

    INVENTIRY 67,600

    MACHINERY & EQUIPMENT 245,700

    WON LOAN 39,000

    TOTAL 461,500

    CREDITS

    A/P 68,900

    CADEL, LOAN 26,000

    WON, CAPITAL 153,400

    CADEL, CAPITAL 117,000

    DAX, CAPITAL 96,200

    TOTAL 461,500

    The partners planned a program of piecemeal conversion of the business assets to minimize liquidation losses. All available cash, less an amount retained to provide for future expenses, was to be distributed to the partners at the end of each month. A summary of liquidation transactions follows:

    JANUARY

    A. 66,300 WAS COLLECTED ON THE A/R; THE BALANCE WAS DEEMED TO BE UNCOLLECTABLE

    B. 49,400 WAS RECEIVED FOR THE ENTIRE INVENTORY

    C. 2,600 IN LIQUIDATION EXPENSES WERE PAID

    D. 65,000 WAS PAID TO OUTSIDE CREDITORS, AFTER RECEIVING A 3,900 CREDIT MEMO FROM A CREDITOR ON JAN. 11

    E. CASH OF 13,000 WAS RETAINED AT THE END OF THE MONTH TO COVER UNRECORDED LIABILITIES AND ANTICIPATED EXPENSES. THE BALANCE OF CASH WAS DISTRIBUTED TO THE PARTNERS

    FEBRUARY

    A. 3,900 IN LIQUIDATION EXPENSES WERE PAID

    B. 7,80 IN CASH WAS RETAINED AT THE END OF THE MONTH TO COVER UNRECORDED LIABILITIES AND ANTICIPATED EXPENSES.

    MARCH

    A. 189,800 WAS RECEIVED ON THE SALE OF ALL MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT

    B. 6,500 IN FINAL LIQUIDATION EXPENSES WERE PAID

    C. NO CASH WAS RETAINED AS ALL CASH WAS DISTRIBUTED TO PARTNERS

    1. PREPARE A SCHEDULE TO CACULATE THE SAFE PAYMENTS TO BE MADE TO THE PARTNERS AT THE END OF JANUARY.

    2. PREPARE A SCHEDULE TO CALCULATE THE SAFE INSTALLMENT PAYMENTS TO BE MADE TO THE PARTNERS AT THE END OF FEBRUARY.

    derivatives exercise 1 1a identifying financial versus managerial accounting items 434020

    Exercise 1 1A Identifying financial versus managerial accounting items

    Required

    Indicate whether each of the following items is representative of managerial or of financial accounting.

    a. Information includes economic and nonfinancial data as well as financial data.

    b. Information is global and pertains to the company as a whole.

    c. Information is provided to insiders including executives, managers, and operators.

    d. Information is factual and is characterized by objectivity, reliability, consistency, and accuracy.

    e. Information is reported continuously and has a current or future orientation.

    f. Information is provided to outsiders including investors, creditors, government agencies, analysts, and reporters.

    g. Information is regulated by the SEC, FASB, and other sources of GAAP.

    h. Information is based on estimates that are bounded by relevance and timeliness.

    i. Information is historically based and usually reported annually.

    j. Information is local and pertains to subunits of the organization.

    derivatives exercise 1 2a identifying product versus general selling and administrat 434021

    Exercise 1 2A Identifying product versus general, selling, and administrative costs

    Required

    Indicate whether each of the following costs should be classified as a product cost or as a general, selling, and administrative cost.

    a. Research and development costs incurred to create new drugs for a pharmaceutical company.

    b. The cost of secretarial supplies used in a doctor’s office.

    c. Depreciation on the office furniture of the company president.

    d. Direct materials used in a manufacturing company.

    e. Indirect materials used in a manufacturing company.

    f. Salaries of employees working in the accounting department.

    g. Commissions paid to sales staff.

    h. Interest on the mortgage for the company’s corporate headquarters.

    i. Indirect labor used to manufacture inventory.

    j. Attorney’s fees paid to protect the company from frivolous lawsuits.

    derivatives exercise 1 7a identifying product versus general selling and administrat 434023

    Exercise 1 7A Identifying product versus general, selling, and administrative costs

    A review of the accounting records of Borland Manufacturing indicated that the company incurred the following payroll costs during the month of September.

    1. Salary of the company president—$128,000.
    2. Salary of the vice president of manufacturing—$64,000.
    3. Salary of the chief financial officer—$75,200.
    4. Salary of the vice president of marketing—$62,400.
    5. Salaries of middle managers (department heads, production supervisors) in manufacturing plant—$784,000.
    6. Wages of production workers—$3,752,000.
    7. Salaries of administrative secretaries—$448,000.
    8. Salaries of engineers and other personnel responsible for maintaining production equipment—$712,000.
    9. Commissions paid to sales staff—$1,008,000.

    Required

    1. What amount of payroll cost would be classified as general, selling, and administrative expense?
    2. Assuming that Borland made 4,000 units of product and sold 3,600 of them during the month of September, determine the amount of payroll cost that would be included in cost of goods sold.

    derivatives exercise 1 9a allocating product costs between ending inventory and cost 434024

    Exercise 1 9A Allocating product costs between ending inventory and cost of goods sold

    Lyon Manufacturing Company began operations on January 1. During the year, it started and completed 4,000 units of product. The company incurred the following costs.

    1. Raw materials purchased and used—$4,000.
    2. Wages of production workers—$6,000.
    3. Salaries of administrative and sales personnel—$2,400.
    4. Depreciation on manufacturing equipment—$7,200.
    5. Depreciation on administrative equipment—$2,800.

    Lyon sold 3,000 units of product.

    Required

    1. Determine the total product cost for the year.
    2. Determine the total cost of the ending inventory.
    3. Determine the total of cost of goods sold.

    derivatives exercise 1 14a using jit to minimize waste and lost opportunity 434027

    Exercise 1 14A Using JIT to minimize waste and lost opportunity

    Kim Weston, a teacher at Reid Middle School, is in charge of ordering the T shirts to be sold for the school’s annual fund raising project. The T shirts are printed with a special Reid School logo. In some years, the supply of T shirts has been insufficient to satisfy the number of sales orders. In other years, T shirts have been left over. Excess T shirts are normally donated to some charitable organization. T shirts cost the school $4 each and are normally sold for $6 each. Ms. Weston has decided to order 500 shirts.

    Required

    1. If the school receives actual sales orders for 450 shirts, what amount of profit will the school earn? What is the cost of waste due to excess inventory?
    2. If the school receives actual sales orders for 550 shirts, what amount of profit will the school earn? What amount of opportunity cost will the school incur?
    3. Explain how a JIT inventory system could maximize profitability by eliminating waste and opportunity cost.

    derivatives exercise 1 15a using jit to minimize holding costs 434028

    Exercise 1 15A Using JIT to minimize holding costs

    Cedric Pet Supplies purchases its inventory from a variety of suppliers, some of which require a six week lead time before delivering the goods. To ensure that she has a sufficient supply of goods on hand, Ms. Keiser, the owner, must maintain a large supply of inventory. The cost of this inventory averages $40,000. She usually finances the purchase of inventory and pays a 10 percent annual finance charge. Ms. Keiser’s accountant has suggested that she establish a relationship with a single large distributor who can satisfy all of her orders within a two week time period. Given this quick turnaround time, she will be able to reduce her average inventory balance to $10,000. Ms. Keiser also believes that she could save $6,000 per year by reducing phone bills, insurance, and warehouse rental space costs associated with ordering and maintaining the larger level of inventory.

    Required

    1. Is the new inventory system available to Ms. Keiser a pure or approximate just in time system?
    2. Based on the information provided, how much of Ms. Keiser’s inventory holding cost could be eliminated by taking the accountant’s advice?

    derivatives exercise 1 16a applications of the sarbanes oxley act 434029

    Exercise 1 16A Applications of the Sarbanes Oxley Act

    The CFO of the Bancor Microscope Corporation intentionally misclassified a downstream transportation expense in the amount of $50,000,000 as a product cost in an accounting period when the company made 10,000 microscopes and sold 8,000 microscopes. Bancor rewards its officers with bonuses that are based on net earnings.

    Required

    1. Indicate whether the elements on the financial statements (i.e., assets, liabilities, equity, revenue, expense, net income, and cash flow) would be overstated or understated as a result of the misclassification of the upstream research and development expense. Determine the amount of the overstatement or understatement for each element.
    2. Based on the provisions of the Sarbanes Oxley Act, what is the maximum penalty that the CFO could face for deliberately missrepresenting the financial statements?

    derivatives problem 1 22a service versus manufacturing companies 434033

    Problem 1 22A Service versus manufacturing companies

    Chekwa Company began operations on January 1, 2008, by issuing common stock for $36,000 cash. During 2008, Chekwa received $48,000 cash from revenue and incurred costs that required $72,000 of cash payments.

    Required

    Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for Chekwa Company for 2008, under each of the following independent scenarios.

    a. Chekwa is a promoter of rock concerts. The $72,000 was paid to provide a rock concert that produced the revenue.

    b. Chekwa is in the car rental business. The $72,000 was paid to purchase automobiles. The automobiles were purchased on January 1, 2008, have four year useful lives, with no expected salvage value. Chekwa uses straight line depreciation. The revenue was generated by leasing the automobiles.

    c. Chekwa is a manufacturing company. The $72,000 was paid to purchase the following items:

    1. Paid $9,600 cash to purchase materials that were used to make products during the year.

    2. Paid $24,000 cash for wages of factory workers who made products during the year.

    3. Paid $2,400 cash for salaries of sales and administrative employees.

    4. Paid $36,000 cash to purchase manufacturing equipment. The equipment was used solely to make products. It had a three year life and a $7,200 salvage value. The company uses straight line depreciation.

    5. During 2007, Chekwa started and completed 2,000 units of product. The revenue was earned when Chekwa sold 1,500 units of product to its customers.

    d. Refer to Requirement c. Could Chekwa determine the actual cost of making the 500th unit of product? How likely is it that the actual cost of the 500th unit of product was exactly the same as the cost of producing the 501st unit of product? Explain why management may be more interested in average cost than in actual cost.

    derivatives problem 1 23a importance of cost classification 434034

    Problem 1 23A Importance of cost classification

    Bailey Manufacturing Company (BMC) was started when it acquired $40,000 by issuing common stock. During the first year of operations, the company incurred specifically identifiable product costs (materials, labor, and overhead) amounting to $24,000. BMC also incurred $16,000 of engineering design and planning costs. There was a debate regarding how the design and planning costs should be classified. Advocates of Option 1 believe that the costs should be classified as general, selling, and administrative costs. Advocates of Option 2 believe it is more appropriate to classify the design and planning costs as product costs. During the year, BMC made 4,000 units of product and sold 3,000 units at a price of $14 each. All transactions were cash transactions.

    Required

    1. Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows under each of the two options.
    2. Identify the option that results in financial statements that are more likely to leave a favorable impression on investors and creditors.
    3. Assume that BMC provides an incentive bonus to the company president equal to 10 percent of net income. Compute the amount of the bonus under each of the two options. Identify the option that provides the president with the higher bonus.
    4. Assume a 35 percent income tax rate. Determine the amount of income tax expense under each of the two options. Identify the option that minimizes the amount of the company’s income tax expense.
    5. Comment on the conflict of interest between the company president as determined in Requirement c and the owners of the company as indicated in Requirement d. Describe an incentive compensation plan that would avoid a conflict of interest between the president and the owners.

    a project has estimated annual cash flows of 95 000 for four years and is estimated 434048

    A project has estimated annual cash flows of $95,000 for four years and is estimated to cost $260,000. Assume a minimum acceptable rate of return of 10%. Using the following tables:

    Below is a table for the present value of $1 at compound interest.

    wrfm12t_ch25_ex8a.gif

    Below is a table for the present value of an annuity of $1 at compound interest.

    wrfm12t_ch25_ex8b.gif

    a. Determine the net present value of the project.
    $

    b. Determine the present value index. Round your answer to two decimal places.

    2.)

    Dickerson Co. is evaluating a project requiring a capital expenditure of $810,000. The project has an estimated life of four years and no salvage value. The estimated net income and net cash flow from the project are as follows:

    wrfm12t_ch25_ex16.gif

    The companys minimum desired rate of return is 12%. The present value of $1 at compound interest of 12% for 1, 2, 3, and 4 years is .893, .797, .712, and .636, respectively.

    Required:

    Determine the average rate of return on investment, including the effect of depreciation on the investment. Round your answer to one decimal place.
    %

    3.)Jimmy Co. is considering a 12 year project that is estimated to cost $1,050,000 and has no residual value. Jimmy Co. seeks to earn an average rate of return of 18% on all capital projects. Determine the necessary average annual income (using straight line depreciation) that must be achieved on this project for this project to be acceptable to Jimmy Co.
    $

    4.)

    wrfm12t_ch26_Adirondak_Marketing.gif

    onepixel.gif

    Calculate the overhead rate per unit for Product A in painting department:

    4.)

    Tibet Company sells glasses, fine china, and everyday dinnerware. They use activity based costing to determine the cost of the shipping and handling activity. The shipping and handling activity has an activity rate of $7 per pound. A box of glasses weighs 2 lbs, the box of china weighs 4 lbs, and a box of everyday dinnerware weighs 6 lbs. Round answers to nearest whole dollar.

    a. Determine the shipping and handling activity for each product.

    Glasses $
    China $
    Everyday dinnerware $

    b. Determine the total shipping and receiving costs for the china if 3,500 boxes are shipped.
    $

    variable and fixed costs in the wine industry decision making 278971

    Variable and fixed costs in the wine industry, decision making A Votre SantA?: Product Costing and Decision Analysis in the Wine Industry3

    Background

    A Votre SantA? (AVS) is a small, independent winery owned by Kay Aproveche. Kay has a relationship with a grower who grows two types of wine grapes, a Chardonnay and a generic white grape. AVS buys the grapes at the point at which they have ripened on the vine. AVS is responsible for harvesting the grapes and all further processing of the grapes into wine. In 2010, AVS earned an operating margin of almost $100,000 on sales of $848,000, for an 11.6% margin. The process of winemaking is fairly simple, yet requires much attention to process details. After the grapes are harvested, they are brought to the winery for washing and crushing. The crushing process separates the juice from the pulp, skin, and stems. The juice is used to make the wine; the pulp, skin, and stems are recycled back onto the fields whenever possible or otherwise disposed of. The amount of wine generated from the grapes is dependent each year on a number of climatic and growing factors such as temperature, length of growing season, rootstock, and fertilizers used.

    Once the juice is extracted, it moves into the fermenting process. The Chardonnay wine grape is fermented using oak barrels; the oak in the barrels gives flavor to the Chardonnay wine. The barrels are expensive ($500 each), but are sold after four years for $200 apiece to another smaller winery. The juice fermenting in each barrel results in the production of 40 cases of wine. The generic white grape juices are fermented in a holding tank; a full tank would result in the production of 1,500 cases of wine. The fermenting process takes place in a temperature controlled environment; however, each fermenting method results in some wine loss through evaporation. Kay Aproveche estimates that the Chardonnay will lose approximately 10% of its volume through the fermentation process, while the generic white will lose approximately 5% of its volume. Harvest takes place in the late summer and early fall months; typically, the time elapsed from harvest to final sale is about 11 months. ?



    AVS bottles three wines: a Chardonnay Estate, a regular Chardonnay, and a Blanc de Blanc. Data related to the three wines is as follows:

    ?c Chardonnay Estate contains only Chardonnay grapes that are grown for AVS; the expected sales price is $22/bottle. The market demand for Chardonnay Estate wine is estimated to be 24,000 bottles for 2010.

    ?c Regular Chardonnay is blended by combining the Chardonnay wine left over after bottling the

    Chardonnay Estate with the fermented generic wine; the blend mixture is two parts Chardonnay grapes (after fermentation) and one part generic grapes (after fermentation). The different grapes are fermented separately and blended at the end. The expected sales price is $16/bottle.

    ?c Blanc de Blanc wine is made from all remaining generic white grapes; the expected sales price is $11/bottle.

    All three wines are bottled at AVS using one bottling line. In a typical year, AVS bottles enough

    Chardonnay Estate to meet the predicted market demand, then bottles the regular Chardonnay after blending all remaining Chardonnay wine with the necessary amount of generic grapes. The

    Blanc de Blanc is the last wine to be bottled, using all remaining generic white grapes. Kay again expects the wines from this harvest year to sell out.

    Additional Operational and Cost Data

    Chardonnay Grapes

    ?c 2009 harvest: 100,000 pounds

    ?c Purchase price of $85,500

    ?c Expected loss in volume through fermentation and bottling: 10%

    Generic White Grapes

    ?c 2009 harvest: 60,000 pounds

    ?c Purchase price of $38,500

    ?c Expected loss in volume through fermentation and bottling: 5%

    Winemaking

    ?c Chardonnay grapes are fermented in oak barrels; each barrel results in the production of 40 cases of wine.

    ?c Barrels cost $500 apiece, and can be used for four years and sold for $200 each at the end of four years; assume that you have to purchase all new barrels for the 2009 harvest. The barrels are depreciated over 4 years.

    ?c Generic white grapes are fermented in the holding tank; the tank can hold up to the equivalent

    of 1,500 cases of wine.

    Bottling

    ?c Requires 36 pounds of grapes (post fermenting) for one case (12 bottles) of wine.

    ?c In the bottling process, the wine is put into bottles, with both corks and labels added during this process. The materials costs associated with the bottles, corks, and labels are estimated to be $2.50/bottle.

    Direct Labor

    ?c Harvest labor is paid an average of $7.25/hour. It is estimated that 80 pounds of grapes can be harvested each hour.

    ?c Crush labor is paid an average of $8.00/hour. It is estimated that it will take 300 hours to crush the grape harvest.

    Overhead Expenses

    ?c Administrative rent and office expenses: estimated to be $20,000/year.

    ?c Depreciation is charged based on the following equipment schedule:

    ?

    ?c Indirect materials: Part of the winemaking process involves introducing yeasts and other additives into the wine to help the fermentation process and to help balance the flavors in the wine.

    Indirect production materials average $1.55 per case of wine.

    ?c Lab expenses: Lab expenses of $8,000 are incurred for lab supplies and equipment. The lab is used by the production supervisor and the wine master to test the grapes and wine at various stages of production.

    ?c Liquor taxes: AVS is required to pay a liquor excise tax of $3/bottle on every bottle of wine sold.

    ?c Production office: AVS pays a part time person to help administer the production function. This person orders supplies, reviews and approves production invoices, and performs other administrative functions. The production office budget is estimated to be a flat rate of $12,000.

    ?c Sales and related: Kay’s sister, Maria, is paid $30,000/year on a contract basis to sell AVS wines.

    She works through distributors, who are paid $2/bottle for each bottle sold.

    ?c Supervision: Kay’s brother, Luis, supervises the production of wine from the harvest through the bottling processes. His salary and benefits total $55,000 annually.

    ?c Utilities: Utility costs are incurred primarily to maintain a constant temperature in the fermenting process. These are expected to be $5,500.

    ?c Waste treatment: After crushing, the pulp, skins, and stems that are left over must be disposed of. One half of the waste can be recycled back onto the fields as a compost material; the other one half must be disposed of at a landfill dumping cost of $2,000.

    ?c A wine master is employed to help formulate and test the wines. This is done on a contract basis;

    AVS pays the wine master $5,000 for each type of wine that is formulated.

    ?c Kay’s role is to manage the AVS business. Her annual salary and benefits total $75,000.

    Required

    (a) Create a single company wide contribution margin income statement (as in the ?oTotal?? column in Exhibit 3 6) for AVS that includes each expense category. Also calculate the average revenue and net income for one bottle of wine. (Note: Do not break out the variable or fixed costs by type of wine.)

    (b) Another grower has available 20,000 pounds of Chardonnay grapes from the 2009 harvest.

    AVS has the opportunity to buy the juice from these grapes (they have already been harvested and crushed). If AVS could blend these grapes with the generic white grapes (using the 2:1 blend formula) to produce a new Chardonnay wine to be priced at $14/bottle, and require a 15% return on sales for this wine, what is the maximum amount that AVS would pay for a pound of Chardonnay grapes?

    (c) Other than the cost of the grapes seen in part b, what factors would you consider to support your purchase of the grapes, and what factors would cause you to reject buying thegrapes?

    variable and fixed costs profitability of order opportunity co 278972

    Variable and fixed costs, profitability of order, opportunity cost Healthy Hearth specializes in lunches for health conscious people. The company produces a small selection of lunch offerings each day. The menu selections may vary from day to day, but Healthy Hearth charges the same price per menu selection because it adjusts the portion sizes according to the cost of producing the selection. Healthy Hearth currently sells 5,000 meals per month. Variable costs are $3 per meal, and fixed costs total $5,000 per month. A government agency has recently proposed that Healthy Hearth provide 1,000 meals next month for senior citizens at $3.50 per meal. Volunteers will deliver the meals to the senior citizens at no charge.

    (a) Suppose Healthy Hearth has sufficient idle capacity to accommodate the government order for next month. What will be the impact on Healthy Hearth’s operating income if it accepts this order?

    (b) Suppose that Healthy Hearth would have to give up regular sales of 500 meals, at a price of $4.50 each, to accommodate the government order for next month. What will be the impact on Healthy Hearth’s operating income if it accepts the government order?

    wesco incorporated s only product is a combination fertilizer 278976

    Wesco Incorporated’s only product is a combination fertilizer/weedkiller called GrowNWeed. GrowNWeed is sold nationwide to retail nurseries and garden stores. Zwinger Nursery plans to sell a similar fertilizer/weedkiller compound through its regional nursery chain under its own private label. Zwinger does not have manufacturing facilities of its own, so it has asked Wesco (and several other companies) to submit a bid for manufacturing and delivering a 20,000 pound order of the private brand compound to Zwinger. While the chemical composition of the Zwinger compound differs from that of GrowNWeed, the manufacturing processes are very similar. The Zwinger compound would be produced in 1,000 pound lots. Each lot would require 25 direct labor hours and the following chemicals:



    The first three chemicals (AG 5, KL 2, and CW 7) are all used in the production of GrowNWeed. DF 6 was used in another compound that Wesco discontinued several months ago. The supply of DF 6 that Wesco had on hand when the other compound was discontinued was not discarded. Wesco could sell its supply of DF 6 at the prevailing market price less $0.10 per pound selling and handling expenses. Wesco also has on hand a chemical called BH 3, which was manufactured for use in another product that is no longer produced. BH 3, which cannot be used in GrowNWeed, can be substituted for AG 5 on a one for one basis without affecting the quality of the Zwinger compound. The BH 3 in inventory has a salvage value of $600. Inventory and cost data for the chemicals that can be used to produce the Zwinger compound are shown below:



    The current direct labor wage rate is $14 per hour. The predetermined overhead rate is based on direct labor hours (DLH). The predetermined overhead rate for the current year, based on a two shift capacity with no overtime, is as follows:



    Wesco’s production manager reports that the present equipment and facilities are adequate to manufacture the Zwinger compound. Therefore, the order would have no effect on total fixed manufacturing overhead costs. However, Wesco is within 400 hours of its two shift capacity this month. Any additional hours beyond the 400 hours must be done in overtime. If need be, the Zwinger compound could be produced on regular time by shifting a portion of GrowNWeed production to overtime. Wesco’s direct labor wage rate for overtime is $21 per hour. There is no allowance for any overtime premium in the predetermined overhead rate.

    Required:

    1. Wesco has decided to submit a bid for the 20,000 pound order of Zwinger’s new compound. The order must be delivered by the end of the current month. Zwinger has indicated that this is a one time order that will not be repeated. Calculate the lowest price that Wesco could bid for the order without reducing its net operating income.

    2. Refer to the original data. Assume that Zwinger Nursery plans to place regular orders for 20,000 pound lots of the new compound. Wesco expects the demand for GrowNWeed to remain strong. Therefore, the recurring orders from Zwinger would put Wesco over its two shift capacity. However, production could be scheduled so that 90% of each Zwinger order could be completed during regular hours. As another option, some GrowNWeed production could be shifted temporarily to overtime so that the Zwinger orders could be produced on regular time. Current market prices are the best available estimates of future market prices.

    Wesco’s standard markup policy for new products is 40% of the full manufacturing cost, including fixed manufacturing overhead. Calculate the price that Wesco, Inc., would quote Zwinger Nursery for each 20,000 pound lot of the new compound, assuming that it is to be treated as a new product and this pricing policy isfollowed.

    sanchez problems 279000

    Please see attached Problem 3 answers Insurance Expense Account No.

    Document Preview:

    Problem 3 answers Insurance Expense Account No. 5060 Date 201x? Explanation?Post Ref.?Debit?Credit?Balance Debit? Credit??9/1 1x?Balance forward????150 00??????????????????????????????????????????? Postage expense Account No. 5070 Date 201X?Explanation?Post Ref.?Debit?Credit?Balance Debit? Credit??9/1 1x?Balance forward????50 00??????????????????????????????????? SANCHEZ COMPUTER CENTER TRIAL BALANCE SEPTEMBER 30, 201X DR CR CASH?164500???ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE?260000???PREPAID RENT?120000???SUPPLIES?45000???COMPUTER SHOP EQUIPMENT?240000???OFFICE EQUIPMENT?60000???ACCOUNTS PAYABLE??210000??FREEDMAN, CAPITAL??450000??FREEDMAN, WITHDRAWALS?10000???SERVICE REVENUE??668500??ADVERTISING EXPENSE?140000???RENT EXPENSE?40000???UTILITIES EXPENSE?18000???PHONE EXPENSE?22000???INSURANCE EXPENSE?15000???POSTAGE EXPENSE?5000???TOTALS?1139500?1139500?????? My problem is in chapter 4 Directions are to Use trial balance above from chapter 3 and the adjusting information given here to complete the worksheet for the three months ended September 30, 201x. From the worksheets, prepare the financial statements. SANCHEZ COMPUTER CENTER At the end of September, Tony took a complete inventory of his supplies and found the following: 5 dozen 1/4” screws at a cost of $8.00 a dozen 2 dozen ½” screws at a cost of $5.00 a dozen 2 cartons of computer inventory paper at a cost of $14 a carton 3 feet of coaxial cable at a cost of $4.00 per foot After speaking to his accountant, he found that a reasonable depreciation amount for each of his long term assets is as follows: Computer purchased July 5, 201x Depreciation $33 a month Office equipment purchased July 17, 201x Depreciation $10 a month Computer workstations purchased Sept. 17, 201x Depreciation $20 a month Tony uses the straight line method of depreciation and declares no salvage value for any of the assets. If any long term asset is purchased in the…

    Attachments:

    depreciation method 279045

    Classic Irons, Inc. purchased manufacturing equipment with an expected useful life of five years or 5,000 hours of usage. The equipment was purchased on January 1, 2008 , for $460,000. It is expected to have a salvage value of $60,000 at the end of five years. During 2008, the equipment was used for 1,200 hours. Assume that usage for the next four years will be 1,100 hours, 900 hours, 1,300 hours, and 500 hours, respectively.

    a. what is the amount of depreciation expense for each of the five using the straight line method?

    b. What is the amount of depreciation expense for each of the five years using the double declining balance method?

    c. What is the amount of depreciation expense for each of the five years using the units of production method?

    how does information from a job order costing system support management decision mak 279065

    1. What are the primary documents supporting a job order costing system and what purposes are served by each of them?

    2. How does information from a job order costing system support management decision making?

    Document Preview:

    What are the primary documents supporting a job order costing system and what purposes are served by each of them? How does information from a job order costing system support management decision making?

    Attachments:

    choose a public company in the food industry analyze the 279087

    Choose a public company in the food industry. Analyze the financial statements and assess whether the financial performance has improved or declined year over year.

    Analysis techniques include the following:

    • comparative financial statements
    • trend analysis
    • ratio analysis
    • percentage analysis

    Presentation of5 PowerPoint slides that includes the following:

    • At least 3 slidesrelevant to the analysis prepared
    • An analysis of the performance of the firm based on the analysis tools used
    • A summary of the company’s financial performance and assessment of whether it has improved or declined year over year in terms of profitability, asset utilization, and liquidity

    Background on Course Research Requirements:In the business world, it is important to use research to strengthen points made in presentations and projects. Learning to use the search functions in databases for research is a crucial critical thinking skill that complements other research techniques.

    There are two main types of databases. You must stay away from inferior Web sites with anonymous writers; articles found on consultant Web sites, and materials on Web sites that are not reputable. Dictionaries and encyclopedias most often repeat the information from textbooks.Acceptable Internet resources include, among others, government sites (especially for statistics).
    Wikipedia or any open source Web sites are not permitted.

    Accounting in Business

    Although many people think of accounting as a maze of numbers, in reality it is information that

    creates value in businesses. The information tells the business owners and managers about

    the outputs produced and the efficiency of their performance. Accounting tells managers

    whether they have improved the quality and cycle time of their tasks. To effectively measure

    and evaluate improvements, the information must be timely and accurate.

    Middle managers need information to summarize the performance of operators and activities

    under their responsibility. The information will include summary information about the outputs

    being produced as well as the expenses and costs. If the middle managers have responsibility

    for sales and marketing, they will also need information on actual prices and margins realized,

    and the measures of profitability.

    Senior executives will want to see aggregate financial performance of the operations under

    their control. Measures such as profitability and return on investment will be useful.

    Since accounting information must be accurate to be meaningful, therefore ethics play an

    important role in accounting. Top management should clearly communicate its ethical

    standards through explicit beliefs systems that specify the company’s values. Managers

    should model the company’s desired ethical standards. In addition, the company should

    develop boundary systems that specify actions that must not be taken.

    Accounting has a close relationship to the organization’s objectives and strategies. The

    organization’s decision makers choose the operating systems or sequence of activities that the

    organization will use to meet the customers’ requirements. The organization’s decisions

    makers also choose the performance measurement systems to monitor and assess how well

    the organization meets customers’ requirements and the organization’s broader objective that

    lead to choosing the target set of customers.

    Customer validated performance measures reflect customer requirements and help employees

    manage the value chain’s processes and activities by concentrating their attention on

    improving what matters to the customer. For example, if all employees at a fast food

    restaurant know that customers require fast service, consistent quality of food and beverage

    products at low prices, and a clean environment, the employees can perform their activities

    according to customer requirements.

    Preparing Financial Statements

    Near the end of the accounting process is preparing the financial statements. The

    only steps after that are preparing the year end closing entries and presenting the

    after closing trial balance.

    The Financial Statements

    Publicly owned companies whose shares are listed on a stock exchange are

    required to release quarterly and annual information to the stockholders and

    public, known as financial reports, including the financial statements and

    explanatory notes. Before the annual report is issued, the financial statements

    must be audited by an external certified public accountant (CPA). Most public

    company financial reports for corporations are audited by one of the four major

    accounting firms.

    Annual reports, known as 10 Ks, must be filed with the Securities and Exchange

    Commission (SEC). Public firms must file abbreviated financial statements

    quarterly, known as 10 Qs, detailing the financial results for the previous quarter.

    These do not provide as many explanatory notes and are unaudited.

    Three of the financial statements—the income statement, balance sheet, and

    statement of retained earnings—can be prepared directly from the amounts shown

    in the adjusted trial balance. The income statement is prepared first because it

    determines the amount of net income that will be reported on the statement of

    retained earnings; the statement of retained earnings is prepared next because it

    determines the amount of retained earnings that will be shown on the balance

    sheet.

    The Income Statement

    The income statement summarizes the financial results of the business by showing

    the revenues (sales) earned and corresponding expenses of the company over a

    period of time. Alternative names for the income statement are profit and loss

    statement (P&L), earnings statement, or statement of operations.

    XYZ Company

    Income Statement

    For the year ended 2009

    Revenue $200,000.00

    Cost of goods sold $130,000.00

    Gross profit $70,000.00

    Operating expenses

    Selling expenses $26,000.00

    General expenses $32,500.00

    Total operating expenses $58,500.00

    Operating income before income taxes $11,500.00

    Taxes related to operations $3,450.00

    Net income $8,050.00The Statement of Retained Earnings

    Retained earnings represent the cumulative profits earned by the business that

    have not been paid out as dividends and that are retained by the company.

    Dividends are the sharing of profits with the shareholders (owners) of the business

    and are paid out in cash. A firm that is just beginning operations will show retained

    earnings of zero. Thereafter, the retained earnings reflect the cumulative profits

    (less any losses) that have occurred since the business began operations.

    Increases in retained earnings result from net profits (net income), and decreases

    result from losses and the payment of dividends.

    The statement of retained earnings is based upon the following relationship:

    Retained Earnings at the

    beginning of the period +

    Net

    Income Dividends =

    Retained earnings at

    the end of the period

    XYZ Company

    Statement of Retained Earnings

    For the year ended 2009

    Retained earnings, January 1, 2008 $0.00

    Add: Net income $8,050.00

    Subtotal $8,050.00

    Less: Dividends $0.00

    Retained earnings, Dec. 31, 2009 $8,050.00

    1. This statement was prepared as of the business’ first year of operation, so

    the beginning retained earnings are zero.

    2. The net income for the period is added (or subtracted if a loss had

    occurred) and subtotaled.

    3. Any dividends paid out are deducted. Dividends for this company are zero,

    as they are not usually paid out until after a company has been in existence

    for a period of time and no longer needs to retain all profits for growth of

    the business. It is important to note that dividends are not an expense, so

    they do not appear on the income statement. The dividends represent the

    sharing of firm profits and are paid out of retained earnings.

    4. The ending retained earnings will appear as retained earnings on the

    balance sheet.

    The Balance Sheet

    The balance sheet shows the assets, liabilities and equity of the company at the

    end of the accounting period. Note that the income statement and statement of

    retained earnings show the results of operations over a period of time (a quarter

    or a year), whereas the balance sheet represents a snapshot of the firm’s financial

    position at one point in time.

    Balance sheets can be presented with assets on the left and liabilities and equity

    on the right hand side, a reminder that assets must equal liabilities plus equity

    (the accounting equation). It can also be presented in report form with assets

    appearing first, followed by liabilities and equity (shown below).XYZ Company

    Balance Sheet

    as of Dec 31, 2009

    Cash $20,000

    Accounts Receivable $12,000

    Inventory $103,050

    Other Assets $5,000

    Total Assets $140,050

    Accounts Payable $10,000

    Accrued Liabilities $41,000

    Long term debt $51,000

    Total Liabilities $102,000

    Common Stock $30,000

    Retained Earnings $8,050

    Total Liabilities and Equity $140,050

    Relationships Among the Financial Statements

    While each financial statement presents different information, the statements are

    all related to one another, known as articulation. The balance sheet reflects the

    While each financial statement presents different information, the statements are

    all related to one another, known as articulation. The balance sheet reflects the

    retained earnings as shown on the statement of retained earnings. The statement

    of retained earnings summarizes the factors that have caused the retained

    earnings to change from one balance sheet to the next. The income statement

    explains in detail the change in retained earnings as reflected in the net income or

    loss of the business.

    Business Financial Terminology

    Financial statements are the output of the accounting process, composed of financial

    data summarized from business transactions reported in monetary terms. A business’s

    financial statements provide a format to communicate its economic status to various

    segments of the community. The purpose of this unit is to familiarize you with the

    content and purpose of bank records as well as the analysis and interpretation of results

    including simple interest, simple discount, compound interest, future value, and present

    value.

    Banks provide many services to individuals and businesses, the most notable being the

    checking account. This service enables people to conduct business transactions, such as

    purchasing goods and services or paying debts without having to use cash. Practically

    all business obligations today are paid by check. This is changing, however, with the

    advent of online banking. The bank statement is a chronological listing of all the

    checks, deposits, and other charges recorded by the bank during the month. It is a rare

    occurrence when the balance shown on the bank statement is exactly the same as the

    checkbook balance. This does not mean that a mistake has been made in either record;

    usually the bank statement contains several bank charges indicated by code letters that

    are explained at the bottom of the statement.

    Interest is a specified amount of money that is paid for the privilege of using money

    that belongs to another person. It is, literally, the price paid for credit. If you live in an

    apartment which you do not own, you pay rent for the privilege of living there. This

    rent enables your landlord to pay his mortgage, taxes, and other expenses, and allows

    him to make a profit on his investment. Interest, too, can be considered rent, for if the

    lender was not loaning his money directly for interest, he could be investing it in an

    apartment house or some other venture for profit. Just as rent is paid in regular monthly

    or yearly installments, so is interest paid on a regular basis. Lending institutions such

    as finance companies and banks are actually in business to rent money. The money

    invested, loaned, or borrowed, upon which interest is charged, is the principal and is

    expressed in dollars and cents. Interest which is paid on the principal only is called

    simple interest.

    Discount is a word that makes buyers stop and listen because a simple discount means

    greater savings for buyers. A simple discount is a reduction from the list price offered

    to customers. This allows customers to save on products and services and enables

    businesses to increase their profits.

    Sometimes money is loaned or borrowed for periods longer than 1 year. There may be

    the dual understanding that the interest is to be paid at regular intervals (annually,

    semiannually, quarterly, or monthly), and if the interest is not paid at such intervals, it

    shall be added to the principal and itself be subject thereafter to the same rate of

    interest as the original principal. Thus, adding this interest to the original principal at

    the end of each period yields a larger principal on which the interest is computed for the following period. This is called compound interest, and means that this unpaid

    interest is actually converted to additional principal. On the other hand, future value is

    the accumulated amount at the end of a loan or investment based on compound interest

    (also known as compound amount and maturity value). Present value is the value of an

    investment at a specified time during the time frame of the investment.

    Generally Accepted Accounting Principles

    Financial statements are prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting

    principles (GAAP) which provide a framework for providing timely, relevant, and

    reliable information to financial statement users. The Financial Accounting Standards

    Board (FASB) is responsible for setting accounting standards. In addition, there are

    various other organizations involved with the development, support, and enforcement

    of GAAP.

    Financial statements should be prepared in accordance with GAAP which are

    established by the FASB. GAAP can be found in various forms such as standards,

    interpretations, bulletins, and staff positions. The most authoritative are the FASB

    standards. An FASB standard is the position taken by the FASB on how a financial

    transaction should be accounted. Often, after a standard has been issued, additional

    guidance is required. This guidance may be provided in the form of an FASB

    Emerging Issues Task Force, FASB Implementation Guide, or AICPA Industry Audit

    and Accounting Guide.

    The American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA) has played a crucial

    support role for the standard setting and has issued bulletins to provide guidance. The

    Securities Exchange Commission (SEC) requires that registered companies adhere to

    GAAP; therefore, the financial statements submitted to the SEC must be in accordance.

    Financial statements that stray from these principles are considered deficient and can

    result in substantial fines.

    Attachments:

    will sales and profits meet the expectations of investors and 279112

    Will sales and profits meet the expectations of investors and Wall Street analysts? Managers at public corporations must answer this vitally important question quarter after quarter, year after year. In an ideal world—one in which the economy never contracts, expenses never go up, and customers never buy competing products—the corporation’s share price would soar, and investors would cheer as every financial report showed ever higher sales revenues, profit margins, and earnings.

    1. What are the ethical and legal implications of using accounting practices such as the book and hold technique to inflate corporate earnings?

    2. Why would Commodore’s auditor insist that Rob document any sales booked under the book and hold technique?

    3. If you were in Rob’s situation, would you agree to use the book and hold technique this month? Justify your decision.

    4. Imagine that Commodore has taken out a multimillion dollar loan that must be repaid next year. How might the lender react if it learned that Commodore was using the book and hold method to make revenues look higher than they really are?

    intermedaite accounting 433251

    Herman Company has three products in its ending inventory. Specific per unit data for each of the products are as follows:

    Product 1 Product 2 Product 3
    Cost $ 34 $ 104 $ 64
    Replacement cost 32 127 54
    Selling price 82 162 112
    Disposal costs 7 68 24
    Normal profit margin 6 58 26

    Required:

    What unit values should Herman use for each of its products when applying the LCM rule to ending inventory?

    Ceiling Floor
    Product RC NRV NRV Af?cAc‚¬” NP Designated Market Value Cost Per Unit Inventory Value
    1
    2
    3

    accounting 433266

    Hey, please help me with the following answers. Also, please keep the language simple, because I do not fully understand accounting terms yet. Thank you. (see below)

    1. What does the calculation of each ratio represent?
    2. How does year one compare with year two, and what trend can be seen when you compare the two years?
    3. Is the trend from year one to year two positive or negative?
    4. What are the possible reasons for the trend?
    5. What recommendations do you have for turning a negative trend to a positive trend.

    Ratio

    Year 1

    Year 2

    Current ratio

    3.12:1

    2.96:1

    Quick ratio

    1.34:1

    1.02:1

    Receivables turnover

    9.7 times

    10.2 times

    Inventory turnover

    2.4 times

    2.3 times

    Profit margin

    11.4%

    12.6%

    Asset turnover

    1.21 times

    1.22 times

    Return on assets

    13.7%

    15.4%

    Return on equity

    28.5%

    29.3%

    Price earnings ratio

    10.4 times

    12.4 times

    Debt ratio

    50.2%

    45.3%

    Times interest earned

    9.6 times

    13.0 times

    target costing accounting 433304

    Hightech manufactures color printers. It is in the process of planning the production and design of Model CX 700, one of its popular selling models. The breakdown of the cost for producing Model CX 700 and the value index computed for this last period are shown below. (For simplicity assume there are only three components.)

    Component Cost Function

    Ink Cartridge $45 Determines color quality

    Color Sensor 35 Matches screen color to printed color

    Paper Sensor 20 Lights up indicator when our of paper

    The customers want sharper colors, a better correspondence between what they see on screen and what they print on paper, and a sensor that can be connected to the PC speaker to issue an audio Af?cAc‚¬A??oout of paperAf?cAc‚¬ warning. The additional spending required to provide these features and the value index for these three components are as follows:

    Additional Cost Value Index

    Ink Cartridge $27 .780

    Color Sensor $18 1.4689

    Paper Sensor $5 .500

    Total Additional Cost $50

    The company feels that if it were to provide all three of these features, the customers would pay an additional $49 for the printer.

    Do you think that Hightech should provide all of these features in the new model? Some of these features? None? Show your calculations.

    net present value 433319

    Holland, Inc., has just completed development of a new cell phone. The new product is expected to produce annual revenues of $1,350,000. Producing the cell phone requires an investment in new equipment, costing $1,440,000. The cell phone has a projected life cycle of five years. After five years, the equipment can be sold for $180,000. Working capital is also expected to increase by $180,000, which Holland will recover by the end of the new product’s life cycle. Annual cash operating expenses are estimated at $810,000. The required rate of return is 8 percent.

    media/fa4/fa49f700 c818 4370 92db 31

    1. Calculate the NPV using only discount factors from Exhibit 14B 1. Round present value calculations and your final answer to the nearest whole dollar.

    2. Calculate the NPV using discount factors from bothExhibit 14B 1 andExhibit 14B 2. Round present value calculations and your final answer to the nearest whole dollar.

    help with accounting please 433339

    House of Organs, Inc., purchases organs from a well known manufacturer and sells them at the retail level. The organs sell, on the average, for $3,100 each. The average cost of an organ from the manufacturer is $1,508. The costs that the company incurs in a typical month are presented below:

    Costs Cost Formula

    Selling:

    Advertising $950 per month

    Delivery of organs $59 per organ sold

    Sales salaries and commissions $4,812 per month, plus 4% of sales

    Utilities $642 per month

    Depreciation of sales facilities $4,916 per month

    Administrative:

    Executive salaries $13,489 per month

    Depreciation of office equipment $901 per month

    Clerical $2,541 per month, plus $41 per organ sold

    Insurance $717 per month

    During November, the company sold and delivered 55 organs.

    Prepare a traditional income statement for November. (Input all amounts as positive values except losses which should be indicated by a minus sign.)

    House of Organs, Inc.

    Traditional Income Statement

    For the Month Ended November 30

    Selling and administrative expenses:

    Selling expenses:

    Total selling expenses

    Administrative expenses:

    Total administrative expenses

    Total selling and administrative expenses

    Prepare a contribution format income statement for November.

    House Of Organs, Inc.

    Contribution Format Income Statement

    For the Month Ended November 30

    Total Per unit

    $ $

    Variable expenses:

    Total variable expenses

    Contribution margin $

    Fixed expenses:

    Total fixed expenses

    accounting 433345

    Hoyt Inc has estimated current year sales (in millions) for the next 4 years
    Q1) 260 Q2) 300 Q3) 310 Q4) 375
    Sales for the 1st quarter next year are projected to by $275
    Accts Rec at the beginning of the year were $100
    The beginning cash balance is $50
    Hoyt Inc turnover is 50 days
    Purchases from suppliers in a quarter are equal to 60% of the nest quarter’s forcasted sales
    Wages, taxes and other expenses are 25% of current sales.
    1) what are total cash collections for Q1?
    2)What are total cash disbursements for Q1?
    3) What are wages, taxes and other expenses for Q3?
    4) What are purchases for Q4?

    help 433355

    Huge, Inc. has many divisions that are evaluated on the basis of ROI. One division, Alpha, makes boxes. A second division, Beta, makes candy and needs 50,000 boxes per year. Alpha incurs the following costs for one box:

    Direct materials

    $0.20

    Direct labor

    0.70

    Variable overhead

    0.10

    Fixed overhead

    0.23

    Total

    $1.23

    Alpha has capacity to make 500,000 boxes per year. Beta currently buys its boxes from an outside supplier for $1.40 each (the same price that Alpha receives).

    Refer to Figure 11 5. Assume that Hugo, Inc., allows division managers to negotiate transfer price. Alpha is producing and selling 400,000 boxes. If Alpha and Beta agree to transfer boxes, what is the floor of the bargaining range and which division sets it?

    a. $1.23; Beta
    b. $1.40; Alpha
    c. $1.40; Beta
    d. $1.00; Alpha
    e. $1.23; Alpha

    Hide FeedbackShow All Feedback Check My Work Feedback Post Submission Feedback Solution

      incremental income question help 433370

      I found the first answer, need help finding the second!

      A company must decide between scrapping or reworking units that do not pass inspection. The company has 12,000 defective units that cost $5.80 per unit to manufacture. The units can be sold as is for $2.50 each, or they can be reworked for $3.50 each and then sold for the full price of $9.20 each. If the units are sold as is, the company will also be able to build 12,000 replacement units at a cost of $5.80 each, and sell them at the full price of $9.20 each.

      (1)

      What is the incremental income from selling the units as scrap? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

      Incremental income $

      (2)

      What is the incremental income from reworking and selling the units? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

      Incremental income $

      (3)

      What must the company decide?

      The units should not be reworked
      The units should be reworked

      acct income tax fundamentals ch 4 comp prob 1 rebecca and walter bunge 433457

      I need this answer ASAP! Give Explanation! Will give lots of points!

      Rebecca and Walter Bunge have been married 5 yrs. They live at 883 Scrub Busch Street, Apt 52B, Las Vegas, NV 89125. Rebecca is a homeowner and Walter is a high school teacher. Rebecca’s Social Security number is 222 43 7690 and Walt’s is 700 01 0002. Walt’s earnings from teaching are:

      Earnings from Las Vegas School Dist. $50,000,

      Federal Income Tax Withheld $5,000,

      State income tax withheld $0.

      In addition, Walt was covered under the Nevada State Teachers’ Pension Plan. he Bunges incurred the following expenses during their move from Maine to Nevada in January of 2012.

      Cost of moving furniture $4,300,

      Transportation (3,235 miles at $23) $744,

      Lodging en route $150,

      Meals en route $90,

      House hunting trip before the move $750

      Walter’s previous job, as a high school teacher in Maine, was only 5 miles from his home. Rebecca was unemployed prior to the move. The Bunges own a ski condo in Utah. The condo was rented for 40 days during 2012 and used by the Bunges for 10 days. Pertinant information about the condo rental is as follows:

      Rental income $6,000,

      Mortgage interest $4,800,

      Homeowners association dues $2,000,

      Utilities $1,000,

      Maintenance $2,800,

      Depreciation (assume fully depreciated) $0.

      The above amounts do not reflect any allocation between rental and personal use of the condo. The Bunges are active managers of the condo.

      Required: Complete the Bunge’s federal income tax return for 2012. Use Form 1040, Schedule E, Form 3903, and any other appropriate schedule(s) you need. Forms can be found on the IRS Website

      accounting ex 17 13 ratio of liabilities to stockholders equity and number of times 433472

      I only need part B, and could you show the work involved, thank you.

      The following data were taken from the financial statements of Weal Construction Inc. for December 31, 2012 and 2011:

      Dec. 31, 2012 Dec. 31, 2011
      Accounts payable $112,000 $130,000
      Current maturities of serial bonds payable 150,000 180,000
      Serial bonds payable, 10%, issued 2005, due 2015 740,000 1,110,000
      Common stock, $1 par value 70,000 80,000
      Paid in capital in excess of par 730,000 740,000
      Retained earnings 2,540,000 2,020,000

      The income before income tax was $222,500 and $206,400 for the years 2012 and 2011, respectively.

      a. Determine the ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity at the end of each year. Round to one decimal place.

      Dec. 31, 2012:
      Dec. 31, 2011:

      b. Determine the number of times the bond interest charges are earned during the year for both years. Round to one decimal place.

      Dec. 31, 2012:
      Dec. 31, 2011:

      prentice hall s federal taxation 2013 comprehensive pope anderson and kramer pearson 433498

      I need help with problem C 6 41 from the textbook

      Marsha owns 100% of Gamma Corporations common stock. Gamma is an accrual basis, calendar year corporation. Marsha formed the corporation six years ago by transferring $250,000 of cash in exchange for the Gamma stock. Thus, she has held the stock for six years and has a $250,000 adjusted basis in the stock. Gamma’s balance sheet at January 1 of the current year is as follows:

      Cash $400,000 basis $400,000 FMV

      Marketable Securities $50,000 basis $125,000 FMV

      Inventory $300,000 basis $350,000 FMV

      Equipment $200,000 basis $275,000 FMV

      Building $500,000 basis $750,000 FMV

      TOTAL $1,450,000 basis $1,900,000 FMV

      Accounts Payable $175,000 basis $175,000 FMV

      Common Stock $250,000 basis $1,725,000 FMV

      Retained Earnings (and E&P) $1,025,000 basis

      Total $1,450,000 basis $1,900,000 FMV

      Gamma has held the marketable securities for two years. In addition, Gamma has claimed &60,000 of MACRS depreciation on the machinery and $90,000 of straight line depreciation on the building. On January 2 of the current year, Gamma liquidates abd distributes all property to Marsha except that Gamma retains cash to pay the accountspayable and any tax laibility resulting from Gamma’s liquidation. Assume that Gamma has no other taxable income or loss. Determine the tax consqequences to Gamma and Marsha.

      process costing 433554

      Idaho Lumber Company grows, harvests, and processes timber for use in construction. The following data pertain to the firm’s sawmill during November:

      Work In Process, Nov 1:

      Direct Material……………..$65,000

      Conversion………………….$180,000

      Costs incurred during Nov:

      Direct Material…………….$425,000

      Conversion…………………$690,000

      The equivalent units of activity for November were as follows: 7,000 equivalent units of direct material and 1,740 equivalent units of conversion activity.

      Calculate the cost per equivalent unit, for both direct material and conversion, during November. Use the weighted average process costing.

      accounting variable expenses 433592

      Ieso Company has two stores: J and K. During November, Ieso Company reported a net operating income of $30,000 and sales of $450,000. The contribution margin in Store J was $100,000, or 40% of sales. The segment margin in Store K was $30,000, or 15% of sales. Traceable fixed expenses are $60,000 in Store J, and $40,000 in Store K.

      Variable expenses in Store K totaled:

      $200,000
      $70,000
      $110,000
      $130,000

      Ieso Company’s total fixed expenses for the year were:

      $100,000
      $140,000
      $40,000
      $170,000

      acct 433597

      (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Czaplinski Corporation is considering a project that would require an investment of $873,000 and would last for 5 years. The incremental annual revenues and expenses generated by the project during those 5 years would be as follows:

      Sales $235,000
      Variable expenses

      31,500

      Contribution margin

      203,500

      Fixed expenses:
      Salaries 30,500
      Rents 22,000
      Depreciation

      87,000

      Total fixed expenses

      139,500

      Net operating income

      $64,000

      The scrap value of the project’s assets at the end of the project would be $44,000. The payback period of the project is closest to:

      5.8 years
      13.6 years
      13.0 years
      6.7 years

      problem 6 3 income statement effects of transactions commitments and hedging 433658

      Income Statement effect of transactions, committments & hedging

      Income statement effect of transactions, commitments,& hedging. Clayton industries sells medical equipment worldwide. On Mar 1 of the current year, the company sold equipment, with a cost of $160,000 to a foreign customer for 200,000 euros payable in 60 days. At the same time, the company purchased a forward contract to sell 200,000 euros in 60 days. In another transaction, the company committed, on Mar 15, to deliver equipment in May to a foreign customer in exchange for 300,000 euros payble in June. This equipment is anticipated to have a completed cost of $210,000. On Mar 15, the company hedged the commitment by acquiring a forward contract to sell 300,000 in 90 days. Changes in the value of the commitment are based on changes in forward rates & all discounting is based on a 6% discount rate.

      Various spot and forward rates for the euro are as follows:

      Spot rate Forward rate fo 60 days from Mar 1 Forward rate for 90 days from Mar 15

      Mar 1 $1.180 $1.181

      Mar 15 1.181 1.180 $ 1.179

      Mar 31 1.179 1.178 1.177

      Apr 30 1.175 1.174

      For individual months of Mar & Apr calculate the income statement effects of:

      1. the foreign currency transaction

      2. the hedge on the foreign currency transaction.

      3. the foreign currency commitment.

      4. the hedge on the foregin currency commitment.

      consolidation worksheet with land sold and inventory remaining 433678

      The individual financial statements

      for Gibson Company and Keller Company for the year ending December 31, 2013, follow. Gibson acquired a 60 percent interest in Keller on January 1, 2012, in exchange for various considerations totaling $570,000. At the acquisition date, the fair value of the

      noncontrolling interest was $380,000 and Keller’s book value was $850,000. Keller had developed internally a customer list that was not recorded on its books but had an acquisition date fair value of $100,000. This intangible asset is being amortized over 20

      years.

      Gibson sold Keller land with a book value of $60,000 on January 2, 2012, for $100,000. Keller still holds this land at the end of the

      current year.

      Keller regularly transfers inventory to Gibson. In 2012, it shipped inventory costing $100,000 to Gibson at a price of $150,000. During 2013, intra entity shipments totaled $200,000, although the original cost to Keller was only $150,000. In each of these years, 20 percent of the merchandise was not resold to outside parties until the period following the transfer. Gibson owes Keller $40,000 at the end of 2013.

      a) What journal entries are needed to prepare the a worksheet to consolidate the separate 2013 financial statements for Gibson and Keller.

      b) How would the consolidation entries be different is Gibson has sold equipment to Keller instead of land for $100,000 with a book value of $ 60,000. Assume the land has a 10 year remaining life at the date of transfer.

      consolidated financial statements with ending inventory 433683

      The individual financial

      statements

      for Gibson Company and Keller Company for the year ending

      December 31, 2013, follow. Gibson acquired a 60 percent interest in

      Keller on January 1, 2012, in exchange for various considerations

      totaling $570,000. At the acquisition date, the fair value of

      the

      noncontrolling interest was $380,000 and

      KellerAfA?A??cAf?cAc€A!A?¬Af?cAc€A3A??cs book value was $850,000. Keller had

      developed internally a customer list that was not recorded on its

      books but had an acquisition date fair value of $100,000. This

      intangible asset is being amortized over 20

      years.

      Gibson sold

      Keller land with a book value of $60,000 on January 2, 2012, for

      $100,000. Keller still holds this land at the end of the

      current year.

      “text align:justify;”>Keller

      regularly transfers

      inventory to Gibson. In 2012, it shipped inventory costing $100,000

      to Gibson at a price of $150,000. During 2013, intra entity

      shipments totaled $200,000, although the original cost to Keller

      was only $150,000. In each of these years, 20 percent of the

      merchandise was not resold to outside parties until the period

      following the transfer. Gibson owes Keller $40,000 at the end of

      2013.

      a) What journal entries are needed to prepare the a worksheet to

      consolidate the separate 2013 financial statements for Gibson and

      Keller.

      b) How would the consolidation entries be different is Gibson

      has sold equipment to Keller instead of land for $100,000 with a

      book value of $ 60,000. Assume the land has a 10 year remaining

      life at the date of transfer.

      Gibson Keller Company Company Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (800,000) …………..$ (500,000) Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . …..500,000 ……………….300,000 Operating expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . …..100,000 ……………60,000 Income of Keller Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ……(84,000) ……………AfA?A??cAf?cAc€A!A?¬Af?cAc‚¬A??o0AfA?A??cAf?cAc€A!A?¬Af?cAc‚¬A??o Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ….. . $ (284,000) ……………$ (140,000) Retained earnings, 1/1/11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $(1,116,000) ……………$ (620,000) Net income (above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ….. . (284,000) ……………(140,000) Dividends paid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ….. . . . 115,000 ……………60,000 Retained earnings, 12/31/11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . … . . $(1,285,000) ……………$ (700,000) Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . $ 177,000 ……………$ 90,000 Accounts receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ….. . . . . . . 356,000 ……………410,000 Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ….. . . . . . . 440,000 ……………320,000 Investment in Keller Company . . . . . . . . . . . . ……. . . . . 726,000 ……………AfA?A??cAf?cAc€A!A?¬Af?cAc‚¬A??o0AfA?A??cAf?cAc€A!A?¬Af?cAc‚¬A??o Land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . … . . . . . . 180,000 ……………390,000 Buildings and equipment (net) . . . . . . . . . . . ……. . . . . . 496,000 ……………300,000 Total assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 2,375,000 ……………$ 1,510,000 Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . $ (480,000) ……………$ (400,000) Common stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (610,000) ……………(320,000) Additional paid in capital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ………. AfA?A??cAf?cAc€A!A?¬Af?cAc‚¬A??o0AfA?A??cAf?cAc€A!A?¬Af?cAc‚¬A??o ……………….(90,000) Retained earnings, 12/31/11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1,285,000) ……………(700,000) Total liabilities and equities . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . $(2,375,000) ……………$(1,510,000)

      calculate income from operations and net income 433698

      My instructor told us that for this problem we dont consider net cash provided by operations or accounts payable…that they dont belong on income statement..and provision of income is just an expense

      P4 20 Calculate income from operations and net income [LO 6, 7]

      Selected information taken from the financial statements of Fordstar Co. for the year ended December 31, 2010, follows:

      Net cash provided by operations $ 15,000
      Cost of goods sold 65,500
      Selling, general, and administrative expenses 22,500
      Accounts payable 18,000
      Extraordinary loss from hurricane, net of tax savings of $36,000 31,500
      Research and development expenses 13,500
      Net loss from discontinued operations, net of tax savings of $8,820 22,000
      Provision for income taxes 8,500
      Net sales 183,500
      Interest expense 20,500

      Required:
      (a)

      Calculate income from operations (operating income) for the year ended December 31, 2010. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

      Operating income $
      (b)

      Calculate net income(loss) for the year ended December 31, 2010. (Input the amount as positive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

      (Click to select)Net lossNet income $

      evaluate alternative capital investment decisions 433744

      The investment committee of Shield Insurance Co. is evaluating two projects, office expansion and upgrade to computer servers. The projects have different useful lives, but each requires an investment of $610,000. The estimated net cash flows from each project are as follows:

      NET CASH FLOWS
      Yr 1 $160,000 for office expansion $210000 servers

      Yr 2 $160,000 for office expansion $210000 servers

      Yr 3 $160,000 for office expansion $210000 servers

      Yr 4 $160,000 for office expansion $210000 servers

      Yr 5 $160,000 for office expansion

      Yr 6 $160,000 for office expansion

      The committee has selected a rate of 12% for purposes of net present value analysis. It also estimates that the residual value at the end of each project’s useful life is $0, but at the end of the fourth year, the office expansion’s residual value would be $200,000.

      Present Value of $1 at Compound Interest

      Year 6% 10% 12% 15% 20%

      1 0.943 0.909 0.893 0.870 0.833

      2 0.890 0.826 0.797 0.756 0.694

      3 0.840 0.751 0.712 0.658 0.579

      4 0.792 0.683 0.636 0.572 0.482

      5 0.747 0.621 0.567 0.497 0.402

      6 0.705 0.564 0.507 0.432 0.335

      7 0.665 0.513 0.452 0.376 0.279

      8 0.627 0.467 0.404 0.327 0.233

      9 0.592 0.424 0.361 0.284 0.194

      10 0.558 0.386 0.322 0.247 0.162

      Present Value of an Annuity of $1 at Compound Interest

      Year 6% 10% 12% 15% 20%

      1 0.943 0.909 0.893 0.870 0.833

      2 1.833 1.736 1.690 1.626 1.528

      3 2.673 2.487 2.402 2.283 2.106

      4 3.465 3.170 3.037 2.855 2.589

      5 4.212 3.791 3.605 3.353 2.991

      6 4.917 4.355 4.111 3.785 3.326

      7 5.582 4.868 4.564 4.160 3.605

      8 6.210 5.335 4.968 4.487 3.837

      9 6.802 5.759 5.328 4.772 4.031

      10 7.360 6.145 5.650 5.019 4.192

      Required:

      1. For each project, compute the net present value. Use the present value of an annuity of $1 table present above. Ignore the unequal lives of the projects. If required, round to the nearest dollar.

      Office Expansion Server Upgrade

      Present value of annual net cash flows: $ $

      Less amount to be invested: $ $

      Net present value: $ $

      2. For each project, compute the net present value, assuming that the office expansion is adjusted to a four year life for purposes of analysis. Use the present value of $1 table present above.

      Office Expansion Server Upgrade

      Present value of net cash flow total: $ $

      Less amount to be invested: $ $

      Net present value: $ $

      accounting help 433764

      Iwasaki inc. Is considering wether to continue to make a component or to buy it from an outside supplier. (The outside supplier has offered to sell iwasaki all needed components at a cost of $20 each). The company uses 13000 of the components each year. The unit cost of making the component, according to the companys cost accounting system, is given as follows:

      Dm 8.80

      Direct labor 5.80

      Variable manufacturing overhaead 1.60

      Fixed manufacturing overhead 3.60

      Unit product cost 19.80

      Of the fixed manufacturing overhead, 30% is avoidable if the component were bought from the outside supplier. In addition, making the component uses 1 minute on the machine that is the companys current constraint. If the component were bought, tis machine time would be freed up for use on one of the companys other products that requires 2 minutes on this machine and has a contribution margin of $5.20 per unit.

      What is the difference in cost, in total, between making or buying the component?

      What is the maximum amount the company should be willing to pay an outside supplier if the supplier commits to supplying all 13000 parts needed per year?

      intermediate acct ii 432809

      Fores Construction Company reported a pretax operating loss of $130 million for financial reporting purposes in 2011. Contributing to the loss were (a) a penalty of $6 million assessed by the Environmental Protection Agency for violation of a federal law and paid in 2011 and (b) an estimated loss of $5 million from accruing a loss contingency. The loss will be tax deductible when paid in 2012.

      The enacted tax rate is 40%. There were no temporary differences at the beginning of the year and none originating in 2011 other than those described above. Taxable income in Fores’s two previous years of operation was as follows:

      2009 $ 65 million

      2010 50 million

      Required:

      (1)

      Prepare the journal entry to recognize the income tax benefit of the operating loss in 2011. Fores elects the carryback option. (Enter your answers in millions of dollar rounded to 1 decimal place. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

      (2)

      What is the net operating loss reported in 2011 income statement? (Enter your answers in millions of dollar rounded to 1 decimal place. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

      (3)

      Prepare the journal entry to record income taxes in 2012 assuming pretax accounting income is $60 million. No additional temporary differences originate in 2012. (Enter your answers in millions of dollar rounded to 1 decimal place. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

      total cost 432847

      Frazier Manufacturing Company collected the following production data for the past month:

      Units Produced

      Total Cost

      1,600

      $33,000

      1,300

      28,500

      1,500

      33,750

      1,100

      24,750

      If the high low method is used, what is the monthly total cost equation?

      Total cost = $0 + $22.50/unit

      Total cost = $4,950 + $18/unit

      Total cost = $8,250 + $15/unit

      Total cost = $6,600 + $16.50/unit

      managerial accounting 432917

      GG Tire Co. manufactures automobile tires. Standard costs and actual costs for direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead incurred for the manufacture of 20,000 tires was as follows: Show All Work!

      Standard Costs

      Actual Costs

      Direct Materials

      200,000 pounds @ $4.20

      220,000 pounds @ $4.00

      Direct Labor

      6,000 hours at $18.00

      6,200 hours at $19.00

      Factory Overhead

      Rates per direct labor hour,

      Based on 100% of normal

      Capacity of 10,000 direct labor

      Hours:

      Variable Cost, $2.80

      $16,000 variable cost

      ,

      Fixed Cost, $4.00

      $40,000 fixed cost

      Each tire requires 0.30 hour of direct labor.

      Required

      1. Compute the direct material price and quantity variances

      2. Compute the direct labor rate and efficiency variances

      3. Compute variable overhead spending and efficiency variances

      4. Compute the fixed overhead spending and production volume variances

      xyz corp 432938

      You are given the following information about XYZ Corporation:
      Account Name Value
      Accounts payable 5800
      Accounts receivable 10600
      Accumulated depreciation 34000
      Cash 17550
      Common stock (10,000 shares) 46000
      Cost of goods sold 6,750
      Depreciation expense 600
      Earnings before taxes ?????
      General & admin expense 950
      Gross buildings & equipment 123000
      Gross profits 27,250
      Interest expense 4,300
      Inventories 7500
      Long term debt 56000
      Net buildings & equipment 89000
      Net income ?????
      Operating income (EBIT) ?????
      Retained earnings 16250
      Sales 33,000
      Short term notes payable 700
      Taxes @40% 8,560
      Required:
      Using the Data above, complete the following on the templates provided:
      Part 1: Complete the Balance Sheet and Income Statement for XYZ Corporation
      Part 2: Calculate the Ratios for XYZ Corporation
      Part 3: Complete the Ratio analysis using Cross Sectional Analysis and Trend Analysis

      fill in the chart 432943

      You are given the following information about XYZ Corporation:

      Account Name

      Value

      Accounts payable

      5800

      Accounts receivable

      10600

      Accumulated depreciation

      34000

      Cash

      17550

      Common stock (10,000 shares)

      46000

      Cost of goods sold

      6,750

      Depreciation expense

      600

      Earnings before taxes

      ?????

      General & admin expense

      950

      Gross buildings & equipment

      123000

      Gross profits

      27,250

      Interest expense

      4,300

      Inventories

      7500

      Long term debt

      56000

      Net buildings & equipment

      89000

      Net income

      ?????

      Operating income (EBIT)

      ?????

      Retained earnings

      16250

      Sales

      33,000

      Short term notes payable

      700

      Taxes @40%

      8,560

      indirect cost of goods sold 432948

      Given the following problem:

      Kuvomi Corporation worked on four jobs during October: Job F346, Job F347, Job F348, and Job F349. At the end of October, the job cost sheets for these jobs contained the following data:
      Job F346 Job F347 Job F348 Job F349
      Beginning balance $ 1,050 $ 670 $ 0 $ 0
      Charged to the jobs during October:
      Direct materials $ 2,780 $ 3,900 $ 1,550 $ 3,660
      Direct labor $ 1,210 $ 970 $ 680 $ 420
      Manufacturing overhead applied $ 1,692 $ 1,740 $ 1,982 $ 480
      Units completed 204 0 117 0
      Units in process at the end of October 0 310 0 263
      Units sold during October 154 0 50 0

      Jobs F346 and F348 were completed during October. The other two jobs had not yet been completed at the end of October. There was no finished goods inventory on October 1.
      In October, overhead was underapplied by $1,260. The company adjusts its cost of goods sold every month for the amount of the underapplied or overapplied overhead.

      I came up with 7349, which the system rejects. What have I done incorrectly? Below is my excel work.

      bb 1050 0

      DM 2780 1550
      DL 1210 680
      MOHA 1692 1982
      Units completed 204 117
      wip 0 0
      sold 154 50
      total job charges 5682 4212
      product cost 27.85294 36
      unadjusted cogs 4289.353 1800 6089.353
      plus 1260 1260

      Thanks!

      7349.353

      easy accounting 432954

      Glade Company produces a single product. The costs of producing and selling a single unit of this product at the company’s current activity level of 7,500 units per month are:
      Direct materials $ 2.50
      Direct labor $ 2.00
      Variable manufacturing overhead $ .50
      Fixed manufacturing overhead $ 4.95
      Variable selling and administrative expenses $ 1.00
      Fixed selling and administrative expenses $ 1.00

      The normal selling price is $15.45 per unit. The company’s capacity is 9,600 units per month. An order has been received from a potential customer overseas for 2,100 units at a price of $10.20 per unit. This order would not affect regular sales.

      Required:
      1.

      If the order is accepted, by how much will monthly profits increase or decrease? (The order would not change the company’s total fixed costs.) (Input the amount as a positive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

      Monthly profits would increase by??? $
      2.

      Assume the company has 500 units of this product left over from last year that are inferior to the current model. The units must be sold through regular channels at reduced prices. What unit cost is relevant for establishing a minimum selling price for these units? (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

      Relevant cost per unit $

      fraudulent financial reporting by coy notes in which long lived assets can be fraud 432962

      Fraudulent financial reporting by COY notes the many ways in which long lived assets can be fraud overstated, including: • Fictitious assets on the books (WorldCom) • Improper and incomplete depreciation (Waste ManIgen* • Failure to record impairment of assets, especially gooAill(Sa Microsystems) • Expired or worthless assets left on a company’s ho, (Millacron) • Assets overvalued upon acquisition, especially in the ;fleeing of a company (WorldCom) What substantive audit procedures might have detected these frauds?

      accounting help 432965

      Glunn Company makes three products in a single facility. These products have the following unit product costs:

      Product A B C Direct materials $ 12.80 $ 9.30 $ 4.70 Direct labor 14.10 14.90 10.00 Variable manufacturing overhead 1.20 0.90 0.50 Fixed manufacturing overhead 18.50 17.20 23.70 Unit product cost $ 46.60 $ 42.30 $ 38.90

      Additional data concerning these products are listed below.

      Product A B C Mixing minutes per unit 3.70 3.40 3.90 Selling price per unit $ 59.20 $ 60.10 $ 55.30 Variable selling cost per unit $ 2.90 $ 2.70 $ 3.70 Monthly demand in units 2,000 4,000 2,000

      The mixing machines are potentially the constraint in the production facility. A total of 24,200 minutes are available per month on these machines. Direct labor is a variable cost in this company.

      Required:

      a. How many minutes of mixing machine time would be required to satisfy demand for all three products?

      Product A B C Total minutes required

      b. How much of each product should be produced to maximize net operating income? (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answers to nearest whole unit.)

      Product A B C Optimal production

      c. Up to how much should the company be willing to pay for one additional minute of mixing machine time if the company has made the best use of the existing mixing machine capacity? (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)

      Company willing to pay $

      accounting budgeting 432977

      The Gomez Company, a merchandising firm, has budgeted its activity for December according to the following information:

      %u2022 Sales at $840,000, all for cash.
      %u2022 Merchandise Inventory on November 30 was $420,000.
      %u2022 The cash balance at December 1 was $54,000.
      %u2022 Selling and administrative expenses are budgeted at $62,000 for December and are paid for in cash.
      %u2022 Budgeted depreciation for December is $41,000.
      %u2022 The planned merchandise inventory on December 31 is $430,000.
      %u2022 The cost of goods sold represents 64% of the selling price.
      %u2022 All purchases are paid for in cash.

      The budgeted cash receipts for December are:

      $840,000
      $537,600
      $881,000
      $302,400

      why 433003

      Granite Company uses a job order costing system. The company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs using a predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor hours. Last year, manufacturing overhead and direct labor hours were estimated at $80,000 and 16,000 hours respectively, for the year. In June, Job #315 was completed. Materials costs on the job totaled $1,500 and labor costs totaled $2,400 at $6 per hour. At the end of the year, it was determined that the company worked 15,000 direct labor hours for the year, and incurred $78,000 in actual manufacturing overhead costs.

      a. Determine the predetermined overhead rate for the year. (4 points)

      b. Determine the amount of overhead charged to jobs during the year. (4 points)

      c. Determine the amount of underapplied or overapplied overhead for the year. (4 points)

      d. Assuming that 100 units were completed, determine the unit cost that would appear on the job cost sheet for Job #315. (4 points)

      form 1040 schedule d schedule a schedule m schedule b schedule se schedule c form 88 433014

      Gregory R. and Lulu B. Clifden live with their family at the Rock Glen House Bed & Breakfast, Which Gregory operates. The bed and breakfast (B&B) is located at 33333 Fume Blanc Way, Temecula, CA 92591. Gregory’s Social Security number is XXX XX XXXX and Lulu’s is XXX XX XXXX. Both are in their mid 40s and enjoy good health and eyesight.
      1.The Clifdens have three sons, Gerald A. (SSN# XXX XX XXXX),Gary T.(SSN#465 76 8375),and Glen E.(SSN#475 23 1426). Gerald is 17 years old, Gary is 12 years old, and Glenn is 10 years old.
      2.The Rock Glen House Bed & Breakfast is operated as a sole proprietorship and had the following income and expenses for the year:
      Room rental income $164,250
      Vending machine income$2,325
      Advertising expense $4,720
      Depreciation $18,180
      Mortgage interest on the B&B$32,940
      Wages of maid $15,450
      Taxes and licenses $6,420
      Supplies $8,930
      Business Insurance $6,300
      Laundry Expenses$4,290
      Accounting fees$1,850
      Office expenses$2,380
      Utilities$6,350
      All of the above amounts relate to the business portion of the Bed & Breakfast; the personal portion is accounted for separately. The Rock Glen House Bed & Breakfast uses the cash method of accounting and has no inventory. The employer tax ID number is XX XXXXXXX.
      3.The Clifdens made estimatedFederal income tax payments of $16,000 and estimated state income taxpayments of $6,000 (all made 2009).
      4.Lulu is a substitute teacher with the local school district. For the current year, lulu’s Form W 2 from the school district showed the following:
      Wages $10,200
      Federal income tax withheld $1,650
      State income tax withheld $380
      FICA (OASDI & Medicare) $780
      5.Gregory is retired from the U.S. Navy. His annual statement from the Navy showed the following:
      Retirement Income $9,400
      Federal income tax withheld $1,200
      State income tax withheld $290
      6.Gregory and Lulu paid (and can substantiate) the following amounts during the year: MasterCard interest $1,480
      Dental expenses$2,600
      California state income tax (for 2008)$450 Charitable Contributions $1,875
      Mortgage interest on home purchase$6,400 (Personal portion)
      Real Estate taxes (personal portion)$820 Life insurance premiums $845
      Investment interest$4,300
      Automobile registration fees$450(Deductible portion)
      Tax return preparation fee$475
      Contributions to George Clinton’s$1,000 Reelection campaign
      None of the investment interest is related to amounts borrowed to purchase the City of Atlanta tax exempt bonds.
      7.During the year, Gregory and Lulu received the following qualifying dividends and interest: Interest:
      Vintage Bank$3,775
      Bob’s Big Bank$360
      Bank of Ireland$220
      City of Atlanta Tax Exempt Bonds $1,490 Dividends:
      Southwest Airlines $110 Heinz Foods $216
      Also, Lulu owns Series EE U.S. savings bonds. During the year, the bond redemption value increased by $1,300. Lula has not elected the accrual method for these bonds. There were no Irish taxes paid on the interest from the bank of Ireland. All the above stocks, bonds, andbank account are community property.
      8.Lulu has a stock portfolio. During the year she sold the following stock, none of which is qualified small business stock:
      Orange Co. Gold Co. Green Co.
      Sales Price $8,200 $12,100 $7,500 Basis $3,800 $14,200 $1,450
      Date acquired 02/11/03 03/27/09 10/23/09 Date sold 06/19/09 09/18/09 10/23/09
      9.Lulu paid her ex husband $6,000 alimony in the current year, as required under the divorce decree. Her ex husband’s name is XXXXXX XXXXX and his Social Security number is XXX XX XXXX.
      10. Gregory does all the significant work in the Bed & Breakfast and therefore he pays self employment taxon 100 percent of theearnings from the B&B.
      11.During the year, Gregory’s uncle Martin died. Martin has a $50,000 life insurance policy that named Gregory as the beneficiary. Gregory received the check for the benefits payable under the policy on November 30 of the current year. Martin also left Gregory a small nonoperating farm with an appraised value of $120,000.
      12.Two years ago, Gary won a contest and received a cash prize. The money is in a savings account in Gary’s name. His interest on the savings account in the current year is $3,400. Instead of having Gary fill out a tax return and pay the Af?cAc‚¬A??okiddie tax,Af?cAc‚¬ Gregory and Lulu elect to report the interest income on their joint tax return.
      Required: Gregory and Lulu have come to you to prepare their 2009 federal income tax return. Do not complete a California state income tax return. Assume any other information (addresses, etc.) that you need. Do not file a federal Form4562, Form 4952, or form 8829 for the Clifdens. The following is a list of the forms and schedules that you will need to cocomplete the tax return:
      Form 1040 Schedule D Schedule A Schedule M Schedule B Schedule SE Schedule C Form 8814

      accounting225 433029

      Hallas Company manufactures a fast bonding glue in its Northwest plant. The company normally produces and sells 46,000 gallons of the glue each month. This glue, which is known as MJ 7, is used in the wood industry to manufacture plywood. The selling price of MJ 7 is $35 per gallon, variable costs are $20 per gallon, fixed manufacturing overhead costs in the plant total $226,000 per month, and the fixed selling costs total $310,000 per month.

      Strikes in the mills that purchase the bulk of the MJ 7 glue have caused Hallas Company%u2019s sales to temporarily drop to only 11,000 gallons per month. Hallas Company%u2019s management estimates that the strikes will last for two months, after which sales of MJ 7 should return to normal. Due to the current low level of sales, Hallas Company%u2019s management is thinking about closing down the Northwest plant during the strike.

      If Hallas Company does close down the Northwest plant, fixed manufacturing overhead costs can be reduced by $60,000 per month and fixed selling costs can be reduced by 9%. Start up costs at the end of the shutdown period would total $16,000. Because Hallas Company uses Lean Production methods, no inventories are on hand.

      1a. Assuming that the strikes continue for two months, what is the impact on income by closing the plant.(Input the amount as a positive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

      2.At what level of sales (in gallons) for the two month period should Hallas Company be indifferent between closing the plant or keeping it open? (Round your answer to the nearest whole number.)

      comprehensive problem bonds interest and journaling 433035

      HAMPTON CORPORATION
      Balance Sheet
      December 31, 2011
      Cash $ 24,600 Accounts payable $ 25,600
      Accounts receivable 45,500 Common stock ($10 par) 80,000
      Allowance for doubtful Retained earnings 127,400
      accounts (1,500)
      $233,000
      Supplies 4,400
      Land 40,000
      Buildings 142,000
      Accumulated depreciationAf?cAc‚¬”
      buildings (22,000)
      $233,000

      During 2012, the following transactions occurred.
      1. On January 1, 2012, Hampton issued 1,200 shares of $40 par, 7% preferred stock for
      $49,200.
      2. On January 1, 2012, Hampton also issued 900 shares of the $10 par value common
      stock for $21,000.
      3. Hampton performed services for $320,000 on account.
      4. On April 1, 2012, Hampton collected fees of $36,000 in advance for services to be performed from April 1, 2012, to March 31, 2013.
      5. Hampton collected $276,000 from customers on account.
      6. Hampton bought $35,100 of supplies on account.
      7. Hampton paid $32,200 on accounts payable.
      8. Hampton reacquired 400 shares of its common stock on June 1, 2012, for $28 per share.
      9. Paid other operating expenses of $188,200.
      10. On December 31, 2012, Hampton declared the annual preferred stock dividend and a

      Adjustment data:
      1. A count of supplies indicates that $5,900 of supplies remain unused at year end.
      2. Recorded revenue earned from item 4 above.
      3. The allowance for doubtful accounts should have a balance of $3,500 at year end.
      4. Depreciation is recorded on the building on a straight line basis based on a 30 year
      life and a salvage value of $10,000.
      5. The income tax rate is 30%. (Hint: Prepare the income statement up to income before
      taxes and multiply by 30% to compute the amount.)

      Instructions
      (a) Prepare journal entries for the transactions listed above and adjusting entries.
      (b) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at December 31, 2012.
      (c) Prepare closing entries

      safe payments for partnership liquidation 433051

      Hardin, Sutton, and Williams has operated a local business as a partnership for several years. All profits and losses have been allocated in a 3:2:1 ratio, respectively. Recently, Williams has undergone personal financial problems, and is insolvent. To satisfy Williams’ creditors, the partnership has decided to liquidate.
      The following balance sheet has been produced:

      cash 10,000

      noncash assets 227,000

      total assets 237,000

      liabilities 80,000

      Hardin, capital 96,000

      Sutton, capital 45,000

      Williams, capital 16,000

      total liabilities and capital 237,000

      During the liquidation process, the following transactions take place:
      Noncash assets are sold for $116,000.
      Liquidation expenses of $12,000 are paid. No further expenses are expected.
      Safe capital distributions are made to the partners.
      Payment is made of all business liabilities.
      Any deficit capital balances are deemed to be uncollectible.

      1. Develop a predistribution plan for this partnership, assuming 12,000 of liquidation expenses are expeced to be paid.

      2. compute safe cash payments after the noncash assets have been sold and the liquidation expenses have been paid.

      weighted avg 433056

      Harmon Company uses the weighted average method in its process costing system. The Curing Department of Harmon Company reported the following information for the month of November.

      Units % Complete with
      Respect to
      Conversion
      Work in process, November 1 10,000 80%
      Units started 28,000
      Completed and transferred out 30,000
      Work in process, November 30 8,000 30%
      Costs for November: Materials Conversion
      Work in process, November 1 $34,500 $48,600
      Added during the month $146,000 $194,400

      All materials are added at the beginning of the process.

      Compute the following items using the weighted average method:

      a. The equivalent units of production for materials. (4 points)

      b. The cost per equivalent unit for conversion. (4 points)

      c. The total cost assigned to units transferred out of the Curing Department during November. (4 points)

      d. The cost assigned to work in process inventory as of November 30. (4 points)

      help 433063

      Hartzog Corporation’s most recent balance sheet and income statement appear below:

      Statement of Financial Position
      December 31, Year 2 and Year 1
      (in thousands of dollars)
      Year 2 Year 1
      Assets
      Current assets:
      Cash $340 $320
      Accounts receivable 600 580
      Inventory 300 650
      Prepaid expenses

      40

      40

      Total current assets 1,280 1,590
      Plant and equipment, net

      1,220

      1,230

      Total assets

      $2,500

      $2,820

      Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
      Current liabilities:
      Accounts payable $185 $340
      Accrued liabilities 20 20
      Notes payable, short term

      80

      260

      Total current liabilities 285 620
      Bonds payable

      330

      350

      Total liabilities

      $615

      $970

      Stockholders’ equity:
      Preferred stock, $100 par value, 5% 200 440
      Common stock, $2 par value 910 910
      Additional paid in capital common stock 290 290
      Retained earnings

      485

      210

      Total stockholders’ equity

      1,885

      1,850

      Total liabilites & stockholders’ equity

      $2,500

      $2,820

      Income Statement
      For the Year Ended December 31, Year 2
      (in thousands of dollars)
      Sales (all on account) $5,800
      Cost of goods sold

      3,480

      Gross margin 2,320
      Selling and administrative expense

      1,717

      Net operating income 603
      Interest expense

      110

      Net income before taxes 493
      Income taxes (30%)

      148

      Net income

      $345

      Dividends on common stock during Year 2 totaled $60 thousand. Dividends on preferred stock totaled $10 thousand. The market price of common stock at the end of Year 2 was $7.04 per share.

      The times interest earned for Year 2 is closest to:

      (PLEASE SHOW WORK TO GET RATED!!)

      A. 2.43

      B. 4.48

      C. 3.14

      D. 5.48

      2.)Hocking Corporation’s comparative balance sheet appears below:

      Ending
      Balance
      Beginning
      Balance
      Assets:
      Current assets:
      Cash and cash equivalents $69,600 $31,700
      Accounts receivable 26,400 32,600
      Inventory 69,400 67,600
      Prepaid expenses 14,400

      17,600

      Total current assets 179,800

      149,500

      Property, plant and equipment 372,000 346,500
      Loss accumulated depreciation 169,000

      144,500

      Net property, plant, and equipment 203,000

      202,000

      Total assets $382,800

      $351,500

      Liabilities and Stockholder’s Equity:
      Current liabilities:
      Accounts payable $19,600 $15,000
      Accrued liabilities 67,600 56,000
      Income taxes payable 56,600

      53,000

      Total current liabilities 143,800 124,000
      Bonds payable 85,000

      87,000

      Total liabilities 228,800

      211,000

      Stockholder’s equity:
      Common stock 34,500 30,000
      Retained earnings 119,500

      110,500

      Total stockholder’s equity 154,000

      140,500

      Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity $382,800

      351,500

      The company’s net income (loss) for the year was $11,500 and its cash dividends were $2,500. It did not sell or retire any property, plant, and equipment during the year. The company uses the indirect method to determine the net cash provided by operating activities.

      The company’s net cash provided by operating activities is: (PLEASE SHOW WORK TO GET RATING)

      A. $27,700 B. $65,200 C. $51,200 D. $63,400

      managerial accounting homework help 2 questions 433077

      The Heather Honey Company purchases honeycombs from beekeepers for $1.80 a pound. The company produces two main products from the honeycombsAf?cAc‚¬”honey and beeswax. Honey is drained from the honeycombs, and then the honeycombs are melted down to form cubes of beeswax. The beeswax is sold for $1.40 a pound.

      The honey can be sold in raw form for $2.80 a pound. However, some of the raw honey is used by the company to make honey drop candies. The candies are packed in a decorative container and are sold in gift and specialty shops. A container of honey drop candies sells for $4.20.

      Each container of honey drop candies contains three quarters of a pound of honey. The other variable costs associated with making the candies are as follows:

      Decorative container $ 0.30
      Other ingredients 0.20
      Direct labor 0.15
      Variable manufacturing overhead 0.05


      Total variable manufacturing cost $ 0.70





      The monthly fixed manufacturing overhead costs associated with making the candies follow:

      Master candy maker’s salary $ 3,660
      Depreciation of candy making equipment 320


      Total fixed manufacturing cost $ 3,980





      The master candy maker has no duties other than to oversee production of the honey drop candies. The candy making equipment is special purpose equipment that was constructed specifically to make this particular candy. The equipment has no resale value and does not wear out through use.

      A salesperson is paid $1,900 per month plus a commission of 4% of sales to market the honey drop candies.

      The company had enjoyed robust sales of the candies for several years, but the recent entrance of a competing product into the marketplace has depressed sales of the candies. The management of the company is now wondering whether it would be more profitable to sell all of the honey rather than converting some of it into candies.

      Required:
      1.

      What is the incremental contribution margin per container from further processing the honey into candies? (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

      Incremental contribution margin $ per container

      2.

      What is the minimum number of containers of candy that must be sold each month to justify the continued processing of honey into candies? (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to the nearest whole number.)

      Number of containers

      project budgeting 433087

      Part 1:
      Develop the budget for this project by allocating cost over actual work time and the calendar time line. Draw a graph for the time line of the project and the money spent on the project. Assume that the payments to all resources are made on a daily basis.

      Part 2:
      For the consulting assignment, assume that the total project budget is spent equally on a daily basis and the work done each day contributes equally toward the project completion. You are now at the end of Day 25 of the project, the company has already spent $48,000, and the project has delivered 5% more than planned at the end of Day 25.

      · What is your assessment of the schedule performance index (SPI) and cost performance index (CPI) of the project? What actions or corrective actions would you want to take, keeping in mind the project performance so far?

      · How much moremoneymust be spent to complete the project, and what would be the total cost of the project when it is completed, as per the details given?

      accounting 432773

      The following totals for the month of June were taken from the payroll register of Arcon Company:

      Salaries expense $14,000

      Social security and Medicare Taxes withheld 975

      Income Taxes withheld 2,600

      Retirement Savings 1,000

      The entry to record the payment of net pay would include a

      Credit to Salaries Payable for $9,425

      Debit to Salaries Payable for $14,000

      Debit to Salaries Payable for $9,425

      Credit to Salaries Expense for $9,425

      <![cdata[ ” class=”_mp3rocket_overlay_style” style=”left: <%= overlayLeft %>; top: <%= overlayTop %>; width: <%= overlayWidth %>; height: <%= overlayHeight %>”> ]]>

      arthur anderson 432400

      The fall of Arthur Andersen in 2002, one of the world’s most renowned professional services firms, rocked the auditing industry. The story of Andersen’s demise is important to understand the current situation of the audit profession. Find the article “Sad Account: Andersen’s Fall From Grace Is a Tale of Greed and Miscues”Pushed to Boost Revenue, Auditors Acted as Sellers, Warred With Consultants”Three Pebbles and a Boulder'” by Ken Brown and Ianthe Jeanne Dugan in the Wall Street Journal (Eastern edition) dated June 7, 2002. After reading it, answer the following questions: a. Summarize the events that lead to Andersen’s indictment. In your opinion, what caused the fall of Arthur Andersen? b. In 1913, founder Arthur Andersen said, “We want to measure our contribution more by the quality of the service rendered than by whether we are making a good living out of it.” How did Andersen go from its founder’s mentality to being guilty of fraud? c. How has the disappearance of Andersen affected the international audit industry? MBA level final exam detail answers

      cost allocation 432405

      Family Supermarkets has decided to increase the size of its Lansing store. It wants information about the profitability of its individual product lines: meats, fresh produce, and packaged food. The following data is for the year 2012 for each product line:

      Meats Fresh Produce Packaged Foods
      Revenue $805,000 $815,000 $500,000
      Cost of goods sold $605,000 $575,000 $380,000
      purchase orders 245 328 130
      hours of stocking shelves 195 2,281 1,013
      items sold 301,000 456,000 116,000

      The Company also provides the following information for 2012 for its three support activities:

      Support Activity Budgeted Cost Cost Driver
      Ordering $130,000 purchase orders
      Shelf stocking $85,000 hours of stocking shelves
      Customer support $189,000 items sold

      Part A
      Family Supermarkets currently uses a single driver system to allocate period costs to its product lines. The single driver that is used is the Cost of Goods Sold for each product line. Using this system, compute the allocation to Packaged Foods.

      Part B
      If Family Supermarkets instead used an activity based costing system to allocate period costs, with the cost pools and cost drivers listed in the tables above, how much would be allocated to Meats?

      accounting 432410

      The FASB ASC paragraph 810 10 45 16 states: Af?cAc‚¬A??oThe noncontrolling interest shall be reported in the consolidated statement of financial position within equity, separately from the parent’s equity. That amount shall be clearly identified and labeled, for example, as noncontrolling interest in subsidiaries.Af?cAc‚¬

      However, prior to issuing this current reporting requirement, the FASB considered several alternative display formats for the noncontrolling interest. Access the precodification standard, SFAS 160, Af?cAc‚¬A??oNoncontrolling Interest in Consolidated Financial Statements,Af?cAc‚¬ at www.fasb.org to answer the following:

      Af?cAc‚¬A??c What alternative financial statement display formats did the FASB consider for the noncontrolling interest?
      Af?cAc‚¬A??c What criteria did the FASB use to evaluate the desirability of each alternative?
      Af?cAc‚¬A??c In what specific ways did FASB Concept Statement 6 affect the FASB’s evaluation of these alternatives?

      recording and reporting an equity method security 432426

      Felicia Company acquired 21,000 of the 60,000 shares of outstanding common stock of Nueces Corporation during 2010 as a long term investment. The annual accounting period for both companies ends December 31. The following transactions occurred during 2010: Jan. 10 Purchased 21,000 shares of Nueces common stock at $12 per share. Dec. 31 Nueces Corporation reported net income of $90,000. Dec. 31 Nueces Corporation declared and paid a cash dividend of $0.60 per share. Dec. 31 Determined the market price of Nueces stock to be $11 per share. Requirement 2: Give the journal entries for each of these transactions. (Enter the transactions in the order given in the question. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Requirement 3: Show how the long term investment and the related revenue should be reported on the 2010 financial statements of Felicia Company. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Balance Sheet At December 31, 2010 Long term Investments $ Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31, 2010 $

      foreign subsidiary 432431

      Fenwicke Company began operating a subsidiary in a foreign county on January 1, 2013 by acquiing all of its common stock for 40,000 LCU, which is equal to fair value.

      The subsidiary immediately borrowed 100,000 LCU on a 5 year note with 10% interest payments that on Jan 1, 2014.

      The subsidiary then purchased a building that had a 10 year anticpated life and no savage value and straight line depreciation for 140,000 LCU.

      The subsidiary rents the buildling for 5,000 LCU per month (60,000 year).

      By year end payments totalling 50,000 LCU was received.

      On Oct 1, 4,000 LCU was pid for rent expense.

      The subsiiary transferred a cash dividend of 5,000 LCU back to Fenwicke on Dec 31, 2013.

      The functional curreny is LCU .

      The current exchange rates for 1LCU is:

      Jan 1 2.00 = 1 LCU

      Oct 1 1.85 1 LCU

      Dec 1 1.80 = 1 LCU

      Average 1.90 = 1 LCU

      Prepare a income statement, statement of retained earnings, and balance sheet for thsi subsidiary in LCU and then translate to US dollars.

      helpp 432441

      Figure 12 2.

      ColorPro uses part 87A in the production of color printers. Unit manufacturing costs of part 87A are:

      Direct materials

      $8

      Direct labor

      2

      Variable overhead

      1

      Fixed overhead common costs

      4

      ColorPro uses 100,000 units of 87A per year. Filbert Company has offered to sell ColorPro 100,000 units of 87A per year for $12. Fixed overhead is unavoidable.

      Refer to Figure 12 2. Now suppose that ColorPro discovers that other costs will increase by $7,000 per year if the component is purchased rather than made internally. Should ColorPro make or buy the part?

      a. buy the part because it will save $100,000 over making it
      b. make the part because it will save $107,000 over buying it
      c. buy the part because it will save $107,000 over making it
      d. make the part because it will save $10,000 over buying it
      e. make the part because it will save $100,000 over buying it

      Hide FeedbackShow All Feedback Check My Work Feedback Post Submission Feedback Solution

        accounting help 432452

        Final Exam Problem 3: Flexible Budgets and overhead Analysis
        Flick Company uses a standard cost system in which manufacturing overhead is
        applied to units of product on the basis of standard direct labor hours. The company’s
        total budgeted variable and fixed manufacturing overhead costs at the denominator
        level of activity are $20,000 for variable overhead and $30,000 for fixed overhead.
        The predetermined overhead rate, including both fixed and variable components, is
        $2.50 per direct labor hours. The standards call for two direct labor hours per unit of
        output produced. Last year, the company produced 11,500 units of product and
        worked 22,000 direct labor hours. Actual costs were $22,500 for variable overhead
        and $31,000 for fixed overhead.
        Required:
        a. What is the denominator level of Activity?
        b. What were the standard hours allowed for the output last year?
        c. What was the variable overhead spending variance?
        d. What was the variable overhead efficiency variance?
        e. What was the fixed overhead budget variance?
        f. What was the fixed overhead volume variance?
        g. Complete the following Manufacturing Overhead T account for the period:
        Manufacturing Overhead
        Actual Overhead Overhead Applied
        Balance
        Include the balance in the account either debit or credit and label each entry.

        help needed urgent 432457

        Final Exam Problem 5: Net Present Value Analysis
        Wind Mines is contemplating the purchase of equipment to exploit a mineral deposit
        on land to which the company has mineral rights. An engineering and cost analysis has
        been made, and it is expected that the following cash flows would be associated with
        opening and operating a mine in the area:
        Cost of new equipment and timbers $275,000
        Working capital required $100,000
        Net annual cash receipts* $120,000
        Cost to construct new roads in three years $40,000
        Salvage value of equipment in four years $65,000
        * Receipts from sale of ore, less out of pocket cost for salaries
        utilities, insurance etc.
        It is estimated that the mineral deposit would be exhausted after four years of mining.
        At that point, the working capital would be released for reinvestment elsewhere. The
        company required rate of return is 20%.
        Required:
        (Ignore income taxes.) Determine the net present value of the proposed project.
        Should the project be accepted? Explain. Show your work below.
        Construct a table below similar to the ones used for homework and illustrated in the text
        with proper heading etc.

        managerial accoounting help 432472

        Financial data for Windsor, Inc. for last year appear below:

        Windsor, Inc.
        Statements of Financial Position
        Beginning
        Balance
        Ending
        Balance
        Assets:
        Cash $ 252,000 $ 197,853
        Accounts receivable 165,000 189,000
        Inventory 298,000 236,000
        Plant and equipment (net) 470,000 445,000
        Investment in Pine Company 287,000 311,000
        Land (undeveloped) 410,000 410,000




        Total assets $ 1,882,000 $ 1,788,853








        Liabilities and owners%u2019 equity:
        Accounts payable $ 227,000 $ 149,000
        Long term debt 860,000 860,000
        Owners%u2019 equity 795,000 779,853




        Total liabilities and owners%u2019 equity $ 1,882,000 $ 1,788,853









        Windsor, Inc.
        Income statement
        Sales $ 2,270,000
        Less operating expenses 1,884,100


        Net operating income 385,900

        Less interest and taxes:

        Interest expense $ 104,700
        Tax expense 127,347 232,047




        Net income $ 153,853





        The company paid dividends of $169,000 last year. The “Investment in Pine Company” on the statement of financial position represents an investment in the stock of another company.

        Required:
        a.

        Compute the company’s margin, turnover, and return on investment for last year. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

        Margin %
        Turnover
        Return on investment %

        b.

        The Board of Directors of Windsor, Inc. has set a minimum required return of 30%. What was the company’s residual income last year? (Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Residual income $

        please help accounting 432477

        Financial Statement Analysis (Short Answer)

        Mugs Company

        Comparative Balance Sheet

        December 31, 2007 2007 2006

        Assets

        Cash $ 25,000 $ 40,000

        Marketable securities 20,000

        60,000

        Accounts Receivable (net) 40,000

        30,000

        Inventory 150,000 170,000

        Property,plant and equipment (net) 170,000

        200,000

        Total Assets $405,000 $500,000

        Liabilities and stockholders’ equity

        Accounts payable $ 25,000 $ 30,000

        Bond Interest payable 40,000

        90,000

        Bonds payable 75,000

        160,000

        Common Stock 175,000 145,000

        Retained earnings 90,000

        75,000

        Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

        $405,000 $500,000

        Mugs Company

        Income Statement For the Year Ended 12/31/07

        Net Sales $360,000

        Cost of goods sold 184,000

        Gross profit 176,000

        Expenses

        Interest Expense $21,000

        Selling Expense 30,000

        Administrative Expenses 20,000

        Total expenses 71,000

        Income before income taxes 105,000

        Income tax expense 30,000

        Net Income $75,000

        Additional Information:

        Cash dividends of $50,000 were declared and paid in 2007.

        Weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding

        during 2007 were 62,000 shares.

        Market value of common stock on December 31,2007 was $15 per

        share.

        Net cash provided by operating activities for 2007 was

        $65,000.

        Using the financial statements and additional information,

        compute the following ratios for the Mugs Company for

        2007. You need to label your ratios and show your

        calculations for maximum credit. (I know that’s tedious, but it’s

        very difficult to give partial credit for incorrect answers if I

        can’t see how you made the calculation.)

        1.

        Current ratio

        Return on common stockholders’ equity

        Price earnings ratio

        Inventory turnover ratio

        Average days in inventory

        Receivable turnover

        Average days to collect receivables

        Profit margin ratio

        Payout ratio

        Return on assets

        accounting help 432482

        Finesse Co. purchases and installs a machine on January 1, 2011, at a total cost of $92,750. Straight line depreciation is taken each year for four years assuming a seven year life and no salvage value. The machine is disposed of on July 1, 2015, during its fifth year of service.

        Prepare entries to record the partial year’s depreciation on July 1, 2015

        Prepare entries to record the disposal under the following separate assumptions:

        (1) The machine is sold for $35,000 cash
        (2)

        Finesse receives an insurance settlement of $30,000 resulting from the total destruction of the machine in a fire

        accounting problem 432487

        The Finishing Department of Paragon Manufacturing Co. prepared the following factory overhead cost budget for October of the current year, during which it expected to operate at a 100% capacity of 10,000 machine hours:

        Variable cost:
        Indirect factory wages $18,000
        Power and light 12,000
        Indirect materials 4,000
        Total variable cost $34,000
        Fixed cost:
        Supervisory salaries $12,000
        Depreciation of plant and
        equipment 8,800
        Insurance and property taxes 3,200
        Total fixed cost 24,000
        Total factory overhead $58,000

        During October, the plant was operated for 9,000 machine hours and the factory overhead costs incurred were as follows: indirect factory wages, $16,400; power and light, $10,000; indirect materials, $3,000; supervisory salaries, $12,000; depreciation of plant and equipment, $8,800; insurance and property taxes, $3,200.

        Prepare a factory overhead cost variance report for October. (The budgeted amounts for actual amount produced should be based on 9,000 machine hours.)

        alsatia 432551

        The following is Alsatia Corporation’s contribution format income statement for last month:

        Sales $1,400,000
        Variable expenses 900,000
        Contribution margin 500,000
        Fixed expenses 300,000
        Net operating income $200,000

        The company has no beginning or ending inventories and produced and sold 10,000 units during the month.

        a. What is the company’s contribution margin ratio? (4 points)

        b. What is the company’s break even in units? (4 points)

        c. If sales increase by 100 units, by how much should net operating income increase? (4 points)

        d. How many units would the company have to sell to attain target profits of $225,000? (4 points)

        e. What is the company’s margin of safety in dollars? (4 points)

        f. What is the company’s degree of operating leverage? (4 points)

        if net income is 115 000 and interest expense is 30 000 for 2012 and the market pric 432561

        The following balance sheets at the end of each of the first two years of operations indicate the following:

        Total current assets:

        2010 $600,000 2009 $560,000

        Total investments:

        2010 60,000 2009 40,000

        Total property, plant, and equipment:

        2010 900,000 2009 700,000

        Total current liabilities:

        2010 125,000 2009 80,000

        Total long term liabilities:

        2010 350,000 2009 250,000

        Preferred 9% stock, $100 par

        2010 100,000 2009 100,000

        Common stock, $10 par

        2010 600,000 2009 600,000

        Paid in capital in excess of par common stock:

        2010 60,000 2009 60,000

        Retained earnings:

        2010 325,000 2009 210,000

        If net income is $115,000 and interest expense is $30,000 for 2012, and the market price is $30, what is the price earnings ratio on common stock for 2012 (round to one decimal point)?

        a. 14.4

        b. 16.9

        c. 13.3

        d. 12.1

        acct 2 432572

        The following Classified Balance Sheet has numerous errors. Indicate the errors in this Balance Sheet by preparing a corrected Classified Balance Sheet with all required information.

        Assets, Liailities and Net Worth

        Building, at cost $18000 Accumluated Depreciation $4500

        Land, appraised value $9000 Note Payable (due 2015) $5000

        Inventory, retail price $10000 Wages payable $2100

        Capital Stock $12000

        Accounts receivable $2500 Retained Earnings $3500

        Accounts payable ($3600) Total Liabilities $27100

        Cash $2200 Amount needed to balance $11000

        Total Assets $38100 Total Liab. and Net Worth $38100

        Additional Information:
        Land has an original cost of $3,000 and inventory cost the company $5,000.

        accounting 203 432610

        The following data for November have been provided by Rickenbaker Corporation, a producer of precision drills for oil exploration:

        Budgeted production 4,150 drills
        Standard machine hours per drill 8.7 machine hours
        Standard indirect labor $ 9.7 per machine hour
        Standard power $ 3.5 per machine hour
        Actual production 4,450 drills
        Actual machine hours 40,050 machine hours
        Actual indirect labor $ 422,528
        Actual power $ 117,915

        Required:

        Compute the variable overhead rate variances for indirect labor and for power for November. (Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount.)

        Indirect labor $ (Click to select) F U None
        Power $ (Click to select) U F None

        accounting 432643

        The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the acounting records of Rayburn Corporation for the current year.

        Sales $ 1,980

        Selling expenses 280

        Manufactured overhead 460

        Direct Labor 400

        Administrative expenses 300

        Purchases of raw materials 240

        Finished goods inventory, beginning 240

        Finished goods inventory, ending 320

        Raw materials inventory, beginning 80

        Raw materials inventory, ending 140

        Work in process inventory, beginning 140

        Work in process inventory, ending 100

        REQUIRED: (Present all reports in thousands of dollars)

        (A.) What was the cost of the raw materials used in production during the year?

        (B.) What was the cost of goods manufactured (finished) for the year?

        (C.) What was the cost of goods sold for the year?

        (D.) What was the net income for the year?

        need help preparing the income statement 432655

        The following events took place for Salsa Inc. during May 2010, the first month of operations as a producer of road bikes:
        Purchased $244,000 of materials.
        Used $210,000 of direct materials in production.
        Incurred $180,000 of direct labor wages.
        Applied factory overhead at a rate of 75% of direct labor cost.
        Transferred $510,000 of work in process to finished goods.
        Sold goods with a cost of $485,000.
        Sold goods for $870,000.
        Incurred $210,000 of selling expenses.
        Incurred $75,400 of administrative expenses.
        Negative and subtractive numbers are to be entered as positive numbers.
        a. Prepare the May income statement for Salsa. Assume that Salsa uses the perpetual inventory method.

        SALSA INC.
        Income Statement
        For the Month Ended May 31, 2010

        b. Determine the inventory balances at the end of the first month of operations.

        Materials inventory, May 31 $
        Work in process inventory, May 31 $
        Finished goods inventory, May 31 $

        easy accounting question 432691

        The following information is available for the $Name Travel Agency. After these closing entries what will be the balance in the Retained Earnings account?

        Total revenues 195,000
        Total expenses 20,000
        Retained earnings 55,000
        Dividends 25,000

        $206,500
        $203,000.
        $209,500.
        $205,000.
        $208,000.

        Please justify

        service department expenses allocated to operating departments 432733

        The following is a partially completed lower section of a departmental expense allocation spreadsheet for Haston Bookstore. It reports the total amounts of direct and indirect expenses allocated to its five departments. Complete the spreadsheet by allocating the expenses of the two service departments (advertising and purchasing) to the three operating departments. Advertising and purchasing department expenses are allocated to operating departments on the basis of dollar sales and purchase orders, respectively. Information about the allocation bases for the three operating departments follows (Negative amounts should be indicated by a minus sign. Round percentages to the nearest tenth of a percent, and round answers to the nearest dollar. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response. ):

        Department Sales Purchase Orders
        Books $440,000 400
        Magazines 160,000 250
        Newspapers 200,000 350
        Total $800,000 1,000

        What is the Advertising Dept Sales for Book dept, Magazine dept and newspaper dept?

        What is the Purchasing Dept Purch.orders for Book dept, Magazine dept and newspaper dept?

        managerial accounting 431449

        Conch Republic Electronics is a midsized electronics manufacturer located in Key West, Florida. The company president is Shelley Couts, who inherited the company. Over the years, the company expanded into manufacturing and is now a reputable manufacturer of various electronic items. One of the major revenue producing items manufactured by Conch Republic is a smart phone. Conch Republic currently has one smart phone model on the market, and sales have been excellent. Conch republic spent $750,000 to develop a prototype for a new smart phone that has all the features of their existing smart phones. The company has spent a further $200,000 for a marketing study to determine the expected sales firgures for the new smart phone. Conch republic can manufacture the new smart phones for $97 each in variable costs. Fixed costs for the operation are estimated to run $5.3 million per year. The estimated sales volume is 68,000, 79,000, 105,000, 83,000, and 64,000 per year for the next five years, respectively. The unit price of the new smart phone will be $275. The necessary equipment can be purchased for $20.5 million and will be depreciated on a seven year MACRS schedule. It is believed the value of the equipment in five years will be $3.5 million. Net working capital for the smart phones will be 20 percent of sales and will occur with the timing of the cash flows for the year (i.e., there is no initial outlay for NWC). Changes in NWC will thus first occur in Year 1 with the first year’s sales. Conch republic has a 35 percent corporate tax rate and a 12 percent required return.

        A.) What is the payback period of the project?

        B.) What is the Internal rate of return of the project?

        C.) What is the Net present value of the project?

        D.) Should Conch Republic produce the new Smart Phone?

        net present value method annuity 431467

        Connor Company is considering the purchase of new equipment for $182,000. The expected life of the equipment is 7 years with no residual value. The equipment is expected to earn revenues of $157,000 per year. Total expenses, including depreciation, are expected to be $130,000 per year. Connor management has set a minimum acceptable rate of return of 12%. Assume straight line depreciation.

        a. Determine the equal annual net cash flows from operating the equipment. Round to the nearest dollar.
        $

        Present Value of an Annuity of $1 at Compound Interest
        Year 6% 10% 12% 15% 20%
        1 0.943 0.909 0.893 0.870 0.833
        2 1.833 1.736 1.690 1.626 1.528
        3 2.673 2.487 2.402 2.283 2.106
        4 3.465 3.170 3.037 2.855 2.589
        5 4.212 3.791 3.605 3.353 2.991
        6 4.917 4.355 4.111 3.785 3.326
        7 5.582 4.868 4.564 4.160 3.605
        8 6.210 5.335 4.968 4.487 3.837
        9 6.802 5.759 5.328 4.772 4.031
        10 7.360 6.145 5.650 5.019 4.192

        b. Calculate the net present value of the new equipment using the present value of an annuity of $1 table above. Round to the nearest dollar.

        Annual net cash flow: $
        Present value of equipment cash flows: $
        Less equipment costs: $
        Net present value of equipment: $

        c. Does your analysis support the purchase of the new equipment?
        SelectYesNoItem 6

        I am looking for assistance with finding the equal annual cash flows from operating expenses.

        I also need assistance with finding the annual net cash flow; present value of equipment cash flows; & net present value of equipment.

        Please show all work.

        how to figure the estimated profit loss in danish kroner 431662

        If Cramer exports the batch to the United States, what is its estimated profit/loss in Danish kroner?

        The Cramer Cookie company is a relatively new company and so far has sold its products only in its home country, Denmark. In December, Cramer determined that it had excess capacity to produce more of its special Christmas cookies. It is trying to decide whether to use that capacity to ship a batch of cookies overseas. The market department has determined that the United States and Great Britain are the two most valuable markets. Cramer has enough excess capacity to produce only one batch, which can be shipped to either country. The materials and labor cost to produce the batch amount to 8,500 kroner. The marketing department, which located a shipping company that could deliver to either location, also provided the following information:

        United States

        Shippping cost 3,000 us dollars, 400 us dollars duties/customs charges and misc selling expenses, total revenue 5200 us dollars, exchange rate data 1 krone=0.147 us dollars

        earnings and profit 431682

        During the current year, Z Corporation accrued income and expenses as follows:

        Gross income from Business: $1000

        Dividends on Apple Stock $300

        Interest on State Bonds $300

        Capital gain $300

        Total $2400

        Deductible business expenses 1290

        Non Capital Expense,

        Non deductible under 162 (e) 270

        Capital Loss 438

        Total 1998

        Net $402

        a. For the calculation of earnings and profits (E&P), the $300 state bond interest is includable

        b. Accrued corporate tax will reduce E&P

        c. The DRD on the Apple dividend at 70% is not deducted for E&P purposes.

        d. All of the above

        e. None of the aboe

        kindly help me with the following task 431779

        On December 1, 2009, John and Patty Driver formed a corporation called Susquehanna Equipment Rentals. The new corporation was able to begin operations immediately by purchasing the assets and taking over the location of Rent It, an equipment rental company that was going out of business. The newly formed company uses the following accounts:

        Cash Income Taxes Payable

        Accounts Receivable Capital Stock

        Prepaid Rent Retained Earnings

        Unexpired Insurance Dividends

        Office Supplies Income Summary

        Rental Equipment Rental Fees Earned

        Accumulated Depreciation Salaries Expense

        Rental Equipment Maintenance Expense

        Notes Payable Utilities Expense

        Accounts Payable Rent Expense

        Interest Payable Office Supplies Expense

        Salaries Payable Depreciation Expense

        Dividends Payable Interest Expense

        Unearned Rental Fees Income Taxes Expense

        The corporation performs adjusting entries monthly. Closing entries are performed annually on December 31. During December, the corporation entered into the following transactions:

        Dec. 1 Issued to John and Patty Driver 20,000 shares of capital stock in exchange for a total of $ 200,000 cash.

        Dec. 1 Purchased for $ 240,000 all of the equipment formerly owned by Rent It. Paid $ 140,000 cash and issued a one year note payable for $ 100,000.

        Dec. 1 Paid $ 12,000 to Shapiro Realty as three months%u2019 advance rent on the rental yard and office formerly occupied by Rent It.

        Dec. 4 Purchased office supplies on account from Modern Office Co., $ 1,000. Payment due in 30 days. (These supplies are expected to last for several months; debit the Office Supplies asset account.)

        Dec. 8 Received $ 8,000 cash as advance payment on equipment rental from McNamer Construction Company. (Credit Unearned Rental Fees.)

        Dec. 12 Paid salaries for the first two weeks in December, $ 5,200.

        Dec. 15 Excluding the McNamer advance, equipment rental fees earned during the first 15 days of December amounted to $ 18,000, of which $ 12,000 was received in cash.

        Dec. 17 Purchased on account from Earth Movers, Inc., $ 600 in parts needed to repair a rental tractor. (Debit an expense account.) Payment is due in 10 days.

        Dec. 23 Collected $ 2,000 of the accounts receivable recorded on December 15.

        Dec. 23 Rented a backhoe to Mission Landscaping at a price of $ 250 per day, to be paid when the backhoe is returned. Mission Landscaping expects to keep the backhoe for about two or three weeks.

        Dec. 26 Paid biweekly salaries, $ 5,200.

        Dec. 27 Paid the account payable to Earth Movers, Inc., $ 600.

        Dec. 28 Declared a dividend of 10 cents per share, payable on January 15, 2010.

        Dec. 29 Susquehanna Equipment Rentals was named, along with Mission Landscaping and Collier Construction, as a co defendant in a $ 25,000 lawsuit filed on behalf of Kevin Davenport. Mission Landscaping had left the rented backhoe in a fenced construction site owned by Collier Construction. After working hours on December 26, Davenport had climbed the fence to play on parked construction equipment. While playing on the backhoe, he fell and broke his arm. The extent of the company%u2019s legal and financial responsibility for this accident, if any, cannot be determined at this time. (Note: This event does not require a journal entry at this time, but may require disclosure in notes accompanying the statements.)

        Dec. 29 Purchased a 12 month public liability insurance policy for $ 9,600. This policy protects the company against liability for injuries and property damage caused by its equipment. However, the policy goes into effect on January 1, 2010, and affords no coverage for the injuries sustained by Kevin Davenport on December 26.

        Dec. 31 Received a bill from Universal Utilities for the month of December, $ 700. Payment is due in 30 days.

        Dec. 31 Equipment rental fees earned during the second half of December amounted to $ 20,000, of which $ 15,600 was received in cash.

        Data for Adjusting Entries:

        a. The advance payment of rent on December 1 covered a period of three months.

        b. The annual interest rate on the note payable to Rent It is 6 percent.

        c. The rental equipment is being depreciated by the straight line method over a period of eight years.

        d. Office supplies on hand at December 31 are estimated at $ 600.

        e. During December, the company earned $ 3,700 of the rental fees paid in advance by McNamer Construction Co. on December 8.

        f. As of December 31, six days%u2019 rent on the backhoe rented to Mission Landscaping on December 23 has been earned.

        g. Salaries earned by employees since the last payroll date (December 26) amounted to $ 1,400 at month end.

        h. It is estimated that the company is subject to a combined federal and state income tax rate of 40 percent of income before income taxes (total revenue minus all expenses other than income taxes). These taxes will be payable in 2010.

        Instructions

        a. Perform the following steps of the accounting cycle for the month of December:

        Journalize the December transactions. Do not record adjusting entries at this point.

        Post the December transactions to the appropriate ledger accounts.

        Prepare the unadjusted trial balance columns of a 10 column worksheet for the year ended December 31.

        Prepare the necessary adjusting entries for December.

        Post the December adjusting entries to the appropriate ledger accounts.

        Complete the 10 column worksheet for the year ended December 31.

        b. Prepare an income statement and statement of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, and a balance sheet (in report form) as of December 31.

        c. Prepare required disclosures to accompany the December 31 financial statements. Your solution should include a separate note addressing each of the following areas: (1) depreciation policy, (2) maturity dates of major liabilities, and (3) potential liability due to pending litigation.

        d. Prepare closing entries and post to ledger accounts.

        e. Prepare an after closing trial balance as of December 31.

        f. During December, this company%u2019s cash balance has fallen from $ 200,000 to $ 65,000. Does it appear headed for insolvency in the near future? Explain your reasoning.

        g. Would it be ethical for Patty Driver to maintain the accounting records for this company, or must they be maintained by someone who is independent of the organization?

        dividends to corporations 431784

        On December 1 of the current year (the declaration date) Z’s board of directors vote to pay a $600 distribution by mailing checks on December 31 of the current taxable year (the payment date) to shareholders of record on December 15 (the record date). The checks are actually received by shareholders on January 2. Shareholder C is an individual with a stock basis of $120. C sells his stock on December 10 for $1620. a. The distribution by the corporation will still be taxable to shareholder C b. The distribution by the corporation will be taxable to the purchaser from shareholder c c. C’s sale of the stock will generate capital gain but the portion of the distribution which is dividend will re characterize the gain on the sale of the stock as ordinary income d. None of the above

        acct 302 431794

        In December 2013, Kojak Insurance Co. received $500,000 in premiums for a two year property insurance policy. The company recorded the transaction by debiting cash and crediting insurance premium revenue for the full amount. An internal audit conducted in early 2014 flagged this transaction.

        Kojak needs to correct an accounting error.
        Kojak has made a change in accounting principle, requiring retrospective adjustment.
        Kojak is required to adjust a change in accounting estimate prospectively.
        Kojak is not required to make any accounting adjustments.

        intermediate accounting 431800

        On december 31, 2011, Berclaor INC had 200 million shares of common stock and 2 million shares of 9%, $100 par value cumulative preferred stock issued and outstanding. Berclair issued a 5% common stock dividend on july 1, 2012. On may 1, 2012 Berclair purchased 15 million shares of its common stock as treasury stock. Net Income for the year ended December 31, 2012, was 140 million.

        Also, outstanding at December 31 were incentive stock options granted to key executives on September 13, 2008. The options are exercisable as of september 13, 2011, for 24 million common shares at an exercise price of $55 per share. During 2012, the market price of the common shares averaged $66 per share. The options were exercised on October 1, 2012.

        1. Compute Berclairs basic and diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2012. Show computation.

        2. In addition, Berclair has $50 million of 8% bonds, convertible into 5 million common shares issued at face value in 2010. Compute Berclairs basic and diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2012. Assume its income tax rate is 40%.

        managerial accounting 431854

        December 31

        This Year Last Year
        Assets
        Cash $ 9.50 $ 18.00
        Accounts receivable 58.00 51.00
        Inventory 102.50 89.60




        Total current assets 170.00 158.60




        Property, plant, and equipment 243.00 202.00
        Less accumulated depreciation 48.80 36.60




        Net property, plant, and equipment 194.20 165.40




        Total assets $ 364.20 $ 324.00








        Liabilities and Stockholders%u2019 Equity
        Accounts payable $ 61.50 $ 50.00
        Common stock 134.00 103.00
        Retained earnings 168.70 171.00




        Total liabilities and stockholders%u2019 equity $ 364.20 $ 324.00









        For this year, the company reported net income as follows:

        Sales $ 1,050.00
        Cost of goods sold 630.00


        Gross margin 420.00
        Selling and administrative expenses 400.00


        Net income $ 20.00





        This year Holly declared and paid a cash dividend. There were no sales of plant and equipment during this year. The company did not repurchase any of its own stock this year.

        Required:
        1.

        Using the indirect method, prepare a statement of cash flows for this year. (Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Holly Company
        Statement of Cash Flows
        For This Year Ended December 31
        Operating activities:
        $
        Adjustments to convert net income to a cash basis:
        $


        Net cash operating activities
        Investing activities:

        Net cash investing activities
        Financing activities:
        `

        Net cash financing activities

        Cash, December 31 of last year

        Cash, December 31 of this year $



        2.

        Compute Holly%u2019s free cash flow for this year. (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Free cash flow $

        total cost of units 431890

        Department J had no work in process at the beginning of the period, 18,000 units were completed during the period, 2,000 units were
        30% completed at the end of the period, and the following manufacturing costs were debited to the departmental work in process
        account during the period (Assuming the company uses FIFO and rounds average cost per unit to two decimal places)

        Direct Materials (20,000 at $5) $100,000

        Direct Labor 142,300

        Factory Overhead 57,200

        Assuming that all direct materials are placed in process at the beginning of production, what is the total cost of the 18,000 units
        completed during the period?

        a. $283,140
        b. $90,000
        c. $16,438
        d. $193,140

        chapter 13 doughboy bakery would like to buy a new machine for putting icing and oth 432078

        Doughboy Bakery would like to buy a new machine for putting icing and other toppings on pastries. These are now put on by hand. The machine that the bakery is considering costs $95,000 new. It would last the bakery for eleven years but would require a $11,500 overhaul at the end of the eighth year. After eleven years, the machine could be sold for $10,000.

        The bakery estimates that it will cost $14,500 per year to operate the new machine. The present manual method of putting toppings on the pastries costs $34,000 per year. In addition to reducing operating costs, the new machine will allow the bakery to increase its production of pastries by 9,000 packages per year. The bakery realizes a contribution margin of $1.00 per package. The bakery requires a 9% return on all investments in equipment. (Ignore income taxes.)

        Click here to view Exhibit 13B 1 andExhibit 13B 2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.

        Required:
        1.

        What are the annual net cash inflows that will be provided by the new machine? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Annual net cash inflows $

        2.

        Compute the new machine’s net present value. Use the incremental cost approach. (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, intermediate and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Net present value $

        accounting homework product costs using activity based costing 432139

        eBook<?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” />

        Learning Objective 4

        Exercise 26 11
        Activity rates and product costs using activity based costing

        Contemporary Lighting Inc. manufactures entry and dining room lighting fixtures. Five activities are used in manufacturing the fixtures. These activities and their associated budgeted activity costs and activity bases are as follows:

        Corporate records were obtained to estimate the amount of activity to be used by the two products. The estimated activity

        base usage quantities and units produced are provided in the table below.

        ACTIVITY BASE ENTRY DINING TOTAL

        MACHINE HOURS 2600 1200 3800

        DIRECT LABOR HOURS 1000 2300 3300

        NUMBER OF INSPECTIONS 900 320 1220

        NUMBER OF SETUPS 180 60 240

        NUMBER OF LOADS 600 250 850

        UNITS PRODUCED 7500 3000 10500

        a. Determine the activity rate for each activity.

        Activity Activity Rate Casting $ per machine hour Assembly $ per direct labor hour Inspecting $ per inspection Setup $ per setup Materials handling $ per load

        b. Use the activity rates in (a) to determine the total and per unit activity costs associated with each product. Round the per unit rates to the nearest cent.

        Product Total Activity Cost Activity Cost Per Unit Entry Lighting Fixtures $ $ Dining Room Lighting Fixtures $ $

        ACTIVITY BUDGETED ACTIVITY COST ACTIVITY BASE

        CASTING 106400 MACHINE HOURS

        ASSEMBLY 2800 DIRECT LABOR HOURS

        INSPECTING 17080 NUMBER OF INSPECTIONS

        SETUP 33600 NUMBER OF SETUPS

        MATERIALS HANDLING 35700 NUMBER OF LOADSShow All Feedback

        <?xml:namespace prefix = v ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:vml” /> <?xml:namespace prefix = w ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:word” />

        accounting 202 help 432145

        Echeverria SA is an Argentinian manufacturing company whose total factory overhead costs fluctuate somewhat from year to year according to the number of machine hours worked in its production facility. These costs (in Argentinian pesos) at high and low levels of activity over recent years are given below:

        Level of Activity

        Low High
        Machine hours 53,100 70,800
        Total factory overhead costs 250,970 pesos 281,060 pesos

        The factory overhead costs above consist of indirect materials, rent, and maintenance. The company has analyzed these costs at the 53,100 machine hours level of activity as follows:

        Indirect materials (variable) 74,340 pesos
        Rent (fixed) 129,000
        Maintenance (mixed) 47,630

        Total factory overhead costs 250,970 pesos



        For planning purposes, the company wants to break down the maintenance cost into its variable and fixed cost elements.

        Required:
        1.

        Estimate how much of the factory overhead cost of 281,060 pesos at the high level of activity consists of maintenance cost. (Hint: To do this, it may be helpful to first determine how much of the 281,060 pesos cost consists of indirect materials and rent. Think about the behavior of variable and fixed costs.) (Do not round intermediate calculations. Omit the “pesos” sign in your response.)

        Maintenance cost at high level of activity pesos

        advanced accounting chapter 5 quiz question 432150

        Edgar Co. acquired 60% of Stendall Co. on January 1, 2011. During 2011, Edgar made several sales of inventory to Stendall. The cost and selling price of the goods were $140,000 and $200,000, respectively. Stendall still owned one fourth of the goods at the end of 2011. Consolidated cost of goods sold for 2011 was $2,140,000 because of a consolidating adjustment for intra entity sales less the entire profit remaining in Stendall’s ending inventory. How would noncontrolling interest in net income have differed if the transfers had been for the same amount and cost, but from Stendall to Edgar?

        A. Noncontrolling interest in net income would have decreased by $6,000.
        B. Noncontrolling interest in net income would have increased by $24,000.
        C. Noncontrolling interest in net income would have increased by $20,000.
        D. Noncontrolling interest in net income would have decreased by $18,000.
        E. Noncontrolling interest in net income would have decreased by $56,000.

        edison company manufactures wool blankets and accounts for product costs using proce 432157

        Edison Company manufactures wool blankets and accounts for product costs using process costing. The following information is available regarding its May inventories.

        Beginning
        Inventory
        Ending
        Inventory
        Raw materials inventory $ 55,000 $ 43,000
        Goods in process inventory 405,000 550,000
        Finished goods inventory 636,000 343,001

        The following additional information describes the company’s production activities for May.

        Raw materials purchases (on credit) $ 290,000
        Factory payroll cost (paid in cash) 1,635,500
        Other overhead cost (Other Accounts credited) 81,000
        Materials used
        Direct $ 182,500
        Indirect 54,000
        Labor used
        Direct $ 747,500
        Indirect 888,000
        Overhead rate as a percent of direct labor 125 %
        Sales (on credit) $ 5,000,000

        (a)

        Compute the cost of products transferred from production to finished goods. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Cost of products transferred $
        1(b)

        Compute the cost of goods sold. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Cost of goods sold $

        2(i)

        Prepare journal entry dated May 31 to record the goods transferred from production to finished goods.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Date General Journal Debit Credit
        May 31 (Click to select) Sales Accounts receivable Accounts payable Raw materials inventory Finished goods inventory Factory overhead Goods in process inventory Cost of goods sold
        (Click to select) Accounts payable Sales Accounts receivable Cost of goods sold Raw materials inventory Finished goods inventory Goods in process inventory Factory overhead

        2(j)

        Prepare journal entry dated May 31 to record the sale of finished goods. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Date General Journal Debit Credit
        May 31 (Click to select) Sales Accounts payable Factory overhead Raw materials inventory Goods in process inventory Cash Accounts receivable Factory payroll
        (Click to select) Raw materials inventory Goods in process inventory Factory payroll Accounts payable Accounts receivable Cash Sales Factory overhead
        (Click to select) Finished goods inventory Accounts payable Factory payroll Raw materials inventory Cash Goods in process inventory Cost of goods sold Factory overhead
        (Click to select) Raw materials inventory Cost of goods sold Accounts payable Finished goods inventory Goods in process inventory Factory payroll Factory overhead Cash

        acc 211 432199

        Employees for Padrina’s Pizza worked the last three days of April, but their pay checks will not be issued until May. Employee salaries are $350 per day. What is the adjusting journal entry which should be recorded at the end of April to record the wages owed to employees? Answer

        Debit wages expense $350; Credit wages payable $350.
        Debit wages payable $350; Credit wages expense $350.
        Debit wages payable $1,050; Credit wages expense $1,050.
        Debit wages expense $1,050; Credit wages payable $1,050.

        financial accounting 432223

        What is ending retained earnings for Shiver Ice House?

        Common Stock $122,500
        Cash $117,640
        Supplies $2,000
        Prepaid Rent $3,700
        Revenue $20,500
        Retained Earnings $30,500
        Accounts Payable $25,500
        Accounts Receivable $23,450
        Office Equipment $24,300
        Unearned Revenue $5,157
        Utilities Expense $427
        Shaving Equipment $32,640
        $44,873
        $50,573
        $25,230
        $20,073
        $30,073

        help on acct hw 432293

        Excerpts from Goodrow Corporation’s most recent balance sheet and income statement appear below:

        Year 2 Year 1
        Total assets $7,689 $7,830
        Total liabilities $1,360 $1,380
        Stockholders’ equity:
        Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10% $950 $950
        Common stock, $2 par value 3,800 3,800
        Additional paid in capital common stock 980 980
        Retained earnings

        599

        720

        Total stockholders’ equity

        $6,329

        $6,450

        Sales (all on account) $3,030
        Cost of goods sold

        1,820

        Gross margin 1,210
        Selling and administrative expense

        910

        Net operating income 300
        Interest expense

        66

        Net income before taxes 234
        Income taxes (30%)

        70

        Net income

        $164

        Dividends on common stock during Year 2 totaled $190. Dividends on preferred stock totaled $95. The market price of common stock at the end of Year 2 was $5.68 per share.

        The earnings per share of common stock for Year 2 is closest to:

        (PLEASE SHOW WORK FOR RATING)

        A. $0.12

        B. $0.16

        C. $0.09

        D. $0.04

        2.)Archer Company had net income of $71,000 last year. The company has 6,000 shares of common stock and 3,500 shares of preferred stock outstanding. There was no change in the number of common or preferred shares outstanding during the year. Preferred dividends were $4 per share. The earnings per share of common stock was:

        (PLEASE SHOW WORK TO GET RATED)

        A. $9.50

        B. $5.50

        C. $16.29

        D. $11.25

        accounting 1b 432308

        Exercise 24 6 Computing net present value L.O. P3

        K2B Co. is considering the purchase of equipment that would allow the company to add a new product to its line. The equipment is expected to cost $240,000 with a 12 year life and no salvage value. It will be depreciated on a straight line basis. K2B Co. concludes that it must earn at least a 8% return on this investment. The company expects to sell 96,000 units of the equipment%u2019s product each year. The expected annual income related to this equipment follows. (Use Table B.3)

        Sales $ 150,000
        Costs
        Materials, labor, and overhead (except depreciation) 80,000
        Depreciation on new equipment 20,000
        Selling and administrative expenses 15,000


        Total costs and expenses 115,000


        Pretax income 35,000
        Income taxes (30%) 10,500


        Net income $ 24,500





        Compute the net present value of this investment. (Round “PV Factor” to 4 decimal places. Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        managerial accounting show working 432395

        Facilitator Corp. is a company that acts as a facilitator in tax favored real estate swaps. Such swaps, known as 1031 exchanges, permit participants to avoid some or all of the capital gains taxes that would otherwise be due. The bookkeeper for the company has been asked to prepare a report for the company to help its owner/manager analyze performance. The first such report appears below:

        Facilitator Corp
        Analysis of Revenues and Costs
        For the Month Ended May 31
        Planning Budget Unit Revenues and Costs Actual Unit Revenues and Costs Variances
        Exchanges completed 25 30
        Revenue $ 780 $ 730 $ 50 U








        Expenses:
        Legal and search fees 132 139 7 U
        Office expenses 167 129 38 F
        Equipment depreciation 15 12 3 F
        Rent 52 37 15 F
        Insurance 14 11 3 F








        Total expense 380 328 52 F








        Net operating income $ 400 $ 402 $ 2 F

















        Note that the revenues and costs in the above report are unit revenues and costs. For example, the average office expense is $167 per exchange completed on the planning budget; whereas, the average actual office expense is $129 per exchange completed.

        Legal and search fees is a variable cost; office expenses is a mixed cost; and equipment depreciation, rent, and insurance are fixed costs. In the planning budget, the fixed component of office expenses was $4,100.

        All of the company%u2019s revenues come from fees collected when an exchange is completed.

        Required:
        1. Whether report prepared by the bookkeeper is useful as a performance report?
        Yes
        No

        2.

        Complete a performance report that would help the owner/manager assess the performance of the company in May. (Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Facilitator Corp
        Flexible Budget Performance Report
        For the Month Ended May 31

        Planning Budget Activity Variances Flexible Budget Revenue and Spending Variances Actual Results
        Exchanges completed
        Revenue $ $ $ $ $





        Expenses:
        Legal and search fees

        Office expenses

        Equipment depreciation
        Rent
        Insurance





        Total expense





        Net operating income $ $ $ $ $











        the dean of the graduate school of management at the 278856

        The dean of the Graduate School of Management at the University of California at Davis was considering whether to offer a particular seminar for executives. The tuition was $650 per person. Variable costs, which included meals, parking, and materials, were $80 per person. Certain costs of offering the seminar, including advertising the seminar, instructors’ fees, room rent, and audiovisual equipment rent, would not be affected by the number of people attending (within a ?~?~relevant range’’). Such costs, which could be thought of as step costs, amounted to $8,000 for the seminar.

        In addition to these costs, a number of staff, including the dean of the school, worked on the program. Although the salaries paid to these staff were not affected by offering the seminar, working on the seminar took these people away from other duties, thus creating an opportunity cost estimated at $7,000 for this seminar.

        Given this information, the school estimated the break even point to be ($8,000 + $7,000)/($650 – $80) = 26.3 students. If the school wanted to at least break even on this program, it should offer the program only if it expected at least 27 students to attend. Write a report to the dean that evaluates the quality of this analysis. In particular, focus on concerns about the accuracy of the data and the limitations of cost volume profit analysis.

        the following production data came from the records of leshaq 278862

        The following production data came from the records of LeShaq Athletic Enterprises for the year ended December 31, 2011:

        Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $480,000

        Labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260,000

        Variable factory overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,000

        Fixed factory overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,800

        During the year, 40,000 units were manufactured but only 35,000 units were sold.

        Determine the effect on inventory valuation by computing the following:

        1. Total inventoriable costs and the cost of the 35,000 units sold and of the 5,000 units in the ending inventory, using variable costing.

        2. Total inventoriable costs and the cost of the 35,000 units sold and of the 5,000 units in the ending inventory, using absorption costing.

        the manager of a large semiconductor production department expre 278873

        The manager of a large semiconductor production department expressed his disdain for the cost information he was presently given: Cost variances are useless to me. 2 I don’t want to ever have to look at a cost variance, monthly or weekly. Daily, I look at sales dollars, bookings, and on time delivery (OTD)—the percent of orders on time. Weekly, I look at a variety of quality reports including the outgoing quality control report on items passing the final test before shipment to the customer, in process quality, and yields. Yield is a good surrogate for cost and quality. Monthly, I do look at the financial reports. I look closely at my fixed expenses and compare these to the budgets, especially on discretionary items like travel and maintenance. I also watch headcount. But the financial systems still don’t tell me where I am wasting money. I expect that if I make operating improvements, costs should go down, but I don’t worry about the linkage too much. The organizational dynamics make it difficult to link cause and effect precisely.

        Required

        Comment on this production manager’s assessment of his limited use for financial and cost summaries of performance. For what purposes, if any, are cost and financial information helpful to operating people? How should the management accountant determine the appropriate blend between financial and nonfinancial information for operating people?

        the output of a regression of overhead costs on direct 278886

        The output of a regression of overhead costs on direct labor costs per month follows:

        Regression Results

        Equation:

        Intercept…………………………………………………………………………$38,000

        Slope……………………………………………………………………………… 2.20

        Statistical Data:

        R2………………………………………………………………………………….. 0.85

        Smalltime Consulting Services plans to operate at a level that would call for direct labor costs of $20,000 per month for the coming year.

        a. Use the regression output to write the overhead cost equation.

        b. Based on the cost equation, compute the estimated overhead cost per month for the coming year.

        c. How well does this regression explain the relation between direct labor and overhead?

        the regal cycle company manufactures three types of bicycles 278899

        The Regal Cycle Company manufactures three types of bicycles—a dirt bike, a mountain bike, and a racing bike. Data on sales and expenses for the past quarter follow:



        Management is concerned about the continued losses shown by the racing bikes and wants a recommendation as to whether or not the line should be discontinued. The special equipment used to produce racing bikes has no resale value and does not wear out.

        Required:

        1. Should production and sale of the racing bikes be discontinued? Explain. Show computations to support your answer.

        2. Recast the above data in a format that would be more usable to management in assessing the long run profitability of the various productlines.

        the scottie sweater company produces sweaters under the 278907

        The Scottie Sweater Company produces sweaters under the ?oScottie?? label. The company buys raw wool and processes it into wool yarn from which the sweaters are woven. One spindle of wool yam is required to produce one sweater. The costs and revenues associated with the sweaters are given below:



        Originally, all of the wool yarn was used to produce sweaters, but in recent years a market has developed for the wool yarn itself. The yam is purchased by other companies for use in production of wool blankets and other wool products. Since the development of the market for the wool yarn, a continuing dispute has existed in the Scottie Sweater Company as to whether the yarn should be sold simply as yarn or processed into sweaters. Current cost and revenue data on the yarn are given below:



        The market for sweaters is temporarily depressed, due to unusually warm weather in the western states where the sweaters are sold. This has made it necessary for the company to discount the selling price of the sweaters to $30 from the normal $40 price. Since the market for wool yarn has remained strong, the dispute has again surfaced over whether the yam should be sold outright rather than processed into sweaters. The sales manager thinks that the production of sweaters should be discontinued; she is upset about having to sell sweaters at a $2.50 loss when the yarn. Could be sold for a 4.00 profit. However, the production superintendent does not want to close down a large portion of the factory. He argues that the company is in the sweater business, not the yarn business, and that the company should focus on its core strength. All of the manufacturing overhead costs are fixed and would not be affected even if sweaters were discontinued. Manufacturing overhead is assigned to products on the basis of 150% of direct labor cost. Materials and direct labor costs are variable.

        Required:

        1. Would you recommend that the wool yarn be sold outright or processed into sweaters? Support your answer with appropriate computations and explain your reasoning.

        2. What is the lowest price that the company should accept for a sweater? Support your answer with appropriate computations and explain yourreasoning.

        the southern rail lines srl is considering replacing its power 278910

        The Southern Rail Lines (SRL) is considering replacing its power jack tamper, used to maintain track and roadbed, with a new automatic raising power tamper. SRL spent $18,000 five years ago for the present power jack tamper and estimated it to have a total life of 12 years. If SRL keeps the old tamper, it must overhaul the old tamper two years from now at a cost of $5,000. SRL can sell the old tamper for $2,500 now; the tamper will be worthless seven years from now.

        A new automatic raising tamper costs $23,000 delivered and has an estimated physical life of 12 years. SRL anticipates, however, that because of developments in maintenance machines, it should retire the new machine at the end of the seventh year for $5,000.

        Furthermore, the new machine will require an overhaul costing $10,000 at the end of the fourth year. The new equipment will reduce wages and fringe benefits by $4,000 per year. Track maintenance work is seasonal, so SRL normally uses the equipment only from May 1 through October 31 of each year. SRL transfers track maintenance employees to other work but pays them at the same rate for the rest of the year.

        The new machine will require $1,000 per year of maintenance, whereas the old machine requires $1,200 per year. Fuel consumption for the two machines is identical. SRL’s cost of capital is 12 percent per year, and because of operating losses, SRL pays no income tax.

        Should SRL purchase the new machine?

        the walton toy company manufactures a line of dolls and 278914

        The Walton Toy Company manufactures a line of dolls and a doll dress sewing kit. Demand for the dolls is increasing, and management requests assistance from you in determining an economical sales and production mix for the coming year. The company has provided the following data:



        The following additional information is available:

        (a) The company’s plant has a capacity of 130,000 direct labor hours per year on a single shift basis. The company’s present employees and equipment can produce all five products.

        (b) The direct labor rate of $8 per hour is expected to remain unchanged during the coming year.

        (c) Fixed costs total $520,000 per year. Variable overhead costs are $2 per direct labor hour.

        (d) All of the company’s nonmanufacturing costs are fixed.

        (e) The company’s finished goods inventory is negligible and can be ignored.

        Required:

        1. Determine the contribution margin per direct labor hour expended on each product.

        2. Prepare a schedule showing the total direct labor hours that will be required to produce the units estimated to be sold during the coming year.

        3. Examine the data you have computed in (1) and (2) above. How would you allocate the

        130,000 direct labor hours of capacity to Walton Toy Company’s various products?

        4. What is the highest price, in terms of a rate per hour, that Walton Toy Company would be willing to pay for additional capacity (that is, for added direct labor time)?

        5. Assume again that the company does not want to reduce sales of any product. Identify ways in which the company could obtain the additionaloutput.

        this problem continues the draper consulting situation 19 33 278918

        This problem continues the Draper Consulting, Inc., situation from Problem 19 33 of Chapter 19. Draper Consulting provides consulting service at an average price of $175 per hour and incurs variable costs of $100 per hour. Assume average fixed costs are $5,250 a month. Draper has developed new software that will revolutionize billing for companies. Draper has already invested $200,000 in the software. It can market the software as is at $30,000 a client and expects to sell to eight clients. Draper can develop the software further, adding integration to Microsoft products at an additional development cost of $120,000. The additional development will allow Draper to sell the software for $38,000 each, but to 20 clients.

        Requirement

        1. Should Draper sell the software as is or develop it further?

        troy engines ltd manufactures a variety of engines for use 278927

        Troy Engines, Ltd., manufactures a variety of engines for use in heavy equipment. The company has always produced all of the necessary parts for its engines, including all of the carburetors. An outside supplier has offered to sell one type of carburetor to Troy Engines, Ltd., for a cost of $35 per unit. To evaluate this offer, Troy Engines, Ltd., has gathered the following information relating to its own cost of producing the carburetor internally:

        *Onethird supervisory salaries; two thirds depreciation of special equipment

        (no resale value).



        Required:

        1. Assuming that the company has no alternative use for the facilities that are now being used to produce the carburetors, should the outside supplier’s offer be accepted? Show all computations.

        2. Suppose that if the carburetors were purchased, Troy Engines, Ltd., could use the freed capacity to launch a new product. The segment margin of the new product would be $150,000 per year. Should Troy Engines, Ltd., accept the offer to buy the carburetors for $35 per unit? Show allcomputations.

        accounting question 431270

        A company had revenue of $660,000, rent expense of $111,000, utility expense of $11,100, salary expense of $136,500, depreciation expense of $40,100, advertising expense of $41,300, dividends in the amount of $194,000, and an ending balance in retained earnings of $413,300. What is the appropriate journal entry to close income summary?

        A. Income summary $320,000
        Retained earnings $320,000
        B. Retained earnings $320,000
        Income summary $320,000
        C. Income summary $126,000
        Retained earnings $126,000
        D. Retained earnings $126,000
        Income summary $126,000
        E. Income summary $340,000
        Retained earnings $340,000
        Option A
        Option B
        Option C
        Option D
        Option E

        financial accounting acg 2021 431275

        A company had revenue of $690,000, rent expense of $114,000, utility expense of $11,400, salary expense of $139,500, depreciation expense of $40,400, advertising expense of $41,600, dividends in the amount of $197,000, and an ending balance in retained earnings of $416,300. What is the appropriate journal entry to close income summary?

        A. Income summary $343,100
        Retained earnings $343,100
        B. Retained earnings $343,100
        Income summary $343,100
        C. Income summary $146,100
        Retained earnings $146,100
        D. Retained earnings $146,100
        Income summary $146,100
        E. Income summary $346,900
        Retained earnings $346,900
        Option A
        Option B
        Option C
        Option D
        Option E

        accounting help asap work needs to be shown 431296

        A company’s planned activity level for next year is expected to be 200,000 machine hours. At this level of activity, the company budgeted the following manufacturing overhead costs:

        Variable Fixed

        Indirect materials $280,000 Depreciation $120,000

        Indirect labor 400,000 Taxes 20,000

        Factory supplies 40,000 Supervision 100,000

        A flexible budget prepared at the 160,000 machine hours level of activity would show total manufacturing overhead costs of

        a. $576,000.

        b. $720,000.

        c. $768,000.

        d. $816,000.

        A company developed the following per unit standards for its product: 2 pounds of direct materials at $4 per pound. Last month, 1,500 pounds of direct materials were purchased for $5,700. The direct materials price variance for last month was

        a. $5,700 favorable.

        b. $300 favorable.

        c. $150 favorable.

        d. $300 unfavorable.

        A company budgeted unit sales of 204,000 units for January, 2013 and 240,000 units for February, 2013. The company has a policy of having an inventory of units on hand at the end of each month equal to 30% of next month’s budgeted unit sales. If there were 61,200 units of inventory on hand on December 31, 2013, how many units should be produced in January, 2013 in order for the company to meet its goals?

        a. 214,800 units

        b. 204,000 units

        c. 193,200 units

        d. 276,000 units

        In the month of June, a department had 20,000 units in beginning work in process that were 70% complete. During June, 80,000 units were transferred into production from another department. At the end of June there were 10,000 units in ending work in process that were 40% complete. Materials are added at the beginning of the process, while conversion costs are incurred uniformly throughout the process. The equivalent units of production for materials for June were

        a. 90,000 equivalent units.

        b. 100,000 equivalent units.

        c. 104,000 equivalent units.

        d. 80,000 equivalent units.

        Mah, Inc. completed Job No. B14 during 2013. The job cost sheet listed the following:

        Direct materials $55,000

        Direct labor $30,000

        Manufacturing overhead applied $20,000

        Units produced 3,000 units

        Units sold 1,800 units

        How much is the cost of the finished goods on hand from this job?

        a. $105,000

        b. $63,000

        c. $42,000

        d. $51,000

        WORK NEEDS TO BE SHOWN!!!

        accounting prepare flexible budget report 431310

        Company uses a flexible budget for manufacturing overhead based on machine hours. Variable manufacturing overhead costs per machine hour are as follows:

        Indirect labor $5.00

        Indirect materials 2.50

        Maintenance 1.50

        Utilities .30

        Fixed overhead costs per month are:

        Supervision $800

        Insurance 200

        Property taxes 300

        Depreciation 900

        The company believes it will normally operate in a range of 2,000 to 4,000 machine hours per month. During the month of August, 2010, the company incurs the following manufacturing overhead costs:

        Indirect labor $14,000

        Indirect materials 8,100

        Maintenance 4,400

        Utilities 950

        Supervision 720

        Insurance 200

        Property taxes 300

        Depreciation 930

        Instructions

        Prepare a flexible budget report, assuming that the company used 3,000 machine hours during August.

        statement of cas flows 431340

        The comparative balance sheet of Posner Company, for 2011 and the preceding year ended December 31, 2010, appears below in condensed form:<?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” />

        Year Year 2011 2010 Cash $ 53,000 $ 50,000 Accounts receivable (net) 37,000 48,000 Inventories 108,500 100,000 Investments ….. 70,000 Equipment 573,200 450,000 Accumulated depreciation equipment (142,000) (176,000) $629,700 $542,000 Accounts payable $ 62,500 $ 43,800 Bonds payable, due 2011 ….. 100,000 Common stock, $10 par 325,000 285,000 Paid in capital in excess of par common stock 80,000 55,000 Retained earnings 162,200 58,200 $629,700 $542,000

        The income statement for the current year is as follows:

        Sales $625,700 Cost of merchandise sold 340,000 Gross profit $285,700 Operating expenses: Depreciation expense $26,000 Other operating expenses 68,000 94,000 Income from operations $191,700 Other income: Gain on sale of investment $ 4,000 Other expense: Interest expense 6,000 (2,000) Income before income tax $189,700 Income tax 60,700 Net income $129,000

        Additional data for the current year are as follows:

        (a) Fully depreciated equipment costing $60,000 was scrapped, no salvage, and equipment was purchased for $183,200. (b) Bonds payable for $100,000 were retired by payment at their face amount. (c) 5,000 shares of common stock were issued at $13 for cash. (d) Cash dividends declared and paid, $25,000.

        Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the indirect method of reporting cash flows from operating activities.

        statement of cash flows 431365

        The comparative balance sheet of Posner Company, for 2011 and the preceding year ended December 31, 2010, appears below in condensed form:

        media/f90/f9020e0c 6dff 4963 bda9 c3

        Additional data for the current year are as follows:

        1. Fully depreciated equipment costing $60,000 was scrapped, no salvage, and equipment was purchased for $183,200.
        2. Bonds payable for $100,000 were retired by payment at their face amount.
        3. 5,000 shares of common stock were issued at $13 for cash.
        4. Cash dividends declared and paid, $25,000.


        Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the indirect method of reporting cash flows from operating activities.

        accounting 431371

        A comparative balance sheet for Riabko Company containing data for the last two years is as follows:

        Riabko Company
        Comparative Balance Sheet
        This
        Year
        Last
        Year
        Assets
        Current assets:
        Cash and cash equivalents $ 92,000 $ 66,800
        Accounts receivable 632,000 662,500
        Inventory 633,200 441,000
        Prepaid expenses 26,800 15,500




        Total current assets 1,384,000 1,185,800




        Property, plant, and equipment 2,475,000 1,884,000
        Less accumulated depreciation 640,200 578,900




        Net property, plant, and equipment 1,834,800 1,305,100




        Long term investments 124,100 193,000




        Loans to subsidiaries 141,000 80,500




        Total assets $ 3,483,900 $ 2,764,400








        Liabilities and Stockholders’ equity
        Current liabilities:
        Accounts payable $ 903,600 $ 591,000
        Accrued liabilities 37,600 60,900
        Income taxes payable 160,300 134,800




        Total current liabilities 1,101,500 786,700
        Bonds payable 725,000 463,000




        Total liabilities 1,826,500 1,249,700




        Stockholders’ equity:
        Common stock 1,132,000 1,021,000
        Retained earnings 525,400 493,700




        Total stockholders’ equity 1,657,400 1,514,700




        Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 3,483,900 $ 2,764,400









        The following additional information is available about the company’s activities during this year:
        a. The company declared and paid a cash dividend this year.
        b. Bonds with a principal balance of $401,000 were repaid during this year.
        c. Equipment was sold during this year for $80,500. The equipment had cost $172,000 and had $65,200 in accumulated depreciation on the date of sale.
        d. Long term investments were sold during the year for $152,000. These investments had cost $68,900 when purchased several years ago.
        e. The subsidiaries did not repay any outstanding loans during the year.
        f. Riabko did not repurchase any of its own stock during the year.

        The company reported net income this year as follows:

        Riabko Company
        Income Statement
        Sales $ 3,420,000
        Cost of goods sold 2,120,400


        Gross margin 1,299,600
        Selling and administrative expenses 1,041,300


        Net operating income 258,300
        Non operating items:
        Gain on sale of investments $ 83,100
        Loss on sale of equipment 26,300 56,800




        Income before taxes 315,100
        Income taxes 101,000


        Net income $ 214,100





        Required:
        1.

        Using the indirect method, prepare a statement of cash flows for this year. (Amounts to be deducted and negative amounts should be indicated with a minus sign.)

        use my values so i can see steps worked out 431388

        Comparative financial statements for Heritage Antiquing Services for the fiscal year ending December 31 appear on the following page. The company did not issue any new common or preferred stock during the year. A total of 700 thousand shares of common stock were outstanding. The interest rate on the bond payable was 10%, the income tax rate was 40%, and the dividend per share of common stock was $1.00. The market value of the company’s common stock at the end of the year was $24. All of the company’s sales are on account.

        Heritage Antiquing Services
        Comparative Balance Sheet
        (dollars in thousands)
        This Year Last Year
        Assets
        Current assets:
        Cash $ 1,120 $ 1,270
        Accounts receivable, net 9,600 6,800
        Inventory 13,900 12,400
        Prepaid expenses 740 620






        Total current assets 25,360 21,090






        Property and equipment:
        Land 10,800 10,800
        Buildings and equipment, net 39,910 40,520






        Total property and equipment 50,710 51,320






        Total assets $ 76,070 $ 72,410












        Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
        Current liabilities:
        Accounts payable $ 20,500 $ 19,300
        Accrued payables 980 860
        Notes payable, short term 130 130






        Total current liabilities 21,610 20,290
        Long term liabilities:
        Bonds payable 9,500 9,500






        Total liabilities 31,110 29,790






        Stockholders’ equity:
        Preferred stock 1,000 1,000
        Common stock 700 700
        Additional paid in capital 4,000 4,000






        Total paid in capital 5,700 5,700
        Retained earnings 39,260 36,920






        Total stockholders’ equity 44,960 42,620






        Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 76,070 $ 72,410













        Heritage Antiquing Services
        Comparative Income Statement and Reconciliation
        (dollars in thousands)
        This Year Last Year
        Sales $ 71,340 $ 65,000
        Cost of goods sold 47,340 35,000






        Gross margin 24,000 30,000






        Selling and administrative expenses:
        Selling expenses 11,100 11,000
        Administrative expenses 6,800 6,400






        Total selling and administrative expenses 17,900 17,400






        Net operating income 6,100 12,600
        Interest expense 950 950






        Net income before taxes 5,150 11,650
        Income taxes 2,060 4,660






        Net income 3,090 6,990
        Dividends to preferred stockholders 50 310






        Net income remaining for common stockholders 3,040 6,680
        Dividends to common stockholders 700 700






        Net income added to retained earnings 2,340 5,980
        Retained earnings, beginning of year 36,920 30,940






        Retained earnings, end of year $ 39,260 $ 36,920













        Required:
        Compute the following financial data for short term creditors for this year:

        1.

        Working capital. (Enter your answer in thousands of dollars. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Working capital $

        2.

        Current ratio. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)

        Current ratio

        3.

        Acid test ratio. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)

        Acid test ratio

        4.

        Accounts receivable turnover. (Round your answer to 1 decimal place.)

        Accounts receivable turnover

        5.

        Average collection period. (Use 365 days in a year. Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 1 decimal place.)

        Average collection period days

        6.

        Inventory turnover. (Round your answer to 1 decimal place.)

        Inventory turnover

        7.

        Average sale period. (Use 365 days in a year. Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 1 decimal place.)

        Average sale period days

        Type your question here

        accounting 431439

        Compute the cost assigned to ending inventory using (a) FIFO, (b) LIFO, (c) weighted average, and (d)specific identification. For specific identification, the March 9 sale consisted of 55 units from beginning inventory and 185 units from the March 5 purchase; the March 29 sale consisted of 35 units from the March 18 purchase and 75 units from the March 25 purchase. (Due to rounding, the sum of Cost of Goods Sold and Ending inventory may not equal the Cost of Good available for sales. Round your weighted average cost to 3 decimal places. Round your final answers to nearest whole dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)


        Ending
        Inventory
        (a) FIFO $
        (b) LIFO $
        (c) Weighted average $
        (d) Specific identification $

        rev: 12_18_2012

        Compute gross profit earned by the company for each of the four costing methods. For specific identification, the March 9 sale consisted of 55 units from beginning inventory and 185 units from the March 5 purchase; the March 29 sale consisted of 35 units from the March 18 purchase and 75 units from the March 25 purchase. (Round your per unit costs to 3 decimal places and inventory balances and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)



        Gross profit FIFO$ LIFO$ Weighted average$ Specific identification$



        Cost of goods available for sale $
        Number of units available for sale units


        need answer for this accounting problem 431444

        The computer workstation furniture manufacturing that Santana Rey started in January is progressing well. As of the end of June, Business Solutions’ job cost sheets show the following total costs accumulated on three furniture jobs.

        Job 6.02 Job 6.03 Job 6.04
        Direct materials $ 1,500 $ 3,300 $ 2,700
        Direct labor 800 1,420 2,100
        Overhead 400 710 1,050

        Job 6.02 was started in production in May, and these costs were assigned to it in May: direct materials, $600; direct labor, $180; and overhead, $90. Jobs 6.03 and 6.04 were started in June. Overhead cost is applied with a predetermined rate based on direct labor costs. Jobs 6.02 and 6.03 are finished in June, and Job 6.04 is expected to be finished in July. No raw materials are used indirectly in June. (Assume this company’s predetermined overhead rate did not change over these months).

        Required:
        1.

        What is the cost of the raw materials used in June for each of the three jobs and in total? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Job 6.02 $
        Job 6.03
        Job 6.04

        Total $



        2.

        How much total direct labor cost is incurred in June? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Total direct labor $

        3.

        What predetermined overhead rate is used in June? (Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

        Predetermined overhead rate %

        4.

        How much cost is transferred to finished goods inventory in June? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Total transferred cost $

        relevant costs sunk costs product replacement decisions syd yo 278702

        Relevant costs, sunk costs, product replacement decisions Syd Young, the production manager at Fuchow Company, purchased a cutting machine for the company last year. Six months after the purchase of the cutting machine, Syd learned about a new cutting machine that is more reliable than the machine that he purchased. The following information is available for the two machines:

        ?

        Annual operating costs for the old machine are $140,000. The new machine will decrease annual operating costs by $60,000. These amounts do not include any charges for depreciation. Fuchow Company uses the straight line depreciation method. These estimates of operating costs exclude rework costs. The new machine will also result in a reduction in the defect rate from the current 5% to 2.5%. All defective units are reworked at a cost of $1 per unit. The company, on average, produces 100,000 units annually.

        (a) Should Syd Young replace the old machine with the new machine? Explain, listing all relevant costs.

        (b) What costs should be considered as sunk costs for this decision?

        (c) What other factors may affect Young’s decision?

        rianne company produces a light fixture with the following unit 278713

        Rianne Company produces a light fixture with the following unit cost:

        Direct materials ………………$2

        Direct labor ………………….. 1

        Variable overhead …………… 3

        Fixed overhead ………………. 2

        Unit cost ………………………$8

        The production capacity is 300,000 units per year. Because of a depressed housing market, the company expects to produce only 180,000 fixtures for the coming year. The company also has fixed selling costs totaling $500,000 per year and variable selling costs of $1 per unit sold. The fixtures normally sell for $12 each. At the beginning of the year, a customer from a geographic region outside the area normally served by the company offered to buy 100,000 fixtures for $7 each. The customer also offered to pay all transportation costs. Since there would be no sales commissions involved, this order would not have any variable selling costs.

        Required:

        1. Based on a quantitative (numerical) analysis, should the company accept the order?

        2. What qualitative factors might impact the decision? Assume that no other orders are expected beyond the regular business and the special order.

        romeros what s the story on clayton it didn t have a 278720

        Romeros:

        What’s the story on Clayton? It didn’t have a loss the previous year did it?

        Littlebear:

        No, the Clayton facility has had a nice profit every year since it was opened six years ago, but Clayton lost a big contract this year.

        Romeros:

        Why?

        Littlebear:

        One of our national competitors entered the local market and bid very aggressively on the contract. We couldn’t afford to meet the bid. Clayton’s costs—particularly their facility expenses—are just too high. When Clayton lost the contract, we had to lay off a lot of employees, but we could not reduce the fixed costs of the Clayton facility.

        Rameros:

        Why is Clayton’s facility expense so high? It’s a smaller facility than either Billings or Great Falls and yet its facility expense is higher.

        Littlebear:

        The problem is that we are able to rent suitable facilities very cheaply at Billings and Great Falls. No such facilities were available at Clayton; we had them built. Unfortunately, there were big cost overruns, The contractor we hired was inexperienced at this kind of work and in fact went bankrupt before the project was completed. After hiring another contractor to finish the work, we were way over budget. The large depreciation charges on the facility didn’t matter at first because we didn’t have much competition at the time and could charge premium prices.

        Rorneros:

        Well we can’t do that anymore. The Clayton facility will obviously have to be shut down. Its business can be shifted to the other two check processing centers in the region.

        Littlebear:

        I would advise against that. The $1,200,000 in depreciation at the Clayton facility is misleading. That facility should last indefinitely with proper maintenance. And it has no resale value; there is no other commercial activity around Clayton.

        Romeros:

        What about the other costs at Clayton?

        Littlebear:

        If we shifted Clayton’s business over to the other two processing centers in the region, we wouldn’t save anything on direct labor or variable overhead costs. We might save $90,000 or so in local administrative expense, but we would not save any regional administrative expense and corporate headquarters would still charge us 9.5% of our sales as corporate administrative expense.

        In addition, we would have to rent more space in Billings and Great Falls in order to handle the work transferred from Clayton; that would probably cost us at least $600,000 a year. And don’t forget that it will cost us something to move the equipment from Clayton to Billings and Great Falls. And the move will disrupt service to customers.

        Rorneros:

        I understand all of that, but a money losing processing center on my performance report is completely unacceptable.

        Littlebear:

        And if you shut down Clayton, you are going to throw some loyal employees out of work.

        Romeros:

        That’s unfortunate, but we have to face hard business realities.

        Littlebear:

        And you would have to write off the investment in the facilities at Clayton.

        Romeros:

        I can explain a write off to corporate headquarters; hiring an inexperienced contractor to build the Clayton facility was my predecessor’s mistake. But they’ll have my head at headquarters if I show operating losses every year at one of my processing centers. Clayton has to go. At the next corporate board meeting, I am going to recommend that the Clayton facility be closed.

        Required:

        1. From the standpoint of the company as a whole, should the Clayton processing center be shut down and its work redistributed to other processing centers in the region? Explain.

        2. Do you think Haley Romeros’s decision to shut down the Clayton facility is ethical? Explain.

        3. What influence should the depreciation on the facilities at Clayton have on prices charged by Clayton for itsservices?

        royal company manufactures 20 000 units of part r 3 each year 278721

        Royal Company manufactures 20,000 units of part R 3 each year for use on its production line. At this level of activity, the cost per unit for part R 3 follows:

        Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 4.80

        Direct labor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.00

        Variable manufacturing overhead. . . . . . . . . 3.20

        Fixed manufacturing overhead. . . . . . . . . . . 10.00

        Total cost per part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $25.00

        An outside supplier has offered to sell 20,000 units of part R 3 each year to Royal Company for $23.50 per part. If Royal Company accepts this offer, the facilities now being used to manufacture part R 3 could be rented to another company at an annual rental of $150,000. However, Royal Company has determined that $6 of the fixed manufacturing overhead being applied to part R 3 would continue even if part R 3 were purchased from the outside supplier.

        Required:

        Prepare computations showing how much profits will increase or decrease if the outside supplier’s offer is accepted.

        select two destinations for a one week vacation and gather info 278726

        Select two destinations for a one week vacation, and gather information about them from brochures, magazines, travel agents, the Internet, and friends. Then list the relevant quantitative and qualitative information in order of its importance to your decision. Analyze the information, and select a destination.

        Which factors were most important to your decision? Why? Which were least important? Why? How would the process of identifying relevant information differ if the president of your company asked you to prepare a budget for the next training meeting, to be held at a location of your choice?

        Your instructor will divide the class into groups and ask each group to discuss this case. One student from each group will summarize his or her group’s finding and debrief the entire class.

        semico is considering whether to add capacity to their microchip 278727

        Semico is considering whether to add capacity to their microchip fabrication plant. Adding capacity would cost $600M, to be paid in one year. The value of an added capacity plant depends on the demand for Semico’s chips. If demand is ?ohigh?? (25 percent chance), then the value of the added capacity plant would be $1,600M (one year from now). If demand is ?olow?? (75 percent chance), then the value of the added capacity plant would be $400M. If Semico chooses to keep the current capacity, then there is no incremental cost. If demand is ?ohigh?? (25 percent chance), then the value of the current capacity plant would be $600M (one year from now). If demand is ?olow?? (75 percent chance), then the value of the current capacity plant would be $400M. We will use the CAPM to estimate expected returns in this problem, where the expected market premium is 7 percent, and the riskfree rate is 5 percent.

        (a) Draw the decision tree for Semico’s problem, where its first decision (node 1) is whether to commit today to add capacity at a cost of $600M (to be paid in one year), or to wait one year until information about demand is revealed.

        (b) Suppose that Semico chooses to commit at node 1. Solve for the NPV of the project as a function of its beta. Compute this value in the special cases of ?2 5 1 and ?2 5 0.

        (c) Suppose that Semico chooses to wait at node 1. Use replication methods to solve for the NPV under the same cases as in part (b).

        (d) What is the value of the real option to wait?

        (e) Compute the risk neutral probabilities of high demand and low demand under the same cases as in part (b). Use these risk neutral probabilities to calculate the NPV of the project with flexibility. Verify that these NPVs are the same as found in part (c).

        shelf mix decision superstore is a large discount supermarket p 278729

        Shelf mix decision Superstore is a large discount supermarket. Profits have declined, so the manager has collected data on revenues and costs for different food categories. The following data pertain to some of the frozen foods that Superstore sells. To facilitate comparisons, the manager has listed average price and cost information for each category in equivalent square foot packages:

        ?



        The manager wants a maximum of 250 square feet devoted to the four categories in this table.

        Required

        (a) Given the manager’s constraints, and assuming that the store can sell whatever is displayed on the shelves, what shelf mix (i.e., what number of square feet for each category in the table) will maximize Superstore’s contribution margin from these four categories?

        (b) What other factors might the manager consider in deciding on the amount of shelf space percategory?

        shenista inc produces four products alpha beta gamma and de 278730

        Shenista Inc. produces four products (Alpha, Beta, Gamma, and Delta) from a common input. The joint costs for a typical quarter follow:

        Direct materials ……………$95,000

        Direct labor ……………….. 43,000

        Overhead …………………. 85,000

        The revenues from each product are as follows: Alpha, $100,000; Beta, $93,000; Gamma, $30,000; and Delta, $40,000. Management is considering processing Delta beyond the split off point, which would increase the sales value of Delta to $75,000. However, to process Delta further means that the company must rent some special equipment that costs $15,400 per quarter. Additional materials and labor also needed will cost $8,500 per quarter.

        Required:

        1. What is the operating profit earned by the four products for one quarter?

        2. Should the division process Delta further or sell it at split off? What is the effect of the decision on quarterly operating profit?

        silven industries which manufactures and sells a highly success 278736

        Silven Industries, which manufactures and sells a highly successful line of summer lotions and insect repellents, has decided to diversify in order to stabilize sales throughout the year. A natural area for the company to consider is the production of winter lotions and creams to prevent dry and chapped skin.

        After considerable research, a winter products line has been developed. However, Silven’s president has decided to introduce only one of the new products for this coming winter. If the product is a success, further expansion in future years will be initiated.

        The product selected (called Chap Off) is a lip balm that will be sold in a lipstick type tube. The product will be sold to wholesalers in boxes of 24 tubes for $8 per box. Because of excess capacity, no additional fixed manufacturing overhead costs will be incurred to produce the product. However, a $90,000 charge for fixed manufacturing overhead will be absorbed by the product under the company’s absorption costing system.

        Using the estimated sales and production of 100,000 boxes of Chap Off, the Accounting Department has developed the following cost per box:



        The costs above include costs for producing both the lip balm and the tube that contains it. As an alternative to making the tubes, Silven has approached a supplier to discuss the possibility of purchasing the tubes for Chap Off. The purchase price of the empty tubes from the supplier would be $1.35 per box of 24 tubes. If Silven Industries accepts the purchase proposal, direct labor and variable manufacturing overhead costs per box of Chap Off would be reduced by 10% and direct materials costs would be reduced by 25%.

        Required:

        1. Should Silven Industries make or buy the tubes? Show calculations to support your answer.

        2. What would be the maximum purchase price acceptable to Silven Industries? Explain.

        3. Instead of sales of 100,000 boxes, revised estimates show a sales volume of 120,000 boxes. At this new volume, additional equipment must be acquired to manufacture the tubes at an annual rental of $40,000. Assuming that the outside supplier will not accept an order for less than 100,000 boxes, should Silven Industries make or buy the tubes? Show computations to support your answer.

        4. Refer to the data in (3) above. Assume that the outside supplier will accept an order of any size for the tubes at $1.35 per box. How, if at all, would this change your answer? Show computations.

        5. What qualitative factors should Silven Industries consider in determining whether they should make or buy thetubes?

        sketch cost graphs for the following situations a a 30 278743

        Sketch cost graphs for the following situations:

        a. A 30 percent increase in fixed costs will enable Donelan Company to produce up to 75 percent more. Variable costs per unit will remain unchanged.

        b. Refer to part a. What if Donelan Company’s variable costs per unit triple for the additional units it intends to produce?

        c. Richmond’s variable marketing costs per unit decline as more units are sold.

        d. Anderson Paper pays a flat fixed charge per month for electricity plus an additional rate of $0.20 per unit for all consumption over the first 2,000 units.

        e. Indirect labor costs at KMD Bank consist only of supervisors’ salaries. The bank needs

        one supervisor for every 20 clerks.

        f. National Plastics currently operates close to capacity. A short run increase in production would result in increasing unit costs for every additional unit produced.

        smith petroleum has spent 204 000 to refine 62 000 gallons of 278748

        Smith Petroleum has spent $204,000 to refine 62,000 gallons of petroleum distillate, which can be sold for $6.40 a gallon. Alternatively, Smith can process the distillate further and produce 56,000 gallons of cleaner fluid. The additional processing will cost $1.75 per gallon of distillate. The cleaner fluid can be sold for $9.00 a gallon. To sell the cleaner fluid, Smith must pay a sales commission of $0.13 a gallon and a transportation charge of $0.18 a gallon.

        Requirements

        1. Diagram Smith’s decision alternatives, using Exhibit 20 26 as a guide.

        2. Identify the sunk cost. Is the sunk cost relevant to Smith’s decision?

        3. Should Smith sell the petroleum distillate or process it into cleaner fluid? Show the expected net revenue difference between the two alternatives.

        smooth move company manufactures professional paperweights and h 278750

        Smooth Move Company manufactures professional paperweights and has been approached by a new customer with an offer to purchase 15,000 units at a per unit price of $7.00. The new customer is geographically separated from Smooth Move’s other customers, and existing sales will not be affected. Smooth Move normally produces 82,000 units but plans to produce and sell only 65,000 in the coming year. The normal sales price is $12 per unit. Unit cost information is as follows:

        Direct materials ………………….$3.00

        Direct labor ……………………… 2.25

        Variable overhead ………………. 1.15

        Fixed overhead ………………….. 1.80

        Total ……………………………..$8.20

        The customer wants to have its company logo affixed to each paperweight using a label. Smooth Move would have to purchase a special logo labeling machine that will cost $14,000. The machine will be able to label the 15,000 units and then it will be scrapped (with no further value). No other fixed overhead activities will be affected.

        special order pricing shorewood shoes company makes and sells a 278763

        Special order pricing Shorewood Shoes Company makes and sells a variety of leather shoes for children. For its current mix of different models and sizes, the average selling price and costs per pair of shoes are as follows:

        ITEM AMOUNT

        Price…………………………………………… $20

        Costs:

        Direct materials………………………………… $6

        Direct labor……………………………………… 4

        Variable manufacturing overhead………………. 2

        Variable selling costs…………………………… 1

        Fixed overhead………………………………….. 3

        Total costs…………………………………….. $16

        Shoes are manufactured in batch sizes of 100 pairs. Each batch requires 5 machine hours to manufacture. The plant has a total capacity of 4,000 machine hours per month, but current monthly production consumes only about 80% of the capacity.

        A discount store has approached Shorewood to buy 10,000 pairs of shoes next month. It has requested that the shoes bear its own private label. Embossing the private label will cost Shorewood an additional $0.50 per pair. However, no variable selling costs will be incurred for fulfilling this special order.

        Required

        Determine the minimum (floor) price that Shorewood Shoes should charge for this order. What other considerations are relevant in this decision?

        spectra inc produces semiconductors of which part no 200 is 278765

        Spectra, Inc., produces semiconductors of which part no. 200 is a subassembly. Spectra, Inc., currently produces part no. 200 in its own shop. The Alta Company offers to supply it at a cost of $200 per 500 units. An analysis of the costs Spectra incurs producing part no. 200 reveals the following information:

        Cost per 500 Units

        Direct (Variable) Material ………………………………………………………… $80

        Direct (Variable) Labor ……………………………………………………………… 90

        Other Variable Costs …………………………………………………………………. 25

        Fixed Costs a ……………………………………………………………………………… 50

        Total ……………………………………………………………………………………… $245

        aFixed overhead comprises largely depreciation on general purpose equipment and factory buildings.

        Management of Spectra, Inc., needs your advice in answering the following questions:

        a. Should Spectra, Inc., accept the offer from Alta if Spectra’s plant is operating well below capacity?

        b. Should the offer be accepted if Alta reduces the price to $180 per 500 units?

        c. Suppose Spectra can find other profitable uses for the facilities it now uses in turning out part no. 200. How would that fact affect the price Spectra is willing to pay Alta?

        stenback builders builds 1 500 square foot starter tract homes i 278802

        Stenback Builders builds 1,500 square foot starter tract homes in the fast growing suburbs of Atlanta. Land and labor are cheap, and competition among developers is fierce. The homes are a standard model, with any upgrades added by the buyer after the sale. Stenback Builders’ costs per developed sub lot are as follows:

        Land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 59,000

        Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 124,000

        Landscaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 6,000

        Variable marketing costs . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 5,000

        Stenback Builders would like to earn a profit of 14% of the variable cost of each home sale. Similar homes offered by competing builders sell for $208,000 each.

        Requirements

        1. Which approach to pricing should Stenback Builders emphasize? Why?

        2. Will Stenback Builders be able to achieve its target profit levels?

        3. Bathrooms and kitchens are typically the most important selling features of a home. Stenback Builders could differentiate the homes by upgrading the bathrooms and kitchens. The upgrades would cost $22,000 per home but would enable Stenback Builders to increase the selling prices by $38,500 per home. (Kitchen and bathroom upgrades typically add about 175% of their cost to the value of any home.) If Stenback Builders makes the upgrades, what will the new cost plus price per home be? Should the company differentiate its product in this manner?

        steve murningham manager of an electronics division was consid 278808

        Steve Murningham, manager of an electronics division, was considering an offer by Pat Sellers, manager of a sister division. Pat’s division was operating below capacity and had just been given an opportunity to produce 8,000 units of one of its products for a customer in a market not normally served. The opportunity involves a product that uses an electrical component produced by Steve’s division. Each unit that Pat’s division produces requires two of the components. However, the price that the customer is willing to pay is well below the price that is usually charged; to make a reasonable profit on the order, Pat needs a price concession from Steve’s division. Pat had offered to pay full manufacturing cost for the parts. So Steve would know that everything was above board, Pat supplied the following unit cost and price information concerning the special order, excluding the cost of the electrical component:

        Selling price ……………………$32

        Less costs:

        Direct materials ……….. 17

        Direct labor ……………. 7

        Variable overhead …….. 2

        Fixed overhead ……….. 3

        Operating profit ……………… $ 3

        The normal selling price of the electrical component is $2.30 per unit. Its full manufacturing cost is $1.85 ($1.05 variable and $0.80 fixed). Pat argued that paying $2.30 per component would wipe out the operating profit and result in her division showing a loss. Steve was interested in the offer because his division was also operating below capacity (the order would not use all the excess capacity).

        Required:

        1. Should Steve accept the order at a selling price of $1.85 per unit? By how much will his division’s profits be changed if the order is accepted? By how much will the profits of Pat’s division change if Steve agrees to supply the part at full cost?

        2. Suppose that Steve offers to supply the component at $2. In offering this price, Steve says that it is a firm offer, not subject to negotiation. Should Pat accept this price and produce the special order? If Pat accepts the price, what is the change in profits for Steve’s division?

        3. Assume that Steve’s division is operating at full capacity and that Steve refuses to supply the part for less than the full price. Should Pat still accept the special order? Explain.

        superior markets inc operates three stores in a large 278812

        Superior Markets, Inc., operates three stores in a large metropolitan area. A segmented absorption costing income statement for the company for the last quarter is given below:



        The North Store has consistently shown losses over the past two years. For this reason, management is giving consideration to closing the store. The company has asked you to make a recommendation as to whether the store should be closed or kept open. The following additional information is available for your use:

        (a)The breakdown of the selling and administrative expenses is as follows:





        (b) The lease on the building housing the North Store can be broken with no penalty.

        (c) The fixtures being used in the North Store would be transferred to the other two stores if the North Store were closed.

        (d)The general manager of the North Store would be retained and transferred to another position in the company if the North Store were closed. She would be filling a position that would otherwise be filled by hiring a new employee at a salary of $11,000 per quarter. The general manager of the North Store would be retained at her normal salary of $12,000 per quarter. All other employees in the store would be discharged.

        (e) The company has one delivery crew that serves all three stores. One delivery person could be discharged if the North Store were closed. This person’s salary is $4,000 per quarter. The delivery equipment would be distributed to the other stores. The equipment does not wear out through use, but does eventually become obsolete.

        (e) The company’s employment taxes are 15% of salaries.

        (f) One third of the insurance in the North Store is on the store’s fixtures.

        (g)The ?oGeneral office salaries?? and ?oGeneral office—other?? relate to the overall management of Superior Markets, Inc. If the North Store were closed, one person in the general office could be discharged because of the decrease in overall workload. This person’s compensation is $6,000 per quarter.

        Required:

        1. Prepare a schedule showing the change in revenues and expenses and the impact on the company’s overall net operating income that would result if the North Store were closed.

        2. Assuming that the store space can’t be subleased, what recommendation would you make to the management of Superior Markets, Inc.?

        3. Disregard requirement 2. Assume that if the North Store were closed, at least one fourth of its sales would transfer to the East Store, due to strong customer loyalty to Superior Markets. The East Store has enough capacity to handle the increased sales. You may assume that the increased sales in the East Store would yield the same gross margin as a percentage of sales as present sales in that store. What effect would these factors have on your recommendation concerning the North Store? Show all computations to support youranswer.

        suppose that ebv decides to consider six possible structures for 278831

        Suppose that EBV decides to consider six possible structures for the Series A stock in Exercise 8.2:

        Structure I: The original structure considered in Exercise 8.2: 6M shares of CP.

        Structure II: 6M shares of common.

        Structure III: RP + 6M shares of common.

        Structure IV: PCP with participation as if 6M shares of common.

        Structure V: PCPC with participation as if 6M shares of common, with liquidation return capped at 5 times OPP.

        Structure VI: RP ($4M APP) 15M shares of CP ($2M APP).

        Structures IV and V have mandatory conversion upon a QPO, where a QPO is any offering of at least $5 per common share and $15M of proceeds. For the purpose of solving this problem, assume that any exit above $5 per share will qualify as a QPO (i.e., acquisitions for at least $5 per common share would also be considered to be QPOs).

        Draw an exit diagram for each structure.

        suppose that the following four funds all with committed capital 278838

        Suppose that the following four funds—all with committed capital of $100M—have combined to form a syndicate to invest in Newco:

        (I) ABC Fund, management fees of 2.5 percent per year of committed capital for all

        10 years.

        (II) DEF Fund, management fees of 2.5 percent per year for the first 5 years, then decreasing by 25 basis points per year in each year from 6 to 10. All fees calculated based on committed capital.

        (III) UVW fund, management fees of 2.0 percent per year. During the first 5 years of the fund, these fees are charged based on committed capital. Beginning in year 6, the fees are charged based on net invested capital. UVW expects to be fully invested by the beginning of year 6, and also to have realized 25 percent of all investment capital by this time. In each of the subsequent 5 years, UVW expects to realize about 15 percent of all investment capital.

        (IV) XYZ fund, management fees of 2.0 percent per year of committed capital for all 10 years. The XYZ fund expects to make all exits very quickly and to reinvest capital back into new investments. The total amount of investments is limited to $100M.

        (a) Suppose that each fund in the syndicate invests $5M in Newco. What is the LP cost for each fund?

        (b) It is possible that all four funds could agree on all the assumptions to the VC method, but still disagree about the wisdom of making this investment. Explain the economic logic behind this possibility.

        the controller of a german machine tool company believed that 278855

        The controller of a German machine tool company believed that historical cost depreciation was inadequate for assigning the cost of using expensive machinery to individual parts and products. Each year, he estimated the replacement cost of each machine and included depreciation based on the machine’s replacement cost in the machine hour rate used to assign machine expenses to the parts produced on that machine. Additionally, the controller included an interest charge, based on 50% of the machine’s replacement value, into the machine hour rate. The interest rate was an average of the three to five year interest rate on government and high grade corporate securities.

        As a consequence of these two decisions (charging replacement cost rather than historical cost and imputing a capital charge for the use of capital equipment), the product cost figures used internally by company managers were inconsistent with the numbers that were needed for inventory valuation for financial and tax reporting. The accounting staff had to perform a tedious reconciliation process at the end of each year to back out the interest and replacement value costs from the cost of goods sold and inventory values before they could prepare the financial statements.

        Required

        (a) Why would the controller introduce additional complications into the company’s costing system by assigning replacement value depreciation costs and imputed interest costs to the company’s parts and products?

        (b) Why should management accountants create extra work for the organization by deliberately adopting policies for internal costing that violate the generally accepted accounting principles that must be used for external reporting?

        accounting 430490

        Cairns owns 70 percent of the voting stock of Hamilton, Inc. The parent%u2019s interest was acquired several years ago on the date that the subsidiary was formed. Consequently, no goodwill or other allocation was recorded in connection with the acquisition. Cairns uses the equity method in its internal records to account for its investment in Hamilton.

        On January 1, 2010, Hamilton sold $1,900,000 in 10 year bonds to the public at 110. The bonds had a cash interest rate of 8 percent payable every December 31. Cairns acquired 45 percent of these bonds at 92 percent of face value on January 1, 2012. Both companies utilize the straight line method of amortization.

        Prepare the consolidation worksheet entries to recognize the effects of the intra entity bonds at each of the following dates.

        calculate profitability and liquidity measures 430516

        Calculate profitability and liquidity measures [LO 3, 4, 6]

        Presented here are the comparative balance sheets of Hames, Inc., at December 31, 2011 and 2010. Sales for the year ended December 31, 2011, totaled $590,000.

        Hames, Inc.,
        Balance Sheets
        December 31, 2011 and 2010
        2011 2010
        Assets
        Cash $ 21,000 $ 19,000
        Accounts receivable 78,000 72,000
        Merchandise inventory 103,000 99,000
        Total current assets

        $202,000

        $190,000

        Land 50,000 40,000
        Plant and equipment 125,000 110,000
        Less: Accumulated depreciation (65,000 ) (60,000 )
        Total assets

        $312,000

        $280,000

        Liabilities
        Short term debt $18,000 $17,000
        Accounts payable 64,800 75,000
        Other accrued liabilities

        20,000

        18,000

        Total current liabilities $102,800 $110,000
        Long term debt 22,000 30,000
        Total liabilities

        $124,800

        $140,000

        Owners%u2019 Equity
        Common stock, no par, 100,000 shares authorized
        40,000 and 25,000 shares issued, respectively

        $ 74,000

        $ 59,000

        Retained earnings:
        Beginning balance $108,000 $85,000
        Net income for the year 25,200 1,000
        Dividends for the year (20,000 ) (5,000 )
        Ending balance

        $113,200

        $81,000

        Total owners%u2019 equity

        $187,200

        $140,000

        Total liabilities and owners%u2019 equity

        $312,000

        $280,000


        Requirement 1:
        Calculate ROI for 2011. (Round your percentage answer to two decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)
        ROI %

        Requirement 2:

        Calculate ROE for 2011. (Round your percentage answer to one decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

        ROE %
        Requirement 3:

        Calculate working capital at December 31, 2011. (Round your answer to the nearest whole number. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Working capital $
        Requirement 4:

        Calculate the current ratio at December 31, 2011. (Round your answer to two decimal places.)

        Current ratio

        Requirement 5:

        Calculate the acid test ratio at December 31, 2011. (Round your answer to two decimal places.)

        Acid test ratio

        chapter 8 calgon products a distributor of organic beverages needs a cash budget for 430535

        Calgon Products, a distributor of organic beverages, needs a cash budget for September. The following information is available:

        a. The cash balance at the beginning of September is $10,900.
        b. Actual sales for July and August and expected sales for September are as follows:

        July August September
        Cash sales $ 5,800 $ 4,500 $ 8,300
        Sales on account 19,000 34,000 37,000






        Total sales $ 24,800 $ 38,500 $ 45,300













        Sales on account are collected over a three month period as follows: 10% collected in the month of sale, 60% collected in the month following sale, and 28% collected in the second month following sale. The remaining 2% is uncollectible.

        c.

        Purchases of inventory will total $30,000 for September. Thirty percent of a month’s inventory purchases are paid for during the month of purchase. The accounts payable remaining from August’s inventory purchases total $19,000, all of which will be paid in September.

        d. Selling and administrative expenses are budgeted at $14,000 for September. Of this amount, $4,000 is for depreciation.
        e. Equipment costing $19,000 will be purchased for cash during September, and dividends totaling $4,000 will be paid during the month.
        f. The company maintains a minimum cash balance of $6,900. An open line of credit is available from the company’s bank to bolster the cash balance as needed.
        Required:
        1. Prepare a schedule of expected cash collections for September. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Schedule of Expected Cash Collections
        September cash sales $
        September collections on account:
        July sales
        August sales
        September sales

        Total cash collections $



        2.

        Prepare a schedule of expected cash disbursements for inventory purchases for September. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Schedule of Expected Cash Disbursements
        Payments to suppliers:
        August purchases $
        September purchases

        Total cash payments $



        3.

        Prepare a cash budget for September. Indicate in the financing section any borrowing that will be needed during September. Assume that any interest will not be paid until the following month. (Input all amounts as positive values except cash deficiency, repayments and interest which should be indicated by a minus sign. Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Calgon Products
        Cash Budget
        For the Month of September
        Cash balance, beginning $
        Add cash receipts:
        Collections from customers

        Total cash available before current financing
        Less disbursements:
        Payments to suppliers for inventory $
        Selling and administrative expenses
        Equipment purchases
        Dividends paid

        Total disbursements

        Excess (deficiency) of cash available over disbursements

        Financing:
        Borrowings
        Repayments
        Interest

        Total financing

        Cash balance, ending $

        capp corporation is a wholesaler of industrial goods data regarding the store s oper 430555

        Capp Corporation is a wholesaler of industrial goods. Data regarding the store’s operations follow:

        %u2022

        Sales are budgeted at $460,000 for November, $470,000 for December, and $450,000 for January.

        %u2022

        Collections are expected to be 55% in the month of sale, 42% in the month following the sale, and 3% uncollectible.

        %u2022 The cost of goods sold is 60% of sales.
        %u2022

        The company desires an ending merchandise inventory equal to 35% of the following month’s cost of goods sold. Payment for merchandise is made in the month following the purchase.

        %u2022 The November beginning balance in the accounts receivable account is $81,000.
        %u2022 The November beginning balance in the accounts payable account is $268,000.

        Required:
        a.

        Prepare a Schedule of Expected Cash Collections for November and December. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Capp Corporation
        Schedule of Expected Cash Collections
        November December
        Sales $ $
        Schedule of Expected Cash Collections
        Accounts receivable $
        November sales $
        December sales


        Total cash collections $ $





        b.

        Prepare a Merchandise Purchases Budget for November and December. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Capp Corporation
        Merchandise Purchases Budget
        November December
        Budgeted cost of goods sold $ $
        (Click to select) Deduct Add : (Click to select) Beginning merchandise inventory Desired ending merchandising inventory


        Total needs
        (Click to select) Add Deduct : (Click to select) Beginning merchandise inventory Desired ending merchandising inventory


        Required purchase $ $

        decision makers of 2013 430559

        Carbon Corporation had a $2,000,000 contract to build a small hospital with total costs estimated at $1,600,000.It received the following payments and incurred the following expenses over the three year contract period:

        Under the percentage of completion method, how much profit should Carbon recognize in year 1?

        Year

        Payments

        Expenses

        1

        $ 400,000

        $300,000

        2

        $1,200,000

        $900,000

        3

        $ 400,000

        $550,000

        advanced managerial and cost accounting 430614

        Case 3 62

        FiberCom, Inc., a manufacturer of fiber optic communications equiptment, uses a job order costing system. Since the production process is heavily automated, manufacturing voverhead is applied on the basis of machine hours using a predetermined overhead rate. The current annual rate of $15 per machine hour is based on budget manufacturing overhead costs of $1,200,000 and a budgeted activity level of 80,000 machine hours (the company’s estimated practical capacity). Operations for the year have been completed, and all accounting entries have been made for the year except the application of manufacturing overhead to the jobs worked on during December, and transfer of costs from work in Precess to Finished Goods for the jobs completed in December, and the transfer of costs from Finished Goods to Cost of Goods Sold for the jobs that have been sold during December. Summarized data as of November 30 and the month of December are Presented in the following table. Jobs T11 007, N11 013, and N11 015 were completed during December. All Completed jobs except job N11 013 had been turned over to customers by the close of business on December 31.

        Work in Process December Activity

        Job No. Balance November 30 Direct Material Direct Labor Machine Hours

        T11 007 $ 87,000 $ 1,500 $ 4,500 300

        N11 013 $ 55,000 4,000 $ 12,000 1,000

        N11 015 $ 0 25,600 26,700 1,400

        D12 002 0 37,900 20,000 2,500

        D12 003 0 26,000 16,800 800

        Total $142,000 $95,000 $80,000 600

        Operating Activity: Activity through November 30 December Activity

        Actual Manufacturing Overhed Occured:

        Indirect Material $ 125,000 $ 9,000

        Indirect Labor $ 345,000 30,000

        Utilities $ 245,000 22,000

        Depreciation $ 385,000 35,000

        Total Overhead $ 1,100,000 96,000

        Other Data:

        Raw Material Purchases $ 965,000 $ 98,000

        Direct Labor costs $ 845,000 $ 80,000

        Machine hours 73,000 6,000

        Accounts Balances at Beginning of Year January 1

        Raw Material Inventory $105,000

        Work in Process 60,000

        Finished Goods Inventory 125,000

        Note: Raw material purchases and raw material inventory consist of both direct and indirect materials. The balance of the Raw Material Inventory account as of December 31, of the year just completed is $85,000.

        Required:

        2. How much manafacturing overhead would FiberCom have applied to jobs through November 30 of the year just completed?

        3. How much manufacturing overhead would have been applied to jobs during December of the year just completed?

        4. Determined the amount by which manafacturing overhead is overapplied or underapplied as of December 31 of the year

        completed.

        5. Determined the balance in the Finish Goods Inventory account on December 31, of the year just completed.

        6. Prepare a Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured for FiberCom, Inc., for the year just completed. (Hint: In computing the cost of direct material used, remember that Fibercom includes both direct and indirect material in its Raw Material Inventory Account).

        management accounting 430639

        media/61d/61d16b59 e159 438b 821d 6f

        media/754/754208b2 1ad3 4be0 b7b3 9a

        Cash dividends were $1. The company sold equipment for $15 that was originally purchased for $5 and that had accumulated depreciation of $5.

        Required:

        Determine the net cash provided by (used in) operating activities for the year using the indirect method.

        acct 430644

        CASH FLOWS PROBLEM:

        Kite Corporation, a merchandiser, recently completed its calendar year 2011 operations. For theyear,

        (1) all sales are credit sales, (2) all credits to Accounts Receivable reflect cashreceipts from customers,

        (3) all purchases of inventory are on credit, (4) all debits to Accounts Payable reflect cash payments for inventory, and (5) Other Expenses are paid in advance and are initially debited to Prepaid Expenses. The company’s balance sheets and income statement follow. Prepare a statement of cash flows in good form.

        Joseph Corporation Comparative Balance Sheet December 31, 2011 and 2010

        Assets

        Cash

        $ 136,500.00

        $ 71,550.00

        Accounts Receivable

        $ 74,100.00

        $ 90,750.00

        Merchandise Inventory

        $ 454,500.00

        $ 490,200.00

        Prepaid Expenses

        $ 17,100.00

        $ 19,200.00

        Equipment

        $ 278,250.00

        $ 216,000.00

        Accumulated Depreciation $ (108,750.00) $ (93,000.00)

        Total Assets $ 851,700.00 $ 794,700.00

        Liabilities and Equity

        Accounts Payable

        $ 117,450.00

        $ 123,450.00

        Short term Notes Payable

        $ 17,250.00

        $ 11,250.00

        Long term Notes Payable

        $ 112,500.00

        $ 82,500.00

        Common Stock, $5 par

        $ 465,000.00

        $ 450,000.00

        Paid in Capital in excess

        $ 18,000.00

        Retained Earnings $ 121,500.00 $ 127,500.00

        Total Liabilities & Equity $ 851,700.00 $ 794,700.00

        accounting 430655

        Cash and Receivables at cost $50,000 (Fair Value $50,000; Inventory at cost $120,000 (Fair value $125,000); Buildings and equipment net at cost $200,000 (Fair Value $240,000); Liabilities at cost $100,000 (Fair Value $100,000). Based on the preceding information, the differential reflected in a consolidation worksheet to prepare a consolidated balance sheet immediately after the business combination is:

        $0.

        $25,000.

        $70,000.

        $45,000.

        capital budgeting and managerial accounting 430692

        Cayman Products manufactures and sells to wholesalers approximately 300,000 packages per year of underwater markers at $4 per package. Annual costs for the production and sale of this quantity are shown in the table.

        Direct materials $ 384,000
        Direct labor 96,000
        Overhead 288,000
        Selling expenses 120,000
        Administrative expenses 80,000


        Total costs and expenses $ 968,000





        A new wholesaler has offered to buy 50,000 packages for $3.44 each. These markers would be marketed under the wholesaler%u2019s name and would not affect Cayman Products%u2019 sales through its normal channels. A study of the costs of this additional business reveals the following:

        %u2022 Direct materials costs are 100% variable.
        %u2022

        Per unit direct labor costs for the additional units would be 50% higher than normal because their production would require overtime pay at one and one half times the usual labor rate.

        %u2022

        25% of the normal annual overhead costs are fixed at any production level from 250,000 to 400,000 units. The remaining 75% of the annual overhead cost is variable with volume.

        %u2022 Accepting the new business would involve no additional selling expenses.
        %u2022 Accepting the new business would increase administrative expenses by a $4,000 fixed amount.

        Complete the three column comparative income statement that shows the following:

        Annual operating income without the special order.
        Annual operating income received from the new business only.
        Combined annual operating income from normal business and the new business.

        jasper and crewella dahvill were married in year 0 they filed joint tax returns in y 430960

        Jasper and Crewella Dahvill were married in year 0. They filed joint tax returns in years 1 and 2. In year 3, their relationship was strained and Jasper insisted on filing a separate tax return. In year 4, the couple divorced. Both Jasper and Crewella filed single tax returns in year 4. In year 5, the IRS audited the couple’s joint year 2 tax return and each spouse’s separate year 3 tax returns. The IRS determined that the year 2 joint return and Crewella’s separate year 3 tax return understated Crewella’s self employment income causing the joint return year 2 tax liability to be understated by $4,000 and Crewella’s year 3 separate return tax liability to be understated by $6,000. The IRS also assessed penalties and interest on both of these tax returns. Try as it might, the IRS has not been able to locate Crewella, but they have been able to find Jasper.

        advanced accounting 431035

        Chapman Company obtains 100 percent of Abernethy Company’s stock on January 1, 2012. As of that date, Abernethy has the following trial balance:

        Debit Credit
        Accounts payable $ 52,800
        Accounts receivable $ 49,500
        Additional paid in capital 50,000
        Buildings (net) (4 year life) 174,000
        Cash and short term investments 84,000
        Common stock 250,000
        Equipment (net) (5 year life) 315,000
        Inventory 137,500
        Land 90,500
        Long term liabilities (mature 12/31/15) 188,500
        Retained earnings, 1/1/12 323,600
        Supplies 14,400





        Totals $ 864,900 $ 864,900











        During 2012, Abernethy reported income of $129,000 while paying dividends of $16,000. During 2013, Abernethy reported income of $176,000 while paying dividends of $38,000.

        Assume that Chapman Company acquired Abernethy’s common stock for $731,110 in cash. Assume that the equipment and long term liabilities had fair values of $338,650 and $156,340, respectively, on the acquisition date. Chapman uses the initial value method to account for its investment.

        Prepare consolidation worksheet entries for December 31, 2012, and December 31

        General Journal Debit Credit
        Dec. 31, 2012
        Entry S (Click to select)Additional Paid In CapitalInvestment in AbernethyCommon Stock AbernethyDepreciation ExpenseDividends PaidEquipmentInterest ExpenseRetained Earnings, 1/1/12
        (Click to select)Depreciation ExpenseCommon Stock AbernethyInvestment in AbernethyDividends PaidRetained Earnings, 1/1/12Interest ExpenseAdditional Paid In CapitalEquipment
        (Click to select)Interest ExpenseCommon Stock AbernethyInvestment in AbernethyRetained Earnings, 1/1/12EquipmentAdditional Paid In CapitalDividends PaidDepreciation Expense
        (Click to select)Dividends PaidInvestment in AbernethyCommon Stock AbernethyRetained Earnings, 1/1/12GoodwillDividend IncomeAdditional Paid In CapitalInterest Expense
        Entry A (Click to select)Depreciation ExpenseEquipmentLong Term LiabilitiesInvestment in AbernethyRetained Earnings, 1/1/12Dividends PaidCommon Stock AbernethyGoodwill
        (Click to select)Depreciation ExpenseLong Term LiabilitiesEquipmentInvestment in AbernethyGoodwillDividends PaidRetained Earnings, 1/1/12Common Stock Abernethy
        (Click to select)Depreciation ExpenseLong Term LiabilitiesCommon Stock AbernethyInvestment in AbernethyEquipmentGoodwillRetained Earnings, 1/1/12Dividends Paid
        (Click to select)Interest ExpenseInvestment in AbernethyDepreciation ExpenseRetained Earnings, 1/1/12Long Term LiabilitiesDividend IncomeDividends PaidGoodwill
        Entry I (Click to select)Dividend IncomeGoodwillInvestment in AbernethyLong Term LiabilitiesEquipmentDividends PaidRetained Earnings, 1/1/12Additional Paid In Capital
        (Click to select)Dividends PaidLong Term LiabilitiesRetained Earnings, 1/1/12Investment in AbernethyGoodwillEquipmentAdditional Paid In CapitalDividend Income
        Entry E (Click to select)Depreciation ExpenseLong Term LiabilitiesAdditional Paid In CapitalInvestment in AbernethyInterest ExpenseRetained Earnings, 1/1/12EquipmentGoodwill
        (Click to select)GoodwillAdditional Paid In CapitalInvestment in AbernethyInterest ExpenseEquipmentRetained Earnings, 1/1/12Long Term LiabilitiesDepreciation Expense
        (Click to select)GoodwillLong Term LiabilitiesDepreciation ExpenseDividends PaidInterest ExpenseDividend IncomeInvestment in AbernethyEquipment
        (Click to select)Long Term LiabilitiesGoodwillEquipmentDividend IncomeDividends PaidInvestment in AbernethyInterest ExpenseDepreciation Expense
        Dec. 31, 2013
        Entry *C (Click to select)Interest ExpenseGoodwillEquipmentDividend IncomeCommon Stock AbernethyRetained Earnings, 1/1/13Dividends PaidInvestment in Abernethy
        (Click to select)Investment in AbernethyLong Term LiabilitiesRetained Earnings, 1/1/13Interest ExpenseDividend IncomeGoodwillCommon Stock AbernethyDividends Paid
        Entry S (Click to select)Depreciation ExpenseEquipmentRetained Earnings, 1/1/13Common Stock AbernethyGoodwillLong Term LiabilitiesAdditional Paid In CapitalInvestment in Abernethy
        (Click to select)Common Stock AbernethyInvestment in AbernethyAdditional Paid In CapitalEquipmentDepreciation ExpenseGoodwillLong Term LiabilitiesRetained Earnings, 1/1/13
        (Click to select)EquipmentGoodwillCommon Stock AbernethyInvestment in AbernethyAdditional Paid In CapitalRetained Earnings, 1/1/13Long Term LiabilitiesDepreciation Expense
        (Click to select)Investment in AbernethyDepreciation ExpenseCommon Stock AbernethyDividend IncomeRetained Earnings, 1/1/13Additional Paid In CapitalDividends PaidInterest Expense
        Entry A (Click to select)Common Stock AbernethyDepreciation ExpenseEquipmentInvestment in AbernethyAdditional Paid In CapitalGoodwillLong Term LiabilitiesRetained Earnings, 1/1/13
        (Click to select)GoodwillInvestment in AbernethyCommon Stock AbernethyRetained Earnings, 1/1/13Additional Paid In CapitalLong Term LiabilitiesEquipmentDepreciation Expense
        (Click to select)Investment in AbernethyAdditional Paid In CapitalDepreciation ExpenseEquipmentRetained Earnings, 1/1/13Long Term LiabilitiesCommon Stock AbernethyGoodwill
        (Click to select)Investment in AbernethyGoodwillDividends PaidEquipmentLong Term LiabilitiesDividend IncomeInterest ExpenseRetained Earnings, 1/1/13
        Entry I (Click to select)GoodwillDividends PaidLong Term LiabilitiesEquipmentAdditional Paid In CapitalDividend IncomeRetained Earnings, 1/1/13Investment in Abernethy
        (Click to select)Long Term LiabilitiesEquipmentInterest ExpenseGoodwillDividends PaidAdditional Paid In CapitalRetained Earnings, 1/1/13Dividend Income
        Entry E (Click to select)Interest ExpenseEquipmentDepreciation ExpenseCommon Stock AbernethyLong Term LiabilitiesDividends PaidInvestment in AbernethyDividend Income
        (Click to select)Long Term LiabilitiesDividends PaidCommon Stock AbernethyInvestment in AbernethyInterest ExpenseDepreciation ExpenseDividend IncomeEquipment
        (Click to select)Additional Paid In CapitalRetained Earnings, 1/1/13EquipmentInvestment in AbernethyInterest ExpenseGoodwillDepreciation ExpenseLong Term Liabilities
        (Click to select)GoodwillEquipmentAdditional Paid In CapitalDepreciation ExpenseLong Term LiabilitiesRetained Earnings, 1/1/13Interest ExpenseInvestment in Abernethy

        check my workreferencesebook & resources

        eBook: Subsequent Consolidations Investment Recorded Using Initial Value or Partial Equity Method
        Worksheet Difficulty: 3 Hard
        Problem 3 21 [LO4b] Learning Objective: 03 04b Prepare consolidated financial statements subsequent to acquisition when the parent has applied the initial value method in its internal records.
        eBook: Subsequent Consolidations Investment Recorded Using Initial Value or Partial Equity Method
        Worksheet Difficulty: 3 Hard
        Problem 3 21 [LO4b] Learning Objective: 03 04b Prepare consolidated financial statements subsequent to acquisition when the parent has applied the initial value method in its internal records.

        accounting exercise 2 and 1 431060

        Chapter 3 Exercise 2

        2. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
        Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:

        Materials and supplies used

        Brass $75,000

        Repair parts 16,000

        Machine lubricants 9,000

        Wages and salaries Machine operators 128,000

        Production supervisors 64,000

        Maintenance personnel 41,000

        Other factory overhead Variable 35,000

        Fixed 46,000

        Sales commissions 20,000

        Compute:

        a. Total direct materials consumed

        b. Total direct labor

        c. Total prime cost

        d. Total conversion cost

        Chapter 3 Exercise 1

        1. Product costs and period costs

        The costs that follow were extracted from the accounting records of several different manufacturers:

        1. Weekly wages of an equipment maintenance worker

        2. Marketing costs of a soft drink bottler

        3. Cost of sheet metal in a Honda automobile

        4. Cost of president’s subscription to Fortune magazine

        5. Monthly operating costs of pollution control equipment used in a steel mill

        6. Weekly wages of a seamstress employed by a jeans maker

        7. Cost of compact discs (CDs) for newly recorded releases of Rush, Billy Joel, and Bryan Adams

        a. Determine which of these costs are product costs and which are period costs.

        b. For the product costs only, determine those that are easily traced to the finished product and those that are not.

        Please answer all parts from both questions for full credit . Also, please show steps. Thank you very much

        managerial accounting help homework 431125

        Climate Control, Inc., manufactures a variety of heating and air conditioning units. The company is currently manufacturing all of its own component parts. An outside supplier has offered to sell a thermostat to Climate Control for $31 per unit. To evaluate this offer, Climate Control, Inc., has gathered the following information relating to its own cost of producing the thermostat internally:

        Per Unit 14,600 Units
        per year
        Direct materials $ 9 $ 131,400
        Direct labor 11 160,600
        Variable manufacturing overhead 2 29,200
        Fixed manufacturing overhead, traceable 6* 87,600
        Fixed manufacturing overhead, common, but allocated 13 189,800




        Total cost $ 41 $ 598,600









        *40% supervisory salaries; 60% depreciation of special equipment (no resale value).

        Required:
        1a.

        Assuming that the company has no alternative use for the facilities now being used to produce the thermostat, compute the total cost of making and buying the parts. (Round your Fixed manufacturing overhead per unit rate to two decimals and your final answers to the nearest dollar amount.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Make Buy
        Total relevant cost (14,600 units) $ $

        1b. Should the outside supplier’s offer be accepted?
        Reject
        Accept

        2a.

        Suppose that if the thermostats were purchased, Climate Control, Inc., could use the freed capacity to launch a new product. The segment margin of the new product would be $116,360 per year. Compute the total cost of making and buying the parts. (Round your Fixed manufacturing overhead per unit rate to two decimals and your final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Make Buy
        Total relevant cost (14,600 units) $ $

        profitability of order opportunity cost and capacity hudson hy 278651

        Profitability of order, opportunity cost, and capacity Hudson Hydronics, Inc., is a corporation based in Troy, New York, that sells high quality hydronic control devices. It manufactures two products, HCD1 and HCD2, for which the following information is available:

        ?

        The average wage rate including fringe benefits is $20 per hour. The plant has a capacity of 15,000 direct labor hours, but current production uses only 14,000 direct labor hours of capacity. Hudson can, if desired, hire additional direct labor up to its capacity of 15,000 direct labor hours.

        Required

        (a) A new customer has offered to buy 200 units of HCD2 if Hudson lowers its price to $400 per unit. How many direct labor hours will be required to produce 200 units of HCD2? How much will Hudson Hydronic’s profit increase or decrease if it accepts this proposal? (Assume all other prices will remain as before.)

        (b) Suppose the customer has offered instead to buy 300 units of HCD2 at $400 per unit. How much will the profits increase or decrease if Hudson accepts this proposal? Assume that the company cannot increase its production capacity beyond 15,000 direct labor hours.

        (c) Answer the question in part b assuming that the plant can work overtime. Direct labor costs for the overtime production increase to $30 per hour. Variable overhead costs for overtime production are 50% more than for normalproduction.

        profits have been decreasing for several years at pegasus airlin 278655

        Profits have been decreasing for several years at Pegasus Airlines. In an effort to improve the company’s performance, consideration is being given to dropping several flights that appear to be unprofitable. A typical income statement for one round trip of one such flight (flight 482) is as follows:



        The following additional information is available about flight 482:

        (a)Members of the flight crew are paid fixed annual salaries, whereas the flight assistants are paid based on the number of round trips they complete.

        (b)One third of the liability insurance is a special charge assessed against flight 482 because in the opinion of the insurance company, the destination of the flight is in a ?ohigh risk?? area. The remaining two thirds would be unaffected by a decision to drop flight 482.

        (c)The baggage loading and flight preparation expense is an allocation of ground crews’ salaries and depreciation of ground equipment. Dropping flight 482 would have no effect on the company’s total baggage loading and flight preparation expenses.

        (d) If flight 482 is dropped, Pegasus Airlines has no authorization at present to replace it with another flight.

        (e) Aircraft depreciation is due entirely to obsolescence. Depreciation due to wear and tear is negligible.

        (f) Dropping flight 482 would not allow Pegasus Airlines to reduce the number of aircraft in its fleet or the number of flight crew on its payroll.

        Required:

        1. Prepare an analysis showing what impact dropping flight 482 would have on the airline’s profits.

        2. The airline’s scheduling officer has been criticized because only about 50% of the seats on Pegasus’ flights are being filled compared to an industry average of 60%. The scheduling officer has explained that Pegasus’ average seat occupancy could be improved considerably by eliminating about 10% of its flights, but that doing so would reduce profits. Explain how this couldhappen.

        rainbow cruises operates a week long cruise tour through the haw 278668

        Rainbow Cruises operates a week long cruise tour through the Hawaiian Islands. Passengers currently pay $1,800 for a two person cabin, which is an all inclusive price that includes food, beverages, and entertainment. The current cost to Rainbow per two person cabin is $1,440 for the week long cruise, and at this cost, Rainbow is able to earn the minimum profit margin needed to operate the business. Rainbow competes with two other cruise lines and, to date, $1,800 has been the prevailing market price for the week long cruises. Each cruise line provides exactly the same services to their passengers, but recently one of Rainbow’s competitors found a way to permanently lower its price to $1,500 per two person cabin.

        Required:

        a. At a new market price of $1,500 per two person cabin, calculate the target cost that will allow Rainbow to earn the same profit margin percentage it currently earns.

        b. Calculate the target cost reduction that Rainbow must achieve if it expects to remain competitive.

        c. Describe several cost reduction initiatives that Rainbow might explore to achieve its target cost reduction requirements.

        ramanan inc has performed cost studies and projected the foll 278669

        Ramanan, Inc., has performed cost studies and projected the following annual costs based on 200,000 units of production and sales:

        Total Annual Costs (200,000 units)

        Direct Material …………………………………………………………………… $ 400,000

        Direct Labor…………………………………………………………………………. 360,000

        Manufacturing Overhead……………………………………………………….. 300,000

        Selling, General, and Administrative……………………………………….. 200,000

        Total………………………………………………………………………………… $1,260,000

        a. Compute Ramanan’s unit selling price that will yield a profit of $300,000, given sales of 200,000 units.

        b. Assume management selects a selling price of $8 per unit. Compute Ramanan’s dollar sales that will yield a projected 20 percent profit on sales, assuming variable costs per unit are 60 percent of the selling price per unit and fixed costs are $420,000.

        refer to problems 33 and 34 brazil brewery hired an 278686

        Refer to problems 33 and 34. Brazil Brewery hired an engineering consulting firm to perform an engineering estimate of beer production costs. The consulting firm came up with the following monthly cost estimates based on information for the current period:

        Facilities costs……………………………………………. $26,008.00

        Beer production level costs…………………………..$13.5 per hL produced

        Raw materials costs……………………………………..$0.70 per kg consumed

        Batch level costs………………………………………… $60 per batch

        Water costs………………………………………………… $0.90 per hL consumed

        CIP costs…………………………………………………… $18.5 per CIP performed

        New product costs………………………………………. $500 per new product

        Required:

        Assuming the following level of cost driver volume for a month, what is the estimated cost using the engineering estimates? (Don’t forget to include the facilities costs in your estimate.)

        1,650…………………………….. hL of beer produced

        25,500…………………………… kg of raw materials consumed

        100……………………………….. Batches

        10,800…………………………… hL of water consumed

        120……………………………….. CIPs

        1…………………………………… New product

        relevant and sunk costs don baxter s 6 year old impala requires 278695

        Relevant and sunk costs Don Baxter’s 6 year old Impala requires repairs estimated at $5,400 to make it roadworthy again. His friend Aaron Bloom suggested that he buy a 6 year old Ford Escort instead for $5,400 cash. Aaron estimated the following costs for the two cars:

        ?



        Required

        (a) What costs should the decision maker consider as sunk costs?

        (b) List all relevant costs and when they are incurred.

        (c) What should the plant manager do? Why? Required

        (a) What costs are relevant and what costs are not relevant to this decision? Why?

        (b) What should Don do? Explain.

        (c) What quantitative and qualitative factors are relevant to his decision? Why?

        accounting assume that as in requirement 7 a proposal is received from an outside su 429879

        Assume that, as in requirement 7 a proposal is received from an outside supplier who will make and ship high style pens directly to the Clas Company’s customers as sales orders are forwarded from Class’s sales staff. If the supplier’s offer is accepted, the present plant facilities will be used to make a new pen whose unit costs will be:

        Variable manufacturing costs $5.00

        Fixed manufacturing costs 1.00

        Variable Marketing costs 2.00

        Fixed marketing costs for the new pen .50

        Total fixed manufacturing overhead will be unchanged from the original level given at the beginning of the problem. Fixed marketing costs for the new pens are over and above the fixed marketing costs incurred for the marketing the high style pens at the beginning of the problem. The new pen will sell for $9. The minimum desired operating income on the two pens taken together is $50,000 per year. What is the maximim purchase cost per unit that the Class Company should be willing to pay for subcontracting the production of the high style pens.

        accounting homework help please 429951

        Austin Company is investigating four different investment opportunities. Information on the four projects under study is given below:

        Project Number

        1 2 3 4
        Investment required $ (450,000 ) $ (400,000 ) $ (300,000 ) $ (420,000 )
        Present value of cash inflows at a 10% discount rate 584,550 482,460 324,750 533,500












        Net present value $ 134,550 $ 82,460 $ 24,750 $ 113,500
























        Life of the project 11 years 22 years 11 years 8 years
        Internal rate of return 16% 13% 12% 17%

        Because the company’s required rate of return is 10%, a 10% discount rate has been used in the present value computations above. Limited funds are available for investment, so the company can’t accept all of the available projects.

        1.

        Compute the project profitability index for each investment project. (Round your answers to 3 decimal places.)

        Project Profitability
        Index
        1
        2
        3
        4

        comparison of dividends and redemptions 429987

        Bailey is one of four equal unrelated shareholders of Checker Corporation. Bailey has held Checker stock for four years and has a basis in her stock of $40,000. Checker has $280,000 of current and accumulated E&P and distributies $100,000 to Bailey.

        a. What are the tax consequences to Checker and to Bailey if Bailey is an individual and the distribution is treated as a dividend?

        b. In part a, what would be the tax consequences if Bailey were a corporation?

        c. What are the tax consquences to checker and to Bailey (an individual) if Bailey surrenders all her stock in a redemption qualifying for sale treatment?

        d. In part c, what would be the tax consequences if Bailey were a corporation?

        e. Which treatment would Bailey prefer if Baily were an individual? Which treatment would Baily Corporation prefer?

        cost of production and journal entries 430007

        Balance debit credit Debit Credit

        Jan 1. Bal,. 5,200 units, 20% completed 11,648

        31 Direct materials, 27,700 units 38,780 50,428

        31 Direct labor 11,700 62,128 31 Factory overhead 6,576 69.704

        31 Goods transferred, 30,900 units ? ?

        31 Bal., 2,000 units, 30% completed ?

        1a. Prepare the january journal entry for paper,aking dept for the materials charged to production.

        work in progress 38780 material pulp 38780

        2a. Prepare the january journal entry for the papermaking dept for the conversion costs charged to production.

        work in progress 18276 wages payable 11700 factory overhead 6576

        3a. Prepare january journal entry for papermaking dept for the completed production transferred to the converting dept.

        work in progress converting dept ? work in progress papermaking dept ?

        1b. Determine the work in process paper making dept. Jan 31 balance

        I need help with 3a and 1b. What are the forumlas? Please help I have been trying for four days now. Please do not post a spread sheet. I really need to know how to use the forumla. Thank you

        show below is a selected information from the financial statement of rentsch inc a r 430032

        from the balance sheet cash…………………………………………………………………………….. $30,000 accounts receivable……………………………………………………..150,000 inventory ……………………………………………………………………….200,000 plant assets(net of accumulated depreciation)…………….. 500,000 current liabilities…………………………………………………………….150,000 total stockholder’s equity………………………………………………..300,000 total assets……………………………………………………………………..1,000,000 from the income statement: net sales………………………………………………………………………….$1,500,000 costs of goods sold………………………………………………………….1,080,000 operating expenses…………………………………………………………. 315,000 interest expenses…………………………………………………………….. 84,000 income tax expenses………………………………………………………….6,000 net income………………………………………………………………………….15,000 From the statement of cash flows: net cash provided by operating activities (including interest paid of $79,000)……………………………………….$40,000 net cash used in investing activities……………………………………..(46,000) Financing activities: Amounts borrowed…………………………………………….$50,000 Repayment of amounts borrowed………………………(14,000) Dividends paid…………………………………………………..(20,000) Net cash provided by financing activities………………………….16,000 Net increase in cash during the year…………………………………….$10,000 Instructions: a) explain how the interest expense shown in the income statement could be $84,000, when the interest payment appearing in the statement of cash flows is only $79,000. b)Compute the following (round to one decimal place): 1. current ratio 2. Quick ratio 3. Working capital 4. Debt ratio c) comment on these measurements and evaluate Rentsch, Inc.’s short term debt paying ability. d)Computed the following ratios (assume that the year end amounts of total assets and total stockholders’ equity also represent the average amounts throughout the year): 1. return on assets 2. return on equity. e) comment on the company’s performance under these measurements. explain why the return on assets and return on equity are so different. f) Discuss (1) the apparent safety of long term creditor’s claims and (2) the prospect for Rentsch, Inc., continuing payments at the present level.

        direct material and direct labor variances 430054

        Barker Production Company has developed the following

        standards

        for one of its products.

        STANDARD VARIABLE COST CARD

        One Unit of Product

        Materials: 30 square feetAfA?A??cAf?cAc€A!A?¬Af?cAc‚¬ $5 per square foot $150.00

        Direct labor: 16 hours $7 perh hour 112.00

        Variable manufacturing overhead: 16 hours x$5 per hour 80.00

        Total standard variable cost per unit $342.00

        The company records materials price variances at the time of

        purchase. The following activity occurred during the month

        of

        April:

        Materials purchased: AfA?Ac€A! 80,000 sq. feet at $5.30 per

        sq. foot

        Materials used: 74,000 square feet

        Units produced 2,500 units

        Direct labor: AfA?Ac€A! 42,000 hours at $6.70 per hour

        Required:

        Prepare an excel spreadsheet that details the

        following(

        be sure to indicate Favorable or Unfavaorable):


        a.Calculate the direct materials price variance

        and

        provide 1 possible cause of this variance.


        b.Calculate the direct materials usage variance

        and

        provide 1 possible cause of this variance.


        c.Calculate the direct labor rate variance and provide

        1

        possible cause of this variance.


        d.Calculate the direct labor efficiency variance

        and

        provide one possible cause of this vaiance..

        financial accounting 430084

        Based on the following information, determine the current ratio, assuming all accounts have a normal balance?

        Cash $6,924
        Accounts receivable 13,903
        Office supplies 2,795
        Land 37,170
        Office equipment 14,552
        Accounts payable 6,293
        Common stock 54,507
        Dividends 2,017
        Consulting fees earned 13,735
        Rent expense 3,690
        Salaries expense 6,659
        Telephone expense 577
        Miscellaneous expense 297
        Retained earnings ?
        14.08
        0.27
        1.74
        1.19
        3.75

        cost accounting 430115

        at the begining of the month kitcken craft corporation had two jobs in process that had the following costs assigned from prevouse months

        Job No Direct labor applied overhead

        X10 $ 1280 ?

        X12 840 ?

        during the month jobs X10 and X12 were completed but not billed to customers the completion cost for X10 required$ 1400 in direct labor and X12 $ 4000 in direct labor used

        during the month a new job z 14 was started but not finished it was only new job total cost of work that is not dirictly traced to particular jobs including copying, printing and travel cost to meet with clients, overhead is applied at rate 50 percent of direct labor costs for this and prevouse periods actual overhead for the month was $ 3900

        required

        cost of job X10 and X12 at the begining of month and when completed

        what is the cost of job Z at the end of the month and how much was the manufacturingoverhead variance for the month

        accounting 2 cash distribution schedule 430168

        The Best Company at December 31 has cash $20,000, noncash assets $100,000, liabilities $55,000, and the following capital balances: Rodriguez $45,000 and Escobedo $20,000. The firm is liquidated, and $110,000 in cash is received for the noncash assets. Rodriguez and Escobedo income ratios are 60% and 40%, respectively. Complete the cash distribution schedule The Best Company Schedule of Cash Payments (Chart like set up) Item Cash + Noncash Assests = Liabilities + Rodriguez, Capital + Escobeo, Caspital Balances before liquidation X + X = X + X + X Sale of noncash assests and X + X = X + X + X allocation of gain New balances X + X = X + X + X Pay Liabilities X + X = X + X + X New Balances X + X = X + X + X Cash distribution to partners X + X = X + X + X Final Balances X + X = X + X + X

        sleight of hand or the real deal 430173

        Blair Chemical has three divisions. Its consumer products division continually faces strong competition from companies in foreign countries. At the most recent senior management meeting, John Hampstead, head of the division, reported that his division’s sales for the year were expected to come in below the break even point. When the final results for the year were reported, Seaborn Blair, the company president, was surprised to learn that the consumer products division actually reported a profit in excess of $200,000.

        Assuming the role of John Hampstead, you have been invited to the president’s office to share your insight on this puzzling circumstance, and prior to the meeting, you need to prepare an analysis to explain the results.

        Explain how you would address the inconsistency. Use information from this unit’s readings as well as any necessary outside research. Be sure to cite your sources.

        Please help with answers that are within the question.

        bonds 430189

        Blue mountain Power Company obtained authorization to issue 20 year bonds with a face value of $10 million. The bonds are dated May 1, 2011 and have a contract rate of interest of 10%. They pay interest on November 1 and May 1. The bonds were issued on August 1,2011, at 100 plus three months’ accrued interest.

        Prepare the necessary journal entries in general journal form on:

        a. August 1,2011, to record the issuance of the bonds

        b. November 1, 2011, to record the first semiannual interest payment on the bond issued

        c. December 31,2011, to record interest expense accrued through year end. (Round to the nearest dollar)

        d. May 1,2012, to record the second semiannual interest payment (Round to the nearest dollar)

        e. What was the prevailing market rate of interest on the date that the bonds were issued? Explain.

        garrett wolfe company has the following balances in selected acc 430292

        Garrett Wolfe Company has the following balances in selected accounts on December 31, 2012.

        Accounts Receivable $ 0

        Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment 0

        Equipment 7,000

        Interest Payable 0

        Notes Payable 10,000

        Prepaid Insurance 2,100

        Salaries and Wages Payable 0

        Supplies 2,450

        Unearned Service Revenue 30,000

        All the accounts have normal balances. The information below has been gathered at December 31, 2012.

        1. Garrett Wolfe Company borrowed $10,000 by signing a 12%, one year note on September 1, 2012.

        2. A count of supplies on December 31, 2012, indicates that supplies of $900 are on hand.

        3. Depreciation on the equipment for 2012 is $1,000.

        4. Garrett Wolfe Company paid $2,100 for 12 months of insurance coverage on June 1, 2012.

        5. On December 1, 2012, Garrett Wolfe collected $30,000 for consulting services to be performed from December 1, 2012, through March 31, 2013.

        6. Garrett Wolfe performed consulting services for a client in December 2012. The client will be billed $4,200.

        7. Garrett Wolfe Company pays its employees total salaries of $9,000 every Monday for the preceding 5 day week (Monday through Friday). On Monday, December 29, employees were paid for the week ending December 26. All employees worked the last 3 days of 2012.

        Instructions

        Prepare adjusting entries for the seven items described above.

        flexible budgets and standard costing 430307

        “border: 0px; height: 0px; margin: 0px; padding: 0px; width: 707px”>

        Success SystemsAfA?A??cAf?cAc€A!A?¬Af?cAc€A3A??c second quarter 2010 fixed

        budget performance report for its computer furniture operations

        follows. The $156,000 budgeted expenses include $108,000 in

        variable expenses for desks and $18,000 in variable expenses for

        chairs, as well as $30,000 fixed expenses. The actual expenses

        include $31,000 fixed expenses. Prepare a flexible budget

        performance report that shows any variances between budgeted

        results and actual results. List fixed and variable expenses

        separately.

        AfA?Ac€A!

        “http://s3.amazonaws.com/answer board image/3abf535b 8338 4733 baa6 be3ebd159dd8.jpeg” />

        AfA?Ac€A!

        Explanation in excel would be greatly appreciated.

        help 430312

        “border: 0px; height: 0px; margin: 0px; padding: 0px; width: 707px”>

        At a total cost of $660,000, Penn Corporation acquired 60,000

        shares of Teller Corp. common stock as a long term investment. Penn

        Corporation uses the equity method of accounting for this

        investment. Teller Corp. has 200,000 shares of common stock

        outstanding, including the shares acquired by Penn

        Corporation.

        Journalize the entries by Penn Corporation to record the following

        information:

        a. Teller Corp. reports net income of $940,000 for the current

        period.

        b. A cash dividend of $2.50 per common share is paid by Teller

        Corp. during the current period.

        c. Why is the equity method appropriate for the Teller Corp.

        investment?

        accounting 202 430350

        Bovine Company, a wholesale distributor of DVDs, has been experiencing losses for some time, as shown by its most recent monthly contribution format income statement below:

        Sales $ 1,500,000
        Variable expenses 588,000


        Contribution margin 912,000
        Fixed expenses 945,000


        Net operating loss $ (33,000)





        In an effort to isolate the problem, the president has asked for an income statement segmented by geographic market. Accordingly, the Accounting Department has developed the following data:

        Geographic Market

        South Central North
        Sales $ 400,000 $ 600,000 $ 500,000
        Variable expenses as a percentage of sales 52 % 30 % 40 %
        Traceable fixed expenses $ 240,000 $ 330,000 $ 200,000

        Required:
        1.

        Prepare a contribution format income statement segmented by geographic market, as desired by the president. (Input all amounts as positive values except losses which should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Geographic Market

        Total
        Company
        South Central North
        $ $ $ $








        $ $ $







        $



        2a.

        The company%u2019s sales manager believes that sales in the Central geographic market could be increased by 15% if monthly advertising were increased by $25,000. Calculate the incremental net operating income. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Incremental net operating income $

        2b. Would you recommend the increased advertising?
        Yes
        No

        need help with this quick 430359

        Bill Braddock is considering opening a fast %u2018n Clean car Service Center. He estimates that the following costs will be incurred during his first year of operations: Rent $9,200, Depreciation on equipment $7,000, Wages $16,400, Motor oil $2.00 per quart. He estimates that each oil change will require 5 quarts of oil. Oil filters will cost $3.00 each. He must also pay the Fast n%u2019 Clean Corporation a franchise fee of $1.10 per oil change, since he will operate the business as a franchise. In addition, utility costs are expected to behave in relation to the number of oil changes as follows:

        Number of oil changes Utility cost

        4,000 $ 6,000

        6,000 $ 7,300

        9,000 $ 9,600

        12,000 $ 12,600

        14,000 $ 15,000

        Bill Braddock anticipates that he can provide the oil change service with a filter at $ 25 each.

        (A) Using the high and low method, determine variable costs per unit and total fixed costs.

        (B) Determine the break even point in number of oil changes and sales dollars.

        (C) Without regard to your answers in part A and B, determine the oil changes required to earn net income of $20,000, assuming fixed costs are $32,000 and the contribution margin per unit is $8.

        please show all working.

        i need help to solve this problem 430374

        Breakeven Analysis and Planning Future Sales

        P9. PeerlessCompanyhasamaximumcapacityof500,000unitsperyear.Variable manufacturing costs are $25 per unit. Fixed overhead is $900,000 per year. Vari able selling and administrative costs are $5 per unit, and fixed selling and adminis trative costs are $300,000 per year. The current sales price is $36 per unit.

        Required

        1. What is the breakeven point in (a) sales units and (b) sales dollars?

        2. How many units must Peerless Company sell to earn a profit of $600,000

          per year?

        3. Astrikeatoneofthecompany%u2019smajorsuppliershascausedashortageofmate

          rials, so the current year%u2019s production and sales are limited to 400,000 units. To partially offset the effect of the reduced sales on profit, management is plan ning to reduce fixed costs to $1,000,000. Variable cost per unit is the same as last year. The company has already sold 30,000 units at the regular selling price of $36 per unit.

          a. What amount of fixed costs was covered by the total contribution mar gin of the first 30,000 units sold?

          b. What contribution margin per unit will be needed on the remaining 370,000 units to cover the remaining fixed costs and to earn a profit of $300,000 this year?

        managerial accounting 430401

        Brown Company has two service departments,

        Maintenance and Personnel. Brown Company also has two

        production

        departments, Mixing and Finishing. Maintenance costs are

        allocated

        based on square footage while personnel costs are allocated

        based

        on number of employees. The following information has been

        gathered

        for the current year.

        “text decoration:underline;”>Maintenance

        Personnel

        Mixing

        Finishing

        Direct

        costs

        $126,000

        $84,000

        $105,000

        $175,000

        Square

        footage

        800

        400

        1,600

        1,200

        Number of

        employees

        8

        12

        24

        32

        If the direct method is used to allocate

        service department costs, then the total cost of the

        Finishing

        Department after allocation would be ______________.

        “font size:12pt;font family:Arial;”>

        need answer 430439

        Business Solutions’ second quarter 2012 fixed budget performance report for its computer furniture operations follows. The $156,000 budgeted expenses include $108,000 in variable expenses for desks and $18,000 in variable expenses for chairs, as well as $30,000 fixed expenses. The actual expenses include $31,000 fixed expenses.

        Fixed Budget Actual Results Variances
        Desk sales (in units) 144 150
        Chair sales (in units) 72 80
        Desk sales (in dollars) $ 180,000 $ 186,000 $ 6,000 F
        Chair sales (in dollars) $ 36,000 $ 41,200 $ 5,200 F
        Total expenses $ 156,000 $ 163,880 $ 7,880 U
        Income from operations $ 60,000 $ 63,320 $ 3,320 F

        Prepare a flexible budget performance report that shows any variances between budgeted results and actual results. List fixed and variable expenses separately. (Input all amounts as positive values. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        BUSINESS SOLUTIONS
        Flexible Budget Performance Report
        For Quarter Ended June 30
        Flexible Budget Actual Results Variances
        (Click to select)Flexible budget salesBudgeted selling priceDesk salesFixed expensesIncome from operations $ $ $ (Click to select)FUNone
        (Click to select)Income from operationsBudgeted selling priceFixed expensesChair salesFlexible budget sales (Click to select)UNoneF
        (Click to select)Flexible budget salesIncome from operationsVariable expensesFixed expensesBudgeted selling price (Click to select)FUNone



        (Click to select)Contribution marginGross margin (Click to select)UNoneF
        (Click to select)Income from operationsChair salesFixed expensesDesk salesVariable expenses (Click to select)UFNone



        (Click to select)Income from operationsDesk salesFixed expensesVariable expensesChair sales $ $ $ (Click to select)FUNone







        the internet is a good place to get information that is useful to you in 430445

        The internet is a good place to get information that is useful to you in your study of accounting. For example, you can find information about current events, professional accounting organizations, and
        specific companies that may support your study.

        Sports Direct is the UK’s leading sports retailer by revenue and operating profit, and the owner of a significant number of world famous sport, fashion and lifestyle brands. Sports Direct provides a full multi channel approach to the UK and European Retail markets. Its strategy includes identifying opportunities for improvement through in store specialist collaborations and acquisitions, developing online opportunities and leveraging the SPORTSDIRECT.com fascia. The Group continues to enhance its store portfolio and now operates out of over 500 stores in the UK and internationally.

        Access the Sports Direct home web page at:
        www.sportsdirectplc.com. From Sports Direct’s home page and then “INVESTOR RELATIONS”, click on “ANNUAL REPORTS AND PRESENTATIONS”, followed by the year 2013 to display and download the “Annual Report”: April 28, 2013 on Form PDF.

        Note: the annual report of Sports Direct plc is available at:

        http://media.sportsdirectplc.com/App_Media/SportsDirect/pdfs/Annual_Report_2013.pdf

        Instructions Use the annual report of 2012/2013 to answer the following questions:

        1. Explain how International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) add to the integrity of Sports Direct’s financial accounting information. Support your answer with evidence from the annual report (Hint: some research is required here.)

        [Marks (Words): 10(150)]

        1. As mentioned in p. 51, Directors’ responsibilities:

        The Directors have elected to prepare the Company financial statements in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practices (UK GAAP).”

        Required: State the major sources of these practices. Support your answer with evidence from the annual report (
        Hint: some research is required here.)

        [Marks (Words): 10(150)]

        1. As mentioned in p. 66, Notes to the Financial Statements:

        “The critical accounting estimates and judgements made by the Group regarding the future or other key sources of estimation, uncertainty and judgement that may have a significant risk of giving rise to a material adjustment to the carrying values of assets and liabilities within the next financial year”

        Required

        • Identify four items found in Sports Direct’s annual report that are based on estimates and judgments.
        • Discuss the expected impact on the usefulness of the Company’s financial statement of such estimates and judgments. Explain briefly why you think that the calculation of depreciation is based on estimates rather than actual information, relating your answer to Sports Direct’ fixed assets.

        [Marks (Words): 16(150)]

        1. Sports Direct mentioned in its annual report, pp. 62 63 that:

        “Property, plant and equipment are stated at historical cost less depreciation less any recognised impairment losses. Cost includes expenditure that is directly attributable to the acquisition or construction of these items. Subsequent costs are included in the asset’s carrying amount only when it is probable that future economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the Group and the costs can be measured reliably.

        All other costs, including repairs and maintenance costs, are charged to the income statement in the period in which they are incurred.

        Depreciation is provided on all property, plant and equipment other than freehold land and is calculated on a reducing balance basis or straight line basis, whichever is deemed by the Directors to be more appropriate, to allocate cost less assessed residual value, other than assets in the course of construction, over the estimated useful lives, as follows:The internet is a good place to get information that is useful to you in your study of accounting. For example, you can find information about current events, professional accounting organizations, and
        specific companies that may support your study.

        Sports Direct is the UK’s leading sports retailer by revenue and operating profit, and the owner of a significant number of world famous sport, fashion and lifestyle brands. Sports Direct provides a full multi channel approach to the UK and European Retail markets. Its strategy includes identifying opportunities for improvement through in store specialist collaborations and acquisitions, developing online opportunities and leveraging the SPORTSDIRECT.com fascia. The Group continues to enhance its store portfolio and now operates out of over 500 stores in the UK and internationally.

        Access the Sports Direct home web page at:
        www.sportsdirectplc.com. From Sports Direct’s home page and then “INVESTOR RELATIONS”, click on “ANNUAL REPORTS AND PRESENTATIONS”, followed by the year 2013 to display and download the “Annual Report”: April 28, 2013 on Form PDF.

        Note: the annual report of Sports Direct plc is available at:

        http://media.sportsdirectplc.com/App_Media/SportsDirect/pdfs/Annual_Report_2013.pdf

        Instructions Use the annual report of 2012/2013 to answer the following questions:

        1. Explain how International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) add to the integrity of Sports Direct’s financial accounting information. Support your answer with evidence from the annual report (Hint: some research is required here.)

        [Marks (Words): 10(150)]

        1. As mentioned in p. 51, Directors’ responsibilities:

        “The Directors have elected to prepare the Company financial statements in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practices (UK GAAP).”

        Required: State the major sources of these practices. Support your answer with evidence from the annual report (
        Hint: some research is required here.)

        [Marks (Words): 10(150)]

        1. As mentioned in p. 66, Notes to the Financial Statements:

        “The critical accounting estimates and judgements made by the Group regarding the future or other key sources of estimation, uncertainty and judgement that may have a significant risk of giving rise to a material adjustment to the carrying values of assets and liabilities within the next financial year”

        Required

        • Identify four items found in Sports Direct’s annual report that are based on estimates and judgments.
        • Discuss the expected impact on the usefulness of the Company’s financial statement of such estimates and judgments. Explain briefly why you think that the calculation of depreciation is based on estimates rather than actual information, relating your answer to Sports Direct’ fixed assets.

        [Marks (Words): 16(150)]

        1. Sports Direct mentioned in its annual report, pp. 62 63 that:

        “Property, plant and equipment are stated at historical cost less depreciation less any recognised impairment losses. Cost includes expenditure that is directly attributable to the acquisition or construction of these items. Subsequent costs are included in the asset’s carrying amount only when it is probable that future economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the Group and the costs can be measured reliably.

        All other costs, including repairs and maintenance costs, are charged to the income statement in the period in which they are incurred.

        Depreciation is provided on all property, plant and equipment other than freehold land and is calculated on a reducing balance basis or straight line basis, whichever is deemed by the Directors to be more appropriate, to allocate cost less assessed residual value, other than assets in the course of construction, over the estimated useful lives, as follows:

        Attachments:

        assignment 1 5 429221

        Identify how each of the following separate transactions affects financial statements. For the balance sheet, identify how each transaction affects total assets, total liabilities, and total equity. For the income statement, identify how each transaction affects net income. For the statement of cash flows, identify how each transaction affects cash flows from operating activities, cash flows from financing activities, and cash flows from investing activities. For increases, place a,1, in the column or columns. For decreases, place a ,2, in the column or columns. If both an increase and a decrease occur, place ,1y2, in the column or columns. The first transaction is completed as an example.

         

         

         

          

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              

              

        Balance Sheet

            

            

        Income Statement

            

            

        Statement of Cash Flows

            

         
                         
            

        Transactipon

            

            

        Total Assets

            

            

        Total Liab.

            

            

        Total Equity

            

            

        Net Income

            

            

        Operating Activity

            

            

        Financial Activities

            

            

        Investing Activities

            

         
            

        1 Owner invests cash for     stock 1 1 1

            

                       
            

        2 Buys building by signing     note payable

            

                       
            

        3 Pays cash for salaries     incurred

            

                       
            

        4 Provides services for     cash

            

                       
            

        5 Pays cash for rent     incurred

            

                       
            

        6 Incurs utilities costs on     credit

            

                       
            

        7 Buys store equipment for     cash

            

                       
            

        8 Pays cash dividend

            

                       
            

        9 Provides services on     credit

            

                       
            

        10 Collects cash on     receivable from

            

        16 5 429256

        16 15. (Comprehensive EOQ calculations) Knutson Products Inc. is involved in the production of airplane parts and has the following inventory, carrying, and storage costs:

        1. Orders must be placed in round lots of 100 units.

        2. Annual unit usage is 250,000. (Assume a 50 week year in your calculations.)

        3. The carrying cost is 10 percent of the purchase price.

        4. The purchase price is $10 per unit.

        5. The ordering cost is $100 per order.

        6. The desired safety stock is 5,000 units. (This does not include delivery time stock.)

        7. The delivery time is 1 week.

        Given the forgoing information:

        a. Determine the optimal EOQ level.

        b. How many orders will be placed annually?

        c. What is the inventory order point? (That is, at what level of inventory should a new order be placed?)

        d. What is the average inventory level?

        e. What would happen to the EOQ if annual unit sales doubled (all other unit costs and safety stocks remaining constant)? What is the elasticity of EOQ with respect to sales? (That is, what is the percentage change in EOQ divided by the percentage change in sales?)

        f. If carrying costs double, what will happen to the EOQ level? (Assume the original sales level

        of 250,000 units.) What is the elasticity of EOQ with respect to carrying costs?

        g. If the ordering costs double, what will happen to the level of EOQ? (Again assume original levels of sales and carrying costs.) What is the elasticity of EOQ with respect to ordering costs?

        h. If the selling price doubles, what will happen to EOQ? What is the elasticity of EOQ with respect to selling price

        financial accounting 429262

        17. Corresponds to CLO 5(a) Lennox Corporation purchased a new delivery truck for 35,000. The sales taxes are $2,700. The logo is painted on the side of the truck for $800. The truck’s annual license is $200. Annual insurance on the truck is $1,300. What should Lennox record as the cost of the new truck? (Points : 5)

        $40,000
        $38,500
        $37,700
        $35,000

        18. Corresponds to CLO 5(b) On April 1, 2013, Ballard Corporation purchased equipment for $65,000. It is estimated that the equipment will have a $5,000 salvage value at the end of its 5 year useful life. If Ballard uses the straight line method of depreciation, what is the accumulated depreciation at December 31, 2013? (Points : 5)

        $13,000
        $12,000
        $9,750
        $9,000

        19. Corresponds to CLO 5(c) Tyree Company purchased equipment with a cost of $90,000 and an estimated salvage value of $18,000. The equipment is expected to produce 120,000 units over its estimated useful life of 10 years. If Tyree uses the units of activity method, what is the depreciation cost per unit to be used in calculating depreciation? (Points : 5)

        $1.67
        $0.75
        $0.60
        $1.33

        20. Corresponds to CLO 5(d) Kerns Company purchased equipment with a cost of $200,000 and an estimated salvage value of $10,000. The equipment has an estimated useful life of 10 years. If Kerns uses the double declining balance method, what is the annual depreciation rate to be used in calculating depreciation? (Points : 5)

        5%
        10%
        20%
        40%

        21. Corresponds to CLO 6(a) Marshall Machinery made a sale for $80,000 on January 6. The customer is sent a statement on January 25 and payment is received on February 20. Marshall prepares January’s monthly internal financial statements on February 15. Marshall follows GAAP and applies the revenue recognition principle. When is the $80,000 considered to be earned? (Points : 5)

        February 20
        February 15
        January 25
        January 6

        22. Corresponds to CLO 6(b) Mann Corporation’s employees worked overtime to complete an order that is sold on July 27. The office sends a statement to the customer on August 15, and payment is received on September 5. Mann follows GAAP. In what month should the overtime wages be expensed? (Points : 5)

        either July or August, depending on when the pay period ends
        September
        August
        July

        23. Corresponds to CLO 6(c) Sight Company had the following transactions during 2013: sales of $6,000 on account; collected $1,800 for services to be performed in 2014; paid $4,300 cash for 2013 salaries; purchased airline tickets for $500 in December for a trip to take place in 2014. What is Sight’s 2013 net income using accrual accounting? (Points : 5)

        $1,700
        $1,200
        $3,500
        $3,000

        24. Corresponds to CLO 6(d) Lyme Corporation had the following transactions during 2013: sales of $8,000 on account; collected $4,500 for services to be performed in 2014; paid $3,000 cash for 2013 salaries; paid $400 for airline tickets for a trip to take place in 2014. What is Lyme’s 2013 net income using cash basis accounting? (Points : 5)

        $4,600
        $9,100
        $1,100
        $1,500

        25. Corresponds to CLO 7(a) Ping Sports Company purchases $1,000 of merchandise on credit. Using the perpetual inventory approach, the journal entry to record this transaction would be: (Points : 5)

        debit: Inventory $1,000; credit: Accounts Payable $1,000
        debit: Accounts Payable $1,000; credit: Inventory $1,000
        debit: Accounts Payable $1,000; credit: Purchases $1,000
        debit: Purchases $1,000; credit: Accounts Payable $1,000

        26. Corresponds to CLO 7(b) Gardner Corporation had sales of $2,400 on account on January 9, 2013. Gardner uses the periodic inventory method. The journal entry to record this transaction would include: (Points : 5)

        a debit to Sales Revenue and a credit to Accounts Receivable.
        a debit to Accounts Receivable, a credit to Sales Revenue, a debit to Cost of Goods Sold, and a credit to Inventory.
        a debit to Accounts Receivable and a credit to Sales Revenue.
        a debit to Accounts Receivable, a credit to Sales Revenue, a debit to Cost of Goods Sold, and a credit to Purchases.

        27. Corresponds to CLO 7(c) Rupert Hobby’s accounting records show the following for the year ending December 31, 2014: Purchase DiscountsAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$15,600; Freight inAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$14,000; PurchasesAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$540,500; Beginning InventoryAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$54,200; Ending InventoryAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$58,600; Purchase ReturnsAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$20,000. Using the periodic inventory system, what is the cost of goods sold? (Points : 5)

        $573,100
        $500,500
        $536,100
        $514,500

        28. Corresponds to CLO 7(d) Bay Company sold $100,000 of merchandise in the month of April, 2013. Returns that month totaled $5,000. Bay Company uses the periodic method to determine ending inventory each December 31. For interim financial statements, cost of goods sold is estimated based on the previous year’s gross profit rate. If Bay Company’s gross profit rate for 2012 was 40%, what is the cost of goods sold for the month of April? (Points : 5)

        $60,000
        $57,000
        $40,000
        $38,000

        29. Corresponds to CLO 8(a) We Love Pets, Inc. has the following inventory data: January 1, beginning inventory of 50 units at $25; January 10, purchases of 70 units at $27; January 25, purchases of 40 units at $28. A physical count of inventory on January 31 reveals that there are 45 units on hand. Using the FIFO inventory method, cost of goods sold for January is (Points : 5)

        $3,135
        $3,005
        $2,875
        $1,255

        30. Corresponds to CLO 8(b) Party Retailers has the following inventory data: May 1, beginning inventory of 200 units at $10; May 14, purchases of 300 units at $12; May 23, purchases of 250 units at $15. A physical count of inventory on May 31 reveals that there are 225 units on hand. Using the LIFO inventory method, ending inventory for May is (Points : 5)

        $2,300
        $2,250
        $7,050
        $3,375

        31. Corresponds to CLO 8(c) Halting Corporation has the following inventory data: September 1, beginning inventory of 430 units at $11; September 8, purchases of 350 units at $12; September 21, purchases of 460 units at $14. A physical count of inventory on September 30 reveals that there are 400 units on hand. Using the weighted average inventory method, rounding the unit cost to the nearest penny, what is cost of goods sold for September? (Points : 5)

        $10,357
        $4,960
        $10,416
        $4,932

        32. Corresponds to CLO 8(d) Unleash Corporation is a retailer operating in an industry currently experiencing high inflation. Unleash wants to show the highest cost of goods sold possible in order to reduce the company’s income tax liability. Which inventory costing method should Unleash use? (Points : 5)

        FIFO because cost of goods sold represents the earliest costs.
        Average because cost of goods sold will represent an average amount.
        Specific identification because it involves the actual costs.
        LIFO because cost of goods sold represents the latest costs.

        33. Corresponds to CLO 9(a) The following balance sheet and income statement data is available for Gold River Corporation: Current assetsAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$205,000; Total assetsAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$520,000; Net incomeAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$345,000; Current liabilitiesAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$125,000; Total liabilitiesAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$250,000; Stockholders’ equityAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$270,000; Average common shares outstandingAf?cAc‚¬A?¦ 10,000. What is Gold River’s current ratio? (Points : 5)

        2.08
        1.64
        1.56
        0.82

        34. Corresponds to CLO 9(b) The following balance sheet data is available for Pinpoint Products: Current assetsAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$25,000; Property, plant, and equipment,Af?cAc‚¬A?¦$100,000Af?cAc‚¬A?¦Other assetsAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$15,000; Current liabilitiesAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$15,000; Long term liabilitiesAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$48,000; Stockholders’ equityAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$77,000; Average common shares outstandingAf?cAc‚¬A?¦ 10,000. What is Pinpoint’s debt to total assets, shown as a percentage? (Points : 5)

        45%
        60%
        40%
        81%

        35. Corresponds to CLO 9(c) The following balance sheet and income statement data is available for Frame Manufacturing: Total assetsAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$420,000; Total liabilitiesAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$300,000; Stockholders’ equityAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$120,000; Gross profitAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$54,000; Net incomeAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$42,000; Average common shares outstandingAf?cAc‚¬A?¦ 12,000. What is Frame Manufacturing’s earnings per share? (Points : 5)

        $10.00
        $3.50
        $1.60
        $4.50

        36. Corresponds to CLO 9(d) The following financial information is available for Maroon Corporation: Sales revenueAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$200,000; Cost of goods soldAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$120,000; Operating expensesAf?cAc‚¬A?¦$40,000. What is Maroon’s profit margin ratio, shown as a percentage? (Points : 5)

        20%
        80%
        60%
        40%

        37. Corresponds to CLO 10(a) Which of the following is not true about a company’s system of internal controls? (Points : 5)

        Internal control procedures are designed to safeguard assets from employee theft.
        Internal control measures can eliminate all irregularities in the accounting process.
        Internal controls can be rendered ineffective by employee collusion.
        Large companies often assign internal auditors to continuously evaluate the effectiveness of the company’s internal control systems.

        38. Corresponds to CLO 10(b) At Speedy Market, three cashiers handle cash sales from the same cash register drawer. Which of the following internal control principles does this violate? (Points : 5)

        Segregation of duties
        Physical controls
        Human resource controls
        Establishment of responsibility

        39. Corresponds to CLO 10(c) At Stone Pool Supplies, one person is responsible for the related activities of ordering merchandise, receiving goods, and paying for them. Which of the following internal control principles does this violate? (Points : 5)

        Physical controls
        Segregation of duties
        Human resource controls
        Establishment of responsibility

        40. Corresponds to CLO 10(d) At Beauty Bargains, the employees that handle cash are all bonded. This is an example of which of the following internal control procedures? (Points : 5)

        Physical controls
        Establishment of responsibility
        Segregation of duties
        Human resource controls

        acct hw 429302

        During 2011 and 2012, Faulkner Manufacturing used the sum of the years%u2019 digits (SYD) method of depreciation for its depreciable assets, for both financial reporting and tax purposes. At the beginning of 2013, Faulkner decided to change to the straight line method for both financial reporting and tax purposes. A tax rate of 40% is in effect for all years.

        For an asset that cost $21,000 with an estimated residual value of $1,000 and an estimated useful life of 10 years, the depreciation under different methods is as follows:

        Year Straight Line SYD Difference
        2011 $2,000 $3,636 $1,636
        2012 2,000 3,273 1,273






        $4,000 $6,909 $2,909

        1.

        Prepare the journal entry that Faulkner will record in 2013 related to the change. (If no entry is required for a particular event, select “No journal entry required” in the first account field.)


        2.Suppose instead that Faulkner previously used straight line depreciation and changed to sum of the years%u2019 digits in 2013. Prepare the journal entry that Faulkner will record in 2013 related to the change.(If no entry is required for a particular event, select “No journal entry required” in the first account field.)



        accounting help needed please 429408

        4. Brusveen Corporation applies manufacturing overhead to jobs on the basis of direct labor hours. The following information relates to Brusveen for last year: Estimated Actual

        Direct labor hours…………………………… 15,000 14,800

        Manufacturing overhead cost…………….. $300,000 $287,120

        What was Brusveen’s underapplied or overapplied overhead for last year?

        $4,000 underapplied
        $8,880 underapplied
        $8,880 overapplied
        $9,000 underapplied

        5. Linh Corporation applies manufacturing overhead to jobs on the basis of pounds of direct material used. Linh estimated 160,000 pounds of material usage and $200,000 of manufacturing overhead cost for the year. During the year, Linh actually used 150,000 pounds of material and incurred $171,000 of manufacturing overhead cost. What was Linh’s underapplied or overapplied overhead for the year?

        $12,500 underapplied

        $16,500 overapplied

        $17,600 underapplied

        $29,000 overapplied

        6. Darrow Company uses a predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor hours to apply manufacturing overhead to jobs. Last year, the company worked 10,000 direct labor hours and incurred $80,000 of actual manufacturing overhead cost. If overhead was underapplied by $2,000, the predetermined overhead rate for the company for the year must have been:

        $7.80

        $8.00

        $8.20

        $8.40

        Washtenaw Corporation uses a job order costing system. The following data are for last year:

        Estimated direct labor hours……………………………. 12,000

        Estimated manufacturing overhead costs…………… $39,000

        Actual direct labor hours……………………………….. 11,000

        Actual manufacturing overhead costs……………….. $37,000

        Washtenaw applies overhead using a predetermined rate based on direct labor hours. What amount of overhead was applied to jobs last year?

        $39,050
        $42,600
        $35,750
        $36,960

        9. The Silver Company uses a predetermined overhead rate to apply manufacturing overhead to jobs. The predetermined overhead rate is based on labor cost in Dept. A and on machine hours in Dept. B. At the beginning of the year, the company made the following estimates: Dept A Dept B

        Direct labor costs……………………………….. $60,000 $40,000

        Manufacturing overhead……………………….. $90,000 $45,000

        Direct labor hours………………………………. 6,000 9,000

        Machine hours………………………………….. 2,000 15,000

        What predetermined overhead rates would be used in Dept A and Dept B, respectively?

        67% and $3.00

        150% and $5.00

        150% and $3.00

        67% and $5.00

        11. Wayne Company’s beginning and ending inventories for the month of June were as follows:

        June 1 June 30

        Work in process……………………………. $145,000 $171,000

        Finished goods…………………………….. $ 85,000 $ 78,000

        Production data for the month follow:

        Direct labor cost incurred…………………………. $200,000

        Direct labor hours…………………………………… $ 25,000

        Actual manufacturing overhead cost incurred… $132,000

        Direct materials…………………………………….. $170,000

        Wayne applies manufacturing overhead cost to jobs based on direct labor hours, and the predetermined rate is $5.75 per direct labor hour. The company does not close underapplied or overapplied manufacturing overhead to Cost of Goods Sold until the end of the year. What is the amount of cost of goods manufactured?

        $508,750
        $502,000
        $585,000
        $487,750

        13. Baka Corporation applies manufacturing overhead on the basis of direct labor hours. At the beginning of the most recent year, the company based its predetermined overhead rate on total estimated overhead of $239,700 and 4,700 estimated direct labor hours. Actual manufacturing overhead for the year amounted to $242,000 and actual direct labor hours were 4,600.

        The predetermined overhead rate for the year was closest to:

        $52.61

        $49.91

        $51.00

        $51.49

        15. Toan Inc. uses a job order costing system in which any underapplied or overapplied overhead is closed to cost of goods sold at the end of the month. In September the company completed job S80M that consisted of 23,000 units of one of the company’s standard products. No other jobs were in process during the month. The job cost sheet for job S80M shows the following costs:

        Begininning balance…………………………………….. $ 66,700

        Direct materials………………………………………….. $494,000

        Direct labor cost…………………………………………. $158,700

        Manufacturing overhead cost applied……………….. $269,100

        During the month, the actual manufacturing overhead cost incurred was $270,020 and 3,000 completed units from job S80M were sold. No other products were sold during the month.
        The unit product cost for job S80M is closest to:

        $31.30

        $43.00

        $329.97

        $329.67

        16. An effective ERM program would include coverage of broad risk categories, including:

        legal and regulatory risks

        risk of losses due to natural disasters

        risk of IT operations failures

        all of the above

        accounting break even points 429413

        4.

        The income statement for Nyland Company for 2010 appears below.

        NYLAND COMPANY

        Income Statement

        For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

        Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”

        Sales (40,000 units) $1,000,000

        Variable expenses 700,000

        Contribution margin 300,000

        Fixed expenses 330,000

        Net income (loss) $ (30,000)

        Instructions

        Answer the following independent questions and show computations using the contribution margin technique to support your answers:

        1. What was the company’s break even point in sales dollars in 2010?

        2. How many additional units would the company have had to sell in 2011 in order to earn net income of $45,000?

        3. If the company is able to reduce variable costs by $2.50 per unit in 2011 and other costs and unit revenues remain unchanged, how many units will the company have to sell in order to earn a net income of $35,000?

        cost accounting 429444

        5) The following information pertains to the Cannady Corporation:

        Beginning work in process inventory 50,000

        Ending work in process inventory 48,000

        Beginning finished goods inventory 180,000

        Ending finished goods inventory 195,000

        Cost of goods manufactured 1,220,000

        What is cost of goods sold?

        A) $1,205,000 B) $1,222,000 C) $1,235,000 D) $1,218,000

        _______________________________________________________________________________________________

        6) For last year, Lewisburn Manufacturing reported the following:

        Revenue

        $420,000

        Beginning inventory of direct materials, January 1

        22,000

        Purchases of direct materials

        146,000

        Ending inventory of direct materials, December 31

        16,000

        Direct manufacturing labor

        18,000

        Indirect manufacturing costs

        40,000

        Beginning inventory of finished goods, January 1

        35,000

        Cost of goods manufactured

        104,000

        Ending inventory of finished goods, December 31

        36,000

        Operating costs

        140,000

        What was Lewisburn’s cost of goods sold?

        A) $152,000 B) $103,000 C) $268,000 D) $317,000

        _________________________________________________________________________________________________

        7) For last year, Lewisburn Manufacturing reported the following:

        Revenue

        $420,000

        Beginning inventory of direct materials, January 1

        22,000

        Purchases of direct materials

        146,000

        Ending inventory of direct materials, December 31

        16,000

        Direct manufacturing labor

        18,000

        Indirect manufacturing costs

        40,000

        Beginning inventory of finished goods, January 1

        35,000

        Cost of goods manufactured

        104,000

        Ending inventory of finished goods, December 31

        36,000

        Operating costs

        140,000

        What was Lewisburn’s gross margin (or gross profit)?

        A) $152,000 B) $268,000 C) $317,000 D) $103,000

        cost accounting 429464

        8) For last year, Lewisburn Manufacturing reported the following:

        Revenue

        $420,000

        Beginning inventory of direct materials, January 1

        22,000

        Purchases of direct materials

        146,000

        Ending inventory of direct materials, December 31

        16,000

        Direct manufacturing labor

        18,000

        Indirect manufacturing costs

        40,000

        Beginning inventory of finished goods, January 1

        35,000

        Cost of goods manufactured

        104,000

        Ending inventory of finished goods, December 31

        36,000

        Operating costs

        140,000

        What was Lewisburn’s operating income?

        A) $76,000 B) $177,000 C) $128,000 D) $280,000

        ___________________________________________________________________________________________________

        9) For last year, Lewisburn Manufacturing reported the following:

        Revenue

        $420,000

        Beginning inventory of direct materials, January 1

        22,000

        Purchases of direct materials

        146,000

        Ending inventory of direct materials, December 31

        16,000

        Direct manufacturing labor

        18,000

        Indirect manufacturing costs

        40,000

        Beginning inventory of finished goods, January 1

        35,000

        Cost of goods manufactured

        104,000

        Ending inventory of finished goods, December 31

        36,000

        Operating costs

        140,000

        How much of the above would be considered period costs for Lewisburn Manufacturing?

        A) $140,000 B) $246,000 C) $104,000 D) $390,000

        ________________________________________________________________________________________________

        10) Rodney Worsham is paid $10 an hour for straight time and $15 an hour for overtime. One week he worked 45 hours, which included 5 hours of overtime, and 3 hours of idle time caused by material shortages. Compensation would be reported as:

        A) $450 of direct labor and $25 of manufacturing overhead

        B) $445 of direct labor and $30 of manufacturing overhead

        C) $420 of direct labor and $55 of manufacturing overhead

        D) $370 of direct labor and $105 of manufacturing overhead

        chapter 9 exercise 22 accounting cost ii 429468

        9 22 Absorption versus variable costing. Grunewald Company manufacturers a professional grade vacuum cleaner and began operations in 2011. For 2011, Grunewald budgeted to produce and sell 20,000 units. The company had no price, spending, or efficiency variances, and writes off production volume variance to cost of goods sold. Actual data for 2011 are given as follows:

        1Units produced 18,000

        2 Units sold 17,500

        3 Selling price $ 425

        Variable costs:

        Manufacturing cost per unit produced

        Direct materials $ 30

        Direct manufacturing labor 25

        Manufacturing overhead 60

        Marketing cost per unit sold 45

        Fixed costs:

        Manufacturing costs $1,100,000

        Administrative costs 965,450

        Marketing 1,366,400

        1. Prepare a 2011 income statement for Grunewald Company using variable costing.

        2. Prepare a 2011income statement for Grunewald Company using absorption costing.

        3. Explain the differences in operating incomes obtained inrequirement 1 and requirement 2.

        4. Grunewald’s management is considering implementing a bonus for the supervisors based on gross margin under absorption costing. What incentives will this create for the supervisors? What modifica tions could Grunewald management make to improve such a plan? Explain briefly.

        acc hw 429478

        ABC Corporation has three service departments with the following costs and activity base:

        Service Department Cost Activity base

        Graphics Production$ 200,000 # of copies

        Accounting $500,000 # of invoices processed

        Personnel Department $400,000 # of employees

        ABC has three operating divisions, Micro, Macro, and Super. Their revenue, cost and activity information are as follows:

        Micro Macro Super

        Direct Revenues 700,000 850,000 650,000

        Direct Operating Expenses 50,000 70,000 100,000

        # of copies made 20,000 30,000 50,000

        # invoices processed 700 800 500

        # of employees 130 145 125

        A. How much service department cost will be allocated to the Micro Division?

        B. How much service department cost would be allocated to the Macro Division?

        accounting 429508

        The accounting records of Fabiano Distribution show the following assets and liabilities as of December 31, 2010 and 2011.

        December 31 2010 2011
        Cash $ 43,894 $ 6,731
        Accounts receivable 23,826 18,680
        Office supplies 3,758 2,753
        Office Equipment 115,374 122,895
        Trucks 45,148 54,148
        Building 0 150,502
        Land 0 37,554
        Accounts Payable 62,640 31,068
        Note payable 0 88,056

        Late in December 2011, the business purchased a small office building and land for $188,056. It paid $100,000 cash toward the purchase and an $88,056 note payable was signed for the balance. Mr. Fabiano had to invest $35,000 cash in the business in exchange for stock to enable it to pay the $100,000 cash. The business also pays $3,300 cash per month for dividends.

        By comparing equity amounts from the balance sheets and using the additional information presented in this problem, prepare a calculation to show how much net income was earned by the business during 2011. (Negative amounts should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        media/8a5/8a592386 7e8d 4237 86de 6f

        I NEED THE ANSWER FOR THESE THREE BLANKS

        the accounting records of the company include the following information relating to 429518

        The accounting records of Idaho Paper Company include the following information relating to the current year: Dec1 Jan1 Materialsinventory………………………………………………………$20,000 $25,000 Work in processinventory…………………………………………… 37,500 40,000 Finished goods inventory,Jan1(10,000 units@ $21 perunit).. ? 210,000 Purchases of direct materials duringyear…………………………. 330,000 Direct labor costs assigned toproduction……………………….. 375,000 Manufacturingoverhead……………………………………………… 637,500 The company manufactures a single product; during the current year 45,000 units were manufactured and 40,000 units were sold. c. compute the cost of goods sold during the year assuming that the FIFO method of inventory costing is used d. compute the cost of the inventory of finished goods at december 31 of the current year, assuming that the FIFO method of inventory costing is used

        financial accounting 429607

        An adjusting entry was made on December 31, 2009 to accrue salary expense of $2,800. Which of the following entries would be prepared to record the next payment of salaries, on January, 2010 in the amount of $7,000?

        Salaries Expense 2,800
        Salaries Payable 2,800
        Salaries Payable 7,000
        Cash 7,000
        Salaries Payable 2,800
        Salaries Expense 4,200
        Cash 7,000
        Salaries Payable 2,800
        Cash 2,800
        Salaries Expense 7,000
        Cash 7,000

        managerial accounting 429613

        Advanced Company reports the following information for the current year. All beginning inventory amounts equaled $0 this year.

        Units Produced this year 25,000 units

        Units sold this year 15,000 units

        direct materials $9 per unit

        Direct Labor $11 per unit

        Variable Overhead $75,000 in total

        Fixed Overhead $137,500 in total

        Given Advanced Company’s data, and the knowledge that the product is sold for $50 per unit and operating expenses are $200,000, compute the net income under absorption costing. $205,000, $122,500, $80,500, $55,000, $67,500

        Front Company had net income of $72,500 based on variable costing. Beginning and ending inventories were 800 units and 1,200 units, respectively. Assume the fixed overhead per unit was $7.90 for both the beginning and ending inventory. What is net income under absorption costing?

        $88,300
        $56,700
        $69,340
        $75,660

        $72,900

        cumulative accounting problem 429638

        Alfred E. Old and Beulah A. Crane, each age 42, married on September 7, 2009. Alfred and Beulah will file a joint return for 2010. Alfred’s Social Security number is 111 11 1111. Beulah’s Social Security number is 123 45 6789, and she adopted “Old” as her married name. They live at 211 Bricks tone Drive, Atlanta, GA 30304. Alfred was divorced from Sarah Old in March 2008. Under the divorce agreement, Alfred is to pay Sarah $1,250 per month for the next 10 years or until Sarah’s death, whichever occurs first. Alfred pays Sarah $20,000 in 2010. In addition, in January 2010, Alfred pays Sarah $50,000, which is designated as being for her share of the marital property. Also, Alfred is responsible for all prior years’ income taxes. Sarah’s Social Security number is 123 45 6788.
        Alfred’s salary for 2010 is $150,000, and his employer, Cherry, Inc. (Federal I.D. No. 98 7654321), provides him with group term life insurance equal to twice his annual salary. His employer withheld $24,900 for Federal income taxes and $8,000 for state income taxes. The following amounts were withheld for FICA taxes: $6,622 ($106,800 x 6.2%) for Social Security and $2,175 ($150,000 x 1.45%) for Medicare. Beulah recently graduated from law school and is employed by Legal Aid Society, Inc. (Federali.D. No. 11 1111111), as a public defender. She receives a salary of $40,000 in 2010. Her employer withheld $7,500 for Federal income taxes and $2,400 for state income taxes. The following amounts were withheld for FICA taxes: $2,480 ($40,000 x 6.2%) for Social Security and $580 ($40,000 x 1.45%) for Medicare. Beulah has $3,000 in qualified dividends on Yellow Corporation stock she inherited. Alfred and Beulah receive a $1,600 refund on their 2009 state income taxes. They itemized deductions on their 2009 Federal income tax return (total= $15,000). Alfred and Beulah pay $4,500 interest and $1,450 property taxes on their personal residence in 2010. Their charitable contributions total $2,100 (all to their church). They paid sales taxes of$1,400 for which they maintain the receipts. Compute the Olds’ net tax payable (or refund due) for 2010. If you use tax forms for your solution, you will need Form 1040 and Schedules A and B

        stock holders equity 429661

        Alpha Corporation has the following ShareholdersA????1 Equity section of the Balance Sheet at 1/1/2004:

        Preferred Stock, 10%, $100 Par Value, 10,000 shares authorized, 1,000 issued, and outstanding

        $ 100,000

        Additional Paid In Capital A????1 Preferred Stock

        240,000

        Common Stock, $10 Par Value, 100,000 shares authorized, 50,000 shares issued and outstanding

        500,000
        Additional Paid In Capital A????1 Common Stock

        800,000
        Total Paid In Capital

        $1,640,000
        Retained Earnings

        2,000,000
        Total ShareholdersA????1 Equity

        $ 3,640,000
        Questions 27 (Stockholders’ Equity):

        Assume Alpha sells 500 shares of Preferred Stock for $400 per share. What will be the dollar amount of the increase to Preferred Stock, APIC Preferred Stock, and Retained Earnings?

        Increase PStk Increase APIC A????1 PStk Increase RE
        a. 200,000 0 0
        b. 150,000 50,000 0
        c. 0 200,000 0
        d. 50,000 150,000 0
        e. 50,000 100,000 50,000

        WHAT ARE THE STEPS TO GET ANSWER D, AND WHY?

        Assume Alpha reacquires share of their own Common Stock to hold in the Treasury. They pay $ 30.00 per share. With this purchase, the impact on Total Paid in Capital and the total Shareholders%uFFFD Equity, respectively, will be

        a. increase/increase
        b. decrease/decrease
        c. increase/decrease
        d. decrease/increase
        e. none/decrease

        WHAT ARE THE STEPS TO GET ANSWER D, AND WHY for this problem also?

        how to calculate the maintenance cost assigned to the pharmacy using the existing me 429718

        Analyze the following scenario: Jump Hospital currently allocates all maintenance department costs based on departmental square feet. However, the manager of the pharmacy department has suggested that an ABC approach be used for the portion of the maintenance department costs that relate to repairing equipment. Her contention is that the pharmacy has relatively little equipment that breaks. However, it must subsidize many high tech departments that require expensive equipment repairs. Using the tables below, calculate the maintenance cost assigned to the pharmacy using the existing method and using an ABC approach. Clearly label your calculations in your analysis.

        Maintenance Costs

        Routine Maintenance

        Repairs

        Total

        Volume (Square Feet)

        100,000

        800

        Labor Hours

        10,000

        4000

        14,000

        Labor Cost/Hour

        $12.00

        $18.00

        $13.71

        Supplies

        $20,000

        $80,000

        $100,000

        Administration

        $15,000

        Department Information

        Pharmacy

        All Other Departments

        Total

        Square Feet

        2,000

        98,000

        100,000

        Volume of Repairs

        3

        797

        800

        Hours of Repairs

        6

        3,994

        4,000

        Supplies Used for Repairs

        $200

        $79,800

        $80,000

        managerial accounting 429728

        The Anazi Leather Company manufactures leather handbags (H) and moccasins (M). The company has been using the factory overhead rate method but has decided to evaluate the multiple production department factory overhead rate to allocate factory overhead. The factory overhead estimated per unit together with direct materials and direct labor will help determine selling prices.

        Handbags = 60,000 units, 3 hours of direct labor

        Moccasins= 40,000 units, 2 hours of direct labor

        Total Budgeted factory overhead cost = $360,000

        The company has two different production departments: Cutting and Sewing. The cutting department has a factory overhead budget of $80,000. Each unit will require 1 direct labor hour or a total of 100,000 direct labor hours.

        The Sewing Department estimates factory overhead in the amount of $280,000. Handbags require 2 hours of sewing time and Moccasins require 1 hour for a total of 160,000 labor hours.

        Calculate the amount of factory overhead to be allocated to each unit using direct labor hours.

        Moccasins $
        Handbags $

        calculate margin net income and roe cost flow assumptions fifo lifo and weighted ave 429745

        ANY ANSWER I HAVE ARE WRONG

        For the year ended December 31, 2010 ,Taylor & Partridge, earned an ROI of 14%. Sales for the year were $14 million, and average asset turnover was 2.4. Average owners’ equity was $2.6 million.

        Required:
        (a)

        Calculate Taylor & Partridge’s margin and net income. (Round your margin percentage to 1 decimal place and use the same for the calculation of net income. Enter your answer in dollars, not millions of dollars. Omit the “$” and “%” signs in your response.)

        Margin %
        Net income $

        (b) Calculate Taylor & Partridge’s return on equity. (Round your answer to the nearest whole percent. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

        ROE %

        The following data are available for Sellco for the fiscal year ended on January 31, 2011:

        Sales 770 units
        Beginning inventory 300 units @ $ 4
        Purchases, in chronological order 320 units @ $ 4
        440 units @ $ 6
        250 units @ $ 7

        Required:
        (a)

        Calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory amounts under the cost flow assumptions, FIFO, LIFO and Weighted average (using a periodic inventory system): (Round your unit cost to 2 decimal places and rest of the answers to the nearest whole number. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Cost of goods sold Ending inventory
        FIFO $ $
        LIFO $ $
        Weighted average $ $

        (b)

        Assume that net income using the weighted average cost flow assumption is $14,000. Calculate net income under FIFO and LIFO. (Round your unit cost to 2 decimal places and rest of the answers to the nearest whole number. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Net income
        FIFO $
        LIFO $

        record transactions and calculate financial statement amounts 429768

        DO NOT ANSWER THIS QUESTION WITH SOLICITATION!! I NEED A REAL ANSWER SOON!! ALREADY REPORTED ABUSE ON THIS QUESTION.

        E4 2 Record transactions and calculate financial statement amounts [L O 2, 6, 7]

        The following are the transactions relating to the formation of Cardinal Mowing Services, Inc., and its first month of operations.

        a. The firm was organized and the owners invested cash of $480.
        b. The company borrowed $720 from a relative of the owners; a short term note was signed.
        c.

        Two lawn mowers costing $384 each and a trimmer costing $104 were purchased for cash. The original list price of each mower was $488, but a discount was received because the seller was having a sale.

        d. Gasoline, oil, and several packages of trash bags were purchased for cash of $72.
        e.

        Advertising flyers announcing the formation of the business and a newspaper ad were purchased. The cost of these items, $136, will be paid in 30 days.

        f.

        During the first two weeks of operations, 47 lawns were mowed. The total revenue for this work was $564; $372 was collected in cash and the balance will be received within 30 days.

        g. Employees were paid $336 for their work during the first two weeks.
        h. Additional gasoline, oil, and trash bags costing $88 were purchased for cash.
        i. In the last two weeks of the first month, revenues totaled $736, of which $300 was collected.
        j. Employee wages for the last two weeks totaled $408; these will be paid during the first week of the next month.
        k. It was determined that at the end of the month the cost of the gasoline, oil, and trash bags still on hand was $24.
        l.

        Customers paid a total of $120 due from mowing services provided during the first two weeks. The revenue for these services was recognized in transaction f.

        Required:
        (a)

        Record each transaction in the appropriate columns. (Negative amounts should be indicated by a minus sign. Enter the total of the expense column as a positive amount. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” signs in your response.)

        Assets

        Liabilities

        Owners’ Equity

        Transaction Cash + Accounts Receivable + Supplies + Equipment = Notes Payable + Accounts Payable + Paid in Capital + Retained earnings + Revenues Expenses
        a.
        b.
        c.
        d.
        e.
        f.
        g.
        h.
        i.
        j.
        k.
        l.
        Total + + + = + + + +

        (b)

        Calculate the total assets, liabilities, and owners’ equity at the end of the month and calculate the amount of net income for the month. (Omit the “$” signs in your response.)

        Assets $
        Liabilities $
        Owners’ equity $
        Net income $

        mount snow operates a rocky mountain ski resort the company 278582

        Mount Snow operates a Rocky Mountain ski resort. The company is planning its lift ticket pricing for the coming ski season. Investors would like to earn a 16% return on the company’s $109,375,000 of assets. The company primarily incurs fixed costs to groom the runs and operate the lifts. Mount Snow projects fixed costs to be $35,000,000 for the ski season. The resort serves about 700,000 skiers and snowboarders each season. Variable costs are about $12 per guest. Currently, the resort has such a favorable reputation among skiers and snowboarders that it has some control over the lift ticket prices.

        Requirements

        1. Would Mount Snow emphasize target pricing or cost plus pricing. Why?

        2. If other resorts in the area charge $83 per day, what price should Mount Snow charge?

        multiple breakeven points last month capetini capacitor company 278583

        Multiple breakeven points Last month, Capetini Capacitor Company sold capacitors to its distributors for $250 per capacitor. The sales level of 3,000 capacitors per month was less than the single shift capacity of 4,400 capacitors at its plant located in San Diego. Variable production costs were $100 per capacitor, and fixed production costs were $200,000 per month. In addition, variable selling and distribution costs are $20 per capacitor, and fixed selling and distribution costs are $62,500 per month. At the suggestion of the marketing department, this month Capetini reduced the sales price to $200 and increased the monthly advertising budget by $17,500. Sales are expected to increase to 6,800 capacitors per month. If the demand exceeds the single shift capacity of 4,400 capacitors, the plant needs to be operated in two shifts. Two shift operation will increase monthly fixed production costs to $310,000.

        Required

        (a) Determine the contribution margin per capacitor last month.

        (b) Determine the sales level in number of capacitors at which the profit to sales ratio would be 10% for last month.

        (c) Determine the two breakeven points for this month.

        (d) Determine the sales level in number of capacitors at which the profit to sales ratio this month is the same as the actual profit to sales ratio last month. Is there more than one possible sales level at which this equality would occur?

        multiple choice questions 1 in a make or buy decision a the c 278585

        Multiple Choice Questions

        1. In a make or buy decision,

        a. The company must choose between expanding or dropping a product line.

        b. The company must choose between accepting or rejecting a special order.

        c. The company would consider the purchase price of the externally provided good to be relevant.

        d. The company would consider all fixed overhead to be irrelevant.

        e. None of the above.

        2. Carroll Company, a manufacturer of vitamins and minerals, has been asked by a large drugstore chain to provide bottles of vitamin E. The bottles would be labeled with the name of the drugstore chain, and the chain would pay Carroll Company charges $2.30 per bottle rather than the $3.00 regular price. Which type of a decision is this?

        a. Make or buy

        b. Keep or drop

        c. Special order

        d. Economic order quantity

        e. Markup pricing

        3. Jennings Hardware Store marks up its merchandise by 80 percent. If a part costs $1.50, which of the following is true?

        a. The price is $1.20.

        b. The markup is $2.70.

        c. The price is $2.70.

        d. The markup is pure profit.

        e. All of the above.

        4. When a company faces a production constraint or scarce resource (e.g., only a certain number of machine hours is available), it is important to a. produce the product with the highest contribution margin in total.

        b. Produce the product with the lowest full manufacturing cost.

        c. Produce the product with the highest contribution margin per unit of scarce resource.

        d. Produce the product with the highest contribution margin per unit.

        e. The constraint is not relevant to the production problem.

        5. In the keep or drop decision, the company will find which of the following income statement formats most useful?

        a. A segmented income statement in the contribution margin format

        b. A segmented income statement in the full costing format that is used for financial reporting

        c. An overall income statement in the contribution margin format

        d. An overall income statement in the full costing format that is used for financial reporting

        e. Income statements are of no use in making this type of decision.

        6. In the sell or process further decision,

        a. Joint costs are always relevant.

        b. Total costs of joint processing and further processing are relevant.

        c. All costs incurred prior to the split off point are relevant.

        d. The most profitable outcome can be to further process some separately identifiable products beyond the split off point, but sell others at the split off point.

        e. None of the above.

        multiple choice questions 1 which of the following is not a 278587

        Multiple Choice Questions

        1. Which of the following is not a step in the short run decision making model?

        a. Defining the problem

        b. Identifying alternatives

        c. Identifying the costs and benefits of feasible alternatives

        d. Assessing qualitative factors

        e. All of the above are steps in the short run decision making model.

        2. Costs that cannot be affected by any future action are called

        a. Differential costs.

        b. Relevant costs.

        c. Inventory costs.

        d. Sunk costs.

        e. Joint costs.

        3. Sandy is considering moving from her apartment into a small house with a fenced yard. The apartment is noisy, and she has difficulty studying. In addition, the fenced yard would be great for her dog. The distance from school is much the same from the house and from the apartment. The apartment costs $750 per month, and she has two months remaining on her lease. The lease cannot be broken, so Sandy must pay the last two months of rent whether she lives there or not. The rent for the house is $450 per month, plus utilities, which should average $100 per month. The apartment is furnished; the house is not. If Sandy moves into the house, she will need to buy a bed, dresser, desk, and chair immediately. She thinks that she can pick up some used furniture for a good price. Which of the following costs is irrelevant to Sandy’s decision to stay in the apartment or move to the house?

        a. House rent of $450 per month

        b. Utilities for the house of $100 per month

        c. The noise in the apartment house

        d. The cost of the used furniture

        e. The last two months of rent in the apartment

        4. Please refer to the information in Question 13 3. Which of the following is a qualitative factor?

        a. House rent of $450 per month

        b. Utilities for the house of $100 per month

        c. The noise in the apartment house

        d. The cost of the used furniture

        e. The last two months of rent in the apartment

        5. Please refer to the information in Question 13 3. Suppose that the apartment building was within walking distance to campus and the house was five miles away. Sandy does not own a car. How would that affect her decision?

        a. It would make the apartment more desirable.

        b. It would make the house more desirable.

        c. It would make both choices less desirable.

        d. It would make both choices more desirable.

        e. It would have no effect on the decision; buying or not buying a car is a separate decision.

        6. Which of the following is a true statement?

        a. Fixed costs are always irrelevant.

        b. Variable costs are always relevant.

        c. Step costs may be relevant if an alternative requires moving outside the existing relevant range.

        d. Usually, variable costs are irrelevant.

        e. All of the above.

        multiple product breakeven analysis florida favorites company pr 278588

        Multiple product breakeven analysis Florida Favorites Company produces toy alligators and toy dolphins. Fixed costs are $1,290,000 per year. Sales revenue and variable costs per unit are as follow:

        ?



        Required

        (a) Suppose the company currently sells 140,000 alligators per year and 60,000 dolphins per year. Assuming the sales mix stays constant, how many alligators and dolphins must the company sell to break even per year?

        (b) Suppose the company currently sells 60,000 alligators per year and 140,000 dolphins per year. Assuming the sales mix stays constant, how many alligators and dolphins must the company sell to break even per year?

        (c) Explain why the total number of toys needed to break even in part a is the same as or different from the number in partb.

        nature place operates a commercial plant nursery where it propa 278598

        Nature Place operates a commercial plant nursery, where it propagates plants for garden centers throughout the region. Nature Place has $5,100,000 in assets. Its yearly fixed costs are $650,000 and the variable costs for the potting soil, container, label, seedling, and labor for each gallon size plant total $1.40. Nature Place’s volume is currently 480,000 units. Competitors offer the same plants, at the same quality, to garden centers for $3.75 each. Garden centers then mark them up to sell to the public for $7 to $10, depending on the type of plant.

        Requirements

        1. Nature Place’s owners want to earn a 11% return on the company’s assets. What is Nature Place’s target full cost?

        2. Given Nature Place’s current costs, will its owners be able to achieve their target profit?

        3. Assume Nature Place has identified ways to cut its variable costs to $1.25 per unit. What is its new target fixed cost? Will this decrease in variable costs allow the company to achieve its target profit?

        4. Nature Place started an aggressive advertising campaign strategy to differentiate its plants from those grown by other nurseries. Monrovia Plants made this strategy work so Nature Place has decided to try it, too. Nature Place does not expect volume to be affected, but it hopes to gain more control over pricing. If Nature Place has to spend $125,000 this year to advertise, and its variable costs continue to be $1.25 per unit, what will its cost plus price be? Do you think Nature Place will be able to sell its plants to garden centers at the cost plus price? Why or why not?

        ol salt enterprises produces 1 000 sailboats per year although 278604

        Ol’ Salt Enterprises produces 1,000 sailboats per year. Although the company currently buys sails for the sailboats (one set of sails per boat), it is considering making sails in some space that it does not currently use. The company purchases each set of sails for $300. It could make the sails for variable costs of $250 per set, plus it would allocate $200,000 of fixed costs per year to the sail making operation. However, this $200,000 is not a differential cost of making sails; it is part of the costs the company already incurs that it would allocate away from sailboat manufacture to sail making.

        a. Prepare a differential analysis to show whether Ol’ Salt Enterprises should make or buy the sails. What should you recommend to management? Explain why the $200,000 fixed costs allocated to sail making is or is not relevant to the decision.

        b. If Ol’ Salt buys the sails, then it would have unused factory space. Suppose Ol’ Salt received an opportunity to rent out this unused factory space for $80,000 per year.

        Would that affect your recommendation in part a.?

        one of the original online travel agency sites travelocity has 278610

        One of the original online travel agency sites, Travelocity, has been bookmarked by millions of people seeking low prices on airline tickets, hotel rooms, cruises, and rental cars. The site books $10 billion worth of travel annually to destinations near and far. Customers can search for flights on six major carriers, read descriptions before reserving at one of 20,000 participating hotels, compare car rental prices, and click to browse and buy specially priced travel packages.

        1. Each year, Travelocity helps millions of customers find low prices on airline tickets, hotel rooms, cruises, and rental cars by providing a website that is easy to use. What type of business model is Travelocity using? Support your answer.

        2. Today, competition between Internet travel firms such as Travelocity, Expedia, and other online travel agencies has never been greater. What steps has Travelocity taken to retain its market share and increase revenues and profits?

        3. Why would Travelocity publicize the availability of telephone customer service when higher call volume raises the company’s costs?

        outsourcing and ethics hollenberry inc is a successful mail o 278614

        Outsourcing and ethics Hollenberry, Inc., is a successful mail order catalog business with customers worldwide. The company’s headquarters is in a small town some distance from any major metropolitan area. Sales have grown steadily over the years, and the call center facilities are currently inadequate for the sales volume. Management is deciding whether to outsource the call center operations to a company specializing in such operations. If the call center is outsourced, most of the current employees would lose their jobs because they do not wish to relocate to the new call center location, close to a major metropolitan area. Many of the employees have been with Hollenberry for more than 20 years. Regardless of where the call center is located, customers will call a toll free phone number. If the call center is outsourced, however, more multilingual operators would be available. Hollenberry has identified the following costs of operating the call center in house:

        Labor ………………………………$650,000

        Building rent………………………… 60,000

        Phone charges……………………….. 35,000

        Other overhead costs………………… 42,000

        If the call center is outsourced, the related office equipment would be sold to the new call center operations for $20,000. The equipment was originally purchased at a cost of $100,000. The building will no longer be rented, and call center employees will have the opportunity to transfer to the outside call center, in which case their salaries will be paid by the outside call center. The other overhead costs are associated with maintaining the building and office equipment for the current call center.

        If Hollenberry outsources the call center and the same number and pattern of calls occur next year, Hollenberry will pay the new call center firm $700,000 for the year.

        Required

        (a) What costs are relevant to the decision to outsource the call center?

        (b) What qualitative factors are important in this decision?

        (c) What should Hollenberry do? Provide reasons for your recommendation.

        pagilla inc manufactures croquet sets a national sporting go 278617

        Pagilla, Inc., manufactures croquet sets. A national sporting goods chain recently submitted a special order for 4,000 croquet sets. Pagilla was not operating at capacity and needed the extra business. Unfortunately, the order’s offering price of $21 per croquet set was below the cost to produce the sets. The controller was opposed to taking a loss on the deal.

        However, the personnel manager argued in favor of accepting the order even though a loss would be incurred; it would avoid the problem of layoffs and would help maintain the community image of the company. The full cost to produce a croquet set is as follows:

        Direct materials ………….$ 7.90

        Direct labor ………………..5.40

        Variable overhead …………4.75

        Fixed overhead ……………3.10

        Total ……………………$21.15

        No variable selling or administrative expenses would be associated with the order. Non unit level activity costs are a small percentage of total costs and are therefore not considered.

        Required:

        1. Assume that the company would accept the order only if it increased total profits. Should the company accept or reject the order? Provide supporting computations.

        2. Consider the personnel manager’s concerns. Discuss the merits of accepting the order even if it decreases total profits.

        product mix and overtime decisions excel corporation manufacture 278640

        Product mix and overtime decisions Excel Corporation manufactures three products at its plant. The plant capacity is limited to 120,000 machine hours per year on a single shift basis. Direct material and direct labor costs are variable. The following data are available for planning purposes:

        ?

        Required

        (a) Given the capacity constraint, determine the production levels for the three products that will maximize profits.

        (b) If the company authorizes overtime in order to produce more units of XL3, the direct labor cost per unit will be higher by 50% because of the overtime premium. Materials cost and variable overhead cost per unit will be the same for overtime production as regular production. Is it worthwhile operatingovertime?

        product mix decision aramis aromatics company produces and sells 278642

        Product mix decision Aramis Aromatics Company produces and sells its product AA100 to well known cosmetics companies for $940 per ton. The marketing manager is considering the possibility of refining AA100 further into finer perfumes before selling them to the cosmetics companies. Product AA101 is expected to command a price of $1,500 per ton and AA102 a price of $1,700 per ton. The maximum expected demand is 400 tons for AA101 and 100 tons for AA102.

        The annual plant capacity of 2,400 hours is fully utilized at present to manufacture 600 tons of AA100. The marketing manager proposed that Aramis sell 300 tons of AA100, 100 tons of AA101, and 75 tons of AA102 in the next year. It requires 4 hours of capacity to make 1 ton of AA100, 2 hours to refine 1 ton of AA100 further into AA101, and 4 hours to refine 1 ton of AA100 into AA102 instead. The plant accountant has prepared the following information for the three products:

        ?



        Required

        (a) Determine the contribution margin for each product.

        (b) Determine the production levels for the three products under the present constraint on plant capacity that will maximize total contribution.

        (c) Suppose a customer, Cosmos Cosmetics Company, is very interested in the new product AA101. It has offered to sign a long term contract for 400 tons of AA101. It is also willing to pay a higher price if the entire plant capacity is dedicated to the production of AA101. What is the price for AA101 at which Aramis is indifferent between its current production of AA100 and dedicating its entire capacity to the production of AA101 for Cosmos?

        (d) Suppose, instead, that the price of AA101 is $1,500 per ton and that the capacity can be increased temporarily by 600 hours if the plant is operated overtime. Overtime premium payments to workers and supervisors will increase direct labor and variable manufacturing overhead costs by 50% for all products. All other costs will remain unchanged. Is it worthwhile operating the plant overtime? If the plant is operated overtime for 600 hours, what are the optimal production levels for the threeproducts?

        managerial accounting cash budget cost of goods sold and finished goods inventory 429132

        1. Sales
        2012 Actual Sales 2013 Estimated Sales
        Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May
        Units 7,835 7,970 7,450 7,090 8,320 9,070 10,120
        The selling price per unit has remained constant for the past year and is expected to
        remain unchanged throughout the first quarter of 2013 at an amount of $68.99
        2. Cash Collection Policy
        Total sales consist of the following:
        Cash sales: 5%
        Credit sales: 95%
        Credit collections are as follows:
        In the month following the month of sale: 75%
        In the second month following the month of sale: 25%
        The Company does not have any bad debts.
        3. Production Policy
        The Company’s policy is to produce during each month, enough units to meet the current
        month’s sales as well as a desired inventory at the end of the month which should be
        equal to 23% of next month’s estimated sales. At the end of December 2012, the finished
        goods inventory consisted of 1,714 units at a cost each of $40.50.
        4. Raw Materials Purchasing Policy
        Each month the Company purchases enough raw materials to meet that month’s
        production requirements and an amount equal to 25% of the next month’s estimated
        production requirements. Each unit of finished product requires 2.83 pounds of raw
        materials. Raw materials are purchased at a cost of $1.38 per pound. On December 31,
        2012, there were enough materials in inventory to meet 20% of January 2013’s
        production requirements.
        Payments are made as follows:
        In the month of purchase: 80%
        In the following month the balance: 20%
        The accounts payable balance of $5,754.60 as of December 31, 2012, represents 20% of
        purchases made in December 2012 to be paid in January 2013.
        5. Direct Labor Costs
        Direct labor hours required per unit of finished product: 1.75
        Average rate per direct labor hour: $ 10.25
        6. Manufacturing Overhead
        The Company applies variable manufacturing overhead cost at the rate of 120% of direct
        labor cost and fixed factory overhead on the basis of the number of direct labor hours.
        The company has the following fixed overhead expenses per month:
        Factory supervisor’s salary $ 54,000.00
        Factory rent 6,000.00
        Factory insurance 6,500.00
        Depreciation of factory equipment 600.00
        All manufacturing overhead costs, except depreciation, are paid for in cash during the
        month in which they are incurred.
        7. Selling and Administrative Expenses
        Variable selling expenses are:
        Freight out $ 0.80 per unit
        Sales commissions 1% of sales
        Fixed selling and administrative expenses per month are:
        Salaries $ 8,700.00
        Rent 1,800.00
        Advertising 150.00
        Insurance 250.00
        Depreciation (excluding depreciation of
        computer to be purchased at the end
        of January 2013 10,050.00
        8. Income Taxes
        Combined tax rate 30% of Income before taxes
        9. Capital Expenditures
        The Company expects to buy a new computer on January 31, 2013, for use in the sales and
        administrative offices at a cost of $180,000.00, which will be paid in cash. Monthly
        depreciation expense will be an additional $3,000.00 .
        10. Financing Policy
        On March 31, 2013, the Company is scheduled to pay $300,000.00 , of the long-term notes
        payable plus interest expense for the first quarter at a rate of 12%
        With respect to short-term borrowing, the Company’s policy is to borrow at the beginning
        of a month with an anticipated cash deficiency. A minimum cash balance of $25,000.00 is
        required of the end of each month. The Company repays the principal of such short-term
        borrowing at the end of the first following month to the extent of anticipated excess cash.
        Interest must be paid at the beginning of the following month at a rate of 12%. Borrowing
        and principal repayments are made in multiples of $1,000.00 .
        11. Investing Policy
        The Company invests any cash balance in excess of minimum requirements in marketable
        securities at the beginning of any month where such surplus is anticipated. Investments
        earn interest of the rate of 6% per annum which is credited to our account by the bank at
        the beginning of the following month. You may assume that the balance of Marketable
        Securities at December 31, 2012, was outstanding throughout the entire month.
        12. General Information
        Use proper rounding and show two (2) decimal places of accuracy on dollar amounts.
        Round up and show whole amounts on all other figures.

        WHAT NEEDS TO GET DONE:

        1 Cost of Goods Sold & Ending Finished Goods Inventory calculations assuming FIFO.
        2 Budgeted Income Statement for the entire quarter (not month by month)

        The Sales budget, materials budget, manufacturing overhead and selling and administrative expenses have all been completed but I’m having trouble with my numbers on these two.

        accouting queston part 2 45 minutes multiple questions 429136

        1. In which section of the balance sheet would treasury stock be reported? (Points : 2)

        Fixed assets
        Long term liabilities
        Stockholders’ equity
        Intangible assets

        2. The charter of a corporation provides for the issuance of 100,000 shares of common stock. Assume that 60,000 shares were originally issued and 5,000 were subsequently reacquired. What is the number of shares outstanding? (Points : 2)

        5,000
        100,000
        60,000
        55,000

        3. Payroll taxes levied against employees become liabilities (Points : 2)

        the first of the following month.
        at the time the liability for the employee’s wages is paid.
        when earned by the employee.
        at the end of an accounting period.

        4. What options does a business have when financing operations? (Points : 2)

        Debt financing
        Equity financing
        Asset financing
        Both debt financing and equity financing

        5. The liability for a dividend is recorded on which of the following dates? (Points : 2)

        The date of record
        The date of payment
        The date of announcement
        The date of declaration

        6. The primary purpose of a stock split is to (Points : 2)

        increase paid in capital.
        reduce the market price of the stock per share.
        increase the market price of the stock per share.
        increase retained earnings.

        7. Current liabilities are (Points : 2)

        due but not receivable for more than one year.
        due but not payable for more than one year.
        due and receivable within one year.
        due and payable within one year.

        8. Where is interest expense listed on the income statement? (Points : 2)

        Other expense section
        Cost of merchandise sold
        Operating expenses
        Interest expense is on the balance sheet, not the income statement.

        9. The charter of a corporation provides for the issuance of 100,000 shares of common stock. Assume that 40,000 shares were originally issued and 5,000 were subsequently reacquired. What is the number of shares outstanding? (Points : 2)

        5,000
        35,000
        45,000
        55,000

        10. An employee receives an hourly rate of $27, with time and a half for all hours worked in excess of 40 during a week. Payroll data for the current week are as follows: hours worked, 46; federal income tax withheld, $350; cumulative earnings for year prior to current week, $99,700; social security tax rate, 6.0% on maximum of $106,800; and Medicare tax rate, 1.5% on all earnings. What is the net pay for the employee? (Points : 2)

        $798.85
        $873.77
        $953.16
        $1,223.77

        spade company 429148

        1.) Spade Company recorded the following events last year:

        Insurance of shares of the company’s own common stock $210,000
        Purchase of long term investment $96,000
        Dividends paid to the company’s own shareholders $55,800
        Cash paid to suppliers for inventory purchases $3,200
        Repayment of principal on the company’s own bonds $214,000
        Interest paid to lenders $28,800
        Collection by Spade of a loan made to another company $226,000
        Purchase of equipment $550,000

        On the statement of cash flows, some of these events are classified as operating activities, some are classified as investing activities, and some are classified as financing activities.

        Based solely on the information above, the net cash provided by (used in) financing activities on the statement of cash flows would be: (PLEASE SHOW WORK TO GET RATED!!!)

        $69,000
        $(59,800)
        $1,383,800
        $(141,400)

        accounting multiple questions this is final exam i cannot afford to get a bad grade 429164

        1. Which statement is normally prepared first? (Points : 3)

        Income statement
        Balance sheet
        Statement of cash flows
        Retained earnings statement

        2. When a business borrows money, it incurs a(n) (Points : 3)

        tax.
        liability.
        cash payment.
        all of these.

        3. More than 70% of businesses are organized as what type of business? (Points : 3)

        Not for profit
        Corporation
        Partnership
        Sole proprietorship

        4. Brennan, Inc. had revenues of $234,000, expenses of $175,000, and dividends of $40,000 during 2009. Which of the following statements is correct? (Points : 3)

        Net income for 2009 totaled $19,000.
        Net income for 2009 totaled $59,000.
        Total retained earnings increased by $59,000 during 2009.
        Total retained earnings decreased by $40,000 during 2009.

        5. The statement of cash flows is integrated with the balance sheet because (Points : 3)

        the cash at the beginning of the period plus or minus the cash flows from operating, investing, and financing activities equals the end of period cash reported on the balance sheet.
        the cash at the beginning of the period plus or minus the net income equals the end of period cash reported on the balance sheet.
        the cash at the beginning of the period plus or minus assets and liabilities equals the end of period cash reported on the balance sheet.
        the cash at the beginning of the period plus or minus the cash flows from operating activities equals the end of period cash reported on the balance sheet.

        6. The basic financial statements do NOT include the (Points : 3)

        income statement.
        tax return
        balance sheet.
        statement of cash flows.

        7. A __________ is an economic event that under generally accepted accounting principles affects an element of the financial statements and must be recorded. (Points : 3)

        framework
        control
        set of rules
        transaction

        8. The payment of a liability (Points : 3)

        decreases assets and stockholders’ equity.
        increases assets and decreases liabilities.
        decreases assets and increases liabilities.
        decreases assets and decreases liabilities.

        9. Co. received $1,000 from Newbie as rent for the use of a building owned by UNI. How does this transaction affect UNI’s accounts if UNI recognizes a liability? (Points : 3)

        Cash is increased and revenue is increased.
        Cash is increased and revenue is decreased.
        Cash is increased and unearned revenue is increased.
        It is not recorded.

        10. Depreciation Expense and Accumulated Depreciation are classified, respectively, as (Points : 3)

        expense and contra asset.
        asset and contra liability.
        revenue and asset.
        contra asset and expense.

        11. Deferred expenses (prepaid expenses) are items initially recorded as assets but are expected to become __________ over time. (Points : 3)

        Liabilities
        Assets
        stockholders%u2019 equity
        Expenses

        12. A&M Co. provided services of $1,000,000 to clients on account. How does this transaction affect A&M%u2019s accounts? (Points : 3)

        Increase accounts receivable and cash by $1,000,000 each
        Increase accounts receivable and revenues by $1,000,000 each
        Increase accounts receivable and unearned revenues by $1,000,000 each
        No effect at this time

        13. Multiple step income statements show: (Points : 3)

        gross profit but not income from operations.
        neither gross profit nor income from operations.
        both gross profit and income from operations.
        income from operations but not gross profit.

        14. Since merchandise inventory is normally sold within a year, how is it reported on the balance sheet? (Points : 3)

        As a revenue
        As the cost of merchandise sold
        It does not appear on the Balance Sheet
        As a current asset

        15. The credit terms of a sale are normally indicated on a(n) (Points : 3)

        purchase order.
        invoice.
        bill of lading.
        account receivable.

        16. Inventory shortage is recorded when (Points : 3)

        merchandise is returned by a buyer.
        merchandise purchased from a seller is incomplete or short.
        merchandise is returned to a seller.
        there is a difference between a physical count of inventory and inventory records.

        17. The bank reconciliation (Points : 3)

        should be prepared by an employee who records cash transactions.
        is part of the internal control system.
        is for information purposes only.
        is sent to the bank for verification.

        18. A special cash fund used to make small payments that occur frequently is called a(n) (Points : 3)

        operating expenses fund.
        change fund.
        market fund.
        petty cash fund.

        19. The objectives of internal control are to (Points : 3)

        control the internal organization of the accounting department personnel and equipment.
        provide reasonable assurance that assets are safeguarded, information is processed accurately, and laws and regulations are complied with.
        prevent fraud and promote the social interest of the company.
        provide control over %u201Cinternal use only%u201D reports and employee internal conduct.

        20. When a firm uses internal auditors, it is adhering to which of the following internal control elements? (Points : 3)

        Risk assessment
        Proofs and security measures
        Monitoring
        Separating responsibilities for related operations

        21. What type of account is Allowance for Doubtful Accounts? (Points : 3)

        Contra asset
        Asset
        Revenue
        Expense

        22. Merchandise inventory is reported on the balance sheet in the section entitled (Points : 3)

        current assets.
        fixed assets.
        current liabilities.
        stockholders’ equity.

        23. Receivables are usually a significant portion of (Points : 3)

        total current liabilities.
        total liabilities.
        total current assets.
        total assets.

        24. The inventory data for an item for November are:

        Nov.1 Inventory 25 units at $20
        10 Purchased 30 units at $21
        30 Purchased 10 units at $22
        Sold 35 units

        Using the first in, first out method, what is the cost of the merchandise inventory of 30 units on November 30? (Points : 3)

        $640
        $605
        $623
        $660

        25. All amounts paid to get an asset in place and ready for use are referred to as (Points : 3)

        capital expenditures.
        revenue expenditures.
        residual value.
        cost of an asset.

        26. Fixed assets are ordinarily presented in the balance sheet (Points : 3)

        at current market values.
        at replacement costs.
        at cost less accumulated depreciation.
        in a separate section along with intangible assets.

        27. Goodwill is (Points : 3)

        amortized similar to other intangibles.
        only written down if an impairment in value occurs.
        charged to expense immediately.
        amortized over 40 years or its economic life, whichever is shorter.

        28. If a capital expenditure is treated as a revenue expenditure, then (Points : 3)

        expenses are overstated and owners’ equity is understated.
        expenses are overstated and assets are overstated.
        expenses are understated and owners’ equity is overstated.
        net income is overstated and owners’ equity is understated.

        29. A bond indenture is (Points : 3)

        a contract between the corporation issuing the bonds and the underwriters selling
        the bonds.
        the amount due at the maturity date of the bonds.
        a contract between the corporation issuing the bonds and the bondholders.
        the amount for which the corporation can buy back the bonds prior to the maturity date.

        30. Gross earnings for a payroll period less payroll deductions are referred to as (Points : 3)

        overtime pay.
        bonus pay.
        gross pay.
        net pay.

        31. How is treasury stock shown on the balance sheet? (Points : 3)

        As an asset
        As a decrease in stockholders’ equity
        As an increase in stockholders’ equity
        Treasury stock is not shown on the balance sheet.

        32. Current liabilities are (Points : 3)

        due but not receivable for more than one year.
        due but not payable for more than one year.
        due and receivable within one year.
        due and payable within one year.

        33. The total earnings of an employee for a payroll period are referred to as (Points : 3)

        take home pay.
        pay net of taxes.
        net pay.
        gross pay.

        34. Where is interest expense listed on the income statement? (Points : 3)

        Other expense section
        Cost of merchandise sold
        Operating expenses
        Interest expense is on the balance sheet, not the income statement.

        35. A corporation has 50,000 shares of $100 par value stock outstanding. If the corporation issues a 4 for 1 stock split, the number of shares outstanding after the split will be (Points : 3)

        200,000 shares.
        50,000 shares.
        250,000 shares.
        12,500 shares.

        this is the correct 35 points multiple choice accouting have 1 hour 429168

        1. Which statement is normally prepared first? (Points : 3) Income statement Balance sheet Statement of cash flows Retained earnings statement 2. When a business borrows money, it incurs a(n) (Points : 3) tax. liability. cash payment. all of these. 3. More than 70% of businesses are organized as what type of business? (Points : 3) Not for profit Corporation Partnership Sole proprietorship 4. Brennan, Inc. had revenues of $234,000, expenses of $175,000, and dividends of $40,000 during 2009. Which of the following statements is correct? (Points : 3) Net income for 2009 totaled $19,000. Net income for 2009 totaled $59,000. Total retained earnings increased by $59,000 during 2009. Total retained earnings decreased by $40,000 during 2009. 5. The statement of cash flows is integrated with the balance sheet because (Points : 3) the cash at the beginning of the period plus or minus the cash flows from operating, investing, and financing activities equals the end of period cash reported on the balance sheet. the cash at the beginning of the period plus or minus the net income equals the end of period cash reported on the balance sheet. the cash at the beginning of the period plus or minus assets and liabilities equals the end of period cash reported on the balance sheet. the cash at the beginning of the period plus or minus the cash flows from operating activities equals the end of period cash reported on the balance sheet. 6. The basic financial statements do NOT include the (Points : 3) income statement. tax return balance sheet. statement of cash flows. 7. A __________ is an economic event that under generally accepted accounting principles affects an element of the financial statements and must be recorded. (Points : 3) framework control set of rules transaction 8. The payment of a liability (Points : 3) decreases assets and stockholders’ equity. increases assets and decreases liabilities. decreases assets and increases liabilities. decreases assets and decreases liabilities. 9. Co. received $1,000 from Newbie as rent for the use of a building owned by UNI. How does this transaction affect UNI’s accounts if UNI recognizes a liability? (Points : 3) Cash is increased and revenue is increased. Cash is increased and revenue is decreased. Cash is increased and unearned revenue is increased. It is not recorded. 10. Depreciation Expense and Accumulated Depreciation are classified, respectively, as (Points : 3) expense and contra asset. asset and contra liability. revenue and asset. contra asset and expense. 11. Deferred expenses (prepaid expenses) are items initially recorded as assets but are expected to become __________ over time. (Points : 3) Liabilities Assets stockholders%u2019 equity Expenses 12. A&M Co. provided services of $1,000,000 to clients on account. How does this transaction affect A&M%u2019s accounts? (Points : 3) Increase accounts receivable and cash by $1,000,000 each Increase accounts receivable and revenues by $1,000,000 each Increase accounts receivable and unearned revenues by $1,000,000 each No effect at this time 13. Multiple step income statements show: (Points : 3) gross profit but not income from operations. neither gross profit nor income from operations. both gross profit and income from operations. income from operations but not gross profit. 14. Since merchandise inventory is normally sold within a year, how is it reported on the balance sheet? (Points : 3) As a revenue As the cost of merchandise sold It does not appear on the Balance Sheet As a current asset 15. The credit terms of a sale are normally indicated on a(n) (Points : 3) purchase order. invoice. bill of lading. account receivable. 16. Inventory shortage is recorded when (Points : 3) merchandise is returned by a buyer. merchandise purchased from a seller is incomplete or short. merchandise is returned to a seller. there is a difference between a physical count of inventory and inventory records. 17. The bank reconciliation (Points : 3) should be prepared by an employee who records cash transactions. is part of the internal control system. is for information purposes only. is sent to the bank for verification. 18. A special cash fund used to make small payments that occur frequently is called a(n) (Points : 3) operating expenses fund. change fund. market fund. petty cash fund. 19. The objectives of internal control are to (Points : 3) control the internal organization of the accounting department personnel and equipment. provide reasonable assurance that assets are safeguarded, information is processed accurately, and laws and regulations are complied with. prevent fraud and promote the social interest of the company. provide control over %u201Cinternal use only%u201D reports and employee internal conduct. 20. When a firm uses internal auditors, it is adhering to which of the following internal control elements? (Points : 3) Risk assessment Proofs and security measures Monitoring Separating responsibilities for related operations 21. What type of account is Allowance for Doubtful Accounts? (Points : 3) Contra asset Asset Revenue Expense 22. Merchandise inventory is reported on the balance sheet in the section entitled (Points : 3) current assets. fixed assets. current liabilities. stockholders’ equity. 23. Receivables are usually a significant portion of (Points : 3) total current liabilities. total liabilities. total current assets. total assets. 24. The inventory data for an item for November are: Nov.1 Inventory 25 units at $20 10 Purchased 30 units at $21 30 Purchased 10 units at $22 Sold 35 units Using the first in, first out method, what is the cost of the merchandise inventory of 30 units on November 30? (Points : 3) $640 $605 $623 $660 25. All amounts paid to get an asset in place and ready for use are referred to as (Points : 3) capital expenditures. revenue expenditures. residual value. cost of an asset. 26. Fixed assets are ordinarily presented in the balance sheet (Points : 3) at current market values. at replacement costs. at cost less accumulated depreciation. in a separate section along with intangible assets. 27. Goodwill is (Points : 3) amortized similar to other intangibles. only written down if an impairment in value occurs. charged to expense immediately. amortized over 40 years or its economic life, whichever is shorter. 28. If a capital expenditure is treated as a revenue expenditure, then (Points : 3) expenses are overstated and owners’ equity is understated. expenses are overstated and assets are overstated. expenses are understated and owners’ equity is overstated. net income is overstated and owners’ equity is understated. 29. A bond indenture is (Points : 3) a contract between the corporation issuing the bonds and the underwriters selling the bonds. the amount due at the maturity date of the bonds. a contract between the corporation issuing the bonds and the bondholders. the amount for which the corporation can buy back the bonds prior to the maturity date. 30. Gross earnings for a payroll period less payroll deductions are referred to as (Points : 3) overtime pay. bonus pay. gross pay. net pay. 31. How is treasury stock shown on the balance sheet? (Points : 3) As an asset As a decrease in stockholders’ equity As an increase in stockholders’ equity Treasury stock is not shown on the balance sheet. 32. Current liabilities are (Points : 3) due but not receivable for more than one year. due but not payable for more than one year. due and receivable within one year. due and payable within one year. 33. The total earnings of an employee for a payroll period are referred to as (Points : 3) take home pay. pay net of taxes. net pay. gross pay. 34. Where is interest expense listed on the income statement? (Points : 3) Other expense section Cost of merchandise sold Operating expenses Interest expense is on the balance sheet, not the income statement. 35. A corporation has 50,000 shares of $100 par value stock outstanding. If the corporation issues a 4 for 1 stock split, the number of shares outstanding after the split will be (Points : 3) 200,000 shares. 50,000 shares. 250,000 shares. 12,500 shares.

        help taxes 429174

        1. If a taxpayer works for two separate employers, how much in FUTA taxes is each employer responsible to remit in the name of the taxpayer? (Points : 1) Only the first employer is required to remit FUTA taxes on the wages earned from the first job.
        Both employers must remit FUTA taxes on the first $7,000 in wages they pay to the taxpayer.
        The first employer remits 5.4% on the first $7,000 in wages while the second employer remits only .8% on the first $7,000 in wages to equal the 6.2% rate.
        The first employer remits FUTA tax on the first $7,000 in wages and the second employer remits FUTA tax on the next $7,000 in wages.

        2. Sandra is single and her son Julius is 12 years old. If her AGI is $79,000, what amount of child tax credit can Sandra claim? (Points : 1)

        $0.
        $500.
        $800.
        $1,000.

        3. Regarding a full or partial rollover of assets from one retirement plan to another retirement plan: (Points : 1)

        Rollovers are normally taxable to the beneficiary.
        Rollovers are permitted only in unusual circumstances.
        A tax free rollover can be made from a traditional IRA to another traditional IRA.
        A tax free rollover can be made from a traditional IRA to a Roth IRA.

        4. Regarding a Coverdell Education Savings Account: (Points : 1)

        Distributions are tax free to the beneficiary if they are used for his or her qualified education expenses.
        Qualified education expenses include required tuition, fees, books, supplies, and equipment at an eligible educational institution.
        Qualified expenses must be reduced by scholarships or other tax free income.
        All of the above.

        5. Kobe is a single dad with two dependent children, Lizzie, age 7 and Leslie, age 3. He has AGI of $51,000 and paid $6,300 to a qualified day care center. What amount of credit can Kobe receive for the child and dependent care credit? (Points : 1)

        $600.
        $1,200.
        $1,260.
        $6,300.

        6. In order to obtain and retain qualified status, a pension or profit sharing plan must not discriminate in favor of highly compensated employees which include: (Points : 1)

        Employees who own more than 5% of the corporation’s stock.
        Employees who received over $85,000 compensation in the previous year.
        Employees who were in the top 25% of employees based on compensation.
        None of the above.

        7. DJ and Nicolette paid $1,600 in qualifying expenses for their daughter Nicole to attend the University of Nevada. Nicole is a sophomore. DJ and Nicolette’s AGI is $95,000. What is their maximum allowable Hope credit after the credit phase out based on AGI is taken into account? (Points : 1)

        $0.
        $1,400.
        $1,600.
        $1,650.

        8. Employers with a payroll tax liability of less than $2,500 at the end of any quarter pay their tax liability: (Points : 1)

        Directly to the authorized depository after the end of the quarter when Form 941 is filed.
        Directly to the authorized depository on the same day the Form 941 is mailed.
        Directly to the Internal Revenue Service when they file Form 941.
        Directly only if they use the EFTPS form of payment before Form 941 is filed.

        9. Joseph paid $1,750 in qualifying expenses for his daughter who attended a community college. How much is Joseph’s lifetime learning credit without regard to AGI limitations or other credits? (Points : 1)

        $250.
        $350
        $825.
        $1,375

        10. Supplemental wages are subject to the following taxes: (Points : 1)

        FICA taxes.
        Federal withholding taxes.
        Unemployment taxes.
        All of the above.

        incremental analysis 429185

        1.)The per unit standards for direct labor are 2 direct labor hours at $15 per hour. If in producing 1,800 units, the actual direct labor cost was $48,000 for 3,000 direct labor hours worked, the total direct labor variance is

        2.)The standard number of hours that should have been worked for the output attained is 6,000 direct labor hours and the actual number of direct labor hours worked was 6,300. If the direct labor price variance was $3,150 unfavorable, and the standard rate of pay was $9 per direct labor hour, what was the actual rate of pay for direct labor?

        3.)Which one of the following statements is true?

        a.

        There is no correlation of favorable or unfavorable for price and quantity variances.

        b.

        Price and quantity variances move in the same direction. If one is favorable, the others will be as well.

        c.

        If the materials price variance is unfavorable, then the materials quantity variance must also be unfavorable.

        d.

        If the materials price variance is unfavorable, then the materials quantity variance must be favorable.

        4.)Which one of the following describes the total overhead variance?

        a.

        The difference between what was actually incurred and the flexible budget amount

        b.

        The difference between what was actually incurred and the total production budget

        c.

        The difference between the overhead applied and the flexible budget amount

        d.

        The difference between what was actually incurred and overhead applied

        5.)Manufacturing overhead costs are applied to work in process on the basis of

        a.

        ratio of actual variable to fixed costs.

        b.

        standard hours allowed.

        c.

        actual hours worked.

        d.

        actual overhead costs incurred.

        6.)An overhead volume variance is calculated as the difference between normal capacity hours and standard hours allowed

        a.

        divided by actual number of hours worked.

        b.

        times the predetermined fixed overhead rate.

        c.

        times the total predetermined overhead rate.

        d.

        times the predetermined variable overhead rate.

        managerial accounting 429190

        1. Use the following data to find the direct labor efficiency variance.

        Direct labor standard (4 hrs. @ $7/hr.) $28 per unit

        Actual Hours worked per unit 3.5 hours

        Actual Units produced 3,500 units

        Actual rate per hour $7.50

        (A) $6,125 unfavorable
        (B) $12,250 favorable
        (C) $6,125 favorable
        (D) $7,000 favorable
        (E) $7,000 unfavorable

        2. Use the following data to find the direct labor rate variance.

        Direct labor standard (4 hrs. @ $7/hr.) $28 per unit

        Actual hours worked per unit 3.5 hours

        Actual units produced 3,500 units

        Actual rate per hour $7.5

        (A)$12,250 favorable

        (B)$6,125 unfavorable

        (C)$7,000 favorable

        (D)$7,000 unfavorable

        (E)$6,125 favorable

        3. Use the following data to find the total direct labor cost variance.

        Direct labor standard (4 hrs. @ $7/hr.) $28 per unit

        Actual hours worked per unit 3.5 hours

        Actual units produced 3,500 units

        Actual rate per hour $7.5

        (A)$7,000 favorable

        (B)$12,250 favorable

        (C)$7,000 unfavorable

        (D)$6,125 favorable

        (E)$6,125 unfavorable

        4. Actual fixed overhead for a company during March was $77,612. The flexible budget for fixed overhead this period is $78,000 based on a production level of 4,875 units. If the company actually produced 4,300 units, what is the fixed overhead volume variance for March?

        (A) $388 unfavorable

        (B) $9,200 unfavorable
        (C) $9,200 favorable
        (D) $388 favorable
        (E) $8,812 unfavorable

        5. The following company information is available:

        Direct materials used for production 712 pounds

        Standard quantity for units produced 750 pounds

        Standard cost per pound of direct material $48

        Actual cost per pound of direct material $50

        The direct materials quantity variance is:

        (A)$1,424 favorable

        (B)$1,424 unfavorable

        (C)$400 favorable

        (D)$1,824 favorable

        (E)$1,824 unfavorable

        6.

        Direct materials used for production 36,000 gallons

        Standard quantity for units produced 34,400 gallons

        Standard cost per gallon for direct material $6.00

        Actual cost per gallon of direct material $6.10

        The drect materials price variance is:

        (A)$13,200 unfavorable

        (B)$10,000 unfavorable

        (C)$13,200 favorable

        (D)$9,600 unfavorable

        (E)$3,600 unfavorable

        7. Landlubber Company established a standard direct materials cost of 1.5 gallons at $2 per gallon for one unit of its product. During the past month, actual production was 6,500 units. The material quantity variance was $700 favorable and the material price variance was $470 unfavorable. The entry to charge Goods in Process Inventory for the standard material costs during the month and to record the direct material variances in the accounts would include

        (A) a credit to goods in process for $19,500

        (B) A debit to raw materials for $19,500

        (C) a credit to goods in process for $19,270

        (D) a debit to direct material price variance for $470

        (E) a debit to direct material quantity variance for $700

        8. Adams, Inc., uses the following standard to produce a single unit of its product:
        Overhead (2 hrs. @ $3/hr.) = $6
        The flexible budget for overhead is $100,000 plus $1 per direct labor hour. Actual data for the month show overhead costs of $150,000 based on 24,000 units of production. The overhead volume variance is:

        (A)$36,000 unfavorable

        (B)$16,000 unfavorable
        (C)$12,000 favorable
        (D)$4,000 unfavorable
        (E)$10,000 favorable

        help 276265

        Need help solving Exercise Five: On April 1, Paine Co.

        Document Preview:

        Exercise Five: On April 1, Paine Co. began construction of a small building. Payments of $120,000 were made monthly for four months beginning on April 1. The building was completed and ready for occupancy on August 1. For the purpose of determining the amount of interest cost to be capitalized, calculate the weighted average accumulated expenditures on the building by completing the schedule below: Date Expenditures Capitalization Period Weighted Average Expenditures Exercise Six: A machine which cost $200,000 is acquired on October 1, 2010. Its estimated salvage value is $20,000 and its expected life is eight years. Instructions Calculate depreciation expense for 2010 and 2011 by each of the following methods, showing the figures used. (a) Double declining balance (b) Sum of the years’ digits Exercise Seven: In early January 2009, Lerner Corporation applied for a patent, incurring legal costs of $50,000. In January 2010, Lerner incurred $9,000 of legal fees in a successful defense of its patent. Instructions (a) Compute 2009 amortization, 12/31/09 carrying value, 2010 amortization, and 12/31/10 carrying value if the company amortizes the patent over 10 years. (b) Compute the 2011 amortization and the 12/31/11 carrying value, assuming that at the beginning of 2011, based on new market research, Lerner determines that the fair value of the patent is $44,000. Estimated future cash flows from the patent are $45,000 on January 3, 2011.

        Attachments:

        on april 1 paine co began construction of a small building payments of 120 000 276270

        Exercise Five:

        On April 1, Paine Co. began construction of a small building. Payments of $120,000 were made monthly for four months beginning on April 1. The building was completed and ready for occupancy on August 1. For the purpose of determining the amount of interest cost to be capitalized, calculate the weighted average accumulated expenditures on the building by completing the schedule below:

        Date Expenditures Capitalization Period Weighted Average Expenditures

        Exercise Six
        :

        A machine which cost $200,000 is acquired on October 1, 2010. Its estimated salvage value is $20,000 and its expected life is eight years.

        Instructions

        Calculate depreciation expense for 2010 and 2011 by each of the following methods, showing the figures used.

        (a) Double declining balance

        (b) Sum of the years’ digits

        Exercise Seven:

        In early January 2009, Lerner Corporation applied for a patent, incurring legal costs of $50,000. In January 2010, Lerner incurred $9,000 of legal fees in a successful defense of its patent.

        Instructions

        (a) Compute 2009 amortization, 12/31/09 carrying value, 2010 amortization, and 12/31/10 carrying value if the company amortizes the patent over 10 years.

        (b) Compute the 2011 amortization and the 12/31/11 carrying value, assuming that at the beginning of 2011, based on new market research, Lerner determines that the fair value of the patent is $44,000. Estimated future cash flows from the patent are $45,000 on January 3, 2011.

        Document Preview:

        Exercise Five: On April 1, Paine Co. began construction of a small building. Payments of $120,000 were made monthly for four months beginning on April 1. The building was completed and ready for occupancy on August 1. For the purpose of determining the amount of interest cost to be capitalized, calculate the weighted average accumulated expenditures on the building by completing the schedule below: Date Expenditures Capitalization Period Weighted Average Expenditures Exercise Six: A machine which cost $200,000 is acquired on October 1, 2010. Its estimated salvage value is $20,000 and its expected life is eight years. Instructions Calculate depreciation expense for 2010 and 2011 by each of the following methods, showing the figures used. (a) Double declining balance (b) Sum of the years’ digits Exercise Seven: In early January 2009, Lerner Corporation applied for a patent, incurring legal costs of $50,000. In January 2010, Lerner incurred $9,000 of legal fees in a successful defense of its patent. Instructions (a) Compute 2009 amortization, 12/31/09 carrying value, 2010 amortization, and 12/31/10 carrying value if the company amortizes the patent over 10 years. (b) Compute the 2011 amortization and the 12/31/11 carrying value, assuming that at the beginning of 2011, based on new market research, Lerner determines that the fair value of the patent is $44,000. Estimated future cash flows from the patent are $45,000 on January 3, 2011. Page 1 of 2 s patent. Instructions (a) Compute 2009 amortization, 12/31/09 carrying value, 2010 amortization, and 12/31/10 carrying value if the company amortizes the patent over 10 years. (b) Compute the 2011 amortization and the 12/31/11 carrying value, assuming that at the beginning of 2011, based on new market research, Lerner determines that the fair value of the patent is $44,000. Estimated future cash flows from the patent are $45,000 on January 3,…

        Attachments:

        in early january 2009 lerner corporation applied for a patent incurring legal costs 276272

        On April 1, Paine Co. began construction of a small building. Payments of $120,000 were made monthly for four months beginning on April 1. The building was completed and ready for occupancy on August 1. For the purpose of determining the amount of interest cost to be capitalized, calculate the weighted average accumulated expenditures on the building by completing the schedule below:

        Date Expenditures Capitalization Period Weighted Average Expenditures

        Exercise Six
        :

        A machine which cost $200,000 is acquired on October 1, 2010. Its estimated salvage value is $20,000 and its expected life is eight years.

        Instructions

        Calculate depreciation expense for 2010 and 2011 by each of the following methods, showing the figures used.

        (a) Double declining balance

        (b) Sum of the years’ digits

        Exercise Seven:

        In early January 2009, Lerner Corporation applied for a patent, incurring legal costs of $50,000. In January 2010, Lerner incurred $9,000 of legal fees in a successful defense of its patent.

        Instructions

        (a) Compute 2009 amortization, 12/31/09 carrying value, 2010 amortization, and 12/31/10 carrying value if the company amortizes the patent over 10 years.

        (b) Compute the 2011 amortization and the 12/31/11 carrying value, assuming that at the beginning of 2011, based on new market research, Lerner determines that the fair value of the patent is $44,000. Estimated future cash flows from the patent are $45,000 on January 3, 2011.

        Document Preview:

        Exercise Five: On April 1, Paine Co. began construction of a small building. Payments of $120,000 were made monthly for four months beginning on April 1. The building was completed and ready for occupancy on August 1. For the purpose of determining the amount of interest cost to be capitalized, calculate the weighted average accumulated expenditures on the building by completing the schedule below: Date Expenditures Capitalization Period Weighted Average Expenditures Exercise Six: A machine which cost $200,000 is acquired on October 1, 2010. Its estimated salvage value is $20,000 and its expected life is eight years. Instructions Calculate depreciation expense for 2010 and 2011 by each of the following methods, showing the figures used. (a) Double declining balance (b) Sum of the years’ digits Exercise Seven: In early January 2009, Lerner Corporation applied for a patent, incurring legal costs of $50,000. In January 2010, Lerner incurred $9,000 of legal fees in a successful defense of its patent. Instructions (a) Compute 2009 amortization, 12/31/09 carrying value, 2010 amortization, and 12/31/10 carrying value if the company amortizes the patent over 10 years. (b) Compute the 2011 amortization and the 12/31/11 carrying value, assuming that at the beginning of 2011, based on new market research, Lerner determines that the fair value of the patent is $44,000. Estimated future cash flows from the patent are $45,000 on January 3, 2011. Page 1 of 2 s patent. Instructions (a) Compute 2009 amortization, 12/31/09 carrying value, 2010 amortization, and 12/31/10 carrying value if the company amortizes the patent over 10 years. (b) Compute the 2011 amortization and the 12/31/11 carrying value, assuming that at the beginning of 2011, based on new market research, Lerner determines that the fair value of the patent is $44,000. Estimated future cash flows from the patent are $45,000 on January 3,…

        Attachments:

        julie martinez manager of the new retail outlet of super 276279

        Julie Martinez, manager of the new retail outlet of Super Printing, is pondering the management challenges in her new position. Super Printing is a long established printing company in a major metropolitan area. The new Super outlet, located at the edge of the parking lot for Western Business School, represents Super’s attempt to break into the rapidly growing business for retail digital imaging. The Super retail store provides a range of copying and digital imaging services for the business school’s students, faculty, and administrators, plus other retail customers. Super’s primary products are black and white copies of documents. Variation exists even in this basic product, however, as consumers can choose from a variety of paper colors, sizes, and quality. Super recently purchased a machine that prints color copies from digital input. Color copies also can be produced in a variety of sizes, paper quality, and paper types, including transparencies for overhead projection and photographic quality reproductions. Other printing products include business cards, laminated luggage tags, and name badges for conferences, executive programs, and students. In addition to physical printing, the Super center provides fax services by which individuals can both receive and transmit documents. When incoming faxes are received, a store employee calls the recipient, who stops at the outlet to pick up the document. The center also has several personal computers, both Windows based and Macintosh, that students rent by the hour for basic computer processing, Internet access, e mail, and preparing presentations and rA?sumA?s. Each computer is connected to Super’s black and white and color printers, enabling students to produce paper copies of their presentations and rA?sumA?s.

        Super has other machines that assemble printed pages into bound documents. Two different binding types are available. The store also sells a limited selection of office supplies, including paper, envelopes, paper clips, glue, binders, tabs, pens, pencils, and marking pens. Currently, about five employees (including Julie) work at the retail outlet during prime hours (8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M.) with two to four people working the evening shift (5:00 P.M. to midnight) when walk in business is much slower. The number of people working during the evening hours is determined by the anticipated backlog of reproduction work that will be performed during these hours.

        Prices for the various products and services have been set based on those of competitors, such as FedEx Kinko’s and Staples. Julie receives a daily report on total sales, broken down by cash sales, credit card sales, and credit sales to various programs at the business school; however, she currently does not have a report on expenses such as labor, materials, and equipment for each line of business (black and white and color printing, computer services, document preparation, fax services, and sales of office supplies). Thus, Julie is unsure whether each line of business is profitable. Julie is also unsure how efficiently the business is run.

        Further, the different business lines require different quantities and types of capital: equipment such as copying and printing machines, computers, and facsimile machines; physical capital such as office space; and the different inventories of paper types, colors, grades and sizes, and office supplies.

        If the pilot store that Julie is operating is successful, then the parent company will likely try to open many similar outlets near schools and universities throughout the metropolitan area. For this purpose, the parent company wants to know which business lines are the most profitable, including the cost of capital and space required, so that these lines can be featured at each retail outlet. If some business lines are not profitable, then Super probably will not offer those services at newly opened stores unless they are necessary to build retail traffic. Required Identify the management accounting information needs for the following:

        (a) An employee desiring to help serve customers more efficiently and effectively

        (b) Julie Martinez, the manager of the pilot retail outlet

        (c) The president of Super Printing Be sure to address the content, frequency, and level of aggregation of information needed by these different individuals.

        lancaster company manufactures two types of hair conditioners c 276289

        Lancaster Company manufactures two types of hair conditioners, Creemy and Shiney, out of a joint process. The joint (common) costs incurred are $840,000 for a standard production run that generates 360,000 gallons of Creemy and 240,000 gallons of Shiney. Additional processing costs beyond the split off point are $2.80 per gallon for Creemy and $1.80 per gallon for Shiney. Creemy sells for $4.80 per gallon, while Shiney sells for $7.80 per gallon.

        Comida Buena, a supermarket chain, has asked Lancaster to supply it with 480,000 gallons of Shiney at a price of $7.30 per gallon. Comida Buena plans to have the conditioner bottled in 16 ounce bottles with its own Comida Buena label.

        If Lancaster accepts the order, it will save $0.10 per gallon in packaging of Shiney. There is sufficient excess capacity for the order. However, the market for Creemy is saturated, and any additional sales of Creemy would take place at a price of $3.20 per gallon. Assume that no significant non unit level activity costs are incurred.

        Required:

        1. What is the profit normally earned on one production run of Creemy and Shiney?

        2. Should Lancaster accept the special order? Explain.

        leitner inc has four salaried clerks to process purchase orde 276291

        Leitner, Inc., has four salaried clerks to process purchase orders. Each clerk is paid a salary of $27,400 and is capable of processing as many as 8,000 purchase orders per year. Each clerk uses a PC and laser printer in processing orders. Time available on each PC system is sufficient to process 8,000 orders per year. The depreciation on each PC system is $1,800 per year. In addition to the salaries, Leitner spends $20,800 for forms, postage, and other supplies (assuming 32,000 purchase orders are processed). During the year, 29,320 orders were processed.

        Required:

        1. Classify the resources associated with purchasing as flexible or committed.

        2. Compute the total activity availability, and break this into activity usage and unused activity.

        3. Calculate the total cost of resources supplied (activity cost), and break this into the cost of activity used and the cost of unused activity.

        4. (a) Suppose that a large special order will cause an additional 1,000 purchase orders. What purchasing costs are relevant? By how much will purchasing costs increase if the order is accepted? (b) Suppose that the special order causes 4,500 additional purchase orders. How will your answer to part (a) change?

        like the hole in a bagel any hole in finagle 276293

        Like the hole in a bagel, any hole in Finagle A Bagel’s information and accounting systems means less dough for the company. Copresidents Alan Litchman and Laura Trust and their management team could not make timely, informed decisions to build the business profitably without reliable systems for collecting data, processing them, and presenting the results in a meaningful way.

        1. Is Finagle A Bagel collecting data from internal sources, external sources, or both? What cautions apply to the sources of its data?

        2. Finagle A Bagel uses information to track cash, sales revenues, and expenses on a daily basis. How does this type of accounting system encourage effective decision making and discourage store level theft?

        3. As a small business, which of the financial ratios might Finagle A Bagel want to track especially closely? Why?

        4. Do you think the Frequent Finagler card has any effect on Finagle A Bagel’s customer loyalty? For the firm, what are the benefits of the loyalty program?

        make or buy and opportunity cost premier company manufactures ge 278528

        Make or buy and opportunity cost Premier Company manufactures gear model G37, which is used in several of its farm equipment products. Annual production volume of G

        Direct materials costs………… $55

        Direct labor costs……………… 30

        Variable overhead costs……….. 25

        Fixed overhead costs………….. 15

        Total costs…………………… $125

        Alternatively, Premier can purchase gear model G37 from an outside supplier for $120 per unit. If G37 is outsourced, Premier can use the facility where G37 is currently manufactured for production of another gear—model G49. This would save Premier $113,000 in facility rental and other costs presently incurred.

        Required

        Should Premier make or buy G37? By how much will Premier be better off by choosing your decision rather than the alternative?

        make or buy and relevant costs the assembly division of davenpor 278530

        Make or buy and relevant costs The assembly division of Davenport, Inc., is bidding on an order of 50,000 smart phones. The division is eager to get this order because it has a substantial amount of unused plant capacity. The variable cost for each smart phone is $140 in addition to the cost of the display and touchscreen component. The divisional purchasing manager has received two bids for the component. One is from Davenport’s electronics division. This bid is for $35 per unit, although its variable cost is only $30 per unit. The other is from an outside vendor for $34 per unit. Davenport’s electronics division has sufficient unused capacity for this order.

        Required

        (a) Determine the relevant costs for this order for the assembly division under both internal and outsourcing arrangements.

        (b) Determine the relevant costs for this order for Davenport as a company under each of the sourcing arrangements.

        make or buy beau s bistro has a reputation for providing good va 278532

        Make or buy Beau’s Bistro has a reputation for providing good value for its menu prices. The desserts, developed by the pastry chef, are one of the distinctive features of the menu. The pastry chef has just given notice that he will relocate to another city in a month and has volunteered to share some of the dessert recipes with the next pastry chef. Beau has been concerned about the Bistro’s declining profits but is reluctant to raise prices because of the competition he faces. He decided this was an opportune time to consider outsourcing dessert production. Beau solicited bids for dessert production and delivery and is evaluating two bids as well as the alternative of hiring a new pastry chef who would make the desserts in house. The first bid is from a gourmet dessert provider who would fill the Bistro’s current dessert demand for $5,500 per month and would periodically introduce new gourmet desserts. The second bid is from a dessert provider who would provide high quality, traditional desserts to fill Bistro’s current demand (in terms of servings) for $5,000 per month. Beau has identified the following costs per month if the desserts are made in house:

        Ingredients………………… $500

        Pastry chef labor…………. 3,500

        Assistants’ labor…………. 1,500

        Variable overhead…………. 200

        Total……………………. $5,700

        Required

        (a) What qualitative factors are relevant for this decision?

        (b) Would you advise Beau to outsource dessert production? Provide reasons for your decision.

        mallory manufacturing company has a maximum productive capacity 278538

        Mallory Manufacturing Company has a maximum productive capacity of 210,000 units per year. Normal capacity is 180,000 units per year. Standard variable manufacturing costs are $10 per unit. Fixed factory overhead is $360,000 per year. Variable selling expense is $5 per unit, and fixed selling expense is $252,000 per year. The unit sales price is $20. The operating results for the year are as follows: sales, 150,000 units; production, 160,000 units; beginning inventory, 10,000 units. All variances are written off as additions to (or deductions from) the standard cost of sales.

        Required:

        1. What is the break even point expressed in dollar sales?

        2. How many units must be sold to earn a net operating income of $100,000 per year?

        3. Prepare a formal income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011 under the following:

        a. Absorption costing.

        b. Variable costing.

        mansour automotive company manufactures an engine designed for m 278541

        Mansour Automotive Company manufactures an engine designed for motorcycles and markets the product using its own brand name. Although Mansour has the capacity to produce 40,000 engines annually, it currently produces and sells only 30,000 units per year. The engine normally sells for $500 per unit, with no quantity discounts. The unit level costs to produce the engine are $200 for direct materials, $150 for direct labor, and $30 for indirect manufacturing costs. Mansour expects total annual product and facility level costs to be $540,000 and $750,000, respectively. Assume Mansour receives a special order from a new customer seeking to buy 1,000 engines for $370 each.

        Required

        Should Mansour accept or reject the special order? Support your answer with appropriate computations.

        what are financial accounting management accounting and finance 278550

        DQ1. 500 words What are financial accounting, management accounting, and finance? What are their similarities and differences? (Chapter 1)

        DQ2. 500 words What information does a balance sheet provide? How do accounting conventions and asset valuation affect measuring and reporting financial position?

        D3. The following events occurred during the first month of operations for XYZ Ltd., a company specialised in providing carburetors to automobile manufacturers.

        Date Event

        Jan. 1st The shareholders invested £300,000 in cash, land worth £100,000 and a building worth £250,000 in exchange for common shares.

        Jan. 2nd In order to develop a research facility, XYZ acquired computer equipment for £175,000. The purchase price was paid 20% in cash and the remaining on a note.

        Jan. 4th XYZ issued an advertisement in the newspaper in order to recruit a research lab specialist. The ad will run throughout the month and will cost £1,500. The invoice was received on the 15th of the month.

        Jan. 31st The research specialist worked for the last two weeks of the month. His salary of £5,500 was paid on the last day of the month.

        Jan. 31st The company started shipping products during the last week of the month. During that period, sales amounted to £265,000, all received in cash except for £15,000 which was sold on account.

        Jan. 31st At the end of the month, XYZ received a bill from My Telecomm Ltd for its telephone, Internet and cell phone charges. The total of the invoice amounts to £750 to be paid by the end of the following month. In addition, the company paid the newspaper company for the advertisement services provided.

        Jan. 31st To ensure the survival of the company in case of an incident, the company prepaid £5,000 for an annual insurance policy with coverage starting at the beginning of the following month.

        Jan. 31st Given the success of the company, the board of directors declared and paid a dividend of £15,000.

        Complete the following:

        Prepare the journal entries for the current month. Do not prepare any entries for transactions that relate to the following month

        Attachments:

        mary tan is the controller for duck associates a property 278556

        Mary Tan is the controller for Duck Associates, a property management company in Portland, Oregon. Each year Tan and payroll clerk Toby Stock meet with the external auditors about payroll accounting. This year, the auditors suggest that Tan consider outsourcing Duck Associates’ payroll accounting to a company specializing in payroll processing services. This would allow Tan and her staff to focus on their primary responsibility: accounting for the properties under management. At present, payroll requires 1.5 employee positions—payroll clerk Toby Stock and a bookkeeper who spends half her time entering payroll data in the system. Tan considers this suggestion, and she lists the following items relating to outsourcing payroll accounting:

        a. The current payroll software that was purchased for $4,000 three years ago would not be needed if payroll processing were outsourced.

        b. Duck Associates’ bookkeeper would spend half her time preparing the weekly payroll input form that is given to the payroll processing service. She is paid $450 a week.

        c. Duck Associates would no longer need payroll clerk Toby Stock, whose annual salary is $42,000.

        d. The payroll processing service would charge $2,000 a month.

        Requirements

        1. Would outsourcing the payroll function increase or decrease Duck Associates’ operating income?

        2. Tan believes that outsourcing payroll would simplify her job, but she does not like the prospect of having to lay off Stock, who has become a close personal friend. She does not believe there is another position available for Stock at his current salary. Can you think of other factors that might support keeping Stock, rather than outsourcing payroll processing? How should each of the factors affect Tan’s decision if she wants to do what is best for Duck Associates and act ethically?

        maya company is making plans for the introduction of a 278558

        Maya Company is making plans for the introduction of a new hair product that it will sell for $6 per unit. The following estimates have been made for manufacturing costs on 100,000 units to be produced the first year:

        Direct materials……………………….. $50,000

        Direct labor…………………………….. $80,000 (the labor rate is $8 an hour A?10,000 hours)

        Manufacturing overhead costs have not yet been estimated for the new product, but monthly data on total production and overhead costs for the past 24 months have been analyzed using regression. The following results were derived from the regression and will provide the basis for overhead cost estimates for the new product.

        REGRESSION ANALYSIS RESULTS

        Dependent variable Factory overhead costs

        Independent variable Direct labor hours

        Computed values:

        Intercept………………………………………………………… $55,000

        Coefficient of independent variable………………….. $ 3.20

        Coefficient of correlation…………………………………. 0.953

        R2………………………………………………………………….. 0.908

        a. The total overhead cost for an estimated activity level of 20,000 direct labor hours would be

        (1) $55,000

        (2) $64,000

        (3) $82,000

        (4) $119,000

        (5) Some other amount

        b. What is the expected contribution margin per unit to be earned during the first year on 100,000 units of the new product? (Assume all marketing and administrative costs are fixed.)

        (1) $4.38

        (2) $4.89

        (3) $3.83

        (4) $5.10

        (5) Some other amount

        c. How much is the variable manufacturing cost per unit, using the variable overhead estimated by the regression (and assuming direct materials and direct labor are variable costs)?

        (1) $1.30

        (2) $1.11

        (3) $1.62

        (4) $3.00

        (5) Some other amount

        d. What is the manufacturing cost equation implied by these results, where x refers to units produced?

        (1) TC = $80,000 + $1.11x

        (2) TC = $55,000 + $1.62x

        (3) TC = $185,000 + $3.20x

        (4) Some other equation

        e. (Answer if Appendix 5.2 was assigned reading.) What percentage of the variation in overhead costs is explained by the independent variable?

        (1) 90.8 percent

        (2) 42 percent

        (3) 48.8 percent

        (4) 95.3 percent

        (5) Some other amount

        meals com inc which produces and ships frozen meals has the 278561

        Meals.com, Inc., which produces and ships frozen meals, has the plant capacity to produce 10,000 units annually. Its predicted operations for the year follow:

        Sales (8,000 units at $10 each) ……………………………………………………………… $80,000

        Manufacturing Costs

        Variable ………………………………………………………………………………………… $4 per Unit

        Fixed …………………………………………………………………………………………………. $10,000

        Marketing and Administrative Costs

        Variable ………………………………………………………………………………………… $2 per Unit

        Fixed …………………………………………………………………………………………………… $8,000

        Meals.com is considering a special order of 1,000 units from a prospective customer willing to pay $8 per unit. Assume this order will have no effect on regular sales at regular prices, on total fixed costs, or on variable costs per unit.

        a. The effect of the special order on sales will be an increase of

        (1) $10,000.

        (2) $72,000.

        (3) $80,000.

        (4) $8,000.

        (5) Some other amount.

        b. The effect of the special order on total variable costs will be an increase of

        (1) $8,000.

        (2) $6,000.

        (3) $5,000.

        (4) $4,000.

        (5) Some other amount.

        c. The effect of the special order on total fixed costs will be an increase of

        (1) $0.

        (2) $2,250.

        (3) $8,000.

        (4) $1,250.

        (5) Some other amount.

        d. The effect of the special order on fixed costs per unit will be

        (1) Zero.

        (2) An increase of $2.25.

        (3) A decrease of $2.25.

        (4) A decrease of some other amount.

        (5) An increase of some other amount.

        e. How will the special order affect operating profit?

        (1) Increase it.

        (2) Decrease it.

        (3) Have no effect.

        the jacquers a semi professional baseball team prepare financial statements on a mo 278568

        The Jacquers, a semi professional baseball team, prepare financial statements on a monthly basis. Their season begins in April. In March and April the team engaged in the following transactions:

        Paid $90,000 to Lawrence City as advance rent for use of Lawrence City Stadium for the six month period April 1 through September 30.

        Collected $500,000 cash from sales of season tickets for the team’s 20 home games.

        During the month of April, the Jacquers played four home games.

        Stadium Rent Expense needs to be recognized in April.

        Document Preview:

        Accounting 201 Name _Fujehat Ara ____ Please circle your section: A B C D E Chapter 4: 16 Point QUIZ Form A Match the statements below with the appropriate terms by entering the letter code in the spaces provided. TERMS: A. Prepaid Expenses B. Unearned Revenues C. Accrued Revenues D. Accrued Expenses STATEMENTS: _B__ 1. A revenue not yet earned; collected in advance. _C__ 2. Office supplies on hand that will be used in the next period. __B__ 3. Subscription revenue collected; not yet earned. __C__ 4. Rent not yet collected; already earned. __D__ 5. An expense incurred; not yet paid or recorded. __C__ 6. A revenue earned; not yet collected or recorded. __A__ 7. An expense not yet incurred; paid in advance. __D__ 8. Interest expense incurred; not yet paid. The Jacquers, a semi professional baseball team, prepare financial statements on a monthly basis. Their season begins in April. In March and April the team engaged in the following transactions: Paid $90,000 to Lawrence City as advance rent for use of Lawrence City Stadium for the six month period April 1 through September 30. Collected $500,000 cash from sales of season tickets for the team’s 20 home games. During the month of April, the Jacquers played four home games. Stadium Rent Expense needs to be recognized in April. Instructions: Prepare the entries required for the transactions above. Trans # Account Description Debit Credit 1 Prepaid Rent 90,000 Cash 90,000 2 Unearned Sales Revenue 500,000 Cash 500,000 3 Sales Revenue 100,000 Unearned Sales Revenue 400,000 4 Rent Expense 18,000 Prepaid Rent 72,000 Prepare adjusting entries for the following transactions. Omit explanations. Unrecorded interest accrued on savings bonds is $410. Property taxes incurred but not paid or recorded amount to $800. Legal service revenues of $4,000 were collected in advance. By year end $900 of service revenue was still unearned. A 6 month insurance…

        Attachments:

        mervin company produces circuit boards that sell for 8 per 278569

        Mervin Company produces circuit boards that sell for $8 per unit. It currently has capacity to produce 600,000 circuit boards per year, but is selling 550,000 boards per year. Annual costs for the 550,000 circuit boards follow.

        Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 825,000

        Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,100,000

        Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,375,000

        Selling expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275,000

        Administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . 550,000

        Total costs and expenses . . . . . . $4,125,000

        An overseas customer has offered to buy 50,000 circuit boards for $6 per unit. The customer is in a different market from its regular customers and would not affect regular sales. A study of its costs in anticipation of this additional business reveals the following:

        ?c Direct materials and direct labor are 100% variable.

        ?c Twenty percent of overhead is fixed at any production level from 550,000 units to 600,000 units; the remaining 80% of annual overhead costs are variable with respect to volume.

        ?c Selling expenses are 40% variable with respect to number of units sold, and the other 60% of selling expenses are fixed.

        ?c There will be an additional $0.20 per unit selling expense for this order.

        ?c Administrative expenses would increase by a $700 fixed amount.

        Required

        1. Prepare a three column comparative income statement that reports the following:

        a. Annual income without the special order.

        b. Annual income from the special order.

        c. Combined annual income from normal business and the new business.

        2. Should management accept the order? What nonfinancial factors should Mervin consider? Explain.

        Analysis Component

        3. Assume that the new customer wants to buy 100,000 units instead of 50,000 units—it will only buy 100,000 units or none and will not take a partial order. Without any computations, how does this change your answer in part 2?

        micron manufacturing produces electronic equipment this year i 278571

        Micron Manufacturing produces electronic equipment. This year, it produced 7,500 oscilloscopes at a manufacturing cost of $300 each. These oscilloscopes were damaged in the warehouse during storage and, while usable, cannot be sold at their regular selling price of $500 each. Management has investigated the matter and has identified three alternatives for these oscilloscopes.

        1. They can be sold to a wholesaler for $75 each.

        2. They can be disassembled at a cost of $400,000 and the parts sold to a recycler for $130 each.

        3. They can be reworked and turned into good units. The cost of reworking the units will be $3,200,000, after which the units can be sold at their regular price of $500 each.

        Required

        Which alternative should management pursue? Show analysis for each alternative.

        unit 4 individual project 278572

        NEEDS TO BE IN APA FORMAT 6TH EDITION, REFERENCES NEED TO BE IN APA FORMAT 6TH EDITION ACCT685 1301A 01 Review Course: Auditing and Regulation Assignment Name: Unit 4 Individual Project Deliverable Length: 10–12 pages Details: Select a publicly traded company using the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) EDGAR System ( http://sec.gov/edgar/searchedgar/companysearchlhttp://sec.gov/edgar/searchedgar/companysearchl) and submit to the instructor for approval. Please note that each student must research a different company.

        Document Preview:

        NEEDS TO BE IN APA FORMAT 6TH EDITION, REFERENCES NEED TO BE IN APA FORMAT 6TH EDITION ACCT685 1301A 01 Review Course: Auditing and Regulation??Assignment Name:?Unit 4 Individual Project??Deliverable Length:?10–12 pages??Details:?Select a publicly traded company using the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) EDGAR System (? HYPERLINK “http://sec.gov/edgar/searchedgar/companysearchl” t “_blank” ?http://sec.gov/edgar/searchedgar/companysearchl?) and submit to the instructor for approval. Please note that each student must research a different company. Once the instructor has approved the company selection, obtain the Annual Report (Form 10K) and Proxy Statement (Form DEF 14A) of the company for the immediate past fiscal year. Review these documents in addition to Earnings Releases and other financial information available on the company’s Investor Relations Web site to evaluate the following items. Identify the company’s independent registered public accounting firm. Determine how long this firm has served as the external auditors and other services, if any, provided to or on behalf of the company. Describe the responsibilities of internal and external auditors and how audit engagements are planned to comply with requirements of the Statement of Accounting Standards (SAS) 99 to detect fraud. Explain the criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO) and the PCAOB governing the auditor’s consideration of internal control. Discuss documentation of management’s representations and auditor findings regarding internal controls in the audited financial statements. Discuss requirements for audit documentation, working papers, analytical procedures and evaluation of audit evidence when conducting the audit. Highlight any tests or procedures used by the public accounting firm discussed in the notes to the audited financial statements. Analyze and…

        Attachments:

        accounting 428936

        1) the effect of stock dividend is to a) decrease total assets and stockholders equity b) change the composition of stockholders equity c) decrease total assets and total liabilities d) increase the book value per share of common stock

        2) using the indirect method which of the following adjustments to convert net income to net cash provided by operating activities is correct?

        a) accounts receivable add to net income; increase, deduct from net income, decrease

        b) prepaid expense; add to net income, increase, deduct from net income: decrease

        c) inventory, add to net income: decrease, deduct from net income: increase

        d) taxes payable, add to net income: decrease, deduct from net income: increase

        3) Steinkuhler, Inc. decided on January 1 to discontinue its telescope manufacturing division. On july 1, the division’s assets with a book value of $840,000 are sold for $600,000. Operating income from january 1 to june 30 for the division amount to $100,000. Ignoring income taxesm what total amount should be reported on Steinkuler’s income statement for the current year under the caption, Discounted operations?

        4) The rem risidual claim refers to a shareholders right to

        a) receive dividends

        b) share in assets upon liquidation

        c) acquire additional shares when offered

        d) exercise a proxy vote

        financial accounting 428952

        1) Financing activities for corporations include borrowing money and selling shares of their own stock. True or False 2) At December 31, 2014 Lowery Company had retained earnings of $2,384,000. During 2014 they issued stock for $98,000, and paid dividends of $34,000. Net income for 2014 was $402,000. The retained earnings balance at the beginning of 2014 was a .$2,752,000 b $2,016,00 c $2,114,000 d $2,654,000 3) Current assets divided by current liabilities is known as the a working capital. b current ratio. c profit margin. d capital structure. 4) Ending retained earnings for a period is equal to beginning a Retained earnings + Net income + Dividends b Retained earnings ‘ Net income ‘ Dividends c Retained earnings + Net income ‘ Dividends d Retained earnings ‘ Net income + Dividends 5)The financial statement that summarizes the changes in retained earnings for a specific period of time is the a balance sheet. b income statement. c statement of cash flows. d retained earnings statement.

        accounting multiple choice 45 minutes pleaase help 428964

        1. Which of the following is FALSE? (Points : 1)

        Accounts payable always require payment of interest
        Notes and bonds require interest to be paid periodically
        Vendors and suppliers help to finance operations
        Most businesses maintain a normal amount of accounts payable.

        2. An employee earns $18 per hour and 1 1/2 times that rate for all hours worked in excess of 40 hours per week. Assume that the employee works 46 hours during the week and the FICA tax rate is 7% and federal income tax withheld is $185. The employee’s net pay is __________. (Points : 1)

        $635.26
        $586.04
        $882.00
        None of these choices

        3. If the contract rate is lower than the market rate, the bonds will sell at __________. (Points : 1)

        a discount
        a premium
        face amount
        Cannot be determined from facts given

        4. RR Inc. issued $100,000, 8%, 10 year bonds on January 1, 2008. The bonds were issued at a discount of $24,600. Using the straight line method, what is the annual amount of interest expense for these bonds? (Points : 1)

        $10,460
        $8,000
        $5,540
        Cannot be determined from the information given

        5. Which of the following is NOT a source of paid in capital? (Points : 1)

        Preferred stock
        Common stock
        No par stock
        All answers are sources of paid in capital

        6. Assume that Corporation X has 20,000 shares of $10 par value cumulative 6% preferred stock and 5,000 shares of common stock outstanding. No dividends were paid in 2009 and 2010. In 2011, the board of directors declares dividends of $50,000. What is the total cash paid to the preferred stockholders in 2011? (Points : 1)

        $12,000
        $24,000
        $36,000
        Zero

        7. Stock dividends are: (Points : 1)

        distributions of common stock to holders of common stock.
        distributions of cash or other assets to shareholders
        normally recorded at the par value of the stock issued
        required of companies periodically, according to their corporate charters

        8. Mickey Mouse Co. announced a 2 for 1 stock split of its $20 par value common stock, which is currently trading for $60 per share. What is the new par value and the estimated market price of the stock after the split? What is the New Par Value and the Estimated market price of the stock? (Points : 1)

        $10, $30
        $20, $30
        $10, $60
        $40, $120

        9. Which of the following statements is NOT true regarding current liabilities? (Points : 1)

        Obligations due for a period of time greater than one year.
        Will be paid out of current assets
        Arise from receiving goods or services prior to making payment
        Include taxes payable and wages payable.

        10. A major profitability measure that is reported in the financial statements and is followed closely by the financial press is: (Points : 1)

        net income.
        income from operations
        profit margin
        earnings per share


        Use the following information to answer questions 1 5.

        The following information is for employee William Heedy for the week ended March 15.

        Total hours worked: 48
        Rate: $16 per hour, with double time for all hours in excess of 40
        Federal income tax withheld: $200
        United Fund deduction: $50
        Cumulative earnings prior to current week: $6,400
        Tax rates:
        Social security: 6% on maximum earnings of $106,800
        Medicare tax: 1.5% on all earnings; on both employer and employee
        State unemployment: 3.4% on maximum earnings of $7,000; on employer
        Federal unemployment: 0.8% on maximum earnings of $7,000; on employer

        11. What is WIlliam’s total earnings? (Points : 3)

        $640.00
        $896.00
        $256.00
        $900.00

        12. What is WIlliam’s total deductions? (Points : 3)

        $200.00
        $50.00
        $317.30
        $250.00

        13. What is William’s net pay? (Points : 3)

        $578.80
        $640.00
        $580.00
        $600.00

        14. What is the employers FICA based on Williams pay? (Points : 3)

        $70.00
        $67.20
        $20.40
        $0

        15. What is the employers Federal Unemployment based on Williams pay? (Points : 3)

        $0
        $13.44
        $7.00
        $4.80

        accounting 428969

        1. Which of the following is not true about why a service firm will use the job order costing system?

        A. to help control cost B. to determine client billing C. to determine department cost with the firm D. to determine profit

        2. Job order costing and process are

        A. pricing systems B. cost accountin systems C. cost flow systems D. inventory tracking systems

        3. Which of the following would most likely use a job order costing system?

        A. paper mill B. swimming pool installer C. company that manufactures chlorine for swimming pools D. oil refinery

        4. Which of the following would probly not be found in the accountin system of a service provider?

        A. cost ledger B. Finished jobs ledger C. deferred revenue account D. job cost sheets

        5. During the period, labor cost incurred on account amounted to $250,000 including $200,000 for production order and $50,000 for general factory use. In addition, factory overhead applied to production was $23,000. From the following, select the entry to record the actual factory overhead cost incurred.

        A. Accounts Payable $50,000 and Cr. Factory Overhead $50,000 B. Factory Overhead 23,000 and Cr. Accounts Payable $23,000

        c. Work in Process $50,000 Cr. Wages Payable $50,000 D. Factory Overhead $50,000 Cr. Wages Payable $50,000

        journalize reid supply ben cartwright pest control 428979

        On September 1, Reid Supply had an inventory of 15 backpacks at a cost of $25 each.

        The company uses a perpetual inventory system.

        During September, the following transactions and events occurred.

        04 Sep Purchased 70 backpacks at $25 each from Hunter, terms 2/10, n/30.

        06 Sep Received credit of $150 for the return of 6 backpacks purchased on Sept 4 that were defective

        09 Sep Sold 40 backpacks for $35 each to Oliver Books, terms 2/10, n/30.

        13 Sep Sold 15 backpacks for $35 each to Heller Office Supply, terms n/30

        14 Sep Paid Hunter in full, less discount

        Instructions: Journalize the September transactions for Reid Supply.

        Document Preview:

        0 0 6650 0 9500 1980 0 2940 36000 Ben Cartwright Pest Control has the folllowing balances in selected accounts on December 21, 2010: Accounts Receivable Accumulated Depreciation Equipment Spraying Equipment Interest Payable Notes Payable Prepaid Insurance Salaries Payable Supplies Unearned Spraying Revenue All of the accounts have normal balances. The information below has been gathered at December 31, 2010. 1. Depreciation on the equipment for 2010 is $1250. 2. Ben Cartwright Pest Control borrowed $12,500 by signing a 10%, one year note on July 1, 2010. 3. Ben Cartwright Pest Control paid $1980 for 12 months of insurance coverae on October 1, 2010 4. Ben Cartwright Pest Control pays its employees total salaries of $10,000 every Monday for the preceding 5 day week (Monday Friday). On Monday, Dec. 7, 2010, employees were paid for the week ending Dece. 24, 2010. All employees worked the five days ending December 31, 2010. 5. Ben Cartwright Pest Control performed disinfecting services for a client in December 2010. The client will be billed $3000. 6. On December 1, 2010, Ben Cartwright Pest Control collected $36,000 for disenfecting processed to be performed from Dec. 1, 2010, through May 31, 2010. 7. A count of supplies on December 31, 2010, indicates that supplies of $750 are on hand. Instructions: Prepare in journal form the adjusting entries for the seven items listed fro Ben Cartwright Pest Control. ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

        process costing and departments 428985

        1. Goldfarb’s Book and Music Store has two service departments, Warehouse and Data Center. Warehouse Department costs of $350,000 are allocated on the basis of budgeted warehouse hours. Data Center Department costs of $150,000 are allocated based on the number of computer log on hours. The costs of operating departments Music and Books are $250,000 and $300,000, respectively. Data on budgeted warehouse hours and number of computer log on hours are as follows:

        Support Departments

        Production Departments

        Warehouse Department

        Data Center Department

        Music

        Books

        Budgeted costs

        $350,000

        $150,000

        $125,000

        $150,000

        Budgeted warehouse hours

        NA

        500

        1,000

        1,500

        Number of computer hours

        200

        NA

        800

        1,000

        Using the direct method, what amount of Data Center Department costs will be allocated to Department Music?

        A) $150,000

        B) $66,667

        C) $83,333

        D) $60,000

        2. Using the step down method, what amount of Warehouse Department cost will be allocated to Department Music if the service department with the highest percentage of interdepartmental support service is allocated first? (Round up)

        A) $233,333

        B) $116,667

        C) $243,333

        D) $121,667

        1. Hawkeye Cleaners has been considering the purchase of an industrial dry cleaning machine. The existing machine is operable for three more years and will have a zero disposal price. If the machine is disposed now, it will be sold for $120,000. The new machine will cost $400,000 and an additional cash investment in working capital of $120,000 will be required at day of purchase.

        The new machine will reduce the average amount of time required to wash clothing and will decrease labor costs. The investment is expected to net $100,000 in additional cash inflows during the year of acquisition and $300,000 each additional year of use. The new machine has a three year life, and zero disposal value. These cash flows will generally occur throughout the year and are recognized at the end of each year.

        What is the net present value of the investment, assuming the required rate of return is 10%? Would the company want to purchase the new machine?

        A) $164,000; yes

        B) $100,000; no

        C) $(100,000); yes

        D) $(164,000); no

        2. Assume your goal in life is to retire with two million dollars. What is the equivalent of $2,000,000 in today’s term assuming a rate of 6% and and a 20 year work life?

        A) $29,130

        B) $54,369

        C) $240,204

        D) $624,000

        1. Sherfield Company uses a normal costing system, applying overhead using a single plant wide rate. At the beginning of the year, budgeted (estimated) manufacturing overhead costs totaled $400,000, budgeted direct labor hours totaled 80,000 hours and budgeted machine hours totaled 20,000 hours. At the end of the year, the actual overhead costs recorded totaled $450,000 and actual direct labor hours were 86,000. The Sherfield Company’s production process is very labor intensive and therefore uses direct labor hours as the activity base. With this information, what is the assigned (applied) amount of MOH that Sherfield Company assign to production?

        A. $430,000

        B. $450,000

        C. $400,000

        D. $483,750

        1. The WISCO Company uses a weighted average process costing system. The following data are available:

        Beg inventory 0

        Units started in production 20,000

        Units finished during period 16,000

        Units in process at end of period (complete as to materials, 1/4 complete as to labor and overhead) 4,000

        Cost of materials used $35,200

        Labor and overhead costs $37,400

        Total cost assigned to the 16,000 units completed and finished is (Please round cost per equivalent unit to two decimals).
        A. $61,440.
        B. $67,320.
        C. $72,640.
        D. $65,120.

        2. Kimbeth Manufacturing uses process costing to control costs in the manufacture of Dust Sensors for the mining industry. The following information pertains to operations for November.

        Work in process, November 1st 16,000 units

        started in production during November 100,000 units

        Work in process, November 30th 24,000 units

        The beginning inventory was 60% complete as to materials and 20% complete as to conversion costs. The ending inventory was 90% complete as to materials and 40% complete as to conversion costs.

        Costs pertaining to November are as follows:
        Beginning inventory: direct materials, $54,560; direct labor, $20,320; manufacturing overhead, $15,240

        Costs incurred during the month: direct materials, $468,000; direct labor, $182,880; manufacturing overhead, $391,160

        What are the total costs assigned to Ending Work in Process Inventory (uncompleted units) assuming Kimbeth uses first in, first out (FIFO) process costing? Please round cost per equivalent units to two decimals.

        A. $153,168
        B. $154,800
        C. $155,328
        D. $156,960
        E. $159,648

        managerial accounting 429006

        1)In incremental analysis,

        a. only costs are analyzed.

        b. only revenues are analyzed.

        c. both costs and revenues may be analyzed.

        d. both costs and revenues that stay the same between alternate courses of action will be analyzed.

        2)The source of data to serve as inputs in incremental analysis is generated by

        a. market analysts.

        b. engineers.

        c. accountants.

        d. all of these.

        3)In a competitive market, a company is forced to act as a price taker and must emphasize minimizing and controlling costs.

        True or False

        4)In a competitive environment, the company must set a target cost and a target selling price.

        True or False

        5)If a cost based transfer price is used, the transfer price must be based on variable cost.

        True or False

        6)Target cost is comprised of

        a. variable and fixed manufacturing costs only.

        b. Total manufacturing costs only

        c. total manufacturing and selling and administrative costs.

        d. all costs inlcluding manufacturing and selling and administrative costs only

        7)Target costing starts it focus after a product or service is in manufacturing, and tries to target areas to reduce cost from an existing cost object

        True or False

        managerial accounting 429011

        1Af?A??1Ac€°In incremental analysis, total fixed costs will always remain constant under alternative courses of action.

        True or False

        2Af?A??1Ac€°In making decisions the management accountant and management ordinarily considers:

        a.both financial and nonfinancial information

        b. financial data but not nonfinancial information

        c.non financial information

        d.none of the above

        3)A special one time order should not be accepted if the unit sales price is less than the unit variable cost or marginal cost incurred

        True or False

        4)If an incremental make or buy analysis indicates that it is cheaper to buy rather than make an item, management should always make the decision to choose the lowest cost alternative without regard for issues like quality or employee morale

        True or False

        5)The basic decision rule in a sell or process further decision is: process further if the incremental revenue from processing exceeds the incremental processing costs.

        True or False

        6)In a decision concerning replacing old equipment with new equipment, the book value of the old equipment can be considered a sunk cost and irrelevant to the decision.

        True or False

        7)The elimination of an unprofitable product line may adversely affect the remaining product lines.

        True or False

        8)If a company is operating at full capacity, the incremental costs of a special order will likely include fixed manufacturing costs.

        True or False

        intermediate accounting problem 429016

        1.

        Iris Company decided to change from LIFO to FIFO inventory costing, effective January 1, 2012. The following data were available:

        Excess of FIFO

        Ending Inventory

        Pretax Operating

        over LIFO

        Year

        Income using LIFO

        Ending Inventory

        2012

        $40,000

        $8,000

        2011

        20,000

        7,000

        2010

        30,000

        4,000

        The income tax rate is 40%. The company began operations on January 1, 2010, and has paid no dividends since inception.

        What is net income for 2012? ___________

        What is restated net income for 2011? ___________

        Prepare the 2011 statement of retained earnings as it would appear in the comparative 2011 2012 financial statements.

        2.

        Spok A Company leased some equipment from another company on January 1, 2010, for a four year period. Payments of $18,000 were due each December 31. The lease qualified as a capital lease. Assets were depreciated straight line over the life of the lease. The appropriate interest rate to use was 10%.

        Required: Prepare all journal entries for 2010 on Spokane’s books (round to nearest whole number)

        3.

        Falco Falconhead Supply had three operating segments during 2010. In determining whether these segments are considered reportable segments, Falconhead has gathered the following information:

        Segment

        A

        B

        C

        Revenues

        $ 60,000

        $ 80,000

        $160,000

        Expenses

        30,000

        50,000

        85,000

        Assets

        200,000

        180,000

        420,000

        In addition, Falconhead has incurred $100,000 of common expenses that can be reasonably allocated to the three segments. A reasonable allocation method is to allocate the common costs to each segment based on the ratio of a segment’s assets to total assets of the three segments. 9 points

        Required:

        Compute the profit (loss) for each operating segment under current GAAP provisions

        sec 351 and tax strategy 429036

        Part 1:

        On June 3 of current year, Eric, Florence, and George form Wildcat Corporation and transfer the following items:

        Transferor Asset Basis to Transferor FMV # of Com Share

        Eric Land $200,000 $50,000 500

        Florence Equipment 0 25,000 250

        George Legal Services 0 25,000 250

        Eric purchased the land (a capital asset) 5 years ago for &200,000. Florence purchased the equipment three years ago for $48,000. The equipment has been fully depreciated.

        a. Does the transaction meet the requirement of Sec. 351?

        b. What are the amount and character of the gains and losses recognized by Eric, Florence, George, and Wildcat?

        c. What is each shareholder%u2019s basis in his or her Wildcat stock? When does the holding period for the stock begin?

        d. What is Wildcat%u2019s basis in the land, equipment, and services? When does the holding period for each property begin?

        Part 2:

        Assume the same facts above:

        a. Under what circumstances is the tax result beneficial, and for which shareholders?

        b. Can you suggest ways to enhance the tax benefit?

        accounting 45 minutes 429069

        1. To measure depreciation, all of the following must be known EXCEPT (Points : 2)

        market value.
        residual value.
        historical cost.
        estimated life.

        2. Book value is defined as (Points : 2)

        current market value less residual value.
        cost less residual value.
        current market value less accumulated depreciation.
        cost less accumulated depreciation.

        3. A fully depreciated asset must be (Points : 2)

        removed from the books.
        kept on the books until sold or discarded.
        disclosed only in the notes to the financial statements.
        recognized on the income statement as a loss.

        4. The process of transferring the cost of metal ores and other minerals removed from the earth to an expense account is called (Points : 2)

        depletion.
        deferral.
        amortization.
        depreciation.

        5. Which of the following expenditures would NOT be included in the cost of an asset? (Points : 2)

        Freight costs
        Vandalism
        Sales tax
        Surveying fees

        6. Which of the following is NOT an intangible asset? (Points : 2)

        Goodwill
        Trademark
        Copyrights
        Long term receivable

        7. Salvage value has a similar meaning as (Points : 2)

        residual value.
        scrap value.
        book value.
        both residual value and scrap value.

        8. If a fixed asset is sold and the book value is less than cash received, the company must (Points : 2)

        recognize a loss on the income statement under other expenses.
        recognize a loss on the income statement under operating expenses.
        recognize a gain on the income statement under other revenues.
        Gains and losses are not to be recognized upon the sell of fixed assets.

        9. If a revenue expenditure is treated as a capital expenditure, then (Points : 2)

        expenses are overstated and owners’ equity is understated.
        expenses are overstated and assets are overstated.
        expenses are understated and owners’ equity is overstated.
        net income is overstated and owners’ equity is understated.

        10. A company acquired some land for $80,000 to construct a new office complex. Legal fees paid were $2,300, delinquent taxes assumed were $3,400, and $5,850 was paid to remove an old building from which salvaged materials sold for $1,950. What is the cost basis for the land? (Points : 2)

        $93,500
        $91,550
        $85,700
        $89,600

        help please 429081

        1.) Megna Company’s net income last year was $188,000. Changes in the company’s balance sheet accounts for the year appear below:

        Increases
        (Decreases)
        Asset and Contra Assets Accounts:
        Cash $4,500
        Accounts receivable $6,500
        Inventory $(9,500)
        Prepaid expenses $12,000
        Long term investments $88,500
        Property, plant and equipment $79,500
        Accumulated depreciation $86,500
        Liability and Equity Accounts:
        Accounts payable $21,500
        Accrued liabilities $13,500
        Income taxes payable $(30,500)
        Bonds payable $(62,500)
        Common stock $37,500
        Retained earnings $116,500

        The company paid a cash dividend and it did not dispose of any long term investments or property, plant, and equipment. The company did not issue any bonds payable or repurchase any of its own common stock. The following question pertain to the company’s statement of cash flows.

        The net cash provided by (used in) operating activities last year was:

        (PLEASE SHOW WORK FOR RATING)

        A. $180,500

        B. $188,000

        C. $270,000

        D. $274,500

        2.) Financial statements for Marcell Company appear below:

        Marcell Company
        Statement of Financial Position
        December 31, Year 2 and Year 1
        (dollars in thousands)
        Year 2 Year 1
        Current assets:
        Cash and marketable securities $190 $180
        Accounts receivable, net 140 140
        Inventory 270 270
        Prepaid expenses

        50

        50

        Total current assets 650 640
        Noncurrent assets:
        Plant & equipment, net

        1,940

        1,920

        Total assets

        $2,590

        $2,560

        Current liabilities:
        Accounts payable $140 $180
        Accured liabilities 60 60
        Notes payable, short term

        310

        350

        Total current liabilities 510 590
        Noncurrent liabilities:
        Bonds payable

        540

        560

        Total liabilities

        $1,050

        $1,150

        Stockholders’ equity:
        Preferred stock, $10 par, 8% 160 160
        Common stock, $5 par 200 200
        Additional paid in capital common stock 370 370
        Retained earnings

        810

        680

        Total stockholders equity

        1,540

        1,410

        Total liabilites & stockholders equity

        $2,590

        $2,560

        Marcell Company
        Income Statement
        For the Year Ended December 31, Year 2
        (dollars in thousands)
        Sales (all on account) $4,400
        Cost of goods sold

        3,080

        Gross margin 1,320
        Selling and administrative expense

        520

        Net operating income 800
        Interest expense

        80

        Net income before taxes 720
        Income taxes (30%)

        216

        Net income

        $504

        Marcell Company’s current ratio at the end of Year 2 was closest to:

        (PLEASE SHOW WORK FOR RATING)

        A. 1.27

        B. 0.90

        C. 0.63

        D. 1.17

        financial accounting 429095

        1) Net cash provided by operating activities takes into account that a company must invest in capital expenditures just to maintain its current level of operations. True or False 2) These are selected account balances on December 31, 2014. Land $100,000 Land (held for future use) 150,000 Buildings 800,000 Inventory 200,000 Equipment 450,000 Furniture 100,000 Accumulated Depreciation 300,000 What is the total amount of property, plant, and equipment that will appear on the balance sheet? a $1,500,000 b $1,300,000 c $1,800,000 d $1,150,000 3) Elston Company compiled the following financial information as of December 31, 2014: Service revenue $700,000 Common stock 150,000 Equipment 200,000 Operating expenses 625,000 Cash 175,000 Dividends 50,000 Supplies 25,000 Accounts payable 100,000 Accounts receivable 75,000 Retained earnings, 1/1/14 375,000 Elston’s stockholders’ equity on December 31, 2014 is: a $525,000 b $550,000 c $400,000 d $600,000 4) Henson Company began the year with retained earnings of $330,000. During the year, the company recorded revenues of $500,000, expenses of $380,000, and paid dividends of $40,000. What was Henson’s retained earnings at the end of the year? a $490,000 b $410,000 c $790,000 d $450,000

        managerial accounting 429105

        1)

        What is the process and how I can solve this question please!
        Bovine Company, a wholesale distributor of DVD’s, has been experiencing losses for some time, as shown by its most recent monthly contribution format income statement below:

        Sales…….$1,500,000
        Variable expenses…..588,000
        Contribution margin……912,000
        Fixed Expenses………..945,000
        Net Operating Loss……$ (33,000)

        In an effort to isolate the problem, the president has asked for an income statement segmented by geographical market. Accordingly, the Accounting Department has developed the following data:

        Geographic Market
        South………….Central…………..North
        Sales……………………………….$400,000………$600,000……….$500,000
        Vairiable expenses as a percentage
        of sales…………………………….. 52%……………. 30%…………….40%
        Traceable fixed expenses…….$240,000…………$330,000………..200,000

        2) How do we calculate the solution? also if the company sales manager believes that sale in the Central geog market could increase 15% if monthly advertising were increased by $25,000. Would you recommend the increase advertisement? Show the computation

        accounting question about bank and company reconciliation 429120

        1.Which of the reconciling items listed below require an entry in the company’s accounts? (None of the transactions reported by bank debit and credit memos have been recorded by the company.)

        Item Entry Required
        1. Bank service charges. SelectYesNoItem 1
        2. NSF check returned to company by the bank. SelectYesNoItem 2
        3. Check incorrectly recorded by company. SelectYesNoItem 3
        4. Check incorrectly charged by bank. SelectYesNoItem 4
        5. Deposit in transit. SelectYesNoItem 5
        6. Outstanding checks. SelectYesNoItem 6
        7. Note collected by bank. SelectYesNoItem 7

        Yes or No

        2.Entries for Bank Reconciliation

        The following data were accumulated for use in reconciling the bank account of Maplewood Co. for July:

        1. Cash balance according to the company’s records at July 31, $15,600.
        2. Cash balance according to thebank statement at July 31, $16,230.
        3. Checks outstanding, $3,180.
        4. Deposit in transit, not recorded by bank, $2,950.
        5. A check for $270 in payment of an account was erroneously recorded in the check register as $720.
        6. Bank debit memo for service charges, $50.

        Journalize the entry or entries that should be made by the company.

        3.Petty Cash Fund Entries

        Journalize the entries to record the following:

        1. Check No. 6300 is issued to establish a petty cash fund of $1,200.
        2. The amount ofcash in the petty cash fund is now $200. Check No. 6527 is issued to replenish the fund, based on the following summary of petty cash receipts: office supplies, $650; miscellaneous selling expense, $230; miscellaneous administrative expense, $90. (Since the amount of the check to replenish the fund plus the balance in the fund do not equal $1,200, record the discrepancy in thecash short and over account.)

        a. Journalize the entry to establish the petty cash fund.

        b. Journalize the entry to replenish the petty cash fund. If a box does not require an entry, leave it blank or enter “0”.

        accouting multiple quesion 45 minutes to answer this is a test please be carefull on 429125

        1. In reference to a promissory note, the person who is to receive payment is called the (Points : 2)

        maker.
        payee.
        seller.
        payor.

        2. In reference to a promissory note, the person who makes the promise to pay is called the (Points : 2)

        maker.
        payee.
        seller.
        receiver.

        3. The amount of the promissory note plus the interest earned on the due date is called the (Points : 2)

        realizable value.
        maturity value.
        face value.
        net realizable value.

        4. Receivables are usually a significant portion of (Points : 2)

        total current liabilities.
        total liabilities.
        total current assets.
        total assets.

        5. When merchandise sold is assumed to be in the order in which the expenditures were made, the inventory method is called (Points : 2)

        first in, last out.
        last in, first out.
        first in, first out.
        average cost.

        6. Merchandise inventory is reported on the balance sheet in the section entitled (Points : 2)

        current assets.
        fixed assets.
        current liabilities.
        stockholders’ equity.

        7. A 60 day, 10% note for $6,000 dated April 15 is received from a customer on account.
        The face value of the note is (Points : 2)

        $6,100.
        $5,400.
        $5,900.
        $6,000.

        8. The inventory data for an item for November are:

        Nov. 1

        Inventory

        25 units at $20

        10

        Purchased

        30 units at $21

        30

        Purchased

        10 units at $22

        Sold

        35 units

        Using the first in, first out method, what is the cost of the merchandise inventory of 30 units on November 30? (Points : 2)

        $640
        $605
        $623
        $660

        9. The inventory method that assigns the most recent costs to cost of goods sold is (Points : 2)

        FIFO.
        LIFO.
        average cost.
        specific identification.

        10. The due date of a 90 day note dated July 5 is (Points : 2)

        September 30.
        October 2.
        October 3.
        October 1.

        in my opinion we ought to stop making our own 276229

        In my opinion, we ought to stop making our own drums and accept that outside supplier’s offer:?? said Wim Niewindt, managing director of Antilles Refining, N.V., of Aruba. ?oAt a price of 18 florins per drum, we would be paying 5 forms less than it costs us to manufacture the drums in our own plant. (The currency in Aruba is the form, denoted below by fl.) Since we use 60,000 drums a year, that would be an annual cost savings of 300,000 florins.?? Antilles Refining’s present cost to manufacture one drum is given below (based on 60,000 drums per year):



        A decision about whether to make or buy the drums is especially important at this time because the equipment being used to make the drums is completely worn out and must be replaced. The choices facing the company are:

        Alternative 1:

        Rent new equipment and continue to make the drums. The equipment would be rented for fl135,000 per year.

        Alternative 2:

        Purchase the drums from an outside supplier at fl18 per drum. The new equipment would be more efficient than the equipment that Antilles Refining has been using and, according to the manufacturer, would reduce direct labor and variable overhead costs by 30%. The old equipment has no resale value. Supervision cost (fl45,000 per year) and direct materials cost per drum would not be affected by the new equipment. The new equipment’s capacity would be 90,000 drums per year. The company’s total general company overhead would be unaffected by this decision.

        Required:

        1. To assist the managing director in making a decision, prepare an analysis showing the total cost and the cost per drum for each of the two alternatives given above. Assume that 60,000 drums are needed each year. Which course of action would you recommend to the managing director?

        2. Would your recommendation in (1) above be the same if the company’s needs were: (a) 75,000 drums per year or (b) 90,000 drums per year? Show computations to support your answer, with costs presented on both a total and a per unit basis.

        3. What other factors would you recommend that the company consider before making adecision?

        introducing a new product profitability santos company is consi 276242

        Introducing a new product, profitability Santos Company is considering introducing a new compact disc player model at a price of $105 per unit. Santos’s controller has compiled the following incremental cost information based on an estimate of 120,000 units of sales annually for the new product:

        Direct materials cost…………………………… $3,600,000

        Direct labor cost………………………………… $2,400,000

        Variable manufacturing overhead……………… $1,200,000

        Sales commission………………………………. 10% of sales

        Fixed cost………………………………………. $2,000,000

        The sales manager expects the introduction of the new model to result in a reduction in sales of the existing model from 300,000 to 240,000 units. The contribution margin for the existing model is $20 per unit.

        Required

        (a) Determine the total impact on Santos’s profit from the introduction of the new model.

        (b) Should Santos introduce the new model? Explain.

        jackson county senior services is a nonprofit organization 276259

        Jackson County Senior Services is a nonprofit organization devoted to providing essential services to seniors who live in their own homes within the Jackson County area. Three services are provided for seniors—home nursing, meals on wheels, and housekeeping. In the home nursing program, nurses visit seniors on a regular basis to check on their general health and to perform tests ordered by their physicians. The meals on wheels program deliver a hot meal once a day to each senior enrolled in the program. The housekeeping service provides weekly housecleaning and maintenance services. Data on revenue and expenses for the past year follow:



        The head administrator of Jackson County Senior Services, Judith Miyama, is concerned about the organization’s finances and considers the net operating income of $5,000 last year to be razor thin. (Last year’s results were very similar to the results for previous years and are representative of what would be expected in the future.) She feels that the organization should be building its financial reserves at a more rapid rate in order to prepare for the next inevitable recession. After seeing the above report, Ms. Miyama asked for more information about the financial advisability of perhaps discontinuing the housekeeping program.

        The depreciation in housekeeping is for a small van that is used to carry the housekeepers and their equipment from job to job. If the program were discontinued, the van would be donated to a charitable organization. None of the general administrative overhead would be avoided if the housekeeping program were dropped, but the liability insurance and the salary of the program administrator would be avoided.

        Required:

        1. Should the housekeeping program be discontinued? Explain. Show computations to support your answer.

        2. Recast the above data in a format that would be more useful to management in assessing the long run financial viability of the variousservices.

        jan shumard president and general manager of danbury company w 276263

        Jan Shumard, president and general manager of Danbury Company, was concerned about the future of one of the company’s largest divisions. The division’s most recent quarterly income statement follows:

        Sales …………………………………………$3,751,500

        Less: Cost of goods sold ……………………. 2,722,400

        Gross profit ………………………………….$1,029,100

        Less: Selling and administrative expenses …. 1,100,000

        Operating (loss) …………………………….. $ (70,900)

        Jan is giving serious consideration to shutting down the division because this is the ninth consecutive quarter that it has shown a loss. To help him in his decision, the following additional information has been gathered: The division produces one product at a selling price of $100 to outside parties. The division sells 50 percent of its output to another division within the company for $83 per unit (full manufacturing cost plus 25 percent). The internal price is set by company policy. If the division is shut down, the user division will buy the part externally for $100 per unit. The fixed overhead assigned per unit is $20. There is no alternative use for the facilities if shut down. The facilities and equipment will be sold and the proceeds invested to produce an annuity of $100,000 per year. Of the fixed selling and administrative expenses, 30 percent represent allocated expenses from corporate headquarters. Variable selling expenses are $5 per unit sold for units sold externally. These expenses are avoided for internal sales. No variable administrative expenses are incurred.

        Required:

        1. Prepare an income statement that more accurately reflects the division’s profit performance.

        2. Should the president shut down the division? What will be the effect on the company’s profits if the division is closed?

        managerial accounting 428503

        The Worldwide Credit Card, Inc., uses standards to control the labor time involved in opening mail from card holders and recording the enclosed remittances. Incoming mail is gathered into batches, and a standard time is set for opening and recording each batch. The labor standards relating to one batch are as follows:

        Standard Hours Standard Rate Standard Cost
        Per batch 1.80 $5.50 $9.90

        The record showing the time spent last week in opening batches of mail has been misplaced. However, the batch supervisor recalls that 170 batches were received and opened during the week, and the controller recalls the following variance data relating to these batches:

        Total labor spending variance $ 861 U
        Labor rate variance $ 371 F

        Required:
        1. Determine the number of actual labor hours spent opening batches during the week.

        Actual labor hours hours

        2.

        Determine the actual hourly rate paid to employees for opening batches last week.

        Actual hourly rate $ per hour

        wright corporation had the following information available for 428508

        Wright Corporation had the following information available for December 2011:

        Work in Process, December 1 $20,000
        Materials placed into production, December 27,500
        Direct labor, December 37,500

        Factory overhead rate is 150 percent of direct labor costs.

        Job cost sheets had the following balances:

        Job Z1 $32,500
        Job Z2 55,000
        Job Z3 35,000
        Job Z4 18,750

        Jobs Z3 and Z4 were not completed at the end of December.

        Refer to Figure 5 5. What is the cost of goods finished during December for Wright Corporation? Select one: a. $85,000 b. $87,500 c. $56,250 d. $53,750

        accounting 428513

        Wright Manufacturing makes picnic tables in three sizes: small, medium, and large. The picnic tables can be sold with or without a finishing stain. The company’s managers are currently trying to decide which picnic tables, if any, should be stained in order to maximize profits.

        The following information is available:

        Small

        Medium

        Large

        Initial Sales Price

        $60

        $100

        $175

        Initial Cost

        20

        40

        55

        Sales price after staining

        70

        125

        210

        Cost of staining

        11

        15

        20

        Number sold per month

        100

        300

        175

        What is the maximum amount that net income could increase each month with further processing?

        A. $ 81,125

        B. $ 82,125

        C. $ 5,525

        D. $ 5,625

        standard costs and variances 428551

        Wymont Company produces a single product that requires a large amount of labor time. Overhead cost is applied on the basis of standard direct labor hours. Variable manufacturing overhead should be $2.00 per standard direct labor hour and fixed manufacturing overhead should be $180,000 per year.

        The company’s product requires 4 feet of direct material that has a standard cost of $3.00 per foot. The product requires 1.5 hours of direct labor time. The standard labor rate is $12.00 per hour.

        During the year, the company had planned to operate at a denominator activity level of 30,000 direct labor hours and to produce 20,000 units of product. Actual activity and costs for the year were as follows:

        Number of units produced 22,000
        Actual direct labor hours worked 35,000
        Actual variable manufacturing overhead cost incurred $ 63,000
        Actual fixed manufacturing overhead cost incurred $ 181,000

        Required:
        1.

        Compute the predetermined overhead rate for the year. Break the rate down into variable and fixed components. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Predetermined overhead rate $ per DLH
        Variable rate $ per DLH
        Fixed rate $ per DLH

        2.

        Compute the standard cost card for the company’s product. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Direct materials, feet at $ per foot $
        Direct labor, DLHs at $ per DLH
        Variable overhead, DLHs at $ per DLH
        Fixed overhead, DLHs at $ per DLH

        Standard cost per unit $



        3a. Compute the standard direct labor hours allowed for the year’s production.

        Standard direct labor hours

        3b.

        Complete the following Manufacturing Overhead T account for the year: (Omit the “$” sign in your response):

        Manufacturing Overhead


        (Click to select)Actual costsApplied costsStandard costs (Click to select)Actual costsStandard costsApplied costs


        (Click to select)Underapplied overheadOverapplied overhead



        4.

        Determine the reason for the underapplied or overapplied overhead from (3) above by computing the variable overhead rate and efficiency variances and the fixed overhead budget and volume variances. (Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Variable overhead rate variance $ (Click to select)FUNone
        Variable overhead efficiency variance $ (Click to select)FUNone
        Fixed overhead budget variance $ (Click to select)FUNone
        Fixed overhead volume variance $ (Click to select)FUNone

        25b 2 428602

        Xu Company is considering replacing one of its manufacturing machines. The machine has a book value of $44,000 and a remaining useful life of 4 years, at which time its salvage value will be zero. It has a current market value of $54,000. Variable manufacturing costs are $33,700 per year for this machine. Information on two alternative replacement machines follows.

        Alternative A Alternative B
        Cost $ 117,000 $ 118,000
        Variable manufacturing costs per year 22,700 10,700

        Calculate the total change in net income if Alternative A is adopted. (Input all amounts as positive values, except cash outflows and any negative total change in net income which should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Alternative A: Increase or (Decrease) in Net Income
        Cost to buy new machine $
        Cash received to trade in old machine
        Reduction in variable manufacturing costs

        Total change in net income $



        Calculate the total change in net income if Alternative B is adopted. (Input all amounts as positive values, except cash outflows and any negative total change in net income which should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Alternative B: Increase or (Decrease) in Net Income
        Cost to buy new machine $
        Cash received to trade in old machine
        Reduction in variable manufacturing costs

        Total change in net income $



        Should Xu keep or replace its manufacturing machine? If the machine should be replaced, which alternative new machine should Xu purchase?

        Alternative B
        Alternative A
        Keep the manufacturing machine

        accounting 428612

        XYZ manufacturing produces a single product that sells for $200. Variable costs per unit equal $50. The company expects total fixed costs to be $120,000 for the next month at the projected sales level of 2,000 units.

        In an attempt to improve performance, XYZ manufacturing is considering a 20% reduction in the selling price which will result in a 20% increase in sales. If this proposed reduction in selling price (and increase in sales) is implemented,

        a) Operating income will decrease by $36,000

        b) Operating income will increase by $36,000

        c) Operating income will decrease by $80,000

        d) Operating income will increase by $80,000

        24) The margin of safety is a key concept of CVP analysis. The margin of safety is the

        a) difference between breakeven sales and current sales divided by breakeven sales.

        b) difference between breakeven contribution margin and current contribution margin divided by breakeven contribution margin.

        c) difference between current contribution margin and break even contribution margin divided by current contribution margin.

        d) difference between current sales and break even sales divided by current sales.

        Operating leverage measures:

        a) how senstitive profit is to a change in fixed costs.

        b) how sensititive profit is to a change in sales volume.

        c) how sensititive profit is to a change in sales price per unit.

        D) how sensitive profit is to a change in tax rates.

        Cost structure refers to the relative proportion of:

        a) Variable costs to contribution margin

        b) Total costs to sales.

        Cost structure refers to the relative proportion of: Cost structure refers to the relative proportion of:.

        d) Sales price per unit to variable costs per unit.

        Dc electronics uses a standard part in the manufacture of several of its radios. The cost of producing 30,000 parts is $90,000, which includes fixed costs of $33,000 and variable costs of $57,000. The company can buy the part from an outside supplier for $2.50 per unit, and avoid 30% of the fixed costs.

        If Dc electronics makes the part, how much will its operating income be?

        a) $4800 greater than if company bought the part

        b) $8100 greater than if the company bought the part

        c) $5100 less than if the company bought the part.

        d) $15,000 less than if the company bought the part.

        intermediate accounting 2 428655

        During its first year of operations, the McCollum Corporation entered into the following transactions relating to shareholders’ equity. The corporation was authorized to issue 100 million common shares, $1 par per share.

        Required:

        Prepare the appropriate journal entries to record each transaction.

        p. 1055

        Jan. 9
        Issued 40 million common shares for $20 per share.
        Mar. 11
        Issued 5,000 shares in exchange for custom made equipment. McCollum’s shares have traded recently on the stock exchange at $20 per share.

        Part B

        A new staff accountant for the McCollum Corporation recorded the following journal entries during the second year of operations. McCollum retires shares that it reacquires (restores their status to that of authorized but unissued shares).

        profit 428660

        This year, the store has begun to carry the Flat TV manufactured by Bass Co. Thus far, Washington has recorded the following transactions involving the Flat TV:Jan. 5 Purchased 8 Flat TVs at a unit cost of $1,400Jan. 18 Purchased 5 additional Flat TVs at $1,400 eachFeb. 12 Sold 9 Flat TVs to the Duke Hotel for $15,300Refer to the information above. The gross profit on the Flat TVs as of February 12th is:

        A) $15,300.

        B) $11,200.

        C) $2,700.

        D) $4,100.

        Refer to the information above. If Washington uses a perpetual inventory system, the journal entry to record the sale on February 12th would include all of the following except:

        A) A credit to Inventory for $15,300.

        B) A credit to Sales Revenue for $18,200.

        C) A credit to Purchases for $15,300.

        D) A debit to the Cost of Goods Sold for $15,300.

        accounting 428665

        During the year, Topaz Corporation (a U.S. corporation) has U.S. source income of $2,000,000 and foreign source income of $1,000,000. The foreign source income generates foreign income taxes of $400,000. The U.S. income tax before the foreign tax credit is $1,050,000. Topaz Corporation’s foreign tax credit is: (Points : 5)

        $0.

        $105,000.

        $350,000.

        $400,000.

        None of the above

        The federal income tax applicable to corporations: (Points : 5)

        requires the determination of adjusted gross income.

        allows a deduction for dependency exemptions.

        allows a deduction for personal exemptions.

        allows a deduction for the standard deduction.

        None of the above

        Herbert exchanges a business machine, which has an adjusted basis of $40,000, for a new machine worth $40,000. In addition, he receives cash of $10,000. What is the recognized gain or loss and the basis of the new machine?

        Claudia sells property for a sales price of $170,000. In addition, Karma, the buyer, pays $5,000 in property taxes that had accrued during the year while the property was still legally owned by Claudia. Claudia paid $9,000 in commissions and $1,500 in legal fees connected with the sale of her property. What is the amount realized by Claudia from the sale of her property?

        gross profit method find missing numbers 428681

        Full Year, Last Yr. 1st 6 Mos., this yr.
        Sales Revenue 9,352,500 4,422,100
        Cost of G.S.
        Beg. Invent. 1,172,408
        Purchases 7,392,400 3,255,490
        Cost of Invent. Avail for Sale 8,564,808
        Less cost of ending invent. 2,244,633
        Cost of Goods Sold 6,320,175
        Gross Margin 3,032,325
        Oper. Expenses 2,463,842 1,399,000
        Oper. Income/Loss 568,483

        international business law customary international law 428685

        Several years ago, a multilateral treaty came into effect among some 45 countries, including most of the major developed countries of the world. the treaty, known as the Outer Space Treaty, forbids any member state from claiming ” any planet, satellite, asteroid or other celestial body” as part of the territory of the member state. State X, which is not a party to the treaty, recently sent a spacecraft to the earth’s moon. the crew members of the craft unfurled the flag of State X and claimed a 1,000 square kilometer surface area of the moon to be part of the territory of the State X. several small buildings were constructed, including a radio transponder and a landing guidance system.
        State Y, joined by the other member states of the Outer Space Treaty, has brought suit against State X in the ICJ. they ask the court to declare that State X’s claim to the territorial annexation of part of the moon be declared void. They argue that the provisions of the Outer Space Treaty forbidding such annexations are part of the customary international law and that the treaty itself is an opinio juris, none one of the members of the world community have acted to prevent the annexation of parts of the surface of the moon, and therefore there is no usus. How should the court rule?

        advanced accounting hoyle 428731

        . The following information has been taken from the consolidation worksheet of Graham Company and its 80% owned subsidiary, Stage Company.
        (1.) Graham reports a loss on sale of land of $5,000. The land cost Graham $20,000.
        (2.) Noncontrolling interest in Stage’s net income was $30,000.
        (3.) Graham paid dividends of $15,000.
        (4.) Stage paid dividends of $10,000.
        (5.) Excess acquisition date fair value over book value was expensed by $6,000.
        (6.) Consolidated accounts receivable decreased by $8,000.
        (7.) Consolidated accounts payable decreased by $7,000.

        Using the indirect method, where does the decrease in accounts receivable appear in a consolidated statement of cash flows?
        A. $8,000 increase to net income as an operating activity.
        B. $8,000 decrease to net income as an operating activity.
        C. $6,400 increase to net income as an operating activity.
        D. $6,400 decrease to net income as an operating activity.
        E. $8,000 increase as an investing activity.

        acct 428736

        . (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Czaplinski Corporation is considering a project that would require an investment of $973,000 and would last for 6 years. The incremental annual revenues and expenses generated by the project during those 6 years would be as follows:

        Sales $257,000
        Variable expenses

        34,500

        Contribution margin

        222,500

        Fixed expenses:
        Salaries 33,500
        Rents 24,000
        Depreciation

        95,000

        Total fixed expenses

        152,500

        Net operating income

        $70,000

        The scrap value of the project’s assets at the end of the project would be $48,000. The payback period of the project is closest to:

        13.3 years
        5.9 years
        6.8 years
        13.9 years

        Please show me the work

        week 2 assignment 428773

        . Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts:

        Interest Payable

        Accumulated Depreciation: Equipment

        Alex Kenzy, Drawing

        Accounts Payable

        Service Revenue

        Cash

        Accounts Receivable

        Supplies Expense

        Interest Expense

        Which of the preceding accounts

        a. appear on a post closing trial balance?

        b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts?

        c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process?

        d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process?

        managerial accounting 428822

        1.

        Advanced Company reports the following information for the current year. All beginning inventory amounts equaled $0 this year.

        Units Produced this year 25,000 units

        Units sold this year 15,000 units

        direct materials $9 per unit

        Direct Labor $11 per unit

        Variable Overhead $75,000 in total

        Fixed Overhead $137,500 in total

        Given Advanced Company’s data, and the knowledge that the product is sold for $50 per unit and operating expenses are $200,000, compute the net income under absorption costing.

        $205,000, $122,500, $80,500, $55,000
        $67,500

        Front Company had net income of $72,500 based on variable costing. Beginning and ending inventories were 800 units and 1,200 units, respectively. Assume the fixed overhead per unit was $7.90 for both the beginning and ending inventory. What is net income under absorption costing?

        $88,300
        $56,700
        $69,340
        $75,660
        $72,900

        Swisher, Incorporated reports the following annual cost data for its single product.
        This product is normally sold for $48 per unit. If Swisher increases its production to 50,000 units, while sales remain at the current 30,000 unit level, by how much would the company’s gross margin increase or decrease under variable costing?

        $90,000 decrease.
        $60,000 increase.
        $60,000 decrease.
        There is no change in gross margin.
        $90,000 increase.
        Sea Company reports the following information regarding its production cost.
        Units Produced 42,000 Units
        Direct Laber $35 per unit
        Direct Materials $28 per unit
        Variable Overhead $17 per unit
        Fixed Overhead $105,000 in total
        Compute production cost per unit under variable costing.

        $80.00
        $63.00
        $35.00
        $28.00
        $82.50
        Advanced Company reports the following information for the current year. All beginning inventory amounts equaled $0 this year.
        Units Produced this year 25,000 units
        Units sold this year 15,000 units
        Direct Materials $9 per unit
        Direct Labor $11 per unit
        Variable Overhead $75,000 in total
        Fixed Overhead $137,500
        Given Advanced Company’s data, and the knowledge that the product is sold for $50 per unit and operating expenses are $200,000, compute the net income under variable costing.

        $67,500
        $55,000
        $80,500
        $122,500
        $205,000

        Shore Company reports the following information regarding its production cost.
        Units produced 28,000 units
        direct labor $23 per unit
        direct materials $24 per unit
        Variable overhead $280,000 in total
        Fixed overhead $94,920 in total
        Compute production cost per unit under absorption costing

        $60.39
        $47.00
        $23.00
        $57.00
        $24.00

        Pact Company had net income of $972,000 based on variable costing. Beginning and ending inventories were 7,800 units and 5,200 units, respectively. Assume the fixed overhead per unit was $3.61 for both the beginning and ending inventory. What is net income under absorption costing?

        $925,077
        $969,400
        $981,379
        $962,614
        $1,018,923

        Decko Industries reported the following monthly data.
        Units produced 52,000 units
        sales price $33 per unit
        Direct materials $1.50 per unit
        Direct labor $2.50 per unit
        Variable overhead $3.50 per unit
        Fixed overhead $234,000 in total
        What is the company’s contribution margin for this month if 50,000 units were sold?

        $1,716,000
        $1,650,000
        $1,326,000
        $1,275,000
        $1,450,000

        managerial accounting 428847

        1)Budgets are statements of management’s plans stated in financial terms.

        True or False

        2)A budget is a means of communicating a company’s objectives to external parties.

        True or False

        3)Budgets can have a positive or negative effect on human behavior depending on the manner in which the budget is developed and administered.

        True or False

        4)The tops down approach to budgeting always results in the most effective plan

        True or False

        5)The first step in the budget process is often the sales forecast.

        True or False

        6)Flexible budgeting relies on the assumption that unit variable costs will remain constant within the relevant range of activity

        True or False

        7)Management by exception means that management will investigate areas where actual results differ from planned results if the items are material

        True or False

        8)A distinction should be made between controllable and noncontrollable costs when reporting information under responsibility accounting

        True or False

        accounting multiple choices 428852

        1. If a capital expenditure is treated as a revenue expenditure, then: (Points : 1)

        expenses are overstated and owners’ equity is understated
        expenses are overstated and assets are overstated
        expenses are understated and owners’ equity is overstated
        net income is overstated and owners’ equity is understated

        2. A company acquired some land for $80,000 to construct a new office complex. Legal fees paid were $2,300, delinquent taxes assumed were $3,400, and $5,850 was paid to remove an old building from which salvaged materials sold for $950. What is the cost basis for the land? (Points : 1)

        $90,600
        $91,550
        $88,150
        $87,200

        3. Which of the following is true with regard to depreciation recorded on the books of a company? (Points : 1)

        It represents the periodic transfer of the cost of a fixed asset to expense
        It represents the wear and tear from use and from the effects of weather
        It occurs when the asset is no longer able to provide services at the level for which it was intended.
        It represents the decline in market value of an asset.

        4. A machine was purchased for $45,000. It has a useful life of 6 years and a residual value of $6,000. Under the straight line method, what is the annual depreciation expense? (Points : 1)

        $7,500
        $15,000
        $3,750
        $6,500

        5. Which of the following factors are used in computing depreciation expense? Residual Value, Useful Life, Market Value, Initial Cost? (Points : 1)

        Yes, Yes, No, Yes
        Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes
        Yes, No, No, Yes
        No, Yes, Yes, No

        6. Pansy Co. purchased a $50,000 truck on January 1, 2011. The truck will be used for 40,000 miles and has a $2,000 residual value. If Pansy drives the truck 12,000 miles during 2011 and uses the units of production method of depreciation, what is the depreciation expense for the year ended December 31, 2011? (Points : 1)

        $14,400
        $15,000
        $12,500
        Cannot be determined from the information given

        7. A company sold a delivery truck for $18,000 cash. The truck cost $47,500 and had accumulated depreciation of $36,000 as of the date of sale. The sale would include a(n): (Points : 1)

        increase in Accumulated Depreciation for $36,000.
        decrease in Delivery Truck for $11,500
        increase in a loss for $6,500
        increase in a gain for $6,500

        8. A company acquired mineral rights for $10,000,000 which are estimated at 80,000 tons. During the year 15,000 tons were extracted and sold. How much depletion should be recorded for the year? (Points : 1)

        $5,000,000
        $1,875,000
        $3,750,000
        $2,500,000

        9. A patent was purchased for $670,000 with a legal life of 20 years. Management estimates that the patent has an 8 year economic life. The amortization would include a(n): (Points : 1)

        increase in amortization expense for $33,500.
        increase in research and development expense for $670,000
        decrease in Patent for $83,750
        increase in Accumulated Amortization for $670,000

        10. Fixed assets: (Points : 1)

        are shown at their fair market value
        must be shown on the face of the balance sheet by class of fixed asset.
        are normally shown under the caption of property, plant and equipment
        must be shown on the face of the balance sheet by class of fixed asset and are shown at their book value or at their fair market value, whichever is lower.

        managerial accounting 428857

        1. A company expects to produce and sell 8,000 units of a single product. Management desires a 20% return on assets of $1,520,000. The following additional company information is available:

        Variable Cost (per Unit)

        Production costs $78

        Nonproduction costs $22

        Fixed costs (in total)

        Overhead $110,000

        Nonproduction $40,000

        Compute markup per unit. Assume that markup percentage equals desired profit divided by total costs

        (A)$91.75

        (B)$38.00

        (C)$100.00

        (D)$156.75

        (E)$118.75

        2. A company expects to produce and sell 9,000 units of a single product. Management desires an 18% return on assets of $1,750,000. The following additional company information is available:

        Variable Cost (per Unit)

        Production costs $79

        Nonproduction costs $5

        Fixed costs (in total)

        Overhead $279,000

        Nonproduction $90,000

        Compute markup per unit. Assume that markup percentage equals desired profit divided by total costs.

        (A)$125

        (B)$160

        (C)$110

        (D)$84
        (E)$35

        3. Paz Inc. manufactures a product which contains a small motor. The company has always purchased this motor from a supplier for $55 each. Paz recently upgraded its own manufacturing capabilities and now has enough excess capacity (including trained workers) to begin manufacturing the motor instead of buying it. The company prepared the following per unit cost projections of making the motor, assuming that overhead is allocated to the part at the normal predetermined overhead rate of 150% of direct labor cost.

        Direct Materials $16

        Direct labor 20

        Overhead (fixed and variable) 30

        Total $66

        The required volume of output to produce the motors will not require any incremental fixed overhead. Incremental variable overhead cost is $21 per motor. What is the effect on income if Paz decides to make the motors?

        (A) Income will decrease by $11 per unit.
        (B) Income will increase by $2 per unit.
        (C) Income will increase by $11 per unit.
        (D) Income will decrease by $2 per unit.
        (E)

        Income will increase by $19 per unit.

        4. A company has the choice of either selling 750 defective units as scrap or rebuilding them. They have already spent $14 per unit making these items. The company could sell the defective units as they are for $8.00 per unit. Alternatively, the company could rebuild the units at an incremental cost of $1.00 per unit. If it rebuilds the units, they will not be able to produce 750 new units with a unit cost of $3.00 and a normal selling price of $15.00 each. What should the company do?

        (A) Rebuild the units.
        (B) It does not matter because both alternatives have the same result.
        (C) Neither sell nor rebuild because both alternatives produce a loss. Instead, the company should store the units permanently.
        (D) Throw the units away.
        (E) Sell the units as scrap.

        accounting 428894

        1. On December 1, 2008, Denizen Corporation entered into a 120 day forward contract to purchase 20,000 Canadian dollars (C$). Denizen%u2019s fiscal year ends on December 31. The forward contract was to hedge a firm commitment agreement made on December 1, 2008, to purchase electronic goods on January 30, 2009, with payment due on March 31, 2009. The derivative is designated as a fair value hedge. The direct exchange rates follow:

        Date

        Spot Rate

        Forward Rate for March 31, 2009

        December 1, 2008

        0.940

        0.944

        December 31, 2008

        0.945

        0.947

        January 30, 2009

        0.943

        0.943

        March 31, 2009

        0.941

        Prepare all journal entries for Denizen Corporation

        rate 428925

        1) Dooney and Burke, is considering an investment in computer

        and network equipment costing $254,000. This equipment would allow

        them to offer new programming services to clients. The equipment

        will be depreciated on the straight line basis over an eight year

        period with an estimated residual value of $60,000. Using the

        accounting rate of return model, what is the minimum average annual

        operating income that must be generated from this investment in

        order to achieve 11% accounting rate of return?

        2) When you graduated from college, your mother plans to give

        you a gift of $50,000 to start you on your way. However, to

        determine what you learned in business school, your mother presents

        you with four options on how to received the gift. Which of the

        options presented by your mother will yield the greatest present

        value to you?

        a) a lump sum of $50,000 after grad school (2 years) assuming a

        3% discount rate?

        b) a lump sum of $50,000 today

        c) a lump sum of $50,000 after grad school (2 years) assuming a

        5% discount rate

        d) $25,000 per year for the next 2 years using a 3% discount

        rate

        utease company and roi 428145

        Utease Corporation has many production plants across the midwestern United States. A newly opened plant, the Bellingham plant, produces and sells one product. The plant is treated, for responsibility accounting purposes, as a profit center. The unit standard costs for a production unit, with overhead applied based on direct labor hours, are as follows:

        Manufacturing costs (per unit based on expected activity of 35,000 units or 45,500 direct labor hours):
        Direct materials (2.0 pounds at $12) $ 24
        Direct labor (1.3 hours at $80) 104
        Variable overhead (1.3 hours at $10) 13
        Fixed overhead (1.3 hours at $20) 26


        Standard cost per unit $ 167




        Budgeted selling and administrative costs:
        Variable $ 3 per unit
        Fixed $ 1,600,000

        Expected sales activity: 31,000 units at $300 per unit
        Desired ending inventories: 18% of sales

        Assume this is the first year of operations for the Bellingham plant. During the year, the company had the following activity:

        Units produced 34,000
        Units sold 32,500
        Unit selling price $ 295
        Direct labor hours worked 43,700
        Direct labor costs $ 3,539,700
        Direct materials purchased 72,000 pounds
        Direct material costs $ 864,000
        Direct material used 72,000 pounds
        Actual fixed overhead $ 1,300,000
        Actual variable overhead $ 355,000
        Actual selling and administrative costs $ 1,793,000

        In addition, all over or underapplied overhead and all product cost variances are adjusted to cost of goods sold.

        1. Assume Utease Corporation is planning to change its evaluation of business operations in all plants from the profit center format to the investment center format. If the average invested capital at the Bellingham plant is $9,430,000, compute the return on investment (ROI) for the first year of operations. Use the DuPont method of evaluation to compute the return on sales (ROS) and capital turnover (CT) for the plant. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places)

        ROI %
        ROS %
        Capital Turnover %

        accounting 428208

        Various accounting assumptions, principles, constraints, and characteristics are listed below. Select those which best justify the following accounting procedures and indicate the corresponding letter(s) in the space(s) provided. A letter may be used more than once or not at all.

        a. Historical cost f. Economic entity k. Revenue recognition

        b. Relevance g. Materiality l. Full disclosure

        c. Monetary unit h. Conservatism m. Cost constraint

        d. Going concern i. Periodicity n. Industry practices

        e. Consistency j. Expense recognition o. Faithful representation

        _____ 1. Chose the solution that will be least likely to overstate assets or income.

        _____ 2. Describing the depreciation methods used in the financial statements.

        _____ 3. Applying the same accounting treatment to similar accounting events.

        _____ 4. The quality which helps users make predictions about present, past, and future events.

        _____ 5. Recording a transaction when goods or services are exchanged for cash or claims to cash.

        _____ 6. Preparing consolidated statements.

        _____ 7. Information must make a difference or a company need not disclose it.

        _____ 8. Provides the figure at which to record a liability.

        _____ 9. The preparation of timely reports on continuing operations.

        _____ 10. Accrual accounting (do not use “going concern”).

        _____ 11. Reporting those items which are significant enough to affect decisions. Select two (11 and 12).

        _____ 12. See item 11 above.

        _____ 13. Ignoring the phenomenon of price level changes (do not use “historical cost”).

        _____ 14. Not reporting assets at liquidation prices (do not use “historical cost”).

        _____ 15. Characterized by completeness, neutrality, and being free from error.

        _____ 16. Establishment of an allowance for doubtful accounts.

        _____ 17. Additivity of financial statement figures relating to different time periods.

        _____ 18. Carrying inventories at sales price less distribution costs.

        _____ 19. Use of estimating procedures for amortization policies. Select two (do not use “periodicity”) (19 and 20).

        _____ 20. See item 19 above.

        accounting question 428229

        Verona Pizza is a small neighborhood pizzeria that has a small area for in store dining as well offering takeout and free home delivery services. The pizzeria’s owner has determined that the shop has two major cost drivers”the number of pizzas sold and the number of deliveries made. Data concerning the pizzeria’s costs appear below:

        Fixed Cost
        per Month
        Cost per
        Pizza
        Cost per
        Delivery
        Pizza ingredients $ 4.20
        Kitchen staff $ 5,870
        Utilities $ 590 $ 0.10
        Delivery person $ 2.90
        Delivery vehicle $ 610 $ 1.30
        Equipment depreciation $ 384
        Rent $ 1,790
        Miscellaneous $ 710 $ 0.05
        In October, the pizzeria budgeted for 1,500 pizzas at an average selling price of $13.00 per pizza and for 200 deliveries.
        Data concerning the pizzeria’s operations in October appear below:

        Actual
        Results
        Pizzas 1,600
        Deliveries 180
        Revenue $ 21,340
        Pizza ingredients $ 6,850
        Kitchen staff $ 5,810
        Utilities $ 875
        Delivery person $ 522
        Delivery vehicle $ 982
        Equipment depreciation $ 384
        Rent $ 1,790
        Miscellaneous $ 778

        Required:
        1.

        Complete the flexible budget performance report that shows both activity variances and revenue and spending variances for the pizzeria for October. (Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Verona Pizza
        Flexible Budget Performance Report
        For the Month Ended October 31
        Activity Variances Revenue and Spending Variances
        Revenue $ (Click to select)FUNone $ (Click to select)FUNone


        Expenses:
        Pizza ingredients (Click to select)FUNone (Click to select)FUNone
        Kitchen staff (Click to select)FUNone (Click to select)FUNone
        Utilities (Click to select)FUNone (Click to select)FUNone
        Delivery person (Click to select)FUNone (Click to select)FUNone
        Delivery vehicle (Click to select)FUNone (Click to select)FUNone
        Equipment depreciation (Click to select)FUNone (Click to select)FUNone
        Rent (Click to select)FUNone (Click to select)FUNone
        Miscellaneous (Click to select)FUNone (Click to select)FUNone


        Total expense (Click to select)FUNone (Click to select)FUNone


        Net operating income $ (Click to select)FUNone $ (Click to select)FUNone





        flexible budget performance report 428234

        Verona Pizza is a small neighborhood pizzeria that has a small area for in store dining as well offering takeout and free home delivery services. The pizzeria’s owner has determined that the shop has two major cost drivers”the number of pizzas sold and the number of deliveries made. Data concerning the pizzeria’s costs appear below:

        Fixed Cost
        per Month
        Cost per
        Pizza
        Cost per
        Delivery
        Pizza ingredients $ 4.20
        Kitchen staff $ 5,870
        Utilities $ 590 $ 0.10
        Delivery person $ 2.90
        Delivery vehicle $ 610 $ 1.30
        Equipment depreciation $ 384
        Rent $ 1,790
        Miscellaneous $ 710 $ 0.05
        In October, the pizzeria budgeted for 1,500 pizzas at an average selling price of $13.00 per pizza and for 200 deliveries.
        Data concerning the pizzeria’s operations in October appear below:

        Actual
        Results
        Pizzas 1,600
        Deliveries 180
        Revenue $ 21,340
        Pizza ingredients $ 6,850
        Kitchen staff $ 5,810
        Utilities $ 875
        Delivery person $ 522
        Delivery vehicle $ 982
        Equipment depreciation $ 384
        Rent $ 1,790
        Miscellaneous $ 778

        accounting 428260

        Waco Company was started on January 1, 2011 when it issued common stock for $15,000 cash. Also on January 1, 2011 the company purchased office equipment that cost $15,000 cash. The equipment was delivered under terms FOB shipping point, and transportation cost was $1,000. The equipment had a five year useful life and a $1,200 expected salvage value.

        4. Using straight line depreciation, determine the amount of depreciation expense and the amount of accumulated depreciation that would appear on the December 31, 2013 financial statements.

        $2,608/$7,824.
        $2,960/$2,960.
        $2,600/$7,800.
        $2,960/$8,880.

        introduction to managerial accounting 6th edition chapter 9 the foundational 15 428285

        Waterville Company reported the following results from last year’s operations:

        Sales $100,000,00

        Variable Expenses 300,000

        Contribution margin 700,000

        Fixed expenses 500,000

        Net operating Income $200,000

        Average operating assets $625,000

        This year the company has a $120,000 investment opportunity with the following cost and revenue characteristics:

        Sales $200,000

        Contribution margin ratio 60% of sales

        Fixed expenses $90,000

        The company’s required rate of return is 15%.

        Required to Answer:


        1. What is last year’s margin?

        2. What is last year’s turnover?

        3. What is last year’s return on investment (ROI)?

        4. What is the margin related to this year’s investment opportunity?

        5. What is the turn over related to this year’s investment opportunity?

        6. What is the ROI related to this year’s investment opportunity?

        7. If the company pursues the investment opportunity and otherwise performs the same as last year, what margin will it earn this year?

        8. If the company pursues the investment opportunity and otherwise performs the same as last year, what turnover will it earn this year?

        9. If the company pursues the investment opportunity and otherwise performs the same as last year, what ROI will it earn this year?

        10. If Westerville’s Chief Executive Officer will earn a bonus only if her ROI from this year exceeds her ROI from last year, would she pursue the investment opportunity? Would the owners of the company want her to pursue the investment opportunity?

        11. What is last year’s residual income?

        12. What is the residual income of this year’s investment opportunity?

        13. If the company pursues the investment opportunity and otherwise perfroms the same as last year, what residual income will it earn this year?

        14. If Westerville’s Chief Executive Officer will earn a bonus only if her residual income from this year exceeds her residual income from last year, would she pursue the investment opportunity?

        15. Assume that the contribution margin ratio of the investment opportunity was 50% instead of 60%. If Westerville’s Chief Executive Officer will earn a bonus only if her residual income from this year exceeds her residual income from last year, would she pursue the investment opportunity? Would the owners of the company want her to pursue the investment opportunity?

        solve 428295

        Waterways Corporation is preparing its budget for the coming year, 2011. The first step is to plan for the first quarter of that coming year. Waterways gathered the following information from the managers. Sales Unit sales for November 2010 112,500 Unit sales for December 2010 102,100 Expected unit sales for January 2011 113,000 Expected unit sales for February 2011 112,500 Expected unit sales for March 2011 116,000 Expected unit sales for April 2011 125,000 Expected unit sales for May 2011 137,500 Unit selling price $12 Waterways likes to keep 10% of the next month’s unit sales in ending inventory. All sales are on account. 85% of the Accounts Receivable are collected in the month of sale, and 15% of the Accounts Receivable are collected in the month after sale. Accounts receivable on December 31, 2010, totaled $183,780. Direct Materials Item__ Amount used per unit Inventory, Dec. 31 Metal 1 lb @ 58A??c per lb. 5,177.5 lbs Plastic 12 oz @ 6A??c per oz 3,883.125 lbs Rubber 4 oz @ 5A??c per oz 1,294.375 lbs 2 lbs per unit 10,355.0 lbs Metal, plastic, and rubber together are 75A??c per pound per unit. Waterways likes to keep 5% of the materials needed for the next month in its ending inventory. Payment for materials is made within 15 days. 50% is paid in the month of purchase, and 50% is paid in the month after purchase. Accounts Payable on December 31, 2010, totaled $120,595. Raw Materials on December 31, 2010, totaled 11,295 pounds. Direct Labor Labor requires 12 minutes per unit for completion and is paid at a rate of $8 per hour. Manufacturing Overhead Indirect materials 30A??c per labor hour Indirect labor 50A??c per labor hour Utilities 45A??c per labor hour Maintenance 25A??c per labor hour Salaries $42,000 per month Depreciation $16,800 per month Property taxes $2,675 per month Insurance $1,200 per month Janitorial $1,300 per month Selling and Administrative Variable selling and administrative cost per unit is $1.60. Advertising $15,000 a month Insurance $1,400 a month Salaries $72,000 a month Depreciation $2,500 a month Other fixed costs $3,000 a month Other Information The Cash balance on December 31, 2010, totaled $100,500, but management has decided it would like to maintain a cash balance of at least $800,000 beginning on January 31, 2011. Dividends are paid each month at the rate of $2.50 per share for 5,000 shares outstanding. The company has an open line of credit with Romney’s Bank. The terms of the agreement requires borrowing to be in $1,000 increments at 8% interest. Waterways borrows on the first day of the month and repays on the last day of the month. A $500,000 equipment purchase is planned for February. Instructions For the first quarter of 2011, do the following. (a) Prepare a sales budget. (b) Prepare a production budget. (c) Prepare a direct materials budget. (d) Prepare a direct labor budget. (For calculations, round to the nearest hour.) (e) Prepare a manufacturing overhead budget. (Round amounts to the nearest dollar.) (f) Prepare a selling and administrative budget. (g) Prepare a schedule for expected cash collections from customers. (h) Prepare a schedule for expected payments for materials purchases. (i) Prepare a cash budget.

        actual costs and budgeted costs 428305

        Watson Industries uses flexible budgets. At normal capacity of 18,000 units, budgeted manufacturing overhead is $128,000 variable and $360,000 fixed. If Watson had actual overhead costs of $500,000 for 18,000 units produced, what is the difference between actual and budgeted costs?

        $16,000 favorable

        $12,000 unfavorable

        $4,000 unfavorable

        $4,000 favorable

        watson technical institute wti a school owned by tom watson provides training to ind 428310

        Watson Technical Institute (WTI), a school owned by Tom Watson, provides training to individuals

        who pay tuition directly to the school. WTI also offers training to groups in off site locations. Its unadjusted

        trial balance as of December 31, 2005, follows. WTI initially records prepaid expenses and

        unearned revenues in balance sheet accounts. Descriptions of items a through h that require adjusting

        entries on December 31, 2005, follow.

        Additional Information Items

        a. An analysis of the school’s insurance policies shows that $3,000 of coverage has expired.

        b. An inventory count shows that teaching supplies costing $2,600 are available at year end 2005.

        c. Annual depreciation on the equipment is $12,000.

        d. Annual depreciation on the professional library is $6,000.

        e. On November 1, the school agreed to do a special six month course (starting immediately) for a

        client. The contract calls for a monthly fee of $2,200, and the client paid the first five months’

        fees in advance. When the cash was received, the Unearned Training Fees account was credited.

        The fee for the sixth month will be recorded when it is collected in 2006.

        f. On October 15, the school agreed to teach a four month class (beginning immediately) for an

        individual for $3,000 tuition per month payable at the end of the class. The services are being

        provided as agreed, and no payment has yet been received.

        g. The school’s two employees are paid weekly. As of the end of the year, two days’ wages have

        accrued at the rate of $100 per day for each employee.

        h. The balance in the Prepaid Rent account represents rent for December.

        Required

        1. Prepare T accounts (representing the ledger) with balances from the unadjusted trial balance.

        2. Prepare the necessary adjusting journal entries for items a through h and post them to the

        T accounts. Assume that adjusting entries are made only at year end.

        3. Update balances in the T accounts for the adjusting entries and prepare an adjusted trial balance.

        4. Prepare Watson Technical Institute’s income statement and statement of owner’s equity for the

        year 2005 and prepare its balance sheet as of December 31, 2005.

        Check (2e) Cr.Training Fees Earned,

        $4,400; (2f ) Cr.Tuition Fees Earned,

        $7,500; (3) Adj.Trial balance totals,

        $301,500; (4) Net income, $38,500;

        Ending T.Watson, Capital $62,100

        Cash Debit 26,000

        Accounts receivable 0

        Teaching supplies Debit 10,000

        Prepaid insurance Debit 15,000

        Prepaid rent Debit 2,000

        Professional library Debit 30,000

        Accumulated depreciationAf?cAc‚¬”Professional library Credit 9,000

        Equipment Debit 70,000

        Accumulated depreciationAf?cAc‚¬”Equipment credit 16,000

        Accounts payable Credit 36,000

        Salaries payable 0

        Unearned training fees credit 16,000

        Tuition fees earned credit 102,000

        Training fees earned credit 38,000

        Depreciation expenseAf?cAc‚¬”Professional library 0

        Depreciation expenseAf?cAc‚¬”Equipment 0

        Salaries expense Debit 48,000

        Insurance expense 0

        Rent expense debit 22,000

        Teaching supplies expense 0

        Advertising expense Debit 7,000

        Utilities expense Debit 5,600

        T. Watson, Capital Credit 63,600

        T. Watson, Withdrawals Debit 40,000

        Totals 275,600

        Required:

        Adjusting Entries, T Accounts, Adjusted Trial Balance, Income Statement, Balance Sheet.

        accounting help 428326

        WebHelper Inc. acquired 100% of the outstanding stock of Silicon Chips Corporation (SCC) for $46.1 million, of which $17.2 million was allocated to goodwill. At the end of the current fiscal year, an impairment test revealed the following: fair value of SCC, $42.2 million; fair value of SCC’s net assets (excluding goodwill), $32.1 million; book value of SCC’s net assets (including goodwill), $45.3 million.

        What amount of impairment loss should WebHelper recognize? (Enter your answer in millions. Round your answer to 1 decimal place.)

        Impairment Loss:

        WebHelper Inc. acquired 100% of the outstanding stock of Silicon Chips Corporation (SCC) for $46.0 million, of which $17.0 million was allocated to goodwill. At the end of the current fiscal year, an impairment test revealed the following: SCC’s fair value of $42.0 million approximates fair value less costs to sell and that the present value of SCC’s estimated future cash flows is $42.1 million; book value of SCC’s net assets (including goodwill), $45.0 million. WebHelper prepares its financial statements according to IFRS and SCC is considered a cash generating unit.

        What amount of impairment loss, if any, should WebHelper recognize? (Enter your answer in millions. Round your answer to 1 decimal place.)

        Impairment Loss:

        accounting help 428342

        Welnor Industrial Gas Corporation supplies acetylene and other compressed gases to industry. Data regarding the store’s operations follow:

        Sales are budgeted at $320,000 for November, $340,000 for December, and $330,000 for January.

        Collections are expected to be 75% in the month of sale, 20% in the month following the sale, and 5% uncollectible.

        The cost of goods sold is 65% of sales.

        The company desires ending merchandise inventory to equal 80% of the following month’s cost of goods sold. Payment for merchandise is made in the month following the purchase.

        Other monthly expenses to be paid in cash are $21,000.

        Monthly depreciation is $16,000.
        Ignore taxes.

        Statement of Financial Position
        October 31
        Assets
        Cash $ 22,000
        Accounts receivable (net of allowance for uncollectible accounts) 82,000
        Merchandise inventory 166,400
        Property, plant and equipment (net of $658,000 accumulated depreciation) 1,170,000


        Total assets $ 1,440,400




        Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
        Accounts payable $ 199,000
        Common stock 840,000
        Retained earnings 401,400


        Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 1,440,400





        Required:
        a.

        Prepare a Schedule of Expected Cash Collections for November and December. (Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required.)

        Welnor Industrial Gas Corporation
        Schedule of Expected Cash Collections
        November December
        Sales $ $




        Accounts receivable, beginning balance $ $
        November sales
        December sales


        Total cash collections $ $





        b.

        Prepare a Merchandise Purchases Budget for November and December. (Input all amount as positive values.)

        Welnor Industrial Gas Corporation
        Merchandise Purchases Budget
        November December
        Budgeted cost of goods sold $ $
        (Click to select)Add desired ending merchandising inventoryAdd beginning merchandise inventoryLess beginning merchandise inventoryLess desired ending merchandising inventory


        Total needs
        (Click to select)Add beginning merchandise inventoryLess desired ending merchandising inventoryLess beginning merchandise inventoryAdd desired ending merchandising inventory


        Required purchases $





        c.

        Prepare Cash Budgets for November and December. (Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Input all amount as positive values.)

        Welnor Industrial Gas Corporation
        Cash budget
        November December
        Cash disbursement for merchandise $ $
        Other monthly cash expenses


        Total cash disbursements $ $




        Cash balance, beginning $ $
        Add cash receipts


        Total cash available
        Less cash disbursements


        Excess (deficiency) of cash available over disbursements
        Financing


        Cash balance, ending $ $





        d.

        Prepare Budgeted Income Statements for November and December. (Input all amount as positive values.)

        Welnor Industrial Gas Corporation
        Budgeted Income Statements
        November December
        (Click to select)Other monthly expensesCost of goods soldDirect materialsSalesDepreciation $ $
        (Click to select)Direct materialsOther monthly expensesDepreciationBad debt expenseAccounts payable
        (Click to select)Direct materialsDepreciationOther monthly expensesCost of goods soldAccounts payable


        (Click to select)Gross marginGross loss
        (Click to select)Bad debt expenseCost of goods soldAccounts receivableOther monthly expensesSales
        (Click to select)DepreciationSalesCost of goods soldBad debt expenseAccounts receivable


        (Click to select)Net operating lossNet operating income $ $





        e.

        Prepare a Budgeted Balance Sheet for the end of December. (Be sure to list the assets and liabilities in order of their liquidity.)

        Welnor Industrial Gas Corporation
        Budgeted Balance Sheet
        December 31
        Assets
        (Click to select)Accounts receivableAccounts payableRetained earningsCashCommon stock $
        (Click to select)Accounts receivableRetained earningsBulidings and equipmentCashAccounts payable
        (Click to select)Accounts receivableInventoryRetained earningsCashAccounts payable
        (Click to select)CashAccounts receivableAccounts payableRetained earningsProperty, plant and equipment

        Total assets $


        Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
        (Click to select)Property, plant and equipmentCashInventoryAccounts receivableAccounts payable $
        (Click to select)Property, plant and equipmentAccounts receivableAccounts payableInventoryCommon stock
        (Click to select)Retained earningsInventoryAccounts receivableAccounts payableProperty, plant and equipment

        Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $



        I’m ok till I got to C thats when I started to get lost on this question. Also please double check the anwser I came up with. thanks

        help pls 428351

        Wendell’s Donut Shoppe is investigating the purchase of a new $18,703 donut making machine. The new machine would permit the company to reduce the amount of part time help needed, at a cost savings of $3,375 per year. In addition, the new machine would allow the company to produce one new style of donut, resulting in the sale of 1,000 dozen more donuts each year. The company realizes a contribution margin of $1.20 per dozen donuts sold. The new machine would have a six year useful life. (Ignore by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c1″>income taxes.)

        by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c1″>

        To determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables, click here to view Exhibit 13B 1 andExhibit 13B 2. Alternatively, if you calculate the discount factor(s) using a formula, round to three (3) decimal places before using by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c1″>the factor in the problem.

        by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c1″>

        rev: 12_14_2011

        2. value:

        2.00 points

        Requirement 1:

        What would be the total annual cash inflows associated with the new machine for capital by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c1″>budgetingpurposes? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c1″>

        Total annual cash inflows $

        rev: 12_06_2011 check my workeBook Link

        3. value:

        2.00 points

        Requirement 2:

        Find the internal rate of return promised by the new machine. (Round your answer to 3 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

        Internal rate of return %

        rev: 12_06_2011 check my workeBook Link

        4. value:

        2.00 points

        Requirement 3:

        In addition to the data given previously, assume that the machine will have a $7,294 salvage value at the end of six years. Under these conditions, compute the internal rate of return. (Hint: You may find it helpful to use the trial and error process; find the discount rate that will cause the net present value to be closest to zero.) (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

        Internal rate of return %

        help 428386

        Williams and Park Accounting Practice is considering investing in a new by Savings Explorer” href=”http://sjc.cengagenow.com/ilrn/takeAssignment/takeAssignmentMain.do#” class=”c2″>computer system that costs $9,000 and would reduce processing costs by $2,000 a year for the next six years.

        by Savings Explorer” href=”http://sjc.cengagenow.com/ilrn/takeAssignment/takeAssignmentMain.do#” class=”c2″>

        by Savings Explorer” href=”http://sjc.cengagenow.com/ilrn/takeAssignment/takeAssignmentMain.do#” class=”c2″> Calculate the internal rate of return, using thetime value of money charts. Round your answer to the nearest whole number. Do not round your interim calculations. Do not enter the percent sign (%).

        financial accounting urgent 428392

        The Willie Company has provided the following information:
        Af?cAc‚¬A??c Operating expenses were $365,000;
        Af?cAc‚¬A??c Income from operations was $250,000;
        Af?cAc‚¬A??c Net sales were $1,500,000;
        Af?cAc‚¬A??c Interest expense was $77,000;
        Af?cAc‚¬A??c Discontinued operations loss net of tax was $85,000;
        Af?cAc‚¬A??c Income tax expense was $51,900.
        What was Willie’s gross profit?
        $885,000
        $785,800
        $666,900
        $615,000

        accounting urgent 428398

        The Willie Company has provided the following information:
        Af?cAc‚¬A??c Operating expenses were $430,000;
        Af?cAc‚¬A??c Income from operations was $240,000;
        Af?cAc‚¬A??c Net sales were $1,400,000;
        Af?cAc‚¬A??c Interest expense was $90,000;
        Af?cAc‚¬A??c Discontinued operations loss net of tax was $98,000;
        Af?cAc‚¬A??c Income tax expense was $60,000.
        What was Willie’s gross profit?
        $608,000
        $730,000
        $670,000
        $730,000

        annual depreciation schedule first year accounting 428404

        Would be willing to give out an extra 3,000 points for this question answered correctly. (By posting another question worth that much) This is a longer question but if you know accounting it should be somewhat simple. I just don’t have any extra time to get it done. It needs to be done on an excel spreadsheet, but you could just upload a screenshot of the final spreadsheet with formulas shown. I will awarding with points after I get my grade back which will be within a week. To show formulas on excel follow these steps.

        1. Press and hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard
        2. Press and release the
          grave accent key ( ` ) key on the keyboard without releasing the Ctrl key

        Consider all of the following information:<?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” />

        Bison Industries is in its first year of operations. Bison purchased the following assets during 2012:

        A?· On January 1, Bison purchased land and buildings for $20 million. The amount allocated to land is $5 million and the amount allocated to the buildings is $15 million. The buildings’ expected useful life is 30 years and its salvage value is $2 million.

        A?· On January 1, Bison purchased a delivery truck for $20,000. The truck has a useful life of 7 years and no expected salvage value.

        A?· On April 1, Bison purchased some machinery for $1 million. The machinery is to be depreciated over 10 years and has a $50,000 salvage value.

        A?· Bison’s standard practice is to recognize depreciation expense to the nearest month in the year of acquisition or disposal.

        A?· Bison uses the straight line method of depreciation

        Use MS Excel to prepare an annual depreciation schedule for the fixed assets of Bison Industries as of December 31, 2012. At a minimum the schedule should include the following information:

        A?· Asset

        A?· Cost

        A?· Salvage Value

        A?· Depreciable Cost

        A?· Useful life

        A?· Date of Acquisition

        A?· Depreciation Expense* (for the 2012 income statement)

        A?· Accumulated Depreciation* (as of December 31, 2012)

        A?· Carrying Value* (as of December 31, 2012)

        A?· Totals* for Cost, Depreciation Expense and Carrying Value

        Students may include other information as appropriate for the carrying out of formulas in the schedule.

        Students should format cells such that amounts are rounded and presented to the nearest dollar.

        * The cells for Depreciation Expense, Accumulated Depreciation, Carrying Value and Totals should all be based on formulas utilizing the other cells within the spreadsheet. Students are not to do separate calculations to input the answers. Let the spreadsheet do the calculations for you. Instructors will be checking the spreadsheet by changing input fields and testing the resulting calculations of Depreciation Expense, Accumulated Depreciation, and Carrying Value. The grade for this project will be based on correct solutions, proper formulas, and formatting of the schedule.

        homework windathon inc expects sales volume totaling 500 000 for june 428420

        Windathon, Inc. expects sales volume totaling $500,000 for June. Data for the month follows:

        Sales commissions 4% of sales
        Sales manager’s salary $30,000 per month
        Advertising expense $25,000 per month
        Shipping expense. 1% of sales
        Miscellaneous selling expenses $2,100 per month plus 3/4% of sales

        How much is Windathon’s selling expense budget for June?

        wiseman video plans to make four annual deposits of 2 000 each to a special building 428435

        Wiseman Video plans to make four annual deposits of $2,000 each to a special building fund. The fund’s assets will be invested in mortgage instruments expected to pay interest at 12% on the fund’s balance.

        Using the appropriate annuity table, determine how much will be accumulated in the fund on December 31, 2014, under each of the following situations (Use Table 1,Table 3, andTable 5) (Round “FV Factor” to 5 decimal places and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response):

        (1) The first deposit is made on December 31, 2011, and interest is compounded annually.

        Amount accumulated $

        (2) The first deposit is made on December 31, 2010, and interest is compounded annually.

        Amount accumulated $

        (3) The first deposit is made on December 31, 2010, and interest is compounded quarterly.
        Future Value
        First deposit $
        Second deposit
        Third deposit
        Fourth deposit

        Total $



        please show work q 428467

        PLEASE SHOW WORK

        Q:

        Financial data for Bridger, Inc., for last year are as follows:

        Bridger, Inc.
        Balance Sheet

        Beginning
        Balance

        Ending
        Balance

        Assets

        Cash

        $

        125,000

        $

        130,000

        Accounts receivable

        340,000

        480,000

        Inventory

        570,000

        490,000

        Plant and equipment, net

        845,000

        820,000

        Investment in Brier Company

        400,000

        430,000

        Land (undeveloped)

        250,000

        250,000





        Total assets

        $

        2,530,000

        $

        2,600,000









        Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

        Accounts payable

        $

        380,000

        $

        340,000

        Long term debt

        1,000,000

        1,000,000

        Stockholders’ equity

        1,150,000

        1,260,000





        Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

        $

        2,530,000

        $

        2,600,000










        Bridger, Inc.
        Income Statement

        Sales

        $

        4,180,000

        Operating expenses

        3,553,000



        Net operating income

        627,000

        Interest and taxes:

        Interest expense

        $ 120,000

        Tax expense

        200,000

        320,000




        Net income

        $

        307,000






        The company paid dividends of $197,000 last year. The “Investment in Brier Company” on the balance sheet represents an investment in the stock of another company.

        Required:

        1.

        Compute the company’s margin, turnover, and return on investment (ROI) for last year. (Round the “Turnover” to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

        2.

        The board of directors of Bridger, Inc., has set a minimum required return of 20%. What was the company’s residual income last year? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        direct materials and labor ratios 428488

        1. Please Show all work for all subsections(A D) of both problems(Ravena Labs and Orgeron Corporation) or no points will be awarded.

          (Give formulas, plug numbers, then give answers to be sufficient)


          1. Ravena Labs., Inc. makes a single product which has the following standards:

        Direct materials

        2.5 ounces at $20 per ounce

        Direct labor

        1.4 hours at $12.50 per hour

        • 3,750 units of compound were produced during the month.

        • There was no beginning direct materials inventory.

        • The ending direct materials inventory was 2,000 ounces.

        • Direct materials purchased: 12,000 ounces for $225,000.

        • Direct labor hours worked: 5,600 hours at a cost of $67,200.

        A. The direct materials price variance for October is:

        B. The direct materials quantity variance for October is:

        C. The direct labor rate variance for October is:

        D. The direct labor efficiency variance for October is:

        2. Orgeron Corporation’s most recent balance sheet and income statement appear below:

        Statement of Financial Position

        December 31, Year 2 and Year 1

        (in thousands of dollars)

        Assets

        Year 2

        Year 1

        Current assets:

        Cash

        $ 260

        $ 120

        Accounts receivable

        160

        190

        Inventory

        180

        160

        Prepaid expenses

        60

        70

        Total current assets

        660

        540

        Plant and equipment, net

        680

        750

        Total assets

        $1,340

        $1,290

        Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

        Current liabilities:

        Accounts payable

        $ 170

        $ 150

        Accrued liabilities

        40

        40

        Notes payable, short term

        80

        90

        Total current liabilities

        290

        280

        Bonds payable

        290

        300

        Total liabilities

        580

        580

        Stockholders’ equity:

        Preferred stock, $100 par value, 5%

        100

        100

        Common stock, $2 par value

        200

        200

        Additional paid in capitalAf?cAc‚¬”common stock

        100

        100

        Retained earnings

        360

        310

        Total stockholders’ equity

        760

        710

        Total liabilities & stockholders’ equity

        $1,340

        $1,290

        Income Statement

        For the Year Ended December 31, Year 2

        (in thousands of dollars)

        Sales (all on account)

        $1,260

        Cost of goods sold

        800

        Gross margin

        460

        Selling and administrative expense

        272

        Net operating income

        188

        Interest expense

        38

        Net income before taxes

        150

        Income taxes (30%)

        45

        Net income

        $ 105

        Compute the following for Year 2:

        1. A. Working capital.

        2. B. Current ratio.

        3. C. Acid test ratio.

        4. D Accounts receivable turnover.

        financial accounting 427728

        Tiger Company’s stockholders’ equity at the beginning of the year was $193,000. During the year Tiger reported the following:

        Net income of $97,000.
        Dividend declarations totaling $18,800.
        Issued stock to stockholders in exchange for $51,000 cash.
        Stockholders sold some of their stock to other stockholders for $12,800 cash.
        What is Tiger’s stockholders’ equity at the end of the year?
        $341,000
        $322,200
        $316,200
        $335,000

        variances 427772

        Topper Toys has developed a new toy called the Brainbuster. The company has a standard cost system to help control costs and has established the following standards for the Brainbuster toy:

        Direct materials: 7 diodes per toy at $0.34 per diode
        Direct labor: 1.4 hours per toy at $7.10 per hour

        During August, the company produced 5,300 Brainbuster toys. Production data on the toy for August follow:

        Direct materials: 74,000 diodes were purchased at a cost of $0.30 per diode. 27,625 of these diodes were still in inventory at the end of the month.
        Direct labor: 8,020 direct labor hours were worked at a cost of $60,150.

        1. Compute the following variances for August

        a. Direct materials price and quantity variances.

        Material price variance?

        Material quantity variance?

        b. Direct labor rate and efficiency variances.

        Labor rate variance?

        Labor efficiency variance?

        accounting help 427804

        Towel Enterprises issued 9%, 5 year, $2,000,000 par value bonds that pay interest semiannually on October 1 and April 1. The bonds are dated April 1, 2011, and are issued on that date. The discount rate of interest for such bonds on April 1, 2011, is 8%. What cash proceeds did Towel Enterprises receive from issuance of the bonds?

        On July 1, 2011, Hobbit Company issued $600,000, 6%, 10 year bonds at face value. Interest is payable semiannually on January 1 and July 1. Hobbit Corporation has a calendar year end.

        Prepare all entries related to the bond issue for 2011.

        On January 1, 2011, Metal Gear Company issued bonds with a face value of $800,000. The bonds carry a stated interest of 7% payable each January 1 and July 1.

        a. Prepare the journal entry for the issuance assuming the bonds are issued at 97.b. Prepare the journal entry for the issuance assuming the bonds are issued at 102.

        Andy Dick sells televisions with a 2 year warranty. Past experience indicates that 2% of the units sold will be returned during the warranty period for repairs. The average cost of repairs under warranty is estimated to be $50 per unit. During 2011, 12,000 units were sold at an average price of $400. During the year, repairs were made on 70 units at a cost of $4,000.

        Prepare journal entries to record the repairs made under warranty and estimated warranty expense for the year.

        On January 1, 2011, Doctor X issued 8%, 20 year bonds with a face amount of $5,000,000 at 101. Interest is payable semiannually on June 30 and December 31.

        Prepare the entries to record the issuance of the bonds and the first semiannual interest payment assuming that the Doctor uses straight line amortization.

        On January 1, 2011, Pacman Enterprises issued 9%, 10 year bonds with a face amount of $900,000 at 96. Interest is payable semiannually on June 30 and December 31. The bonds were issued for an effective interest rate of 10%.

        Prepare the entries to record the issuance of the bonds and the first semiannual interest payment assuming that the company uses effective interest amortization.

        Spanner Company issued $1,000,000, 10%, 2 year bonds which pay interest semiannually. Compute the amount at which the bonds would sell if investors required a rate of return of 8%.

        All help much appreciated, I realize it’s a lot!

        venture company earned 8000 of service revenue on account during 2010 427838

        Venture Company earned $8000 of service revenue on account during 2010. The company collected $5200 cash from accounts receivable during 2010.

        Based on this information alone, determine the following.

        C. The amount of net income that Venture would report on the 2010 income statement would be ________.

        D. The amount of cash flow from operating activities that Venture would report on the 2010 statement would be __________

        E. The amount of retained earnings that Venture would report on the 2010 balance sheet would be ___________

        F. Why are the answers to C and D different? Complete the statement below…

        $________ of revenue was earned buy only $ _________ of it was collected.

        Attachments:

        managerial accounting q8 17 427856

        Triumph Corporation has analyzed their customer and order handling data for the past year and has determined the following costs:

        Order processing cost per $8.00

        Additional costs if under

        must be expedited (rushed) $9.00

        Customer technical support $13.00

        Relationship management

        costs (Per customer per year) $1,800.00

        In addition to these costs, product costs amount to 80% of sales.

        In the prior year, triumph had the following experience with one of its customers, Julius Company:

        Sales $20,000

        Number of orders 170

        Percent of orders marked rush 80%

        Calls to technical support 90

        REQUIRED:

        Calculate the profitability of the Julius Company account.

        Sales Amount

        Less:

        Title? Formula?

        Title? Formula?

        Title? Formula?

        Title? Formula?

        Title? Formula? Formula?

        Profitability of Julius

        Company account Formula?

        managerial acct 427861

        Troy Engines, Ltd., manufactures a variety of engines for use in heavy equipment. The company has always produced all of the necessary parts for its engines, including all of the carburetors. An outside supplier has offered to sell one type of carburetor to Troy Engines, Ltd., for a cost of $35 per unit. To evaluate this offer, Troy Engines, Ltd., has gathered the following information relating to its own cost of producing the carburetor internally:

        Per Unit 15,000 Units
        per year
        Direct materials $14 $210,000
        Direct labor 10 150,000
        Variable manufacturing overhead 3 45,000
        Fixed manufacturing overhead, traceable 6* 90,000
        Fixed manufacturing overhead, allocated 9 135,000
        Total cost

        $42

        $630,000

        What will be the total relevant cost of 15,000 units, if they are manufactured internally?

        Suppose that if the carburetors were purchased, Troy Engines, Ltd., could use the freed capacity to launch a new product. The segment margin of the new product would be $150,000 per year.
        (a)

        What will be the total relevant cost of 15,000 units, if they are manufactured internally?

        relevant costs for decision making 427867

        Troy Engines, Ltd., manufactures a variety of engines for use in heavy equipment. The company has always produced all of the necessary parts for its engines, including all of the carburetors. An outside supplier has offered to sell one type of carburetor to Troy Engines, Ltd., for a cost of $35 per unit. To evaluate this offer, Troy Engines, Ltd., has gathered the following information relating to its own cost of producing the carburetor internally:

        Per Unit 14,400 Units
        per year
        Direct materials $9 $129,600
        Direct labor 11 158,400
        Variable manufacturing overhead 3 43,200
        Fixed manufacturing overhead, traceable 9* 129,600
        Fixed manufacturing overhead, allocated 13 187,200
        Total cost

        $45

        $648,000


        *One third supervisory salaries; two thirds depreciation of special equipment (no resale value).

        rev: 02 12 2011

        3. value:

        3.00 points

        Requirement 1:
        (a)

        What will be the total relevant cost of 14,400 units, if they are manufactured internally? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Total relevant cost $

        (b) Should the outside supplier’s offer be accepted?
        (Click to select) Accept Reject

        rev: 02 12 2011 check my workeBook Linkreferences

        4. value:

        3.00 points

        Requirement 2:
        Suppose that if the carburetors were purchased, Troy Engines, Ltd., could use the freed capacity to launch a new product. The segment margin of the new product would be $70,000 per year.
        (a)

        What will be the total relevant cost of 14,400 units, if they are manufactured internally? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Total relevant cost $
        (b) Should Troy Engines, Ltd., accept the offer to by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c38″>buy the carburetors for $35 per unit?

        (Click to select) Accept Reject

        rev: 02 12 2011 check my workeBook Linkreferences

        5. value:

        6.00 points

        Imperial Jewelers is considering a special order for 27 handcrafted by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c38″>gold bracelets to be given as gifts to members of a wedding party. The normal selling price of a gold bracelet is $401.50 and its unit product cost is $264.00 as shown below:

        by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c38″>

        Direct materials $142.00
        Direct labor 86.00
        Manufacturing overhead 36.00
        Unit product cost

        $264.00


        Most of the manufacturing overhead is fixed and unaffected by variations in how much jewelry is produced in any given period. However, $11 of the overhead is variable with respect to the number of bracelets produced. The customer who is interested in the special bracelet order would like special filigree applied to the bracelets. This filigree would require additional materials costing $10 per bracelet and would also require acquisition of a special tool costing $458 that would have no other use once the special order is completed. This order would have no effect on the company’s regular sales and the order could be by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c38″>fulfilled using the company’s existing capacity without affecting any other order.

        by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c38″>

        Required:
        (a)

        What effect would accepting this order have on the company’s net operating income if a special price of$361.50 per bracelet is offered for this order? (Input the amount as positive value. Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Net operating income (Click to select)decreasedincreased by $

        (b) Should the special order be accepted at this price?
        (Click to select)NoYes

        Barlow Company manufactures three products: A, B, and C. The selling price, variable costs, and contribution margin for one unit of each product follow:

        Product
        A B C
        Selling price

        $190

        $258

        $250

        Variable expenses:
        Direct materials 20 78 32
        Other variable expenses

        102

        90

        136

        Total variable Expense 122 168 168
        Contribution margin

        $68

        $90

        $82

        Contribution margin ratio 35.79% 34.88% 32.8%

        The same raw material is used in all three products. Barlow Company has only 5,000 pounds of raw material on hand and will not be able to obtain any more of it for several weeks due to a strike in its supplier’s plant. Management is trying to decide which product(s) to concentrate on by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c38″>next week in filling its backlog of orders. The material costs $2 per pound.

        by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c38″>

        rev: 02 12 2011

        6. value:

        2.00 points

        Requirement 1:

        Compute the amount of contribution margin that will be obtained per pound of material used in each product. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        A B C
        Contribution margin $ $ $

        rev: 02 12 2011 check my workeBook Linkreferences

        7. value:

        2.00 points

        Requirement 2:

        Since material time seems to be the company’s constraint, identify the product, which the company should work on next week.

        rev: 02 12 2011

        Product B
        Product C
        Product A

        check my workeBook Linkreferences

        8. value:

        2.00 points

        Requirement 3:

        A foreign supplier could furnish Barlow with additional stocks of the raw material at a substantial premium over the usual price. If there is unfilled demand for all three products, what is the highest price that Barlow Company should be willing to pay for an additional pound of materials? (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        For product A $
        For product B $
        For product C $

        24 c 427878

        Tuna Company set the following standard unit costs for its single product.
        Direct materials (28 Ibs. @ $5 per Ib.) $ 140.00
        Direct labor (10 hrs. @ $10 per hr.) 100.00
        Factory overhead”variable (10 hrs. @ $6 per hr.) 60.00
        Factory overhead”fixed (10 hrs. @ $9 per hr.) 90.00


        Total standard cost $ 390.00





        The predetermined overhead rate is based on a planned operating volume of 70% of the productive capacity of 60,000 units per quarter. The following flexible budget information is available.

        Operating Levels

        60% 70% 80%
        Production in units 36,000 42,000 48,000
        Standard direct labor hours 360,000 420,000 480,000
        Budgeted overhead
        Fixed factory overhead $ 3,780,000 $ 3,780,000 $ 3,780,000
        Variable factory overhead $ 2,160,000 $ 2,520,000 $ 2,880,000

        During the current quarter, the company operated at 80% of capacity and produced 48,000 units of product; actual direct labor totaled 477,000 hours. Units produced were assigned the following standard costs:

        Direct materials (1,344,000 Ibs. @ $5 per Ib.) $ 6,720,000
        Direct labor (480,000 hrs. @ $10 per hr.) 4,800,000
        Factory overhead (480,000 hrs. @ $15 per hr.) 7,200,000


        Total standard cost $ 18,720,000





        Actual costs incurred during the current quarter follow:

        Direct materials (1,339,000 Ibs. @ $5.10) $ 6,828,900
        Direct labor (477,000 hrs. @ $9.75) 4,650,750
        Fixed factory overhead costs 4,230,000
        Variable factory overhead costs 3,960,000


        Total actual costs $ 19,669,650





        value:
        1.00 points

        Required:
        1.

        Compute the direct materials cost variance, including its price and quantity variances. (Do not round your intermediate calculations. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Direct materials cost variance $ (Click to select)UNoneF
        Price variance $ (Click to select)FNoneU
        Quantity variance $ (Click to select)NoneUF

        eBook Links (2)references

        2. value:
        1.00 points

        2.

        Compute the direct labor variance, including its rate and efficiency variances. (Do not round your intermediate calculations. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Direct labor cost variance $ (Click to select)UNoneF
        Rate variance $ (Click to select)UFNone
        Efficiency variance $ (Click to select)NoneFU

        eBook Links (2)references

        3. value:
        1.00 points

        3.

        Compute the overhead controllable and volume variances. (Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Controllable variance $ (Click to select)UFNone
        Fixed overhead volume variance $ (Click to select)FNoneU

        journal entries 427882

        tuscarora hardwoods, a custom manufacturer of furniture, uses job order costing. the following transactions to support job mrs 55 for a custom meeting room set a large table plus 16 chairs occurred in january: (a) purchased $10,000 of raw materials. (b) issued $500 of supplies from raw material inventory. (c) purchased $7,000 of raw material. (d) paid for the raw material purchased in transaction (a). (e) issued $8,500 in raw material to the production department. (f) incurred production labor costs of $12,500, which were credited to payroll payable. (g) paid $23,250 cash for utilities, power, equipment maintenance, and miscellaneous items for the manufacturing plant. (h) applied overhead on the basis of 185 percent of $8500 in material costs. (i) recognized depreciation on manufacturing property, plant, and equipment of $6250. prepare journal entries to record these transactions

        human resource 427941

        1. Type your question hereAnswer
        2. Permits employers to hire only U.S. Citizens.
          Permits employers to require more documentation from some prospective employees than from others to ensure that illegal aliens are not hired.
          Prevents employers from discriminating against undocumented aliens.
          Makes it illegal for an employer to discriminate based on national origin.

        3.85 points

        Question 19

        1. Which of the following statements is TRUE with regard to sexual orientation and gay rights? Answer
          The Supreme Court had not decided whether gay men and lesbians have rights under the equal protection amendment to the U.S. Constitution.
          Transvestites are considered disabled under the ADA.
          Federal law prohibits discrimination based on sexual orientation.
          State and city laws banning discrimination based on sexual orientation have typically been held invalid by the individual state supreme courts.

        3.85 points

        Question 20

        1. Susan, the school principal, is interviewing applicants for a position as an elementary school teacher in an isolated rural community in North Dakota. Which of the following questions is LEGAL? Answer
          Are you married? It is really hard to meet single people out here, and we have had a lot of single teachers quit.
          Most people here are church goers. We find that our teachers fit better into the community if they have the same values. Would you be active in any of the churches here?
          All of our students are native English speakers. What languages do you speak and write fluently?
          Have you ever been arrested for child abuse, child pornography, or any other offense?

        3.85 points

        Question 21

        1. The EEOC’s policy guidelines are:? Answer
          law.
          persuasive authority.
          optional suggestions for HR practitioners.
          usually not enforced.

        3.85 points

        Question 22

        1. The major purpose of the OFCCP is to: ? Answer
          Evaluate the pay equity of federal government jobs.
          Help the victims of unlawful discrimination to file claims and obtain relief.
          Handle in the public sector all functions that the EEOC handles in the private sector.
          Require that federal contractors and subcontractors take affirmative action to overcome the effects of prior discriminatory practices.

        3.85 points

        Question 23

        1. Under the Uniform Guidelines on Employee Selection, there are two ways employers can choose to prove it is not illegally discriminating against employees. These are:? Answer
          Validity and reliability tests.
          Prima facie evidence and bona fide occupational requirements.
          No disparate impact and job related validity.
          No adverse impact and no disparate treatment.
          ?

        3.85 points

        Question 24

        1. A large daily newspaper with national market employs a large number of staff reporters. Annual hiring rates are fairly high because there is high turnover among the reporters as they are promoted or are hired away by other newspapers. Last year, 37 men applied for a reporter positions; 8 were hired. For women, 22 applied and 6 were hired. Calculate the selection rates for men and women. Is there evidence of disparate impact for women? Answer
          Yes, there is disparate impact. The number of women hired is 75% of the number of men hired.
          Yes, there is a disparate impact because at least 4/5 of the female candidates should have been hired, i.e., 18 candidates.
          No, there is no disparate impact because the selection rate for women is actually higher than that for men.
          No, there is no disparate impact because 6 of the men were hired as sports writers and that removes these jobs from the calculations.

        3.85 points

        Question 25

        1. Employers can check for disparate impact in all the following internal activities EXCEPT:? Answer
          Candidates selected for interviews of these recruited.
          Promotions
          Terminations
          Use of sick leave

        3.85 points

        Question 26

        1. If a company has external disparate impact, it means that:? Answer
          Fewer than 4/5ths of its employees are members of a protected classes and it needs to recruit more minorities from the relevant labor market.
          The employer has intentionally hired fewer minorities than it should have, so much so, that minorities comprise less than 4/5ths of the proportion they should, given the composition of the relevant work force.
          At least one category of minority employees makes up less than 4/5ths of the population that minority makes up in the relevant labor market.
          The company has too many employees of one minority class in comparison to the other minorities, thus giving rise to an illegal “favored minority” situation.
          ?

        3.85 points

        Question 27

        1. On applying for a job as an assistant designer with a noted regional designer of wedding and ball gowns, Schubert was required to bring in a portfolio of his dress designs, including drawings, photographs, and several completed garments. This represents:? Answer
          An employment test that estimates the reliability of Schubert work.
          A content valid employment test for this job, because Schubert is presenting a work sample
          Test retest reliability, because each item in the portfolio presents a different test.
          An example of criterion related validity, where Schubert’s future performance is the criterion and the portfolio items are the predictors.

        3.85 points

        Question 28

        1. Which of the following statements is TRUE about applicant flow data? Answer
          It is illegal for interviewers to make a notation on a separate form not used in the selection process about the racial category a job applicant seems to fit.
          The only legal way to collect racial data about job applicants is to place this as an optional item on the job application form.
          The only legal way to collect racial data on job applicants is to ask the applicant to voluntarily supply this information on a separate form that is not used the selection process.
          It is legal for an interviewer to look at a job applicant in order to classify him/her as to race and to make a notation on a separate form that is not used in the selection process.

        3.85 points

        Question 29

        1. A large commercial cleaning service in the Southwest requires all Hispanic applicants for supervisory positions to have a high school diploma from a U.S. high school, not a school in another country, such as Mexico. This is an example of:? Answer
          Disparate treatment
          A bona fide occupational requirement
          Disparate impact
          A business necessity

        3.85 points

        Question 30

        1. Emily works for a small architecture firm of a dozen employees. Emily has discovered that she is pregnant. Which of the following statements is true under the Pregnancy Discrimination Act? Answer
          If the employer has a medical leave program for other circumstances, it must treat Emily’s pregnancy the same way.
          Emily has job protection when she returns from maternity leave if she is one of the firm’s architects, not if she is an hourly employee.
          Emily has job protection when she returns from maternity leave if she is an hourly employee, and not one of the firm’s architects, who are professionals on salaries and, thus, not protected by the PDA.
          Emily is not protected by the PDA.

        3.85 points

        Question 31

        1. During a trip to China, Kevin became very ill and had to be treated for several days in a Chinese hospital. During the course of treatment Kevin received several blood transfusions. Kevin is now back to work in the U.S., but rumors in the workplace a spreading that the reason Kevin is constantly fatigued and subject to colds is because he caught AIDS from the transfusions. For this reason, Kevin was passed over for a promotion because the supervisor of the department did not want to work with a person with AIDS. Is Kevin covered by the ADA? Answer
          Yes, but only if Kevin really has AIDS. So Kevin needs to have an AIDS test to clarify his medical condition.
          No, because Kevin hasn’t had an AIDS test, so his actual medical condition is not known.
          Yes, Kevin is covered by the ADA because some coworkers think he has AIDS, even though me may or may not actually have AIDS.
          No, because the real causes of the rumors about Kevin are his fatigue and his frequency of colds. Colds and fatigue are transitory and are not covered by the ADA.

        3.85 points

        Question 32

        1. A large federal contactor is hiring individuals for positions as private security guards in a war zone. Answer
          The ADA would allow a pre employment medical exam in this case because the job is para military
          The ADA would not allow physical testing until a conditional job offer was made.
          The ADA would allow a pre employment medical exam because the employee would be an employee of a contractor for the federal government.
          The ADA would allow a pre employment medical exam if it was used in the context of a preliminary fitness for active duty test.

        3.85 points

        Question 33

        1. Which of the following questions to job applicants is LEGAL and under ADA? Answer
          How many times were you absent due to illness in the last two years?
          Have you ever filed for workers’ compensation?
          I see you are wearing a cast on your arm? How did you hurt yourself?
          Describe any problems you would have lifting a 50 pound dog onto an examination table.
          ?

        3.85 points

        Question 34

        1. Touchdown Plastic Molding has experienced a 2 year long downturn in orders. As a result, layoffs are unavoidable. At Touchdown, almost every employment decision takes seniority into account: promotions, transfers, pay raises, vacations, etc. So, the company wishes to lay off its employees in reverse order of seniority. That is, the newest employees would be the first to be laid off. In general, Touchdown’s newer employees younger, but they also include minorities and woman of all ages. Most of the senior employees are white males. Answer
          Touchdown can lay off junior employees because it has consistently used seniority in employment decisions.
          Touchdown cannot use seniority to lay off its employees because it will violate Title VII.
          If Touchdown lays off senior employees, it will violate their psychological contract and the employer can be sued for damages.
          Touchdown cannot lay off any employees because it will violate Title VII or the ADEA. It must rely on attrition to reduce the number of employees.

        3.85 points

        Question 35

        1. Which of the following is TRUE with regard to conviction and arrest records? Answer
          Using conviction records has been shown to be discriminatory.
          All convictions may be considered in employment decisions.
          In general, only job related convictions can be considered.
          Recent job related arrest may be considered in employment decisions.

        3.85 points

        Question 36

        1. While Edith, the manger of HR for a large insurance company, was on vacation, her new intern decided to straighten out the bulging files in the file room. He went through all employee records and discarded all the records of people who applied for jobs but who were rejected, and, he discarded all information about employees that was more than five years old. To maintain confidentiality of the files, the intern had all the discarded materials shredded. Answer
          Everything the intern did was within EEOC guidelines.
          The intern was correct in discarding the rejected applicants’ records, but he should have kept all of the current employees’ records.
          The intern was probably within EEOC guidelines with his 5 year cut off for current employee files, but he should have retained the rejected applicants’ records.
          The intern was correct in shredding the rejected applicants’ records, but current employee records should be kept on site for a minimum of three years, and then in a safe storage location for another 10 years in order to comply with EEOC guidelines.
          ?

        3.85 points

        Question 37

        1. Affirmative Action:? Answer
          Lowers the KSA’s for jobs where minorities are under represented.
          Requires applicants to have the basic qualifications for jobs.
          Encourages hiring under qualified applicants and bringing up their skills with extra training.
          Maintains traditional KSA’s where minorities are over represented.

        3.85 points

        Question 38

        1. Katrina, who is of Polish descent, works with Paul who has a large repertoire of Polish jokes. Katrina is embarrassed by this and she has asked Paul to stop, but Paul tells her to “lighten up” and continues telling his jokes. Which of the following statements is TRUE? Answer
          Katrina has no legal resources because Poles are not a protected category.
          Katrina would have legal resources only if the jokes were always about Polish women, because then the situation might be considered a hostile environment.
          Paul has the right to free speech in the workplace. He does not intend the jokes to be offensive, rather he views them as something that makes the workplace more jovial. He is justified in this because all the other co workers laugh at the jokes.
          Katrina has a possible case of ethnic harassment against Paul.

        3.85 points

        Question 39

        1. Lydia is 3 months pregnant with twins. She is applying for a pharmaceutical sales representative position that requires two weeks of overnight travel per month. Which of the following is TRUE? Answer
          The employer cannot take Lydia’s pregnancy into consideration in the hiring decision.
          The interviewer can ask Lydia about her pregnancy since she is “showing” and is wearing maternity clothes. Her choice of clothing indicated that Lydia intends the employer to know she is pregnant.
          Lydia is required to indicate that she is pregnant on the application forms.
          The Pregnancy Discrimination Acts applies to persons who are employed at the time that they become pregnant, not to job applicants.

        3.85 points

        Question 40

        1. Policies of reassigning women from hazardous jobs to lower paying jobs because of health related concerns, including, potential birth defects sustained during pregnancy, Answer
          Are recommended as a way of reducing worker compensation premiums.
          Are usually left for supervisors to decide on a case by case basis.
          Have been ruled illegal by the Supreme Court.
          Are recommended as good corporate policy
          ?

        human resource 427955

        Type your question hereQuestion 42

        1. From the organization’s point of view, a romance between _____________is of the most legal concern regarding potential sexual harassment exposure. Answer
          A vendor and an employee who has no work related contact with the vendor
          Two partners (of the opposite sex) in an accounting firm
          Two paralegal assistants of the same sex
          A teacher in a private high school and the principal

        3.85 points

        Question 43

        1. A male co worker who continually asks a female co worker if they could “get together after work” even though she refuses would be an example of:? Answer
          A man with poor interpersonal skills
          Romance at work
          Hostile work environment harassment
          Quid pro quo sexual harassment

        3.85 points

        Question 44

        1. All of the following actions are critical components of a company’s establishing “reasonable care” to prohibit sexual harassment EXCEPT. Answer
          Firing any employee or manager accused of sexual harassment
          Establishing a sexual harassment policy
          Training employees and managers on avoiding sexual harassment
          Investigating and taking action when complaints are made
          ?

        fifo lifo financial accounting 427991

        Type your Type ??Golf Challenge Corp. is a retail sports store carrying golf apparel and equipment. The store is at the end of its second year of operation and is struggling. A major problem is that its cost of inventory has continually increased in the past two years. In the first year of operations, the store assigned inventory costs using LIFO. A loan agreement that the store has with its bank, its prime source of financing, requires the store to maintain a certain profit margin and current ratio. The store’s owner is currently looking over Golf Challenge’s preliminary financial statements for its second year. The numbers are not favorable. The only way the store can meet the required financial ratios agreed on with the bank is to change from LIFO to FIFO. The store orginally decided on LIFO because of its tax advantages. The owner recalculates ending inventory using FIFO and submits those numbers and statements to the officer at the bank for the required review. The owner thankfully reflects on the available latitude in choosing the inventory costing method. ??1. How does Golf Challenge’s use of FIFO improve its net profit margin and current ratio? ??2. Is the action by Golf Challenge’s owner ethical? Explain.<?XML:NAMESPACE PREFIX = O />

        your question here

        accounting quiz multiple choice only have 45 minutes 428006

        uestions 1, 2 & 3 will use the following information:

        Using the following information, prepare a bank reconciliation for Salem Co. for
        May 31, 2010.
        (a) The bank statement balance is $2,597.
        (b) The cash account balance is $2,680.
        (c) Outstanding checks amounted to $703.
        (d) Deposits in transit are $732.
        (e) The bank service charge is $25.
        (f) Interest added to the checking account by the bank is $7.
        (g) A check drawn for $59 was incorrectly charged by the bank as $95.

        Questions 4 & 5 will use the following information:

        The bank statement for Marley Co. indicates a balance of $10,000.50 on June 30, 2010.

        The cash account in the depositor’s records had a balance of $4,677.10. Prepare a bank reconciliation on the basis of the following reconciling items:

        (a) Cash sales of $342 had been erroneously recorded as $324.

        (b) Deposits in transit not recorded by bank, $700.

        (c) Bank debit memorandum for service charges, $30.

        (d) Bank credit memorandum for note collected by bank, $2,050, including $50 interest.

        (e) Bank debit memorandum for $207.40 NSF (not sufficient funds) check from Alice Martin, a customer.

        (f) Checks outstanding, $4,192.80.

        1. What is the Adjusted Balance for Cash? (Points : 3)

        $3,001.00
        $ 452.00
        $ 2,662.00
        $2.687.00

        2. Based on the Bank Reconciliation completed in Question 1, what is the total amount of the “Deposits in transit not recorded by bank”? (Points : 3)

        $ 36.00
        $ 703.00
        $ 7.00
        $ 732.00

        3. Based on the Bank Reconciliation completed in Question 1, what is the total amount of the “Deduction for outstanding checks”? (Points : 3)

        $ 703.00
        $ 732.00
        $ 36.00
        $ 7.00

        4. What is the correct Adjusted Balance? (Points : 3)

        $ 10,700.00
        $ 6.507.70
        $ 2,050.00
        $ 4,192.80

        5. The amount given for the NSF check should be: (Points : 3)

        Ignored
        Add $207.40 to the Cash Balance according to the Bank Statement.
        Add $207.40 to the Cash balance according to depositor’s records.
        Deduct $207.40 from the Cash balance according to depositor’s records

        cost accounting 428037

        University Printers has two service departments (Maintenance and Personnel) and two operating departments (Printing and Developing). Management has decided to allocate maintenance costs on the basis of machine hours in each department and personnel costs on the basis of labor hours worked by the employees in each.

        The following data appear in the company records for the current period:

        Maintenance Personnel Printing Developing
        Machine hours 1,000 1,000 3,000
        Labor hours 500 500 2,000
        Department direct costs $ 15,000 $ 36,000 $ 45,000 $ 30,000

        Required:
        (a)

        Allocate the service department costs using the step method, starting with the Maintenance Department. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        using the appropriate present value table and assuming a 12 annual interest rate det 428073

        Using the appropriate present value table and assuming a 12% annual interest rate, determine the present value on December 31, 2011, of a five period annual annuity of $5,000 under each of the following situations (Use Table 2,Table 4, andTable 6) (Round “PV Factor” to 5 decimal places and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response):

        (1) The first payment is received on December 31, 2012, and interest is compounded annually.

        Present value $

        (2) The first payment is received on December 31, 2011, and interest is compounded annually.

        Present value $

        (3) The first payment is received on December 31, 2012, and interest is compounded quarterly.

        Present Value
        First Payment $
        Second Payment
        Third Payment
        Fourth Payment
        Fifth Payment

        Total $



        accounting 427648

        (TCOs 1, 2, 4, & 7) Brown Corporation had consistently reported its income by the cash method. The corporation should have used the accrual method because inventories are material to the business. In 2011, Brown timely filed a request to change to the accrual method. At the beginning of 2011, Brown had accounts receivable of $60,000. Also, Brown had merchandise on hand with a cost of $80,000 and accounts payable for merchandise of $25,000. The accounts receivable, inventory, and accounts payable balance per books were zero. Determine the adjustment to income due to the change in accounting method and the amount that is allocated to 2011

        (TCOs 1, 3, & 10) Margaret is trying to decide whether or not to place funds in a qualified tuition program. Her son will be attending college in four years. She is in the 35% marginal tax bracket and she believes she can earn 7% before tax return on alternative investments. Thus, $10,000 will accumulate to $11,948 (after tax) in four years. Margaret expects tuition to increase at the rate of 5% each year to $12,155 in four years. Her son will be in the 15% marginal tax bracket in all relevant years. Given these assumptions, should Margaret participate in the qualified tuition program?

        1.Explain the ethical implications where a tax preparer knowingly prepares a return with false information

        2. Steve has a tentative general business credit of $85,000 for the current year. His net regular tax liability before the general business credit is $95,000, and his tentative minimum tax is $90,000. Compute Steve’s allowable general business credit for the year.

        1. A large municipality is considering the enactment of an ad valorem tax on personal jewelry. What, if any, problem would you anticipate with such a tax

        2. (TCOs 2, 3, & 11) Discuss the computation of percentage depletion.

        abc costing problem 427664

        Teri Martin Nerdmeister, CPA provides bookkeeping and tax services to her clients. She charges a fee of $60 per hour for bookkeeping and $90 an hour for tax services. Martin estimates the following overhead costs for the upcoming year:

        Office Supplies $16,000

        Computer fees 24,000

        Secretary’s salary 30,000

        Rent 18,000

        $88,000

        Operating profits declined last year and Ms. Martin has decided to use activity based coating (ABC) procedures to evaluate her hourly fees. She gathered the following info from last year’s records:

        Activity Cost Driver Bookkeeping Tax Services

        Office supplies Hours billed 1,200 800

        Computer fees Computer hrs used 400 600

        Secretary’s salary Number of clients 16 84

        Rent Types of services offered 1 1

        What is the toatl overhead allocated to the bookkeeping services using activity based costing?

        A. 24,000

        B. 33,000

        C. 35,000

        (Please show how you came up with the answer, I would like to know how to do this. Thanks)

        exercise 24 8 427674

        The Theatre Arts Guild of Miami employs five people in its production department. These people layout paget for pamphlets, brochures, magazines, and other publications for the TAG M productions. The pages are delivered to an outside company for printing. The company is considering an outside publication service for the layout work. The outside service is quoting a price of $14 per layout page. The budget for the publication department for 2013 is as follows:

        Salaries $185000

        Benefits $42000

        Supplies 23000

        office expense 28000

        office depreciation 25000

        computer depreciation 17000

        total 320000

        The department expects to layout 20000 pages for 2012. The computers used by the department hav an estimated residual value of 9000. The publication department office space would be used for the future administrative needs, it the department’s funciton were wurchased from the outside.

        acct help 427706

        Thompson Company uses a standard cost system for its single product. The following data are available:

        Actual experience for the current year:

        Purchases of raw materials (12,000 yards at $12.00 per yard) $ 144,000
        Raw materials used 19,000 yards
        Direct labor costs (10,100 hours at $9.00 per hour) $ 90,900
        Actual variable overhead cost $ 84,020
        Units produced 12,500 units

        Standards per unit of product:

        Raw materials 1.8 yards at $14.00 per yard
        Direct labor .8 hours at $8.50 per hour
        Variable overhead $7.00 per direct labor hour

        Required:

        Compute the following variances for raw materials, direct labor, and variable overhead, assuming that the price variance for materials is recognized at point of purchase: (Input all amounts as positive values. Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        a. Direct materials price variance $
        b. Direct materials quantity variance $
        c. Direct labor rate variance $
        d. Direct labor efficiency variance $
        e. Variable overhead rate variance $
        f. Variable overhead efficiency variance $

        3 427718

        Thrifty Markets, Inc., operates three stores in a large metropolitan area. The company’s segmented absorption costing income statement for the last quarter is given below:

        Thrifty Markets, Inc.
        Income Statement
        For the Quarter Ended March 31
        Total Uptown
        Store
        Downtown
        Store
        Westpark
        Store
        Sales $ 3,300,000 $ 1,300,000 $ 600,000 $ 1,400,000
        Cost of goods sold 1,655,000 728,000 359,000 568,000












        Gross margin 1,645,000 572,000 241,000 832,000












        Selling and administrative expenses:
        Selling expenses:
        Direct advertising 118,100 34,000 42,000 42,100
        General advertising* 16,000 6,303 2,909 6,788
        Sales salaries 156,000 51,000 43,000 62,000
        Delivery salaries 33,000 11,000 11,000 11,000
        Store rent 208,000 69,000 63,000 76,000
        Depreciation of store fixtures 46,050 17,600 8,600 19,850
        Depreciation of delivery equipment 18,000 6,000 6,000 6,000












        Total selling expenses 595,150 194,903 176,509 223,738












        Administrative expenses:
        Store management salaries 68,000 21,000 21,000 26,000
        General office salaries* 48,000 18,909 8,727 20,364
        Utilities 90,600 30,000 30,000 30,600
        Insurance on fixtures and inventory 22,800 7,100 8,100 7,600
        Employment taxes 38,000 11,800 12,500 13,700
        General office expenses”other* 24,000 9,455 4,364 10,181












        Total administrative expenses 291,400 98,264 84,691 108,445












        Total operating expenses 886,550 293,167 261,200 332,183












        Net operating income (loss) $ 758,450 $ 278,833 $ (20,200 ) $ 499,817

























        *Allocated on the basis of sales dollars.

        Management is very concerned about the Downtown Store’s inability to show a profit, and consideration is being given to closing the store. The company has asked you to make a recommendation as to what course of action should be taken. The following additional information is available about the store:

        a.

        The manager of the store has been with the company for many years; he would be retained and transferred to another position in the company if the store were closed. His salary is $7,000 per month, or $21,000 per quarter. If the store were not closed, a new employee would be hired to fill the other position at a salary of $6,000 per month.

        b. The lease on the building housing the Downtown Store can be broken with no penalty.
        c. The fixtures being used in the Downtown Store would be transferred to the other two stores if the Downtown Store were closed.
        d. The company’s employment taxes are 11% of salaries.
        e.

        A single delivery crew serves all three stores. One delivery person could be discharged if the Downtown Store were closed; this person’s salary amounts to $8,500 per quarter. The delivery equipment would be distributed to the other stores. The equipment does not wear out through use, but it does eventually become obsolete.

        f. One-third of the Downtown Store’s insurance relates to its fixtures.
        g.

        The general office salaries and other expenses relate to the general management of Thrifty Markets, Inc. The employee in the general office who is responsible for the Downtown Store would be discharged if the store were closed. This employee’s compensation amounts to $8,000 per quarter.

        Required:
        1.

        Prepare a schedule showing the change in revenues and expenses and the impact on the overall company net operating income that would result if the Downtown Store were closed. (Input all amounts as positive values. Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your intermediate and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        $
        Less costs that can be avoided:
        $


        $



        2.

        Based on your computations in (1) above, what recommendation would you make to the management of Thrifty Markets, Inc.?

        The Downtown Store should not be closed.
        The Downtown Store should be closed.

        3.

        Assume that if the Downtown Store were closed, sales in the Uptown Store would increase by $200,000 per quarter due to loyal customers shifting their buying to the Uptown Store. The Uptown Store has ample capacity to handle the increased sales, and its gross margin is 44% of sales.

        a.

        Calculate the Net advantage of closing the Downtown Store. (Negative amount should be indicated with a minus sign. Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your intermediate and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Net advantage of closing the Downtown Store $

        b. What recommendation would you make to the management of Thrifty Markets, Inc.?
        The Downtown Store should not be closed.
        The Downtown Store should be closed.

        each morning ned stenback stocks the drink case at ned s 276069

        Each morning, Ned Stenback stocks the drink case at Ned’s Beach Hut in Myrtle Beach, South Carolina. The drink case has 115 linear feet of refrigerated drink space. Each linear foot can hold either six 12 ounce cans or three 20 ounce bottles.

        Ned’s Beach Hut sells three types of cold drinks:

        1. Yummy Time in 12 oz. cans, for $1.45 per can

        2. Yummy Time in 20 oz. bottles, for $1.75 per bottle

        3. Pretty Pop in 20 oz. bottles, for $2.30 per bottle

        Ned’s Beach Hut pays its suppliers:

        1. $0.15 per 12 oz. can of Yummy Time

        2. $0.35 per 20 oz. bottle of Yummy Time

        3. $0.65 per 20 oz. bottle of Pretty Pop

        Ned’s Beach Hut’s monthly fixed expenses include:

        Hut rental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 360

        Refrigerator rental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

        Ned’s salary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,500

        Total fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1,940

        Ned’s Beach Hut can sell all the drinks stocked in the display case each morning.

        Requirements

        1. What is Ned’s Beach Hut’s constraining factor? What should Ned stock to maximize profits?

        2. Suppose Ned’s Beach Hut refuses to devote more than 75 linear feet to any individual product. Under this condition, how many linear feet of each drink should Ned’s stock? How many units of each product will be available for sale each day?

        ebv is considering a 5m series a investment in newco 276072

        EBV is considering a $5M Series A investment in Newco. EBV proposes to structure the investment as 6M shares of convertible preferred stock. The employees of Newco have claims on 10M shares of common stock. Thus, following the Series A investment, Newco will have 10M common shares outstanding and would have 16M shares outstanding on conversion of the CP. EBV estimates a 25 percent probability for a successful exit, with an expected exit time in 5 years and an exit valuation of $500M. The $100M EBV fund has annual fees of 2 percent for each of its 10 years of life and earns 20 percent carried interest on all profits.

        (a) What is your investment recommendation for EBV? (Show all steps.)

        (b) How sensitive is this recommendation to different assumptions about the exit valuation and the probability of success?

        (c) Given the evidence described in Chapter 7, do you think that 25 percent is an aggressive assumption about the probability of success for a first round investment?

        eradicate inc produces and sells a line of insect repellants 276081

        Eradicate, Inc., produces and sells a line of insect repellants that are sold primarily in the summer months. Recently, the chief operating officer has become interested in possibly manufacturing a repellant, ?~?~Halt’’ that can prevent a person from being attacked by use of a ?~?~pepper’’ repellant. The appeal of this product is that it would have year round sales and would help stabilize the income of the company.

        The product, however, must be sold in a specially designed spray can that will be safe from being discharged accidentally. The product will be sold in cartons that hold 24 cans of the repellant. The sales price will be $96 per carton. The plant is now operating at only 65% of its total capacity, so no additional fixed costs will be incurred. However, a $100,000 fixed overhead charge will be allocated to the new product from the company’s present total of fixed costs.

        Using the current estimates for 100,000 cartons of ?~?~Halt’’ as a standard volume, the following costs were developed for each carton, including the cost of the can:

        Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $12

        Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

        Overhead (includes allocated fixed charge) . . . . . . . . . 4

        Total cost per carton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $22

        Eradicate, Inc., has requested a bid from a manufacturer of specialty dispensers for a purchase price of an empty can that could be used for the new product. The specialty company offered a price of $5 for a carton of cans. If the proposal is accepted, Eradicate, Inc., estimates that direct labor and variable overhead costs would be reduced by 10% and direct materials would be reduced by 20%.

        Required:

        1. Should Eradicate make or buy the special cans?

        2. What would be the maximum purchase price acceptable to Eradicate for the cans?

        estimating total labor costs dr barbara benson is the head 276083

        Estimating total labor costs Dr. Barbara Benson is the head of the pathology laboratory at Barrington Medical Center in Mobile, Alabama. Dr. Benson estimates the amount of work for her laboratory staff by classifying the pathology tests into three categories: simple routine, simple non routine, and complex. She expects a simple routine test to require 4 hours of staff time. She estimates the demand for each type of test for June through August to be the following:

        ?

        Laboratory staff salaries, including fringe benefits, average $3,600 per month. Each worker works 150 hours per month. If the hospital workload exceeds the available staff time, Dr. Benson has the tests performed at a neighboring private pathology laboratory that charges $80 for a simple routine test, $100 for a simple non routine test, and $160 for a complex test.

        Dr. Benson is thinking of employing 20 to 27 workers. Because of the difficulty in hiring reliable workers, Barrington’s chief administrator has instructed her to employ laboratory staff for no shorter a period than one quarter.

        Required

        (a) Determine how many workers Dr. Benson should employ over the quarter to minimize the costs of performing the tests. What is the minimum cost?

        (b) Suppose the easy availability of experienced laboratory staff allows Barrington Medical Center to change staffing loads each month. Determine the number of workers Dr. Benson should hire each month in these circumstances to minimize the costs of performing tests. What is the minimum cost?

        eunice company produces two products from a joint process joint 276086

        Eunice Company produces two products from a joint process. Joint costs are $70,000 for one batch, which yields 1,000 liters of germain and 4,000 liters of hastain. Germain can be sold at the split off point for $24 or be processed further, into geraiten, at a manufacturing cost of $4,100 (for the 1,000 liters) and sold for $33 per liter. If geraiten is sold, additional distribution costs of $0.80 per liter and sales commissions of 10 percent of sales will be incurred. In addition, Eunice’s legal department is concerned about potential liability issues with geraiten—issues that do not arise with germain.

        Required:

        1. Considering only gross profit, should germain be sold at the split off point or processed further?

        2. Taking a value chain approach (by considering distribution, marketing, and after the sale costs), determine whether or not germain should be processed into geraiten.

        preparing financial statement 276091

        PROJECT OVERVIEW Create a set of financial statements based on the accounting information provided for a service or merchandising company. See the  http://mypath.westwood.edu/bbcswebdav/pid 3267224 dt content rid 5434067_2/xid 5434067_2Preparing Financial Statements handout and http://mypath.westwood.edu/bbcswebdav/pid 3267224 dt content rid 5434090_2/xid 5434090_2Student Template for details. Refer to the Course Schedule within the Syllabus for specific project deliverables and due dates. DELIVERABLE Record the journal entries for June.

        Document Preview:

        PROJECT OVERVIEW Create a set of financial statements based on the accounting information provided for a service or merchandising company. See the ? HYPERLINK “http://mypath.westwood.edu/bbcswebdav/pid 3267224 dt content rid 5434067_2/xid 5434067_2” t “_new” ?Preparing Financial Statements? handout and? HYPERLINK “http://mypath.westwood.edu/bbcswebdav/pid 3267224 dt content rid 5434090_2/xid 5434090_2” t “_new” ?Student Template? for details. Refer to the Course Schedule within the Syllabus for specific project deliverables and due dates. DELIVERABLE Record the journal entries for June. Post the June transactions to the general ledger accounts. Prepare a trial balance. Prepare adjusting entries in a worksheet using the information below: Three days’ wages accrued by the end of June. Consulting services performed (that will not be billed until July) total $380. Consulting services for which payment has been received in advance amounted to $1,460. Depreciation on office equipment for June is $320. Depreciation on office furniture for June is $200. An inventory of office supplies shows $200 still on hand as of June 30. One month’s prepaid insurance has expired in the amount of $100. One month’s prepaid rent has expired in the amount of $2,000. Record the closing entries and post them to the ledger accounts. Prepare a post closing trial balance. From the worksheet, prepare an income statement, statement of owners’ equity, and balance sheet. Answer the following questions as a summary of your work: What information were you able to glean about the financial situation of this company from the financials? How does this accounting information impact business decisions? ACCT120 Principles of Accounting I Key Graded Assignment Preparing Financial Statements Handout?? The L&L Accounting Firm The May 31, 20XX, post closing trial balance for the L&L Accounting Firm appears below. During June, the firm engaged in the following transactions: 1 Received an…

        Attachments:

        eye on world inc has a capacity of 200 000 computer monitors 276098

        Eye on World, Inc., has a capacity of 200,000 computer monitors per year. The company is currently producing and selling 160,000 monitors per year at a selling price of $400 per monitor. The cost of producing and selling one monitor at the 160,000 unit level of activity follows:

        Variable Manufacturing Costs …………………………………………………………… $160

        Fixed Manufacturing Costs …………………………………………………………………… 40

        Variable Selling and Administrative Costs ……………………………………………… 80

        Fixed Selling and Administrative Costs …………………………………………………… 20

        Total Costs………………………………………………………………………………………… $300

        The company has received a special order for 10,000 monitors at a price of $250 per monitor.

        Because it need not pay a sales commission on the special order, the variable selling and administrative costs would be only $50 per monitor. The special order would have no effect on total fixed costs. The company has rejected the offer based on the following computations:

        Selling Price per Monitor ……………………………………………………………………. $250

        Variable Manufacturing Costs ………………………………………………………………. 160

        Fixed Manufacturing Costs ……………………………………………………………………. 40

        Variable Selling and Administrative Costs ………………………………………………. 50

        Fixed Selling and Administrative Costs …………………………………………………… 20

        Net Loss per Monitor …………………………………………………………………………. $(20)

        Management is reviewing its decision and wants your advice. Should Eye on World have accepted the special order? Show your computations.

        for many years futura company has purchased the starters 276106

        For many years Futura Company has purchased the starters that it installs in its standard line of farm tractors. Due to a reduction in output, the company has idle capacity that could be used to produce the starters. The chief engineer has recommended against this move, however, pointing out that the cost to produce the starters would be greater than the current $8.40 per unit purchase price:



        A supervisor would have to be hired to oversee production of the starters. However, the company has sufficient idle tools and machinery that no new equipment would have to be purchased. The rent charge above is based on space utilized in the plant. The total rent on the plant is $80,000 per period. Depreciation is due to obsolescence rather than wear and tear.

        Required:

        Prepare computations showing how much profits will increase or decrease as a result of making thestarters.

        frank perdue had built up a successful development company when 276107

        Frank Perdue had built up a successful development company. When he became City Commissioner, everyone said it was good to have a businessman on the Commission. Businessmen know how to control costs and make sound economic decisions, they said, and Frank could help the city tighten its belt. One of his first projects was an analysis of the Human Resources Department. He claimed that if the whole function was outsourced, it would save the taxpayers money. A year later, after painful layoffs and a bumpy transition, the new contractor, NewSoft, was in place. Two years later, NewSoft’s billing rates had steadily increased, and there were complaints about service. After five years, the supposed savings had vanished, and Frank had moved on to state government, his campaigns fueled by ?ogenerous?? campaign contributions from companies like NewSoft.

        Requirements

        1. Although this case differs from ?ofraud?? in the usual sense, describe the conflict of interest in this case. Who benefitted and who did not?

        2. When making business decisions of this sort, some factors are quantitative and some are not. Discuss some of the non quantitative factors related to this case. (Challenge)

        gators inc is considering a project that requires an initial 276110

        Gators, Inc., is considering a project that requires an initial investment of $2,000,000 and that will generate the following cash inflows for the next five years:

        Year Cash Inflow at End of Year

        1 ……………………………………………………………………………………… $300,000

        2 ………………………………………………………………………………………… 400,000

        3 ………………………………………………………………………………………… 800,000

        4 ………………………………………………………………………………………… 800,000

        5 …………………………………………………………………………………………. 600,000

        Calculate the net present value of this project if Gator’s cost of capital is

        a. 12 percent.

        b. 20 percent.

        han products manufactures 30 000 units of part s 6 each year 276132

        Han Products manufactures 30,000 units of part S 6 each year for use on its production line. At this level of activity, the cost per unit for part S 6 is as follows:



        An outside supplier has offered to sell 30,000 units of part S 6 each year to Han Products for $21 per part. If Han Products accepts this offer, the facilities now being used to manufacture part S 6 could be rented to another company at an annual rental of $80,000. However, Han Products has determined that two thirds of the fixed manufacturing overhead being applied to part S 6 would continue even if part S 6 were purchased from the outside supplier.

        Required:

        Prepare computations showing how much profits will increase or decrease if the outside supplier’s offer isaccepted.

        harold manufacturing produces denim clothing this year it prod 276143

        Harold Manufacturing produces denim clothing. This year, it produced 5,000 denim jackets at a manufacturing cost of $45 each. These jackets were damaged in the warehouse during storage. Management investigated the matter and identified three alternatives for these jackets.

        1. Jackets can be sold to a second hand clothing shop for $6 each.

        2. Jackets can be disassembled at a cost of $32,000 and sold to a recycler for $12 each.

        3. Jackets can be reworked and turned into good jackets. However, with the damage, management estimates it will be able to assemble the good parts of the 5,000 jackets into only 3,000 jackets. The remaining pieces of fabric will be discarded. The cost of reworking the jackets will be $102,000, but the jackets can then be sold for their regular price of $45 each.

        Required

        Which alternative should Harold choose? Show analysis for each alternative.

        harrison ford company has been approached by a new customer 276144

        Harrison Ford Company has been approached by a new customer with an offer to purchase 10,000 units of its model IJ4 at a price of $4 each. The new customer is geographically separated from the company’s other customers, and existing sales would not be affected. Harrison normally produces 75,000 units of IJ4 per year but only plans to produce and sell 60,000 in the coming year. The normal sales price is $12 per unit. Unit cost information for the normal level of activity is as follows:

        Direct materials ………………….$1.50

        Direct labor ……………………… 2.00

        Variable overhead ………………. 1.00

        Fixed overhead ………………….. 3.25

        Total ……………………………..$7.75

        Fixed overhead will not be affected by whether or not the special order is accepted.

        Required:

        1. What are the relevant costs and benefits of the two alternatives (accept or reject the special order)?

        2. By how much will operating income increase or decrease if the order is accepted?

        heather alburty purchased a previously owned two year old grand 276146

        Heather Alburty purchased a previously owned, two year old Grand Am for $8,900. Since purchasing the car, she has spent the following amounts on parts and labor:

        New stereo system ………………….$1,200

        Trick paint …………………………. 400

        New wide racing tires ……………… 800

        Total ………………….……………..$2,400

        Unfortunately, the new stereo doesn’t completely drown out the sounds of a grinding transmission. Apparently, the Grand Am needs a considerable amount of work to make it reliable transportation. Heather estimates that the needed repairs include the following:

        Transmission overhaul …………………$2,000

        Water pump …………………………… 400

        Master cylinder work …………………. 1,100

        Total ………………….………………..$3,500

        In a visit to a used car dealer, Heather has found a one year old Neon in mint condition for $9,400. Heather has advertised and found that she can sell the Grand Am for only $6,400. If she buys the Neon, she will pay cash, but she would need to sell the Grand Am.

        Required:

        1. In trying to decide whether to restore the Grand Am or to buy the Neon, Heather is distressed because she already has spent $11,300 on the Grand Am. The investment seems too much to give up. How would you react to her concern?

        2. Assuming that Heather would be equally happy with the Grand Am or the Neon, should she buy the Neon, or should she restore the Grand Am?

        hollings company sells and delivers office furniture in the rock 276153

        Hollings Company sells and delivers office furniture in the Rocky Mountain area. The costs associated with the acquisition and annual operation of a delivery trucks are given below:



        Required:

        1. Assume that Hollings Company has purchased one truck that has been driven 50,000 miles during the first year. Compute the average cost per mile of owning and operating the truck.

        2. At the beginning of the second year, Hollings Company is unsure whether to use the truck or leave it parked in the garage and have all hauling done commercially. (The state requires the payment of vehicle taxes even if the vehicle isn’t used.) What costs from the previous list are relevant to this decision? Explain.

        3. Assume that the company decides to use the truck during the second year. Near year end an order is received from a customer over 1,000 miles away. What costs from the above list are relevant in a decision between using the truck to make the delivery and having the delivery done commercially? Explain.

        4. Occasionally, the company could use two trucks at the same time. For this reason, some thought is being given to purchasing a second truck. The total miles driven would be the same as if only one truck were owned. What costs from the above list are relevant to a decision over whether to purchase the second truck?Explain.

        calculate cash 427581

        TabComp Inc. is a retail distributor for MZB 33 computer hardware and related software. TabComp prepares annual sales forecasts of which the first six months of the coming year are presented below.
        Hardware Hardware.

        Units Dollar Software Total Sales
        JanuaryAc€¦Ac€¦.. 130 $390000 $160000 $550000
        FebruaryAc€¦Ac€¦ 120 $360000 140000 500000
        MarchAc€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦ 110 $330000 150000 480000
        AprilAc€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦.. 90 $270000 130000 400000
        MayAc€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦.. 100 $300000 125000 425000
        JuneAc€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦.. 125 $375000 225000 600000

        Cash sales account for 25% of TabComp’s total sales, 30% of the total sales are paid by bank credit card, and the remaining 45% are on open account (TabComp’s own charge accounts). The cash and bank credit card sale payments are received in the month of the sale. Bank credit card sales are subject to a 4% discount which is deducted immediately. The cash receipts for sales on open account are 70% in the month following the sale, 28% in the second month following the sale, and the remaining are uncollectible.
        TabComp’s month end inventory requirements for computer hardware units are 30% of the next month’s sales. The units must be ordered two months in advance due to long lead times quoted by the manufacturer.
        Required:

        a. Calculate the cash that TabComp can expect to collect during April. Show all of your calculations.

        b. Determine the number of computer hardware units that should be ordered in January. Show all of your calculations.

        target costing 427609

        Target Costing

        Basic Motor Corporation uses target costing. Assume that Basic marketing personnel estimate that the competitive selling price for the QuikCar in the upcoming model year will need to be $23,700. Assume further that the QuikCar’s total unit cost for the upcoming model year is estimated to be $19,200 and that Basic requires a 20% profit margin on selling price (which is equivalent to a 25%markup on total cost).

        a. What price will Basic establish for the QuikCar for the upcoming model year?
        $

        b. What impact will target costing have on Basic, given the assumed information?

        The input in the box below will not be graded, but may be reviewed and considered by your instructor.

        Hide Feedback Partially Correct Check My Work Feedback a. What dictates the price?

        b. Subtract the 20% desired profit from the estimated price of $24,000.

        case study examine financial records and answer the questions 427616

        My assignment is to examine city’s financial statements and answer the questions. City of Jacksonville financial statements and questions are attached.

        Document Preview:

        CITY OF JACKSONVILLE, FLORIDA COMPREHENSIVE ANNUAL FINANCIAL REPORT FOR THE FISCAL YEAR ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2010CITY SERVICES CITY SERVICES The City of Jacksonville delivers a diverse and expansive number of services, including critical functions that keep our residents safe and our city running. The current economic climate has forced city operations at every level to make adjustments. But even in light of these tough decisions, city government is looking for ways to serve the public most effectively. A city the size of Jacksonville must meet daily demands that are almost immeasurable. Last year, Jacksonville Fire & Rescue answered more than 113,000 calls for assistance. Almost 75 percent of those calls were for emergency medical attention. With one of the largest park systems of any city in America, Jacksonville’s Public Works Department maintains 72,054 acres of parks. This is in addition to overseeing the repair of 3,600 miles of roads and 7.4 million square feet of public building space. Managing operations of this scope effectively requires reliable information. To that end, the city is reaching out to the public in a variety of ways. During the budget planning process, we hosted a series of workshops throughout Jacksonville that gave attendees the opportunity to meet with city department leaders and learn about how city finances work. Most importantly, the workshops allowed citizens to communicate their concerns to city decision makers and share their priorities for the services the city provides. Additionally, City Council held community meetings throughout Jacksonville where they, too, gathered citizen input on city services and budget priorities. This focused and more interactive approach resulted not only in more open communication between citizens and city leaders, but also a better budget that reflects the needs and wants of this community. By inviting everyone to play an informed and active role in the shaping of the budget, we were able to…

        taylor lewis company has provided information on intangible assets as follows a pate 427620

        Taylor Lewis Company has provided information on intangible assets as follows.

        A patent was purchased from Craig Company for $4,000,000 on June 1, 2010. Lewis estimated the remaining useful life of the patent to be eight years. The patent was carried in Craig’s accounting records at a net book value of $3,500,000 when Craig sold it to Lewis.

        During 2011, a franchise was purchased from Faragher Company for $360,000. In addition, 8% of revenue from the franchise must be paid to Faragher. Revenue from the franchise for 2011 was $1,950,000. Lewis estimates the useful life of the franchise to be 12 years and takes a full year’s amortization in the year of purchase.

        Lewis incurred research and development costs in 2010 as follows.

        Materials and equipment $286,500
        Personnel $153,700
        Indirect costs $ 95,355
        $535,555

        Lewis estimates that these costs will be recouped by December 31, 2014. The materials and equipment purchased have no alternative uses.

        On January 1, 2011, because of recent events in the field, Lewis estimates that the remaining life of the patent purchased on June 1, 2010, is only five years from January 1, 2011.

        1. Prepare a schedule showing the intangible section of Lewis’s balance sheet at December 31, 2011. Show supporting computations in good form.
        2. Prepare a schedule showing the income statement effect for the year ended December 31, 2011, as a result of the facts above. Show supporting computations in good form.



        accounting 212 question tco4 linda s lampshades started business on jan 1 2001 they 427643

        (TCO4) Linda’s Lampshades started business on Jan. 1, 2001. They had the following inventory transactions:

        Journals Jan. 2001

        Purchases

        Supplier Date Received Quantity Unit Cost Amount

        Donna 01/10/01 110 12.00 1320.00

        Thomas 01/15/01 160 14.00 2240.00

        Cindy 01/18/01 150 15.00 2250.00

        Sales

        Customer Date shipped Quantity Sel. Price Amount

        Norilene 01/16/01 200 25.00 5000.00

        1. Calculate the ending inventory, using the perpetual inventory method:

        A. Using FIFO

        B. Using LIFO

        C. Using Average Cost

        2. Prepare the following statement

        Using

        FIFO LIFO Average Cost

        Sales

        Cost of Sales

        Gross Profit

        (Points : 25)

        breakeven analysis and target profit for a hospital morton medic 275907

        Breakeven analysis and target profit for a hospital Morton Medical Institute operates a 300 bed hospital and offers a number of specialized medical services. Morton’s hospital facility and equipment are leased on a long term basis. The hospital charges $2,000 per patient day. On the basis of past cost data, Morton has estimated its variable costs as $500 per patient day. Fixed costs are $2,000,000 per month. The hospital’s administrator has estimated that the hospital will average 5,400 patient days per month.

        Required

        (a) How much will the hospital need to charge per patient day to break even at this level of activity?

        (b) Refer to the original data in the problem. How many patient days must Morton average each month to earn a target profit of $45,000 per month?

        breakeven analysis and target profit taxes patterson parkas com 275909

        Breakeven analysis and target profit, taxes Patterson Parkas Company’s sales revenue is $30 per unit, variable costs are $19.50 per unit, and fixed costs are $147,000. Required

        (a) Compute Patterson’s contribution margin per unit and contribution margin ratio.

        (b) Determine the number of units Patterson must sell to break even.

        (c) Determine the sales revenue required to earn (pretax) income equal to 20% of revenue.

        (d) How many units must Patterson sell to generate an after tax profit of $109,200 if the tax rate is 35%?

        (e) Patterson is considering increasing its advertising expenses by $38,500. How much of an increase in sales units is necessary from expanded advertising to justify this expenditure (generate an incremental contribution margin of $38,500)?

        breakeven point and competitive contribution margin analysis joh 275913

        Breakeven point and competitive contribution margin analysis Johnson Company and Smith Company are competing firms that offer limousine service from the Charlesburg airport. While Johnson pays most of its employees on a per ride basis, Smith prefers to pay its employees fixed salaries. Information about the selling prices per ride and cost structures of the two firms is given below.

        ?

        Required

        (a) Calculate the breakeven point in the number of rides for both firms.

        (b) Draw two graphs plotting profit as a function of the number of rides for the two firms.

        (c) Explain which firm’s cost structure is more profitable.

        (d) Explain which firm’s cost structure isriskier.

        bronkowski is a retailer for high tech recording disks the proj 275916

        Bronkowski is a retailer for high tech recording disks. The projected operating profit for the current year is $200,000 based on a sales volume of 200,000 units. The company has been selling the disks for $16 each; variable costs consist of the $10 purchase price and a $2 handling cost. The company’s annual fixed costs are $600,000.

        Management is planning for the coming year, when it expects that the unit purchase price of the disks will increase by 30 percent.

        a. Calculate the company’s break even point for the current year in units.

        b. What will be the company’s operating profit for the current year if there is a 20 percent increase in projected unit sales volume?

        c. What volume of dollar sales must be achieved in the coming year to maintain the current year’s operating profit if the selling price remains at $16?

        d. Would the use of a financial model be helpful to the firm in addressing issues such as those raised in requirements b. and c.? Explain.

        calla company produces skateboards that sell for 50 per unit 275927

        Calla Company produces skateboards that sell for $50 per unit. The company currently has the capacity to produce 90,000 skateboards per year, but is selling 80,000 skateboards per year. Annual costs for 80,000 skateboards follow.

        Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 800,000

        Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640,000

        Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960,000

        Selling expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560,000

        Administrative expenses . . . . . . . . 480,000

        Total costs and expenses . . . . . $3,440,000

        A new retail store has offered to buy 10,000 of its skateboards for $45 per unit. The store is in a different market from Calla’s regular customers and it would not affect regular sales. A study of its costs in anticipation of this additional business reveals the following:

        ?c Direct materials and direct labor are 100% variable.

        ?c Thirty percent of overhead is fixed at any production level from 80,000 units to 90,000 units; the remaining 70% of annual overhead costs are variable with respect to volume.

        ?c Selling expenses are 60% variable with respect to number of units sold, and the other 40% of selling expenses are fixed.

        ?c There will be an additional $2 per unit selling expense for this order.

        ?c Administrative expenses would increase by a $1,000 fixed amount.

        Required

        1. Prepare a three column comparative income statement that reports the following:

        a. Annual income without the special order.

        b. Annual income from the special order.

        c. Combined annual income from normal business and the new business.

        2. Should Calla accept this order? What nonfinancial factors should Calla consider? Explain.

        Analysis Component

        3. Assume that the new customer wants to buy 15,000 units instead of 10,000 units—it will only buy 15,000 units or none and will not take a partial order. Without any computations, how does this change your answer for part 2?

        capacity and product mix decisions linear programming xu compan 275938

        Capacity and product mix decisions, linear programming Xu Company makes two types of wood doors: standard and deluxe. The doors are manufactured in a plant consisting of three departments: cutting, assembly, and finishing. Both labor and machine time are spent on the two products as they are worked on in each department.

        In planning the production schedule for the next month, management is confronted with a labor shortage and the knowledge that some machines must be shut down for major maintenance and repair. The following information pertains to the estimated levels of capacity of direct labor hours and machine hours available next month in the three departments:

        ?

        Direct labor and machine hours required per unit of each product are as follows:

        ?

        The estimated demand for the next month is 13,000 units of standard doors and 5,000 units of deluxe doors. Unit cost and price information are as follows:

        ?

        The average wage rate is $20 per hour and variable overhead cost is 25% times direct labor cost. Direct labor and machine availability in individual departments cannot be switched from one department to another.

        Required

        (a) Determine whether the direct labor hour and machine hour capacities are adequate to meet the next month’s demand.

        (b) How many units of each product should the company produce to maximize its profits?

        (c) Suppose that as a result of process improvements, the deluxe model only requires 1.2 machine hours in finishing and 0.8 labor hour in cutting. How many units of each product should the company produce to maximize its profits?

        (d) Suggest other alternatives the company might consider to satisfy the estimated demand for both products.

        cocoaheaven processes cocoa beans into cocoa powder at a process 275968

        Cocoaheaven processes cocoa beans into cocoa powder at a processing cost of $9,500 per batch. Cocoaheaven can sell the cocoa powder as is or it can process the cocoa powder further into either chocolate syrup or boxed assorted chocolates. Once processed, each batch of cocoa beans would result in the following sales revenue:

        Cocoa powder………………………………….. $ 16,500

        Chocolate syrup ……………………………….. $102,000

        Boxed assorted chocolates………………….. $196,000

        The cost of transforming the cocoa powder into chocolate syrup would be $70,000. Likewise, the company would incur a cost of $176,000 to transform the cocoa powder into boxed assorted chocolates. The company president has decided to make boxed assorted chocolates due to its high sales value and to the fact that the cocoa bean processing cost of $9,500 eats up most of the cocoa powder profits.

        Requirement

        1. Has the president made the right or wrong decision? Explain your answer. Be sure to include the correct financial analysis in your response.

        cole petroleum has spent 206 000 to refine 63 000 gallons of 275969

        Cole Petroleum has spent $206,000 to refine 63,000 gallons of petroleum distillate, which can be sold for $6.30 a gallon. Alternatively, Cole can process the distillate further and produce 53,000 gallons of cleaner fluid. The additional processing will cost $1.80 per gallon of distillate. The cleaner fluid can be sold for $9.20 a gallon. To sell the cleaner fluid, Cole must pay a sales commission of $0.12 a gallon and a transportation charge of $0.15 a gallon.

        Requirements

        1. Diagram Cole’s decision alternatives, using Exhibit 20 26 as a guide.

        2. Identify the sunk cost. Is the sunk cost relevant to Cole’s decision?

        3. Should Cole sell the petroleum distillate or process it into cleaner fluid? Show the expected net revenue difference between the two alternatives.

        come clean corporation produces a variety of cleaning compounds 275970

        Come Clean Corporation produces a variety of cleaning compounds and solutions for both industrial and household use. While most of its products are processed independently, a few are related, such as the company’s Grit 337 and its Sparkle silver polish. Grit 337 is a coarse cleaning powder with many industrial uses. It costs $1.60 a pound to make, and it has a selling price of $2.00 a pound. A small portion of the annual production of Grit 337 is retained in the factory for further processing. It is combined with several other ingredients to form a paste that is marketed as Sparkle silver polish. The silver polish sells for $4.00 per jar. This further processing requires one fourth pound of Grit 337 per jar of silver polish. The additional direct costs involved in the processing of ajar of silver polish are:



        Overhead costs associated with processing the silver polish are:



        The production supervisor has no duties other than to oversee production of the silver polish. The mixing equipment is special purpose equipment acquired specifically to produce the silver polish. Its resale value is negligible and it does not wear out through use. Direct labor is a variable cost at Come Clean Corporation. Advertising costs for the silver polish total $4,000 per month. Variable selling costs associated with the silver polish are 7.5% of sales. Due to a recent decline in the demand for silver polish, the company is wondering whether its continued production is advisable. The sales manager feels that it would be more profitable to sell all of the Grit 337 as a cleaning powder.

        Required:

        1. What is the incremental contribution margin per jar from further processing of Grit 337 into silver polish?

        2. What is the minimum number of jars of silver polish that must be sold each month to justify the continued processing of Grit 337 into silver polish? Explain. Show allcomputations.

        company produces one type of sunglasses with the following costs 275974

        Company produces one type of sunglasses with the following costs and revenues for the year:

        Total Revenues……………………………………………………………………………….. $5,000,000

        Total Fixed Costs ……………………………………………………………………………. $1,000,000

        Total Variable Costs ………………………………………………………………………… $3,000,000

        Total Quantity Produced and Sold………………………………………………. 1,000,000 Units

        a. What is the selling price per unit?

        b. What is the variable cost per unit?

        c. What is the contribution margin per unit?

        d. What is the break even point in units?

        e. Assume an income tax rate of 40 percent. What quantity of units is required for PJ Company to make an after tax operating profit of $1,200,000 for the year?

        consider an organization that has empowered its employees askin 275977

        Consider an organization that has empowered its employees, asking them to improve the quality, productivity, and responsiveness of their processes that involve repetitive work. This work could arise in a manufacturing setting, such as assembling cars or producing chemicals, or in a service setting, such as processing invoices or responding to customer orders and requests. Clearly the workers would benefit from feedback on the quality (defects, yields) and process times of the work they were doing to suggest where they could make improvements. Identify the role, if any, for sharing financial information with these employees to help them in their efforts to improve quality, productivity, and process times. Be specific about the types of financial information that would be helpful and the specific decisions or actions that could be made better by supplementing physical and operational information with financial information.

        consider the operation of a fast food company with hundreds of 275996

        Consider the operation of a fast food company with hundreds of retail outlets scattered about the country. Consider the descriptions of management accounting provided in the chapter to identify management accounting information needs for the following:

        a. The manager of a local fast food outlet that prepares food and serves it to customers who walk in or pick it up at a drive through window

        b. The regional manager who supervises the operations of all the retail outlets in a three state region new actions to improve the implementation of the intended strategy through operational enhancements, decisions about products, processes, and customers, new product introductions, and, perhaps most important, better motivated and empowered managers and employees. But all new measurement and management systems must be introduced with sensitivity to the reactions of employees and managers to the act of measurement.

        c. Senior management located at the company’s corporate headquarters. Consider specifically the information needs of the president and the vice presidents of operations and marketing. Be sure to address the content, frequency, and level of aggregation of information needed by these different managers.

        cost behavior and decisions second city airlines operates 35 sch 276006

        Cost behavior and decisions Second City Airlines operates 35 scheduled round trip flights each week between New York and Chicago. It charges a fixed one way fare of $200 per passenger. Second City Airlines can carry 150 passengers per one way flight. Fuel and other flight related costs are $5,000 per one way flight. On flight meal and refreshment costs average $5 per passenger. Flight crew, ground crew, advertising, and other administrative expenditures for the New York–to–Chicago route amount to $400,000 each week.

        Required

        (a) How many passengers must each of the 70 one way flights have on average to break even each week?

        (b) If the load factor is 60% on all flights (that is, the flights are 60% full), how many flights must Second City Airlines operate on this route to earn a total profit of $500,000 before taxes per week?

        (c) Are fuel costs variable or fixed?

        (d) What is the variable cost to Second City Airlines for one additional passenger on a flight if the passenger takes a seat that would otherwise go empty?

        cost volume profit analysis showed how much auto inc had to im 276009

        Cost volume profit analysis showed how much Auto, Inc. had to improve just to break even in Year 1. In that year, the break even point was 2.2 million units, but the company was selling considerably fewer than 2 million units. Faced with a severe recession in the industry, Auto, Inc. had virtually no chance to increase sales enough to break even. Meanwhile, the company had received loan guarantees from the U.S. government, which evoked considerable criticism that the federal government was supporting a ?~?~failing’’ company.

        By Year 4, Auto, Inc. reduced its break even point to 1.1 million units, and the company reported a profit for the first time in several years. The turnaround came despite continued low sales in the industry; it resulted primarily from severe cost cutting, which reduced fixed costs in constant dollars from $4.5 billion in Year 1 to $3.1 billion in Year 4. In addition, the company made improvements in its production methods, which enabled it to maintain its volume of output despite the reduction in fixed costs.

        a. If Auto, Inc.’s break even volume was 1.1 million units and its fixed costs were $3.1 billion, what was its average contribution margin per unit?

        b. Why do you think management concentrated on reducing fixed costs to put Auto, Inc. above its break even point?

        c. As a shareholder of Auto, Inc., what concerns might you have about the company’s massive cost cutting?

        costing orders profitability and opportunity cost wedmark corp 276010

        Costing orders, profitability, and opportunity cost Wedmark Corporation’s Cupertino, California, plant manufactures chips used in personal computers. Its practical capacity is 2,000 chips per week, and fixed costs are $75,000 per week. The selling price is $500 per chip. Production this quarter is 1,600 chips per week. At this level of production, variable costs are $720,000 per week.

        Required

        (a) What will the plant’s profit per week be if it operates at practical capacity?

        (b) Suppose that a new customer offers $480 per chip for an order of 200 chips per week for delivery beginning this quarter. If this order is accepted, production will increase from 1,600 chips at present to 1,800 chips per week. What is the estimated change in the company’s profit if it accepts the order?

        (c) Suppose that the new customer in part b offered $480 per chip for an order of 600 chips per week and that Wedmark cannot schedule overtime production. Consequently, it would have to give up some of its current sales to fill the new order for 600 chips per week. What is the estimated change in Wedmark’s profit if it accepts this order for 600 chips per week?

        crichton publications uses the accounting rate of return method 276011

        Crichton Publications uses the accounting rate of return method to evaluate proposed capital investments. The company’s desired rate of return (its cost of capital) is 18%. The project being evaluated involves a new product that will have a three year life. The investment required is $300,000, which consists of a $240,000 machine, and inventories and accounts receivable totaling $60,000. The machine will have a useful life of three years and a salvage value of $150,000. The salvage value will be received during the fourth year, and the inventories and accounts receivable related to the product also will be converted back to cash in the fourth year. Accrual accounting net income from the product will be $87,000 per year, before depreciation expense, for each of the three years. Because of the time lag between selling the product and collecting the accounts receivable, cash flows from the product will be:

        1st year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $42,000

        2nd year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,000

        3rd year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,000

        4th year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,000

        Required:

        a. Calculate the accounting rate of return for the first year of the product. Assume straight line depreciation. Based on this analysis, would the investment be made? Explain your answer.

        b. Calculate the net present value of the product using a cost of capital of 18% and assuming that cash flows occur at the end of the respective years. Based on this analysis, would the investment be made? Explain your answer.

        c. Which of these two analytical approaches is the more appropriate to use? Explain your answer.

        custom machining company cmc purchased a made to order machine 276013

        Custom Machining Company (CMC) purchased a made to order machine tool for grinding machine parts. The machine costs $160,000, and CMC installed it yesterday. Today, a vendor offers a machine tool that will do exactly the same work but costs only $80,000. Assume that the cost of capital is 12 percent, that both machines will last five years, that CMC will depreciate both machines on a straight line basis for tax purposes with no salvage value, that the income tax rate is and will continue to be 40 percent, and that CMC earns sufficient income that it can offset any loss from disposing of or depreciating the ?~?~old’’ machine against other taxable income.

        How much, at a minimum, must the ?~?~old’’ machine fetch upon resale at this time to make purchasing the new machine worthwhile?

        delta company produces a single product the cost of producing 276029

        Delta Company produces a single product. The cost of producing and selling a single unit of this product at the company’s normal activity level of 60,000 units per year is:



        The normal selling price is $21 per unit. The company’s capacity is 75,000 units per year. An order has been received from a mail order house for 15,000 units at a special price of $14.00 per unit. This order would not affect regular sales.

        Required:

        1. If the order is accepted, by how much will annual profits be increased or decreased? (The order will not change the company’s total fixed costs.)

        2.Assume the company has 1,000 Units of this product left over from last year that are inferior to the current model. The units must be sold through regular channels at reduced prices. What unit cost is relevant for establishing a minimum selling price for these units?Explain.

        dorsey company manufactures three products from a common input i 276060

        Dorsey Company manufactures three products from a common input in a joint processing operation. Joint processing costs up to the split off point total $350,000 per quarter. The company allocates these costs to the joint products on the basis of their relative sales value at the split off point. Unit selling prices and total output at the split off point are as follows:



        Each product can be processed further after the split off point. Additional processing requires no special facilities. The additional processing costs (per quarter) and unit selling prices after further processing are given below:



        Required:

        Which product or products should be sold at the split off point and which product or products should be processed further? Showcomputations.

        dropping a product merchant company manufactures and sells three 276066

        Dropping a product Merchant Company manufactures and sells three models of electronic printers. Ken Gail, president of the company, is considering dropping model JT484 from its product line because the company has experienced losses for this product during the past three quarters. The following product level operating data have been compiled for the most recent quarter:

        ?

        In addition, the following information is also available: ?c Factory rent and depreciation will not be affected by a decision to drop model JT484.

        ?c Quarterly utility bills will be reduced from $40,000 to $31,000 if JT484 isdropped.

        ?c Supervision costs for JT484 can be eliminated if dropped.

        ?c The maintenance department will be able to reduce quarterly costs by $7,000 if JT484 is dropped.

        ?c Elimination of JT484 will make it possible to eliminate two administrative staff positions with combined salaries of $30,000 per quarter.

        Required

        (a) Should Merchant Company eliminate JT484?

        (b) Merchant’s sales manager believes that it is important to continue to produce JT484 to maintain a full product line. He expects the elimination of JT484 will reduce sales of the remaining two products by 5% each. Will this information change your answer to part a? Explain.

        the may 21 2010 edition of the wall street journal 275585

        The May 21, 2010, edition of the Wall Street Journal includes an article by Jeffrey Trachtenberg entitled ?oE Books Rewrite Bookselling.??

        Instructions

        Read the article and answer the following questions.

        (a) What aspect of Barnes and Noble’s current structure puts it at risk if electronic books become a significant portion of book sales?

        (b) What was Barnes and Noble’s primary competitive advantage in a ?opaper book?? world? How has this advantage been eliminated by e books?

        (c) What event do the authors say might eventually be viewed as the big turning point for e books?

        (d) What amount does Barnes and Noble earn on a $25 hardcover book? How much would it likely earn on an e book version of the same title? What implications does this have for Barnes and Noble versus its competitors?

        (e) What two mistakes does the author suggest that Barnes and Noble made that left it ill prepared for an e book environment?

        titus equipment company manufactures and distributes industrial 275620

        Titus Equipment Company manufactures and distributes industrial air compressors. The following costs are available for the year ended December 31, 2010.The company has no beginning inventory. In 2010, 1,500 units were produced, but only 1,300 units were sold. The unit selling price was $4,500. Costs and expenses were:

        Variable costs per unit

        Direct materials ………………………………..$ 1,000

        Direct labor ………………………………………1,500

        Variable manufacturing overhead …………………300

        Variable selling and administrative expenses ………70

        Annual fixed costs and expenses

        Manufacturing overhead ………………….$1,400,000

        Selling and administrative expenses …………100,000

        Instructions

        (a) Compute the manufacturing cost of one unit of product using variable costing.

        (b) Prepare a 2010 income statement for Titus Company using variable costing.

        tommy appleton is in charge of arranging the oattitude adjustmen 275626

        Tommy Appleton is in charge of arranging the ?oattitude adjustment?? period and dinner for the monthly meetings of the local chapter of the Management Accountants Association. Tommy is negotiating with a new restaurant that would like to have the group’s business, and Tommy wants to apply some of the cost–volume–profit analysis concepts he has learned. The restaurant is proposing its regular menu prices of $4.00 for a before dinner drink and $22.00 for dinner. Tommy has determined that on average, the people attending the meeting have 1.5 drinks before dinner. He also believes that the contribution margin ratios for the drinks and dinner are 50% and 40%, respectively.

        Required:

        Prepare a memo to Tommy outlining the possible offers he might make to the restaurant owner, and recommend which offer he should make.

        video concepts inc vci markets video equipment and film thro 275648

        Video Concepts, Inc. (VCI) markets video equipment and film through a variety of retail outlets. Presently, VCI is faced with a decision as to whether it should obtain the distribution rights to an unreleased film titled Touch of Orange. If this film is distributed by VCI directly to large retailers, VCI’s investment in the project would be $150,000.VCI estimates the total market for the film to be 100,000 units. Other data available are as follows:

        Cost of distribution rights for film ……………………. $125,000

        Label design ………………………………………………. 5,000

        Package design …………………………………………… 10,000

        Advertising ………………………………………………. 35,000

        Reproduction of copies (per 1,000) ……………………….. 4,000

        Manufacture of labels and packaging (per 1,000) …………… 500

        Royalties (per 1,000) ………………………………………… 500

        VCI’s suggested retail price for the film is $20 per unit. The retailer’s margin is 40 percent. What is VCI’s unit contribution and contribution margin?

        west coast apparel co manufactures a variety of clothing types 275659

        West Coast Apparel Co. manufactures a variety of clothing types for distribution to several major retail chains. The following costs are incurred in the production and sale of blue jeans:

        a. Salary of production vice president

        b. Property taxes on property, plant, and equipment

        c. Electricity costs of $0.12 per kilowatt hour

        d. Salesperson’s salary, $30,000 plus 2% of the total sales

        e. Consulting fee of $100,000 paid to industry specialist for marketing advice

        f. Shipping boxes used to ship orders

        g. Dye

        h. Thread

        i. Salary of designers

        j. Brass buttons

        k. Janitorial supplies, $2,000 per month

        l. Legal fees paid to attorneys in defense of the company in a patent infringement suit,

        $40,000 plus $150 per hour

        m. Straight line depreciation on sewing machines

        n. Insurance premiums on property, plant, and equipment, $50,000 per year plus $4 per

        $20,000 of insured value over $10,000,000

        o. Hourly wages of machine operators

        p. Fabric

        q. Rental costs of warehouse, $4,000 per month plus $3 per square foot of storage used

        r. Rent on experimental equipment, $40,000 per year

        s. Leather for patches identifying the brand on individual pieces of apparel

        t. Supplies

        Instructions

        Classify the preceding costs as either fixed, variable, or mixed. Use the following tabular headings and place an ?oX?? in the appropriate column. Identify each cost by letter in the costcolumn.

        costa company 275726

        Below find a working trial balance for Pickett Company. This format is often used during the preparation phase of the financial statements since it provides a good overview. The module 2 background information has a very simple example, which may be helpful.

        Costa Company

        31 Dec 12

        Trial Balance (accounts in alphabetical order)

        Accounts

        Working Trial Balance

        Balance Sheet

        Income Statement

        Debit

        Credit

        Debit

        Credit

        Debit

        Credit

        Accounts payable

        $14,500

        $14,500

        Accounts receivable

        $18,000

        $18,000

        Cash

        41,500

        41,500

        Common stock

        10,000

        10,000

        Depreciation expense

        18,250

        18,250

        Cost of goods sold

        402,610

        402,610

        Equipment (net of depreciation)

        325,000

        325,000

        Insurance

        1,500

        1,500

        Inventory

        80,500

        80,500

        Long term debt

        105,000

        105,000

        Marketing

        5,600

        5,600

        Misc. expenses

        4,500

        4,500

        Paid in capital

        90,000

        90,000

        Property taxes

        6,500

        6,500

        Rent

        22,000

        22,000

        Retained earnings

        156,400

        245,500

        Revenues

        619,400

        619,400

        Salaries

        61,940

        61,940

        Utilities

        7,400

        7,400

        Total

        $995,300

        $995,300

        $465,000

        $465,000

        $530,300

        $619,400

        Net Income $89,100

        Required:

        Your task is to prepare an income statement and a balance sheet in good format after adjusting for the two errors below.

        • A physical count of inventory indicates $70,500 on hand.
        • There’s a check for $5,000 from a customer that has not been recorded in the working trial balance. The sale was never recorded in the first place, so the transaction relating to this sale is missing.

        In addition

        1. Please describe the effect of the errors on the income statement and balance sheet.
        2. Is this company profitable? How do you determine whether or not this is the case.
        3. Is the company in a solid financial position, i.e. comment on balance sheet.

        a number of costs are listed below that may be 275790

        A number of costs are listed below that may be relevant in decisions faced by the management of Svahn, AB, a Swedish manufacturer of sailing yachts:



        Required:

        Copy the information above onto your answer sheet and place an X in the appropriate column to indicate whether each item is relevant or not relevant in the following situations. Requirement relates to Case 1 above, and requirement 2 relates to Case 2.

        1. The company chronically has no idle capacity and the old Model Bl00 machine is the company’s constraint. Management is considering purchasing a Model B300 machine to use in addition to the company’s present Model Bl00 machine. The old Model B100 machine will continue to be used to capacity as before, with the new Model B300 machine being used to expand production. This will increase the company’s production and sales. The increase in volume will be large enough to require increases in fixed selling expenses and in general administrative overhead, but not in the fixed manufacturing overhead.

        2. The old Model B 100 machine is not the company’s constraint, but management is considering replacing it with a new Model B300 machine because of the potential savings in direct materials with the new machine. The Model B 100 machine would he sold. This change will have no effect on production or sales, other than some savings in direct materials costs due to lesswaste.

        a u s automobile components plant had recently been reorganized 275799

        A U.S. automobile components plant had recently been reorganized so that quality and employee teamwork were to be the guiding principles for all managers and workers. One production worker described the difference: In the old production environment, we were not paid to think. The foreman told us what to do, and we did it even if we knew he was wrong. Now, the team decides what to do. Our voices are heard. All middle management has been cut out, including foremen and superintendents. Management relies on us, the team members, to make decisions. Salary people help us make these decisions; the production and manufacturing engineers work for us. They are always saying, ?oWe work for you. What do you need??? And they listen to us. The plant controller commented as follows: In traditional factories, the financial system viewed people as variable costs. If you had a production problem, you sent people home to reduce your variable costs. Here, we do not send people home. Our production people are viewed as problem solvers, not as variable costs.

        Required

        (a) What information needs did the production workers have in the old environment?

        (b) What information do you recommend be supplied to the production workers in the new environment that emphasizes quality, defect reduction, problem solving, and teamwork?

        alto company currently produces component th1 for its sole produ 275818

        Alto Company currently produces component TH1 for its sole product. The equipment that it uses to produce TH1 must be replaced, and management must decide whether to replace the equipment or buy TH1 from an outside supplier. The current cost per unit to manufacture its required 400,000 units of TH1 follows.

        Direct materials . . . . . . . . . $1.20

        Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.50

        Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.00

        Total cost per unit . . . . . . . $8.70

        Direct materials and direct labor are 100% variable. Overhead is 75% fixed, and the current fixed overhead includes $1 per unit depreciation on the old equipment. If management buys the new equipment, it will incur depreciation of $1.50 per unit. An outside supplier has offered to supply the 400,000 units of TH1 for $4 per unit.

        Required

        1. Determine whether management should make or buy the TH1.

        2. What factors besides cost must management consider when deciding whether to make or buy TH1?

        antiquities ltd produces antique looking books management ha 275826

        Antiquities, Ltd., produces antique looking books. Management has just received a request for a special order for 2,000 books and must decide whether to accept it. Venus Company, the purchaser, is offering to pay $25.00 per book, which includes $3.00 per book for shipping costs.

        The variable production costs per book include $9.20 for direct materials, $4.00 for direct labor, and $3.80 for variable overhead. The current year’s production is 22,000 books and maximum capacity is 25,000 books. Fixed costs, including overhead, advertising, and selling and administrative costs, total $80,000. The usual selling price is $25.00 per book. Shipping costs, which are additional, average $3.00 per book.

        Determine whether Antiquities should accept the special order.

        assume road runner shoes has a plant capacity that can produce 275851

        Assume Road Runner Shoes has a plant capacity that can produce 3,000 units per week (each unit is a pair of shoes). Its predicted operations for the week follow:

        Sales (2,000 units at $40 each) ………………………………………………………. $80,000

        Manufacturing Costs

        Variable………………………………………………………………………………….. $15 per Unit

        Fixed…………………………………………………………………………………………….. $10,000

        Marketing and Administrative Costs

        Variable (all sales commissions) …………………………………………………… $3 per Unit

        Fixed………………………………………………………………………………………………… $1,500

        Should Road Runner accept a special order for 400 units at a selling price of $30 each?

        Assume these units are subject to half the usual sales commission rate per unit, and assume no effect on regular sales at regular prices. How will the decision affect the company’s operating profit?

        assume that ebv and talltree invested in newco at the 275854

        Assume that EBV and Talltree invested in Newco at the terms in Exercises 10.2 and 10.3, and it is now one year later. Owl is considering a $20M Series C investment in Newco. Talltree proposes to structure the investment as 12M shares of convertible preferred stock. The employees of Newco have claims on 10M shares of common stock, and the previous venture investors hold 6M shares of Series A convertible preferred (EBV) and 8M shares of Series B Convertible Preferred (Talltree). Thus, following the Series C investment, Newco will have 10M common shares outstanding and would have 36M shares outstanding on conversion of the CP. Owl estimates a 50 percent probability for a successful exit, with an expected exit time in three years, and an exit valuation of $500M. The $500M Owl fund has fees as given in Appendix 2.C in Chapter 2.

        (a) What is your investment recommendation for Owl? (Show all steps.)

        (b) How sensitive is this recommendation to different assumptions about the exit valuation and the probability of success?

        (c) Given the evidence described in Chapter 7, do you think that 50 percent is an aggressive assumption about the probability of success for a third round investment?

        assume the linear cost relation of the cost volume profit model 275860

        Assume the linear cost relation of the cost volume profit model for a single product firm, and use the following answer key:

        (1) More than double

        (2) Double

        (3) Increase, but less than double

        (4) Remain the same

        (5) Decrease

        Complete each of the following statements, assuming that all other things (such as quantities) remain constant.

        a. If price doubles, revenue will ____________________________.

        b. If price doubles, the total contribution margin (contribution margin per unit A? number of units) will ____________________________.

        c. If price doubles, profit will ____________________________.

        d. If contribution margin per unit doubles, profit will ____________________________.

        e. If fixed costs double, the total contribution margin will ________________________.

        f. If fixed costs double, profit will ____________________________.

        g. If fixed costs double, the break even point of units sold will _____________________.

        h. If total sales of units double, profit will __________________________.

        i. If total sales dollars double, the break even point will _________________________.

        j. If the contribution margin per unit doubles, the break even point will ______________.

        k. If both variable costs per unit and selling price per unit double, profit will _________.

        bert asiago a salesperson for convertco received an order from 275884

        Bert Asiago, a salesperson for Convertco, received an order from a potential new customer for 50,000 units of Convertco’s single product at a price $25 below its regular selling price of $65. Asiago knows that Convertco has the capacity to produce this order without affecting regular sales. He has spoken to Convertco’s controller, Bia Morgan, who has informed Asiago that at the $40 selling price, Convertco will not be covering its variable costs of $42 for the product, and she recommends the order not be accepted. Asiago knows that variable costs include his sales commission of $4 per unit. If he accepts a $2 per unit commission, the sale will produce a contribution margin of zero. Asiago is eager to get the new customer because he believes that this could lead to the new customer becoming a regular customer.

        Required

        1. Determine the contribution margin per unit on the order as determined by the controller.

        2. Determine the contribution margin per unit on the order as determined by Asiago if he takes the lower commission.

        3. Do you recommend Convertco accept the special order? What factors must management consider?

        bill has just returned from a duck hunting trip he 275885

        Bill has just returned from a duck hunting trip. He has brought home eight ducks. Bill’s friend, John, disapproves of duck hunting, and to discourage Bill from further hunting, John has presented him with the following cost estimate per duck:



        Required:

        1. Assuming that the duck hunting trip Bill has just completed is typical, what costs are relevant to a decision as to whether Bill should go duck hunting again this season?

        2. Suppose that Bill gets lucky on his next hunting trip and shoots 10 ducks in the amount of time it took him to shoot 8 ducks on his last trip. How much would it have cost him to shoot the last two ducks? Explain.

        3.Which costs are relevant in a decision of whether Bill should give up hunting?Explain.

        birch company normally produces and sells 30 000 units of rg 6 275888

        Birch Company normally produces and sells 30,000 units of RG 6 each month. RG 6 is a small electrical relay used as a component part in the automotive industry. The selling price is $22 per unit, variable costs are $14 per unit, fixed manufacturing overhead costs total $150,000 per month, and fixed selling costs total $30,000 per month. Employment contract strikes in the companies that purchase the bulk of the RG 6 units have caused Birch Company’s sales to temporarily drop to only 8,000 units per month. Birch Company estimates that the strikes will last for two months, after which time sales of RG 6 should return to normal. Due to the current low level of sales, Birch Company is thinking about closing down its own plant during the strike, which would reduce its fixed manufacturing overhead costs by $45,000 per month and its fixed selling costs by 10%. Start up costs at the end of the shutdown period would total $8,000. Because Birch Company uses Lean Production methods, no inventories are on hand.

        Required:

        1. Assuming that the strikes continue for two months, would you recommend that Birch Company close its own plant? Explain. Show computations.

        2. At what level of sales (in units) for the two month period should Birch Company be indifferent between closing the plant or keeping it open? Show computations.

        blasingham company is currently manufacturing part q108 275892

        Blasingham Company is currently manufacturing Part Q108, producing 35,000 units annually. The part is used in the production of several products made by Blasingham. The cost per unit for Q108 is as follows:

        Direct materials ……………$ 6.00

        Direct labor ……………….. 2.00

        Variable overhead ………… 1.50

        Fixed overhead ……………. 3.50

        Total ………………………. $13.00

        All of the fixed overhead is common fixed overhead. An outside supplier has offered to sell the part to Blasingham for $11. There is no alternative use for the facilities currently used to produce the part.

        Required:

        1. Should Blasingham Company make or buy Part Q108?

        2. What is the most Blasingham would be willing to pay an outside supplier?

        3. If Blasingham buys the part, by how much will income increase or decrease?

        bob s burgers is in the fast food restaurant business one compo 275897

        Bob’s Burgers is in the fast food restaurant business. One component of its marketing strategy is to increase sales by expending in foreign markets. It uses both financial and nonfinancial quantitative and qualitative information when deciding whether to open restaurants abroad. Bob’s decided to open a restaurant in Prague (Czench Republic) five years ago. The following information helped the managers in making that decision:

        Financial Quantitative Information

        Operating information

        Estimated food, labor, and other operating costs (e.g., taxes, insurance, utilities, and supplies)

        Estimated selling price for each food item

        Capital investment information

        Cost of land, building, equipment, and furniture

        Financing options and amounts

        Nonfinancial Quantitative Information

        Estimated daily number of customers, hamburgers to be sold, employees to work

        High traffic time periods

        Income of people living in the area

        Ratio of population to number of restaurants in the market area

        Traffic counts in front of similar restaurants in the area

        Qualitative Information

        Government regulations, taxes, duties, tariffs, political involvement in business operations

        Property ownership restrictions

        Site visibility

        Accessibility of store location

        Training process for local managers Hiring process for employees

        Local customs and practices

        Bob’s Burgers has hired you as a consultant and given you an income statement comparing the operating incomes of its five restaurants in Eastern Europe. You have noticed that the Prague location is operating at a loss (including unallocated fixed costs) and must decide whether to recommend closing that restaurant.

        Review the information used in making the decision to open the restaurant. Identify the types of information that would also be relevant in deciding whether to close the restaurant. What period or periods of time should be reviewed in making your decision? What additional information would be relevant in making your decision?

        body care inc produces skin lotion chemical xx2 is an 275899

        Body Care, Inc., produces skin lotion. Chemical XX2 is an ingredient of that skin lotion. Body Care, Inc., currently produces Chemical XX2 in its own factory. The Cindy Company offers to supply Chemical XX2 at a price of $200 per 100 units. An analysis of the costs that Body Care incurs producing Chemical XX2 reveals the following information:

        Cost per 100 Units

        Direct (Variable) Material …………………………………………………………………. $100

        Direct (Variable) Labor ………………………………………………………………………… 50

        Other Variable Costs ……………………………………………………………………………. 25

        Fixed Costs per 100 Unitsa ………………………………………………………………….. 50

        Total ………………………………………………………………………………………………. $225

        a These fixed costs would still be incurred by Body Care, Inc. if Chemical XX2 is purchased from Cindy Company.

        Management of Body Care, Inc., needs your advice in answering the following questions:

        a. Should Body Care, Inc., accept the offer from Cindy?

        b. Should the offer be accepted if Cindy reduces the price to $160 per 100 units?

        bozo inc manufactures two products from a joint production proc 275903

        Bozo Inc. manufactures two products from a joint production process. The joint process costs $110,000 and yields 6,000 pounds of LTE compound and 20,000 pounds of HS compound. LTE can be sold at split off for $55 per pound. HS can be sold at split off for $8 per pound. A buyer of HS asked Bozo Inc. to process HS further into CS compound

        If HS were processed further, it would cost $34,000 to turn 20,000 pounds of HS into 4,000 pounds of CS. The CS would sell for $45 per pound.

        Required:

        1. What is the contribution to income from selling the 20,000 pounds of HS at split off?

        2. What is the contribution to income from processing the 20,000 pounds of HS into 4,000 pounds of CS? Should Bozo Inc. continue to sell the HS at split off or process it further into CS?

        accounting 427188

        Specify, to the left of each account, the letter of the financial statement classification the account would appear in. Use only the classifications shown.

        Balance Sheet Income and Retained Earnings Statement

        a. Current Assets j. Sales Revenue

        b. Investments k. Cost of Goods Sold

        c. Property, Plant, and Equipment l. Operating Expenses

        d. Intangible Assets m. Other Revenues and Gains

        e. Other Assets n. Other Expenses and Losses

        f. Current Liabilities o. Extraordinary Item

        g. Long term Debt p. Retained Earnings Section

        h. Capital Stock q. Not on the Statements

        i. Retained Earnings

        Account balances taken from the ledger of Morin Company on December 31, 2012 follow:

        _____ 1. Common Stock, $10 par _____ 16. Inventory

        _____ 2. Loss on Disposal of Equipment _____ 17. Salaries and Wages Expense

        _____ 3. Buildings _____ 18. Merchandise on order with supplier

        _____ 4. Office Expense _____ 19. Interest Revenue

        _____ 5. Allowance for Doubtful Accounts _____ 20. Selling Expenses

        _____ 6. Notes Payable (Short Term) _____ 21. Interest Expense

        _____ 7. Accum. Depreciation”Buildings _____ 22. Income Taxes Payable

        _____ 8. Mortgage Payable due 2014 _____ 23. Insurance Expense

        _____ 9. Depletion Expense _____ 24. Advertising Expense

        _____ 10. Freight Out _____ 25. Equity Investments

        _____ 11. Sales Revenue _____ 26. Accounts Receivable

        _____ 12. Dividends _____ 27. Land

        _____ 13. Retained Earnings Dec. 31, _____ 28. Accounts Payable

        2011

        _____ 29. Error made in computing 2010

        _____ 14. Cash depreciation expense

        _____ 15. Sales Discounts _____ 30. Gain on Redemption of

        Debt

        accounting fifo lifo 427199

        Speed World Cycles sells high performance motorcycles and motocross racers. One of Speed World’s most popular models is the Kazomma 900 dirt bike. During the current year, Speed World purchased eight of these cycles at the following costs:

        Purchase Date Units Purchased Unit Cost Total Cost
        July 1 2 $ 4,950 $ 9,900
        July 22 3 5,000 15,000
        Aug. 3 3 5,100 15,300



        8 $ 40,200







        On July 28, Speed World sold four Kazomma 900 dirt bikes to the Vince Wilson racing team. The remaining four bikes remained in inventory at September 30, the end of Speed World’s fiscal year.

        Assume that Speed World uses a periodic inventory system.

        a.

        Compute the cost of goods sold relating to the sale on July 28 and the ending inventory of Kazomma 900 dirt bikes at September 30, using the following cost flow assumptions:

        1. Average cost
        2. FIFO
        3. LIFO

        Show the number of units and unit costs in each cost layer of the ending inventory. You may determine the cost of goods sold by deducting ending inventory from the cost of goods available for sale. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        a. Cost of goods sold and ending inventory
        1. Average cost method:
        Ending inventory at September 30:
        Average cost $
        Ending inventory $


        Cost of goods sold through September 30:
        Cost of goods available for sale $
        Less: Ending inventory at September 30 (above)

        Cost of goods sold $


        2. First in, first out (FIFO) method:
        Ending inventory at September 30:
        From purchase on August 3 $
        From purchase on July 22

        $


        Cost of goods sold through September 30:
        Cost of goods available for sale $
        Less: Ending inventory at September 30 (above)

        Cost of goods sold $


        3. Last in, first out (LIFO) method:
        Ending inventory at September 30:
        From purchase on July 1 $
        From purchase on July 22

        Ending inventory $


        Cost of goods sold:
        Cost of goods available for sale $
        Less: Ending inventory at September 30 (above)

        Cost of goods sold

        overhead volume variance and overhead controllable variance 427284

        The standard factory overhead rate is $7.50 per machine hour ($6.20 for variable factory overhad and $1.30 for fixed overhead) based on 100% capacity of 80,000 machine hours. The standard cost and the actual cost of factory overhead for the production of 15,000 units during August were as follows:

        Actual Variable Factory Overhead: $360,000

        fixed factory overhead 104,000

        Standard hours allowed for units produced: 60,000 hours

        What is the maount of the factory overhead volume variance & what is the amount of the factory overhead controllable variance?

        options for both are:

        a) 12,000U

        b) 12,000F

        c) 14000U

        d) 26000U

        Please provide explanation with answer

        standard unit costs varience analysis journal entries 427300

        The standard operating capacity of Corona manufacturing Co. is 1,000 units. A detailed study of the manufacturing data relating to the standard production cost of one product revealed the following:

        1. two pounds of materials are needed to produce one unit.

        2. the standard unit cost of materials is $8 per pound.

        3. it takes 1 hour of labor to produce one unit.

        4. standard labor rate is $10 per hour.

        5. standard overhead for this volume is $4,000.

        a. Set up a standard cost summary showing the standard unit cost.

        b. analyze the variances for labor and material.

        C. make journal entries to record the transfer to work and process of :

        1.materials cost

        2. labor costs

        3. overhead costs (when making these entries included the variances)

        D. prepare the journal entry to record the transfer of cost to the finished goods account.

        Question 1:

        1,000 units were started and finished

        Case 1: all prices and quantities for the cost elements are standard, except for materials cost, which is $8.50 per pound.

        Case 2: all prices and quantities for the cost elements are standard, except that 1,900 lb of materials were used.

        Question 2

        1,000 units were started and finished

        Case 1: all prices and quantities are standard, except for the labor rate, which is $10.20 per hour.

        Case 2: all prices and quantities are standard, except for labor hours, which totaled 900.

        Question 3

        All of the deviations listed in the two above questions took place and 900 units were started and finished.

        what are the setup costs allocated to strollers during the current month 427315

        Starbright manufactures children car seats, strollers, and baby swings. Starbright manufacturing costs are budgeted as follows:
        Factory utilities $85,000
        Factory foremen salaries $87,000
        Machinery setup costs $31,000
        Total manufacturing overhead $203,000

        The company uses activity based costing to allocate its manufacturing overhead costs to products based on the following schedule:

        Overhead Cost Allocation Base
        Factory Utilities Direct labor hours
        Factory foremen salaries Machine hours
        Setup costs Number of production runs

        During the current month, the following levels of activities were incurred:

        Car Seats Strollers Baby Swings Total
        Direct Labor Costs $ 46,410 $ 79,275 $ 27,405 $ 153,090
        Direct Labor Hours 4,420 7,550 2,610 14,580
        Machine Hours 5,500 8,200 3,500 17,200
        Production Runs 40 64 42 146
        Units Produced 1,200 3,100 990 5,290

        international business law 6th edition ray august don mayer michael bixby australia 427326

        State Responsibility and Environmental Regulation (Australia)

        A Crocodonian business firm chartered an airplane owned by the Republic of Crocodonia to fly cargo to Country U. The cargo was a load of crocodile skins that are legal to own and sell in Crocodonia but that are considered contraband in Country U. The business firm, knowing this, mislabeled the cargo as cowhides. When the plane landed in Country U, Counry U’s Contraband Enforcement Agency seized both the plane and its cargo. The cargo was destroyed and the plane was sold in accordance with a Country U anti racketeering statute. The government of Crocodonia was incensed. It sent a diplomatic message to Country U protesting that its national honor had been sullied by Country U’s actions. Crocodonia and Country U are parties to an Arbitration Treaty, and they agree to submit the dispute to arbitration. Crocodonia seeks compensation for the airplane and, on behalf of the Crocodonian business firm, compensation for the destroyed cargo. What will the arbitration tribunal decide? Discuss.

        20 3 427383

        Exercise 20 3

        Garza and Neely, CPAs, are preparing their service revenue (sales) budget for the coming year (2012). The practice is divided into three departments: auditing, tax, and consulting. Billable hours for each department, by quarter, are provided below.

        Department Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 Quarter 4
        Auditing 2,580 1,710 2,210 2,580
        Tax 3,250 2,650 2,290 2,840
        Consulting 1,630 1,630 1,630 1,630

        Average hourly billing rates are: auditing $83, tax $92, and consulting $104.

        Prepare the service revenue (sales) budget for 2012 by listing the departments and showing for each quarter and the year in total, billable hours, billable rate, and total revenue.

        GARZA AND NEELY, CPAs
        Sales Revenue Budget
        For the Year Ending December 31, 2012
        Quarter 1 Quarter 2
        Dept. Billable Hours Billable Rate Total Rev. Billable Hours Billable Rate Total Rev.
        Auditing $ $ $ $
        Tax
        Consulting
        $ $

        GARZA AND NEELY, CPAs
        Sales Revenue Budget
        For the Year Ending December 31, 2012
        Quarter 3 Quarter 4
        Dept. Billable Hours Billable Rate Total Rev. Billable Hours Billable Rate Total Rev.
        Auditing $ $ $ $
        Tax
        Consulting
        $ $

        GARZA AND NEELY, CPAs
        Sales Revenue Budget
        For the Year Ending December 31, 2012
        Year
        Dept. Billable Hours Billable Rate Total Rev.
        Auditing $ $
        Tax
        Consulting
        $

        22 01 427385

        Exercise 22 1

        Stanton Company is planning to produce1,900units of product in 2012. Each unit requires2.30pounds of materials at $7.90per pound and a half hour of labor at $15.20per hour. The overhead rate is60% of direct labor.

        (a) Compute the budgeted amounts for 2012 for direct materials to be used, direct labor, and applied overhead.

        Direct materials $
        Direct labor $
        Overhead $

        (b) Compute the standard cost of one unit of product.
        (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.75.)

        Standard cost $

        23 3 427388

        Brief Exercise 23 3

        In Harley Company it costs $31per unit ($19variable and $12fixed) to make a product that normally sells for $41. A foreign wholesaler offers to buy3,360units at $25each. Harley will incur special shipping costs of $1per unit. Assuming that Harley has excess operating capacity.

        Indicate the net income (loss) Harley would realize by accepting the special order.
        (If an amount reduces the net income for Increase (Decrease) column then enter with a negative sign preceding the number e.g. 15,000 or parenthesis, e.g. (15,000). Enter all other amounts in all other columns as positive and subtract where necessary.)

        Reject
        Order
        Accept
        Order
        Net Income
        Increase
        (Decrease)
        Revenues $ $ $
        Costs—Manufacturing
        Shipping
        Net income/(loss) $ $ $

        23 4 427390

        Brief Exercise 23 4

        Vintech Manufacturing incurs unit costs of $6($5variable and $1fixed) in making a subassembly part for its finished product. A supplier offers to make13,600of the part at $6.30per unit. If the offer is accepted, Vintech will save all variable costs but no fixed costs.

        Prepare an analysis showing the total cost saving, if any, Vintech will realize by buying the part.
        (If an amount reduces the net income for Increase (Decrease) column then enter with a negative sign preceding the number e.g. 15,000 or parenthesis, e.g. (15,000). Enter all other amounts in all other columns as positive and subtract where necessary.)

        Make Buy Net Income
        Increase
        (Decrease)
        Variable manufacturing costs $ $ $
        Fixed manufacturing costs
        Purchase price
        Total annual cost $ $ $

        The decision should be tobuy the partmake the part.

        23 6 427392

        Brief Exercise 23 6

        Ridley Company has a factory machine with a book value of $92,500and a remaining useful life of5years. A new machine is available at a cost of $191,300. This machine will have a5 year useful life with no salvage value. The new machine will lower annual variable manufacturing costs from $629,300to $351,400.

        Prepare an analysis showing whether the old machine should be retained or replaced.
        (If an amount reduces the net income for Increase (Decrease) column then enter with a negative sign preceding the number e.g. 15,000 or parenthesis, e.g. (15,000). Enter all other amounts in all other columns as positive and subtract where necessary.)

        Retain
        Equipment
        Replace
        Equipment
        Net5 Year
        Income
        Increase
        (Decrease)
        Variable manufacturing costs $ $ $
        New machine cost
        Total $ $ $

        The old factory machine should bereplacedretained.

        stock 427399

        The stockholders’ equity section on the December 31, 2009, balance sheet of Chemfast Corporation reported the following amounts:

        Contributed Capital
        Preferred Stock (par $20; authorized 10,000 shares, ? issued, of which 500 shares are held as treasury stock) $ 104,000
        Additional Paid in Capital, Preferred 14,300
        Common Stock (no par; authorized 20,000 shares, issued and outstanding 8,000 shares) 600,000
        Retained Earnings 30,000
        Preferred Treasury Stock, 500 shares at cost 9,500

        Assume that no shares of treasury stock have been sold in the past.

        Required:

        Complete the following statements. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        1. The number of shares of preferred stock issued was .
        2. The number of shares of preferred stock outstanding was .
        3. The average issue price of the preferred stock was $ per share.
        4. The average issue price of the common stock was $ .
        5. The treasury stock transaction (Click to select)decreasedincreased stockholders’ equity by $ .
        6. The treasury stock cost $ per share.
        7. Total stockholders’ equity is $ .

        accounting 427411

        How do strategic planning, long range planning, and budgeting differ?

        A. Strategic planninc focuses on the effects that the operating budget and other plans (capital budget) will have no cash balances. Long range planning usually has a horizon of one year or less, and focuses on the budgeted cost of ativites requried to produce and sell products and services. Budgeting usually covers not specific time period, is quite genera, and often is not built around finanicial statements.

        b. Strategic planninc covers no specific time period, is quite general, and often is not built around finaial statements. Long range planning usually has a 5 or 10 year horizon and consisits of fiancial statements without much detail. Budgeting usually has a horizon of one year or less, and consists of financial statemensts with much detail.

        c. Strategic planning usually has a 5 or 10 year horizon and consists of financial statements without much detail. long range planning usually has a horizon of one year or less, consists of financial statements with ch detail. Budgeting usually covers no specific time perod, is quite general, and otern is not built around financial statements.

        d. strategic planning is an ongoing process that adds a month or a quarter as the month or qurter ended is dropped. long range plannin usually has a horizon of one year or less, consists of finanial statements with much detail. Budgeting focuses on preparing budgets for various functions over a specific time period.

        assignment 1 complete each step of the drafting the report audit program indicate co 427476

        ASSIGNMENT: 1. Complete each step of the drafting the report audit program. Indicate completion for each step by making sure that the step is initialed, dated, and that the workpaper reference is indicated. For those audit program steps that are already initialed as having been completed, enter an appropriate date and workpaper reference next to the initials. AUDIT PROGRAM – DRAFTING THE REPORT Procedures Initials Date W/P Ref Completing the Audit 1. Prepare independent accountant’s report subject to one of the situations shown in the requirements 2. Prepare management letter RW . G 1 RP 2/16/15 AUDIT MEMO West & Fair CPAs, LLC Stamford, CT Re: Proli Footwear Proposed Audit Opinion The following is the standard audit opinion. We will reference the PCAOB Standards in this report because Proli intends to go public in the near future. We have audited the accompanying balance sheet of Proli Footwear, Inc. as of December 31, 2014, and the related statement of income, stockholders’ equity, and cash flows for the year then ended. We also have audited Proli Footwear’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2014, based on criteria established in Internal Control Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). Proli Footwear’s management is responsible for these financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting, and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements and an opinion on the company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit. We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit of the financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinions. A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements. Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate. In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Proli Footwear, Inc. as of December 31, 2014 and the results of its operations and its cash flows for the year then ended in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. Also in our opinion, Proli Footwear, Inc. maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 20X8, based on criteria established in Internal Control Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). REQUIRED: Draft the appropriate audit opinion given the following scenarios. Each situation is independent of the other situations. 1. Proli Footwear’s management refuses to accrue the accounts receivable loss related to the bankruptcy of Moccasins For All. 2. The bank is expected to withdraw its financing because: a. The Company has projections that indicate continued decrease in earnings and reduced revenues; OR b. The Company has violated certain loan covenants that the bank will not waive. 3. The auditors want to emphasize, in their opinion, the facts related to the fire that occurred in January. 4. Proli Footwear’s management refuses to accrue the warranty expense adjustments proposed by West & Fair.

        please help 427486

        Summit Products, Inc. is interested in producing and selling an improved widget. Market research indicates that customers would be willing to pay $84 for such a widget and that 44,000 units could be sold each year at this price. The current cost to produce the widget is estimated to be $54

        If Summit Products requires a 20% return on sales to undertake production, what is the target cost for the new widget?
        Some other amount.
        $64.00.
        $67.20.
        $73.20.

        swanson hiller inc purchased a new machine on september 1 2008 at a cost of 118 000 427555

        Swanson & Hiller, Inc., purchased a new machine on September 1, 2008, at a cost of $118,000. The machine’s estimated useful life at the time of the purchase was five years, and its residual value was $6,000.

        a 1.

        Prepare a complete depreciation schedule, beginning with calendar year 2008, using the straight line method (assume that the half year convention is used). (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)


        a 2. Prepare a complete depreciation schedule, beginning with calendar year 2008, using the 200 percent declining balance schedule method (assume that the half year convention is used). (Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
        a 3.

        Prepare a complete depreciation schedule, beginning with calendar year 2008, using the 150 percent declining balance schedule method, switching to straight line when that maximizes the expense (assume that the half year convention is used). (Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        b. Which of the three methods computed in part a is most common for financial reporting purposes?
        150 percent declining balance method.
        200 percent declining balance method.
        Straight line method.

        c.

        Assume that Swanson & Hiller sells the machine on December 31, 2011, for $27,000 cash. Compute the resulting gain or loss from this sale under each of the depreciation methods used in part a. (Loss amounts should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Straight line

        200 percent declining balance.

        150 percent declining balance.

        the clayton manufacturing company is considering an investment i 275532

        The Clayton Manufacturing Company is considering an investment in a new automated inventory system for its warehouse that will provide cash savings to the firm over the next five years. The firm’s CEO anticipates earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation (EBITDA) from cost savings equal to $200, 000 for the first year of the operation of the center; over the next four years, the estimate that this amount will grow at the rate of 5% per year. The system will require an initial investment of $800,000 that will be depreciated over the a five year period using the straight line depreciation of $160,000 per year and a zero estimated salvage value.

        a) Calculate the project’s annual free cash flow (FCF) for each of the next five years, where the firm’s tax rate is 35%.

        b) If the cost of capital for the project is 12%, what is the projected NPV for the investment?

        c) What is the minimum year 1 dollars savings (i.e., EBITDA) required to produce a breakeven NPV = 0?

        the coca cola company hardly needs an introduction a line taken 275534

        The Coca Cola Company hardly needs an introduction. A line taken from the cover of a recent annual report says it all: If you measured time in servings of Coca Cola, ?oa billion Coca Cola’s ago was yesterday morning.?? On average, every U.S. citizen drinks 363 8 ounce servings of Coca Cola products each year. Coca Cola’s primary line of business is the making and selling of syrup to bottlers. These bottlers then sell the finished bottles and cans of Coca Cola to the consumer.

        The annual report of Coca Cola provided the following information

        THE COCA COLA COMPANY

        Management Discussion

        Our gross margin declined to 61 percent this year from 62 percent in the prior year, primarily due to costs for materials such as sweeteners and packaging. The increases [in selling expenses] in the last two years were primarily due to higher marketing expenditures in support of our Company’s volume growth. We measure our sales volume in two ways: (1) gallon shipments of concentrates and syrups and (2) unit cases of finished product (bottles and cans of Coke sold by bottlers).

        Instructions

        Answer the following questions.

        (a) Are sweeteners and packaging a variable cost or a fixed cost? What is the impact on the contribution margin of an increase in the per unit cost of sweeteners or packaging? What are the implications for profitability?

        (b) In your opinion, are marketing expenditures a fixed cost, variable cost, or mixed cost to The Coca Cola Company? Give justification for your answer.

        (c) Which of the two measures cited for measuring volume represents the activity index as defined in this chapter? Why might Coca Cola use two different measures?

        accounting 275540

        Patrick Zimbrick and his son, Dan, own all of the outstanding stock of Osprey Corporation. Both Dan andPatrick are officers in the corporation and, together with their uncle, John, comprise the entire board ofdirectors. Osprey uses the cash method of accounting and has a calendar year end. In late 2006, theboard of directors adopted the following legally enforceable resolution (agreed to in writing by each ofthe officers):Salary payments made to an officer of the corporation that shall be disallowed in whole or inpart as a deductible expense for Federal income tax purposes shall be reimbursed by suchofficer to the corporation to the full extent of the disallowance. It shall be the duty of the boardof directors to enforce payment in each such amount.In 2007, Osprey paid Patrick $560,000 in compensation. Dan received $400,000. On an audit in late2010, the IRS found the compensation of both officers to be excessive. It disallowed deductions for$200,000 of the payment to Patrick and $150,000 of the payment to Dan. The IRS recharacterized thedisallowed payments as constructive dividends. Complying with the resolution by the board of directors,both Patrick and Dan repaid the disallowed compensation to Osprey Corporation in early 2011.Dan and Patrick have asked you, their accountant, to determine how their repayments should betreated for tax purposes. Dan is still working as a highly compensated executive for Osprey while Patrickis retired and living off his savings.

        the hartford symphony guild is planning its annual dinner dance 275570

        The Hartford Symphony Guild is planning its annual dinner dance. The dinner dance committee has assembled the following expected costs for the event:



        The committee members would like to charge $35 per person for the evening’s activities.

        Required:

        1. Compute the break even point for the dinner dance (in terms of the number of persons who must attend).

        2. Assume that last year only 300 persons attended the dinner dance. If the same number attend this year, what price per ticket must be charged in order to break even?

        3. Refer to the original data ($35 ticket price per person). Prepare a CVP graph for the dinner dance from zero tickets up to 600 ticketssold.

        high low method contribution margin per case fixed costs break even 426681

        Royal Essentials, Inc. Begin operations on January 1, 2008. The company produces a hand and body lotion in an eight ounce bottle called Eternal Beauty. The lotion is sold wholesale in 12 bottle cases for $80 per case. There is a selling commission of $16 per case. The January direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead cost are as follows:

        Direct Materials

        ….. Cost Behavior….Units Per Case….Cost per unit…Direct Materials cost per case
        Cream base variable….72 ozs. …………..$0.015 …………..$1.08
        Natural oils …variable….24 ozs. ……………0.250 …………….6.00
        Bottle (8oz.) ..variable… 12 bottles ……….0.400 …………….4.80
        ………………………………………….. ……………………………$11.88

        Direct Labor

        Dept. ..Cost Behavior..Time per case..Labor Rate Per hour..Direct Labor Cost per case

        The Problem:
        The management of Royal Essentials, Inc. Wishes to determine the number of cases required to break even per month. The utilities cost, which is part of factory overhead, is a mixed cost. The following information was gathered from the first six months of operation regarding this cost.
        2008……………..Case Production……………………Utility Total Cost………………..
        January……………………300……………. …………………….$230
        February…………………..600……………. ……………………..265
        March…………………….1,000…………… ……………………..300
        April………………………..900…………. ………………………..292
        May…………………………750………….. ………………………275
        June………………………..825………….. ………………………280
        Instructions:
        1. Determine the fixed and variable portion of the utility cost using the high low method.
        This is what I came up with, is this correct? $200. Fixed cost and a .10 per unit variable cost.

        2. Determine the contribution margin cost per case.
        11.88 + 5.04 + .10 = $17.02 variable cost per case minus $80. Sales per case =$62.98
        Is this correct?

        3. Determine the fixed cost per month, including the utility fixed cost.
        Utility 200 plus facility lease 9,694 plus equipment depreciation 3,600, plus supplies 600 =14.094
        Is this correct?
        4. Determine the break even number of cases per month.
        This is what I came up with: 14094/ 96 =146.8 cases per month.
        Is this correct?

        chapter 17 5a 426686

        Ryan Company (1st number) Priest Company (2nd number)

        Data from the current year end balance sheets

        Assets

        Cash 18500 33000

        Accounts receivable, net 36400 56400

        Current notes receivable (trade) 8100 6200

        Merchandise Inventory 83440 131500

        Prepaid expenses 4000 5950

        Plant assets, net 284000 303400

        Total Assets 434440

        Liabilities and Equity

        Current Liabilities 60340 92300

        Long term notes payable 79800 100000

        common stock, $5 par value 175000 205000

        retained earnings 119300 139150

        total liabilities and equity 434440 536450

        Data from the current year’s income statement

        Sales 660000 780200

        Cost of goods sold 485100 532500

        Interest expense 6900 11000

        income tax expense 12800 19300

        net income 67770 105000

        basic earnings per share 1.94 2.56

        Beginning of year balance sheet data

        Accounts receivable, net 28800 53200

        Current notes receivable (trade) 0 0

        merchandise inventory 54600 106400

        total assets 388000 372500

        common stock, $5 par value 175000 205000

        retained earnings 94300 90600

        Required

        1. For both companies computer the (a) current ratio, (b) acid test ratio, (c) accounts (including notes) receivable turnover, (d) inventory turnover, (e) days’ sales in inventory, and (f) days’ sales uncollected. Identify the company you consider to be the better short term credit risk and explain why.

        2. For both companies compute the (a) profit margin ratio, (b) total asset turnover, (c) return on total assets, and (d) return on common stockholders’ equity. Assuming that each company paid cash dividends of $1.50 per share and each company’s stock can be purchased at $25 per share, compute their (e) price earnings ratios and (f) dividends yields. Identify which company’s stock you would recommend as the better invest and explain why.

        question please help 426693

        Ryder Company, which began operations in 2011, invests its idle cash in trading securities. The following transactions are from its short term investments in its trading securities.

        2011
        Jan. 20 Purchased 1,000 shares of Ford Motor Co. at $26 per share plus a $125 commission.
        Feb. 9 Purchased 2,700 shares of Lucent at $37 per share plus a $200 commission.
        Oct. 12 Purchased 700 shares of Z Seven at $7.60 per share plus a $95 commission.

        2012
        Apr. 15 Sold 1,000 shares of Ford Motor Co. at $31 per share less a $295 commission.
        July 5 Sold 700 shares of Z Seven at $10.50 per share less a $100 commission.
        July 22 Purchased 1,800 shares of Hunt Corp. at $31 per share plus a $225 commission.
        Aug. 19 Purchased 1,800 shares of Donna Karan at $13 per share plus a $105 commission.
        2013
        Feb. 27 Purchased 3,800 shares of HCA at $34 per share plus a $440 commission.
        Mar. 3 Sold 1,800 shares of Hunt at $26 per share less a $130 commission.
        June 21 Sold 2,700 shares of Lucent at $34.75 per share less a $42 commission.
        June 30 Purchased 1,400 shares of Black & Decker at $47.50 per share plus a $595 commission.
        Nov. 1 Sold 1,800 shares of Donna Karan at $23.00 per share less a $124 commission.
        1.

        Prepare journal entries to record these short term investment activities for the years shown. (Ignore any year end adjusting entries.) (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Date General Journal Debit Credit
        Jan. 20, 2011 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Fair value adjustment tradingShort term investments trading (Ford)Loss on sale of short term investmentsCash
        (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Ford)Fair value adjustment tradingCashGain on sale of short term investmentsLoss on sale of short term investments
        Feb. 9, 2011 (Click to select)Fair value adjustment tradingCashLoss on sale of short term investmentsGain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Lucent)
        (Click to select)CashShort term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Fair value adjustment tradingShort term investments trading (Hunt)Gain on sale of short term investmentsLoss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Z Seven)
        Oct. 12, 2011 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Lucent)CashShort term investments trading (Ford)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Hunt)Fair value adjustment tradingGain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Z Seven)
        (Click to select)Gain on sale of short term investmentsCashShort term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Fair value adjustment tradingShort term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Loss on sale of short term investments
        Apr. 15, 2012 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)Gain on sale of short term investmentsCashLoss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Short term investments trading (Hunt)
        (Click to select)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)CashLoss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Ford)
        (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Ford)CashGain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (D.Karan)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Lucent)
        July 5, 2012 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)CashGain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Loss on sale of short term investments
        (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (D.Karan)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Lucent)Short term investments trading (Ford)CashShort term investments trading (Hunt)
        (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Ford)CashLoss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Lucent)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (D.Karan)
        July 22, 2012 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Short term investments trading (Ford)Loss on sale of short term investmentsCashShort term investments trading (Z Seven)Gain on sale of short term investments
        (Click to select)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)Short term investments trading (Lucent)CashLoss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Hunt)
        Aug. 19, 2012 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Lucent)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Gain on sale of short term investmentsCash
        (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (D.Karan)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Ford)Cash
        Feb. 27, 2013 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Ford)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (HCA)CashGain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)Short term investments trading (B&D)
        (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (B&D)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (D.Karan)Short term investments trading (HCA)CashGain on sale of short term investments
        Mar. 3, 2013 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (HCA)CashShort term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)Loss on sale of short term investmentsGain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (B&D)
        (Click to select)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (B&D)Short term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (HCA)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)Cash
        (Click to select)CashShort term investments trading (HCA)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Ford)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (D.Karan)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (B&D)
        June 21, 2013 (Click to select)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (HCA)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (B&D)Short term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Cash
        (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Ford)CashShort term investments trading (HCA)Short term investments trading (Lucent)Loss on sale of short term investmentsGain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (B&D)
        (Click to select)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Hunt)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (HCA)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Ford)CashShort term investments trading (Lucent)
        June 30, 2013 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)CashShort term investments trading (HCA)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (B&D)
        (Click to select)Short term investments trading (B&D)Short term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Loss on sale of short term investmentsCashShort term investments trading (HCA)
        Nov. 1, 2013 (Click to select)Short term investments trading (Ford)CashShort term investments trading (D.Karan)Short term investments trading (B&D)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (Hunt)Short term investments trading (HCA)Loss on sale of short term investments
        (Click to select)Short term investments trading (D.Karan)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (B&D)Short term investments trading (Hunt)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (HCA)Short term investments trading (Ford)Loss on sale of short term investments
        (Click to select)Loss on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (D.Karan)Short term investments trading (B&D)Gain on sale of short term investmentsShort term investments trading (HCA)Short term investments trading (Z Seven)Short term investments trading (Ford)Short term investments trading (Hunt)

        rev: 12_07_2011

        19.

        2.

        On December 31, 2013, prepare the adjusting entry to record any necessary fair value adjustment for the portfolio of trading securities when HCA’s share price is $36 and Black & Decker’s share price is $43.5. (Assume the Fair Value Adjustment”Trading account had an unadjusted balance of zero.)(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Date General Journal Debit Credit
        Dec. 31, 2013 (Click to select)Short term investments tradingUnrealized loss incomeUnrealized gain incomeLoss on sale of short term investmentsFair value adjustment tradingGain on sale of short term investmentsCashLong term investments trading
        (Click to select)Short term investments tradingGain on sale of short term investmentsLoss on sale of short term investmentsCashUnrealized gain incomeUnrealized loss incomeFair value adjustment tradingLong term investments trading

        pbo calculations 426724

        Sachs Brands’ defined benefit pension plan specifies annual retirement benefits equal to: 1.6% Af— service years Af— final year’s salary, payable at the end of each year. Angela Davenport was hired by Sachs at the beginning of 1999 and is expected to retire at the end of 2033 after 35 years’ service. Her retirement is expected to span 18 years. Davenport’s salary is $90,000 at the end of 2013 and the company’s actuary projects her salary to be $240,000 at retirement. The actuary’s discount rate is 7%

        1. What is the comapny’s PBO at the beginning of ’13 with respect to Davenport?

        2. Estimate by the projected benefits approach the portion of Davenport’s annual retirement payments attributaable to 2013

        3. Co’s service cost for 2013 regarding Davenport?

        4. Co’s interest cost for 2013 regarding Davenport?

        managerial accounting 426729

        Sako Company’s Audio Division produces a speaker that is used by manufacturers of various audio products. Sales and cost data on the speaker follow:

        Selling price per unit on the intermediate market $42
        Variable costs per unit $19
        Fixed costs per unit (based on capacity) $7
        Capacity in units 56,000

        Sako Company has a Hi Fi Division that could use this speaker in one of its products. The Hi Fi Division will need 11,000 speakers per year. It has received by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c11″>a quote of $29 per speaker from another manufacturer. Sako Company evaluates division managers on the basis of divisional profits.

        by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c11″>

        Requirement 1:
        Assume that the Audio Division is now selling only 45,000 speakers per year to outside customers.
        (a)

        From the standpoint of the Audio Division, what is the lowest acceptable transfer price for speakers sold to the Hi Fi Division? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Transfer price $

        (b)

        What is the range of transfer price the manager’s of both divisions should by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c11″>agree? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c11″>

        From $ to $

        (c)

        If left free to negotiate without interference, would you expect the division managers to voluntarily agree to the transfer of 11,000 speakers from the Audio Division to the Hi Fi Division?

        (Click to select)YesNo

        (d) From the standpoint of the entire company, should the transfer take place?
        (Click to select)Transfer should not take placeTransfer should take place

        Requirement 2:
        Assume that the Audio Division is selling all of the speakers it can produce to outside customers.
        (a)

        From the standpoint of the Audio Division, what is the lowest acceptable transfer price for speakers sold to the Hi Fi Division? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Transfer price $
        (b)

        From the standpoint of the Hi Fi Division, what is the highest acceptable transfer price for speakers acquired from the Audio Division? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Transfer price $

        (c)

        If left free to negotiate without interference, would you expect the division managers to voluntarily agree to the transfer of 11,000 speakers from the Audio Division to the Hi Fi Division?

        (Click to select)YesNo
        (d) From the standpoint of the entire company, should the transfer take place?
        (Click to select)Transfer should not take placeTransfer should take place

        cvp analysis impact of activity based costing 426739

        Salem Electronics currently produces two products: a programmable calculator and a tape recorder. A recent marketing study indicated that consumers would react favorably to a radio with the Salem brand name. Owner Kenneth Booth was interested in the possibility. Before any commitment was made, however, Kenneth wanted to know what the incrementalfixed costs would be and how many radios must be sold to cover these costs. In response, Betty Johnson, the marketing manager, gathered data for the current products to help in projecting overhead costs for the new product. The overhead costs based on 30,000 direct labor hours follow. (The high low method using direct labor hours as the independent variable was used to determine thefixed and variable costs.) Fixed Variable Materials handling $” $18,000 Power ” 22,000 Engineering 100,000 ” Machine costs 30,000* 80,000 Inspection 40,000 ” Setups 60,000 ” * All depreciation. The following activity data were also gathered: Calculators Recorders Units produced 20,000 20,000 Direct labor hours 10,000 20,000 Machine hours 10,000 10,000 Material moves 120 120 Kilowatt hours 1,000 1,000 Engineering hours 4,000 1,000 Hours of inspection 700 1,400 Number of setups 20 40 Betty was told that a plantwide overhead rate was used to assign overhead costs based on direct labor hours. She was also informed by engineering that if 20,000 radios were produced and sold (her projection based on her marketing study), they would have the same activity data as the recorders (use the same direct labor hours, machine hours, setups, and so on). Engineering also provided the following additional estimates for the proposed product line: Prime costs per unit $ 18 Depreciation on new equipment 18,000 Upon receiving these estimates, Betty did some quick calculations and became quite excited. With a selling price of $26 and just $18,000 of additionalfixed costs, only 4,500 units had to be sold to break even. Since Betty was confident that 20,000 units could be sold, she was prepared to strongly recommend the new product line. Required: 1. Reproduce Betty’s break even calculation using conventional cost assignments. How much additional profit would be expected under this scenario, assuming that 20,000 radios are sold? 2. Use an activity based costing approach, and calculate the break even point and the incremental profit that would be earned on sales of 20,000 units. 3. Explain why the CVP analysis done in Requirement 2 is more accurate than the analysis done in Requirement 1. What recommendation would you make?

        accounting 426756

        Sales (41,000 units) $ 1,107,000
        Variable expenses 774,900


        Contribution margin 332,100
        Fixed expenses 265,680


        Net operating income $ 66,420





        Refer to the original data. Rather than purchase new equipment, the marketing manager argues that the company’s marketing strategy should be changed. Instead of paying sales commissions, which are included in variable expenses, the marketing manager suggests that salespersons be paid fixed salaries and that the company invest heavily in advertising. The marketing manager claims that this new approach would increase unit sales by 50% without any change in selling price; the company’s new monthly fixed expenses would be $332,100; and its net operating income would increase by 25%. Compute the break even point in dollar sales for the company under the new marketing strategy.

        the following items are taken from the financial statements of dinkel company 426795

        The following items are taken from the financial statements of Dinkel Company for the year ending December 31, 2010:
        Accounts payable $18,000
        Accounts receivable 11,000
        Accumulated depreciation equipment 28,000
        Advertising expense 21,000
        Cash 15,000 15,000
        Dinkel, Capital (1/1/10) 102,000
        Dinkel, Drawing 14,000
        Depreciation expense 12,000
        Insurance expense 3,000
        Note payable, due 6/30/11 70,000
        Prepaid insurance (12 month policy) 6,000
        Rent expense 17,000
        Salaries expense 32,000
        Service revenue 133,000
        Supplies 4,000
        Supplies expense 6,000
        Equipment 210,000
        What is the company’s net income for the year ending December 31, 2010? Plese show how you came up with answer.
        a. $133,000
        b. $42,000
        c. $28,000
        d. $12,000

        Attachments:

        accounting 2010 426817

        Sandra’s Purse Boutique has the following transactions related to its top selling Gucci purse for the month of October 2012.

        Date Transactions Units Cost per Unit Total Cost
        October 1 Beginning inventory 6 $800 $ 4,800
        October 4 Sale 4
        October 10 Purchase 5 810 4,050
        October 13 Sale 3
        October 20 Purchase 4 820 3,280
        October 28 Sale 7
        October 30 Purchase 6 830 4,980

        $17,110

        Required:

        1. Calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold at october 31, 2012 using the specific identification method. The October 4th sales consists of purses from beginning inventory, the October 13 sale consists of one purse from beginning inventory and two purses from the October 10 purchase, and the October 28 sale consists of three purses from the October 10 purchase and four purses from the October 20 purchase.

        2. Using FIFO, calculate ending inventory and Cost of goods sold on 10/31/12

        3. Using LIFO, calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold on 10/31/12

        4. Using weighted average cost, calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold at October 31, 2012

        intro to accounting i asignment 426876

        I need assistance in complete a very straight forward Multiple choice assignment with only 1 problem that need to be worked out (Hand written is fine if its easier). But predominately this is a multiple Choice assignment that I need assistance in completing please bear with me with the price I have listed given that its minimum work required.

        Document Preview:

        ACC 211 FALL 2013 EXTRA CREDIT 20 POINTS DUE ON MONDAY 11/25/2013 Points will be given on correct answers only. For Question 1 & 2 you need to use scantron. Answers question no. 3 on separate paper. Question 1 Multiple Choice Journal Entries R. Sparks, an interior decorator, started a business by investing $10,000 cash. The business would record this transaction: Debit Cash $10,000, Credit Revenue $10,000 Debit Cash $10,000, Credit R. Sparks, Capital $10,000 Credit Cash $10,000, Debit R. Sparks, Capital $10,000 Credit Cash $10,000, Debit Revenue $10,000 R Sparks business purchases a used car for $6,000 cash. The business would record this transaction: Debit Car expense $6,000, Credit Cash $6,000 Debit Cash 6,000, Credit Car expense $6,000 Debit Assets: car $6,000, Credit Cash $6,000 Debit Cash $6,000, Credit Assets: car $6,000 R. Sparks business purchases a one year liability insurance policy effective immediately for $1,200 cash. The business would record this transaction: Debit Asset: Prepaid insurance $1,200, Credit cash $1,200 Debit Insurance expense $1,200, Credit cash $1,200 Debit Cash $1,200, Credit Prepaid Insurance $1,200 Debit Cash $1,200, Credit Insurance Expense $1,200 R. Sparks business purchases six months of supplies on account for $550. The business would record this transaction: Debit Supplies Expense $550, Credit Cash $550 Debit Supplies Expense $550, Credit Accounts Payable $550 Debit Asset: Supplies $550, Credit Cash $550 Debit Asset: Supplies $550, Credit Accounts Payable $550 R. Sparks business billed customers $2,100 for services performed. The business would record this transaction: Debit Accounts Receivable $2,100, Credit Service Revenues $2,100 Debit Cash $2,100, Credit Service Revenues $2,100 Debit Service Revenues $2,100, Credit Cash $2,100 Debit Service Revenues $2,100, Credit Accounts Receivable $2,100 R. Sparks withdrew from his business $300. The business would record this transaction: Debit Cash $300, Credit…

        valenko company provided the following account balances for the year ended december 426907

        Selling expenses $ 215,000
        Purchases of raw materials $ 260,000
        Direct labor ?
        Administrative expenses $ 160,000
        Manufacturing overhead applied to work in process $ 340,000
        Total actual manufacturing overhead costs $ 350,000

        Inventory balances at the beginning and end of the year were as follows:
        Beginning of Year End of Year
        Raw materials $ 50,000 $ 40,000
        Work in process ? $ 33,000
        Finished goods $ 30,000 ?

        The total manufacturing costs for the year were $675,000; the cost of goods available for sale totaled $720,000; the unadjusted cost of goods sold totaled $665,000; and the net operating income was $35,000. The company’s overapplied or underapplied overhead is closed entirely to cost of goods sold.

        Required:
        a. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
        Valenko Company
        Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured
        Direct materials:
        (Click to select)Ending work in process inventoryFinished goods inventory, beginningRaw materials inventory, beginningBeginning work in process inventoryRaw materials inventory, ending $
        (Click to select)DeductAdd : (Click to select)Beginning work in process inventoryEnding work in process inventoryPurchases of raw materialsRaw materials inventory, endingFinished goods inventory, beginning

        Total raw materials available
        (Click to select)DeductAdd : (Click to select)Raw materials inventory, endingPurchases of raw materialsBeginning work in process inventoryRaw materials inventory, beginningEnding work in process inventory

        Raw materials used in production
        (Click to select)Direct laborEnding work in process inventoryPurchases of raw materialsRaw materials inventory, endingRaw materials inventory, beginning
        (Click to select)Manufacturing overhead applied to work in process inventoryRaw materials inventory, endingRaw materials inventory, beginningDirect laborPurchases of raw materials

        Total manufacturing cost
        (Click to select)AddDeduct : (Click to select)Purchases of raw materialsRaw materials inventory, endingBeginning work in process inventoryEnding work in process inventoryRaw materials inventory, beginning

        (Click to select)DeductAdd : (Click to select)Ending work in process inventoryRaw materials inventory, beginningBeginning work in process inventoryPurchases of raw materialsRaw materials inventory, ending

        Cost of goods manufactured $



        b.

        Prepare a schedule of cost of goods sold. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Valenko Company
        Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold
        (Click to select)Finished goods inventory, endingOverapplied overheadCost of goods manufacturedFinished goods inventory, beginningCost of goods available for sale $
        (Click to select)AddDeduct : (Click to select)Cost of goods available for saleCost of goods manufacturedOverapplied overheadUnadjusted cost of goods soldUnderapplied overhead

        (Click to select)Finished goods inventory, endingUnadjusted cost of goods soldCost of goods manufacturedFinished goods inventory, beginningCost of goods available for sale
        (Click to select)AddDeduct : (Click to select)Cost of goods available for saleCost of goods manufacturedOverapplied overheadFinished goods inventory, endingUnderapplied overhead

        (Click to select)Cost of goods manufacturedFinished goods inventory, endingFinished goods inventory, beginningUnderapplied overheadUnadjusted cost of goods sold
        (Click to select)DeductAdd : (Click to select)Cost of goods manufacturedOverapplied overheadCost of goods available for saleFinished goods inventory, endingUnderapplied overhead

        Adjusted cost of goods sold $



        c.

        Prepare an income statement for the year. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Valenko Company
        Income Statement
        (Click to select)Depreciation expenseSalesSelling expensesAdministrative expenseCost of goods sold $
        (Click to select)Administrative expenseSelling expensesDepreciation expenseSalesCost of goods sold

        (Click to select)Gross lossGross margin
        Selling and administrative expenses:
        (Click to select)Depreciation expenseRent expenseSelling expensesInsurance expenseAdministrative expense $
        (Click to select)Insurance expenseDepreciation expenseSelling expensesRent expenseAdministrative expense


        (Click to select)Net operating incomeNet operating loss $

        acct question 426963

        Shelby Corporation was organized in January 2010 by 10 stockholders to operate an air conditioning sales and service business. The charter issued by the state authorized the following capital stock:

        Common stock, $1 par value, 200,000 shares.
        Preferred stock, $8 par value, 6 percent, 50,000 shares.
        During January and February 2010, the following stock transactions were completed:

        a. Collected $40,000 cash from each of the 10 organizers and issued 2,000 shares of common stock to each of them.
        b. Issued 15,000 shares of preferred stock at $25 per share; collected in cash.

        Net income for 2010 was $40,000; cash dividends declared and paid at year end were $10,000.

        Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2010

        Contributed capital:
        Preferred stock $
        Additional paid in capital, preferred stock
        Common stock
        Additional paid in capital, common stock

        Total contributed capital
        Retained earnings

        Total stockholders’ equity

        direct materials 426973

        Sherman has budgeted sales for the upcoming quarter as follows:

        April May June
        Units 1,100 1,400 1,250

        The desired ending finished goods inventory for each month is one half of next month’s budgeted sales. Three pounds of direct material are required for each unit produced. If direct material costs $4 per pound, and must be paid for in the month of purchase, the budgeted direct materials purchases (in dollars) for April are:

        incremental analysis 427006

        ShurShot Sports Inc. manufactures basketballs for the National Basketball Association (NBA). For the first 6 months of 2014, the company reported the following operating results while operating at 80% of plant capacity and producing 119,400 units.

        Amount
        Sales $4,776,000
        Cost of goods sold 3,760,230
        Selling and administrative expenses 403,572
        Net income $612,198

        Fixed costs for the period were cost of goods sold $1,079,700, and selling and administrative expenses $201,786.

        In July, normally a slack manufacturing month, ShurShot Sports receives a special order for 10,400 basketballs at $29 each from the Greek Basketball Association (GBA). Acceptance of the order would increase variable selling and administrative expenses $0.49 per unit because of shipping costs but would not increase fixed costs and expenses.

        Prepare an incremental analysis for the special order.

        operating income 427032

        Simpson Corporation operates two division with the following operating results from last year:

        Western Division Eastern Division Total

        Sales 620,000 290,000 $900,000

        Variable costs 310,000 200,000 $510,000

        contributing margin 310,000 90,000 $400,000

        avoidable fixed costs 110,000 70,000 $180,000

        allocated fixed costs 90,000 45,000 $135,000

        operating income (loss) 100,000 (25,000) $75,000

        Management is considering wether the Eastern Division should be discontinued since it incurred an operating lost last year. Allocated common fixed cost would continue for Simpson Corporation whether the division is discontinued or not.

        If the Eastern Division has been discontinued at the beginning of last year what would be the total operating income for Simpsom Corporation have been for the year?

        accounting 427037

        Single plantwide factory overhead rate

        Krispy Treats Snack Food Company manufactures three types of snack foods: tortilla chips, potato chips, and pretzels. The company has budgeted the following costs for the upcoming period:

        Factory depreciation $15,967
        Indirect labor 39,569
        Factory electricity 4,512
        Indirect materials 9,372
        Selling expenses 22,214
        Administrative expenses 12,496
        Total costs $104,130

        Factory overhead is allocated to the three products on the basis of processing hours. The products had the following production budget and processing hours per case:

        Budgeted Volume
        (Cases)
        Processing Hours
        Per Case
        Tortilla chips 6,600 0.10
        Potato chips 1,500 0.12
        Pretzels 3,300 0.15
        Total 11,400

        If required, round all per case answers to nearest cent.

        a. Determine the single plantwide factory overhead rate

        $_______

        b. Use the factory overhead rate in (a) to determine the amount of total and per case factory overhead allocated to each of the three products under generally accepted accounting principles.

        Total factory overhead per case factory overhead

        Tortilla chips $ $

        Potato Chips $ $

        Pretzels $ $

        Total $ $

        financial accounting 427103

        Bill Smith opened Smith Construction on April 1, 2010. The following amounts summarize the transactions and financial position of Smith construction as of May 31.
        During May the following transactions occurred:
        1 May Smith received $10,000 as an inheritance and used it to buy stock in the company.
        7 May Smith paid his accounts payable balance.
        15 May Smith replaced some windows for a client and received $5,000 cash for his services
        17 May Smith collected $1,200 from a customer for a job performed in April
        20 May Smith purchased supplies for $1,000 on account
        24 May Smith gave a bid to a customer and billed the customer for the services performed $800
        25 May Smith sold $5,000 of company stock to his brother
        28 May Smith paid wages to his workers of $1,800
        30 May Smith paid office rent of $1,000
        30 May Smith paid dividends to himself of $1,400

        product margins help 427115

        Smoky Mountain Corporation makes two types of hiking boots”Xtreme and the Pathfinder. Data concerning these two product lines appear below:

        Xactive Pathbreaker
        Selling price per unit $ 127.00 $ 89.00
        Direct materials per unit $ 64.80 $ 51.00
        Direct labor per unit $ 18.20 $ 13.00
        Direct labor hours per unit 1.4 DLHs 1.0 DLHs
        Estimated annual production and sales 25,000 units 75,000 units

        The company has a traditional costing system in which manufacturing overhead is applied to units based on direct labor hours. Data concerning manufacturing overhead and direct labor hours for the upcoming year appear below:

        Estimated total manufacturing overhead $2,200,000
        Estimated total direct labor hours 110,000 DLHs

        Requirement 1:
        (a)
        Calculate the predetermined overhead rate. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Predetermined overhead rate $

        (b)
        Compute the product margins for the Xtreme and the Pathfinder products under the company’s traditional costing system. (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Round your predetermined overhead rate to 2 decimal places. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Xtreme
        Product margin ?

        Pathfinder

        Product margin ?

        Requirement 2:
        The company is considering replacing its traditional costing system with an activity based costing system that would assign its manufacturing overhead to the following four activity cost pools (the Other cost pool includes organization sustaining costs and idle capacity costs):

        Estimated

        Expected Activity

        Activities and Activity Measures Overhead Cost Xactive Pathbreaker Total
        Supporting direct labor (direct labor hours) $ 797,500 35,000 75,000 110,000
        Batch setups (setups) 680,000 250 150 400
        Product sustaining (number of products) 650,000 1 1 2
        Other 72,500 NA NA NA


        Total manufacturing overhead cost $ 2,200,000





        Compute the product margins for the Xtreme and the Pathfinder products under the activity based costing system. (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Do not round your intermediate calculations. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Xtreme
        Product margin ?

        Pathfinder
        Product margin ?

        Requirement 3:
        Prepare a quantitative comparison of the traditional and activity based cost assignments. (Do not round your intermediate calculations. Round your predetermined overhead rate to 2 decimal places. Round your percentage values to 1 decimal places and round all other values to the nearest whole number. Omit the “$” & “%” signs in your response.)

        Xactive Pathbreaker Total
        Amount % of
        Total Amount
        Amount % of
        Total Amount
        Amount
        Traditional Cost System
        (Click to select)Supporting direct laborSelling and administrativeOtherDirect materialsBatch setupsProduct sustaining $ % $ % $
        (Click to select)Direct laborBatch setupsOtherProduct sustainingSelling and administrativeSupporting direct labor % %
        (Click to select)OtherManufacturing overheadSelling and administrativeProduct sustainingBatch setupsSupporting direct labor % %



        Total cost assigned to products $ $ $






        Activity Based Costing System
        Direct costs:
        (Click to select)Batch setupsSelling and administrativeSupporting direct laborProduct sustainingDirect materialsManufacturing overhead $ % $ % $
        (Click to select)Supporting direct laborBatch setupsSelling and administrativeManufacturing overheadProduct sustainingDirect laborOther % %
        Indirect costs:
        (Click to select)Direct laborOtherSelling and administrativeManufacturing overheadDirect materialsSupporting direct labor % %
        (Click to select)Manufacturing overheadOtherSelling and administrativeBatch setupsDirect laborDirect materials % %
        (Click to select)OtherSelling and administrativeDirect laborManufacturing overheadProduct sustainingDirect materials % %



        Total cost assigned to products $ $ $




        Costs not assigned to products:
        (Click to select)Direct laborDirect materialsSupporting direct laborBatch setupsOtherProduct sustaining

        Total cost $



        price variance 427131

        Snuggs Corporation makes a product with the following standard costs:

        Inputs………………….Standard Quanitity….. Standard Price

        Rate Direct Materials….. 2.8 ounces…… $6.00 per ounce

        Direct Labor…………0.3 hours………..$24.00 per hour

        Variable Overhead 0.3 hours……….$4.00 per hour

        The company reported the following results concerning this product in October.

        Actual outputAc€¦Ac€¦1,100 units.

        Raw materials used in productionAc€¦..2,790 ounces

        Actual direct labor hoursAc€¦..350 hours

        purchases of raw materialsAc€¦. 3,100 ounces

        actual price of raw materails purchasedAc€¦..$6.20 per ounce

        actual direct labor rateAc€¦. $25.50 per hour

        actual variable overhead rateAc€¦Ac€¦$4.10 per hour

        The company applies variable overhead on the basis of direct labor hours. The direct materials purchases variance is computed when the materials are purchased.

        1. The variable overhead rate variance for October is:
        A. $33 F
        B. $35 U
        C. $35 F
        D. $33 U

        2. The materials price variance for October is:
        A. $620 F
        B. $616 F
        C. $616 U
        D. $620 U

        managerial accounting 427158

        Sonora Clothing Company is a retail company that sells hiking and other outdoor gear specially made for the desert heat. It sells to individuals as well as local companies that coordinate adventure getaways in the desert for tourists. The following information is available for several months of the current year.

        Month Sales Purchases Cash
        Expenses
        Paid
        May $ 90,000 $ 70,000 $ 24,000
        June 115,000 95,000 29,500
        July 130,000 120,000 38,250
        August 125,000 80,000 34,700

        The majority of Sonora’s sales (70 percent) are cash, but a few of the excursion companies purchase on credit. Of the credit sales, 40 percent are collected in the month of sale and 60 percent are collected in the following month. All of Sonora’s purchases are on account with 55 percent paid in the month of purchase and 45 percent paid the following month.

        Requirement 1:
        Calculate the budgeted cash collections for July and August. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        July August
        Budgeted cash collections $ $

        Requirement 2:
        Calculate the budgeted cash payments for July and August. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        July August
        Budgeted cash payments $ $

        check my workeBook Linkreferences

        Worksheet Difficulty: Medium Learning Objective: 09 06 Prepare the cash budget and describe the other financial budgets required to prepare a budgeted balance sheet.

        human resource 426197

        Question 5

        1. Ingrid is a recent immigrant from Denmark with a valid U.S. work permit. She has applied for work on the wait staff at a Chinese restaurant near her home. Ingrid doesn’t have a car, and this restaurant is one of the few employers she can walk to. Ingrid was turned down for an opening at the restaurant although she has relevant job experience. Later, Ingrid noticed a Chinese man was hired for the job. Ingrid should:? Answer
          Sue because this is sex discrimination.
          Sue because this is national origin discrimination and violates the IRCA
          Not sue because this is an English only workplace and Ingrid’s English language skills are minimal.
          Not sue because Chinese origin is a bona fide occupational qualification in the case

        management accounting 426262

        Rabbid Industries Ltd consists of three decentralised division: Brentwood Division, Crater Division and Dollar Division. The managing director of Rabbid Industries has given the managers of the three dicisions the authority to decide whether to sell their products outside the company, or between themselves at a transfer price determined by the division managers. The external market for the company’s product is very active and there are many competitors, so sales made internally or externally by the devisions willnot effect marjet prices. Intermediate markets will always be available for Brentwood, Crater and Dollar to purchase their manufacturing needs or sell their products. Each division manager attempts to maximise his contribution margin at the current level of operating assets for the division.

        The manager of Crater Division is currently considering the follpwing two orders:

        Dollor Division needs 3000 units of a motor that can be supplied by Crater Division. To manufacture these motors, Crater would purchase components from Brentwood division at a transfer price of $900 per unit. Brentwood’s variable cost for these components is $450per unit. Crater Division would further process these compontents at a variable cost of $750 per unit.

        Eros Company wants to order 3500 motors from the Crater Division. This is a custom built product and the price will be $1875 per unit. Crater would purchase components for these motors from Brentwood Division at a transfer price of $750 per unit. Brentwood’s variable cost for these components is $375 per unit. Crater Division will further process these components at a variable cost of $600 per unit.

        Crater Division’s plant capacity is limited, and the company can accept either the Eros order or the Dollor order, but not both. The managing director of Rabbid Industries and the manager of Crater Division agree that it would not be beneficial to increase capacity.

        If Dollor Division cannot obtain the motors from Crater Division, it will purchase the motors from Frantic Company, which as offered to supply the same motors to Dollor Division at a price of $2250 per unit. Frantic Company would also purchase 3000 components from Brentwood’s variable cost for these components is $300 per unit.

        Required:

        1. If the manager of Crater Dision wants to maximise the division’s short run contribution margin, determine whether Crater Division should:

        (a) sell motors to Dollor Division at the prevailing market price; or

        (b) accept the Eros Company order.

        2. Independent of ypur answer to requirement 1, assum that Crater Division decides to accept the Eros Company contract. Determined if this decision is in the best interests of Rabbid Industries.

        managerial accounting 426267

        Rainwater Corp. expects to sell 600 umbrellas in May and 400 in June. Each umbrella sells for $15. Rainwater’s beginning and ending finished goods inventories for May are 75 and 50 units, respectively. Ending finished goods inventory for June will be 60 units. It expects the following unit sales for the third quarter:

        July 525
        August 490
        September 450

        Sixty percent of Rainwater’s sales are cash. Of the credit sales, 50 percent is collected in the month of the sale, 45 percent is collected during the following month, and 5 percent is never collected.

        Required:

        Calculate Rainwater’s total cash receipts for August and September. (Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        August September
        Total cash receipts $ $

        check my workeBook Linkreferences

        Worksheet Difficulty: Medium Learning Objective: 09 06 Prepare the cash budget and describe the other financial budgets required to prepare a budgeted balance sheet.

        allocated cost 426277

        Rand Company sells fine collectible statues and has implemented activity based costing. Costs in the shipping department have been divided into three cost pools. The first cost pool contains costs that are related to packaging and shipping and Rand has determined that the number of boxes shipped is an appropriate cost driver for these costs. The second cost pool is made up of costs related to the final inspection of each item before it is shipped and the cost driver for this pool is the number of individual items that are inspected and shipped. The final cost pool is used for general operations and supervision of the department and the cost driver is the number of shipments. Information about the department is summarized below: Cost Pool Total Costs Cost Driver Annual Activity Packaging and shipping $170,000 Number of boxes shipped 25,000 boxes Final inspection $200,000 Number of individual items shipped 100,000 items General operations and supervision $85,000 Number of orders 10,000 orders During the period, the Far East sales office generated 680 orders for a total of 6,120 items. These orders were shipped in 1,495 boxes. What amount of shipping department costs should be allocated to these sale? SHOW WORK PLEASE

        a. $16,590

        b. $28,186

        c. $22,406

        d. $10,588

        need help 426283

        Randall Company is a merchandising company that sells a single product. The company’s inventories, production, and sales in units for the next three months have been forecasted as follows:

        October November December
        Beginning inventory 12,000 12,000 12,000
        Merchandise purchases 62,000 72,000 37,000
        Sales 62,000 72,000 42,000
        Ending inventory 12,000 12,000 7,000

        Units are sold for $11 each. One fourth of all sales are paid for in the month of sale and the balance are paid for in the following month. Accounts receivable at September 30 totaled $452,000.

        Merchandise is purchased for $6 per unit. Half of the purchases are paid for in the month of the purchase and the remainder are paid for in the month following purchase. Selling and administrative expenses are expected to total $122,000 each month. One half of these expenses will be paid in the month in which they are incurred and the balance will be paid in the following month. There is no depreciation. Accounts payable at September 30 totaled $292,000 includes selling and administrative payables.

        Cash at September 30 totaled $82,000. A payment of $302,000 for purchase of equipment is scheduled for November, and a dividend of $202,000 is to be paid in December.

        Required:
        a.

        Prepare a schedule of expected cash collections for each of the months of October, November, and December. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Schedule of Expected Cash Collections
        October November December
        Sales $ $ $
        September accounts receivable $
        October sales $
        November sales $
        December sales



        Total cash collections $ $ $







        b.

        Prepare a schedule showing expected cash disbursements for merchandise purchases and selling and administrative expenses for each of the months October, November, and December. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Schedule of Expected Cash Disbursements
        October November December
        Merchandise purchases $ $ $
        Selling and administrative expenses



        Total incurred $ $ $






        Disbursements, previous month $ $ $
        Disbursements, current month



        Total $ $ $







        c.

        Prepare a cash budget for each of the months October, November, and December. There is no minimum required ending cash balance. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Randall Company
        Cash Budget
        October November December
        Beginning cash balance $ $ $
        Add cash receipts



        Total cash available $ $ $






        Disbursements
        Accounts payable
        Payment for equipment
        Payment for dividend



        Total disbursements



        Ending cash balance $ $ $





        accounting methods 426308

        Razar Sharp Company purchased equipment on July 1, 2010, for $22,140. The equipment was expected to have a useful life of three years, or 4,320 operating hours, and a residual value of $540. The equipment was used for 800 hours during 2010, 1,500 hours in 2011, 1,300 hours in 2012, and 720 hours in 2013.

        Instructions:

        1. Determine the amount of depreciation expense for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2011, 2012, and 2013, by (a) thestraight line method, (b) theunits of production method, and (c) thedouble declining balance method. Do not round your intermediate calculations but round final answers to the nearest dollar.

        a. Straight line method

        Year Amount
        2010 $
        2011 $
        2012 $
        2013

        $

        b. Units of production method

        Year Amount
        2010 $
        2011 $
        2012 $
        2013 $

        c. Double declining balance method

        Year Amount
        2010 $
        2011 $
        2012 $
        2013 $

        research paper last paper of the semester help 426314

        Please read the following article and answer the questions at the end. Please show all work! This is the last paper of the semester and I am really struggling with it.

        ?

        The Journal of Business Cases and Applications ? www.jbcaonline.org ? 77 ? Winter, 2009

        A Change of Taste

        Michael L. Garcia, The University of Tampa

        Karen D. Squires, Accessible Continuing Education Solutions

        ABSTRACT:

        This case is a disguised real world event where students break even analysis, introduce business valuation issues, fraud, and ethics. The case is appropriate for managerial accounting courses.

        INTRODUCTION

        I smiled to myself as I drove south on Interstate 95. I felt like I was joining the retiree migration to Florida. Like other retirees, I was moving back to my home town to be close to elderly relatives, long time friends and with a plan to buy a business to keep me busy and to supplement my retirement income. Many of my friends had their own businesses and were active in the local business community. One in particular, Mel Rivers, thought that he’d found a good opportunity. Mel and I grew up together and was one of my few friends who knew that I had worked for the past 20 years as a revenue agent for the Treasury Department. I generally told people that I worked for the Federal Government without mentioning that I was with the IRS.

        Mel offered to introduce me to Ronald Zumbado, a business leader and respected individual within the community. Mel told me that he had met Ronald a couple of years ago at a Chamber of Commerce meeting and that Mr. Zumbado specialized in buying troubled companies, turning them around and then selling them. About a month before my official retirement date, Mel had approached Ronald to see if he knew of any businesses which might be fore sale. Ronald said “this is fabulous timing!” And went on to indicate that he was ready to sell his latest venture which was a small retail outlet selling a Spanish custard called Flan. This sweet delicacy is a favorite of local residents and tourists alike.

        Mel started the meeting by saying, “Ronald, I’d like for you to meet Joe Jimenez, one of my oldest and closest friends.” In our preliminary meeting Ronald told to me that he had been able to improve Tasty Flan’s operations to the point that and he is ready to start something new. Ronald said that when he started the business, most of the revenue came from over the counter sales and that he had expanded sales by finding restaurants willing to put Tasty Flan on their dessert menus. He also had one Spanish market that was selling his product. He said that he felt that there was significant potential for sales growth through the commercial market for flan, but he hadn’t had the chance to fully develop that potential. That was one of the reasons that he wanted to sell the business to someone who could invest the time to develop the commercial side of the business. And right now he didn’t have the time because he’s had to get involved in another company of his. Apparently the current owner needed some help running the business and he wanted to help the new owner make the business flourish.

        Ronald exclaimed if you are interested in Tasty Flan you can have access to the business’s financial statements and any other documentation necessary in order to complete your due diligence. The business leases all of its fixed assets except for a used delivery vehicle. The selling price for the business is $250,000. If you prove to be an excellent credit risk I will hold paper on the sale with a 20% down payment and the balance in a note with annual payments for 5 years at 12%. Joe, if you find these terms agreeable I will enjoy doing business with you. I assured Ronald that from what I have researched before that his terms were indeed competitive with other financial institutions in the area, but I would have to review the business’s records before I would be willing to agree on the sales price. Ronald agreed in

        ? The Journal of Business Cases and Applications ? www.jbcaonline.org ? 78 ? Winter, 2009

        spirit, we set up a forthcoming meeting where I would have access to the business records for Tasty Flan. Ronald also wanted me to shadow him for a couple of days just to see how everything functions and to meet certain customers & vendors on the commercial side of the business.

        As planned, I met with Ronald and while shadowing him for the first few days observed that he had a wonderful demeanor and that his relationships with everyone around him were positive. Further, he was approachable. He seemed to have control and managed an efficient operation. When we went into Ronald’s office at Tasty Flan he said “did you notice that this business has significant cash sales?” I merely nodded while Ronald continued, “The information that I’m handing you shows sales figures which are approximately $40,000 less per year than the true amount.” I said, “interesting, did you record all of the expenses?” He said “ABSOLUTELY!” And then with a smile handed me a package of financial material that consisted of the following: Copies of Profit/ (Loss) statements of Tasty Flan from Ronald’s accountant. (See Exhibit 1); Copies of the Schedule C operating results along with the IRS transcripts for the tax years of 2005, 2006, & 2007 concerning the schedule C for Tasty Flan; state sales tax returns for Tasty Flan; and finally access to everything in the Tasty Flan office, including all of the paper copies of records in the file cabinets and to the office computer.

        EXHIBIT 1

        Years

        Item

        2005

        2006

        2007

        Sales

        $225,000

        $240,000

        $280,000

        CGS:

        Materials

        68,300

        81,000

        83,000

        Labor (Part Time)

        55,000

        58,000

        60,000

        Total CGS

        123,300

        139,000

        143,000

        Operating Expenses:

        Bank Charges

        225

        240

        280

        Delivery Truck Exp.

        5,625

        6,000

        6,200

        Equipment Rental

        9,000

        9,000

        9,000

        Insurance

        3,375

        4,800

        4,875

        Legal & Professional

        2,250

        2,400

        2,500

        Licensing

        113

        195

        200

        Office supplies

        450

        513

        510

        Payroll Expenses

        4,208

        4,437

        4,590

        Rent

        15,000

        16,000

        16,000

        Repairs

        2,867

        3,075

        1,500

        Total Operating Exp.

        43,113

        46,660

        45,655

        Utilities:

        Gas & Electric

        8,438

        9,000

        10,500

        Telecommunications

        1,440

        1,440

        1,440

        Waste Disposal

        4,500

        4,800

        5,205

        Water

        3,375

        3,600

        4,200

        Total Utilities

        17,753

        18,840

        21,345

        Total Expenses

        184,166

        204,500

        210,000

        Profit (Loss)

        $40,834

        $35,500

        $70,000

        After our meeting Ronald invited me to stay and start my analysis. The first thing that I did was to trace sales to Bank Statements, to the Transcripts of the IRS, and to the State Sales Returns. As I suspected they were a perfect match. I then turned my attention to the Profit & Loss Statements (Exhibit 1) in order to try a get a sense of what was happening.

        I performed horizontal and vertical analysis. On a line by line basis, I didn’t see anything significant. When I limited my analysis to the major category subtotals (Exhibit 2), some curious trends began to emerge. The vertical analysis shows that cost of goods sold as a percentage of sales dropped from 54.8% to 51.07% which is difficult to explain. All other expenses, in total, dropped as a percentage of sales which resulted in profit growing from 18.15% of sales to 25% of sales!

        EXHIBIT 2

        Vertical Analysis

        Horizontal Analysis

        Item

        2005

        2006

        2007

        2005

        2006

        2007

        Sales

        100.00%

        100.00%

        100.00%

        100.00%

        106.67%

        124.44%

        CGS

        54.80%

        57.92%

        51.07%

        100.00%

        112.73%

        115.98%

        Operating Exp.

        19.16%

        19.44%

        16.31%

        100.00%

        108.23%

        105.90%

        Utilities

        7.89%

        7.85%

        7.62%

        100.00%

        106.12%

        120.23%

        Total Expenses

        81.85%

        85.21%

        75.00%

        100.00%

        111.04%

        114.03%

        Profit (Loss)

        18.15%

        14.79%

        25.00%

        100.00%

        86.94%

        171.43%

        The sales increase of 24.44% over 2005 might be explained by the increase in selling price. From 2005 to 2006 profits declined and then from 2006 to 2007 profits almost doubled! For 2005 & 2006 the sales prices remained constant at $6.00 per individual unit, but in 2007 the sales price increased to $7.00 per individual unit. Basically an egg custard flan has a very short shelf life, so it wasn’t surprising that total units produced equaled units sold. In 2005, ’06, ’07 units sold totaled 37,500, 40,000, & 40,000 respectively (Exhibit 3.)

        EXHIBIT 3

        Years

        Item

        2005

        2006

        2007

        Sales

        $225,000

        $240,000

        $280,000

        Sales in units

        37,500

        40,000

        40,000

        Selling price per unit

        $6

        $6

        $7

        Many of the methods used to determine the selling price of a business are based upon business profit and expected future cash flows of the business. There was still something bothering me and that was the statement that Ronald made about undisclosed income. By Ronald disclosing to me the fact that he was skimming from the business made me skeptical of all of the information that he gave me so I decided to dig further.

        When I was shadowing Ronald I had seen first hand how the product was produced and its ingredients. The process was simple enough and although the recipe was tweaked there was one ingredient that was constant in the mix and that is sweetened condensed milk. Other ingredients were increased or decreased with each batch for taste, but the condensed milk did not change. I knew now

        what steps had to be performed in order to calculate the total amount of product that was sold for the periods in question.

        I examined Ronald’s business records with respect to the purchases of condensed milk as shown in Exhibit 4. I interviewed one of the bakers and found that production was done in small batches and that each batch required one can of condensed milk. One batch created four individual flans. When I looked through the invoices for condensed milk, I called the suppliers that I met when shadowing Ronald. I also called a few others. The suppliers confirmed the number of cans of condensed milk that Ronald had purchased. So he was indeed claiming all of his business expenditures.

        EXHIBIT 4 ‘ CONDENSED MILK USAGE ANALYSIS

        Number in cans:

        2005

        2006

        2007

        Beginning Inventory:

        250

        280

        350

        Quarter 1

        4,000

        4,220

        4,300

        Quarter 2

        2,700

        3,000

        3,010

        Quarter 3

        1,800

        1,950

        1,815

        Quarter 4

        1,155

        1,200

        1,175

        Total

        9,905

        10,650

        10,650

        Ending Inventory

        280

        350

        275

        TOTAL CANS USED IN PRODUCTION

        9,625

        10,300

        10,375

        4 units per batch

        4

        4

        4

        Total Units Sold

        38,500

        41,200

        41,500

        Reported units sold (Exhibit 3)

        37,500

        40,000

        40,000

        Difference in cans:

        1,000

        1,200

        1,500

        Times selling price:

        $6

        $6

        $7

        Total undisclosed income:

        $6,000

        $7,200

        $10,500

        This analysis proves that Ronald was skimming money from the business, but incremental income was significantly less than $40,000 per year. Exhibit 4 shows that Ronald’s skimming was approximately $6,000 for 2005, $7,200 in 2006, and $10,500 in 2007.

        I decided to categorize to the best of my ability to cost components of Tasty Flan’s expenses (Exhibit 5). As for the mixed costs:

        Delivery Vehicle: includes an existing note of $3,000 per year for the next 3 years. Note repayment is a cash outflow, but not a business expense. Note payments approximately equaled the truck’s depreciation. I made a note to myself that I might want to change accountants or do it myself.

        For the utility costs I plotted the bill by month and the associated units sold for the same month. I then estimated the formula for the line: Y = a + bX. Where the answer that I calculated for “a” the fixed cost and the amount of “b” is variable costs per unit. The amount in the table is “b” multiplied by the unit sales for 2007.

        EXHIBIT 5 ‘ ANALYSIS OF COST BEHAVIOR

        Mixed, Fixed, or Variable

        2007

        Fixed

        Variable

        Materials

        v

        $ 83,000.00

        Labor

        v

        55,000.00

        Bank Charges

        f

        $ 280.00

        Delivery Truck Exp.

        m

        3,000.00

        3,200.00

        Equipment Rental

        f

        9,000.00

        Insurance

        f

        4,875.00

        Legal & Professional

        f

        2,500.00

        Licensing

        f

        200.00

        Office supplies

        f

        510.00

        Payroll Expenses

        f

        4,590.00

        Rent

        f

        16,000.00

        Repairs

        v

        1,500.00

        Gas & Electric

        m

        1,540.00

        8,960.00

        Telephone

        f

        1,440.00

        Waste Disposal

        m

        600.00

        4,605.00

        Water/Sewer

        m

        465.00

        3,735.00

        TOTALS

        $ 45,000.00

        $ 160,000.00

        Before our next scheduled meeting I emailed him a number of questions regarding production capabilities, the timing of the sale of the business, my credit standing with him, and the amortization of the note. I also mentioned that, based upon my analysis, I wasn’t confident that a price of $250,000 could be justified. I thought that Ronald stated that by the following week he will have all of my answers and that hopefully all will go according to plan.

        The day arrived and we commenced our meeting. Ronald’s answers to my key questions were as follows:

        As long as we have a signed sales contract, I could keep Tasty Flan until the end of the year. This way you’ll be launching the business at the start of the tourist season.

        The business price was based upon his estimate of the discounted future potential income of the business, including the $40,000 of revenue, which he said was how he had determined the selling price of previous businesses and that method had always worked in the past.

        Joe you have checked out with excellent credit, if you decide to purchase the business I will need a down payment of $50,000 on 12/31/08 and you will make annual payments of $55,482 to me for the next 5 years. Since the tourist season just ended, we could postpone the formal transfer of ownership until December 31, 2008 and the first note payment would be due on December 31, 2009.

        With respect to Tasty Flan’s productive capacity, given the size of the rental unit the business’s production is capped at 42,000 individual units per year. (And that’s pushing it to the outer limits!)

        At the conclusion of the meeting I said, “Ronald, given this information I only have a couple of things that I have to accomplish via my due diligence and I will be able to give you an offer in two business days. If we agree upon a purchase price, I will have my attorney draft a purchase agreement.” Ronald agreed and said that he was looking forward to my answer.

        Later that day my friend Mel called to find out how things were progressing with Ronald and the Tasty Flan investigation. I told him that things were moving forward and that Ronald seemed to be very open with sharing his business information and allowed me to meet customers and suppliers, etc. And then I said “Mel, do you happen to know any of the people who have purchased a business from Ronald?” Mel said, “not really, but I heard that Ronald recently had an owner default on their note and that he took back the business and found another buyer. Why do you ask?” I responded, “Well, like most sellers, Ronald is presenting Tasty Flan in the best possible light. I thought that it might be interesting to talk to other people who had purchased businesses from him.” I then added, “Ronald has been so open I don’t anticipate any problems. Don’t worry about it.”

        I thought to myself that Tasty Flan looked exactly like the business of my retirement dreams. I particularly liked the idea of working the counter and getting reacquainted with people in the neighborhood. Right now the retail sales were just carryout. I thought it might be worthwhile to put in a couple of small tables and encourage customers to stay and have some flan and coffee before taking their order home for their family. And then there was the possibility of expanding wholesale sales to other grocery stores and restaurants. Ronald appeared to be very open, cooperative, and willing to work with me. The terms of the note were competitive for a first time business owners. However, the repossession and resale of one of his other businesses bothered me. And of course, as a former IRS agent, not reporting all of the Tasty Flan’s income concerned me. Of course I would report all of the income.

        I decided that I needed net profit from the business of at least $45,000. The net amount, after paying Social Security taxes and income taxes would be a nice supplement to my government pension

        Instructions!! ( Please show all work )

        Read the article and discuss the implications of managerial accounting for this company. Following are specific questions related to the case that should be addressed:

        1. Summarize the case in approximately one page (not more than 2). What are the underlying issues, problems or opportunities?

        2. a. Tasty Flan’s unit variable costs for 2007 using the Joe’s estimate of sales volume.

        b. The number of units that Joe Jimenez would need to sell in order to achieve his objectives.

        c. What are the dollar sales required to achieve this objective.

        d. Prepare a contribution margin income statement for 2009.

        3. Based upon the findings in question #2, should Joe purchase the business from Ronald? Support your position with a well reasoned argument. What other factors might Joe consider as part of the decision making process?

        4. What are the ethical issues that are found in this case? Using the IMA’s Statement of Ethical Professional Practice identify and discuss the standards that may be applicable to this case. Explain what should be done and the consequences of the recommended actions.

        Format your paper consistent with APA formatting, include page numbering, running header, in text citations as appropriate, use section headers within the text to separate your discussion topics.

        accounting problem need help 426356

        Recent financial statements for Madison Company follow:

        Madison Company
        Balance Sheet
        June 30
        Assets
        Current assets:
        Cash $ 24,000
        Accounts receivable, net 260,000
        Merchandise inventory 380,000
        Prepaid expenses 8,000



        Total current assets 672,000
        Plant and equipment, net 820,000



        Total assets $ 1,492,000






        Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
        Liabilities:
        Current liabilities $ 270,000
        Bonds payable, 8% 360,000



        Total liabilities 630,000
        Stockholders’ equity:
        Common stock, $5 par value $ 150,000
        Retained earnings 712,000



        Total stockholders’ equity 862,000



        Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 1,492,000







        Madison Company
        Income Statement
        For the Year Ended June 30
        Sales $ 2,290,000
        Cost of goods sold 1,170,000



        Gross margin 1,120,000
        Selling and administrative expenses 580,000



        Net operating income 540,000
        Interest expense 28,800



        Net income before taxes 511,200
        Income taxes 153,360



        Net income $ 357,840







        Account balances at the beginning of the company’s fiscal year were: accounts receivable, $190,000; and inventory, $280,000. All sales were on account.

        Assume that Madison Company paid dividends of $3.35 per share during the year. Also assume that the company’s common stock had a market price of $73.00 per share on June 30 and that there was no change in the number of outstanding shares of common stock during the fiscal year.

        Required:
        Compute the following:

        1.

        Earnings per share. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Earnings per share $

        2.

        Dividend payout ratio. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to 1 decimal place.Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

        Dividend payout ratio %

        3. Dividend yield ratio. (Round your answer to 1 decimal place.Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

        Dividend yield ratio %

        4.

        Price earnings ratio. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to 1 decimal place.)

        Price earnings ratio

        accounting serial problem 426387

        1. Record and post the necessary closing entries for Business Solutions.

        2. Prepare a post closing trial balance as of December 31, 2011.

        After the success of the company’s first two months, Santana Rey continues to operate Business Solutions. The November 30, 2011, unadjusted trial balance of Business Solutions (reflecting its transactions for October and November of 2011) follows.

        101 Cash 38,264

        106 Accounts receivable 12,618

        126 Computer supplies 2,545

        128 Prepaid insurance 2,220

        131 Prepaid rent 3,300

        163 Office equipment 8,000

        164 Accumulated depreciation”Office equipment

        167 Computer equipment 20,000

        168 Accumulated depreciation”Computer equipment

        201 Accounts payable

        210 Wages payable

        236 Unearned computer services revenue

        301 S. Rey, Capital 73,000

        302 S. Rey, Withdrawals 5,600

        403 Computer services revenue 25,659

        612 Depreciation expense”Office equipment

        613 Depreciation expense”Computer equipment

        623 Wages expense 2,625

        637 Insurance expense

        640 Rent expense

        652 Computer supplies expense

        655 Advertising expense 1,728

        676 Mileage expense 704

        677 Miscellaneous expenses 250

        684 Repairs expense”Computer 805

        Totals $98,659 $98,659

        Business Solutions had the following transactions and events in December 2011.

        Dec. 2 Paid $1,025 cash to Hillside Mall for Business Solutions’ share of mall advertising costs.

        3 Paid $500 cash for minor repairs to the company’s computer.

        4 Received $3,950 cash from Alex’s Engineering Co. for the receivable from November.

        10 Paid cash to Lyn Addie for six days of work at the rate of $125 per day.

        14 Notified by Alex’s Engineering Co. that Business Solutions’ bid of $7,000 on a proposed project has been accepted. Alex’s paid a $1,500 cash advance to Business Solutions.

        15 Purchased $1,100 of computer supplies on credit from Harris Office Products.

        16 Sent a reminder to Gomez Co. to pay the fee for services recorded on November 8.

        20 Completed a project for Liu Corporation and received $5,625 cash.

        22’26 Took the week off for the holidays.

        28 Received $3,000 cash from Gomez Co. on its receivable.

        29 Reimbursed S. Rey for business automobile mileage (600 miles at $0.32 per mile).

        31 S. Rey withdrew $1,500 cash from the company for personal use.

        The following additional facts are collected for use in making adjusting entries prior to preparing financial statements for the company’s first three months:

        a. The December 31 inventory count of computer supplies shows $580 still available.

        b. Three months have expired since the 12 month insurance premium was paid in advance.

        c. As of December 31, Lyn Addie has not been paid for four days of work at $125 per day.

        d. The company’s computer is expected to have a four year life with no salvage value.

        e. The office equipment is expected to have a five year life with no salvage value.

        f. Three of the four months’ prepaid rent has expired.

        intermediate accounting 426404

        Recording the journal entries for the fiscal year 2012 (Jan 1 Dec 31) use the journal entry number for the journal entry reference. (please see attachment) Balance Sheet as of December 31st Assets 2011 2010 Cash $785,000 $675,000 Short term investments in cash equivalents $75,000 $15,000 Accounts Rec. $455,000 $525,000 Allowance for Bad Debt $(25,000) $(105,000) Inventory$975,000 $775,000 Current Assets$2,265,000 $1,885,000 Equipment $5,000,000 $5,000,000 Accum.Deprectation $(2,000,000) $(1,500,000) LT Notes Receivable $285,000 $ Land $1,450,000 $1,450,000 Non Current Assets $4,735,000 $4,950,000 Total Assets $7,000,000 $6,835,000 Liabilities Accounts Payable $450,000 $570,000 Wages Payable $150,000 $185,000 Dividends Payable $155,000 $135,000 Current Liabilities $755,000$890,000 LT Notes Payable$1,250,000 $1,250,000 Total Liabilities $2,005,000$2,140,000 Stockholders Equity Contributed Capital $3,000,000 $3,000,000 Retained Earnings $1,995,000 $1,695,000 Total Liabilities and Equity $7,000,000 $6,835,000 Prior year’s income statement account balances 2011 2010 Sales, net $2,435,000 $2,500,000 COGS $850,000 $780,000 Wages Expense $565,000 $785,000 Interest Income $52,000 $56,000 Interest Expense $56,250 $56,250 Bad Debt Expense$60,750 $45,000 Depreciation Expense$500,000 $500,000 2012 information (the following events occurred during 2012) 1. The company sells ‘/2 of its land for $2,000,000. 2. The company collected $425,000 from customers related to last year’s credit sales. 3. The company paid the outstanding accounts payable balance. 4. The company purchased additional inventory at a cost of $1,000,000 with terms 2/10, n/30. Subsequently, the company paid half within the discount period and the remainder was outstanding as the end of the year (12/31/2012). The company accounts for discounts using the gross method. 5. Customers purchased your products throughout the year. Total sales for the year were $2,950,000. This cost of this inventory, was $1,500,000 and you use a perpetual inventory system. i. Customers paid you 45% in cash and the remainder was on account. ii. The credit sales were sold with term 2/10/, n/30 and payment was received within the discount period for 50 percent of these credit sales. The remainder was outstanding as of the end of the year. The company accounts for discounts using the gross method. 6. Wage expenses for the year, thru Dec. 15th were $550,000. This amount was paid in full as was the outstanding Wages Payable balance from the beginning of the year. 7. Wages earned between Dec. l5t and Dec 31st were $75,000. The company wifi pay this amount on Jan 7t,h ,2013. 8. A customer that previously bought your product on account has filed for bankruptcy. He owed you $10,000. You expect to collect $0. 9. To calculate depreciation expense for the year, assume that the equipment was purchased 5 years ago (i.e., this is the fifth year that your company has used the equipment). Your company uses straight line depreciation. Calculate and record Depreciation Expense. (hint: you can figure out the amount even without the salvage value). 10. The company purchased a new manufacturing plant (property) for $650,000 cash. Management estimates the salvage value to be $20,000 and that the plant will have a useful life of 10 years. During acquisition and disposition years the company takes 1/2 year’s depreciation. 11. Outstanding dividends payable from the beginning of the year were paid with cash. 12. A customer pays you $1,250,000 for work that you will start in Jan ’13. 13. The long term Notes Receivable of $285,000 pays 8 percent interest annually on 12/31. 14. You declare dividends of$100,000 to be paid next year. 15. You pay the interest owed for the long term note payable (hint: you can figure out the amount). 16. On April 1, 2012, you contract with Built In a Hurry, Inc. to have new headquarters constructed (a building for your own use, not for resale). Construction begins on May 1, 2012 and it is estimated that the project would be completed on April 1, 2013. The building will be constructed on land you already own. The estimated cost of construction of the new building is $4,500,000 and Built In A Hurry, Inc. requires payments on the following dates: Date Payment Amount May 1, 2012 450,000 August 1, 2012 800,000 November 1, 2012 1,500,000 Ajjril 1, 2013 1,750,000 In order to finance the project, on April 1, 2012, you sign a 2 year construction loan for $2,000,000 at 12% interest paid annu3lly on April 1S The loan is issued at par (no discount or premium). (hint: this is an interest capitalization problem). 17.During 2012, you made $100,000 of installment sales, which are appropriately accounted for using the installment sales method. The cost of the installment sales was $75,000. During 2012, you collected $20,000 related to these installment sales (this is in addition to amount collected from customers indicated in items 2 and 4 from above). 18.Your company signs a 3 year, $4,000,000 contract with a customer to build a supper widget! The CFO of the company estimates that the total costs of building the widget will be $3,200,000 and determines that the percentage of completion method is appropriate for this transaction. Details of the contract for 2012 are provided below. 2012 Costs incurred during the year $800,000 Customer Billings during the year $750,000 Payments from custome $500,000 Estimited costs to complete $2,400,000 19.At the end of the year, the executive team is concerned that the plant purchased early in the year for $650,000 might be impaired. At the time the plant was purchased management thought that the products produced in the plant would be in high demand. Subsequently it was learned that the products themselves cause bizarre mood swings and result in uncontrollable laughter, which has severely decreased the demand for the products. The executive team now estimates that total cash flows to be generated by selling the products manufactured in the plant(not discounted to present value) are $350,000 and the fair value of the plant is $200,000. 20An Aging of schedule for A/R prepared at the end of 2012 indicates that management expects that $35,000 of outstanding A/R will ultimately not be collected.

        cvp what if analysis 426410

        Red Rock, Inc. mines and distributes various types of rocks. Most of the company’s rock is sold to contractors who use the product in highway construction projects. Aracely Hudson, company president, believes that the company needs to advertise to increase sales. She has proposed a plan to the other managers that Red Rock, Inc. spend $92,000 on a targeted advertising campaign. The company currently sells 26,000 tons of aggregate for total revenue of $5,420,000. Other data related to the company’s production and operational costs follow:

        Direct labor $1,460,000
        Variable production overhead 230,000
        Fixed production overhead 380,000
        Selling and administrative expenses:
        Variable 53,000
        Fixed 327,000

        Required:

        A. Compute the break even point in units (i.e., tons) for Red Rock, Inc. If required, round interim calculations to 2 decimal places, use your rounded number in subsequent calculations, and round your answer to nearest whole number.

        ______ tons

        B. Compute the contribution margin ratio for Red Rock, Inc. Round your answer to two decimal places. Ensure that answer is entered in decimals and not in percentages.

        ______

        C. If Aracely decides to spend $100,000 on advertising and the company expects the advertising to increase sales by $200,000, should the company increase the advertising?

        If the company increases the advertising, the contribution margin will (increase / decrease) by $______ and net income will (increase / decrease) by $_______.

        accounting hw 426437

        Renfree Mines, Inc., owns the mining rights to a large tract of land in a mountainous area. The tract contains a mineral deposit that the company believes might be commercially attractive to mine and sell. An engineering and cost analysis has been made, and it is expected that the following cash flows would be associated with opening and operating a mine in the area:

        Cost of equipment required $ 900,000
        Annual net cash receipts $ 355,000*
        Working capital required $ 250,000
        Cost of road repairs in six years $ 71,000
        Salvage value of equipment in eight years $ 120,000

        *Receipts from sales of ore, less out of pocket costs for salaries, utilities, insurance, and so forth.

        The mineral deposit would be exhausted after eight years of mining. At that point, the working capital would be released for reinvestment elsewhere. The company’s required rate of return is 19%. (Ignore income taxes.)

        Click here to view Exhibit 11B 1 andExhibit 11B 2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.

        Required:
        a.

        Determine the net present value of the proposed mining project. (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, other intermediate calculations and final answer to the nearest whole dollar.)

        Net present value $

        b. Should the project be accepted?
        No
        Yes

        population proportion hypothesis testing i need a detail solution please 426494

        The results of an annual Satisfaction Survey of policyholders who have had a claim with State Farm Insurance Company revealed a 80% satisfaction rate for claim service.
        To check the accuracy of this claim, a random sample of State Farm claimants was asked to rate whether they were satisfied with the quality of the service.
        (data worksheet: 1 = Satisfied and 2 = Unsatisfied)
        Can we infer that the satisfaction rate is greater than 80%?
        (Use a significance level of 0.05)

        chapter 26 managerial accounting capital investment proposal 426587

        Roberts III Corporation is considering an investment in special purpose equipment to enable the company to obtain a four year government contract for the manufacture of a special item. The equipment costs $206,000 and would have no salvage value when the contract expires at the end of the four years. Estimated annual operating results of the project are as follows:

        Revenue from contract sales $ 315,000
        Expenses other than depreciation $ 212,000
        Depreciation (straight line basis) 70,000 (282,000 )





        Increase in net income from contract work $ 33,000







        All revenue and all expenses other than depreciation will be received or paid in cash in the same period as recognized for accounting purposes.

        a.

        Compute the payback period for Bowman’s proposal to undertake the contract work:

        Payback period years

        b.

        Compute the return on average investment for Bowman’s proposal to undertake the contract work:(Round your answer to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

        Return on average investment %
        c.

        Compute the net present value of the proposal to undertake contract work, discounted at an annual rate of 12 percent. (Refer to annuity table in Exhibit 26 4.) (Round your “PV factor” to 3 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Net present value $

        depreciation expense 426602

        Robillard Inc. acquired the following assets in January of 2009.

        Equipment, estimated service life, 5 years; salvage value, $13,200 $479,700
        Building, estimated service life, 30 years; no salvage value $676,500

        The equipment has been depreciated using the sum of the years’ digits method for the first 3 years for financial reporting purposes. In 2012, the company decided to change the method of computing depreciation to the straight line method for the equipment, but no change was made in the estimated service life or salvage value. It was also decided to change the total estimated service life of the building from 30 years to 40 years, with no change in the estimated salvage value. The building is depreciated on the straight line method.

        (a) Prepare the journal entry to record depreciation expense for the equipment in 2012.

        (b) Prepare the journal entry to record depreciation expense for the building in 2012.

        (a) Depreciation Expense ???

        Accumulated Depreciation Equipment ???

        (b) Depreciation Expense ???

        Accumulated Depreciation Buildings ???

        If you could show the work for this problem, that would be great!!

        dan mckinley a long time friend has come to you ca seeking some advice 426626

        Dan McKinley, a long time friend, has come to you, CA, seeking some advice. The following conversation takes place on Wednesday morning:

        Dan: “I’m thinking of retiring. In fact, my wife, Pam, and I are looking for a small business that we can manage and from which we can earn $50,000 per year to live comfortably. But we don’t have much experience with this type of thing, and we are hoping you can help us out.”

        CA: “I’ll try, Dan. Is there anything specific that I can help you with?”

        Dan: “Yes, there is. We have been approached by Steve Doty, who wants to sell his business and was wondering if we were interested. It looks like a good little business for my wife and me and something that we could earn a living from until we retire for good in about ten years’ time. We just want the business to generate enough money so that we can live comfortably and still maintain the retirement nest egg that we have built up in the past. Steve has prepared an information package for us regarding the history of the business and its potential in the future (Exhibit I). Can you please let us know if you think it is a good business and, if so, give us your opinion on whether we should buy it?”

        CA: “Sure, Dan. How soon do you need an answer?”

        Dan: “Steve wants an oral commitment and a small deposit by this Friday. I know that’s not a lot of time, but I don’t need anything fancy—just a report letting us know what you think. After that point he says that we could review his records and contracts in more detail and have a closer look at the business and ther finalize the terms of the deal.”

        CA: “No problem, Dan. We’ll see you on Friday morning.”

        Required:

        Prepare the report for Dan McKinley. 😉

        product pricing 426639

        RooPhone Inc. uses the product cost concept of applying the cost plus approach to product pricing. The costs of producing and selling 5,000 units of cellular phones are as follows: (6 points)<?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” />

        Variable costs Fixed Costs:

        Direct materials $625,000 Factory overhead $215,000

        Direct labor 225,000 Selling & Admin. expenses 75,000

        Factory Overhead 200,000

        Selling & admin. Exp. 150,000

        $1,200,000

        RooPhone desires a profit equal to a 25% rate of return on invested assets of $400,000.

        a.) Determine the amount of desired profit.

        b.) Determine the product cost per unit for the production of 5,000 phones.

        c.) Determine the total cost markup percentage (rounded to 2 decimal places) using the product cost concept.

        d.) Determine the selling price of each cellular phone. Round to nearest dollar.

        minimum annual cash flows 426650

        Rosenholm Corporation uses a discount rate of 16% in its capital budgeting. Partial analysis of an investment in automated equipment with a useful life of 5 years has thus far yielded a net present value of ?$327,300. This analysis did not include any estimates of the intangible benefits of automating this process nor did it include any estimate of the salvage value of the equipment. (Ignore income taxes.)

        Click here to view Exhibit 13B 1 http://lectures.mhhe.com/connect/0078111005/Exhibit/Exhibit 13B 1.jpg and or

        Exhibit 13B 2 See imaged attached to help determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.

        Required:
        a.

        Ignoring any salvage value, how large would the additional cash flow per year from the intangible benefits have to be to make the investment in the automated equipment financially attractive? (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Minimum annual cash flows $

        b.

        Ignoring any cash flows from intangible benefits, how large would the salvage value of the automated equipment have to be to make the investment in the automated equipment financially attractive? (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Chegg responders/helpers If you respond to this question, please show your work on how you got the answer.

        media/488/488ad540 ed03 4cac bfdd 9b

        Thanks,

        cost accounting 426676

        Royal Company manufactures 26,000 units of part R 3 each year for use on its production line. At this level of activity, the cost per unit for part R 3 is: Direct material $4.90 ; Direct Labor $7 ; Varialble Manufacturing overhead $ 3.00 ; Fixed Manufacturing overhead $15 ; total cost per part $ 29.90.

        An outside supplier has offered to sell 26,000 units of part R 3 each year to Royal Company for $49.50 per part. If Royal Company accepts this offer, the facilities now being used to manufacture part R 3 could be rented to another company at an annual rental of $780,600. However, Royal Company has determined that $10 of the fixed manufacturing overhead being applied to part R 3 would continue even if part R 3 were purchased from the outside supplier.

        Total Relevant cost of making 26000 units = $1,298,000

        Total relevant cost of buying the product (26000 units) = $1,287,000

        What is the oppoutunity cost of making instead of buying?

        How much would the profit increase by if the outside suppliers offer is accepted ?

        pension plan problem need help asap 425751

        “Preparing a pension work sheet.

        The accountant for Marlin Corporation has developed the following information for the company’s

        defined benefit pension plan for 2013:

        Service cost $500,000

        Actual return on plan assets 240,000

        Annual contribution to the plan 900,000

        Amortization of prior service cost 125,000

        Benefits paid to retirees 60,000

        Settlement rate 10%

        Expected rate of return on plan assets 8%

        The accumulated benefit obligation at December 31, 2013, amounted to $3,250,000.

        Instructions

        (a) Using the above information for Marlin Corporation, complete the pension work sheet for

        2013. Indicate (credit) entries by parentheses. Calculated amounts should be supported.

        (b) Prepare the journal entry to reflect the accounting for the company’s pension plan for the year ended 12.31.2013.

        accounting 425767

        Presented below is data relative to the 12/31/12 inventory of Lance Company:

        Number Units Original Cost Total Current

        Item In Inventory Per Unit Original Cost Replacement Cost

        A 5,000 $1.09 $5,450 $1.08

        B 5,000 1.30 6,500 1.15

        C 5,000 1.50 7,500 1.05

        D 5,000 1.60 8,000 1.65

        E 5,000 1.80 9,000 1.70

        Total 25,000 $36,450

        Appropriate

        Upper Lower Inventory

        Limit Limit Designated Valuation

        Item (“Ceiling”) (“Floor”) Market (Totals)

        A

        B

        C

        D

        E

        Total

        Additional Data:

        Selling price is $2.00/unit for all items. Disposal costs amount to 10% of selling price and a “normal” profit is 35% of selling price.

        Instructions

        Complete the last four columns above.

        predetermined overhead rates overhead variances unit costs 425808

        Primera Company produces two products and uses a predetermined overhead rate to apply

        overhead. Primera currently applies overhead using a plantwide rate based on direct labor

        hours. Consideration is being given to the use of departmental overhead rates where overhead

        would be applied on the basis of direct labor hours in Department 1 and on the basis of machine

        hours in Department 2. At the beginning of the year, the following estimates are provided:

        Department 1 Department 2

        Direct labor hours 640,000 128,000

        Machine hours 16,000 192,000

        Overhead cost $384,000 $1,152,000

        Actual results reported by department and product during the year are as follows:

        Department 1 Department 2

        Direct labor hours 627,200 134,400

        Machine hours 17,600 204,800

        Overhead cost $400,000 $1,232,000

        Product 1 Product 2

        Direct labor hours:

        Department 1 480,000 147,200

        Department 2 96,000 38,400

        Machine hours:

        Department 1 8,000 9,600

        Department 2 24,800 180,000

        Required:

        1. Compute the plantwide predetermined overhead rate and calculate the overhead assigned to

        each product.

        2. Calculate the predetermined departmental overhead rates and calculate the overhead

        assigned to each product.

        3. Using departmental rates, compute the applied overhead for the year. What is the under or

        overapplied overhead for thefirm?

        4. Prepare the journal entry that disposes of the overhead variance calculated in Requirement

        3, assuming it is not material in amount. What additional information would you need if

        the variance is material to make the appropriate journal entry?

        business improvement strategies bbmm601 imagecaf 425825

        Staying Afloat

        With his company, ImageCafé, struggling amidst financial uncertainty, Clarence

        Wooten, Jr. faced some difficult decisions. With a current burn rate1 of nearly $50,000

        per month, the bridge loans2 and Angel investments3 of $710,000 would not be not

        enough capital to carry the company to break even. While struggling to close a $3

        million financing round, a Virginia based Internet services company, Network Solutions

        Inc., approached Wooten about selling ImageCafé. Time seemed to be running out and

        closing the $3 million on acceptable terms was proving to be more difficult than Wooten

        had ever anticipated.

        Should he sell ImageCafé to Network Solutions, or risk losing it all for the potential of a

        greater gain, if/when the financing materialized? And if he did decide to sell, what was

        the right price?

        Time was clearly not on his side.

        Document Preview:

        BUSINESS IMPROVEMENT STRATEGIES (BBMM601) Practical Exercise DUE WEEK 4.1 Learning Outcome Assessed: a e Weighting: 30% Written Report Case Study Analysis (2000 words) INDIVIDUAL ASSIGNMENT ImageCafé Arthur M. Blank Center for Entrepreneurship Babson Park, MA Phone: 781 239 4420 02457 0310 Fax: 781 239 4178 Printed 8/16/04 URL: http://www.babson.edu/entrep This case is written by Kathryn F. Spinelli under the direction of Professor Stephen Spinelli, Jr. © Copyright Babson College, 2004. Funding provided by the HBCU Consortium. All rights reserved. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Staying Afloat With his company, ImageCafé, struggling amidst financial uncertainty, Clarence Wooten, Jr. faced some difficult decisions. With a current burn rate1 of nearly $50,000 per month, the bridge loans2 and Angel investments3 of $710,000 would not be not enough capital to carry the company to break even. While struggling to close a $3 million financing round, a Virginia based Internet services company, Network Solutions Inc., approached Wooten about selling ImageCafé. Time seemed to be running out and closing the $3 million on acceptable terms was proving to be more difficult than Wooten had ever anticipated. Should he sell ImageCafé to Network Solutions, or risk losing it all for the potential of a greater gain, if/when the financing materialized? And if he did decide to sell, what was the right price? Time was clearly not on his side. Clarence Wooten Jr. Clarence Wooten Jr. had a typical childhood dream: to get rich. His early childhood, however, was less typical. At an early age, Wooten was fascinated by television based video games; for Christmas one year, he convinced his parents to buy him an Atari game system. Wooten soon discovered that the game cartridges were too expensive for him to…

        Attachments:

        accounting 425839

        Problem 15 1

        Comparative information taken from the Koda Company financial statements is shown below:

        2012 2011

        (a) Notes Receivable $ 10,000 0

        (b) Accounts Receivable 175,000 140,000

        (c) Retained Earnings 30,000 (40,000)

        (d) Sales 840,000 750,000

        (e) Operating Expenses 160,000 200,000

        (f) 28,000 20,000

        Required:

        Using horizontal analysis, show the percentage change from 2011 to 2012 with 2011 as the base year. If an item is impossible to compute, enter a “0” in the percentage box and select “Not possible to compute” in the narrative box.

        Select: Increase, Decrease, or Not possible to compute

        a. % SelectIncreaseDecreaseNot possible to computeItem 2
        b. % SelectIncreaseDecreaseNot possible to computeItem 4
        c. % SelectIncreaseDecreaseNot possible to computeItem 6
        d. % SelectIncreaseDecreaseNot possible to computeItem 8
        e. % SelectIncreaseDecreaseNot possible to computeItem 10
        f. % SelectIncreaseDecreaseNot possible to compute

        accounting 425844

        Problem 17 13

        The following is a list of costs incurred by several business organizations. Classify each of the costs below as product costs or period costs. For those costs classified as product costs, indicate whether the product cost is a direct materials cost, direct labor cost, or factory overhead cost. For those costs classified as period costs, indicate whether the period cost is a selling expense or an administrative expense.

        a. Telephone cable for a telephone company.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 1

        b. Subscription to a health club for executives.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 2

        c. Salary of the Director of Internal Auditing.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 3

        d. Long distance telephone bill for calls made by salespersons.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 4

        e. Carrying cases for a manufacturer of video camcorders.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 5

        f. Cotton for a textile manufacturer of blue jeans.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 6

        g. Bandages for the emergency room of a hospital.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 7

        h. Cost of company holiday party.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 8

        i. Electricity used to operate factory machinery.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 9

        j. State unemployment compensation taxes for factory workers.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 10

        k. Gloves for factory machine operators.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 11

        l. Fees paid lawn service for office grounds.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 12

        m. Salary of secretary to vice president of finance.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 13

        n. Salary of secretary to vice president of marketing.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 14

        o. Production supervisor’s salary.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 15

        p. Engine oil for manufacturer and distributor of motorcycles.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 16

        q. Oil lubricants for factory plant and equipment.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 17

        r. Cost of a radio commercial.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 18

        s. Depreciation on factory equipment.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 19

        t. Wages of check out clerk in company owned retail outlet.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 20

        u. Maintenance and repair costs for factory equipment.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 21

        v. Depreciation on office equipment.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 22

        w. Bonuses paid to salespersons.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 23

        x. Insurance on factory building.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 24

        y. Training for accounting personnel on use of microcomputer.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 25

        z. Steel for a construction contractor.
        SelectPeriod Cost Administrative ExpensePeriod Cost Selling ExpenseProduct Cost Direct Labor CostProduct Cost Direct Materials CostProduct Cost Factory Overhead CostItem 26

        problem 5 5 percentage of completion method lo5 5 425872

        Problem 5 5 Percentage of completion method [LO5 5]

        In 2013, the Westgate Construction Company entered into a contract to construct a road for Santa Clara County for $10,000,000. The road was completed in 2015. Information related to the contract is as follows:

        2013 2014 2015
        Cost incurred during the year $ 1,776,000 $ 3,330,000 $ 2,523,400
        Estimated costs to complete as of year end 5,624,000 2,294,000 0
        Billings during the year 1,400,000 3,706,000 4,894,000
        Cash collections during the year 1,260,000 3,000,000 5,740,000

        Westgate uses the percentage of completion method of accounting for long term construction contracts.

        Required:

        1.

        Calculate the amount of gross profit (loss) to be recognized in each of the three years. (Do not round intermediate calculations.)

        2013 2014 2015

        Gross profit (loss)

        2.1 In the journal below, complete the necessary journal entries for the year 2013 (credit various accounts for construction costs incurred). (If no entry is required for a particular transaction, select “No journal entry required” in the first account field. Do not round intermediate calculations.)

        • Record construction costs.
        • Record progress billings.
        • Record cash collections.
        • Record gross profit.

        2.2 In the journal below, complete the necessary journal entries for the year 2014 (credit various accounts for construction costs incurred). (If no entry is required for a particular transaction, select “No journal entry required” in the first account field. Do not round intermediate calculations.)

        • Record construction costs.
        • Record progress billings.
        • Record cash collections.
        • Record gross profit.

        2.3

        In the journal below, complete the necessary journal entries for the year 2015 (credit various accounts for construction costs incurred). (If no entry is required for a particular transaction, select “No journal entry required” in the first account field. Do not round intermediate calculations.)

        • Record construction costs.
        • Record progress billings.
        • Record cash collections.
        • Record gross profit.

        3. Complete the information required below to prepare a partial balance sheet for 2013 and 2014 showing any items related to the contract. (Do not round intermediate calculations.)

        2013 2014

        Current assets:

        4. Calculate the amount of gross profit (loss) to be recognized in each of the three years, assuming the following costs incurred and costs to complete information. (Do not round intermediate calculations.)

        2013 2014 2015
        Costs incurred during the year $ 2,560,000 $ 3,880,000 $ 3,260,000
        Estimated costs to complete as of year end 5,760,000 3,260,000 0

        5.

        Calculate the amount of gross profit (loss) to be recognized in each of the three years, assuming the following costs incurred and costs to complete information. (Do not round intermediate calculations.)

        2013 2014 2015
        Costs incurred during the year $ 2,560,000 $ 3,880,000 $ 4,140,000
        Estimated costs to complete as of year end 5,760,000 4,260,000 0

        8 3 425882

        (Problem 8 3) Straight forward net present value and payback computations

        The Calgary Eskimos play in the Canadian Hockey League. Although the Eskimos will soon be moving to a modern arena, management is studying the possibility of expanding the team’s present facility to accommodate increased crowds. A $2.4 million expansion is planned that has a $200,000 residual value and will be depreciated by the straight line method over four seasons. Information about the expansion follows:

        Number of seats

        Occupancy rate

        Ticket price

        Class 1 seats

        2,500

        80%

        $6

        Class 2 seats

        2,000

        60

        4

        The team will play 50 home games each season. Total added operating costs per game (ushers, cleanup, and depreciation) are expected to average $11,800. All such costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays.

        Instructions

        • By using the net present value method and a 16% desired rate of return, determine whether the expansion should be undertaken.
        • In addition to the cash flows presented here, what other cash flows might change if the Eskimos add on to the arena?

        linear programming 425893

        Problem 8 6. Eddie Kelly is running for reelection as mayor of a small town in Alabama. Jessica Martinez, Kelly’s campaign manager during this election, is planning the marketing campaign, and there is some stiff competition. Martinez has selected four ways to advertise: television ads, radio ads, billboards, and newspaper ads. The costs of these, the audience reached by each type of ad, and the maximum number of each is shown in the following table:
        Type of Ad Cost per ad Audience Reached / Ad Maximum number
        TV $800 30,000 10
        Radio $400 22,000 10
        Billboards $500 24,000 10
        Newspapers $100 8,000 10

        In addition, Martinez has decided that there should be at least six ads on TV or radio or some combination of those two. The amount spent on billboards and newspapers together must not exceed the amount spent on TV ads. While fundraising is still continuing, the monthly budget for advertising has been set at $15,000. How many ads of each type should be placed to maximize the total number of people reached?
        Use Excel’s Solver to complete the problems.

        chapter 9 pr 9 2a compare three depreciation methods 425899

        Problem 9 2A
        Compare Three Depreciation Methods

        Breyer Company purchased packaging equipment on January 3, 2010, for $101,250. The equipment was expected to have a useful life of three years, or 25,000 operating hours, and aresidual value of $7,500. The equipment was used for 9,500 hours during 2010, 8,400 hours in 2011, and 7,100 hours in 2012.

        Instructions:

        1. Determine the amount of depreciation expense for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2011, and 2012, by theStraight Line Method, theUnits of Production Method, and theDouble Declining Balance Method. Also determine the total depreciation expense for the three years by each method.

        Depreciation Expense
        Year Straight Line Method Units of Production Method Double Declining Balance Method
        2010 $ $ $
        2011 $ $ $
        2012 $ $ $
        Total $ $ $

        2. What method yields the highest depreciation expense for 2010?

        The input in the box below will not be graded, but may be reviewed and considered by your instructor.

        blank

        3. What method yields the most depreciation over the three’year life of the equipment?

        The input in the box below will not be graded, but may be reviewed and considered by your instructor.

        managerial accounting p2 1 425921

        Problem P2 1 Cost of Goods Manufactured, Cost of Goods Sold, and Income
        The following information is available for Satterfield’s Custom Glass for the fiscal year ending December 31, 2011:
        Beginning balance in Work In Process $200,000
        Ending balance in Work In Process 300,000
        Beginning balance in Finished Goods 500,000
        Ending balance in Finished Goods 400,000
        Direct material cost 2,000,000
        Direct labor cost 2,400,000
        Manufacturing overhead 1,700,000
        Selling expense 250,000
        General and administrative expenses 450,000
        Sales 8,000,000
        Required:
        Part a. Prepare a schedule of costs of goods manufactured.
        Satterfield’s Custom Glass
        Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured
        For the Year Ended December 31, 2011
        Beginning balance in work in process $200,000
        Add current manufacturing costs:
        Direct Material $2,000,000
        Direct Labor 2,400,000
        Manufacturing overhead 1,700,000 Formula
        Selling expense 250,000
        General and administrative expenses 450,000
        Sales $8,000,000
        Part b. Prepare an income statement for fiscal 2011. Ignore income taxes.
        Satterfield’s Custom Glass
        Income Statement
        For the Year Ended December 31, 2011
        Sales $8,000,000
        Less cost of goods sold:
        Beginning balance in finished goods $500,000
        Manufacturing Overhead 1,700,000
        Ending balance in finished goods 400,000
        Amount Formula
        Title Formula
        Less nonmanufacturing expenses:
        Title Amount
        Title Amount Formula
        Title Formula

        managerial accounting p3 1 425931

        Problem P3 1 Comprehensive Problem, One Department
        Regal Polish manufactures a single product in one department and uses a process costing system. At the start of
        May, there were 10,000 units in process that were 100% complete with respect to direct
        materials and 60% complete with respect to conversion costs (labor and overhead). During the
        month, the company began production on 105,000 units and ending Work in Process Inventory
        consisted of 5,000 units that were 100% complete with respect to material and
        70% complete with respect to conversion costs.
        Cost Information: Beginning Work in Process Costs Added in May
        Direct material $4,000 $76,500
        Direct labor 200 8,880
        Manufacturing overhead 300 9,915
        Total: $4,500 $95,295
        Required:
        Part a. Calculate the cost per equivalent unit for each of the three cost items and in total.
        Text answer as desired.
        The denominators for the calculations of cost per equivalent are:
        Units
        Completed
        Equivalent Units
        in Ending WIP
        Total
        Material Number Formula Formula
        Labor Number Formula Formula
        Overhead Number Formula Formula
        Beginning WIP Cost Added Total Denominator Cost per EU
        Material Amount Amount Formula Number Formula
        Labor Amount Amount Formula Number Formula
        Overhead Amount Amount Formula Number Formula
        Total Formula Formula Formula Formula
        Part b. Calculate the cost of units completed in May and the cost of ending Work in Process.
        Enter formula as desired.
        Cost of items in ending work in process:
        Material Amount
        Labor Amount
        Overhead Amount
        Total Formula
        Part c. Reconcile the sum of the two costs in part b to the sum of beginning Work in Process and costs added in May.
        Title Amount
        Title Amount
        Total Formula
        Title Amount
        Title Amount
        Total Formula

        managerial accounting p3 7 425935

        Problem P3 7 Production Cost Report, Missing Data
        Classic 50s Flooring produces linoleum flooring. Below is a partial production cost report for the Mixing Department. In the report, a unit is a gallon of linoleum cement (a mixture of linseed oil, pine resin, and wood flour).
        Production Cost Report
        Mixing Department
        June
        Quantity Reconciliation
        Units in beginning WIP 400
        Units started 2,100
        Units to account for 2,500
        Units completed 2,300
        Units in ending WIP ( 100% material, 70% conv. costs) a
        Units accounted for b
        Cost Per Equivalent Unit Calculation
        Cost Material Labor Overhead Total
        Beginning WIP $475 $1,200 $2,400 $4,075
        Cost incurred during June 4,125 11,610 23,830 39,565
        Total $4,600 $12,810 $26,230 $43,640
        Units
        Units completed 2,300 2,300 2,300
        Equivalent units, ending WIP c d e
        Total f g h
        Cost per equivalent unit i j k l
        Required:
        Fill in the missing data (items a through l).

        product cost concept of product pricing 425991

        Product Cost Concept of Product Pricing

        Mademoiselle Company produces women’s handbags. The cost of producing 1,240 handbags is as follows:

        Direct materials $14,800
        Direct labor 7,000
        Factory overhead 5,500
        Total manufacturing cost $27,300

        The selling and administrative expenses are $27,600. The management desires a profit equal to 17% of invested assets of $505,000.

        If required, round your answers to nearest whole number.

        a. Determine the amount of desired profit from the production and sale of 1,240 handbags.
        $

        b. Determine the product cost per unit for the production of 1,240 handbags.
        $

        c. Determine the product costmarkup percentage for handbags.
        %

        d. Determine the selling price of handbags. Round your answers to nearest whole value.

        Cost amount per unit: $
        Markup:
        Selling price: $

        Hide Feedback Partially Correct Check My Work Feedback a. Multiply the desired profit percentage by the desired amount (invested assets).

        b. Divide the total manufacturing costs by the number of units produced.

        c. Divide the desired profit plus the selling and administrative expenses by the total manufacturing cost.

        d. Add cost (b) and mark up [(c) x (b)].

        managerial accounting 425998

        Product X Product Y Product Z
        Selling price $ 80 $ 56 $ 70











        Variable expenses:
        Direct materials 24 15 9
        Labor and overhead 24 27 40











        Total variable expenses 48 42 49











        Contribution margin $ 32 $ 14 $ 21






















        Contribution margin ratio 40 25 30

        Demand for the company’s products is very strong, with far more orders each month than the company can produce with the available raw materials. The same material is used in each product. The material costs $3 per pound, with a maximum of 5,000 pounds available each month.

        Required:
        a.

        Compute contribution margin per pound of materials used.

        fixed and variable cost determinations 426012

        The projected cost of a lamp is calculated based upon the projected increases or decreases to
        current costs. The present costs to manufacture one lamp are:
        Lamp Kit: $16.0000000 per lamp
        Direct Labor: 2.0000000 per lamp (4 lamps/hr.)
        Variable Overhead: 2.0000000 per lamp
        Fixed Overhead: 10.0000000

        per lamp (based on normal capacity of 25,000 lamps)

        Cost per lamp: $30.0000000 per lamp
        Expected increases for 20×2
        When calculating projected increases round to TWO ($0.00) decimal places.
        1. Material Costs are expected to increase by 5.50% .
        2. Labor Costs are expected to increase by 2.50%.
        3. Variable Overhead is expected to increase by 6.50%.
        4. Fixed Overhead is expected to increase to $290,000.
        5. Fixed Administrative expenses are expected to increase to $56,000.
        6. Variable selling expenses (measured on a per lamp basis) are expected to increase
        by 4.50%.
        7. Fixed selling expenses are expected to be $37,000 in 20×2.
        8. Variable administrative expenses (measured a per lamp basis) are expected to
        increase by 5.00%.
        On the following schedule develop the following figures:
        1 20×2 Projected Variable Manufacturing Unit Cost of a lamp.
        2 20×2 Projected Variable Unit Cost per lamp.
        3 20×2 Projected Fixed Costs.

        accounting help 426151

        Question 1

        1. The calculation of free cash flow contains a deduction for Answer
          a. net cash flows from operating activities.
          b. interest expense.
          c. dividends.
          d. depreciation.

        Question 2

        1. Which of the following situations severely limits the use of industry norms as standards of comparison? Answer
          a. The existence of conglomerates
          b. A downward turn in the economy
          c. The fact that little information exists on industry norms
          d. The presentation of segmented information

        Question 3

        1. A company with a current ratio of 2.4 times will see that ratio decrease when the company Answer
          a. declares a 10 percent stock dividend on its common stock.
          b. converts a short term liability to a long term liability.
          c. borrows cash by issuing a short term note payable.
          d. pays a large current liability.

        Question 4

        1. One reason that a common size statement is a useful tool in financial performance evaluation is that it enables the user to Answer
          a. judge the relative potential of two companies of similar size in different industries.
          b. determine which companies in a single industry are of the same value.
          c. determine which companies in a single industry are of the same size.
          d. make better comparisons of two companies of different sizes in the same industry.

        1 points

        Question 5

        1. The following information pertains to Jasmin Corporation. Assume that all balance sheet amounts represent both average and ending figures.
          Jasmin Corporation
          Partial Balance Sheet
          December 31, 2009
          Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
          Current liabilities $ 60,000
          Long term liabilities 90,000
          Stockholders’ equity 150,000
          Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $300,000
          Jasmin Corporation
          Income Statement
          For the Year Ended December 31, 2009
          Net sales $80,000
          Cost of goods sold 45,000
          Gross margin $35,000
          Operating expenses 15,000
          Income before income taxes $20,000
          Income taxes expense 5,000
          Net income $15,000

          Jasmin Corporation had 6,000 shares of common stock issued and outstanding. The market price of Jasmin common stock on December 31, 2009, was $20. Jasmin paid dividends of $1.65 per share during 2009.What is the dividends yield of this corporation? Round your answer to two decimal places. Answer

          a. 9.90 percent
          b. 6.60 percent
          c. 4.95 percent
          d. 8.25 percent

        Question 6

        1. The equation for finding the breakeven point may be written as Answer
          a. S + VC + FC = 0.
          b. VC FC = S.
          c. S + FC = VC.
          d. S VC FC = 0.

        Question 7

        1. At the breakeven point, the contribution margin Answer
          a. minus total fixed costs equals a positive number.
          b. is at a minimum.
          c. equals fixed costs.
          d. is at a maximum.

        Question 8

        1. An insurance company pays its employees a commission of 6 percent on each sale. What is the proper classification of the cost of sales commissions? Answer
          a. Mixed cost
          b. Variable cost
          c. Fixed cost
          d. Constant cost

        Question 9

        1. The new Corina watch has an expected selling price per watch of $42, the projected variable cost per unit is $24, and estimated fixed costs per month are $24,120.The breakeven point in sales dollars is Answer
          a. $48,240.
          b. $32,160.
          c. $40,200.
          d. $56,280.

        Question 10

        1. Using the contribution margin approach, find the contribution margin ratio for Consumer Products if the selling price per unit is $12, the variable cost per unit is $3, and the fixed costs are $8,040. Answer
          a. 75%
          b. 100%
          c. 25%
          d. 50%

        accounting help 426165

        Question 1

        1. Repair bills for large machinery may include a flat fee for the visit to the company’s premises plus additional labor charges per hour of repair work and various costs of replacement parts needed. What type of cost is the repair? Answer
          a. Variable cost
          b. Selling cost
          c. Mixed cost
          d. Fixed cost

        1 points

        Question 2

        1. Using the contribution margin approach, find the breakeven point in units for Consumer Products if the selling price per unit is $12, the variable cost per unit is $6, and the fixed costs are $8,040. Answer
          a. 1,340
          b. 6,000
          c. 670
          d. 1,200

        1 points

        Question 3

        1. The equation that will provide the breakeven point in units (SP = selling price) is Answer
          a. VC per unit + FC = SP per unit A?´ BE units.
          b. SP per unit ‘ VC per unit = FC Af· BE units.
          c. BE units = FC Af· CM per unit.
          d. BE units = (SP VC) Af· FC per unit.

        1 points

        Question 4

        1. At production levels beyond the breakeven point, Answer
          a. profit is negative.
          b. variable costs are zero.
          c. fixed costs are not recovered.
          d. profit is positive.

        1 points

        Question 5

        1. Dilly LLC, wants to make a profit of $30,000. It has variable costs of $99 per unit and fixed costs of $20,000. How much must it charge per unit if 5,000 units are sold? Answer
          a. $69
          b. $99
          c. $109
          d. $84

        1 points

        Question 6

        1. The receivable turnover and inventory turnover ratios are used to analyze Answer
          a. leverage.
          b. profitability.
          c. liquidity.
          d. long term solvency.

        1 points

        Question 7

        1. During the year, Dempsey Corporation’s current ratio increased while its quick ratio decreased. Which of the following could help explain this situation? Answer
          a. An increase in accounts payable during the year
          b. A decrease in accounts receivable during the year
          c. An increase in inventory levels during the year
          d. The sale of short term investments during the year

        1 points

        Question 8

        1. Horizontal analysis of comparative financial statements includes the Answer
          a. calculation of the percentage of net sales for each item listed.
          b. development of common size statements.
          c. calculation of dollar amount changes and percentage changes from the previous to the current year.
          d. calculation of liquidity ratios.

        1 points

        Question 9

        1. The existence of diversified companies makes which of the following very difficult? Answer
          a. The preparation of interim financial statements
          b. The compilation of segmented information
          c. Comparison with industry norms
          d. Use of more than one depreciation or inventory method

        1 points

        Question 10

        1. Which of the following describes the return on assets ratio? Answer
          a. Net income plus income tax expense divided by average total assets
          b. Average total assets divided by net sales
          c. Net income divided by average total assets
          d. Average total assets divided by net income

        accounting 426177

        Question 16

        The direct write off method records Bad Debt Expense in the year the specific account receivable is determined to be uncollectible.

        Answer

        True
        False

        Question 17

        The depreciable cost of a building is the same as its acquisition cost.

        Answer

        True
        False

        Question 18

        What is the term applied to the excess of net revenue from sales over the cost of merchandise sold?

        Answer

        a.

        gross sales

        b.

        net income

        c.

        gross profit

        d.

        income from operations

        Question 19

        When using a perpetual inventory system, the journal entry to record the cost of merchandise sold is:

        Answer

        a.

        debit Cost of Merchandise Sold; credit Sales

        b.

        debit Cost of Merchandise Sold; credit Merchandise Inventory

        c.

        debit Merchandise Inventory; credit Cost of Merchandise Sold

        d.

        No journal entry is made to record the cost of merchandise sold.

        Question 20

        In preparing a bank reconciliation, the amount indicated by a credit memo for a note receivable collected by the bank is added to the balance per company’s records.

        Answer

        True
        False

        Question 21

        A credit to the cash account will increase the account.

        Answer True
        False

        Question 22

        Liabilities are debts owed by the business entity.

        Answer

        True
        False

        Question 23

        Revenues and expenses should be recorded in the same period to which they relate.

        Answer

        True
        False

        Question 24

        On December 31, Strike Company has decided to sell one of its batting cages. The initial cost of the equipment was $215,000 with an accumulated depreciation of $185,000. Depreciation has been taken up to the end of the year. The company found a company that is willing to buy the equipment for $55,000. What is the amount of the gain or loss on this transaction?

        Answer

        a.

        No gain or loss

        b.

        Gain of $25,000

        c.

        Gain of $55,000

        d.

        Cannot be determined

        Question 25

        When a company sells machinery at a price equal to its book value, this transaction would be recorded with an entry that would include the following:

        Answer

        a.

        debit Machinery; credit Cash and Accumulated Depreciation

        b.

        debit Cash and Depreciation Expense; credit Accumulated Depreciation

        c.

        debit Cash and Machinery; credit Accumulated Depreciation

        d.

        debit Cash and Accumulated Depreciation; credit Machinery

        Question 26

        Which of the following accounts will not be closed to Income Summary at the end of the fiscal year?

        Answer

        a.

        Fees Earned

        b.

        Unearned Rent

        c.

        Depreciation Expense

        d.

        Salaries Expense

        Question 27

        The interest on a 6%, 60 day note for $5,000 is $300.

        Answer True
        False

        Question 28

        In preparing a bank reconciliation, the amount of deposits in transit is deducted from the balance per bank statement.

        Answer

        True
        False

        Question 29

        A fixed asset with a cost of $30,000 and accumulated depreciation of $28,500 is sold for $3,500. What is the amount of the gain or loss on disposal of the fixed asset?

        Answer

        a.

        $3,500 gain

        b.

        $1,500 loss

        c.

        $2,000 gain

        d.

        $2,000 loss

        Question 30

        The Miracle Corporation issues 1,000, 10 year, 8%, $1,000 bonds dated January 1, 2011, at 96. The journal entry to record the issuance will show a

        Answer

        a.

        credit to Bonds Payable for $960,000.

        b.

        debit to Cash of $1,000,000.

        c.

        credit to Cash for $960,000.

        d.

        debit to Discount on Bonds Payable for $40,000.

        apus managerial accounting for hospitality industry 426183

        Question 1

        Chapter 8; Question 3 (page 310 of your text)
        Rubric: Table complete and correct worth 4 points, each question “a” through “i” worth 1/2 point each

        Read question 3 scenario from your text, chapter 8 page 310, then complete the shaded areas of the following table. After completing the table, answer the questions that follow:
        Thandi’s Hotel
        Darla’s Hotel
        250 rooms
        250 rooms
        Day
        Rooms Sold
        ADR
        Occ %
        RevPAR
        Rooms Sold
        ADR
        Occ %
        RevPARMonday 205 $117.21 82.00% 158 63.20% $62.64 Tuesday 230 135.45 92.00% 124.61 249 89.53 99.60% 89.17Wednesday 226 131.25 90.40% 118.65 230 91.14 83.85Thursday 228 132.22 120.58 248 92.15 99.20% 91.41Friday 195 78.00% 89.86 138 101.51 56.03Five Day Total 126.8 81.80% 76.62 a. What was Thandi’s RevPar on Monday? b. What was Darla’s ADR on Monday? c. What was Darla’s occupancy % on Wednesday? d. What was Thandi’s occupancy % on Thursday? e. What was Thandi’s ADR on Friday? f. What was Darla’s occupancy % on Friday? g. How many rooms did Thandi sell during the five days? h. What was Thandi’s occupancy% for the five days? i. What was Thandi’s five day RevPAR total? j. How many rooms did Darla sell during the five days? k. What was Darla’s ADR for the five day period?

        l. Did Thandi or Darla have a higher RevPAR during this five day period? What do you think was the reason for this difference?
        Question 2

        Chapter 9; Question 4 (page 349 of your text)
        Rubric: Each table and question worth 2.5 points each, 10 points total
        Read question 4 scenario from your text, chapter 9 page 349, then complete the shaded areas of the following table. After completing each table, answer the question(s) that follows: Given Information:

        Corporate Marketing Expense
        Position Salary Office and Travel Expense Total Costs
        Corporate Marketing Director $165,000 $75,000 $240,000
        Corporate Revenue Manager $110,000 $60,000 $170,000
        Total Cost $275,000 $135,000 $410,000
        Property # of Rooms in Property Annual Occupancy Net Income
        Denver 425 70.2% $1,085,875
        Dallas 510 68.6% $1,518,984
        Orlando 820 64.9% $1,532,416
        Atlanta 466 71.1% $1,932,222
        New York 371 79.4% $2,353,513
        Question “a” from the tables on the previous page: a. What is the allocation amount for each hotel if the allocation is made
        on the basis of an “equal” per property cost allocation?
        Total Cost Number of Properties Cost per Property
        b. What is the allocation amount for each hotel if the allocation is made
        on the basis of property size?
        Property # of Rooms in Property % of Total Cost per Property
        Denver 425
        Dallas 510
        Orlando 820
        Atlanta 466
        New York 371
        Total 2,592
        c. What is the allocation amount for each hotel if the allocation is made
        on the basis of number of rooms sold per year?
        Property # of Rooms in Property Annual Occupancy # of Rooms Sold % of Total Cost per Property
        Denver 425 70.2%
        Dallas 510 68.6%
        Orlando 820 64.9%
        Atlanta 466 71.1%
        New York 371 79.4%
        Total
        d. What is the allocation amount for each hotel if the allocation is made
        on the basis of net income earned?
        Property Net Income % of Total Cost per Property
        Denver $1,085,875
        Dallas $1,518,984
        Orlando $1,532,416
        Atlanta $1,932,222
        New York $2,353,513
        Total $8,423,010

        transfer price 425263

        Oneida Associates is a real estate company operating in the Finger Lakes region of central New York. Its leasing division rents and manages properties for others, and its maintenance division performs services such as carpentry, painting, plumbing, and electrical work. The maintenance division, which has an estimated variable cost of $29 per labor hour, works for both Oneida and other companies. It could spend 100 percent of its time working for outsiders. Maintenance division charges $71 per hour for labor performed for outsiders, the same rate that other maintenance companies charge. The leasing division complained that it could hire its own maintenance staff at an estimated variable cost of $40 per hour.

        a. What is the minimum transfer price that the maintenance division should obtain for its services,
        assuming that it is operating at capacity?

        b. What is the maximum price that the leasing division should pay?

        c. Would your answer in requirements (a) or (b) change if the maintenance division had idle capacity? If so, which answer would change, and what would the new amount be?

        management accounting 6e 425318

        overhead variance :manaufacture

        Bright Spark Ltd is a manufacture of the electrical switches, and uses a standard costing system. the standard manufacturing overhead costs per seitch are based on labour hours and are as following:

        variable overhead (5hours @ $12 per hour) $60

        fixed overhead (5 hours @ $18 per hour) 90

        total overhead $150

        based on capacity of 300000 direct labour hours per month

        the following information is available for month of October:

        56000 switches were produced, although 60000 switches were budgeted.

        275000 direct labour hours were worked at a total cost of $3825000.

        variable overhead costs were $3510000.

        fixed overhead costs were $5625000

        required:

        calculate the variable overhead spending and efficiency variance and the fixed overhead budget and volume variance for October. Indicate whether each variance if favourable or unfavourable.

        chapter 2 question 425344

        P2 3 Recording Transactions in T Accounts, Preparing the Balance Sheet, and Evaluating the Current Ratio LO2, 4, 5

        [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

        Cougar Plastics Company has been operating for three years. At December 31, 2011, the accounting records reflected the following:

        Cash $ 21,000 Intangibles $ 4,500
        Investments (short term) 3,200 Accounts payable 13,000
        Accounts receivable 4,400 Accrued liabilities payable 2,100
        Inventory 32,000 Notes payable (short term) 7,700
        Notes receivable (long term) 1,900 Long term notes payable 48,000
        Equipment 42,000 Contributed capital 102,000
        Factory building 106,000 Retained earnings 42,200

        During the year 2012, the company had the following summarized activities:

        a. Purchased short term investments for $8,100 cash.
        b. Lent $6,100 to a supplier who signed a two year note .
        c.

        Purchased equipment that cost $25,000; paid $5,100 cash and signed a one year note for the balance.

        d.

        Hired a new president at the end of the year. The contract was for $82,000 per year plus options to purchase company stock at a set price based on company performance.

        e. Issued an additional 2,900 shares of capital stock for $16,000 cash.
        f. Borrowed $18,000 cash from a local bank, payable in three months.
        g.

        Purchased a patent (an intangible asset) for $1,700 cash.

        h.

        Built an addition to the factory for $21,000; paid $7,400 in cash and signed a three year note for the balance.

        i.

        Returned defective equipment to the manufacturer, receiving a cash refund of $3,500.

        help me with this accounting please 425363

        Packaging Solutions Corporation manufactures and sells a wide variety of packaging products. Performance reports are prepared monthly for each department. The planning budget and flexible budget for the Production Department are based on the following formulas, where q is the number of labor hours worked in a month:

        Cost Formulas
        Direct labor $13.80q
        Indirect labor $7,800 + $1.60q
        Utilities $8,300 + $0.70q
        Supplies $900 + $0.30q
        Equipment depreciation $21,600 + $2.00q
        Factory rent $7,000
        Property taxes $1,220
        Factory administration $11,700 + $1.90q

        The actual costs incurred in March in the Production Department are listed below:

        Actual Cost
        Incurred in March
        Direct labor $132,730
        Indirect labor $19,660
        Utilities $16,070
        Supplies $5,100
        Equipment depreciation $40,200
        Factory rent $7,500
        Property taxes $1,220
        Factory administration $19,270

        rev: 02 10 2011

        2. value:

        3.00 points

        Requirement 1:

        The company had budgeted for an activity level of 10,000 labor hours in March. Prepare the Production Department’s planning budget for the month. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Packaging Solutions Corporation
        Production Department Planning Budget
        For the Month Ended March 31
        Direct labor $
        Indirect labor
        Utilities
        Supplies
        Equipment depreciation
        Factory rent
        Property taxes
        Factory administration

        Total expense $



        rev: 02 10 2011 check my workeBook Links (2)references

        3. value:

        3.00 points

        Requirement 2:

        The company actually worked 9,300 labor hours in March. Prepare the Production Department’s flexible budget for the month. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Packaging Solutions Corporation
        Production Department Flexible Budget
        For the Month Ended March 31
        Direct labor $
        Indirect labor
        Utilities
        Supplies
        Equipment depreciation
        Factory rent
        Property taxes
        Factory administration

        Total expense $



        rev: 02 10 2011 check my workeBook Links (2)references

        4. value:

        6.00 points

        Requirement 3:

        Prepare the Production Department’s flexible budget performance report for March, including both the activity and spending variances. (Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Packaging Solutions Corporation
        Production Department Flexible Budget Performance Report
        For the Month Ended March 31
        Activity Variances Spending Variances
        Direct labor $ (Click to select)NoneFU $ (Click to select)UNoneF
        Indirect labor (Click to select)NoneFU (Click to select)UFNone
        Utilities (Click to select)UFNone (Click to select)UFNone
        Supplies (Click to select)UFNone (Click to select)UNoneF
        Equipment depreciation (Click to select)NoneFU (Click to select)UNoneF
        Factory rent (Click to select)UFNone (Click to select)UFNone
        Property taxes (Click to select)NoneUF (Click to select)FNoneU
        Factory administration (Click to select)UFNone (Click to select)NoneFU




        Total expense $ (Click to select)FUNone $ (Click to select)UFNone









        rev: 02 10 2011 check my workeBook Links (2)references

        A?©
        2011 The McGraw Hill Companies. All rights reserved.

        consolidation working papers using the equity method 425368

        Packo Company acquired all the voting stock of Sennett Corporation on January 1, 2010 for $90,000 when Sennett had Capital Stock of $50,000 and Retained Earnings of $8,000. The excess of fair value over book value was allocated as follows: (1) $5,000 to inventories(sold in 2010), (2) $16,000 to equipment with a 4 year remaining useful life(straight line method of depreciation) and (3) the remainder to goodwill.

        Financial statements for Packo and Sennett at the end of the fiscal year ended December 31, 2011 (two years after acquisition), appear in the first two columns of the partially completed consolidation working papers. Packo has accounted for its investment in Sennett using the equity method of accounting.

        need a little help with this one 425415

        Parsons Plumbing & Heating manufactures thermostats that it uses in several of its products. Management is considering whether to continue manufacturing the thermostats or to buy them from an outside source. The following information is available:

        1.

        The company needs 80,000 thermostats per year. Thermostats can be purchased from an outside supplier at a cost of $6 per unit.

        2.

        The cost of manufacturing thermostats is $7.50 per unit, computed as follows:

        Direct materials $ 156,000
        Direct labor 132,000
        Manufacturing overhead:
        Variable 168,000
        Fixed 144,000


        Total manufacturing costs $ 600,000




        Cost per unit ($600,000 AfA?A?· 80,000 units) $ 7.50





        3.

        Discontinuing the manufacture of the thermostats will eliminate all of the direct materials and direct labor costs but will eliminate only 60 percent of the variable overhead costs.

        4.

        If the thermostats are purchased from an outside source, certain machinery used in the production process would no longer have to be leased. Accordingly, $9,200 of fixed overhead costs could be avoided. No other reductions will result from discontinuing production of the thermostats.

        a.

        Prepare a schedule to determine the incremental cost or benefit of buying thermostats from the outside supplier. On the basis of this schedule, would you recommend that the company manufacture thermostats or buy them from the outside source? (Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Make the
        Thermostats
        Buy the
        Thermostats
        Incremental
        Analysis
        Manufacturing costs for 80,000 thermostats:
        (Click to select)Direct laborAccounts payableDirect materialsNotes payableRent payable $ $
        (Click to select)Depreciation expenseSalesNotes payableDirect laborDirect material
        Manufacturing overhead:
        (Click to select)SalesVariableCashAccounts receivableDepreciation expense $
        (Click to select)CashAccounts receivableDepreciation expenseFixedSales
        (Click to select)Cost to salesRent payableInterest expenseCommon stockCost to purchase



        Totals $ $ $







        b.

        Assume that if thermostats are purchased from the outside source, the factory space previously used to produce thermostats can be used to manufacture an additional 6,000 heat flow regulators per year. These regulators have an estimated contribution margin of $18 per unit. The manufacture of the additional heat flow regulators would have no effect on fixed overhead. Would this new assumption change your recommendation as to whether to make or buy thermostats? In support of your conclusion, prepare a schedule showing the incremental cost or benefit of buying thermostats from the outside source and using the factory space to produce additional heat flow regulators. (Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Effect of alternative use of factory space:
        Incremental benefit (cost) of buying thermostats from outside source (see part a) $
        Add: Contribution margin of alternative use of factory space

        Incremental benefit of buying thermostats from an outside source and using factory space to produce additional heat flow regulators $



        need accounting help 425454

        Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:

        A?· Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned

        A?· Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned

        A?· Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500

        A?· State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings

        A?· Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings

        A?· State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned

        A?· Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned

        <?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” />

        The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month end.

        a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven’s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:

        A?· Social Security taxes

        A?· Medicare taxes

        A?· Federal income taxes withheld

        A?· State income taxes

        A?· Insurance withholdings

        b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven’s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:

        A?· Matching Social Security taxes

        A?· Matching Medicare taxes

        A?· State unemployment taxes

        A?· Federal unemployment taxes

        prepare a flexible budget performance report for 2011 425476

        Pebco Company’s 2011 master budget included the following fixed budget report. It is based on an expected production and sales volume of 16,000 units.

        PEBCO COMPANY
        Fixed Budget Report
        For Year Ended December 31, 2011
        Sales $ 4,000,000
        Cost of goods sold
        Direct materials $ 1,005,000
        Direct labor 225,000
        Machinery repairs (variable cost) 75,000
        Depreciation”plant equipment 300,000
        Utilities ($55,000 is variable) 215,000
        Plant management salaries 215,000 2,035,000




        Gross profit 1,965,000
        Selling expenses
        Packaging 75,000
        Shipping 110,000
        Sales salary (fixed annual amount) 260,000 445,000


        General and administrative expenses
        Advertising expense 130,000
        Salaries 251,000
        Entertainment expense 100,000 481,000




        Income from operations $ 1,039,000





        Pebco Company’s actual income statement for 2011 follows.

        PEBCO COMPANY
        Statement of Income from Operations
        For Year Ended December 31, 2011
        Sales (19,000 units) $ 4,798,000
        Cost of goods sold
        Direct materials $ 1,208,438
        Direct labor 276,188
        Machinery repairs (variable cost) 80,063
        Depreciation”plant equipment 300,000
        Utilities (fixed cost is $157,000) 221,563
        Plant management salaries 225,000 2,311,252




        Gross profit 2,486,748
        Selling expenses
        Packaging 86,813
        Shipping 122,625
        Sales salary (annual) 277,000 486,438


        General and administrative expenses
        Advertising expense 138,000
        Salaries 251,000
        Entertainment expense 103,500 492,500




        Income from operations $ 1,507,810





        Required:
        1.

        Prepare a flexible budget performance report for 2011.

        accounting fifo lifo 425481

        Pemberton Products uses a periodic inventory system. The company’s records show the beginning inventory of PH4 oil filters on January 1 and the purchases of this item during the current year to be as follows:

        Jan. 1 Beginning inventory 11 units @ $3.00 $ 33.00
        Feb. 23 Purchase 14 units @ $3.50 49.00
        Apr. 20 Purchase 31 units @ $3.80 117.80
        May 4 Purchase 35 units @ $4.00 140.00
        Nov. 30 Purchase 17 units @ $5.00 85.00



        Totals 108 units $ 424.80







        A physical count indicates 22 units in inventory at year end.

        Determine the cost of the ending inventory on the basis of each of the following methods of inventory valuation. (Remember to use periodic inventory costing procedures.) (Round your intermediate and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        what is the average cost?

        fifo?

        lifo?

        taxes 425527

        Tom and Allie Benson (ages 53 and 46) are residents of Fort Worth, Texas, and file a joint federal income tax return. They provide the entire support for their three children, ages 19, 18, and 14. On the basis of the following information, compute Mr. and Mrs. Benson’s federal income (including any AMT) and SE tax and the amount due with their Form 1040 or the refund they should receive. Mr. Benson is an attorney who practices in partnership with 18 other attorneys. His ordinary income was $278,300, and his net earnings from self employment were $257,010 (92.35 percent of $278,300). The Bensons made estimated tax payments totaling $58,000 to the IRS and a $28,500 contribution to the qualified Keogh plan maintained by the partnership. The Bensons earned $10,365 interest income and $13,790 qualified dividend income from their investment portfolio. They also received a $4,218 long term capital gain distribution from a mutual fund. They have a $9,723 capital loss carryforward from last year. The Bensons received a Schedule K 1 from an S corporation in which they own 6 percent of the stock. Their share of the corporation’s business loss was $4,930. The S corporation operates a mink farm in Maine. Mrs. Benson received a $50,000 cash inheritance from her great aunt. The Bensons moved from San Antonio to Fort Worth in April so that Mr. Benson could manage the Fort Worth office. The cost of moving their household goods was $11,260. The law firm reimbursed Mr. Benson for $10,000 of this expense. The Bensons paid $33,890 interest on a $573,000 first mortgage and $4,120 interest on a $90,000 second mortgage on their personal residence. They incurred the first mortgage to buy the home and the second mortgage to purchase new furniture. The Bensons paid $8,400 real property tax on their home and $2,920 for homeowners insurance. The Bensons made $21,980 cash donations to various qualified charities. The Bensons paid $1,911 state and local sales tax. (Texas has no individual income tax.) The Bensons paid $3,350 to the CPA who prepared their Form 1040.

        accounting problem 425551

        Pisa Pizza Parlor is investigating the purchase of a new $52,000 delivery truck that would contain specially designed warming racks. The new truck would have a ten year useful life. It would save $6,700 per year over the present method of delivering pizzas. In addition, it would result in the sale of 1,600 more pizzas each year. The company realizes a contribution margin of $1 per pizza. (Ignore income taxes.)

        Click here to view Exhibit 13B 1 (http://lectures.mhhe.com/connect/0078111005/Exhibit/Exhibit 13B 1.jpg) andExhibit 13B 2 (http://lectures.mhhe.com/connect/0078111005/Exhibit/Exhibit 13B 2.jpg), to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.

        Required:
        1.

        What would be the total annual cash inflows associated with the new truck for capital budgeting purposes? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Total annual cash inflows $

        2.

        Find the internal rate of return promised by the new truck. (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places and final answer to the closest interest rate. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

        Internal rate of return %

        3.

        In addition to the data already provided, assume that due to the unique warming racks, the truck will have a $16,000 salvage value at the end of ten years. Under these conditions, compute the internal rate of return. (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimalplaces and final answer to the closest interest rate. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

        Internal rate of return %

        plant wide department and activity cost rat 425601

        Plant wide, department, and activity cost rates Allen’s Aero Toys makes two models of toy airplanes, fighter jets, and cargo planes. The fighter jets are more detailed and require smaller batch sizes. The controller has asked you to compare plant wide, department, and activity based cost allocations.

        assembly dpartment fighters cargo total

        direct materials 2.5 3.75 6.25

        direct manufacturing labor 3.5 2.00 5.50

        total direct cost per unit 6.00 5.75 11.75

        painting department fighters cargo total

        direct materials 0.5 1.00 1.5

        direct manufacturing labor 2.25 1.6 3.75

        total direct cost per unit 2.75 2.5 5.25

        number of units produced 800 740

        The budgeted overhead cost for each department is as follows:

        assembly department painting department total

        materials handing 1700 900 2600

        quality inspection 2750 1150 3900

        utilities 2580 2100 4680

        7030 4150 11180

        Other information follows:
        Materials handling and quality inspection costs vary with the number of batches processed in each department. The budgeted number of batches for each product line in each department is as follows:
        fighters cargo total

        assembvly department 150 48 198

        painting department 100 32 132

        total 250 80 330

        Utilities costs vary with direct manufacturing labor cost in each department.
        Required
        1. Calculate the budgeted cost per unit for fighter jets and cargo planes based on a single plant wide overhead rate, if total overhead is allocated based on total direct costs.
        2. Calculate the budgeted cost per unit for fighter jets and cargo planes based on departmental overhead rates, where assembly department overhead costs are allocated based on direct manufacturing labor costs of the assembly department and painting department overhead costs are allocated based on total direct costs of the painting department.
        3. Calculate the budgeted cost per unit for fighter jets and cargo planes if Allen’s Aero Toys allocates overhead costs using activity based costing.
        4. Explain how activity based costing could improve or reduce decisionquality.

        tri state corporation 425626

        What will your portfolio be worth in 10 years? In 20 years? When you stop working? The Human Resources Department at Tri State Corporation was asked to develop a financial planning model that would help employees address these questions. Tom Gifford was asked to lead this effort and decided to begin by developing a financial plan for himself. Tom has to lead this effort and decided to begin by developing a financial plan for himself. Thom has a degree in business and, at the age of 25, is making $34,000 per year. After two years of contributions to his company’s retirement program and the receipt of a small inheritance, Tom has accumulated a portfolio valued at $14,500. Tom plans to work 30 more years and hopes to accumulate a portfolio valued a $1 million. Can he do it?
        Tom began with a few assumptions about his future salary, his new investment contributions, and his portfolio growth rate. He assumed 5% annual salary growth rate as reasonable and wanted to make new investment contributions at 4% of his salary. After some research on historical stock market performance, Tom decided that a 10% annual portfolio growth rate was reasonable. Using these assumptions, Tom developed the Excel workshop show in Figure 12.18. Tom’s specific situation and his assumptions are in the top portion of the worksheet (cells D3:D8). The worksheet provides a financial plan for the next five years. In computing the portfolio earnings for a given year, Tom assumed that his new investment contribution would occur evenly throughout the year and thus half of the new investment could be included in the computation of the portfolio earnings for the year. Using Figure 12.18, we see that at age 29, Tom is projected t have a portfolio value at $32,898.
        Tom’s plan was to use this worksheet as a template to develop financial plans, for the company’s employees. The assumptions in cells D3:D8 would be different for each employee, and rows would be added to the worksheet to reflect the number of years appropriate for each employee. After adding another 25 rows to the worksheet, Tom found that he could expect to have a portfolio of $627,937 after 30 years. Tom than took his results to show his boss, Kate Regale.
        Although Kat was pleased with Tom’s progress, she voiced several criticisms. One of the criticisms was the assumption of a constant annual salary growth rate. She noted that most employees experience some variation in the annual salary growth rate from year to year. In addition, she pointed out that the constant annual portfolio growth rate was unrealistic and that the actual growth rate would vary considerably for year to year. She further suggested that a simulation model for the portfolio projection might allow Tom to account for the random variability in the salary growth rate and the portfolio growth rate.
        After some research, Tom and Kate decided to assume that the annual salary growth rate would vary from 0% to 10 % and that a uniform probability distribution would provide a realistic approximation. Tri State’s account firm suggested that the annual portfolio growth rate could be approximated by a normal probability distribution with a mean of 10% and a stand deviation of 5%. With this information, Tom set off to develop a simulation model that could be used by the company’s employees for financial planning.
        Figure 12.18 Financial Planning Worksheet for Tom Gifford (this appear in Excel in textbook)

        A B C D E F G H
        1 Financial Analysis Portfolio Projection
        2
        3 Age 25
        4 Current Salary $34,000
        5 Current Portfolio $14,500
        6 Annual Salary Growth Rate 5%
        7 Annual Investment Rate 4%
        8 Annual Portfolio Growth Rate 10%
        9
        10 Beginning New Portfolio Ending
        11 Year Age Portfolio Salary Investment Earning Portfolio
        12 1 25 14,500 34,000 1,360 1,518 17,378
        13 2 26` 17,378 35,700 1,428 1,809 20,615
        14 3 27 20,615 37,485 1,499 2,136 24,251
        15 4 28 24,251 39,359 1,574 2,504 28,329
        16 5 29 28,329 41,327 1,653 2,916 32,898

        Develop a Simulation model for financial planning and write a report based on the information given on the attached file questions 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5:

        1. Without considering the random variability in growth rates, extend the worksheet in figure 12.8 to 30 years. Confirm that by using the constant annual salary growth rate and the constant annual portfolio growth rate, Tom can expect to have a 30 year portfolio of $627,937. What would Tom’s annual investment rate have to increase to in order for the portfolio to reach a 30 year, $1million goal?

        2. Incorporate the random variability of the annual salary growth rate and the annual portfolio growth rate into a simulation model. Assume that Tom is willing to use the annual investment rate that predicted a 30 year, $1 million portfolio in part 1. Show how to simulate Tom’s 30 year financial plan. Use results from the simulation model to comment on the uncertainty associated with Tom reaching the 30 year, $1 million goal. Discuss the advantage of repeating the simulation numerous times.

        3. What recommendations do you have for employees with a current profile similar to Tom’s after seeing the impact of the uncertainty in the annual salary growth rate and the annual portfolio growth rate?

        4. Assume that Tom is willing to consider working 35 years instead of 30 years. What is your assessment of this strategy if Tom’s goal is to have a portfolio worth $1 million?

        5.Discuss how the financial planning model developed for Tom Gifford can be used as a template to develop a financial plan for any of the company’s employees.

        accounting question 425642

        1. Posner Company wrote off the following accounts receivable as uncollectible for the first year of its operations ending December 31, 2010:

          Customer

          Amount

          J. Jackson

          $10,000

          L. Stanton

          9,500

          C. Barton

          13,100

          S. Fenton

          2,400

          Total

          $35,000

          Required:

          (1)

          Journalize the write offs for 2010 under the direct write off method.

          (2)

          Journalize the write offs for 2010 under the allowance method. Also, journalize the adjusting entry for uncollectible accounts. The company recorded $2,400,000 of credit sales during 2010. Based on past history and industry average, 1.50% of credit sales are expected to be uncollectible.

          (3)

          How much higher or lower would Posner Company’s 2010 net income have been under the direct write off method than under the allowance method?

        general accounting question 425652

        POST INC. BANK RECONCILIATION
        Cash balance per bank $8,200
        Cash balance per books (general ledger) $6,500
        Outstanding checks $2,460
        Check mailed to the bank for deposit had
        not reached the bank by the statement
        date. $500
        NSF check returned by the bank for
        accounts receivable $100
        July interest earned on the bank statement $20
        Check no. 700 for misc. expense cleared
        the bank for $200; erroneously recorded
        in our books for $20

        Prepare a bank reconciliation.
        Shown the accounting entries that must be made by
        Matrix Inc. in journal entry and T Account format.

        introducton to managerial accounting 6th edition mcgraw hill irwin chapter 8 the fou 425678

        Preble Company manufactures one product. Its variable manufacturing overhead is applied to production based on direct labor hours and its standard cost card per unit is as follows:

        Direct Materials: 5 pounds at $8.00 per pound……………………………. $40.00

        Direct Labor: 2 hours at $14.00 per hour ……………………………………. 28.00

        Variable Overhead: 2 hours at $5.00 per hour ……………………………. 10.00

        Total standard variable cost per unit ……………………………………………. $78.00

        * The company also established the following cost formulas for its selling expenses:

        Fixed Cost Variable Cost

        Per Month Per Unit Sold

        Advertising ………………………………………………………… $200,000

        Sales salaries and commisions …………………………. $100,000 $12.00

        Shipping expenses ……………………………………………. $3.00

        The planning budget for March was based on producing and selling 25,000 units. However, March the compnay actually produced and sold 30,000 units and incurred the following costs:

        a. Purchased 160,000 pounds of raw materials at a cost of $7.50 per pound. All of this material was

        used in production

        b. Direct laborers worked 55,000 hours at a rate of $15.00 per hour.

        c. Total variable manufacturing overhead for the month was $280,500.

        d. Total advertising, sales salaries and commissions, and shipping expenses were $210,000,

        $455,000, and $115,000, respectively.

        Required to Answer:

        1. What raw materials cost would be included in the company’s flexible budget for March?

        2. What is the materials quantity variance for March?

        3. What is the materials price variance for March?

        4. If Preble had purchased 170,000 pounds of materials at $7.50 per pound and used 160,000

        pounds in production, what would be the materials quantity variance for March?

        5. If Preble had purchased 170,000 pounds of materials at $7.50 per pound and used 160,000

        pounds in production, what would be the materials price variance for March?

        6. What direct labor cost would be included in the company’s flexiable budget for March?

        7. What is the direct labor efficency variance for March?

        8. What is the direct labor rate variance for March?

        9. What variable manufacturing overhead cost would be included in the company’s flexible budget

        for March?

        10. What is the variable overhead efficiency variance for March?

        11. What is the variable overhead rate variance for March?

        12. What amounts of advertising, sales salaries and commisions, and shipping expenses would be

        included in the company’s flexible budget for March?

        13. What is the spending variance related to advertising?

        14. What is the spending variance related to sales salaries and commissions?

        15. What is the spending variance related to shipping expenses?

        prepare adjusting entries for the following 425694

        Prepare adjusting entries for the following:

        a. Estimated depreciation on office equipment for the year, $3,600

        b. The prepaid insurance account has a $2,580 debit balance before adjustment. An examination of insurance policies shows $890 of insurance expired.

        c. The prepaid insurance account has a $2,150 debit balance before adjustment. An examination of Insurance policies shows $525 of unexpired insurance

        d. A company has three office employees who each earn $75 per day for a five day workweek that ends on Friday. The employees were paid on Friday, December 26, and have worked full days on Monday, Tuesday, and Wednesday, December 29, 20 and 31.

        e. On November 1, a property owner received 6 months’ rent in advance from a tenant whose rent is $675 per month. The $4,050 was credited to the unearned rent account.

        f. A property owner collects rent monthly from his tenants. One tenant whose rent is $750 per month has not paid his rent for December.

        partnership tax return project 425705

        Prepare a Form 1065 and appropriate schedules for AB Custom Saddles for tax year 2012 based upon the following facts:

        AB Custom Saddles is a Domestic LLC formed on 1/1/2004. It has assets of $125,000. Employer

        ID #41 678910. It is located at 1601 Mill Road, Windriver, MN 56300. Business code *1234567.

        AB has two equal owners, Alan Anderson, SSN 555 00 2211, address: 1112 Broadway Ave., Minneapolis, MN 56011. Alan works full time for AB and is paid a guaranteed payment (salary) of $30,000 per year. His capital account and basis going into 2012 were both $10,000. And Bradley Bailey, SSN 470 31 0202, 1000 3rd St., Windom, MN 56011. He also has a basis and capital account of $10,000 going into 2012.

        AB distributed $5,000 in cash, $2500 to each Alan and Bradley in 2012.

        Business information:

        Income from sales $175,000

        Cost of goods sold 38,000

        Rent expense 4,000

        Telephone expense 2,000

        Advertising 3,000

        Salaries to non owners 27,000

        Taxes (employees, personal prop) 2,400

        Depreciation from previous years (Line 17 4562) 1,000

        Repairs 1,000

        AB sold stock (1221 assets) for $11,000 on 2/1/12 that was purchased on 2/1/04 for $7,000.

        AB sold a machine that was fully depreciated (original cost $10,000 acquired 3/15/08) on 3/1/12 for $4,000.

        AB bought and placed in service a used machine (7 year property) for $8,000 on June 1, 2012 and wants to expense the entire amount in 2012 if possible.

        *Complete part L of the K 1 for each partner

        References:

        Text

        Instructions Form 1065

        Instructions Form 1065, Schedule K 1

        Publication 541

        Will need forms:

        1065

        1065 Schedule D

        (2) 1065 Schedule K 1

        4562

        4797

        accouting multiple choice quiz only 35 minutes to be logged off please help but do c 425731

        Prepare a multiple step income statement for Surry Co. from the following data for the year ended December 31, 2010.
        Sales, $915,000; cost of merchandise sold, $670,000; administrative expenses, $30,000; interest expense, $12,000; rent revenue, $19,000; sales returns and allowances, $55,000; selling expenses, $120,000.

        1. If you were to prepare a Multiple Step Income Statement for Surry Co., what would be Surry Co.’s Net income? (Points : 3)

        $40,000
        $190,000
        $47,000
        $150,000

        2. If you were to prepare a Multiple Step Income Statement for Surry Co., what would be Surry Co. Gross Profit? (Points : 3)

        $40,000
        $190,000
        $150,000
        $47,000

        3. If you were to prepare a Multiple Step Income Statement for Surry Co., what would be Surry Co.’s total Operating Expenses? (Points : 3)

        $150,000
        $190,000
        $40,000
        $47,000

        4. If you were to prepare a Multiple Step Income Statement for Surry Co., what would be Surry Co.’s Net Sales? (Points : 3)

        $915,000
        $670,000
        $150,000
        $860,000

        5. If you were to prepare a Multiple Step Income Statement for Surry Co., what would be Surry Co.’s total of Other Revenue/Other Expenses? (Points : 3)

        $19,000
        $7,000
        $12,000
        $40,000

        statement of cash flows 425736

        media/565/565e719f a0d9 4b75 bbdc fd

        media/f2d/f2d20cc6 c1da 4c14 978e 16

        media/7d2/7d2d294d 4e86 4f49 88b8 eb

        media/afb/afb8a865 25a9 42ad 800b a1

        Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the indirect method of presenting cash flows from operating activities. If needed, use the minus sign to indicate cash outflows, negative amounts, net loss, or a decrease in cash.

        net loss

        depreciation

        loss on sale of land

        increase in accounts receivable

        increase in investment

        decrease in prepaid expenses

        decrease in accounts payable

        cash received from land sold

        less cash paid for acquisition of building

        less cash paid for purchase of equipment

        cash received from issuance of bonds payable

        cash received from issuance common stock

        less cash paid for dividends

        increase in cash

        cash at beginning of the year

        cash at end of the year

        accounting 424658

        Match the following cost items with these appropriate accounts:

        a. Land c. Land Improvements

        b. Buildings d. Other

        ____ 1. Interest cost incurred during building construction.

        ____ 2. Back taxes on purchased plot of land to be used for building site.

        ____ 3. Assessment by city for drainage system.

        ____ 4. Building permits.

        ____ 5. Landscaping shrubs planted after building has been constructed.

        ____ 6. Demolition costs of building on land bought for plant site.

        ____ 7. Interest cost incurred after completion of building construction.

        ____ 8. Recording fees for land.

        ____ 9. Architect’s fees.

        ____ 10. Grading and filling building site.

        ____ 11. Parking lots.

        ____ 12. Fences.

        managerial accounting activity based costing 424678

        Matt Company uses activity based costing. The company has two products: A and B. The annual production and sales of Product A is 9,000 units and of Product B is 7,500 units. There are three activity cost pools, with total cost and total activity as follows:

        Total Activity

        Activity Cost Pool Total Cost Product A Product B Total
        Activity 1 $29,295 220 410 630
        Activity 2 $46,895 910 220 1,130
        Activity 3 $130,315 840 3,050 3,890

        The activity based costing cost per unit of Product A is closest to:

        I know the answer to this is 8.46 but i have no idea why! IN ORDER FOR ME TO RATE YOU MUST GIVE A STEP BY STEP PROCESS HOW TO TO DO THIS!! THANK YOU!

        accounting selling price per unit and budgeting question 424684

        1st question:Compute a new “selling price per unit” for the East Division that will enable them to accumulate a balance of $100,000 in their cash account by the end of the second quarter. Assume that the cash balance at March 31 was $10,000.

        2nd Question:Using the selling price per unit computed in #6 prepare a sales budget for the second quarter. Show computations by month and in total for the quarter.

        The East Division of Kensic Company manufactures a vital component that is used in one of Kensic’s major product lines. The East Division has been experiencing some difficulty in coordinating activities between its various departments, which has resulted in some shortages of the component at critical times. To overcome the shortages, the manager of East Division has decided to initiate a monthly budgeting system that is integrated between departments.

        The first budget is to be for the second quarter of the current year (April, May and June). To assist in developing the budget figures, the divisional controller has accumulated the following information.

        Sales: Sales through the first three months of the current year were 30,000 units. Actual sales in units for January, February, and March, and planned sales in units over the next five months, are given below:

        January (actual) 6,000

        February (actual) 10,000

        March (actual) 14,000

        April (planned) 20,000

        May (planned) 35,000

        June (planned) 50,000

        July (planned) 45,000

        August (planned) 30,000

        In total, the East Division expects to produce and sell 250,000 units during the current year.

        Direct Material:Two different materials are used in production of the component. Data regarding these materials are given below:

        Units of Direct Cost

        Direct Materials per per Inventory at

        Material Finished Component lb/ft March 31

        No. 208 4 pounds $5.00 46,000 pounds

        No. 311 9 feet 2.00 69,000 feet

        Material No. 208 is sometimes in short supply. Therefore, the East Division requires that enough of the material be on hand at the end of each month to provide for 50% of the following month’s production needs. Material No. 311 is easier to get, so only one third of the following month’s production needs must be on hand at the end of each month.

        Direct Labor: The East Division has three department through which the components must past before they are completed. Information relating to direct labor in these departments is given below:

        Direct Labor Hours Cost per

        Per Finished Direct

        Department Component Labor Hour

        Shaping .25 $18.00

        Assembly .70 16.00

        Finishing .10 20.00

        Direct labor is adjusted to the workload each month.

        Manufacturing Overhead: East Division manufactured 32,000 components during the first three months of the current year. The actual variable overhead costs incurred during this three month period are shown below. Each Division’s controller believes that the variable overhead costs incurred during the last nine months of the year will be at the same rate per component as experienced during the first three months.

        Utilities $ 57,000

        Indirect Labor 31,000

        Supplies 16,000

        Other 8,000

        Total variable overhead $112,000

        The actual fixed manufacturing overhead costs incurred during the first three months amounted to $1,170,000. The East Division has planned fixed manufacturing overhead costs for the entire year as follows:

        Supervision $ 872,000

        Property Taxes 143,000

        Depreciation 2,910,000

        Insurance 631,000

        Other 72,000

        Total fixed manufacturing

        Overhead $4,628,000

        Finished Goods Inventory: The desired monthly ending inventory of completed components is 20% of the next month’s estimated sales. The East Division has 4,000 units in the finished goods inventory on March 31.

        Selling and Administrative Expenses: Selling and Administrative Expenses are budgeted at $400,000 per month plus 1% of total credit sales for the month.

        managerial accounting help 424696

        MC Qu. 34 A company has provided the following…

        A company has provided the following data:

        Sales 2,960 units
        Sales price $ 82 per unit
        Variable cost $62 per unit
        Fixed cost $25,000

        If the sales volume decreases by 25%, the variable cost per unit increases by 10%, and all other factors remain the same, net operating income will: (Do not round intermediate calculations.)

        increase by $13,356.
        decrease by $28,564.
        decrease by $5,636.
        decrease by $15,800.

        19 17 2 424800

        Exercise 19 17

        Polk Company builds custom fishing lures for sporting goods stores. In its first year of operations, 2012, the company incurred the following costs.

        Variable Cost per Unit
        Direct materials $8.18
        Direct labor $2.67
        Variable manufacturing overhead $6.27
        Variable selling and administrative expenses $4.25
        Fixed Costs per Year
        Fixed manufacturing overhead $257,164
        Fixed selling and administrative expenses $261,709

        Polk Company sells the fishing lures for $27.25. During 2012, the company sold81,100lures and produced95,600lures.

        (a)
        Your answer is correct.

        Assuming the company uses variable costing, calculate Polk’s manufacturing cost per unit for 2012. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g.10.50.)

        Manufacturing cost per unit $

        Show SolutionShow Answer
        Link to Text
        By accessing this Question Assistance, you will learn while you earn points based on the Point Potential Policy set by your instructor.
        Attempts: 1 of 3 used

        (b)

        Prepare a variable costing income statement for 2012.

        POLK COMPANY
        Income Statement
        For the Year Ended December 31, 2012
        Variable Costing
        Administrative ExpensesContribution MarginFixed Manufacturing OverheadFixed Selling and Administrative ExpensesGross ProfitNet Income/(Loss)SalesTotal Fixed ExpensesTotal Variable ExpensesVariable Cost of Goods SoldVariable Selling and Administrative Expenses $
        Administrative ExpensesContribution MarginFixed Manufacturing OverheadFixed Selling and Administrative ExpensesGross ProfitNet Income/(Loss)SalesTotal Fixed ExpensesTotal Variable ExpensesVariable Cost of Goods SoldVariable Selling and Administrative Expenses $
        Administrative ExpensesContribution MarginFixed Manufacturing OverheadFixed Selling and Administrative ExpensesGross ProfitNet Income/(Loss)SalesTotal Fixed ExpensesTotal Variable ExpensesVariable Cost of Goods SoldVariable Selling and Administrative Expenses
        Administrative ExpensesContribution MarginFixed Manufacturing OverheadFixed Selling and Administrative ExpensesGross ProfitNet Income/(Loss)SalesTotal Fixed ExpensesTotal Variable ExpensesVariable Cost of Goods SoldVariable Selling and Administrative Expenses
        Administrative ExpensesContribution MarginFixed Manufacturing OverheadFixed Selling and Administrative ExpensesGross ProfitNet Income/(Loss)SalesTotal Fixed ExpensesTotal Variable ExpensesVariable Cost of Goods SoldVariable Selling and Administrative Expenses
        Administrative ExpensesContribution MarginFixed Manufacturing OverheadFixed Selling and Administrative ExpensesGross ProfitNet Income/(Loss)SalesTotal Fixed ExpensesTotal Variable ExpensesVariable Cost of Goods SoldVariable Selling and Administrative Expenses
        Administrative ExpensesContribution MarginFixed Manufacturing OverheadFixed Selling and Administrative ExpensesGross ProfitNet Income/(Loss)SalesTotal Fixed ExpensesTotal Variable ExpensesVariable Cost of Goods SoldVariable Selling and Administrative Expenses $

        Link to Text
        By accessing this Question Assistance, you will learn while you earn points based on the Point Potential Policy set by your instructor.
        Attempts: 0 of 3 used Save for later Submit Answer

        (c)

        The parts of this question must be completed in order. This part will be available when you complete the part above.

        (d)

        The parts of this question must be completed in order. This part will be available when you complete the part above.

        PLEASE KEEP ON MIND THE ITEMS C AND D WILL SHOW UP AFTER ANSWERING ITEM B, GIVE ME A QUOTE FOR ITEMS B,C,D AND NOT FOR SEPARATE, EVERY ITEM HAS THE SAME LEVEL OF COMPLEXITY

        process activity analysis 424874

        The Mr. Frizz Beverage Company bottles soft drinks into aluminum cans. The manufacturing process consists of three activites:

        1. Mixing: water, sugar, and beverage concentrate are mixed.

        2. Filling: mixed beverage is filled into 12oz. cans.

        3. Packaging: filled cans are boxed into “fridge packs.”

        The activity costs associated with these activities for the period are as follow:

        Mixing Activity Cost $336,000

        Filling Activity Cost $304,000

        Packaging Activity Cost $160,000

        Each cna is expected to contain 12ozs. of beverage. Thus, after being filled, each man is automatically weighed. If a can is too light, it is rejected, or “kicked,” from the filling line prior to being packaged. The primary cause of kicks is heat expansion. With heat expansion, the beverage overflows during filling, resulting in underweight cans.

        The process begins by mixing and fillling 10,400,000 cans during the period, of which only 10,000,000 cans are actually packaged. Four hundred thousand cans are rejected due to underweight kicks.

        A process improvement team has determined that cooling the cans piror to filling them will reduce the amount of overflows due to expansin. After this improvement, the number of kicks is expected to decline from 400,000 cans to 100,000 cans.

        a. Determine the activity cost per can under present operations.

        b. Determine the amount of increased packaging costs from the expected improvements.

        c. Determine the expected activity cost per can agter improvements. Round to the nearest tenth of a cent.

        accounting 424885

        MRI Company has one employee. FICA Social Security taxes are 6.2% of the first $106,800 paid to its employee, and FICA Medicare taxes are 1.45% of gross pay. For MRI, its FUTA taxes are 0.8% and SUTA taxes are 2.9% of the first $7,000 paid to its employee.

        Gross Pay through August Gross Pay for September
        a. $ 6,400 $ 800

        Prepare the employer’s September 30 journal entries to record salary expense and its related payroll liabilities for this employee. The employee’s federal income taxes withheld by the employer are $135 for this pay period. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response)

        Date General Journal Debit Credit
        Sept. 30 (Click to select)Salaries expenseSalaries payableFICA Medicare taxes payableFICA Social security taxes payablePayroll taxes expenseEmployee federal income taxes payableAccrued payroll payableState unemployment taxes payable
        (Click to select)Salaries expenseState unemployment taxes payableEmployee federal income taxes payableFICA Social security taxes payableAccounts payableAccrued payroll payablePayroll taxes expenseFICA Medicare taxes payable
        (Click to select)Salaries expensePayroll taxes expenseFICA Social security taxes payableFICA Medicare taxes payableEmployee federal income taxes payableAccrued payroll payableAccounts payableState unemployment taxes payable
        (Click to select)Salaries expenseAccounts payableState unemployment taxes payableFICA Medicare taxes payableEmployee federal income taxes payablePayroll taxes expenseFICA Social security taxes payableAccrued payroll payable
        (Click to select)Employee federal income taxes payableSalaries expenseFICA Medicare taxes payableFICA Social security taxes payableState unemployment taxes payableAccounts payableAccrued payroll payablePayroll taxes expense

        international business law 6th edition ray august don mayer michael bixby australia 424897

        The Multinational Enterrise Products Liability Jurisdiction (Australia)

        Brand X Inc. is a corporation based in the United States. They do business in India through various channels, especially in controversial sectors. Two of these channels are a branch office of Unheedlock and Brand X Defiance Ltd. (a subsidiary registered with the Bombay Stock Exchange). An investigative journalist has on separate occasions found both Brand X and Brand X Defiance Ltd. offering bribes to Mr. Y a Member of Parliament in India to speed up a project that would take longer in the normal course of things. The United States is looking to prosecute Brand X and Brand X Defiance Ltd. under the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA), and Mr, Y under the general conspiracy statute for conspiring to violate the FCPA. The 1988 Prevention of Corruption Act in India aims to prevent corrupt practices by prosecuting the public officials who receive bribes. However, there is currently no Indian law that makes private parties liable for offering bribes to such officials. You have been retained as defense council for Brand X, Brand X Defiance Ltd., and Mr, Y. Discuss some of the main issues you would be considering while preparing your case.

        cost allocation 424902

        The Muskego National Bank is considering either a bankwide overhead rate or department overhead rates to allocate $250,000 of overhead costs. The bankwide rate could be based on either direct labor hours (DLH) or the number of loans processed. The departmental rates would be based on direct labor hours for Consumer Loans and a dual rate based on direct labor hours and the number of loans processed for Commercial Loans. The following information was gathered for the upcoming period:

        Department

        DLH

        Loans Processed

        Direct Costs

        Consumer

        9,000

        400

        $200,000

        Commercial

        6,000

        100

        $150,000

        If Muskego uses a bankwide rate based on direct labor hours, what would be the overhead costs allocated to the Consumer Department?

        Answer

        $100,000

        $150,000

        $250,000

        $350,000

        solution in excel accounting help 424927

        Natural Fragrance, Inc., began operations on January 1, 2012. The company produces a hand and body lotion in an eight ounce bottle called Eternal Beauty. The lotion is sold wholesale in 12 bottle cases for $80 per case. There is a selling commission of $16 per case. The January direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead costs are as follows:

        The management of Natural Fragrance, Inc., wishes to determine the number of cases required to break even per month. The utilities cost, which is part of factory overhead, is a mixed cost. The following information was gathered from the first six months of operation regarding this cost:

        1. Determine the fixed and variable portion of the utility cost using the high low method.

        2. Determine the contribution margin per case. Enter your answer to the nearest cent.

        3. Determine the fixed costs per month, including the utility fixed cost from part (1).

        4. Determine the break even number of cases per month.

        part b

        During July of the current year, the management of Natural Fragrance, Inc., asked the controller to prepare August manufacturing and income statement budgets. Demand was expected to be 1,300 cases at $80 per case for August. Inventory planning information is provided as follows:

        5. Prepare the August production budget.

        6. Prepare the August direct materials purchases budget.

        7. Prepare the August direct labor budget.

        8. Prepare the August factory overhead budget.

        9. Prepare the August budgeted income statement, including selling expenses.

        part c

        10. Determine and interpret the direct materials price and quantity variances for the three materials.

        11. Determine and interpret the direct labor rate and time variances for the two departments.

        12. Determine and interpret the factory overhead controllable variance.

        13. Determine and interpret the factory overhead volume variance.

        14. Why are the standard direct labor and direct materials costs in the calculations for parts (10) and (11) based on the actual 1,300 case production volume rather than the planned 1,200 cases of production used in the budgets for parts (6) and (7)?

        SOLUTION in EXCEL….

        managerial accounting 424943

        Nature’s Way, Inc., keeps one of its production facilities busy making a perfume called Essence de la Vache. The perfume goes through two processing departments: Blending and Bottling.

        The following incomplete Work in Process account is provided for the Blending Department for March:

        Work in ProcessAf?cAc‚¬”Blending


        March 1 balance 34,100 Completed and transferred
        to Bottling (760,000 ounces)
        ?
        Materials 141,600
        Direct labor 67,200
        Overhead 487,000


        March 31 balance ?



        The $34,100 beginning inventory in the Blending Department consisted of the following elements: materials, $8,500; direct labor, $4,400; and overhead applied, $21,200.

        Costs incurred during March in the Bottling Department were: materials used, $45,000; direct labor, $16,600; and overhead cost applied to production, $111,000.

        Required:
        1.

        Prepare journal entries to record the costs incurred in both the Blending Department and Bottling Department during March. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        a. Raw materials were issued for use in production.
        b. Direct labor costs were incurred.
        c.

        Manufacturing overhead costs for the entire factory were incurred, $696,000. (Credit Accounts Payable and use a single Manufacturing Overhead control account for the entire factory.)

        d. Manufacturing overhead was applied to production using a predetermined overhead rate.
        e.

        Units that were complete with respect to processing in the Blending Department were transferred to the Bottling Department, $662,000.

        f.

        Units that were complete with respect to processing in the Bottling Department were transferred to Finished Goods, $790,000.

        g. Completed units were sold on account for $1,430,000. The cost of goods sold was $630,000.

        managerial accounting 5 1 424954

        NEED ANSWERS FROM 1 To 68 Please N Thank You

        Problem P5 1 Variable and Full Costing: Sales Constant but Production Fluctuates

        Spencer Electronics produces a wireless home lighting device that allows consumers to turn on home lights from their cars and light a safe path into and through their homes. Information on the first three years of business is as follows: 2011 2012 2013 Total Units sold 15,000 15,000 15,000 45,000 Units produced 15,000 20,000 10,000 45,000 Fixed production costs $750,000 $750,000 $750,000 Variable production costs per unit 150 150 150 Selling price per unit 250 250 250 Fixed selling and administrative expense 220,000 220,000 220,000

        Part a: Calculate profit and the value of ending inventory for each year using full costing.

        2011 2012 2013 Fixed manufacturing overhead Amount (1) Amount (2) Amount (3) Divided by ??? Number (4) Number (5) Number (6) Title Formula (7) Formula (8) Formula (9) Title Amount (10) Amount (11) Amount (12) Full cost per unit Formula (13) Formula (14) Formula (15) Sales Amount (16) Amount (17) Amount (18) Less cost of goods sold: 2008 Formula (19) 2009 Formula (20) 2010 Formula (21) Gross margin Amount (22) Amount (23) Amount (24) Less ??? Amount (25) Amount (26) Amount (27) Net income Formula (28) Formula (29) Formula (30) Formula (31) Ending inventory 2008 Formula (32) Ending inventory 2009 Formula (33) Ending inventory 2010 Formula (34)

        Part c: Calculate profit and the value of ending inventory for each year using variable costing.

        2011 2012 2013 Fixed manufacturing overhead Amount (35) Amount (36) Amount (37) Title Amount (38) Amount (39) Amount (40) Units sold Amount (41) Amount (42) Amount (43) Selling price per unit Value (44) Value (45) Value (46) Sales Formula (47) Formula (48) Formula (49) Less ??? Amount (50) Amount (51) Amount (52) Title Formula (53) Formula (54) Formula (55) Less fixed costs: Title Amount (56) Amount (57) Amount (58) Title Amount (59) Amount (60) Amount (61) Title Formula (62) Formula (63) Formula (64) Formula (65) Ending inventory 2008 Amount (66) Ending inventory 2009 Amount (67) Ending inventory 2010 Amount (68)

        managerial accounting 6 8 9 spencer electronics produces a wireless home lighting de 424960

        NEED ANSWERS FOR A THRU F Please

        Spencer Electronics produces a wireless home lighting device that allows consumers to turn on home lights from their cars and light a safe path into and through their homes. Information on the first three years of business is as follows:

        2011 2012 2013 total

        Units Sold 15,000 15,000 15,000 45,000

        Units produced 15,000 20,000 10,000 45,000

        Fixed production costs $750,000 $750,000 $750,000

        Variable production cost per unit $150 $150 $150

        Selling price per unit $250 $250 $250

        Fixed selling and

        administrative expense $220,000 $220,000 $220,000

        REQUIRED:

        A) Calculate profit and the value of ending inventory for each year using full cost.

        B) Explain why profit fluctuates from year to year even though the number of units sold, the selling price, and the cost structure remain constant.

        C) Calculate profit and the value of ending inventory for each year using variable costing.

        D) Explain why, using variable costing, profit does not fluctuate from year to year.

        Marvin company has three service departments, S1, S2, and S3, and two production departments, P1 and P2. The following data relate to marvin’s allocation of service department costs:

        Budgeted Costs Number of Employees

        S1 $4,000,000 80

        S2 3,000,000 60

        S3 2,000,000 30

        P1 200

        P2 300

        Service department costs are allocated by the direct method. The number of employees is used as the allocation base for all service department costs.

        REQUIRED:

        E) Allocate service department costs to production departments.

        F) Calculate the total service department cost allocated to each production department.

        accounting 425055

        New Jersey Valve Company manufactured 6,800 units during January of a control valve used by milk processors in its Camden plant. Records indicated the following:

        Direct labor 41,600 hr. at $14.70 per
        Direct material purchased 26,000 lb. at $2.10 per
        Direct material used 25,600 lb.

        The control valve has the following standard prime costs:
        Direct material: 4 lb. at $2.00 per $ 8.00
        Direct labor: 6 hr. at $15.10 per 90.60



        Standard prime cost per unit $ 98.60







        Required:
        1.

        Prepare a schedule of standard production costs for January, based on actual production of 6,800 units. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        NEW JERSEY VALVE COMPANY
        CAMDEN PLANT
        SCHEDULE OF STANDARD PRODUCTION COSTS
        BASED ON 6,800 UNITS
        FOR THE MONTH OF JANUARY
        Direct material $
        Direct labor

        Total standard production costs $



        2.

        For the month of January, compute the following variances, indicating whether each is favorable or unfavorable. (Select “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Direct material price variance $
        Direct material quantity variance $
        Direct labor rate variance $
        Direct labor efficiency variance $

        accounting depreciation by two methods sale of fixed asset 425060

        New lithographic equipment, acquired at a cost of $718,750 at the beginning of a fiscal year, has an estimated useful life of five years and an estimated residual value of $61,800. The manager requested information regarding the effect of alternative methods on the amount of depreciation expense each year. On the basis of the data presented to the manager, the double declining balance method was selected. In the first week of the fifth year, the equipment was sold for $105,300. 1. Determine the annual depreciation expense for each of the estimated five years of use, the accumulated depreciation at the end of each year, and the book value of the equipment at the end of each year by the following methods: a. Straight line method Year Depreciation Expense Accumulated Depreciation, End of Year Book Value, End of Year 1 $ $ $ 2 $ $ $ 3 $ $ $ 4 $ $ $ 5 $ $ $ b. Double declining balance method Year Depreciation Expense Accumulated Depreciation, End of Year Book Value, End of Year 1 $ $ $ 2 $ $ $ 3 $ $ $ 4 $ $ $ 5 $ $ $ 2. Journalize the entry to record the sale, assuming double declining balance method is used. Debit Credit Cash Accumulated Depreciation Equipment Gain on Sale of Equipment 3. Journalize the entry to record the sale, assuming that the equipment was sold for $90,400 instead of $105,300. Debit Credit Cash Accumulated Depreciation Loss on Sale of Equipment Equipment

        annual depreciation 425081

        The Nichols clinic purchased a new surgical laser for 96,000. The estimated salvage value is 6,000. The laser has a useful life of 5 years and the clinic expects to use it at 10,000 hours. It was used 1,600 hours in year 1. 2,200 hours in year 2. 2,4000 in year 3. 2,300 hours in year 4. 2,000 hours in year 5.

        Instructions: Compute the annual depreciation for each of the five years under each of the following methods.

        (1) straight line (2) units of activity.

        (b) If you were the administrator of the clinic which method would you deem as most appropiate? Justify your answer.

        (c) Which method would result in the lowest reported income in the first year? Which method would result in the lowest total reported income over the 5 year period?

        ~~~~~Please show solution and explanation. Thank you

        ninetween measures of solvency and profitability 425093

        Nineteen Measures of Solvency andProfitability

        The comparative financial statements of Blige Inc. are as follows. The market price of Blige Inc. common stock was $52 on December 31, 2012.

        Blige Inc.
        Comparative Retained Earnings Statement
        For the Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011
        2012 2011
        Retained earnings, January 1 $1,661,950 $1,406,850
        Add net income for year 369,200 288,200
        Total $2,031,150 $1,695,050
        Deduct dividends:
        On preferred stock $12,600 $12,600
        On common stock 20,500 20,500
        Total $33,100 $33,100
        Retained earnings, December 31 $1,998,050 $1,661,950
        Blige Inc.
        Comparative Income Statement
        For the Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011
        2012 2011
        Sales $2,394,265 $2,202,700
        Sales returns and allowances 11,910 7,740
        Net sales $2,382,355 $2,194,960
        Cost of goods sold 817,600 752,190
        Gross profit $1,564,755 $1,442,770
        Selling expenses $560,000 $670,170
        Administrative expenses 477,035 393,590
        Total operating expenses 1,037,035 1,063,760
        Income from operations $527,720 $379,010
        Other income 27,780 24,190
        $555,500 $403,200
        Other expense (interest) 136,000 75,200
        Income before income tax $419,500 $328,000
        Income tax expense 50,300 39,800
        Net income $369,200 $288,200
        Blige Inc.
        Comparative Balance Sheet
        December 31, 2012 and 2011
        Dec. 31, 2012 Dec. 31, 2011
        Assets
        Current assets:
        Cash $390,570 $347,360
        Temporary investments 591,130 575,640
        Accounts receivable (net) 401,500 379,600
        Inventories 292,000 219,000
        Prepaid expenses 73,896 69,470
        Total current assets $1,749,096 $1,591,070
        Long term investments 1,023,394 300,598
        Property, plant, and equipment (net) 2,210,000 1,989,000
        Total assets $4,982,490 $3,880,668
        Liabilities
        Current liabilities $514,440 $508,718
        Long term liabilities:
        Mortgage note payable, 8%, due 2017 $760,000 $0
        Bonds payable, 8%, due 2021 940,000 940,000
        Total long term liabilities $1,700,000 $940,000
        Total liabilities $2,214,440 $1,448,718
        Stockholders’ Equity
        Preferred $0.70 stock, $20 par $360,000 $360,000
        Common stock, $10 par 410,000 410,000
        Retained earnings 1,998,050 1,661,950
        Total stockholders’ equity $2,768,050 $2,431,950
        Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $4,982,490 $3,880,668

        Instructions:

        Determine the following measures for 2012, rounding to one decimal place, except for dollar amounts, which should be rounded to the nearest cent. Assume 365 days a year.

        1. Working capital: $
        2. Current ratio:
        3. Quick ratio:
        4. Accounts receivable turnover:
        5. Number of days’ sales in receivables:
        6. Inventory turnover:
        7. Number of days’ sales in inventory:
        8. Ratio of fixed assets to long term liabilities:
        9. Ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity:
        10. Number of times interest charges are earned:
        11. Number of times preferred dividends earned:
        12. Ratio of net sales to assets:
        13. Rate earned on total assets: %
        14. Rate earned on stockholders’ equity: %
        15. Rate earned on common stockholders’ equity: %
        16. Earnings per share on common stock: $
        17. Price earnings ratio:
        18. Dividends per share of common stock: $
        19. Dividend yield:

        net cash provided by operating activities 425113

        Nordquist Company’s net income last year was $44,000. The company did not sell or retire any property, plant, and equipment last year. Changes in selected balance sheet accounts for the year appear below:

        Increases
        (Decreases)
        Asset and Contra Asset Accounts:
        Accounts receivable $17,500
        Inventory $(4,400)
        Prepaid expenses $13,000
        Accumulated depreciation $32,000
        Liability Accounts:
        Accounts payable $17,000
        Accrued liabilities $(8,900)
        Income taxes payable $3,500

        Based solely on this information, the net cash provided by operating activities under the indirect method on the statement of cash flows would be:
        $78,600
        $113,700
        $61,500
        $26,500

        *** For anyresponders who post an aswern, if you help with this problem please show solution/work to the answer so I can try to understand. Thanks.

        hedging 425163

        On November 10, 2011, King Co. sold inventory to a customer in a foreign country. King agreed to accept 96,000 local currency units (LCU) in full payment for this inventory. Payment was to be made on February 1, 2012. On December 1, 2011, King entered into a forward exchange contract wherein 96,000 LCU would be delivered to a currency broker in two months. The two month forward exchange rate on that date was 1 LCU = $.30. Any contract discount or premium is amortized using the straight line method. The spot rates and forward rates on various dates were as follows:

        November 10, 2011 spot rate $.35 = 1 LCU

        December 1, 2011 spot rate $.32 = 1 LCE

        December 1, 2011 2 month foward rate $.30 = 1 LCU

        December 31, 2011 spot rate $.29 = 1 LCU

        December 31, 2011 1 month foward rate $.28 = 1 LCU

        February 1, 2012 spot rate $.27 = 1 LCU

        The company’s borrowing rate is 12%. The present value factor for one month is .9901.

        1. (A.) Assume this hedge is designated as a cash flow hedge. Prepare the journal entries relating to the transaction and the forward contract.
        (B.) Compute the effect on 2011 net income.
        (C.) Compute the effect on 2012 net income

        2. (A.) Assume this hedge is designated as a fair value hedge. Prepare the journal entries relating to the transaction and the forward contract.
        (B.) Compute the effect on 2011 net income.
        (C.) Compute the effect on 2012 net income.

        chapter 4 tax accounting 425173

        Through November, Tex has received gross income of $265,000. For December, Tex is considering whether to accept one more work engagement for the year. Engagement 1 will generate $13,800 of revenue at a cost of $5,200, which is deductible for AGI. In contrast, engagement 2 will generate $13,800 of revenue at a cost of $2,900, which is deductible as an itemized deduction. Tex files as a single taxpayer.

        a.
        Calculate Tex’s taxable income assuming he chooses engagement 1 and engagement 2 separately. Assume he has no itemized deductions other than those generated by engagement 2.

        Engagement 1 Engagement 2
        Taxable income $ $

        b.
        Calculate Tex’s taxable income assuming he chooses engagement 1 and engagement 2 separately. Assume he has $5,610 of itemized deductions other than those generated by engagement 2.

        Engagement 1 Engagement 2
        Taxable income $ $

        c.
        Calculate Tex’s taxable income assuming he chooses engagement 1 and engagement 2 separately. Assume he has $9,200 of itemized deductions other than those generated by engagement 2.

        Engagement 1 Engagement 2
        Taxable income $ $<?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” />

        for each of these three cases determine the missing amounts indicate 275471

        For each of these three cases, determine the missing amounts indicated by question marks. P10.2 Data from Trail Bikes, Inc.’s perpetual inventory records for a tire it produces and sells follow: The company sold 53,000 tires during the year at $20 each. Required: A. Compute the cost of the ending inventory and the cost of goods sold using both FIFO and LIFO. B. In your opinion, which of the two methods is a better representation of the balance sheet value for the inventory? Why? C. What is the gross margin using each method? D.

        Document Preview:

        WEEK 3, A2 P10.1 For each of these three cases, determine the missing amounts indicated by question marks. P10.2 Data from Trail Bikes, Inc.’s perpetual inventory records for a tire it produces and sells follow: The company sold 53,000 tires during the year at $20 each. Required: A. Compute the cost of the ending inventory and the cost of goods sold using both FIFO and LIFO. B. In your opinion, which of the two methods is a better representation of the balance sheet value for the inventory? Why? C. What is the gross margin using each method? D. Which method do you think is more representative of the firm’s income? Why? CT10.1 Hightech Company offers its customers credit terms of 2/10, n/30. Most customers take advantage of the cash discount, mailing their payments to arrive on the 10th day following the date of the invoice. However, Lowmart Company, Hightech’s largest customer, has recently begun sending payments to arrive on the 30th day after invoice, while still taking the 2 percent discount. Hightech’s collection department has been in touch with Lowmart regarding the taking of the discount outside the discount period, and Lowmart’s response is that it deserves to take the discount whenever payment is made. After all, it is Hightech’s biggest customer. Required: Identify Hightech’s possible courses of action as well as the consequences of these actions. CT10.2 Xanetics, Inc., recently received a $150,000 special order from Lartech, Inc., for some customized equipment. A 50 percent deposit accompanied the order, with the remaining $75,000 payment to be made at delivery. Xanetics manufactured the equipment and was ready to ship it to Lartech when it was notified that Lartech had declared bankruptcy. Required: Identify the accounting issues related to the above scenario. Has Xanetics earned a revenue? Has it been realized? Should the company recognize any revenue? C10.1 Refer to “Panera Bread” Company. Based on your knowledge of this company,…

        Attachments:

        perfromance evaluation for decentralized operations differential analysis and produc 275488

        i would like to have Katie Haynes work on the attached document

        Document Preview:

        1. Using the data from the Koko Company, determine the divisional income from operations for the A and B regions.  ?A Region?B Region? ??Sales?$600,000?$900,000? ??Cost of goods sold?  200,000?  350,000? ??Selling expenses?  150,000?  275,000? ?? ? ? ? ??Service department expenses? ? ? ??        Purchasing? ? ?$80,000??        Payroll accounting? ? ?  40,000????????Allocate service department expenses proportional to the sales of each region. 2. The sales, income from operations, and invested assets for each division of Winston Company are as follows:  ??Sales?Income from?Operations?Invested?Assets??Division C?$5,000,000?$630,000?$3,900,000??Division D?6,800,000?760,000?4,300,000??Division E?3,750,000?750,000?7,250,000????????Management has established a minimum rate of return for invested assets of 8%. (a)?Determine the residual income for each division.?? ? ??(b)?Based on residual income, which of the divisions is the most profitable??? 3. Pnok Company has been purchasing a component, Part Q, for $18.90 a unit. Pnok is currently operating at 70% of capacity and no significant increase in production is anticipated in the near future. The cost of manufacturing a unit of Part Q, determined by absorption costing methods, is estimated as follows: Direct materials?$11.25??Direct labor?4.50??Variable factory overhead?1.12??Fixed factory overhead?    3.15??Total?$20.02??????Prepare a differential analysis report, dated March 12 of the current year, on the decision to make or buy Part Q. 4. FDE Manufacturing Company has a normal plant capacity of 37,500 units per month. Because of an extra large quantity of inventory on hand, it expects to produce only 30,000 units in May. Monthly fixed costs and expenses are $112,500 ($3 per unit at normal plant capacity) and variable costs and expenses are $8.25 per unit. The present selling price is $13.50 per unit. The company has an opportunity to sell 7,500 additional units at $9.90 per unit to an exporter who plans…

        Attachments:

        superior door company sells prehung doors to home builders the 275496

        Superior Door Company sells prehung doors to home builders. The doors are sold for $60 each. Variable costs are $42 per door, and fixed costs total $450,000 per year. The company is currently selling 30,000 doors per year.

        Required:

        1. Prepare a contribution format income statement for the company at the present level of sales and compute the degree of operating leverage.

        2. Management is confident that the company can sell 37,500 doors next year (an increase of 7,500 doors, or 25%, over current sales). Compute the following:

        a. The expected percentage increase in net operating income for next year.

        b. The expected net operating income for next year. (Do not prepare an income statement; use the degree of operating leverage to compute your answer.)

        the purpose of the discussion board is to allow students to learn through sharing 275497

        The purpose of the Discussion Board is to allow students to learn through sharing ideas and experiences as they relate to course content and the DB question. Because it is not possible to engage in two way dialogue after a conversation has ended, no posts to the DB will be accepted after the end of each unit.

        Many corporations and government entities have an internal auditing function and a separate fraud investigation function either as a subunit of internal auditing or security or as a separate unit within the organization. In addition, many accounting and consulting firms have a forensic, investigation, and litigation support services.

        The financial forensic investigation techniques and procedures used within an organization (in house) or from a professional contracted service firm can come about in different ways. For example, some forensic techniques for analyzing financial statements are common for financial auditors, fraud auditors, or forensic accountants and investigators. Other techniques, such asusing behavior detection methods and interviewing methods, are primarily used in specific fraud investigation engagements.

        • Research and locate a company who was audited by an outside source and explain the method, technique, and findings of an audit.
        • Do you think that it is a wise investment to contract services that provide security against fraud or should it be an in house department that provides fraud security services?
        • Include additional information that you think is appropriate or interesting concerning ethical or unethical business behavior.
        • Cite your references in APA format.

        Document Preview:

        1 Page The purpose of the Discussion Board is to allow students to learn through sharing ideas and experiences as they relate to course content and the DB question. Because it is not possible to engage in two way dialogue after a conversation has ended, no posts to the DB will be accepted after the end of each unit. Many corporations and government entities have an internal auditing function and a separate fraud investigation function either as a subunit of internal auditing or security or as a separate unit within the organization. In addition, many accounting and consulting firms have a forensic, investigation, and litigation support services.     The financial forensic investigation techniques and procedures used within an organization (in house) or from a professional contracted service firm can come about in different ways. For example, some forensic techniques for analyzing financial statements are common for financial auditors, fraud auditors, or forensic accountants and investigators. Other techniques, such as using behavior detection methods and interviewing methods, are primarily used in specific fraud investigation engagements. Research and locate a company who was audited by an outside source and explain the method, technique, and findings of an audit. Do you think that it is a wise investment to contract services that provide security against fraud or should it be an in house department that provides fraud security services? Include additional information that you think is appropriate or interesting concerning ethical or unethical business behavior. Cite your references in APA format.

        Attachments:

        suppose that head first company now sells both bicycle helmets a 275505

        Suppose that Head First Company now sells both bicycle helmets and motorcycle helmets. The bicycle helmets are priced at $70 and have variable costs of $49 each. The motorcycle helmets are priced at $220 and have variable costs of $143 each. Total fixed costs for Head First as a whole equals $54,600 (includes all fixed factory overhead and fixed selling and administrative expense). Next year, Head First expects to sell 5,000 bicycle helmets and 1,000 motorcycle helmets.

        Required:

        1. Form a package of bicycle and motorcycle helmets based on the sales mix expected for the coming year.

        2. Calculate the break even point in units for bicycle helmets and for motorcycle helmets.

        3. Check your answer by preparing a contribution margin income statement.

        svetlana pace is the advertising manager for bargain shoe store 275509

        Svetlana Pace is the advertising manager for Bargain Shoe Store. She is currently working on a major promotional campaign. Her ideas include the installation of a new lighting system and increased display space that will add $34,000 in fixed costs to the $270,000 currently spent. In addition, Svetlana is proposing that a 5% price decrease ($40 to $38) will produce a 20% increase in sales volume (20,000 to 24,000). Variable costs will remain at $22 per pair of shoes. Management is impressed with Svetlana’s ideas but concerned about the effects that these changes will have on the break even point and the margin of safety.

        Instructions

        (a) Compute the current break even point in units, and compare it to the break even point in units if Svetlana’s ideas are used.

        (b) Compute the margin of safety ratio for current operations and after Svetlana’s changes are introduced. (Round to nearest full percent.)

        (c) Prepare a CVP income statement for current operations and after Svetlana’s changes are introduced. Would you make the changes suggested?

        telly savalas owns the bonita barber shop he employs four 275520

        Telly Savalas owns the Bonita Barber Shop. He employs four barbers and pays each a base rate of $1,000 per month. One of the barbers serves as the manager and receives an extra $500 per month. In addition to the base rate, each barber also receives a commission of $4.50 per haircut.

        Other costs are as follows.

        Advertising …………………………… $200 per month

        Rent ……………………….…………. $1,100 per month

        Barber supplies ………………………. $0.30 per haircut

        Utilities ………………………………. $175 per month plus $0.20 per haircut

        Magazines ……………………………. $25 per month

        Telly currently charges $10 per haircut.

        Instructions

        (a) Determine the variable costs per haircut and the total monthly fixed costs.

        (b) Compute the break even point in units and dollars.

        (c) Prepare a CVP graph, assuming a maximum of 1,800 haircuts in a month. Use increments of 300 haircuts on the horizontal axis and $3,000 on the vertical axis.

        (d) Determine net income, assuming 1,700 haircuts are given in a month.

        the all cuts barber shop employs four barbers one barber 275523

        The All Cuts Barber Shop employs four barbers. One barber, who also serves as the manager, is paid a salary of $3,900 per month. The other barbers are paid $1,900 per month. In addition, each barber is paid a commission of $2 per haircut. Other monthly costs are: store rent $700 plus 60 cents per haircut, depreciation on equipment $500, barber supplies 40 cents per haircut, utilities $300, and advertising $100. The price of a haircut is $10.

        Instructions

        (a) Determine the variable cost per haircut and the total monthly fixed costs.

        (b) Compute the break even point in units and dollars.

        (c) Prepare a CVP graph, assuming a maximum of 1,800 haircuts in a month. Use increments of 300 haircuts on the horizontal axis and $3,000 increments on the vertical axis.

        (d) Determine the net income, assuming 1,700 haircuts are given in a month.

        the america online division of time warner has fueled its 275525

        The America Online division of Time Warner has fueled its growth by using aggressive promotion strategies. One of these strategies is to send compact disk software to potential customers, offering free AOL service for a period of time. Assume that during a given promotional campaign, AOL mailed 3,200,000 disks to potential customers, offering three months’ free service. In addition, assume the following information:

        Cost per disk (including mailing) ………………………. $1.50

        Number of months an average new customer stays

        with the service (including the three free months) ……. 30 months

        Revenue per month per customer account ………………. $10.00

        Variable cost per month per customer account ………….. $1.00

        Determine the number of new customer accounts needed to break even on the cost of the promotional campaign. In forming your answer,

        (1) Treat the cost of mailing the disk as a fixed cost, and

        (2) Treat the revenue less variable cost per account for the service period as the unit contribution margin.

        performance measurements in decentralized organizations 424440

        MacIntyre Fabrications, Ltd., of Aberdeen, Scotland, has recently begun a continuous improvement campaign in conjunction with a move toward Lean Production. Management has developed new performance measures as part of this campaign. The following operating data have been gathered over the last four months:

        Month

        1 2 3 4
        Throughput time ? ? ? ?
        Manufacturing cycle efficiency ? ? ? ?
        Delivery cycle time ? ? ? ?
        Percentage of on time deliveries 72% 73% 78% 85%
        Total sales (units) 10,540 10,570 10,550 10,490

        Management would like to know the company’s throughput time, manufacturing cycle efficiency, and delivery cycle time. The data to compute these measures have been gathered and appear below:

        Month

        1 2 3 4
        Move time per unit, in days 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.5
        Process time per unit, in days 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.4
        Wait time per order before start
        of production, in days
        9.6 8.7 5.3 4.7
        Queue time per unit, in days 3.6 3.6 2.6 1.7
        Inspection time per unit, in days 0.7 0.7 0.4 0.3

        Required:
        1a. Compute the throughput time for each month. (Round your answers to 1 decimal place.)

        1 2 3 4
        Throughput time

        1b.

        Compute the manufacturing cycle efficiency (MCE) for each month. (Round your answers to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

        1 2 3 4
        Manufacturing cycle efficiency (MCE) % % % %

        1c. Compute the delivery cycle time for each month. (Round your answers to 1 decimal place.)

        1 2 3 4
        Delivery cycle time

        3. Refer to the move time, process time, and so forth, given for month 4.

        a.

        Assume that in month 5 the move time, process time, and so forth, are the same as for month 4, except that through the implementation of Lean Production, the company is able to completely eliminate the queue time during production. Compute the new throughput time and MCE. (Round your answers to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

        Throughput time
        Manufacturing cycle efficiency (MCE) %

        b.

        Assume that in month 6 the move time, process time, and so forth, are the same as for month 4, except that the company is able to completely eliminate both the queue time during production and the inspection time. Compute the new throughput time and MCE. (Round your answers to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

        Throughput time
        Manufacturing cycle efficiency (MCE) %

        managerial accounting 424474

        MANAGEMENT AT FOX VALLEY MACHINE TOOL CO IS CONSIDERING THE DEVELOPMENT OF A NEW AUTOMATED DRILL PRESS CALLED THE AUTO DRILL. AFTER CONFERRING WITH THE DESIGN ENGINEERS THE CONTROLLER’S STAFF ASSEMBLED THE FOLLOWING DATA ABOUT THIS PRODUCT
        TARGET SELLING PRICE $6,000 PER UNIT
        DESIRED PROFIT PERCENTAGE 20% OF TOTAL UNIT COST
        PROJECTED UNIT DEMAND 4,500
        ACTIVITY BASED COST RATES
        MATERIAL HANDLING 5% OF DIRECT MATERIALS AND PURCHASED PARTS COST
        ENGINERING $300 PER UNIT FOR AUTODRILL
        PRODUCTION AND ASSEMBLY $50 PER MACHINE HOUR
        DELIVERY $570 PER UNIT FOR AUTO DRILL
        MARKETING $400 PER UNIT FOR AUTO DRILL
        PER UNIT DATA
        DIRECT MATERIAL COST $1,620
        PURCHASED PARTS COST $200
        MANUFACTURING LABOR
        HOURS 6
        HOURLY LABOR RATE $14
        ASSEMBLY LABOR
        HOUR 10
        HOURLY LABOR RATE $15
        MACHINE HOURS 30
        1 COMPUTE THE PRODUCT’S TARGET COST
        2 COMPUTE THE PRODUCT’S PROJECTED UNIT COST BASED ON THE DESIGN ENGINEERS’S ESTIMATES
        3 SHOULD MANAGEMENT PRODUCE AND MARKET THE AUTODRILL DEFEND YOUR ANSWER

        acct help 424480

        The management of Heider Corporation is considering dropping product J14V. Data from the company’s accounting system appear below:

        Sales $990,000
        Variable expenses $395,000
        Fixed manufacturing expenses $377,000
        Fixed selling and administrative expenses $257,000

        In the company’saccounting system all fixed expenses of the company are fully allocated to products. Further investigation has revealed that $247,000 of the fixed manufacturing expenses and $208,000 of the fixed selling and administrative expenses are avoidable if product J14V is discontinued. What would be the effect on the company’s overall net operating income if product J14V were dropped?

        Overall net operating income would increase by $39,000.
        Overall net operating income would decrease by $39,000.
        Overall net operating income would decrease by $140,000.
        Overall net operating income would increase by $140,000.

        in the euro area inflation has been on a downward trajectory for nearly a year and 424488

        TASK 1 Cost behaviour Objective To be able to relate the importance of the two types of manufacturing costs (variable and fixed costs) and assess thee impact on the production of goods. Marks allocated 25 marks ‘In the euro area. inflation has been on a downward trajectory for nearly a year and a continued fall in inflation could put renewed pressure on the European Central Bank to cut interest rates further. In Juno. final inflation at constant tax rates was 1.2 percent after it was down at 0.8 percent in April. We expect the recent small rise in inflation excluding taxes to be reversed in the future due to low wage pressure combined with declining oil prices. very slow growth in agricultural prices and a drop out of previous year’s tax hikes.” Danske Bank. 5 August, 2013 The above article is just one of the many examples of analysis on the decline of inflation rates around the world. The real message that these analyses were trying to convey to everyone focused more on the end result of the event: the decline in inflation rates would result in higher global competition, fostered by an environment of cheap labour. cost cutting and increased efficiency. Such development in the global economy may lead to a condition where the production of goods is outpacing the number of consumers who are able to buy them. Even so. the level of production is unIkely to decline because factories have been

        Attachments:

        managerial accounting problem 23 2a 424499

        The management of Peterson Manufacturing Company has asked for your assistance in deciding whether to continue manufacturing a part or to buy it from an outside supplier. The part, called Tropica, is a component of Peterson’s finished product.

        An analysis of the accounting records and the production data revealed the following information for the year ending December 31, 2012.

        1. The Machinery Department produced 37,440 units of Tropica.
        2. Each Tropica unit requires 10 minutes to produce. Three people in the Machinery Department work full time (2,080 hours per year) producing Tropica. Each person is paid $11.00 per hour.
        3. The cost of materials per Tropica unit is $1.50.
        4. Manufacturing costs directly applicable to the production of Tropica are: indirect labor, $4,650; utilities, $1,220; depreciation, $1,430; property taxes and insurance, $1,230. All of the costs will be eliminated if Tropica is purchased.
        5. The lowest price for a Tropica from an outside supplier is $5.00 per unit. Freight charges will be $0.30 per unit, and a part time receiving clerk at $8,000 per year will be required.
        6. If Tropica is purchased, the excess space will be used to store Peterson’s finished product. Currently, Peterson rents storage space at approximately $0.90 per unit stored per year. Approximately 5,200 units per year are stored in the rented space.

        unit product cost 424556

        A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

        Units in beginning inventory 0
        Units produced 6,900
        Units sold 6,700
        Units in ending inventory 200
        Variable costs per unit:
        Direct materials $49
        Direct labor $44
        Variable manufacturing overhead $8
        Variable selling and administrative $7
        Fixed costs:
        Fixed manufacturing overhead $200,100
        Fixed selling and administrative $75,900

        What is the absorption costing unit product cost for the month? (Round your intermediate calculations to whole dollar value.)

        $108
        $101
        $137
        $130

        production data maple inc 424562

        Maple, Inc. manufactures syrup that goes through three processing stages prior to completion. Information on work in the first department, Blending, is given below for August:

        Production data:

        Pounds in process, August 1; materials 100% complete; conversion 70% complete

        3,000

        Pounds started into production during August

        85,000

        Pounds completed and transferred out

        ?

        Pounds in process, August 31; materials 80% complete; conversion 30% complete

        6,000

        Cost data:

        Work in process inventory, August 1:
        Materials cost

        $900

        Conversion cost

        $5,900

        Cost added during May:
        Materials cost

        $151,000

        Conversion cost

        $161,700

        The company uses the weighted average method.

        Submit an Excel document, which each tab labeled by item number in good form that demonstrates the following:

        1. Compute the equivalent units of production.
        2. Compute the costs per equivalent unit for the month.
        3. Determine the cost of ending work in process inventory and of the units transferred out to the next department.
        4. Prepare a cost reconciliation schedule for the month.

        accounting 424569

        On March 1, 2011, Abbey and Dames formed a partnership. Abbey contributed $88,000 cash and Dames contributed land valued at $70,000 and a building valued at $100,000. The partnership also assumed responsibility for Dames’s $80,000 long term note payable associated with the land and building. The partners agreed to share income as follows: Abbey is to receive an annual salary allowance of $30,000, both are to receive an annual interest allowance of 10% of their beginning year capital investment, and any remaining income or loss is to be shared equally. On October 20, 2011, Abbey withdrew $32,000 cash and Dames withdrew $25,000 cash. After the adjusting and closing entries are made to the revenue and expense accounts at December 31, 2011, the Income Summary account had a credit balance of $79,000.

        1(a) Prepare journal entries to record the partners’ initial capital investments. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Date General Journal Debit Credit
        Mar. 1, 2011 (Click to select)Long term notes payableAbbey, CapitalBuildingAccounts payableCash Land Dames, Capital Prepaid income
        (Click to select)Cash Dames, Capital Prepaid incomeBuildingLong term notes payableAbbey, Capital LandAccounts payable
        (Click to select)Abbey, Capital Land Dames, CapitalBuildingLong term notes payable Prepaid incomeAccounts payableCash
        (Click to select)Building Prepaid incomeLong term notes payableAbbey, CapitalDames, CapitalAccounts payableLandCash
        (Click to select)LandAbbey, CapitalCashLong term notes payableDames, Capital Prepaid incomeBuildingAccounts payable
        (Click to select)LandCashBuildingAbbey, Capital Prepaid incomeAccounts payableLong term notes payableDames, Capital

        1(b) Prepare journal entries to record their cash withdrawals. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Date General Journal Debit Credit
        Oct. 20, 2011 (Click to select)Supplies payableBuildingCash Prepaid incomeLandDames, WithdrawalsAbbey, WithdrawalsAbbey, Capital
        (Click to select)Abbey, CapitalSupplies payableDames, WithdrawalsLandAbbey, Withdrawals Prepaid incomeCashBuilding
        (Click to select)Supplies payablePrepaid incomeLandBuildingCashAbbey, WithdrawalsDames, WithdrawalsAbbey, Capital

        1(c) Prepare journal entries to record the December 31 closing of both the Withdrawals and Income Summary accounts. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Date General Journal Debit Credit
        Dec. 31, 2011 (Click to select)Supplies payable CashAccounts receivable Abbey, WithdrawalsDames, WithdrawalsDames, Capital Prepaid incomeAbbey, Capital
        (Click to select)Abbey, WithdrawalsDames, WithdrawalsDames, CapitalAbbey, CapitalSupplies payableAccounts receivable Cash Prepaid income
        (Click to select) CashAccounts receivableAbbey, WithdrawalsDames, CapitalAbbey, CapitalSupplies payable Prepaid incomeDames, Withdrawals
        (Click to select)Abbey, CapitalDames, WithdrawalsDames, Capital Prepaid incomeAccounts receivableSupplies payableAbbey, Withdrawals Cash
        (Click to select)Dames, CapitalPrepaid incomeAbbey, CapitalDames, WithdrawalsIncome summaryAbbey, WithdrawalsCashSales revenue
        (Click to select)Prepaid incomeCashAbbey, CapitalDames, WithdrawalsSales revenueAbbey, WithdrawalsIncome summaryDames, Capital
        (Click to select)Dames, CapitalPrepaid incomeDames, WithdrawalsIncome summaryAbbey, WithdrawalsCashAbbey, CapitalSales revenue

        2.

        Determine the balances of the partners’ capital accounts as of December 31, 2011. (Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Capital account balances Abbey Dames
        Initial investment $ $
        Withdrawals
        Share of income


        Ending balances $ $





        number of equivalent units with respect to both materials and direct labor respectiv 424620

        During March, the production department of a process manufacturing system completed a number of units of a product and transferred them to finished goods. Of the units transferred, 28,000 were in process at the beginning of March and 180,000 were started and completed in March. March’s beginning inventory units were 100% complete with respect to materials and 62% complete with respect to labor. At the end of March, 37,000 additional units were in process in the production department and were 100% complete with respect to materials and 37% complete with respect to labor. Compute the number of equivalent units with respect to both materials and direct labor respectively for March using the FIFO method.

        acct 202 ch 13 424630

        Markus Company’s common stock sold for $2.75 per share at the end of this year. The company paid preferred stock dividends totaling $4,400 and a common stock dividend of $0.55 per share this year. It also provided the following data excerpts from this year’s financial statements: Ending Balance Beginning Balance Cash $ 35,000 $ 30,000 Accounts receivable $ 60,000 $ 50,000 Inventory $ 55,000 $ 60,000 Current assets $ 150,000 $ 140,000 Total assets $ 450,000 $ 460,000 Current liabilities $ 60,000 $ 40,000 Total liabilities $ 130,000 $ 120,000 Preferred stock $ 40,000 $ 40,000 Common stock, $1 par value $ 80,000 $ 80,000 Total stockholders’ equity $ 320,000 $ 340,000 Total liabilities and stockholders’s equity $ 450,000 $ 460,000 This Year Sales (all on account) $ 700,000 Cost of goods sold $ 400,000 Gross margin $ 300,000 Net operating income $ 140,000 Interest expense $ 8,000 Net income $ 92,400 1 what is the earnings per share? 2 what is the price earnings ratio? 3 what is the dividend payout ratio? 4.what is the dividend yield ratio? 5.what is the return on total assets (assuming a 30% tax rate)? 6.what is the return on common stockholders’ equity? 7.what is the book value per share at the end of this year? 8.what is the amount of working capital and the current ratio at the end of this year? 9.what is the acid test ratio at the end of this year? 10.what is the accounts receivable turnover? 11.what is the average sale period? 12.what is the inventory turnover? 13.what is the average sale period? 14.what is the time interest earned ratio? 15.what is the debt to equity ratio at the end of this year?

        operating income 424635

        Mars Inc provided the following information regarding its single product:

        Direct Materials used = $240,000

        Direct labor incurred = $420,000

        Variable manufacturing overhead = $160,000

        Fixed manufacturing overhead = $100,000

        Variable selling and administrative expenses = $60,000

        Fixed selling and administrative expenses = $20,000

        The regular selling price for the product is $80. The annual quantity units produced and sold is 40,000 units (the cost above relate to the 40,000 units production level). The company has excess capacity and regular sales will not be affected by this special order. There was no beginning inventory.

        What would be the effect on operating income of accepting a special order for 1,000 units at a sale price of $40 per product? The special order units would not requaire any variable selling and administrative expenses?

        minden company introduced a new product last year for which 275233

        Minden Company introduced a new product last year for which it is trying to find an optimal selling price. Marketing studies suggest that the company can increase sales by 5,000 units for each $2 reduction in the selling price. The company’s present selling price is $70 per unit, and variable expenses are $40 per unit. Fixed expenses are $540,000 per year. The present annual sales volume (at the $70 selling price) is 15,000 units.

        Required:

        1. What is the present yearly net operating income or loss?

        2. What is the present break even point in units and in dollar sales’?

        3. Assuming that the marketing studies are correct, what is the maximum profit that the company can earn yearly? At how many units and at what selling price per unit would the company generate this profit?

        4. What would be the break even point in units and in sales dollars using the selling price you determined in (3) above (e.g., the selling price at the level of maximum profits)? Why is this break even point different from the break even point you computed in (2) above?

        monterey co makes and sells a single product the current 275244

        Monterey Co. makes and sells a single product. The current selling price is $15 per unit. Variable expenses are $9 per unit, and fixed expenses total $27,000 per month.

        Required:

        (Unless otherwise stated, consider each requirement separately.)

        a. Calculate the break even point expressed in terms of total sales dollars and sales volume.

        b. Calculate the margin of safety and the margin of safety ratio. Assume current sales are $75,000.

        c. Calculate the monthly operating income (or loss) at a sales volume of 5,400 units per month.

        d. Calculate monthly operating income (or loss) if a $2 per unit reduction in selling price results in a volume increase to 8,400 units per month.

        e. What questions would have to be answered about the cost–volume–profit analysis simplifying assumptions before adopting the price cut strategy of part d?

        f. Calculate the monthly operating income (or loss) that would result from a $1 per unit price increase and a $6,000 per month increase in advertising expenses, both relative to the original data. Assume a sales volume of 5,400 units per month.

        g. Management is considering a change in the sales force compensation plan. Currently each of the firm’s two salespeople is paid a salary of $2,500 per month. Calculate the monthly operating income (or loss) that would result from changing the compensation plan to a salary of $400 per month, plus a commission of $0.80 per unit, assuming a sales volume of

        1. 5,400 units per month.

        2. 6,000 units per month.

        h. Assuming that the sales volume of 6,000 units per month achieved in part g could also be achieved by increasing advertising by $1,000 per month instead of changing the sales force compensation plan, which strategy would you recommend? Explain your answer.

        naylor company currently produces and sells 6 400 units annually 275275

        Naylor Company currently produces and sells 6,400 units annually of a product that has a variable cost of $18 per unit and annual fixed costs of $161,400. The company currently earns a $69,000 annual profit. Assume that Naylor has the opportunity to invest in new labor saving production equipment that will enable the company to reduce variable costs to $16 per unit. The investment would cause fixed costs to increase by $9,000 because of additional depreciation cost.

        Required

        a. Use the equation method to determine the sales price per unit under existing conditions (current equipment is used).

        b. Prepare a contribution margin income statement, assuming that Naylor invests in the new production equipment. Recommend whether Naylor should invest in the new equipment.

        ipo presentation 275277

        You work for a medium sized privately held electronics firm which is considering transitioning to a publically held organization. Your boss found out that you were taking business courses ata University and has asked you to prepare a presentation for upper level management to explain the process by which a privately held company would transition to publicly held company. He has asked you to describe the general accounting processes involved in establishing an initial public offering (IPO), including but not limited to accounting for all assets, liabilities and equities of the firm. Prepare a 15 20 slide professional MS PowerPoint presentation which covers the following:

        • Identify and explain the top five reasons private companies go public.
        • Explain information the firm is required to provide to the investor with complete transparency.
        • Compare and contrast the differences in accounting processes and procedures that medium sized companies such as yours go through when going public.
        • Discuss any concerns you believe the company should guard against while transitioning from privately held to publicly held (shareholder apprehension, fair market value, etc.) and provide solutions to each concern.

        Use the notes section in MS PowerPoint to explain your talking points. Use at least two charts and two additional graphics which support your points. Utilize at least three references (one of which may be your text) in your presentation.

        novelties inc produces and sells highly faddish products dire 275289

        Novelties, Inc., produces and sells highly faddish products directed toward the preteen market. A new product has come onto the market that the company is anxious to produce and sell. Enough capacity exists in the company’s plant to produce 30,000 units each month. Variable costs to manufacture and sell one unit would be $1.60, and fixed costs would total $40,000 per month. The Marketing Department predicts that demand for the product will exceed the 30,000 units that the company is able to produce. Additional production capacity can be rented from another company at a fixed cost of $2,000 per month. Variable costs in the rented facility would total $1.75 per unit, due to somewhat less efficient operations than in the main plant. The product would sell for $2.50 per unit.

        Required:

        1. Compute the monthly break even point for the new product in units and in total dollar sales. Show all computations in good form.

        2. How many units must be sold each month to make a monthly profit of $9,000?

        3. If the sales manager receives a bonus of 15 cents for each unit sold in excess of the break even point, how many units must be sold each month to earn a return of 25% on the monthly investment in fixed costs?

        conway and lawrence form a partnership by combining the assets and liabilities of th 275295

        Conway and Lawrence form a partnership by combining the assets and liabilities of their respective sole proprietorships. The following are the assets and liabilities of each partner and their market values.

        Conway

        Lawrence

        Asset

        Book value

        Market value

        Asset

        Book Value

        Market value

        Cash

        $20,000

        Cash

        $10,000

        Accounts receivable

        $5,000

        $3,000

        Equipmnet

        $50,000

        $30,000

        Note payable

        $10,000

        Accumulated Depreciation

        $15,000

        Inventory

        $25,000

        $28,000

        Accounts Payable

        $7,000

        Requirements:

        1

        Journalize the formation of the partnership.

        Journal

        Accounts

        Debit

        Credit

        Half way through the first year of operations Conway and Lawrence admit Korman to the partnership. Korman buys a 1/2 share for $37,000 in cash.

        2

        Journalize Korman’s admission to the partnership.

        Journal

        Accounts

        Debit

        Credit

        The net income for the first year of oprations was $50,000. After giving Conway a salary of $20,000, the rest of the net income is split evenly among the partners.

        3

        Prepare an income distribution worksheet.

        Income Distribution

        Net Income

        $50,000

        Conway

        Korman

        Lawrence

        4

        Journalize the closing of the income summary accounts to the capital accounts.

        Journal

        Accounts

        Debit

        Credit

        After 5 years of operation Conway, Korma, and Lawrence decide to dissolve their partnership. The following are the account balances before liquidation begins:

        Cash

        127,000

        The equipment is sold for $8,000

        Equipment

        20,000

        Note Payable

        6,000

        Capital, Conway

        65,000

        Capital,Korman

        40,000

        Capital, Lawrence

        36,000

        5

        Complete the liquidating worksheet.

        Liquidation

        Cash

        Equipment

        Note payable

        Conway

        Korman

        Lawrence

        6

        Journalize each step of the closing.

        Journal

        Accounts

        Debit

        Credit

        olongapo sports corporation is the distributor in the philippine 275306

        Olongapo Sports Corporation is the distributor in the Philippines of two premium golf balls—the Flight Dynamic and the Sure Shot. Monthly sales, expressed in pesos (P), and the contribution margin ratios for the two products follow:



        Fixed expenses total P183,750 per month.

        Required:

        1. Prepare a contribution format income statement for the company as a whole. Carry computations to one decimal place.

        2. Compute the break even point for the company based on the current sales mix.

        3. If sales increase by P100,000 a month, by how much would you expect net operating income to increase? What are yourassumptions?

        operating leverage margin of safety and cost behavior in the 275316

        Operating leverage, margin of safety, and cost behavior In the early years of the 21st century the housing market in the United States was booming. Housing prices were increasing rapidly, new houses were being constructed at a record pace, and companies doing business in the construction and home improvement industry were enjoying rising profits. In 2006 the real estate market had slowed considerably, and the slump continued through 2007.

        Home Depot was one major company in the building supplies industry that was adversely affected by the slowdown in the housing market. On August 14, 2007, it announced that its revenues for the first half of the year were 3 percent lower than revenues were for the first six months of 2006. Of even greater concern was the fact that its earnings for the first half of 2007 were 21 percent lower than for the same period in the prior year.

        Required

        Write a memorandum that explains how a 3 percent decline in sales could cause a 21 percent decline in profits. Y our memo should address the following:

        a. An identification of the accounting concept involved.

        b. A discussion of how various major types of costs incurred by Home Depot were likely affected by the decline in its sales.

        c. The effect of the decline in sales on Home Depot’s margin of safety.

        phoenix based comptronics manufactures audio speakers 275339

        Phoenix based CompTronics manufactures audio speakers for desktop computers. The following data relate to the period just ended when the company produced and sold 42,000 speaker sets:

        Sales:$4,032,000

        Variable costs:1,008,000

        Fixed costs:2,736,000

        Management is considering relocating its manufacturing facilities to northern Mexico to reduce costs.

        Variable costs are expected to average $21.60 per set; annual fixed costs are anticipated to be $2,380,800.

        (In the following requirements, ignore income taxes.)

        a. Determine the effect of an increase in direct material costs on the break even point.

        b. Determine the effect of an increase in fixed administrative costs on the unit contribution margin.

        c. Determine the effect of an increase in the unit contribution margin on net income.

        polaris inc manufactures two types of metal stampings for the 275346

        Polaris Inc. manufactures two types of metal stampings for the automobile industry: door handles and trim kits. Fixed costs equal $146,000. Each door handle sells for $12 and has variable costs of $9; each trim kit sells for $8 and has variable costs of $5.

        Required:

        1. What are the contribution margin per unit and the contribution margin ratio for door handles and for trim kits?

        2. If Polaris sells 20,000 door handles and 40,000 trim kits, what is the operating income?

        3. How many door handles and how many trim kits must be sold for Polaris to break even?

        4. Assume that Polaris has the opportunity to rearrange its plant to produce only trim kits. If this is done, fixed costs will decrease by $35,000, and 70,000 trim kits can be produced and sold. Is this a good idea? Explain.

        prachi company produces and sells disposable foil baking pans to 275352

        Prachi Company produces and sells disposable foil baking pans to retailers for $2.45 per pan. The variable costs per pan are as follows:

        Direct materials ………………..$0.27

        Direct labor ……………………..0.58

        Variable overhead ………………0.63

        Variable selling …………………0.17

        Fixed manufacturing costs total $131,650 per year. Administrative costs (all fixed) total $18,350.

        Required:

        1. Compute the number of pans that must be sold for Prachi to break even.

        2. What is the unit variable cost? What is the unit variable manufacturing cost? Which is used in cost volume profit analysis and why?

        3. How many pans must be sold for Prachi to earn operating income of $12,600?

        4. How much sales revenue must Prachi have to earn operating income of $12,600?

        presented below is information related to junket corp august 1 275353

        Presented below is information related to Junket Corp. August 1 Junket Corp. sold to Sharper Co. merchandise having a sales price of $21,000 with terms 1/10, net/60. Junket records its sales and receivables net.

        5 Accounts receivable of $57,000 (gross) are factored with Easy Credit Corp. with recourse at a financing charge of 5%. Cash is received for the proceeds; collections are handled by the finance company. (These accounts were all past the discount period.)

        9 Specific accounts receivable of $30,000 (gross) are pledged to Second Credit Corp. as security for a loan of $20,000 at a finance charge of 6% of the amount of the loan. The finance company will make the collections. (All the accounts receivable are past the discount period.)

        Sep. 29 Sharper Co. notifies Junket that it is bankrupt and will pay only 20% of its account. Give the entry to write off the uncollectible balance using the allowance method.

        (Note: First record the increase in the receivable when the discount period passed.)

        Instructions:

        Prepare all necessary entries in general journal form for Junket Corp.

        presented here is the income statement for big surf inc 275356

        Presented here is the income statement for Big Surf, Inc., for the month of May:

        Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 65,000

        Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,500

        Gross profit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 11,500

        Operating expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,000

        Operating loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (2,500)

        Based on an analysis of cost behavior patterns, it has been determined that the company’s contribution margin ratio is 30%.

        Required:

        a. Rearrange the preceding income statement to the contribution margin format.

        b. If sales increase by 10%, what will be the firm’s operating income?

        c. Calculate the amount of revenue required for Big Surf, Inc., to break even.

        presented here is the income statement for edwards co for 275357

        Presented here is the income statement for Edwards Co. for February:

        Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $80,000

        Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,000

        Gross profit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $32,000

        Operating expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21,200

        Operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $10,800

        Based on an analysis of cost behavior patterns, it has been determined that the company’s contribution margin ratio is 35%.

        Required:

        a. Rearrange the preceding income statement to the contribution margin format.

        b. Calculate operating income if sales volume increases by 20%. (Note: Do not construct an income statement to get your answer.)

        c. Calculate the amount of revenue required for Edwards to break even.

        refer to the data in exercise 4 32 suppose that in 275397

        Refer to the data in Exercise 4 32. Suppose that in the coming year, Switzer plans to produce an extra thick yoga mat for sale to health clubs. The company estimates that 20,000 mats can be sold at a price of $18 and a variable cost per unit of $13. Fixed costs must be increased by $48,350 (making total fixed costs of $118,350). Assume that anticipated sales of the other products, as well as their prices and variable costs, remain the same.

        Required:

        1. What is the sales mix of DVDs, equipment sets, and yoga mats?

        2. Compute the break even quantity of each product.

        3. Prepare an income statement for Switzer for the coming year. What is the overall contribution margin ratio? The overall break even sales revenue?

        4. Compute the margin of safety for the coming year in sales dollars. (Round the contribution margin ratio to three significant digits; round the break even sales revenue to the nearest dollar.)

        reveen products sells camping equipment one of the company s pr 275416

        Reveen Products sells camping equipment. One of the company’s products, a camp lantern, sells for $90 per unit. Variable expenses are $63 per lantern, and fi xed expenses associated with the lantern total $135,000 per month.

        Required:

        1. Compute the company’s break even point in number of lanterns and in total sales dollars.

        2. If the variable expenses per lantern increase as a percentage of the selling price, will it result in a higher or a lower break even point? Why? (Assume that the fixed expenses remain unchanged.)

        3. At present, the company is selling 8,000 lanterns per month. The sales manager is convinced that a 10% reduction in the selling price will result in a 25% increase in the number of lanterns sold each month. Prepare two contribution income statements, one under present operating conditions, and one as operations would appear after the proposed changes. Show both total and per unit data on your statements.

        4. Refer to the data in (3) above. How many lanterns would have to be sold at the new selling price to yield a minimum net operating income of $72,000 per month?

        stages to calculating the customer and product profitability analysis for rockfield 275437

        3.4.1 The Implementation Stage

        The research work shall employ the below steps to implement customer and product profitability analysis using activity based costing approach following the below stages;

        FIGURE 11: STAGES TO CALCULATING THE CUSTOMER AND PRODUCT PROFITABILITY ANALYSIS FOR ROCKFIELD PETROLEUM PRODUCTS LIMITED

        F
        C
        B
        A
        E
        D

        A. FIGURE 12: Rockfield Petroleum Products Limited Business Process Flow

        Oloru Branch
        Odota Branch
        Fate Branch
        Retail Customers
        Wholesale Customers

        The case company’s first step after receiving confirmation of allocation ( allocation is usually on a time table at the depot pasted on the sign board for all to see so this has no process nor activity involved) is to make payment by purchasing bank draft which is taken to the depot to book for the loading of product in question (PMS,AGO or DPK), then the

        Company Depot Representive goes with the tanker driver to load the product and in the process has to make different payments related to loading charges at the depot, if he is loading outside the city (this is called bridging) the to and fro trip takes about three days but within the town one day. Then he makes supply to the station which is in need or at times shares the products for the three stations. The tanker driver is paid based only on amount of loading made although there are other expenses involved in running the vehicle too which varies depending on whether the company is using its own tanker or renting one for each trip. B.

        Products
        PMS
        AGO
        DPK

        FIGURE 13: Rockfield Petroleum Products Limited Retail Outlets, Products And Customer Segements.

        Rockfield Petroleum Products Limited

        FATE
        ODOTA
        OLORU
        ODOTA
        OLORU
        FATE
        ODOTA?
        OLORU
        FATE
        Roles
        ODOTA
        OLORU
        FATE

        FIGURE 14: Rockfield’s Hierachy Of Authority, Departments and roles C. FIGURE 15: Rockfield Petroleum Products Limited Cost Gathering And Classification The costs incured by the case company has been classified into three groups;

        General Costs
        Direct Costs
        Indirect Costs

        From observations from books of accounts and questions posed to the management staff the accounting records are kept in total sums of sales and costs, there was no where in the account that the company’s management staff could easily tell which product was most profitable and which customer segement was most profitable. According to them they are making good profit and everything is running perfectly as long as we have products to sell to meet our demands.

        The present accounts keeping method is represented by the figure below;

        FIGURE 16: ROCKFIELD PETROLEUM PRODUCTS LIMITED ACCOUNTS ACCOUNTING PROCESS NOW

        These costs are recorded as they are incured on daily basis
        Purchases, Depot/station supervisor purchases allowance, Tanker driver bridging cost, Tanker driver local cost, Local depot expenses, Bridging Depot expenses, M/Veh exp when bridging, Delivery charges to customers
        Chairman and Director’s Remuneration, Salaries, Motor vehicle monthly maintenance, Printing and stationaries, Postage and Telephone, Water Rate, Electricity, Promotion, Insurance, Bank charges, Legal fees, Security, equipment replacement, house rent for staff at Oloru, daily fueling of generators, medical bills
        Monthly
        Profit
        DAILY PROFIT ANALYSIS
        MINUS
        GROSS PROFIT
        TOTAL SALES REVENUE – TOTAL COST INCURED
        = GROSS PROFIT
        Total sales revenue
        Total cost incured
        OLORU
        ODOTA
        FATE
        ROAD



        The total sales at each branch are recorded and submitted to the Active director by the three various supervisors daily by five pm for the close of accounts and all other transactions are recorded against the next day. The Active director then enters all transaction into his own summary of accounts book, balances it and then submit to the chairman whose duty is to go through what was spent, what came in, check accuracy in the balances and sign to seal the day’s transaction. The chairman is assisted by Accounting and Administrative staff to enable smooth running of operations in the company.

        D.

        Having identified the business process, operations, business, products and customers of Rockfield Petroleum Limited, the research shall eploy a multidimensional approach employing the use of activiy based costing method to calculate profits by product type and customers by segment and give a report on the results as appropriate.

        DIRECT COSTS
        DIRECT LABOUR
        INDIRECT COSTS

        FIGURE 17 : AN ACTIVITY BASED COSTING MODEL FOR ROCKFIELD PETROLEUM LIMITED

        Activity based costing aims to accurately calculate the total cost of the object of an organization. In a filling station business in Nigeria the final output is selling petroleum product to either retail customers or wholesale customers, however to get to this point of sales the company has to procure the products from the depot, transport it to their respective filling stations, store and the sell through dispensing pump on the pump island. For example the Purchasing Department ABC structure; Thus having studied Rockfield Petroleum limited extensively for the purpose of this research in the below table is a summary of its activity cost pools and drivers that shall be used to properly allocate the indirect costs to the activity center it took place and the activites responsible for its cause.
        Table: Rockfeild Petroleum Products Limited Acitivity cost pools and Cost drivers

        ACTIVITY COST POOLS ACTIVITY COST DRIVERS ACTIVITY CATEGORIES
        Purchasing Department Number of product loaded Batch Level Activity
        Sales Department Cost per Liter Unit Level Activity
        Facility Management Department Cost per Liter Unit Level Activity
        Administrative Department Cost per liter Unit Level Activity
        Delivery Number of Order Batch Level Activity

        Attachments:

        sohrwide company produces a variety of chemicals one division m 275456

        Sohrwide Company produces a variety of chemicals. One division makes reagents for laboratories. The division’s projected income statement for the coming year is:

        Sales (128,000 units @ $50) ………………..$6,400,000

        Less: Variable expenses ………………………4,480,000

        Contribution margin …………………………$1,920,000

        Less: Fixed expenses …………………………1,000,000

        Operating income …………………………….$ 920,000

        Required:

        1. Compute the contribution margin per unit, and calculate the break even point in units (round to the nearest unit). Calculate the contribution margin ratio and the break even sales revenue.

        2. The divisional manager has decided to increase the advertising budget by $100,000. This will increase sales revenues by $1 million. By how much will operating income increase or decrease as a result of this action?

        3. Suppose sales revenues exceed the estimated amount on the income statement by $315,000. Without preparing a new income statement, by how much are profits underestimated?

        4. Compute the margin of safety based on the original income statement.

        5. Compute the degree of operating leverage based on the original income statement. If sales revenues are 20 percent greater than expected, what is the percentage increase in operating income? Round operating leverage to two decimal places.

        soldner health care products inc expects to maintain the same 275458

        Soldner Health Care Products Inc. expects to maintain the same inventories at the end of 2010 as at the beginning of the year. The total of all production costs for the year is therefore assumed to be equal to the cost of goods sold. With this in mind, the various department heads were asked to submit estimates of the costs for their departments during 2010. A summary report of these estimates is as follows:

        ?

        It is expected that 20,000 units will be sold at a price of $100 a unit. Maximum sales within the relevant range are 25,000 units.

        Instructions

        1. Prepare an estimated income statement for 2010.

        2. What is the expected contribution margin ratio?

        3. Determine the break even sales in units.

        4. Construct a cost volume profit chart indicating the break even sales.

        5. What is the expected margin of safety in dollars and as a percentage of sales?

        6. Determine the operatingleverage.

        sprint nextel is one of the largest digital wireless service 275466

        Sprint Nextel is one of the largest digital wireless service providers in the United States. In a recent year, it had 39.7 million direct subscribers (accounts) that generated revenue of $14,647 million. Costs and expenses for the year were as follows (in millions):

        Cost of revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $6,091

        Selling, general, and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . 4,411

        Depreciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,557

        Assume that 70% of the cost of revenue and 40% of the selling, general, and administrative expenses are variable to the number of direct subscribers (accounts).

        a. What is Sprint Nextel’s break even number of accounts, using the data and assumptions above? Round units to the nearest million.

        b. How much revenue per account would be sufficient for Sprint Nextel to break even if the number of accounts remained constant?

        kdp currently has a a 754 election in effect and has no hot assets or liabilities wh 424063

        Kathy is a 25% partner in the KDP Partnership and receives $120,000 cash in complete liquidation of her partnership interest. Kathy’s outside basis immediately before the distribution is $160,000. KDP currently has a A?§ 754 election in effect and has no hot assets or liabilities. Which of the following statements is true?

        KDP will step up the basis of its assets by $40,000 and Kathy will recognize a $40,000 loss on the distribution.

        KDP will step up the basis of its assets by $40,000 and Kathy will recognize a $40,000 gain on the distribution.

        KDP will step down the basis of its assets by $40,000 and Kathy will recognize a $40,000 loss on the distribution.

        KDP will step down the basis of its assets by $40,000 and Kathy will recognize a $40,000 gain on the distribution.

        product and period cost 424111

        Knight Company reports the following costs and expenses in May.

        Factory utilities $17,316 Direct labor $73,352
        Depreciation on factory equipment 14,568 Sales salaries 49,951
        Depreciation on delivery trucks 4,275 Property taxes on factory building 3,108
        Indirect factory labor 51,419 Repairs to office equipment 1,772
        Indirect materials 82,800 Factory repairs 2,809
        Direct materials used 141,547 Advertising 15,546
        Factory manager’s salary 8,388 Office supplies used 3,261

        From the information, determine the total amount of:

        (a) Manufacturing overhead $
        (b) Product costs $
        (c) Period costs $

        chapter 26 managerial accounting analyzing a capital investment proposal 424116

        Kolev, LLC is debating whether to invest in new equipment to manufacture a line of high quality luggage. The new equipment would cost $900,000, with an estimated four year life and no salvage value. The estimated annual operating results with the new equipment are as follows:

        Revenue from sales of new luggage $ 959,000
        Expenses other than depreciation $ 675,000
        Depreciation (straight line basis) 225,000 (900,000 )





        Increase in net income from the new line $ 59,000







        All revenue from the new luggage line and all expenses (except depreciation) will be received or paid in cash in the same period as recognized for accounting purposes.

        a.

        Compute the annual cash flows for the investment in the new equipment to produce the new luggage line to produce the new luggage line. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Annual cash flows $

        b.

        Compute the payback period for the investment in the new equipment to produce the new luggage line.(Round your answer to the nearest whole number.)

        Payback period years
        c.

        Compute the return on average investment for the investment in the new equipment to produce the new luggage line. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

        Return on average investment %
        d.

        Compute the total present value of the expected future annual cash inflows, discounted at an annual rate of 10 percent for the investment in the new equipment to produce the new luggage line. (Use Exhibit 26 4.) (Round your “PV factor” to 3 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Total present value $

        e.

        Compute the net present value of the proposed investment discounted at 10 percent for the investment in the new equipment to produce the new luggage line. (Use Exhibit 26 4.) (Round your “PV factor” to 3 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Net present value $

        ch 21 424132

        Krauss Leasing Company signs a lease agreement on January 1, 2013, to lease electronic equipment to Stewart Company. The term of the noncancelable lease is 2 years, and payments are required at the end of each year. The following information relates to this agreement.

        1. Stewart has the option to purchase the equipment for $16,040 upon termination of the lease.
        2. The equipment has a cost and fair value of $228,700 to Krauss Leasing Company. The useful economic life is 2 years, with a salvage value of $16,040.
        3. Stewart Company is required to pay $6,580 each year to the lessor for executory costs.
        4. Krauss Leasing Company desires to earn a return of 8% on its investment.
        5. Collectibility of the payments is reasonably predictable, and there are no important uncertainties surrounding the costs yet to be incurred by the lessor.


        (a) Prepare the journal entries on the books of Krauss Leasing to reflect the payments received under the lease and to recognize income for the years 2013 and 2014.

        what is the amount and character of harrison s recognized gain or loss and what is h 424137

        Kristen and Harrison are equal partners in the KH Partnership. The partners formed the partnership 5 years ago by contributing cash. Prior to any distributions Harrison has a basis in his partnership interest of $44,000. On December 31, KH makes a proportionate operating distribution of $50,000 cash to Harrison. What is the amount and character of Harrison’s recognized gain or loss and what is his remaining basis in KH?

        $0 gain, $0 basis

        $6,000 capital gain, $0 basis

        $6,000 capital loss, $0 basis

        $6,000 capital gain, $44,000 basis

        prepare journal entries help please thank you 424158

        The Lahn Company produces and sells a single product. Standards have been established for the product as follows:

        Direct materials: 5 pounds @ $3.50 per pound = $17.50

        Direct labor: 3 hours @ $5.50 per hour = $16.50

        Actual cost and usage figures for the past month follow:

        Units Produced 750

        Direct Materials Used 4,000

        Direct Materials Purchased(4500 lbs) $14,400 lbs

        Direct Labor Cost(2,000 hrs) $11,200

        Prepare journal entries to record:

        A)The purchase of raw materials.

        (Click to select)Materials quantity varianceMaterials price varianceAccounts receivableAccounts payableRaw materials inventoryLabor rate varianceLabor efficiency varianceWork in process
        (Click to select)Materials price varianceLabor efficiency varianceLabor rate varianceAccounts receivableRaw materials inventoryWork in processAccounts payable
        (Click to select)Raw materials inventoryAccounts payableWork in processAccounts receivableMaterials price varianceLabor efficiency varianceLabor rate variance

        b.

        The usage of raw materials in production.

        (Click to select)Accounts payableLabor efficiency varianceMaterials quantity varianceLabor rate varianceMaterials price varianceAccounts receivableWork in process
        (Click to select)Labor efficiency varianceMaterials price varianceWork in processAccounts receivableAccounts payableLabor rate varianceMaterials quantity variance
        (Click to select)Accounts receivableAccounts payableMaterials price varianceLabor rate varianceWork in processMaterials quantity varianceRaw materials inventoryLabor efficiency variance

        c. The incurrence of direct labor cost.

        (Click to select)Accounts receivableLabor rate varianceLabor efficiency varianceMaterials price varianceWork in processRaw materials inventoryAccounts payable
        (Click to select)Raw materials inventoryLabor rate varianceAccounts payableLabor efficiency varianceWork in processAccounts receivableMaterials price variance
        (Click to select)Materials price varianceLabor rate varianceMaterials quantity varianceAccounts payableAccounts receivableAccrued wages payableLabor efficiency variance
        (Click to select)Materials quantity varianceLabor rate varianceAccrued wages payableAccounts payableMaterials price varianceLabor efficiency varianceAccounts receivable

        accounting fifo lifo 424212

        Late in the year, Software City began carrying WordCrafter, a new word processing software program. At December 31, Software City’s perpetual inventory records included the following cost layers in its inventory of WordCrafter programs:

        Purchase Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
        Nov. 14 8 $ 400 $ 3,200
        Dec. 12 20 310 6,200



        Total available for sale at Dec. 31 28 $ 9,400







        a.

        At December 31, Software City takes a physical inventory and finds that all 28 units of Word Crafter are on hand. However, the current replacement cost (wholesale price) of this product is only $250 per unit.

        a 1

        Prepare the entries to record this write down of the inventory to the lower of cost or market at December 31. (Company policy is to charge LCM adjustments of less than $2,000 to Cost of Goods Sold and larger amounts to a separate loss account.) (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)


        debit

        credit



        a 2

        Prepare the entries to the cash sale of 15 WordCrafter programs on January 9, at a retail price of $350 each. Assume that Software City uses the FIFO flow assumption. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        debit

        credit


        debit

        credit



        b.

        Now assume that the current replacement cost of the WordCrafter programs is $405 each. A physical inventory finds only 25 of these programs on hand at December 31. (For this part, return to the original information and ignore what you did in part a.)



        b 1

        Prepare the journal entry to record the shrinkage loss assuming that Software City uses the FIFO flow assumption. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)


        debit

        credit



        b 2

        Prepare the journal entry to record the shrinkage loss assuming that Software City uses the LIFO flow assumption. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        debit

        credit

        accounting 102 help confusing project 424253

        The Lester (Ratio computations and preparations of statements) Lester Fredrick corporation has in recent years maintained the following relationship among the data on its financial statement :
        1. Gross profit rate on net sale 30%
        2. Net profit margin on net sales 8%
        3. Rate of selling expenses to net sales 15%
        4. Accounts receivable turnover 8per year
        5. Inventory turnover 10per year
        6. Acid test ratio 2 to 1
        7. Current ratio 3 to 1
        8. Quick asset composition:8% cash,27% marketable securities, 65% accounts receivable
        9. Asset turnover 2 per year
        10. Ratio of total assets to intangible assets 20 to 1
        11. Ratio of accumulated depreciation to cost of fixed assets 1 to 3
        12. Ratio of accounts receivable to accounts payable 2 to 1
        13. Ratio of working capital to stockholders equity 1 to 1.95
        14. Ratio of total debt to stockholders equity 1 to 3
        The corporation had a net income after tax of $520000 for the year ended December 31,2003,which resulted in earnings of 9.74 per share of common stock. Addition information includes the following:
        1. Capital stock authorized, issued(all in 1982), and outstanding:
        Common, $10 per share par value, issued at 10% premium
        Preferred, 11% nonparticipating,$100 per share par value, issued at a 10% premium
        2. Market value per share of common at December 31,2008:$119.52
        3. Preferred dividends paid in 2003: $33000
        4. Times interest earned in 2003: 28.73
        5. The amounts of the following were the same at December 31,2008,as at January 1,2003: inventory, account receivable, 10% bonds payable due 2006,and total stockholders’ equity
        6. All purchases and sales were “on account“
        INSTRUCTION
        (a) Prepare in good form the condensed (1)balance sheet and (2)income statement and Retained Earnings Statement for the year ending December 31,2003, presenting the amounts you would expect to appear on the Lester Fredrick Corporation`s financial statements. The company`s tax rate in 2003 was 30%.Major caption appearing on Lester Frederick`s balance sheet are: Current Assets(list each of the current assets), Property, plant and equipment , Intangible Assets, Current Liabilities (list each current liabilities),Long Term Liabilities, and Stockholders` Equity (list each section). In addition to the accounts divulged in the problem, you should include accounts for Prepaid Expenses, Accrued Expenses, and Administrative Expenses.
        (b) Note: For each amount used to prepare the three financial statements, please show computations.
        (c) Compute the following for 2003 (show your computation):
        1. Rate of return on common stockholders’ equity
        2. Price earnings ratio for common stock
        3. Dividends paid per share of common stock
        4. Dividends paid per share of preferred stock
        5. Dividends yield on common stock

        absorption costing 424258

        The level of inventory of a manufactured product has increased by 7,000 units during a period. The following data are also available:

        Variable Fixed
        Unit manufacturing costs of the period $12.00 $6.00
        Unit operating expenses of the period 4.00 1.50

        What would be the effect on income from operations if absorption costing is used rather than variable costing? Answer

        a. $52,500 increase
        b. $42,000 increase
        c. $52,500 decrease
        d. $42,000 decrease

        average number of common shares outstanding was 100 000 and preferred dividends were 424261

        In computing earnings per share, assume that the average number of common shares outstanding was 100,000 and preferred dividends were $100,000. (Round earnings per share to the nearest cent.) Save your calculations and enter the requested amounts below. b. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, 2014. Save your calculations and enter the requested amounts below. c. Prepare a balance sheet in report form as of December 31, 2014. Save your calculations and enter the requested amounts below.

        Document Preview:

        In computing earnings per share, assume that the average number of common shares outstanding was 100,000 and preferred dividends were $100,000. (Round earnings per share to the nearest cent.) Save your calculations and enter the requested amounts below. b. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, 2014. Save your calculations and enter the requested amounts below. c. Prepare a balance sheet in report form as of December 31, 2014. Save your calculations and enter the requested amounts below. If required, only use the minus sign to indicate net loss before income tax, net loss, or a deficit balance in retained earnings. Gross profit?$??Total selling expenses?$??Total administrative expenses?$??Total operating expenses?$??Income from operations?$??Net other expenses and income?$??Income tax?$??Net income?$?????Earnings per common share (rounded to the nearest cent)?$??Retained earnings, January 1, 2014?$??Total current assets?$??Investment in Dream Inc. bonds?$??Total property, plant, and equipment?$??Total assets?$??Total current liabilities?$??Net long term liabilities?$??Total liabilities?$??Total paid in capital preferred 5% stock?$??Total paid in capital common stock, $20 par?$??Total paid in capital?$??Retained earnings, December 31, 2014?$??Total stockholders’ equity?$??

        Attachments:

        accounting 1 5 424349

        Locksafe company manufactures burglar resistant commercial door locks. Recently, the company began selling locks on the web, and the company expects sales to increase dramatically compared with the prior year. For the past year, 2011, unit sales were as follows:
        First quarter 23,000 units
        Second quarter 28,000 units
        Third quarter 27,000 units
        Fourth quarter 32,000 units
        REQUIRED: Assume that sales for each quarter in 2012 will be 25% higher than they were in 2011 and the selling price per lock is $15 Prepare a sales budget by quarter for 2012.
        Locksafe Company sales budget for the year ending December 31, 2012
        Quarter1 Quarter2 Quarter3 Quarter4 Year Sales for 2011 in units _______ ______ ______ ______ ___ Projected sales at 125% of prior year _______ _______ ______ ______ ___ Sales price per unit _______ _______ ______ ______ ___ Budgeted revenue for 2012 _______ _______ ______ ______ ___

        accounting fifo lifo 424422

        Mach IV Audio uses a periodic inventory system. One of the store’s most popular products is an MP3 car stereo system. The inventory quantities, purchases, and sales of this product for the most recent year are as follows:

        Number
        of Units
        Cost
        per Unit
        Total Cost
        Inventory, Jan. 1 10 $ 299 $ 2,990
        First purchase (May 12) 15 306 4,590
        Second purchase (July 9) 20 308 6,160
        Third purchase (Oct. 4) 8 315 2,520
        Fourth purchase (Dec. 18) 19 320 6,080



        Goods available for sale 72 $ 22,340
        Units sold during the year 51




        Inventory, Dec. 31 21



        a.

        Using periodic costing procedures, compute the cost of the December 31 inventory and the cost of goods sold for the MP3 systems during the year under each of the following cost flow assumptions:(Round your unit cost values to 2 decimal places and your final answer to the nearest whole dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        langdon company produced 10 000 units during the past year but 275140

        Langdon Company produced 10,000 units during the past year, but only 9,000 of the units were sold. The following additional information is also available.

        Direct materials used …………………………………$90,000

        Direct labor incurred ………………………………….$30,000

        Variable manufacturing overhead …………………….$24,000

        Fixed manufacturing overhead ……………………….$50,000

        Fixed selling and administrative expenses ……………$70,000

        Variable selling and administrative expenses …………$10,000

        There was no work in process inventory at the beginning of the year, nor did Langdon have any beginning finished goods inventory.

        Instructions

        (a) What would be Langdon Company’s finished goods inventory cost on December 31 under variable costing?

        (b) Which costing method, absorption or variable costing, would show a higher net income for the year? By what amount?

        last year cul de sac co had sales of 740 000 275150

        Last year, Cul de sac Co. had sales of $740,000, based on a unit selling price of $200. The variable cost per unit was $120, and fixed costs were $260,000. The maximum sales within Cul de sac’s relevant range are 5,000 units. Cul de sac is considering a proposal to spend an additional $30,000 on billboard advertising during the current year in an attempt to increase sales and utilize unused capacity.

        Instructions

        1. Construct a cost volume profit chart indicating the break even sales for last year.

        Verify your answer, using the break even equation.

        2. Using the cost volume profit chart prepared in part (1), determine (a) the income from operations for last year and (b) the maximum income from operations that could have been realized during the year. Verify your answers arithmetically.

        3. Construct a cost volume profit chart indicating the break even sales for the current year, assuming that a noncancelable contract is signed for the additional billboard advertising. No changes are expected in the selling price or other costs. Verify your answer, using the break even equation.

        4. Using the cost volume profit chart prepared in part (3), determine (a) the income from operations if sales total 4,000 units and (b) the maximum income from operations that could be realized during the year. Verify your answers arithmetically.

        many politicians scientists economists and businesspeople hav 275191

        Many politicians, scientists, economists, and businesspeople have become concerned about the potential implications of global warming. The largest source of the emissions thought to contribute to global warming is from coal fired power plants. The cost of alternative energy has declined, but it is still higher than coal. In 1980, wind power electricity cost 80 cents per kilowatt hour. Using today’s highly efficient turbines with rotor diameters of up to 125 meters, the cost can be as low as 4 cents (about the same as coal), or as much as 20 cents in places with less wind.

        Some people have recently suggested that conventional cost comparisons are not adequate because they do not take environmental costs into account. For example, while coal is a very cheap energy source, it is also a significant contributor of greenhouse gases. Should environmental costs be incorporated into decision formulas when planners evaluate new power plants? The basic arguments for and against are as follows.

        YES: As long as environmental costs are ignored, renewable energy will appear to be too expensive relative to coal.

        NO: If one country decides to incorporate environmental costs into its decision making process but other countries do not, the country that does so will be at a competitive disadvantage because its products will cost more to produce.

        Instructions

        Write a response indicating your position regarding this situation. Provide support for your view.

        martin owns a machine shop in reviewing his utility bill 275201

        Martin owns a machine shop. In reviewing his utility bill for the last 12 months, he found that his highest bill of $2,800 occurred in August when his machines worked 1,400 machine hours. His lowest utility bill of $2,600 occurred in December when his machines worked 900 machine hours.

        Requirements

        1. Calculate (a) the variable rate per machine hour and (b) Martin’s total fixed utility cost.

        2. Show the equation for determining the total utility cost for Martin’s.

        3. If Martin’s anticipates using 1,200 machine hours in January, predict his total utility bill using the equation from Requirement 2.

        4. Draw a graph illustrating your total cost under this plan. Label the axes, and show your costs at 900, 1,200, and 1,400 machine hours.

        mary willis is the advertising manager for bargain shoe store 275205

        Mary Willis is the advertising manager for Bargain Shoe Store. She is currently working on a major promotional campaign. Her ideas include the installation of a new lighting system and increased display space that will add $24,000 in fixed costs to the $270,000 currently spent. In addition, Mary is proposing that a 5% price decrease ($40 to $38) will produce a 20% increase in sales volume (20,000 to 24,000). Variable costs will remain at $24 per pair of shoes. Management is impressed with Mary’s ideas but concerned about the effects that these changes will have on the break even point and the margin of safety.

        Instructions

        (a) Compute the current break even point in units, and compare it to the break even point in units if Mary’s ideas are used.

        (b) Compute the margin of safety ratio for current operations and after Mary’s changes are introduced. (Round to nearest full percent.)

        (c) Prepare a CVP income statement for current operations and after Mary’s changes are introduced. (Show column for total amounts only.) Would you make the changes suggested?

        mayhem manufacturing provides the following standard cost data f 275215

        Mayhem Manufacturing provides the following standard cost data for one of its products:

        Direct materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 feet at $3.15 per foot

        Direct labor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 hours at $12.55 per hour

        During the month of February, the following actual cost data were accumulated:

        Materials purchased . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125,000 feet at $3.00 per foot

        Materials used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,000 feet

        Direct labor incurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,000 hours at a total cost of $215,560

        Units produced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8,000 units

        Required:

        Compute the following variances:

        1. Materials price variance (this variance is computed at the time of purchase)

        2. Materials quantity variance

        3. Labor rate variance

        4. Labor efficiency variance

        media outlets such as espn and fox sports often have 275220

        Media outlets such as ESPN and Fox Sports often have Web sites that provide in depth coverage of news and events. Portions of these Web sites are restricted to members who pay a monthly subscription to gain access to exclusive news and commentary. These Web sites typically offer a free trial period to introduce viewers to the Web site. Assume that during a recent fiscal year, ESPN.com spent $1,800,000 on a promotional campaign for the ESPN.com Web site that offered two free months of service for new subscribers. In addition, assume the following information:

        Number of months an average new customer stays with the

        Service (including the two free months) 25 months

        Revenue per month per customer subscription $10.00

        Variable cost per month per customer subscription $2.00

        Determine the number of new customer accounts needed to break even on the cost of the promotional campaign. In forming your answer, (1) treat the cost of the promotional campaign as a fixed cost, and (2) treat the revenue less variable cost per account for the subscription period as the unit contribution margin.

        miller company s most recent contribution format 275230

        Miller Company’s most recent contribution format income statement is shown below:



        Required:

        Prepare a new contribution format income statement under each of the following conditions (consider each case independently):

        1. The number of units sold increases by 15%.

        2. The selling price decreases by $1.50 per unit, and the number of units sold increases by 25%.

        3. The selling price increases by $1.50 per unit, fixed expenses increase by $20,000, and the number of units sold decreases by 5%.

        4. The selling price increases by 12%, variable expenses increase by 60 cents per unit, and the number of units sold decreases by10%.

        dollar value lifo retail inventory method 423730

        On January 1, 2013, HGC Camera Store adopted the dollar value LIFO retail inventory method. Inventory transactions at both cost and retail, and cost indexes for 2013 and 2014 are as follows:

        2013 2014


        Cost Retail Cost Retail
        Beginning inventory $ 49,000 $ 70,000
        Net purchases 99,250 123,000 105,764 129,700
        Freight in 3,500 4,000
        Net markups 17,500 11,000
        Net markdowns 3,500 3,700
        Net sales to customers 124,460 116,240
        Sales to employees (net of 20% discount) 2,800 6,400
        Price Index:
        January 1, 2013 1.00
        December 31, 2013 1.04
        December 31, 2014 1.08

        Required:

        Estimate the 2013 and 2014 ending inventory and cost of goods sold using the dollar value LIFO retail inventory method.

        2013 2014

        Estimated ending inventory at retail

        Estimated ending inventory at cost

        Estimated COGS

        Dollar Value LIFO retail inventory method

        advanced accounting 423739

        On January 1, 2013, Marshall Company acquired 100 percent of the outstanding common stock of Tucker Company. To acquire these shares, Marshall issued $223,750 in long term liabilities and 21,200 shares of common stock having a par value of $1 per share but a fair value of $10 per share. Marshall paid $21,100 to accountants, lawyers, and brokers for assistance in the acquisition and another $16,550 in connection with stock issuance costs.

        Prior to these transactions, the balance sheets for the two companies were as follows:

        Marshall Company
        Book Value
        Tucker Company
        Book Value
        Cash $ 74,000 $ 7,650
        Receivables 243,000 92,850
        Inventory 332,000 185,000
        Land 255,000 222,000
        Buildings (net) 418,000 214,000
        Equipment (net) 195,000 74,000
        Accounts payable (194,000) (43,500)
        Long term liabilities (431,000) (258,000)
        Common stockAf?cAc‚¬”$1 par value (110,000)
        Common stockAf?cAc‚¬”$20 par value (120,000)
        Additional paid in capital (360,000) 0
        Retained earnings, 1/1/13 (422,000) (374,000)

        Note: Parentheses indicate a credit balance.

        In Marshall’s appraisal of Tucker, it deemed three accounts to be undervalued on the subsidiary’s books: Inventory by $6,500, Land by $21,450, and Buildings by $43,800. Marshall plans to maintain Tucker’s separate legal identity and to operate Tucker as a wholly owned subsidiary.

        a.

        Determine the amounts that Marshall Company would report in its postacquisition balance sheet. In preparing the postacquisition balance sheet, any required adjustments to income accounts from the acquisition should be closed to Marshall’s retained earnings. (Input all amounts as positive values.)

        Consolidated
        Totals
        Cash $
        Receivables
        Inventory
        Land
        Buildings
        Equipment

        Total assets $


        Accounts payable $
        Long term liabilities
        Common stock
        Additional paid in capital
        Retained earnings

        Total liabilities and equities $



        b.

        Prepare a worksheet to consolidate the balance sheets of these two companies as of January 1, 2013. (Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Enter the consolidation entries of ‘Investment in Tucker Company’ in order of (S) Elimination of subsidiary’s stockholders’ equity and (A) Allocation of Tucker’s consideration fair value in excess of book value. Input all amounts as positive values except for the credit balances which should be entered with the minus sign.)

        MARSHALL COMPANY AND CONSOLIDATED SUBSIDIARY
        Worksheet
        January 1, 2013
        Marshall Tucker

        Consolidation Entries

        Consolidated
        Accounts Company Company Debit Credit Totals
        Cash
        Receivables
        Inventory
        Land
        Buildings (net)
        Equipment (net)
        Investment in Tucker






        Total assets












        Accounts payable
        Long term liabilities
        Common stock
        Additional paid in capital
        Retained earnings, 1/1/13








        Total liabilities and owners’ equities
















        do you know 423745

        On January 1, 20X6, Climber Corporation acquired 90 percent of Wisden Corporation for $180,000 cash. Wisden reported net income of $30,000 and dividends of $10,000 for 20X6, 20X7, and 20X8. On January 1, 20X6, Wisden reported common stock outstanding of $100,000 and retained earnings of $60,000, and the fair value of the noncontrolling interest was $20,000. It held land with a book value of $30,000 and a market value of $35,000 and equipment with a book value of $50,000 and a market value of $60,000 at the date of combination. The remainder of the differential at acquisition was attributable to an increase in the value of patents, which had a remaining useful life of five years. All depreciable assets held by Wisden at the date of acquisition had a remaining economic life of five years. Climber uses the equity method in accounting for its investment in Wisden. Based on the preceding information, the increase in the fair value of patents held by Wisden is?

        managerial accounting i m beyond lost 423766

        On January 2, Fred Critchfield paid $19,000 for 930 shares of the common stock of Acme Company. Mr. Critchfield received an $0.79 per share dividend on the stock at the end of each year for six years. At the end of six years, he sold the stock for $22,000. Mr. Critchfield has a goal of earning a minimum return of 17% on all of his investments. (Ignore income taxes.)

        Click here to view Exhibit 11B 1 andExhibit 11B 2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.

        Required:
        a.

        Determine the net present value. (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, other intermediate calculations and final answer to the nearest whole dollar.)

        Net present value $

        b. Did Mr. Critchfield earn a 17% return on the stock?
        No
        Yes

        2.)

        Wriston Company has $220,000 to invest. The company is trying to decide between two alternative uses of the funds. The alternatives are as follows:

        A B
        Cost of equipment required $ 220,000 $ 0
        Working capital investment required $ 0 $ 220,000
        Annual cash inflows $ 95,000 $ 85,000
        Salvage value of equipment in four years $ 22,000 $ 0
        Life of the project 4 years 4 years

        The working capital needed for project B will be released for investment elsewhere at the end of four years. Wriston Company uses a 18% discount rate. (Ignore income taxes.)

        Click here to view Exhibit 11B 1 andExhibit 11B 2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.

        Required:
        a.

        Calculate net present value for each project. (Negative amounts should be indicated by a minus sign.Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, other intermediate calculations and final answers to the nearest whole dollar.)

        Net Present Value
        Project A $
        Project B $

        b. Which investment alternative (if either) would you recommend that the company accept?
        Project B
        Project A

        special order decision question e6 page 418 managerial accounting crosson and needle 423828

        Jen’s Sporting Goods, Inc. manufactures a complete line of sporting equipment. Leiden Enterprises operates a large chain of discount stores. Leiden has approached Jens with a special order for 30,000 deluxe baseballs. Instead of being packaged separately, the balls are to be packed in boxes containing 500 baseballs each. Leiden is willing to pay $2.45 per baseball. Jens knows that annual expected production is 400,000 baseballs. It also knows that the current year’s production is 410,000 baseballs and that the maximum production capacity is 450,000 baseballs. The following additional information is available:

        Standard unit cost data for 400,000 baseballs:

        Direct materials $0.90

        Direct Labor $0.60

        Overhead Variable $.50

        Fixed (100,000 divided by 400,000) $.25

        Packaging per unit $.030

        Advertising (60,000 divided by 400,000) $.015

        Other fixed selling and administrative expenses ($120,000 divided by $400,000) $.030

        Product unit cost $3.00

        Unit selling price $4.00

        Total estimated bulk packaging costs for special order (30,000 baseballs; 500 per box) $2,500

        1. Should Jens Sporting Goods, Inc., accept Leiden’s offer?

        2. What would be the minimum order price per baseball if Jens would like to earn a profit of $3,000

        from the special order?

        taxes 423880

        John and Ellen Brite are married and file a joint return. John owns an unincorporated specialty electrical lightning retail store, Brite On had the following assets on January 1, 2011: Old store building purchased April 1, 1999 $100,000 Equipment ( 7 years recovery) purchased January 10, 2006 30,000 Inventory valued using FIFO method: 4,000 light bulbs $5/bulb Brite On purchased a competitor’s store on March 1, 2011 for $107,000. The purchase price included the following: New store building $60,000 (FMV) Land 18,000 (FMV) Equipment(5 year recovery) 11,000 (FMV) Inventory:3000 light bulbs $6/bulb (cost) On June 30, 2011, Brite On sold the 7 year recovery period equipment for $12,000. Brite On leased a $30,500 car for $500/month beginning on January 1, 2011. The car is used 100% for business and was driven 14,000 miles during the year. Brite On sold 8,000 light bulbs in august 2011 at a cost of $7/bulb. Brite On had the following revenues (in addition to the sales of light bulbs) and additional expenses: Service revenues $64,000 Interest expenses on business loan 4000 Auto expenses (gas, oil, etc,) 3,800 Taxes and licenses 2,800 Salaries 24,000 John and Ellen also had some personal expenses: Medical bills $4,500 Real property taxes 3,800 Home mortgage interest 9,000 Charitable contribution (cash) 600 The Brites recived interest income on a bank saving account of $275. John and Ellen made four $5,000 quarterly estimated tax payments. For self employment tax purposes, assume John spent 100% of his time at the store while Ellen spends no time at the store. Additional Facts: Equipment acquired in 2006: The Brites elected out of bonus depreciation and did not elect Sec. 179. Equipment acquired in 2011: The Brites elected Sec. 179 to expense the cost of the 5 year equipment but elected out of bonus depreciation. Lease inclusion rules require that Brite On reduce its deductible lease expense by $15 Compute the Brite’s taxable income and balance due or refund for 2011

        john s house painting company has the 423885

        John’s House Painting Company has the following transactions for the year

        1. December 1 ‘ Issued capital stock for $100,000 to start a house painting business.

        2. December 1 Paid one year insurance premium costing $4,800. <?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” />

        3. December 1 Paid gas expense $200.

        4. December 1 Purchased equipment costing $4,800 on credit.

        5. December 12 Purchased supplies costing $800 on credit.

        6. December 18 Painted three houses totaling $12,000 and billed customers.

        7. December 23 Painted three rooms and billed customers $500.

        8. December 28 Received $2,000 for houses painted in #6.

        9. December 31 Paid for equipment purchased in #4.

        10. December 31 Received $1,000 for a job to paint a house in January next year.

        11. December 31 Paid a $1,000 dividend.

        Required:

        1. Prepare journal entries for the above transactions.

        2. Post the above transactions to T Accounts.

        3. Prepare a Trial Balance.

        4. Prepare adjusting entries in journal format and post to T Accounts.

        Supplies on Hand December 31 was $400.

        The Equipment is to be depreciated over 48 months starting with December.

        (HINT;Record one month depreciation expense)

        Wages owed but not paid on December 31 was $200.

        One month of insurance has expired.

        5. Prepare an Adjusted Trial Balance.

        6. Prepare an Income Statement, Statement of Retained Earnings and a Balance Sheet.

        7. Prepare closing entries in journal format and post to the T Accounts.

        8. Prepare a Post Closing Trial Balance.

        accounting 423982

        On June 1, 2012 Click Bottle Company sold $1,000,000 in long term bonds for $1,147,197. The bonds will mature in 10 years and have a stated interest rate of 8% and a yield rate of 6%. The bonds pay interest annually on May 31 of each year. The bonds are to be accounted for under the effective interest method.

        Instructions:

        A) Prepare the necessary journal entries to record the bonds sold on June 1, 2012 including accrued interest.

        B) Construct a bond amortization table for this problem to indicate the amount of interest expense and discount amortization at each may 31. Include only the first 4 years.

        C) The sales price of $1,147,197 was determined from present value tables. Specifically explain how one would determine the price using present value tables.

        D) Assuming that interest and discount amortization are recorded each May 31, prepare the adjusting entry to be made on December 31, 2013

        material and labor variance 424014

        During June, Danby Company’s material purchases amounted to 6,600 pounds at a price of $7.9 per pound. Actual costs incurred in the production of 2,300 units were as follows:

        Direct labor: $131,835 ($18.7 per hour)
        Direct material: $37,920 ($7.9 per pound)

        The standards for one unit of Danby Company’s product are as follows:
        Direct labor: Direct material:
        Quantity, 3 hours per unit Quantity, 2 pounds per unit
        Rate, $18.6 per hour Price, $7.6 per pound

        Required:

        Compute the direct material price and quantity variances and the direct labor rate and efficiency variances. Indicate whether each variance is favorable or unfavorable.

        Direct material price variance $ (Click to select)UnfavorableNoneFavorable
        Direct material quantity variance $ (Click to select)UnfavorableNoneFavorable
        Direct labor rate variance $ (Click to select)UnfavorableFavorableNone
        Direct labor efficiency variance $ (Click to select)FavorableUnfavorableNone

        managerial accounting constraint 424020

        PLEASE DO NOT JUST GIVE THE ANSWER BECAUSE I KNOW WHAT IT IS IM HAVING TROUBLE GETTING THERE THOUGH. THE ANSWER IS 9.56 BUT I KEEP GETTING $39.18.

        The constraint at Mcglathery Corporation is time on a particular machine. The company makes three products that use this machine. Data concerning those products appear below:

        UE BI CR
        Selling price per unit $335.04 $228.32 $199.07
        Variable cost per unit $259.54 $173.36 $159.89
        Minutes on the constraint 6.10 4.40 4.10

        Assume that sufficient time is available on the constrained machine to satisfy demand for all but the least profitable product. Up to how much should the company be willing to pay to acquire more of the constrained resource?

        wacc and cost of common equity 15 424042

        Kahn Inc. has a target capital structure of 60% common equity and 40% debt to fund its $8 billion in operating assets. Furthermore, Kahn Inc. has a WACC of 14%, a before tax cost of debt of 10%, and a tax rate of 40%. The company’s retained earnings are adequate to provide the common equity portion of its capital budget. Its expected dividend next year (D1) is $2 and the current stock price is $21.

        a. What is the company’s expected growth rate? Round your answer to two decimal places at the end of the calculations.
        _______ %

        b. If the firm’s net income is expected to be $1.3 billion, what portion of its net income is the firm expected to pay out as dividends? (Hint: Use Equation 10 9.)
        Round your answer to two decimal places at the end of the calculations.
        _________ %

        accounting 423226

        I have a spreadsheet template for this but I am not sure where to input the correct data. I need help with these questions

        Chapter Eight Problems

        Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.

        Chapter 8 Exercise 1:

        1. Basic present value calculations

        Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar:

        a. A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at a 12% rate of return.

        b. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at a 14% rate of return.

        c. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 10% rate of return.

        d. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has a 16% rate of return.

        Chapter 8 Exercise 4:

        4. Cash flow calculations and net present value

        On January 2, 20X1, Bruce Greene invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 20X1 and 20X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 20X3. On December 31, 20X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net present value method and desires a 16% return on investments.

        a. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note: Greene is entitled to the 20X3 dividend.

        b. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.

        c. Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.

        Chapter 8 exercise 5:

        5. Straightforwardnet present value and internal rate of return

        The City of Bedford is studying a 600 acre site on Route 356 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:

        Purchase cost: $450 per acre

        Site preparation: $175,000

        The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Bedford, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.

        a. Should the landfill be acquired if Bedford desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net present value method to determine your answer.

        Chapter 8 Problem 1:

        1. Straightforward net present value and payback computations

        STL Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:

        Cost of boat

        $500,000

        Service life

        10 summer seasons

        Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons

        $100,000

        Capacity per trip

        300 passengers

        Fixed operating costs per season (including straight line depreciation)

        $160,000

        Variable operating costs per trip

        $1,000

        Ticket price

        $5 per passenger

        All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 120,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.

        Instructions:

        By using the net present value method, determine whether STL Entertainment should acquire the boat. Assume a 14% desired return on all investments round calculations to the nearest dollar.

        Chapter 8 Problem 4:

        4. Equipment replacement decision

        Columbia Enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally cost $74,000. The equipment is expected to provide six more years of service if $8,700 of major repairs are performed in two years. Annual cash operating costs total $27,200. Columbia can sell the equipment now for $36,000; the estimated residual value in six years is $5,000.

        New equipment is available that will reduce annual cash operating costs to $21,000. The equipment costs $103,000, has a service life of six years, and has an estimated residual value of $13,000. Company sales will total $430,000 per year with either the existing or the new equipment. Columbia has a minimum desired return of 12% and depreciates all equipment by the straight line method.

        Instructions:

        a. By using the net present value method, determine whether Columbia should keep its present equipment or acquire the new equipment. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar, and ignore income taxes.

        b. Columbia’s management feels that the time value of money should be considered in all long term decisions. Briefly discuss the rationale that underlies management’s belief.

        infosys 423337

        One of India’s new high technology companies is Infosys, specializing in software development. Infosys is now listed on the NASDAQ, the first Indian company to be listed in the United States. While Infosys discloses more information than most Indian companies, as required by the SEC, the company voluntarily discloses a substantial amount of additional information, including a value added statement, an economic value added statement, brand valuations, current cost financial statements, and an “Intangible Assets Score Sheet” (see infosys.com for the most recent example of the intangible assets score sheet).

        Questions

        1. Discuss the reasons why Infosys might want to disclose additional information voluntarily.

        2. Explain and discuss the relevance of the information items disclosed in the intangible assets scoresheet. How would you interpret the changes from 2003 to 2004?

        3. Under what circumstances could voluntary disclosures by Infosys give rise to a competitive advantage rather than disadvantage?

        help 423374

        The individual financial statements for Gibson Company and Keller Company for the year ending December 31, 2013, follow. Gibson acquired a 60 percent interest in Keller on January 1, 2012, in exchange for various considerations totaling $510,000. At the acquisition date, the fair value of the noncontrolling interest was $340,000 and Keller’s book value was $670,000. Keller had developed internally a customer list that was not recorded on its books but had an acquisition date fair value of $180,000. This intangible asset is being amortized over 20 years.

        Gibson sold Keller land with a book value of $85,000 on January 2, 2012, for $170,000. Keller still holds this land at the end of the current year.

        Keller regularly transfers inventory to Gibson. In 2012, it shipped inventory costing $149,500 to Gibson at a price of $230,000. During 2013, intra entity shipments totaled $280,000, although the original cost to Keller was only $168,000. In each of these years, 20 percent of the merchandise was not resold to outside parties until the period following the transfer. Gibson owes Keller $45,000 at the end of 2013.

        comprehensive problem accounting iii 423423

        Intermediate Accounting III

        Comprehensive Problem

        You are about to begin working on a comprehensive problem. This means that when you prepare the journal entries and financial statements for this problem you need to follow ALL the rules applicable to the accounting process. You need to prepare the journal entries and financial statements as if you were doing it for your employer. Be sure to look over the grading rubric prior to starting this problem.

        Balance Sheet accounts are provided in the table below. *The debits and credits do not equal/balance because the net income earned so far this year ($79,000) has not yet been included in retained earnings. This amount will show up as part of the net income when you prepare the financial statements

        Account

        Debit

        Credit

        Cash

        100,000

        Trading Securities

        50,000

        Available for Sale Securities

        50,000

        Fair Value Adjustment AFS

        5,000

        Accounts Receivable

        75,000

        Receivable from Employee

        10,000

        Inventories

        200,000

        Assets Held for Sale

        25,000

        Cash Value of Insurance

        10,000

        Equipment

        54,000

        Accumulated Depreciation Equipment

        16,500

        Building

        96,000

        Accumulated Depreciation Building

        32,000

        Land

        25,000

        Goodwill

        275,000

        Accounts Payable

        80,000

        Interest Payable

        15,000

        Salaries Payable

        10,000

        Taxes Payable

        5,000

        Current Portion of Note

        40,000

        Note Payable (noncurrent portion of note)

        190,000

        Mortgage Liability

        110,000

        Common Stock

        300,000

        Retained Earnings

        92,500

        Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income/Loss

        5,000

        ______

        $975,000

        $896,000

        The following information relates to the revenues earned and expenses incurred during the first half of 2012.

        Debit

        Credit

        Sales

        $1,911,500

        Sales Returns and Allowances

        100,000

        Sales Discounts

        22,500

        Cost of Goods Sold

        1,240,000

        Selling Expenses

        250,000

        General and Administrative Expenses

        220,000

        Transactions occurring in 2012 but not considered in the current net income of 79,000 are as follows:

        1. On July 1st, the corporation entered into a lease agreement for a machine that qualifies as a capital lease. The lease calls for annual lease payments of $26,269 over a six year lease term, with the first payment at July 1st, the leases inception. The interest rate is 5%. *(Round your answer to the nearest whole dollar).

        2. On July 1st, the corporation sold a $15,000, 5 year bond with a stated rate of 8%. The effective yield on the bonds is 10%. Interest on the bond is paid semiannually on January 1st and July 1st. The company uses the effective interest method to amortize any bond discount or premium. *(Round your answer to the nearest whole dollar).

        3. One month following the issue of the bonds, the corporation invested $5,000 into a sinking fund in order to have the money to pay off the bonds when they come due.

        4. On September 3rd, the corporation experienced an uninsured flood loss (extraordinary) which destroyed the building. The tax rate is 40%.

        5. On September 20th, the company sold their shares in Hobokin Company resulting in a loss of $1,000 (pretax). See the portfolio tables below.

        6. When its president died, on October 8th, the corporation realized $110,000 from an insurance policy. The cash surrender value of this policy had been carried on the books as an investment in the amount of $10,000 (the gain is nontaxable).

        7. On November 1st, the corporation filed a suit against Tri Star, Inc. seeking damages for patent infringement. Legal counsel believes that it is probable that the company will be successful against Tri Star for an estimated amount in the range of $100,000 to $150,000, with all amounts in the range considered equally likely.

        8. On November 15th, the corporation disposed of its wholesale division at a loss of $5,000 before taxes. The wholesale operations were shut down at the beginning of the year. This transaction meets the criteria for discontinued operations. The assets associated with this sale are being classified as Af?cAc‚¬A??oAssets Held For SaleAf?cAc‚¬.

        9. The corporation decided to change its method of inventory pricing from average cost to the FIFO method. The effect of this change on prior years is to increase 2010 income by $60,000 and decrease 2011 income by $20,000 before taxes. The FIFO method has been used for 2012. The tax rate on these items is 40%.

        10. On December 18th, the corporation purchased 2,000 shares of its own common stock at $20 a share.

        11. On December 20th, the corporation paid off the current portion of the note payable along with the $15,000 in interest that had been accrued.

        12. December 31st, interest on the lease has accrued.

        13. December 31st, interest on the bonds has accrued.

        14. The company’s products carry a one year warranty against manufacturer’s defects. Warranty costs are expected to be 1% of net sales.

        15. At the beginning of 2011, the corporation purchased a piece of equipment for $54,000, salvage value of $9,000 that had a useful life of 6 years. The bookkeeper used straight line depreciation for 2011 and 2012. However, in 2012 the bookkeeper failed to deduct the salvage value in computing the depreciation base (an error was made). The journal entry for this year depreciation has already been made, but a correcting entry is required to fix the mistake.

        16. Adjust the Trading securities and AFS securities to their respective fair values. See the portfolio tables below.

        Portfolio Tables

        AFS Securities Portfolio

        Cost

        Fair Value 2011

        Fair Value 2012

        Disney Corporation

        $5,000

        $8,000

        $10,000

        Monster Truck, Inc.

        25,000

        20,000

        22,000

        Hobokin Company

        20,000

        17,000

        ______

        Totals

        $50,000

        $45,000

        $32,000

        Trading Securities Portfolio

        Cost

        Fair Value 2011

        Fair Value 2012

        GM Company

        $15,000

        $20,000

        $23,000

        Shaffer Corporation

        35,000

        30,000

        34,000

        Totals

        $50,000

        $50,000

        $57,000

        Required:

        A. Journalize transactions 1 16. The corporation’s tax rate is 40%.

        B. Don’t forget to include a journal entry for your income taxes once you have prepared the income statement.

        C. Prepare a multiple step income statement, statement of retained earnings, and a balance sheet. Do each statement on a separate page in Excel and put your name as part of the company name on all of the statements (e.g., Frilly Things, Fay Barton). List Af?cAc‚¬A??oOther Comprehensive IncomeAf?cAc‚¬ below net income on the income statement. Be sure to list the unrealized holding gains & losses, but do not list them net of taxes. Use good form in preparing these financial statements. Financial statements will be graded on presentation which means that the proper categories and subcategories are to be used, proper placement of dollar values in appropriate columns as well as appropriate use of dollar signs and underlines, etc.

        internal or external acquisitions no opportunity costs the van division of motocar c 423442

        Internal or External Acquisitions:
        No Opportunity Costs
        The Van Division of MotoCar Corporation has offered to purchase 180,000 wheels from the Wheel Division for $42 per wheel. At a normal volume of 500,000 wheels per year, production costs per wheel for the Wheel Division are as follows:

        Direct materials $15
        Direct labor 10
        Variable overhead 5
        Fixed overhead 19
        Total $49

        The Wheel Division has been selling 500,000 wheels per year to outside buyers at $59 each. Capacity is 700,000 wheels per year. The Van Division has been buying wheels from outside suppliers at $55 per wheel.
        (a) Calculate the net benefit (or cost) to the Wheel Division of accepting the offer from the Van Division.

        $___per wheel
        (b) Calculate the net benefit (or cost) to Motocar Corp. if the Wheel Division accepts the offer from the Van Division.
        $___ per wheel

        help on chapter 12 accounting question please and thank you 423608

        Jackson County Senior Services is a nonprofit organization devoted to providing essential services to seniors who live in their own homes within the Jackson County area. Three services are provided for seniorsAf?cAc‚¬”home nursing, Meals On Wheels, and housekeeping. In the home nursing program, nurses visit seniors on a regular basis to check on their general health and to perform tests ordered by their physicians. The Meals On Wheels program delivers a hot meal once a day to each senior enrolled in the program. The housekeeping service provides weekly housecleaning and maintenance services. Data on revenue and expenses for the past year follow:

        Total Home Nursing Meals On Wheels House
        keeping
        Revenues $ 900,000 $ 260,000 $ 400,000 $ 240,000
        Variable expenses 490,000 120,000 210,000 160,000








        Contribution margin 410,000 140,000 190,000 80,000








        Fixed expenses:
        Depreciation 68,000 8,000 40,000 20,000
        Liability insurance 42,000 20,000 7,000 15,000
        Program administrators’ salaries 115,000 40,000 38,000 37,000
        General administrative overhead* 180,000 52,000 80,000 48,000








        Total fixed expenses 405,000 120,000 165,000 120,000








        Net operating income (loss) $ 5,000 $ 20,000 $ 25,000 $ (40,000)

















        *Allocated on the basis of program revenues.

        The head administrator of Jackson County Senior Services, Judith Miyama, is concerned about the organization’s finances and considers the net operating income of $5,000 last year to be too small. (Last year’s results were very similar to the results for previous years and are representative of what would be expected in the future.) She feels that the organization should be building its financial reserves at a more rapid rate in order to prepare for the next inevitable recession. After seeing the above report, Ms. Miyama asked for more information about the financial advisability of discontinuing the housekeeping program.

        The depreciation in housekeeping is for a small van that is used to carry the housekeepers and their equipment from job to job. If the program were discontinued, the van would be donated to a charitable organization. Depreciation charges assume zero salvage value. None of the general administrative overhead would be avoided if the housekeeping program were dropped, but the liability insurance and the salary of the program administrator would be avoided.

        Required:
        1a.

        What is the impact on net operating income by discontinuing housekeeping program? (Input the amount as a positive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        (Click to select)DecreaseIncrease in net operating income by $

        1b. Should the housekeeping program be discontinued?
        Yes
        No

        2.

        Would a segmented income statement format be more useful to management in assessing the long run financial viability of the various services.

        Yes
        No

        accounting help 423614

        Jackson County Senior Services is a nonprofit organization devoted to providing essential services to seniors who live in their own homes within the Jackson County area. Three services are provided for seniors—home nursing, Meals On Wheels, and housekeeping. In the home nursing program, nurses visit seniors on a regular basis to check on their general health and to perform tests ordered by their physicians. The Meals On Wheels program delivers a hot meal once a day to each senior enrolled in the program. The housekeeping service provides weekly housecleaning and maintenance services. Data on revenue and expenses for the past year follow:

         

            Total   Home Nursing   Meals On Wheels   House
        keeping
        Revenues $ 934,000 $ 268,000 $ 407,000 $ 259,000
        Variable expenses   473,000   115,000   207,000   151,000
         







        Contribution margin   461,000   153,000   200,000   108,000
         







        Fixed expenses:                
        Depreciation   69,900   8,400   40,800   20,700
        Liability insurance   43,800   20,200   7,900   15,700
        Program administrators’ salaries   115,700   40,100   38,700   36,900
        General administrative overhead*   186,800   53,600   81,400   51,800
         







        Total fixed expenses   416,200   122,300   168,800   125,100
         







        Net operating income (loss) $ 44,800 $ 30,700 $ 31,200 $ (17,100)
         
















        *Allocated on the basis of program revenues.

         

        The head administrator of Jackson County Senior Services, Judith Miyama, is concerned about the organization’s finances and considers the net operating income of $44,800 last year to be too small. (Last year’s results were very similar to the results for previous years and are representative of what would be expected in the future.) She feels that the organization should be building its financial reserves at a more rapid rate in order to prepare for the next inevitable recession. After seeing the above report, Ms. Miyama asked for more information about the financial advisability of discontinuing the housekeeping program.

        The depreciation in housekeeping is for a small van that is used to carry the housekeepers and their equipment from job to job. If the program were discontinued, the van would be donated to a charitable organization. Depreciation charges assume zero salvage value. None of the general administrative overhead would be avoided if the housekeeping program were dropped, but the liability insurance and the salary of the program administrator would be avoided.

         

        Required:
        1a.

        What is the impact on net operating income by discontinuing housekeeping program? (Input the amount as apositive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

         

        Questions No.2

        Climate Control, Inc., manufactures a variety of heating and air conditioning units. The company is currently manufacturing all of its own component parts. An outside supplier has offered to sell a thermostat to Climate Control for $31 per unit. To evaluate this offer, Climate Control, Inc., has gathered the following information relating to its own cost of producing the thermostat internally:

         

            Per Unit   14,600 Units
        per year
        Direct materials $ 9 $ 131,400
        Direct labor   11   160,600
        Variable manufacturing overhead   2   29,200
        Fixed manufacturing overhead, traceable   6*   87,600
        Fixed manufacturing overhead, common, but allocated   13   189,800
         



        Total cost $ 41 $ 598,600
         








        *40% supervisory salaries; 60% depreciation of special equipment (no resale value).

         

        Required:
        1a.

        Assuming that the company has no alternative use for the facilities now being used to produce the thermostat, compute the total cost of making and buying the parts. (Round your Fixed manufacturing overhead per unit rate to two decimals and your final answers to the nearest dollar amount.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

         

          Make Buy
        Total relevant cost (14,600 units) $ $

        2a.

        Suppose that if the thermostats were purchased, Climate Control, Inc., could use the freed capacity to launch a new product. The segment margin of the new product would be $116,360 per year. Compute the total cost of making and buying the parts. (Round your Fixed manufacturing overhead per unit rate to two decimals and your final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

         

          Make Buy
        Total relevant cost (14,600 units) $ $
         

        accounting 423618

        Jamal & Co. makes and sells two types of shoes, Plain and Fancy. Data concerning these products are as follows:

        Plain Fancy
        Unit selling price $25.00 $34.00
        Variable cost per unit 12.00 26.00

        Sixty percent of the unit sales are Plain, and annual fixed expenses are $60,500.

        rev: 10_29_2012
        A)The weighted average unit contribution margin is

        B)Assuming that the sales mix remains constant, the total number of units that Jamal must sell to break even is

        should janeiro make the deal 423653

        Janeiro Skate, Inc. currently manufactures the wheels that it uses for its in line skates. The annual costs to manufacture the 150,000 wheels needed each year are as follows:

        Total Cost
        Direct material $ 165,000

        Direct labor 45,000

        Variable overhead 60,000
        Fixed overhead 300,000

        Total $ 570,000

        Kasba Rubber Company has offered to provide Janeiro with all of its annual wheel needs for $3.50 per wheel. If Janeiro accepts this offer, 75% of the fixed overhead above could be totally eliminated. Also, Janeiro would be able to rent out the freed up space and could generate $72,000 of income annually.

        Here are my calculations…..

        Direct material<?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” /> $ 165,000.00 Direct labor $ 45,000.00 Variable overhead $ 60,000.00 Variable Cost $ 270,000.00 Fixed overhead (75%) $ 225,000.00 Total Variable Cost $ 495,000.00 Per unit variable cost $ 3.30 Per unit purchase price $ 3.50 Saving per unit $ (0.20) Saving in production $ (3,000.00) Rent revenue $ 72,000.00 Total savings $ 69,000.00

        Is this a wise deal for Janeiro to take? I don’t see them saving any money per unit or in production. But they are gaining $69k.

        cost accounting step down other please show calculations 422682

        Hello, can you show the calculations for these problems

        The RAH Manufacturing Company has two service departments: Maintenance and Accounting. The Maintenance Department’s costs of $300,000 are allocated on the basis of machine hours. The Accounting Department’s costs of $120,000 are allocated on the basis of the number of employees within a specific department. The direct departmental costs for A and B are $300,000 and $500,000, respectively.

        Maint Acctg A B

        machine hours 480 20 2300 200

        number of employees 2 2 8 4

        1. What is the cost of the Accounting Department’s cost allocated to Department A using the step method and assuming the Maintenance Department’s costs are allocated first?
          A. $81,333
          B. $81,587
          C. $80,000
          D. $68,571

        please show the calculations for this problem

        1. Last year, Twins Company reported $750,000 in sales (25,000 units) and a net operating income of $25,000. At the break even point, the company’s total contribution margin equals $500,000. Based on this information, the company’s:
          A. contribution margin ratio is 40%.
          B. break even point is 24,000 units.
          C. variable expense per unit is $9.
          D. variable expenses are 60% of sales.

        I know C is the answer for this one, but I do not know the calculations

        flexible budget variance overhead variance etc 422692

        Hello, I am having some difficulty with these problems. Can someone show me the calculations to these problems? Thanks!!

        Tommy’s Toys produces two types of toys: trains and dolls. Tommy’s uses stainless steel to manufacture the trains and plastic to manufacture the dolls. Information regarding the usage of steel and plastic for the past year follows:

        Product name Steel Plastic

        direct materials information

        standard pounds per unit 1lb .5 lb

        standard price per pound $1.5 ?

        actual quantity used per unit 1.5 lb .75 lb

        actual price paid for material $1.25 $2

        Actual quantity purchased and used 2500 lb 1200 lb

        price variance ? 900F

        quantity variance 206U ?

        flexible budget variance ? $522F

        number of units produced 275 550

        What is the direct materials flexible budget variance for steel used to manufacture the trains?
        A) $419 unfavorable
        B) $419 favorable
        C) $831 unfavorable
        D) $831 favorable

        Cave Hardware’s forecasted sales for April, May, June, and July are $200,000, $230,000, $190,000, and $240,000, respectively. Sales are 65% cash and 35% credit with all accounts receivables collected in the month following the sale. Cost of goods sold is 75% of sales and ending inventory is maintained at $60,000 plus 10% of the following month’s cost of goods sold. All inventory purchases are paid 22% in the month of purchase and 78% in the following month.

        What are the cash collections budgeted for June?
        A) $150,500
        B) $193,500
        C) $123,500
        $204,000

        What are the budgeted cash payments in June for inventory purchases?
        A) $495,000
        B) $315,750
        C) $164,385
        D) $167,415

        What is the balance of accounts payable on the June 30 budgeted balance sheet?
        A) $32,175
        B) $108,225
        C) $146,250
        D) $114,075

        Russo Corporation manufactured 16,000 air conditioners during November. The overhead cost allocation base is $31.50 per machine hour. The following variable overhead data pertain to November:
        Actual Budgeted
        Production 16,000 units 18,000 units
        Machine hours 7,875 hours 9,000 hours
        Variable overhead cost per machine hour: $31.00 $31.50

        What is the variable overhead spending variance?
        A) $4,500 unfavorable
        B) $3,937.50 unfavorable
        C) $4,500 favorable
        D) $3,937.50 favorable

        What is the total variable overhead variance?
        A) $7,875 unfavorable
        B) $3,937.50 f unfavorable
        C) $7,875 favorable
        $3,937.50 f favorable

        Crown Industries has the following information about its standards and production activity for December:
        Actual manufacturing overhead cost incurred, $92,500
        Variable manufacturing overhead cost @ $3.25 per unit produced
        Fixed manufacturing overhead cost @ $1.50 per unit produced
        ($22,500/15,000 budgeted units)
        Actual units produced, 5,400

        Assume the allocation base for fixed overhead costs is the number of units to be produced.

        How much are the total applied overhead for the month?
        A) $48,750
        B) $92,500
        C) $71,250
        D) $25,650

        act 350 422700

        Taylor Lewis Company has provided information on intangible assets as follows.

        A patent was purchased from Craig Company for $4,000,000 on June 1, 2010. Lewis estimated the remaining useful life of the patent to be eight years. The patent was carried in Craig’s accounting records at a net book value of $3,500,000 when Craig sold it to Lewis.

        During 2011, a franchise was purchased from Faragher Company for $360,000. In addition, 8% of revenue from the franchise must be paid to Faragher. Revenue from the franchise for 2011 was $1,950,000. Lewis estimates the useful life of the franchise to be 12 years and takes a full year’s amortization in the year of purchase.

        Lewis incurred research and development costs in 2010 as follows.

        Materials and equipment $286,500
        Personnel $153,700
        Indirect costs $ 95,355
        $535,555

        Lewis estimates that these costs will be recouped by December 31, 2014. The materials and equipment purchased have no alternative uses.

        On January 1, 2011, because of recent events in the field, Lewis estimates that the remaining life of the patent purchased on June 1, 2010, is only five years from January 1, 2011.

        1. Prepare a schedule showing the intangible section of Lewis’s balance sheet at December 31, 2011. Show supporting computations in good form.
        2. Prepare a schedule showing the income statement effect for the year ended December 31, 2011, as a result of the facts above. Show supporting computations in good form.

        mcgraw hill taxation of individuals 2013 appendix c problem 5 revised 422724

        PLEASE HELP I NEED AN ANSWER TO THIS QUESTION ASAP:

        Use the following information to prepare the Vances’ 2012 federal income tax return (Form 1040) including all of the supplementary schedules. Schedule A, Schedule B, Schedule C, Schedule D, Schedule E, Schedule SE, Form 2106 EZ, Form 2441, Form 4562 (for the dental practice), Form 4562 (for the rental property), Form 4684, Form 4797, Form 8863 and Form 8949 are required. Ignore any consideration of the AMT (the taxpayers are not in AMT), and make reasonable assumptions for general information that is not provided, if any. You may download the forms from the IRS website for which there is a link on Blackboard. You may access the instructions to the forms at the IRS site as well. When completing the forms please round each line item to the nearest dollar.

        In order to get a solid understanding of how the various tax forms are related, you are to do this assignment manually. You may not use any tax return preparation software. Please attach all supporting calculations that you make in completing the forms. At a minimum you must attach supporting calculations for the self employment tax and the deductible portion of self employment tax, the income tax (line 44 of Form 1040), any education credits taken, the child tax credit (if applicable), depreciation, and the gain or loss on assets sold (including the calculation for accumulated depreciation used to determine adjusted basis).

        1. Paul and Judy Vance are married and file a joint return. Paul is self employed as a dentist, and Judy is a college professor. Paul and Judy have five children. The oldest is Vince who lives at home. Vince is a law student at the University of Cincinnati and worked part time during the year, earning $1,500, which he spent for his own support. Paul and Judy provided $6,000 toward Vince’s support (including $4,000 for Vince’s tuition). They also provided over half the support (including $2,900 for tuition) of their daughter, Joan, who is a full time student at Edgecliff College in Cincinnati. Joan worked part time as a waitress during the year, earning $3,200. Joan lived at home until she was married on December 15, 2012. She filed a joint return with her husband, Patrick, who earned $28,000 during the year. The Vances’ youngest children are triplets, Jennifer, Alison and Erin. They lived in the Vances’ home for the entire year. The Vance’s provide you with the following additional information:

        A?· Paul and Judy would like to take advantage on their return of any educational expenses paid for their children.

        A?· The Vances do not want to contribute to the presidential election campaign.

        A?· The Vances live at 621 Franklin Avenue, Cincinnati, OH 45211 and their telephone number is (513)262 1141.

        A?· Paul’s birthday is March 5, 1958 and his Social Security number is 333 45 6666.

        A?· Judy’s birthday is April 24, 1961 and her Social Security number is 566 77 8888.

        A?· Vince’s birthday is November 6, 1989 and his Social Security number is 576 18 7928.

        A?· Joan’s birthday is February 1, 1993 and her Social Security number is 575 92 4321.

        A?· Jennifer, Alison and Erin’s birthday is December 12, 2007 and their Social Security numbers are 613 97 8465, 613 97 8466 and 613 97 8467, respectively.

        A?· The Vances do not have any foreign bank accounts or trusts.

        A?· If the Vances have an overpayment, they would like the overpayment applied to their 2013 estimated tax.

        2. Judy is a lecturer in the education department at Xavier University in Cincinnati, where she earned $62,000. The university withheld federal income tax of $7,150, state income tax of $1,900, Cincinnati city income tax of $700, $2,604 of Social Security tax, and $899 of Medicare tax.

        3. The Vances received $800 of interest from State Savings Bank on a joint account. They received interest of $1,000 on City of Cincinnati bonds they bought in January with the proceeds of a loan from Third National Bank of Cincinnati. They paid interest of $1,100 on the loan. Paul received a dividend of $540 on General Bicycle Corporation stock he owns. Judy received a dividend of $390 on Acme Clothing Corporation stock she owns. Paul and Judy received a dividend of $865 on jointly owned stock in Maple Company. All of the dividends received in 2012 are qualified dividends.

        4. Paul practices under the name Af?cAc‚¬A??oPaul J Vance, DDS.Af?cAc‚¬ His business is located at 645 West Avenue, Cincinnati, OH 45211, and his employer identification number is 01 2229867. Paul’s gross receipts during the year were $121,200. Paul uses the cash method of accounting for his business and did not make any payments in 2012 that require him to file Form 1099. Paul’s business expenses are as follows:

        Advertising

        $1,200

        Professional dues

        490

        Professional journals

        360

        Contributions to employee benefit plans

        2,000

        Malpractice insurance

        3,200

        Insurance on office contents

        720

        Fine for overbilling State of Ohio for work

        performed on welfare patient

        5,000

        Interest on money borrowed to refurbish office

        600

        Accounting services

        2,100

        Miscellaneous office expense

        388

        Office rent

        12,000

        Dental supplies

        7,672

        Utilities and telephone

        3,360

        Wages

        30,000

        Payroll taxes

        2,400

        Depreciation

        ?

        In July, Paul decided to renovate his office. This project was completed and the assets placed in service on August 12th. Paul’s expenditures included $8,000 for new office furniture, $6,000 for new dental equipment (7 year recovery period), and $2,000 for a new computer. Paul elected to compute his recovery allowance using MACRS. He did not elect to use Section 179 immediate expensing, and he chose to not claim any bonus depreciation. On September 8, 2012 he sold his old dental equipment for $1,900. He purchased the old equipment on March 14, 2007 for $4,800. Paul had been depreciating the old equipment using MACRS deprecation with a half year convention. No Section 179 immediate expensing or bonus depreciation was taken. The old furniture and computer were fully depreciated before 2012. They are being stored in the basement of his office for the time being.

        5. Judy’s mother, Sarah, died on July 2, 2007, leaving Judy her entire estate. Included in the estate was Sarah’s residence (325 Oak Street, Cincinnati, OH 45211). Sarah’s basis in the residence was $30,000. The fair market value of the residence on July 2, 2007, was $155,000. The property was distributed to Judy on January 4, 2008. The Vances have held the property as rental property and have managed it themselves. From 2008 until June 30, 2012, they rented the house to the same tenant. The tenant’s employer transferred him to California and he moved out in June. Since they did not want to bother finding a new tenant, Paul and Judy sold the house on June 30, 2012. They received $140,000 for the house and land ($15,000 for the land and $125,000 for the house), less 6 percent commission charged by the broker. They had depreciated the house using the MACRS rules and conventions applicable to residential real estate. To compute depreciation on the house, the Vances had allocated $15,000 of the property’s basis to the land on which the house is located. The Vances collected rent of $1,000 a month for the six months the house was occupied during the year. They incurred the following related expenses during this period:

        Property insurance

        $500

        Property taxes

        800

        Repairs and maintenance

        465

        Depreciation (to be computed)

        ?

        6. The Vances sold 200 shares of Capp Corporation stock on September 3, 2012, for $42 a share (minus a $50 commission). They received a Form 1099 B for the sale. The Vances received the stock from Paul’s father on June 25, 1980, as a wedding present. Paul’s father originally purchased the stock for $10 per share in 1967. The stock was valued at $14.50 per share on the date of the gift. No gift tax was paid on the gift.

        7. Paul made a single bet at Off Track Betting for the Kentucky Derby and won $750. $75 of federal income tax was withheld.

        8. Judy is required by Xavier University to visit several high schools in the Cincinnati area to evaluate Xavier University students who are doing their practice teaching. However, she is not reimbursed for the expenses she incurs in doing this. During 2012 she drove her personal automobile 6,800 miles in fulfilling this obligation. Judy drove an additional 6,700 personal miles during 2012. Judy uses the standard mileage method to calculate her car expenses. She has maintained records to support her business mileage deduction.

        9. On April 1, 2012, the Vances’ house was robbed. They apparently interrupted the burglar because all that was missing was an antique diamond ring Judy inherited from her grandmother on June 12, 2004 and $3,000 in cash. Unfortunately the Vances did not have a separate rider on their insurance policy covering the jewelry. Therefore, the insurance company reimbursed them only $500 for the ring. Judy’s basis in the ring was $11,000, and its fair market value was $15,500. Their insurance policy also limits the amount of cash that can be claimed in a theft to $200.

        10. Paul and Judy have given you a file containing the following receipts for expenditures during the year:

        Prescription medicine and drugs (net of insurance reimbursement)

        $ 376

        Doctor and hospital bills (net of insurance reimbursement)

        2,468

        Penalty for underpayment of last year’s state income tax

        15

        Real estate taxes on personal residence

        4,762

        Interest on home mortgage (reported on Form 1098)

        7,800

        Interest home equity loan (reported on Form 1098 Af?cAc‚¬” proceeds used to

        pay for a Caribbean cruise)

        450

        Interest on credit cards (consumer purchases)

        595

        Cash contributions to St. Matthew’s church (they received a statement

        from the church acknowledging their contributions)

        3,080

        Payroll deductions for Judy’s contributions to the United Way

        150

        Professional dues (Judy)

        325

        Professional subscriptions (Judy)

        245

        Fee for preparation of 2011 tax return paid April 14, 2012

        500

        Losses incurred playing blackjack on the Caribbean cruise

        1,450

        11. The Vances paid $6,400 to send the triplets to the Candy Apple Day Care Center. The day care is located at 12 Roxbury Lane, Cincinnati, OH 45211. Its employer identification number is 19 298763.

        12. The Vances filed their 2011 federal, state, and local returns on April 14, 2012. They paid the following additional 2011 taxes due with their returns: federal income taxes of $630, state income taxes of $250, and city income taxes of $75.

        13. The Vances made timely estimated federal income tax payments of $1,500 each quarter during 2012. They also made estimated state income tax payments of $300 each quarter and estimated city income tax payments of $160 each quarter. The Vances made all fourth quarter payments on December 31, 2012. They would like to receive a refund for any overpayments.

        management accounting 422791

        Can some one help me with the question below..

        please show the working

        Umanzor Corporation uses activity based costing to assign overhead costs to products. Overhead costs have already been allocated to the company’s three activity cost pools as follows: Processing, $52,500; Supervising, $28,600; and Other, $24,400. Processing costs are assigned to products using machine hours (MHs) and Supervising costs are assigned to products using the number of batches. The costs in the Other activity cost pool are not assigned to products. Activity data appear below: MHs (Processing) Batches (supervising) Product S5 18,500 1,400 Product F5 1,100 510 Total 19,600 1,910 What is the overhead cost assigned to Product S5 under activity based costing?

        (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places.

        A$55,070.00

        B $20,958.00

        C $70,538.00

        D $49,580.00

        Thank you

        management accounting question 422803

        Please help with the question below

        Provide working as well

        Jansen Painting paints the interiors and exteriors of homes and commercial buildings. The company uses an activity based costing system for its overhead costs. The company has provided the following data concerning its activity based costing system.

        Activity Cost Pool Activity Measure Annual Activity
        Painting Square meters 25,600 square meters
        Job support Jobs 280 jobs
        Other None Not applicable

        The “Other” activity cost pool consists of the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
        The company has already finished the first stage of the allocation process in which costs were allocated to the activity cost centers. The results are listed below:

        Painting Job Support Other Total
        Production overhead $ 38,400 $ 37,268 $ 25,500 $ 101,168
        Office expense 11,520 78,120 11,528 101,168








        Total $ 49,920 $ 115,388 $ 37,028 $ 202,336


















        Required:

        a.

        Compute the activity rates (i.e., cost per unit of activity) for the Painting and Job Support activity cost pools. (Round your intermediate and final answers to 2 decimal places.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Painting Job Support
        Production overhead $ $
        Office expense


        Total $ $





        b.

        Prepare a overhead costs report and an action analysis report in good form of a job that involves painting 172 square meters and has direct materials and direct labor cost of $3,930. The sales revenue from this job is $4,950.
        For purposes of this action analysis report, direct materials and direct labor should be classified as a Green cost; production overhead as a Red cost; and office expense as a Yellow cost. (Input all amounts as positive values except losses which should be indicated by minus sign. Round your intermediate and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Overhead Cost Report
        Painting Job Support Total
        Activity 172 1
        Production overhead $ $ $
        Office expense



        Total cost $ $ $







        Action Analysis Report
        Sales $ 4,950.00
        Green Costs:
        (Click to select)Production overheadSalesYellow marginWages and salariesRed marginGreen marginDirect materials and laborOffice expense $


        (Click to select)Green marginDirect materials and laborRed marginProduction overheadWages and salariesYellow marginOffice expenseSales
        Yellow costs:
        (Click to select)Wages and salariesOffice expenseGreen marginSalesYellow marginRed marginProduction overheadDirect materials and labor


        (Click to select)Direct materials and laborGreen marginRed marginProduction overheadWages and salariesOffice expenseYellow marginSales
        Red costs:
        (Click to select)Production overheadGreen marginSalesWages and salariesDirect materials and laborRed marginYellow marginOffice expense


        (Click to select)Office expenseYellow marginRed marginProduction overheadDirect materials and laborGreen marginSalesWages and salaries $



        colerain corporation is a merchandising company that is preparing a profit plan for 422817

        Colerain Corporation is a merchandising company that is preparing a profit plan for the third quarter of the calendar year. The company’s balance sheet as of June 30 is shown below:

        Colerain Corporation
        Balance Sheet
        June 30
        Assets
        Cash $ 85,000
        Accounts receivable 122,000
        Inventory 51,450
        Plant and equipment, net of depreciation 220,000

        Total assets $ 478,450


        Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
        Accounts payable $ 61,900
        Common stock 350,000
        Retained earnings 66,550

        Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 478,450



        Colerain’s managers have made the following additional assumptions and estimates:

        1.

        Estimated sales for July, August, September, and October will be $210,000, $230,000, $220,000, and $240,000, respectively.

        2.

        All sales are on credit and all credit sales are collected. Each month’s credit sales are collected 30% in the month of sale and 70% in the month following the sale. All of the accounts receivable at June 30 will be collected in July.

        3.

        Each month’s ending inventory must equal 35% of the cost of next month’s sales. The cost of goods sold is 70% of sales. The company pays for 50% of its merchandise purchases in the month of the purchase and the remaining 50% in the month following the purchase. All of the accounts payable at June 30 will be paid in July.

        4.

        Monthly selling and administrative expenses are always $60,000. Each month $4,000 of this total amount is depreciation expense and the remaining $56,000 relates to expenses that are paid in the month they are incurred.

        5.

        The company does not plan to borrow money or pay or declare dividends during the quarter ended September 30. The company does not plan to issue any common stock or repurchase its own stock during the quarter ended September 30.

        Required:
        1.

        Prepare a schedule of expected cash collections for July, August, and September. Also compute total cash collections for the quarter ended September 30th.(Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Schedule of Expected Cash Collections
        July August September Quarter
        From accounts receivable $ $ $ $
        From July sales
        From August sales
        From September sales




        Total cash collections $ $ $ $









        2a.

        Prepare a merchandise purchases budget for July, August, and September. Also compute total merchandise purchases for the quarter ended September 30th.(Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Merchandise Purchases Budget
        July August September Total
        Budgeted cost of goods sold $ $ $ $
        (Click to select)Deduct:Add:(Click to select)Beginning inventoryEnding inventory




        Total needs
        (Click to select)Deduct:Add:(Click to select)Ending inventoryBeginning inventory




        Required purchases $ $ $ $









        2b.

        Prepare a schedule of expected cash disbursements for merchandise purchases for July, August, and September. Also compute total cash disbursements for merchandise purchases for the quarter ended September 30th.(Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Schedule of Expected Cash Disbursements—Merchandise Purchases
        July August September Total
        From accounts payable $ $ $ $
        For July purchases
        For August purchases
        For September purchases




        Total cash disbursements $ $ $ $









        3.

        Prepare an income statement for the quarter ended September 30th.(Input all amounts as positive values except losses which should be indicated by a minus sign.Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Colerain Corporation
        Income Statement
        For the Quarter Ended September 30
        (Click to select)Selling and administrative expensesNet income (loss)Net operating income (loss)SalesGross marginInterest expenseCost of goods sold $
        (Click to select)Gross marginInterest expenseSelling and administrative expensesSalesNet operating income (loss)Cost of goods soldNet income (loss)

        (Click to select)Net operating income (loss)SalesSelling and administrative expensesGross marginInterest expenseNet income (loss)Cost of goods sold
        (Click to select)SalesSelling and administrative expensesGross marginNet operating income (loss)Interest expenseNet income (loss)Cost of goods sold

        (Click to select)Interest expenseSelling and administrative expensesNet operating income (loss)Gross marginSalesCost of goods soldNet income (loss)
        (Click to select)Cost of goods soldSelling and administrative expensesNet operating income (loss)SalesNet income (loss)Gross marginInterest expense

        (Click to select)Selling and administrative expensesSalesInterest expenseCost of goods soldGross marginNet income (loss)Net operating income (loss) $



        4.

        Prepare a balance sheet as of September 30th.(Be sure to list the assets and liabilities in order of their liquidity. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Colerain Corporation
        Balance Sheet
        September 30
        Assets
        (Click to select)Notes payableRetained earningsCashCapital stockAccounts payable $
        (Click to select)Notes payableRetained earningsCapital stockAccounts receivableAccounts payable
        (Click to select)Retained earningsAccounts payableInventoryPlant and equipment, netCapital stock
        (Click to select)Capital stockAccounts payableInventoryPlant and equipment, netRetained earnings

        Total assets $


        Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
        (Click to select)CashAccounts payableNotes receivableInventoryAccounts receivable $
        (Click to select)Capital stockAccounts receivablePlant and equipment, netInventoryCash
        (Click to select)Accounts receivablePlant and equipment, netInventoryRetained earningsCash

        Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $



        please help 422841

        please help me solves this

        QS 24 15 Flexible budget performance report L.O. P1

        Beck Company expects to produce 10,000 units for the year ending December 31. A flexible budget for 10,000 units of production reflects sales of $200,000; variable costs of $40,000; and fixed costs of $75,000. If the company instead produces and sells 13,000 units for the year. Assume that actual sales are $265,000, actual variable costs for the year are $59,000, and actual fixed costs for the year are $73,400.Prepare a flexible budget performance report for the year. (Input all amounts as a positive value. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Exercise 24 4 Preparation of a flexible budget performance report L.O. P1

        Daytec Company’s fixed budget performance report for June follows. The $440,000 budgeted expenses include $300,000 variable expenses and $140,000 fixed expenses. Actual expenses include $130,000 fixed expenses.

        Fixed Budget Actual Results Variances
        Sales (in units) 6,000 4,800








        Sales (in dollars) $ 480,000 $ 422,400 $ 57,600 U
        Total expenses 440,000 394,000 46,000 F






        Income from operations $ 40,000 $ 28,400 $ 11,600 U













        Prepare a flexible budget performance report showing any variances between budgeted and actual results. List fixed and variable expenses separately. (Input all amounts as a positive value. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        DAYTEC COMPANY
        Flexible Budget Performance Report
        For Month Ended June 30
        Flexible Budget Actual Results Variances
        $ $ $






        $ $ $

        accounting 101 422868

        Hi can you please explain the steps I am having trouble with these problems thanks!

        1)Sielert Corporation borrowed $600,000 from National Bank on May 31, 2011. The three year, 7% note required annual payments of $228,630 beginning May 31, 2012. Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 2011 was?

        $0.

        $24,500.

        $28,000.

        $42,000.

        Downs Company issued $800,000 of 8%, 5 year bonds at 106, which pays interest annually. Assuming straight line amortization, what is the total interest cost of the bonds?

        $272,000

        $224,000

        $368,000

        $320,000

        Winrow Company received proceeds of $377,000 on 10 year, 8% bonds issued on January 1, 2011. The bonds had a face value of $400,000, pay interest annually on December 31st, and have a call price of 101. Winrow uses the straight line method of amortization. What is the carrying value of the bonds on January 1, 2013?

        $400,000

        $381,600

        $395,400

        $379,300

        ac221 422898

        Hiatt Company sells automatic can openers under a 75 day warranty for defective merchandise. Based on past experience, Hiatt estimates that 3% of the units sold will become defective during the warranty period. Management estimates that the average cost of replacing or repairing a defective unit is $20. The units sold and units defective that occurred during the last 2 months of 2010 are as follows.

        Month Units
        Sold
        Units Defective
        Prior to December 31
        November 30,000 600
        December 32,000 400

        Determine the estimated warranty liability at December 31 for the units sold in November and December.

        Prepare the journal entries to record the estimated liability for warranties and the costs incurred in honoring 1,000 warranty claims. (Assume actual costs of $20,000.)

        Give the entry to record the honoring of 500 warranty contracts in January at an average cost of $20.

        Q2: The following financial data were reported by 3M Company for 2006 and 2007 ($ in millions).

        3M COMPANY
        Balance Sheets (partial)
        2007 2006
        Current assets
        Cash and cash equivalents $1,896 $1,447
        Accounts receivable, net 3,362 3,102
        Inventories 2,852 2,601
        Other current assets

        1,728

        1,796

        Total current assets $9,838 $8,946
        Current liabilities $5,362 $7,323

        Calculate the current ratio and working capital for 3M for 2006 and 2007.(Round current ratio to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50.)

        Suppose that at the end of 2007 3M management used $200 million cash to pay off $200 million of accounts payable. How would its current ratio and working capital have changed? (Round current ratio to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50.)

        accounting 202 questions 422904

        Hollowell Audio, Inc., manufactures military specification compact discs. The company uses standards to control its costs. The labor standards that have been set for one disc are as follows:

        Standard
        Hours
        Standard
        Rate
        Standard
        Cost
        27 minutes $5.80 $2.61

        During July, 9,675 hours of direct labor time were required to make 19,900 discs. The direct labor cost totaled $54,180 for the month.

        Required:
        1a.

        According to the standards, what direct labor cost should have been incurred to make the 19,900 discs?

        Total standard direct labor cost $

        1b.By how much does this differ from the cost that was incurred?

        Spending variance $

        2.

        Break down the difference in cost from (1) above into a labor rate variance and a labor efficiency variance.

        Labor rate variance $
        Labor efficiency variance $

        3.

        The budgeted variable manufacturing overhead rate is $4.1 per direct labor hour. During July, the company incurred $44,505 in variable manufacturing overhead cost. Compute the variable overhead rate and efficiency variances for the month.

        Variable overhead rate variance $
        Variable overhead efficiency variance $

        questions 2

        Sonne Company produces a perfume called Whim. The direct materials and direct labor standards for one bottle of Whim are given below:

        Standard Quantity
        or Hours
        Standard Price
        or Rate
        Standard
        Cost
        Direct materials 7.2 ounces $ 3 per ounce $ 21.6
        Direct labor 0.5 hours $ 10.4 per hour $ 5.2

        During the most recent month, the following activity was recorded:
        a. 23,800 ounces of material were purchased at a cost of $2.9 per ounce.
        b. The company produced only 2,500 bottles using 19,800 ounces of material. The rest of the material purchased remained in raw materials inventory.
        c. 1,410 hours of direct labor time were recorded at a total labor cost of $17,202.

        Required:

        Compute the direct materials price and quantity variances for the month

        Direct materials price variance $ (Click to select)UNoneF
        Direct materials quantity variance $ (Click to select)NoneUF

        job costing for hoover inc 422930

        Hoover Inc. uses a job order coding system. The company’s inventory balances on February 1, the start of its fiscal year, were as follows:

        Raw Materials Inventory

        $69,325

        Work in Process Inventory

        $55,100

        Finished Goods Inventory

        $81,256

        During the year, the following transactions were completed:

        1. Raw materials were purchased on account, $215,221.
        2. Raw materials were issued from the storeroom for use in production, $198,000 (70% direct and 30% indirect).
        3. Employee salaries and wages were accrued as follows: direct labor, $243,300; indirect labor, $98,750; and selling and administrative salaries, $72,340.
        4. Utility costs were incurred in the factory, $79,233.
        5. Advertising costs were incurred. $110,600.
        6. Prepaid insurance expired during the year, $35,000 (80% related to factory operations, and 20% related to selling and administrative activities).
        7. Depreciation was recorded, $192,100 (75% related to factory assets, and 25% related to selling and administrative assets).
        8. Manufacturing overhead was applied to jobs at the rate of 160% of direct labor cost.
        9. Goods that cost $720,200 to manufacture according to their job cost sheets were transferred to the finished goods warehouse.
        10. Sales for the year totaled $1,293,300 and were all on account. The total cost to manufacture these goods according to their job cost sheets was $725,825.

        Submit an Excel document, which each tab labeled by item number in good form that demonstrates the following:

        1. Prepare the journal entries to record the transactions for the year.
        2. Prepare the T accounts for raw materials inventory, work in process inventory, finished goods inventory, manufacturing overhead, and cost of goods sold. Don’t forget to enter the beginning balances in the inventory accounts.
        3. Is manufacturing overhead underapplied or overapplied for the year? Prepare a journal entry to close this balance to cost of goods sold.

        mba accounting 422961

        Huffman Inc. makes and sells state of the art electronics products. One of its segments produces The Math Machine, an inexpensive calculator. The company’s chief accountant recently prepared the following income statement showing annual revenues and expenses associated with the segment’s operating activities. The relevant range for the production and sale of the calculators is between 30,000 and 60,000 units per year.

        Revenue (40,000 units Af— $8) $ 320,000
        Unit level variable costs
        Materials cost (40,000 Af— $2) (80,000 )
        Labor cost (40,000 Af— $1) (40,000 )
        Manufacturing overhead (40,000 Af— $0.50) (20,000 )
        Shipping and handling (40,000 Af— $0.25) (10,000 )
        Sales commissions (40,000 Af— $1) (40,000 )



        Contribution margin 130,000
        Fixed expenses
        Advertising costs (20,000 )
        Salary of production supervisor (60,000
        Allocated companywide facility level expenses (80,000 )



        Net loss $ (30,000 )







        (Consider each of the requirements independently.)

        A large discount store has approached the owner of Huffman about buying 5,000 calculators. It would replace The Math Machine’s label with its own logo to avoid affecting Huffman’s existing customers. Because the offer was made directly to the owner, no sales commissions on the transaction would be involved, but the discount store is willing to pay only $4.50 per calculator. Based on quantitative factors alone, should Huffman accept the special order? Support your answer with appropriate computations. Specifically, by what amount would the special order increase or decrease profitability?

        transactions 422976

        How do I analyze each transaction and record it in the general journal by Using pg. 3 to begin January’s transactions?

        If you have the book in front of you, I am in Ch. 6 pg. 186. The Mini Practice Set 1

        Purchased supplies for $4,000; issued check 1015

        Purchased a one year insurance policy for $6,000; issued check 1016

        Sold Services for $18,000 in cash and $2,000 on credit during the first week of Jan.

        Collected a total of $3000 on acct. from credit customers during the first week of Jan.

        Issued Check 1017 for $2800 to pay for advertising during the month

        Collected a total of $2500 on acct. from credit customers during the week of Jan.

        Returned supples for a cash refund of $550

        managerial accounting standard costs and variances 422988

        I am assigned a homework problem to do, but I am completely lost…I could really use some help please! On the whole thing..

        Here it is:

        Bronfenbrenner Co. uses a standard cost system for its single product in which variable overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. The following information is given:

        Standard costs per unit:

        Raw materials (1.5 grams at $16.00 per gram)…………………….. $24.00

        Direct labor (0.75 hours at $8 per hour)…………………………………. $6.00

        Variable overhead (0.75 hours at $3 per hour)………………………. $2.25

        Actual experience for current year:

        Units produced………………………………………………………………………. 22,400 units

        Purchases of raw materials (21,000 grams at $17 per gram). $357,000

        Raw materials used………………………………………………………………. 33,400 grams

        Direct labor (16,750 hours at $8 per hour)…………………………….. $134,000

        Variable overhead cost incurred…………………………………………….. $48,575

        Compute the following variances:

        a. Direct materials price variance

        b. Direct materials quantity variance

        c. Direct labor rate variance

        d. Direct labor efficiency variance

        e. Variable overhead spending variance

        f. Variable overhead efficiency variance

        help finding net cash from operations 422994

        Could I please get a breakdown of the Net Cash From Operations for this problem? I can’t seem to wrap my head around it. Thanks.

        1.

        The 2010 financial statements for Armstrong and Blair companies are summarized here:
        Armstrong
        Company
        Blair
        Company
        Balance Sheet
        Cash $ 35,000 $ 22,000
        Accounts Receivable, Net 40,000 30,000
        Inventory 100,000 40,000
        Property and Equipment, Net 180,000 300,000
        Other Assets 45,000 408,000




        Total Assets $ 400,000 $ 800,000








        Current Liabilities $ 100,000 $ 50,000
        Long term Debt 60,000 370,000




        Total Liabilities 160,000 420,000
        Common Stock (par $10) 150,000 200,000
        Additional Paid in Capital 30,000 110,000
        Retained Earnings 60,000 70,000




        Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity $ 400,000 $ 800,000








        Income Statement
        Sales Revenue (1/3 on credit) $ 450,000 $ 810,000
        Cost of Goods Sold (245,000) (405,000)
        Expenses (including interest and income tax) (160,000) (315,000)




        Net Income $ 45,000 $ 90,000








        Selected Data from 2009 Statements
        Accounts Receivable, Net $ 20,000 $ 38,000
        Inventory 92,000 45,000
        Property and Equipment, Net 180,000 300,000
        Long term Debt 60,000 70,000
        Total Stockholders’ Equity 231,000 440,000
        Other Data
        Estimated value of each share at end of 2010 $ 18 $ 27

        The companies are in the same line of business and are direct competitors in a large metropolitan area. Both have been in business approximately 10 years, and each has had steady growth. One third of both companies’ sales are on credit. Despite these similarities, the management of each has a different viewpoint in many respects. Blair is more conservative, and as its president said, “We avoid what we consider to be undue risk.” Both companies use straight line depreciation, but Blair estimates slightly shorter useful lives than Armstrong. No shares were issued in 2010, and neither company is publicly held. Blair Company has an annual audit by a CPA but Armstrong Company does not.

        Consider 365 days in a year.)

        managerial accounting cost per equivalent unit 423042

        I KNOW THE ANSWER IS .76 BUT I DONT KNOW HOW TO GET THERE PLEASE HELP! I NEED A STEP BY STEP PROCESS OR I WILL NOT RATE! THANK YOU!! 🙂

        The following information pertains to Yap Company’s Grinding Department for the month of April:

        Units Materials Costs
        Beginning work in process 27,000 $23,500
        Started in April 47,500 $33,000
        Units completed and transferred out 55,500
        Ending work in process 19,000

        All materials are added at the beginning of the process. Using the weighted average method, the cost per equivalent unit for materials is closest to:

        banner company 423195

        I am needing help for the 3rd part of this question. If someone could lead me in the right direction Banner Company produces three products: A, B, and C. The selling price, variable costs, and contribution margin for one unit of each product follow: Product A B C Selling price $ 70 $ 130 $ 160 Variable costs: Direct materials 34.00 21.50 93.60 Direct labor 12.00 40.00 16.00 Variable manufacturing overhead 3.00 10.00 4.00 Total variable cost 49.00 71.50 113.60 Contribution margin $ 21.00 $ 58.50 $ 46.40 Contribution margin ratio 30 % 45 % 29 % Due to a strike in the plant of one of its competitors, demand for the company’s products far exceeds its capacity to produce. Management is trying to determine which product(s) to concentrate on next week in filling its backlog of orders. The direct labor rate is $8 per hour, and only 3,270 hours of labor time are available each week. Required: 1. Compute the amount of contribution margin that will be obtained per hour of labor time spent on each product. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places.) A B C Contribution margin per labor hour $ $ $ 2. Which orders would you recommend that the company work on next week”the orders for product A, product B, or product C? Product C Product B Product A 3. By paying overtime wages, more than 3,270 hours of direct labor time can be made available next week. Up to how much should the company be willing to pay per hour in overtime wages as long as there is unfilled demand for the three products? (Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places.) Maximum amount $ per hour

        using standard costs direct labor variances 423210

        I have seen this problem out there on Chegg, but the numbers are different. I have tried to solve this with the guide on the homework, but I can’t see to get the right answer. So if you could answer showing the work, I work really appreaste it. I really want to know how to do it.

        The Worldwide Credit Card, Inc., uses standards to control the labor time involved in opening mail from card holders and recording the enclosed remittances. Incoming mail is gathered into batches, and a standard time is set for opening and recording each batch. The labor standards relating to one batch are as follows:

        Standard
        Hours
        Standard
        Rate
        Standard
        Cost
        Per batch 1.25 $12.00 $15.00

        The record showing the time spent last week in opening batches of mail has been misplaced. However, the batch supervisor recalls that 168 batches were received and opened during the week, and the controller recalls the following variance data relating to these batches:

        Total labor spending variance $ 330 U
        Labor rate variance $ 150 F

        Required:
        1. Determine the number of actual labor hours spent opening batches during the week.

        Actual labor hours hours

        2.

        Determine the actual hourly rate paid to employees for opening batches last week. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

        Actual hourly rate $ per hour

        and please don’t just copy the answer from the same worded problem with different varible numbers. Thank you for your time!

        hogan manufacturing company has just adopted a standard cost sys 274437

        Hogan Manufacturing Company has just adopted a standard cost system. You have been asked to analyze the materials purchases and usage for the month of August to determine the materials price variance to be recorded at the end of the month. During August, 5,000 gallons of a chemical were purchased at $3.10 per gallon. Only 4,600 gallons were put into production. The standard price per gallon is $3.20. Compute the following variances:

        1. The materials price variance if the chemical is carried in inventory at standard price (i.e., the price variance is accounted for at the time of purchase).

        2. The materials price variance if the chemical is carried in inventory at actual price and is charged to Work in Process Inventory at the standard price (i.e., the price variance is accounted for at the time of use in production).

        the following costs were incurred on the construction of a new building for ascme in 274462

        The following costs were incurred on the construction of a new building for Ascme. Inc. Land $1,800,000 Clearing and grading 50,000 Closing costs 25.000 Architect fees 25,000 Building permits 10.000 Building costs 2,965,000 Paving & sidewalks 60,000 landscaping 40,000 One year insurance Policy 25.000

        Ascme took out a construction loan to cover the entire project at the time the land was pun:hused. Three months alter the land was purchased, the construction on the building began. The construction period took twenty one more months. Total interest costs for the entire loan were $500,000.

        Required: I) Calculate the costs of the land, building and land improvements, including the tunount of capitalized interest on the building. 2)1f an independent contractor could have completed the building costs for $100000 less than the costs incurred by Ascme, would you adjust the fair market value of the building? EXplain.

        in the all about you feature available on the book s 274488

        In the All About You feature (available on the book’s companion website), you learned that cost volume profit analysis can be used in making personal financial decisions. The purchase of a new car is one of your biggest personal expenditures. It is important that you carefully analyze your options.

        Suppose that you are considering the purchase of a hybrid vehicle. Let’s assume the following facts: The hybrid will initially cost an additional $3,000 above the cost of a traditional vehicle. The hybrid will get 40 miles per gallon of gas, and the traditional car will get 25 miles per gallon. Also, assume that the cost of gas is $4 per gallon.

        Instructions

        Using the facts above, answer the following questions.

        (a) What is the variable gasoline cost of going one mile in the hybrid car? What is the variable cost of going one mile in the traditional car?

        (b) Using the information in part (a), if ?omiles?? is your unit of measure, what is the ?ocontribution margin?? of the hybrid vehicle relative to the traditional vehicle? That is, express the variable cost savings on a per mile basis.

        (c) How many miles would you have to drive in order to break even on your investment in the hybrid car?

        (d) What other factors might you want to consider?

        revenues and expenses 274500

        Retained earnings, January 1, 2011 $50,000 Advertising expense $1,800
        Dividends during 2011 5,200 Rent expense 10,400
        Service revenue 62,500 Utilities expense 3,100
        Salaries expense 28,000

        After analyzing the data, complete the income statement and retained earnings statement below for the year ending December 31, 2011. (List amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2. Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)

        ironjay inc produces two types of weight training equipment 274519

        Ironjay, Inc., produces two types of weight training equipment: the jay flex (a weight machine that allows the user to perform a number of different exercises) and a set of free weights. Ironjay sells the jay flex to sporting goods stores for $200. The free weights sell for $75 per set. The projected income statement for the coming year follows:

        Sales ……………………….$600,000

        Less: Variable expenses …….390,000

        Contribution margin ………$210,000

        Less: Fixed expenses ……….157,500

        Operating income ………….$ 52,500

        The owner of Ironjay estimates that 40 percent of the sales revenues will be produced by sales of the jay flex, with the remaining 60 percent by free weights. The jay flex is also responsible for 40 percent of the variable expenses. Of the fixed expenses, one third are common to both products, and one half are directly traceable to the jay flex line.

        Required:

        1. Compute the sales revenue that must be earned for Ironjay to break even.

        2. Compute the number of jay flex machines and free weight sets that must be sold for Ironjay to break even.

        3. Compute the degree of operating leverage for Ironjay. Now, assume that the actual revenues will be 40 percent higher than the projected revenues. By what percentage will profits increase with this change in sales volume?

        4. Ironjay is considering adding a new product—the jay rider. The jay rider is a cross between a rowing machine and a stationary bicycle (like the Nordic rider?c). For the first year, Ironjay estimates that the jay rider will cannibalize 600 units of sales from the jay flex. Sales of free weight sets will remain unchanged. The jay rider will sell for $180 and have variable costs of $140. The increase in fixed costs to support manufacture of this product is $5,700. Compute the number of jay flex machines, free weight sets, and jay riders that must be sold for Ironjay to break even. For the coming year, is the addition of the jay rider a good idea? Why or why not? Why might Ironjay choose to add the jay rider anyway?

        island novelties inc of palau makes two products hawaiian fa 274523

        Island Novelties, Inc., of Palau makes two products, Hawaiian Fantasy and Tahitian Joy. Present revenue, cost, and sales data for the two products follow:

        ?

        Fixed expenses total $475,800 per year. The Republic of Palau uses the U.S. dollar as its currency.

        Required:

        1. Assuming the sales mix given above, do the following:

        a. Prepare a contribution format income statement showing both dollar and percent columns for each product and for the company as a whole.

        b. Compute the break even point in dollars for the company as a whole and the margin of safety in both dollars and percent.

        2. The company has developed a new product to be called Samoan Delight. Assume that the company could sell 10,000 units at $45 each. The variable expenses would be $36 each. The company’s fixed expenses would not change.

        a. Prepare another contribution format income statement, including sales of the Samoan Delight (sales of the other two products would not change).

        b. Compute the company’s new break even point in dollars and the new margin of safety in both dollars and percent.

        3. The president of the company examines your figures and says, ?oThere’s something strange here. Our fixed expenses haven’t changed and you show greater total contribution margin if we add the new product, but you also show our break even point going up. With greater contribution margin, the break even point should go down, not up. You’ve made a mistake somewhere.?? Explain to the president what hashappened.

        kaiser industries carries no inventories its product is manufac 274547

        Kaiser Industries carries no inventories. Its product is manufactured only when a customer’s order is received. It is then shipped immediately after it is made. For its fiscal year ended October 31, 2014, Kaiser’s break even point was $1.3 million. On sales of $1.2 million, its income statement showed a gross profit of $180,000, direct materials cost of $400,000, and direct labor costs of $500,000. The contribution margin was $180,000, and variable manufacturing overhead was $50,000.

        Instructions

        (a) Calculate the following:

        (1) Variable selling and administrative expenses.

        (2) Fixed manufacturing overhead.

        (3) Fixed selling and administrative expenses.

        (b) Ignoring your answer to part (a), assume that fixed manufacturing overhead was $100,000 and the fixed selling and administrative expenses were $80,000. The marketing vice president feels that if the company increased its advertising, sales could be increased by 25%. What is the maximum increased advertising cost the company can incur and still report the same income as before the advertising expenditure?

        (CGA adapted)

        kincaid company sells flags with team logos kincaid has fixed 274570

        Kincaid Company sells flags with team logos. Kincaid has fixed costs of $664,000 per year plus variable costs of $4.50 per flag. Each flag sells for $12.50.

        Requirements

        1. Use the income statement equation approach to compute the number of flags

        Kincaid must sell each year to break even.

        2. Use the contribution margin ratio CVP formula to compute the dollar sales.

        Kincaid needs to earn $33,600 in operating income for 2012. (Round the contribution margin to two decimal places.)

        3. Prepare Kincaid’s contribution margin income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012, for sales of 75,000 flags. Cost of goods sold is 60% of variable costs. Operating costs make up the rest of variable costs and all of fixed costs. (Round your final answers to the nearest whole number.)

        4. The company is considering an expansion that will increase fixed costs by 24% and variable costs by $0.25 per flag. Compute the new breakeven point in units and in dollars. Should Kincaid undertake the expansion? Give your reasoning. (Round your final answers to the nearest whole number.)

        you are an accountant at a local cpa firm that is auditing the accounting records of 274687

        You are an accountant at a local CPA firm that is auditing the accounting records of ABC Company. You have been asked to educate the accounting department about the limitations of the internal control system in preparation for an upcoming audit. During your audit, you have identified that because of a weak internal control system, an adjusting entry for prepaid insurance was not recorded for the first 3 months of the year at $500 per month.

        • Identify the limitations of the internal control system. Provide at least 3 limitations.
        • Provide at least 2 examples of internal control procedures, and explain how these procedures can be implemented.
        • Identify symptoms of a lack of internal control.
        • Explain the impact of the missing journal entry on the financial statements of the company.

        The Accounting Equation

        The Importance of the Accounting Equation

        The accounting equation, the transactions behind it, and the rules for its use are to business

        like the scoring, rules, and regulations are to a game of baseball. If each baseball team played

        by different rules and scored the game differently, no one would know which team is the best

        or, for that matter, understand what was going on as they watched the game being played.

        Without the use of the accounting equation, businesses could not be compared to each other

        and owners and investors would not be able to determine the profit or loss of a company.

        The Accounting Equation

        The accounting equation on the surface looks very simple: Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s

        Equity. However, like in the game of baseball, there are many rules and plays (transactions)

        that occur before the home run is scored, or the accounting equation is finalized for a business.

        The assets of a business include all the company’s resources. Examples are land, building,

        manufacturing equipment, office equipment and furniture, and inventory. A company’s liabilities

        are what it owes to creditors. This could be money the company borrowed to buy equipment or

        money it owes for the purchase of supplies and inventory. These liabilities are subtracted from

        the owner’s equity to arrive at the VALUE or assets of the business. The owner’s equity

        includes the cash the owner puts into the business, the assets that are transferred into the

        business, and the net income (income after all expenses are accounted for) that remains in the

        business. Both sides of the accounting equation must be equal.

        The Rules

        The rules or guidelines for tracking business activities were developed over many years of

        business practice. Rules were developed and regulatory agencies were created to continue to

        develop, regulate, and publish the rules by which the game of business would be played. The

        rules are called the Generally Accepted Accounting Principles and the regulatory agency is the

        Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB).

        The Transactions and Chart of Accounts

        The transactions record the plays or activities of the business. All transactions are either debits

        or credits to an account. An example is a company that buys a piece of manufacturing

        equipment costing $10,000 and uses cash. What has it done? It has traded one asset for

        another (cash for equipment). The cash account is reduced by $10,000 (as a credit) and the

        equipment account is increased by $10,000 (as a debit). All transactions are two sided. Each

        must have a debit and a credit.

        It takes many accounts to organize and control a business. This list of accounts is called the

        chart of accounts. Some examples are assets (which include cash, inventory, capital

        equipment, supplies, and accounts receivable) and liabilities (which include accounts payable,

        wages payable, and long term loans). In the evaluation (audit) and control of a business, one

        of the most important reviews is to analyze each transaction for each account to make sure

        that each transaction has an offsetting posting (debit and credit). Once all transactions are

        correctly posted to each account, a summary of all accounts must be posted to reports or

        forms. This shows the performance of the business. Types of Forms/Reports

        The most widely used reports are the income statement, balance sheet, and the statement of

        cash flows. The income statement is a report of the activity of a business through time

        (month/year). The balance sheet is a snapshot of the business at a single point in time (monthend, year end) and reports the values of the accounting equation. The statement of cash flows

        is a report of the availability of cash and use of cash through time usually monthly

        Special Income Statement Items

        Generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) require that the following irregular items

        (items that do not happen frequently in the regular course of business) be listed separately in

        the income statement:

        Discontinued operations

        Extraordinary items

        Unusual gains and losses

        Changes in accounting principles

        Changes in estimates Discontinued Operations

        Discontinued operations occur when the results of operations and cash flows of a segment of

        an entity are eliminated and are no longer considered part of continuing operations and the

        company no longer participates in that segment of the operation. If either of these conditions

        is not met, an entity cannot separately disclose the transaction as a discontinued operation.

        When an organization decides to dispose of a segment of its operations, certain aspects of the

        transaction must be reported separately, and disclosures must be presented in the financial

        statement notes. On the income statement, a separate category for the gain or loss

        calculations from the disposal of the assets of that segment of the entity must be included.

        Also, the results of operations for the disposed business segment are reported in discontinued

        operations section.

        Extraordinary Items

        Extraordinary items are material transactions that are unusual in nature and occur

        infrequently. All characteristics must exist for an item to be classified as an extraordinary

        item on the income statement. If the transaction does meet the one or more of the criteria for

        extraordinary items—material, unusual, and infrequent— then the item is shown net of tax

        below the discontinued operations sections of the income statement. An earthquake in the Midwest would be considered material, unusual, and infrequent for that area, so it would

        qualify as an extraordinary item.

        Unusual Gains and Losses

        Material gains and losses that are either unusual or occur infrequently (but not both) cannot

        be included as an extraordinary item and are instead considered unusual gains and losses.

        These transactions are presented with the normal revenue and expense income statement

        sections. If the transaction is material, then the items are disclosed separately on the income

        statement; however, if the transaction is immaterial, then the items are combined with other

        items on the income statement. An example of a transaction that was included as an unusual

        gain or loss because it did not qualify as an extraordinary item was Hurricane Katrina. The

        FASB ruled that because that area of the country is prone to hurricanes, it was not unusual

        for a hurricane to occur. Therefore, any losses were classified as unusual but not

        extraordinary. This was a shock to many organizations.

        Changes in Accounting Principles

        A change in accounting principle occurs when an organization adopts a new accounting

        principle that is different from the one previously used such as changing from LIFO to FIFO

        or straight line depreciation to double declining balance. A company calculates the change in

        accounting principle by making a retrospective adjustment to the financial statements. This

        basically means restating the financial statements. The retroactive adjustment restates the

        previous years’ financial statements on using the newly adopted principle. The company also

        records the cumulative effect of the change for prior periods as an adjustment to beginning

        retained earnings of the earliest year presented in the financial statements. Most companies

        will release 2 years of financial information in their annual report, but there is not a set

        amount of years that must be disclosed when a change in accounting principle occurs.

        Detailed information of the change in the accounting principle is also disclosed in the notes

        to the financial statements. It is extremely important for accountants and users of financial

        information to understand the transaction that the financial statements and notes be used in

        conjunction with each other.

        Changes in Estimates

        When accountants prepare the financial statements of an entity, many estimates are used in

        all phases of preparation—such as the estimated useful life that is used in the calculation of

        depreciation. Adjustments that occur because of the use of estimates are used in the

        determination of income for the current period, and future periods and are not treated as

        changes in the accounting principle on the income statement. Therefore, it is extremely

        important to understand the difference between a change in accounting principle and a

        change in the accounting estimate, as they are handled differently on the income statement.

        In addition, changes in estimates are not considered errors such as prior period adjustments

        (that would be recorded in the statement of retained earnings or extraordinary item

        Attachments:

        1 what are the primary reasons for using a predetermined overhead rate 274762

        Short Answer

        1. What are the primary reasons for using a predetermined overhead rate?

        2. Why is variable costing not used extensively in external reporting?

        3. How can a company product both variable and absorption costing information from a single accounting system?

        4. Why is absorption costing not used for CVP analysis?

        5. What are three significant cost drivers that have been disregarded by traditional product costing system?

        Problem

        1. Dynamic Designs, Inc. has developed a new design to produce track shoes tht are used in cross country races. The company’s shoe design is innovative in that the insole is made of a product that provides a greater cushion and adapts more easily to a runner’s foot. Management estimates expected annual capacity to be 80,000 units; overhead is applied using expected annual capacity. The company’s cost accountant predicts the following current year activities and related costs:

        Standard unit variable manufacturing costs $140

        Variable unit selling expense $6

        Fixed manufacturing overhead $2,400,000

        Fixed selling and administrative expenses $164,000

        Selling price per unit $225

        Units of sales 70,000

        Units of production 81,000

        Units in beginning inventory 15,000

        Other than any possible under or overapplied fixed overhead, management expects no variances from the previous manufacturing costs. Under or overapplied fixed overhead is to be written off to Cost of Goods Sold.

        Required:

        1. Determine the amount of under or overapplied fixed overhead using (a) variable costing and (b) absorption costing:

        2. Prepare projected income statements using (a) variable costing and (b) absorption costing.

        3. Reconcile the incomes derived in part 2

        2. Falcon Crest Corporation manufactures two brands of wine: Regular and Extra Rich. Below is the current year’s production date for the company

        Regular Extra Rich

        Direct material in pounds 225,000 110,000

        Direct labor hours 45,000 65,000

        Machine hours 36,000 24,000

        Number of setups 1,450 2,375

        Number of gallons produced 450,000 90,000

        The 335,000 pounds of matrial had a total cost of $753,750. Direct labor is $21 per hour. The company has total overhead production costs of $2,212,125.

        a. If Falcon Crest Corporation applies factory overhead using direct labor hours, compute the total production cost and the unit cost for each brand.

        b. If Falcon Crest Corporation applies factory overhead using machine hours, compute the total production cost and the unit cost for each brand.

        c. Assume that Falcon Crest Corporation has established the following activity centers, cost drivers, and costs to apply factory overhead.

        Cost Pool Cost Driver Cost Volume

        Equipment Maintenance # of machine hours $450,000 60,000

        Production Setup # of setups $248,625 3,825

        Material Handling Pounds of Materials $703,500 335,000

        Storage Costs # of gallons produced $810,000 540,000

        Compute the total cost and the unit cost for each brand.

        d. Explain why the unit cost for each model is different across the three methods of overhead application. How can this information benefit the organization?

        Attachments:

        auditing canadian standard case analysis golden bear golf inc 274805

        1. From an audit perspective, what is the big picture risk for Golden Bear? In other words, if you were the senior in charge of the audit and the partner approached you and asked for an overall risk to which the majority of other issues could be tied, what would you say was the big picture? What was the root cause of the problems? Answer this question as if you were engaged to complete the Golden Bear audit in 1997. 2. Perform a detailed risk assessment for the 1997 audit. Include 4 risk factors that you identify as significant (you may include your risk factor from #1 above). Use details from the case and your audit knowledge to explain why these risk factors are important. Note: Do not simply copy the risk factors identified on page 150 as you do not have the case facts to support a discussion of all of these items. 3. What was the primary audit failure in 1997? In general, what would you have done differently? 4. If you were engaged to complete the 1996 audit, what would you identify as your most significant audit risk? Discuss in detail why this is a risk. 5. There are many audit issues discussed in the case for which the auditors failed to gather sufficient audit evidence. If you were auditing in an ideal world without any constraints on the functionality of controls or ability to obtain evidence, discuss how you would hope to obtain evidence for 3 of the following issues. a. Revenue Recognition Based on Earned Value b. Change Orders on Construction Projects c. Potential Construction Contracts d. Unbilled Revenues e. Uninvoiced Costs Booked so Cost to Cost Equaled Earned Value

        Document Preview:

        Case Analysis Requirements – Winter 2013 Accounting 456 Due Date: March 28, 2013 **Penalties for late submission are detailed in the course outline The case analysis is available on the course website under the assignments tab. It is called Golden Bear Golf, Inc. The case represents 20% of your final grade and MUST be done in groups of two or three. You cannot submit an individual assignment. Format: Responses should be in memo format. Bullet points are ok; however, you must use full sentences within the bullet points and develop your thoughts completely. Your analysis must not exceed 10 pages double spaced using Times New Roman 12 point font and 1 inch margins. Shorter responses are appreciated and rewarded when done well. Required (#1 8) 1. From an audit perspective, what is the big picture risk for Golden Bear? In other words, if you were the senior in charge of the audit and the partner approached you and asked for an overall risk to which the majority of other issues could be tied, what would you say was the big picture? What was the root cause of the problems? Answer this question as if you were engaged to complete the Golden Bear audit in 1997. 2. Perform a detailed risk assessment for the 1997 audit. Include 4 risk factors that you identify as significant (you may include your risk factor from #1 above). Use details from the case and your audit knowledge to explain why these risk factors are important. Note: Do not simply copy the risk factors identified on page 150 as you do not have the case facts to support a discussion of all of these items. 3. What was the primary audit failure in 1997? In general, what would you have done differently? 4. If you were engaged to complete the 1996 audit, what would you identify as your most significant audit risk? Discuss in detail why this is a risk. 5. There are many audit issues discussed in the case for which the auditors failed to gather sufficient audit evidence. If you were auditing in an ideal world without any…

        Attachments:

        microimage technology inc income statement 274828

        Microimage Technology, Inc. produces miniature digital color cameras that can be attached to endoscopes and other medical devices. The cameras sell for $215 per unit and are disposed of after each use. For 2014, the company’s first full year of operation, the company had sales of 80,000 units and a net loss of $9,810,000, as follows:

        Microimage Technology, Inc.

        Income Statement

        For the Year Ended December 31, 2014:

        Sales $17,200,000

        Less Cost of Goods Sold $18,360,000

        Gross Profit (loss) (1,160,000)

        Less selling and administrative expenses:

        Selling expense $3,750,000

        Administrative expense $4,900,000 $8,650,000

        Net loss ($9,810,000)

        The company is closely held, with six major investors. Early in the first quarter of 2015, Warren Logan, company CFO, was preparing to meet with them to present profitability estimates for the coming two years. He expected the meeting to be somewhat hostile. Two days before, he had received an email from one of the investors, Sanjay Patel:

        Warren:

        I expected a net loss but not this big. And I certainly didn’t expect a negative gross profit! It looks like more we sell, the more we’ll lose. I hope you come to the investor meeting next week with some explanations and some better numbers.

        SP.

        In preparing for the meeting, Warren assembled the following information based on results for 2014:

        Units Sold $80,000

        Units Produced $80,000

        Selling Price $ 215

        Manufacturing Costs:

        Direct material costs $1,280,000

        Direct labor costs $1,200,000

        Variable manufacturing overhead:

        Equipment Maintenance $ 160,000

        Inspection costs $ 400,000

        Miscellaneous fixed manufacturing overhead $ 3,700,000

        $18,360,000

        Selling expenses

        Variable selling expense:

        Shipping $ 280,000

        Commissions $ 800,000

        Travel $ 120,000

        Fixed selling expense:

        Salaries $1,900,000

        Miscellaneous fixed

        Selling expense $ 650,000

        $3,750,000

        Administrative expenses (all fixed)

        Research and development $2,700,000

        Administrative salaries not related to R&D $1,300,000

        Miscellaneous administrative expense $ 900,000

        $ 4,900,000

        Assumptions for 2015

        1. The company will hire two additional sales managers at a base salary of $90,000 each.
        1. R&D will be cut by $1,100,000.

        1. Unit sales will increase by 30 percent.

        Assumptions for 2016

        1. The company will hire one additional sales manager at a base salary of $90,000.
        1. R&D will be increased by $600,000 over 2015.

        1. Unit sales will increase by 60 percent over 2015.

        Required:

        1. Recast the full costing income statement for 2014 into a variable costing format. Does it appear, as Sanjay Patel contends, that the more the company sells, the more it loses?
        1. Based on the previous information, calculate sales in dollars and units needed to break even in 2015.

        1. Warren Logan, CFO, has developed assumptions that he believes are reasonable for 2015 and 2016. Using these assumptions, prepare budgeted income statements for 2015 and 2016 using the variable costing method. Are the major investors likely to find forecasted profits encouraging?

        Attachments:

        activity based cost accounting 274921

        Denny Asbestos Removal Company removes potentially toxic asbestos insulation and related products from buildings. The company’s estimator has been involved in a long simmering dispute with the on site work supervisors. The on site supervisors claim that the estimator does not adequately distinguish between routine work such as removal of asbestos insulation around heating pipes in older homes and nonroutine work such as removing asbestos contaminated ceiling plaster in industrial buildings. The on site supervisors believe that nonroutine work is far more expensive than routine work and should bear higher customer charges. The estimator sums up his position in this way: “My job is to measure the area to be cleared of asbestos. As directed by top management, I simply multiply the square footage by $4,000 per thousand square feet to determine the bid price. Since our average cost is only $3,000 per thousand square feet, that leaves enough cushion to take care of the additional costs of nonroutine work that shows up. Besides, it is difficult to know what is routine or nonroutine until you actually start tearing things apart.”

        budget accounting 274949

        Cyclone Inc. is a wholesaler of mattresses that began business on January 1. The company’s sales policy requires 40% payment in the month of sale, 30% the next month, and 30% due the third month. Purchases will be paid 60% in the month of purchase and 40% in the following month. Cyclone expects to begin operations in January with $5,000 in cash. Cyclone’s expected transactions from January to May are as follows:

        JanuaryFebruaryMarchAprilMay

        Sales$ 50,000$ 60,000$ 30,000$ 100,000$ 65,000

        Purchases 20,00015,0007,50040,00025,000

        The budgeted available cash balance for February is

        Budgeted cash collections for April are

        Cyclone anticipates borrowing $ 25,000 in May and paying for a piece of equipment costing $ 7,600. Given these expectations, what is May’s budgeted ending cash balance?

        the following selected account balances were taken from abc company s general ledger 274981

        Question 9 options:

        The following selected account balances were taken from ABC Company’s general ledger at January 1, 2011

        and December 31, 2011:

        January 1, 2011
        December 31, 2011

        Accounts receivable 52,000 36,000

        Cash 23,000 47,000

        Inventory 31,000 18,000

        Accounts payable 11,000 37,000

        Equipment 123,000 144,000

        Salaries payable 2,000 4,000

        Investments 42,000 ?

        Land 91,000 40,000

        Mortgage payable 111,000 60,000

        Common stock 110,000 125,000

        Retained earnings 32,000 37,000

        Additional information for 2011 appears below:

        1. ABC Company reported net cash inflows from operating activities of $60,000 and net cash outflows from

        financing activities of $87,000 2. ABC Company sold land costing $60,000 and recorded an $8,000 loss on the sale 3. ABC Company purchased equipment for $21,000 cash 4. ABC Company purchased investments for $60,000 cash and sold investments and reported a $25,000 gain on

        the sale

        Calculate the
        balance in the investments account at December 31, 2011. Do not use decimals in your answer.

        Document Preview:

        Question 9 options: The following selected account balances were taken from ABC Company’s general ledger at January 1, 2011?and December 31, 2011: January 1, 2011 December 31, 2011 Accounts receivable 52,000 36,000 ?Cash 23,000 47,000 Inventory 31,000 18,000 Accounts payable 11,000 37,000 ?Equipment 123,000 144,000 Salaries payable 2,000 4,000 Investments 42,000 ? Land 91,000 40,000 Mortgage payable 111,000 60,000 Common stock 110,000 125,000 Retained earnings 32,000 37,000 Additional information for 2011 appears below: 1. ABC Company reported net cash inflows from operating activities of $60,000 and net cash outflows from? financing activities of $87,000 2. ABC Company sold land costing $60,000 and recorded an $8,000 loss on the sale 3. ABC Company purchased equipment for $21,000 cash 4. ABC Company purchased investments for $60,000 cash and sold investments and reported a $25,000 gain on? the sale Calculate the balance in the investments account at December 31, 2011. Do not use decimals in your answer.

        Attachments:

        simulation and linear progression 275047

        A3IOCWAPRI3

        Module: Business Modelling for Decision Makers Coursework 111

        Assignment title: Coursework 1/1 Assignment code: APC310.APR13

        Weighting:

        100% of Module Assessment

        Date of issue: Week commencing — hand in to the Learning Resource Centre

        Date due in: 8th April 2013

        Return to student: From Learning Resource Centre

        Skills:

        Analytical skills Research skills

        Learning Outcomes Addressed: All Five

        Moderated by: Robert Hall and Jeff Evans

        Your report must be handed in no later than the due in date as set out above. This is an INDIVIDUAL coursework assignment. There are two questions to attempt. Each of the two questions has a reflection section and this section is worth 50% of the marks attributed to each question. Both questions are awarded equal marks Where possible, support your case studies with the use of an Excel spreadsheet. Use any given themes as case studies.

        Use your models in each of the questions, to assist you to investigate and analyse the relative strengths and weaknesses. Using the information you find, you are then requested to prepare a report demonstrating your ability to critically evaluate and to reflect upon, the performance of your models as instruments of policy to assist the decision making processes.

        Your reflection section for each question must contain information relating to how you would re address and re submit your work using a different approach or perspective, how you formulated your ideas for your original work, what methods you used in your research, what library references you found useful, how confident you are in your model etc. etc. Note, this list is not exhaustive. In this section, you may use sensitivity analysis to help you to critically evaluate and to reflect upon your models. Remember, your reflection section is worth 50% of the marks for EACH of the two questions. (Learning Outcomes 2 and 4) To help you with reflection and sensitivity analysis, you should ‘study’ your respective models into some detail. WORD LIMIT: 2500 words ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM (remember it is the QUALITY of the words you write and not the QUANTITY).

        API:310 lkpi il z013 Coursework ..,1s.t.,.;riient i’,,iod,?,,,:1,.?(/ b!,) Hohoel Mil ant:1.10ff ,f .,varTs

        Attachments:

        need help from scratch real modeling and relational databases in access on a broader 275071

        Need personalized guidance and feedback to help assimilate cumbersomeness of IT way of thinking about business processes in accounting to the nuances of my specific course material.

        Document Preview:

        ACCT 361: Assignment #4?System Development Project Step One (10 points)? Included in this folder is a summary listing of typical events, risks, and common documents associated with the main business processes to help guide you with the process you have chosen to develop for the project. Mostly, we have focused on the Sales/Collection process. You are not expected to know all of the business processes and their risks at this time. We will cover them in future lectures. Required: Complete a preliminary REA model with cardinalities of the process you will be prototyping for the Database Project. This can be handwritten, although your final project will require this to be completed using computer applications. The database project requires you to only prototype two sequential events in the process. Your REAL model, however, should include all events in the process you have chosen for your entity. A good reference is the text book.  Other examples are available through your instructor. Write on the top of the page the industry name and entity type that is used as the basis for your REA model. On the bottom of the page, indicate the two sequential events you wish to prototype. You are more than welcome to meet with me concerning your ideas prior to developing your model.

        Attachments:

        managerial acct hw helpo 275082

        Hi, I’d like a quote to get the solutions for this worksheet with step by step calculations

        Document Preview:

        The Clash Company uses Normal Job Order Costing in its only production department. Overhead is applied to jobs by a predetermined rate, which is based on machine hours. The Company began business on December 1, 2011. The only job started into process during December was Job 45. During December the Company purchased direct materials with a total cost of $15,000. Of this total for direct materials, $2,500 was used on Job 45. The Company also charged a total of $7,500 in conversion costs (direct labor + overhead) to Job 45 during December. Job 45 was NOT finished as of the end of December and no other jobs were worked on during the month. There was no underapplied or overapplied overhead for December. The following transactions occurred during 2012. Estimated overhead for 2012 is $384,000. The estimated machine hours for 2012 total 24,000. Direct materials purchased during 2012 cost a total of $150,000. Direct materials, direct labor, and machine hours used on jobs during 2012 are as follows: Direct Materials Direct Labor Machine Hours Job 45 $31,500 $18,500 8,000 hours Job 50 $40,250 $22,750 6,000 hours Job 55 $28,000 $29,000 7,000 hours Job 60 $38,250 $30,750 4,000 hours Other Costs incurred during 2012 include the following: Depreciation Expense – Finished Goods Warehouse $ 20,000 Indirect Labor $168,000 Administrative Salaries $120,000 Factory Insurance $ 55,000 Factory Utilities $ 61,000 Miscellaneous Overhead $ 80,000 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense $110,000 Factory Equipment Depreciation $ 49,000 Selling Expense $200,000 Jobs 45, 50, and 55 were completed during the year. Job 45 consisted of 20,000 units; Job 50 consisted of 30,000 units; and Job 55 consisted of 10,000 units. All units in Job 45 were sold for $20 each. All units in Job 55 were…

        Attachments:

        problem 5 275105

        Problem 4.3A Recording correcting entries. LO 4

        The following journal entries were prepared by an employee of Jupiter Company who does not have an adequate knowledge of accounting.

        GENERAL JOURNAL PAGE 3
        Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
        2013
        April 1 Accounts Payable 12,400
        Fees Income 12,400
        Performed services on credit
        2 Cash 500
        Telephone Expense 500
        Paid for March telephone service, Check 1917
        3 Office Equipment 7,200
        Office Supplies 800
        Cash 8,400
        Purchased file cabinet and office supplies, Check 1918

        (Assume that Office Equipment and Office Supplies were recorded at the correct values.)

        Examine the above journal entries carefully and prepare the correct journal entries.(Omit the “$” sign in your response)

        Date General Journal Debit Credit
        April 1 (Click to select)Accounts payableTelephone expenseFees incomeOffice equipmentOffice suppliesCashAccounts receivableUtilities
        (Click to select)Office equipmentOffice suppliesFees incomeTelephone expenseCashUtilitiesAccounts payableAccounts receivable
        2 (Click to select)Accounts payableCashOffice suppliesAccounts receivableTelephone expenseFees incomeUtilitiesOffice equipment
        (Click to select)Accounts receivableOffice equipmentFees incomeAccounts payableOffice suppliesTelephone expenseCashUtilities
        3 (Click to select)Accounts receivableOffice equipmentTelephone expenseUtilitiesFees incomeOffice suppliesCashAccounts payable
        (Click to select)Accounts payableCashOffice suppliesTelephone expenseFees incomeOffice equipmentUtilitiesAccounts receivable
        (Click to select)CashTelephone expenseFees incomeOffice suppliesAccounts payableUtilitiesOffice equipmentAccounts receivable

        Analyze:

        After the correcting journal entries have been posted, what effect do the corrections have on the company’s reported assets?(Leave no cells blank be certain to enter to “0” wherever required; Select NE if there is “No Effect”. Omit the “$” sign in your response. Assume that the erroneous entries are reversed and the correct entries are posted, what is the impact on assets as a result of all corrections?)

        Assets (Click to select)DecreasedNEIncreasedby $

        partnership tax return question 275107

        Ryan Ross (111 11 1111), Oscar Oleander (222 22 2222), Clark Carey (333 33 3333), and Kim Kardigan (444 44 4444) are equal members in ROCK the ages, LLC. ROCK serves as agents and managers for prominent musicians in the Los Angeles area. The LLC’s Federal ID number is 55 5555555. It uses the cash basis and the calendar year and began operations on January 1, 2000. Its current address is 6102 Wilshire Boulevard, Suite 2100, Los Angeles, CA 90036. ROCK was the force behind such music icons as Rhiannon and Ulster and has had a very profitable year.

        Document Preview:

        Ryan Ross (111 11 1111), Oscar Oleander (222 22 2222), Clark Carey (333 33 3333), and Kim Kardigan (444 44 4444) are equal members in ROCK the ages, LLC. ROCK serves as agents and managers for prominent musicians in the Los Angeles area. The LLC’s Federal ID number is 55 5555555. It uses the cash basis and the calendar year and began operations on January 1, 2000. Its current address is 6102 Wilshire Boulevard, Suite 2100, Los Angeles, CA 90036. ROCK was the force behind such music icons as Rhiannon and Ulster and has had a very profitable year. The following information was taken from the LLC’s income statement for the current year: Revenues: Fees and commissions $4,800,000 Taxable interest income from bank deposits 1,600 Tax exempt interest 3,200 Gains and losses on stock sales 4,000 Total revenues $4,808,800 Expenses: Advertising and public relations $ 420,000 Charitable contributions 8,000 Section 179 expense 20,000 Employee salaries 1,200,000 Guaranteed payment, Ryan Ross, office manager 600,000 Guaranteed payment, other members 900,000 Entertainment, subject to 50% disallowance 48,000 Travel 120,000 Legal and accounting fees 108,000 Office rentals paid 86,000 …

        Attachments:

        chi omega sorority is planning its annual riverboat extravaganza 274135

        Chi Omega Sorority is planning its annual Riverboat Extravaganza. The Extravaganza committee has assembled the following expected costs for the event:

        Dinner (per person) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $7

        Favors and program (per person) . . . . . . . . . . . . $3

        Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,500

        Tickets and advertising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $700

        Riverboat rental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $4,800

        Floorshow and strolling entertainers . . . . . . . . . . $1,000

        The committee members would like to charge $30 per person for the evening’s activities.

        Required:

        1. Compute the break even point for the Extravaganza (in terms of the number of persons that must attend).

        2. Assume that only 250 persons attended the Extravaganza last year. If the same number attend this year, what price per ticket must be charged to break even?

        3. Refer to the original data ($30 ticket price per person). Prepare a CVP graph for the Extravaganza from zero tickets up to 600 tickets sold.

        chromatics inc produces novelty nail polishes each bottle se 274137

        Chromatics, Inc., produces novelty nail polishes. Each bottle sells for $3.60. Variable unit costs are as follows:

        Acrylic base ……………….$0.75

        Pigments ……………………0.38

        Other ingredients …………..0.35

        Bottle, packing material ……1.15

        Selling commission ………..0.25

        Fixed overhead costs are $12,000 per year. Fixed selling and administrative costs are $6,720 per year. Chromatics sold 35,000 bottles last year.

        Required:

        1. What is the contribution margin per unit for a bottle of nail polish? What is the contribution margin ratio?

        2. How many bottles must be sold to break even? What is the break even sales revenue?

        3. What was Chromatics’ operating income last year?

        4. What was the margin of safety?

        5. Suppose that Chromatics raises the price to $4.00 per bottle, but anticipated sales will drop to 30,400 bottles. What will the new break even point in units be? Should Chromatics raise the price? Explain.

        comfortcraft manufactures swivel seats for customized vans it c 274141

        ComfortCraft manufactures swivel seats for customized vans. It currently manufactures 10,000 seats per year, which it sells for $480 per seat. It incurs variable costs of $180 per seat and fixed costs of $2,200,000. It is considering automating the upholstery process, which is now largely manual. It estimates that if it does so, its fixed costs will be $3,200,000, and its variable costs will decline to $80 per seat.

        Instructions

        With the class divided into groups, answer the following questions.

        (a) Prepare a CVP income statement based on current activity.

        (b) Compute contribution margin ratio, break even point in dollars, margin of safety ratio, and degree of operating leverage based on current activity.

        (c) Prepare a CVP income statement assuming that the company invests in the automated upholstery system.

        (d) Compute contribution margin ratio, break even point in dollars, margin of safety ratio, and degree of operating leverage assuming the new upholstery system is implemented.

        (e) Discuss the implications of adopting the new system.

        coswell company produces plastic that is used for injection mold 274160

        Coswell Company produces plastic that is used for injection molding applications such as gears for small motors. In 2011, the first year of operations, Coswell produced 4,000 tons of plastic and sold 3,000 tons. In 2012, the production and sales results were exactly reversed. In each year, the selling price per ton was $2,000, variable manufacturing costs were 15% of the sales price of units produced, variable selling expenses were 10% of the selling price of units sold, fixed manufacturing costs were $2,400,000, and fixed administrative expenses were $600,000.

        Instructions

        (a) Prepare income statements for each year using variable costing. (Use the format from Illustration 19A 5.)

        (b) Prepare income statements for each year using absorption costing. (Use the format from Illustration 19A 4.)

        (c) Reconcile the differences each year in net income under the two costing approaches.

        (d) Comment on the effects of production and sales on net income under the two costing approaches.

        critically analyze whether any government in the world is always administered their 274172

        Required:

        You should prepare an essay on the following:

        1. Critically analyze whether any Government in the world is always administered their nation in the interest of citizens. Hint: You may include various examples in your discussion. Bear in mind that your discussions should not be politically motivated.

        (40 marks)

        Document Preview:

        COURSEWORK – ASSIGNMENT 1 Year?THREE/2013?MONTH?JAN 2013?? Subject?FIN 4344 TAXATION 2??Weight?10% ?Submission Date?27TH FEB 2013??Student Name??Student ID??? Regulations A. Late Submission A 10% deduction per day of total coursework marks (excluding weekends and public holidays). Late submission between 5 to 10 days, results in a 50% deduction of total coursework marks. Late submission past 10 days results in an automatic 0% for coursework and the student will be barred from the final examination. B. Deliverables Students must submit all materials supporting their coursework listed in the deliverable section. The coursework must be done INDIVIDUALLY and must be entirely your own work. Please make sure that you are aware of the rules concerning plagiarism. If you are unclear about them, please consult your program coordinator/lecturer. Plagiarism is presenting somebody else’s work as your own. It includes: copying information directly from the Web or books without referencing the material; submitting joint coursework as an individual effort; copying another student’s coursework; stealing coursework from another student and submitting it as your own. Suspected plagiarism will be investigated and if found to have occurred will be dealt with according to the procedures set down by the university/college. The coursework should exhibit formal research skills i.e. with a table of content, proper citations, references, and appendixes. The coursework write up must be able to demonstrate critical analysis and application of both theory and practical issues to the company that you have selected. Student may include additional relevant data/information apart from the proposed guidelines in conjunction to your research. Additional marks will be awarded for such attempt. Your coursework should not be more than 2000 words. You should bind your coursework with the coursework cover as the 1st page. A CD containing the softcopy version of your coursework should be…

        Attachments:

        danna lumus the marketing manager for a division that produces 274178

        Danna Lumus, the marketing manager for a division that produces a variety of paper products, is considering the divisional manager’s request for a sales forecast for a new line of paper napkins. The divisional manager has been gathering data so that he can choose between two different production processes. The first process would have a variable cost of $10 per case produced and fixed costs of $100,000. The second process would have a variable cost of $6 per case and fixed costs of $200,000. The selling price would be $30 per case. Danna had just completed a marketing analysis that projects annual sales of 30,000 cases.

        Danna is reluctant to report the 30,000 forecast to the divisional manager. She knows that the first process would be labor intensive, whereas the second would be largely automated with little labor and no requirement for an additional production supervisor. If the first process is chosen, Jerry Johnson, a good friend, will be appointed as the line supervisor. If the second process is chosen, Jerry and an entire line of laborers will be laid off. After some consideration, Danna revises the projected sales downward to 22,000 cases.

        She believes that the revision downward is justified. Since it will lead the divisional manager to choose the manual system, it shows a sensitivity to the needs of current employees—a sensitivity that she is afraid her divisional manager does not possess. He is too focused on quantitative factors in his decision making and usually ignores the qualitative aspects.

        Required:

        1. Compute the break even point for each process.

        2. Compute the sales volume for which the two processes are equally profitable. Identify the range of sales for which the manual process is more profitable than the automated process. Identify the range of sales for which the automated process is more profitable than the manual process. Why does the divisional manager want the sales forecast?

        3. Discuss Danna’s decision to alter the sales forecast. Do you agree with it? Is she acting ethically? Is her decision justified since it helps a number of employees retain their employment? Should the impact on employees be factored into decisions? In fact, is it unethical not to consider the impact of decisions on employees?

        devonly company produces a variety of products one division mak 274226

        Devonly Company produces a variety of products. One division makes gas grills for outdoor cooking. The division’s projected income statement for the coming year is as follows:

        Sales (120,000 units) …….$7,500,000

        Less: Variable expenses …..3,450,000

        Contribution margin ……..$4,050,000

        Less: Fixed expenses ………3,375,000

        Operating income …………$ 675,000

        Required:

        1. Compute the contribution margin per unit, and calculate the break even point in units. Repeat, using the contribution margin ratio.

        2. The divisional manager has decided to increase the advertising budget by $100,000 and cut the average selling price to $58. These actions will increase sales revenues by $1 million. Will the division be made better off?

        3. Suppose sales revenues exceed the estimated amount on the income statement by $540,000. Without preparing a new income statement, determine by how much profits are underestimated.

        4. How many units must be sold to earn an after tax profit of $1.254 million? Assume a tax rate of 34 percent.

        5. Compute the margin of safety in dollars based on the given income statement.

        6. Compute the operating leverage based on the given income statement. If sales revenues are 20 percent greater than expected, what is the percentage increase in profits?

        diversified investor group is opening an office in boise fixed 274240

        Diversified Investor Group is opening an office in Boise. Fixed monthly costs are office rent ($8,100), depreciation on office furniture ($1,600), utilities ($2,500), special telephone lines ($1,200), a connection with an online brokerage service ($2,700), and the salary of a financial planner ($4,900). Variable costs include payments to the financial planner (8% of revenue), advertising (14% of revenue), supplies and postage (1% of revenue), and usage fees for the telephone lines and computerized brokerage service (7% of revenue).

        Requirements

        1. Use the contribution margin ratio CVP formula to compute Diversified’s breakeven revenue in dollars. If the average trade leads to $750 in revenue for Diversified, how many trades must be made to break even?

        2. Use the income statement equation approach to compute the dollar revenues needed to earn a target monthly operating income of $10,500.

        3. Graph Diversified’s CVP relationships. Assume that an average trade leads to $750 in revenue for Diversified. Show the breakeven point, the sales revenue line, the fixed cost line, the total cost line, the operating loss area, the operating income area, and the sales in units (trades) and dollars when monthly operating income of $10,500 is earned.

        4. Suppose that the average revenue Diversified earns increases to $1,000 per trade. Compute the new breakeven point in trades. How does this affect the breakeven point?

        drake company produces a single product last year s income stat 274247

        Drake Company produces a single product. Last year’s income statement is as follows:

        Sales (20,000 units) ………..$1,218,000

        Less: Variable costs ……………812,000

        Contribution margin …………$ 406,000

        Less: Fixed costs ………………300,000

        Operating income ……………$ 106,000

        Required:

        1. Compute the break even point in units and sales dollars.

        2. What was the margin of safety for Drake Company last year?

        3. Suppose that Drake Company is considering an investment in new technology that will increase fixed costs by $250,000 per year, but will lower variable costs to 45 percent of sales. Units sold will remain unchanged. Prepare a budgeted income statement assuming Drake makes this investment. What is the new break even point in units, assuming the investment is made?

        durant manufacturers has performed extensive studies on its cost 274256

        Durant Manufacturers has performed extensive studies on its costs and production and estimates the following annual costs based on 150,000 units (produced and sold):

        Total Annual

        Costs

        (150,000 units)

        Direct material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $300,000

        Direct labor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,000

        Manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225,000

        Selling, general, and administrative . . . . . . . . . . 150,000

        Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $945,000

        Required

        a. Compute Durant’s unit selling price that will yield a profit of $300,000, given sales of 150,000 units.

        b. Compute Durant’s dollar sales that will yield a projected 20 percent profit on sales, assuming variable costs per unit are 60 percent of the selling price per unit and fixed costs are $420,000.

        c. Management believes that a selling price of $8 per unit is reasonable given current market conditions. How many units must Durant sell to generate the revenues (dollar sales) determined in requirement (b)?

        easton corporation makes two different boat anchors a traditiona 274270

        Easton Corporation makes two different boat anchors—a traditional fishing anchor and a high end yacht anchor—using the same production machinery. The contribution margin of the yacht anchor is three times as high as that of the other product. The company is currently operating at full capacity and has been doing so for nearly two years. Bjorn Borg, the company’s CEO, wants to cut back on production of the fishing anchor so that the company can make more yacht anchors. He says that this is a ?ono brainer?? because the contribution margin of the yacht anchor is so much higher.

        Instructions

        Write a short memo to Bjorn Borg describing the analysis that the company should do before it makes this decision and any other considerations that would affect the decision.

        1 a liquidity ratio measures the question 1 options 274293

        1?A liquidity ratio measures the Question 1 options: a) Income or operating success of an enterprise over a period of time. b) Company’s long run financial viability and its ability to meet long term obligations. c) Short term ability of the enterprise to pay its maturing obligations and to meet unexpected needs for cash. d) The market’s expectations for the company. 2?Company B shows that 38% of its assets are financed by creditors. Which of these shows this result? Question 2 options: a) Current ratio b) Times interest earned c) Return on liabilities d) Debt ratio e) Equity ratio 3?A company provided income statements for the past 5 years. In reviewing the percentage columns for each year, you notice that sales are 46% higher in year 5 than in year 1. The company has most likely provided: Question 3 options: a) A horizontal analysis using the prior year (year 4) as the base year. b) A vertical analysis using net sales as the base. c) A horizontal analysis using year 1 as the base year. d) A vertical analysis using net income as the base. e) None of the above are correct answers 4?A weakness of the current ratio is Question 4 options: a) That it can be expressed as a percentage, as a rate, or as a proportion. b) The difficulty of the calculation. c) That it doesn’t take into account the nature of the different current assets accounts. d) That it is rarely used by sophisticated analysts. 5?When performing vertical analysis, the base amount for cost of goods sold is generally Question 5 options: a) Net income. b) Net sales. c) Gross profit. d) Total assets. 6?Jonas Co. has the following items on its income statement: Sales $200,000 Cost of Goods sold 140,000 Operating Expenses 45,000 Loss on sale of Investment 5,000 Income tax expense 3,000 Extraordinary Gain 2,000 Which of the following statements are correct? Question 6 options: a) Income from Continuing Operations is $7,000 b) Income from Continuing Operations is $15,000 c) Net income is $5,000 d) Operating Income is $60,000 7?The purpose of the statement of cash flows is to Question 7 options: a) Prove that assets = liabilities + equity b) Prove that revenues exceed expenses if there is a net income. c) Provide information about the cash receipts and cash payments during a period d) Facilitate banking relationships 8?Cash flows from the acquisition of treasury stock are: Question 8 options: a) Deducted from operating activities b) Added to Financing Activities c) Added to Investing Activities d) Deducted from Financing Activities e) None of these. This is not reported on the statement of Cash Flows. 9?Cash flows from the purchase of Available for Sale securities are: Question 9 options: a) Deducted Operating Activities b) Added in Financing Activities c) Added in Investing Activities d) Deducted in Investing Activities e) None of these. This is not reported on the statement of cash flows. 10?How would you treat the cash used to repay a short term note payable on a cash flow statement? Question 10 options: a) Added in financing activities b) Deducted in financing activities c) Added in operating activities d) Deducted in operating activities. e) None of these. This is not reported on the statement of cash flows. 11?The contract between the bond issuer and the bondholders, which identifies the rights and obligations of the parties, is called a(n): Question 11 options: a) Debenture. b) Bond indenture. c) Mortgage. d) Installment note. e) Cash flow statement 12?From the standpoint of the issuing company, a disadvantage of using bonds as a means of long term financing is that: Question 12 options: a) Bond interest is deductible for tax purposes. b) Interest must be paid on a periodic basis regardless of earnings. c) Bonds can increase return on equity d) Bonds do not affect the owner control. 13?A $1,000 bond traded at 102 ½ means that: Question 13 options: a) The bond pays 2.5% each period. b) The bond traded at $1,025 c) The market rate is 2.5% d) The market rate is 2 ½% above the contract rate 14?If the market rate of interest is less than the contract rate, bonds will sell: Question 14 options: a) At a premium b) At face value c) At a discount d) Cannot determine without terms of the bond. 15?A bond issue was issued at a premium. Over the life of the bonds, the: Question 15 options: a) Carrying value of the bonds will decrease b) Carrying value of the bonds will increase c) If straight line method is used, interest expense will increase each period d) Cash interest paid will decrease each period. 16A company issues 8%, 20 year bonds with a par or face value of $800,000. The market rate is 10%. The amount of interest paid to the bondholders for each semiannual interest payment is: Question 16 options: a) $32,000 b) $40,000 c) $64,000 d) $80,000 17On January 1, 2010, Kopy Center enters into a 5 year lease of a color copier. The lease transfers all equipment ownership risk and rewards to Kopy Center. The interest rate is 8% and each annual lease payment is $75,137. How much should Kopy Center record as the Lease Liability on January 1, 2010? (choose the one closest to your computed answer – there are rounding issues) Question 17 options: a) $18,819 b) $75,137 c) $300,000 d) $375,685 18?Jake Corporation has an Unrealized Gain on its Available for Sale securities. This account should be disclosed in the financial statements in the following manner: Question 18 options: a) As part of “other revenues and expenses” on the income statement. b) As part of normal operating revenue on the income statement. c) As an addition in stockholders’ equity on the balance sheet. d) As an entry in the notes to the financial statements. 19?Several years ago, Bee Corporation issued $400,000, 10% bonds for $370,000. The balance in the Bond Discount account at the end of the current year is $18,000. The balance sheet for the year current would report the carrying value of the bonds at: Question 19 options: a) $355,000 b) $382,000 c) $388,000 d) $400,000 e) $418,000 20?A company has bonds outstanding with a face value of $100,000. The unamortized premium on these bonds is $2,700. The company retires the bonds by buying them on the open market at 99. What is the gain or loss on this retirement? Question 20 options: a) $1,000 gain b) $1,000 loss c) $2,700 gain d) $2,700 loss e) $3,700 gain 21?On October 1, Ritz Company bought $100,000 of Dublin Co, 9% bonds at 99 plus $ 200 broker fees. The bonds pay interest each October 1 and April 1. The entry to record accrued interest on December 31 by Ritz company should include: Question 21 options: a) A credit to Interest Revenue of $2,228 b) A credit to Interest Revenue of $4,500 c) A credit to Interest Revenue of $2,250 d) A debit to Interest Expense of $4,500 e) A debit to Interest Expense of $2,250 22?Morgan Company purchased 2,000 shares of Acer $1 par value common stock for $40 per share as a long term investment. This investment is considered available for sale. In addition Morgan paid $375 in commissions on the transaction. The entry to record the transaction would include a: Question 22 options: a) Debit to Common Stock for $2,000. b) Debit to Common Stock for $80,375. c) Debit to Long–Term Investments for $2,000. d) Debit to Long Term Investments for $80,000 e) Debit to Long–Term Investments for $80,375. 23?Farmer Inc’s trading securities portfolio at the end of the year consists of: Security Cost Market Value Co. A Common Stock $10,000 $11,000 Co. B Bonds payable 8,000 6,000 At the end of the year, Farmer Corporation should: Question 23 options: a) Recognize an unrealized loss – income for $3,000. b) Recognize an unrealized loss – income for $1,000 c) Recognize an unrealized loss – equity for $1,000 d) Recognize an unrealized loss – equity of $3,000 e) Recognize a unrealized loss income for $2,000 and an unrealized gain income for $1,000 f) Recognize a unrealized loss equity for $2,000 and an unrealized gain equity for $1,000 24?Clark Inc. purchased 40% of IT Co for $125,000 on January 1. On May 20 1 of the same year, IT Co paid total cash dividends of $30,000. At year end, IT Co reported net income of $150,000. The balance in the Clark Inc. Long term investment in ITCo. at December 31 should be: Question 24 options: a) $77,000 b) $125,000 c) $173,000 d) $197,000 e) $370,000 25?On January 1, 2011, you purchased equipment by issuing a $8,000, 3 year, 5% installment note. The interest is compounded annually. The terms of the note call for the note to be paid with equal annual cash payments to be made on December 31 each year. Each payment includes interest plus part principal repayment. Compute the annual cash payment, rounded to the nearest dollar. Write your answer without commas, dollar signs or decimal places (XXXX) Question 25 options:

        following is a list of various costs incurred in producing 274312

        Following is a list of various costs incurred in producing frozen pizzas. With respect to the production and sale of frozen pizzas, classify each cost as either variable, fixed, or mixed.

        1. Property insurance premiums, $1,500 per month plus $0.005 for each dollar of property over $3,000,000

        2. Packaging

        3. Hourly wages of inspectors

        4. Pension cost, $0.50 per employee hour on the job

        5. Hourly wages of machine operators

        6. Rent on warehouse, $5,000 per month plus $5 per square foot of storage used

        7. Refrigerant used in refrigeration equipment

        8. Pepperoni

        9. Dough

        10. Tomato paste

        11. Property taxes, $50,000 per year on factory building and equipment

        12. Electricity costs, $0.08 per kilowatt hour

        13. Salary of plant manager

        14. Straight line depreciation on the production equipment

        15. Janitorial costs, $3,000 per month

        discuss which method fifo or lifo would be preferred for income tax 274343

        of appliances at January 1, 2010, purchases invoices during the year, and the inventory

        count at December 31, 2010, are summarized as follows:

        Inventory,

        Purchases Invoices

        Inventory Count,

        Model January 1 1st 2nd 3rd December 31

        BB900 27 at $213 21 at $215 18 at $222 18 at $225 30

        C911 10 at 60 6 at 65 2 at 65 2 at 70 4

        L100 6 at 305 3 at 310 3 at 316 4 at 317 4

        N201 2 at 520 2 at 527 2 at 530 2 at 535 4

        Q73 6 at 520 8 at 531 4 at 549 6 at 542 7

        Z120 — 4 at 222 4 at 232 — 2

        ZZRF 8 at 70 12 at 72 16 at 74 14 at 78 12

        Instructions

        1. Determine the cost of the inventory on December 31, 2010, by the first in, first out

        method. Present data in columnar form, using the following headings:

        Model Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost

        If the inventory of a particular model comprises one entire purchase plus a portion

        of another purchase acquired at a different unit cost, use a separate line for each

        purchase.

        2. Determine the cost of the inventory on December 31, 2010, by the last in, first out

        method, following the procedures indicated in (1).

        3. Determine the cost of the inventory on December 31, 2010, by the average cost

        method, using the columnar headings indicated in (1).

        4. Discuss which method (FIFO or LIFO) would be preferred for income tax

        purposes in periods of (a) rising prices and (b) declining prices.

        Attachments:

        foxtrot dancing will invest 2 500 per year for 8 years what table is use 274365

        Foxtrot Dancing will invest $2,500 per year for 8 years. What table is used to determine the amount accumulated at the end of the 8 years?

        Future value of an annuity
        Future value of a single amount
        Present value of a single amount
        Present value of an annuity
        Practice Question 16

        What is the process of determining the present value called?

        Discounting
        Accruing interest
        Amortizing
        Compounding
        Document Preview:

        Practice Question 13????Foxtrot Dancing will invest $2,500 per year for 8 years. What table is used to determine the amount accumulated at the end of the 8 years? ? ? PRIVATE “” ??MACROBUTTON HTMLDirect ? ?Future value of an annuity?? ? ? PRIVATE “” ??MACROBUTTON HTMLDirect ? ?Future value of a single amount?? ? ? PRIVATE “” ??MACROBUTTON HTMLDirect ? ?Present value of a single amount?? ? ? PRIVATE “” ??MACROBUTTON HTMLDirect ? ?Present value of an annuity?? Practice Question 16????What is the process of determining the present value called? ? ? PRIVATE “” ??MACROBUTTON HTMLDirect ? ?Discounting?? ? ? PRIVATE “” ??MACROBUTTON HTMLDirect ? ?Accruing interest?? ? ? PRIVATE “” ??MACROBUTTON HTMLDirect ? ?Amortizing Compounding????? ???Practice Question 26????Of which of the following is the present value of a long term note or bond not a function? Discount rate?? ? ? PRIVATE “” ??MACROBUTTON…

        Attachments:

        frieden company s contribution format income statement for the m 274369

        Frieden Company’s contribution format income statement for the most recent month is given below:

        Sales (40,000 units) . . . . . . . . . . . $800,000

        Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . 560,000

        Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . 240,000

        Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192,000

        Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . $ 48,000

        The industry in which Frieden Company operates is quite sensitive to cyclical movements in the economy. Thus, profits vary considerably from year to year according to general economic conditions. The company has a large amount of unused capacity and is studying ways of improving profits.

        Required:

        1. New equipment has come on the market that would allow Frieden Company to automate a portion of its operations. Variable costs would be reduced by $6 per unit. However, fixed costs would increase to a total of $432,000 each month. Prepare two contribution format income statements, one showing present operations and one showing how operations would appear if the new equipment is purchased. Show an Amount column, a Per Unit column, and a Percent column on each statement. Do not show percentages for the fixed costs.

        2. Refer to the income statements in (1) above. For both present operations and the proposed new operations, compute (a) the degree of operating leverage, (b) the break even point in dollars, and (c) the margin of safety in both dollar and percentage terms.

        3. Refer again to the data in (1) above. As a manager, what factor would be paramount in your mind in deciding whether to purchase the new equipment? (You may assume that ample funds are available to make the purchase.)

        4. Refer to the original data. Rather than purchase new equipment, the marketing manager argues that the company’s marketing strategy should be changed. Instead of paying sales commissions, which are included in variable expenses, the marketing manager suggests that salespersons be paid fixed salaries and that the company invest heavily in advertising. The marketing manager claims that this new approach would increase unit sales by 50% without any change in selling price; the company’s new monthly fixed expenses would be $240,000; and its net operating income would increase by 25%. Compute the break even point in dollar sales for the company under the new marketing strategy. Do you agree with the marketing manager’s proposal?

        frightproof commuter airlines is considering adding a new flight 274371

        Frightproof Commuter Airlines is considering adding a new flight to its current schedule from Metro to Hicksville. This route has the following prices and costs:

        Selling price per passenger per flight . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 80

        Variable cost per passenger per flight . . . . . . . . . . . $ 20

        Fixed cost per flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $2,400

        Income tax rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30%

        Required

        a. Compute Frightproof’s break even point in number of passengers per flight.

        b. How many passengers per flight must Frightproof have to earn $1,050 per flight after taxes?

        c. Each aircraft has the capacity for 70 passengers per flight. In view of this capacity limitation, can Frightproof carry enough passengers to break even? Can the company carry enough passengers to earn $1,050 per flight after taxes?

        gagliano company has decided to introduce a new product the 274376

        Gagliano Company has decided to introduce a new product. The new product can be manufactured by either a capital intensive method or a labor intensive method. The manufacturing method will not affect the quality of the product. The estimated manufacturing costs by the two methods are as follows.

        ?

        Gagliano’s market research department has recommended an introductory unit sales price of $30. The incremental selling expenses are estimated to be $502,000 annually plus $2 for each unit sold, regardless of manufacturing method.

        Instructions

        With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

        (a) Calculate the estimated break even point in annual unit sales of the new product if Gagliano Company uses the:

        (1) capital intensive manufacturing method.

        (2) labor intensive manufacturing method.

        (b) Determine the annual unit sales volume at which Gagliano Company would be indifferent between the two manufacturing methods.

        (c) Explain the circumstance under which Gagliano should employ each of the two manufacturingmethods.

        hall company had sales in 2014 of 1 560 000 on 60 000 274411

        Hall Company had sales in 2014 of $1,560,000 on 60,000 units. Variable costs totaled $720,000, and fixed costs totaled $500,000.

        A new raw material is available that will decrease the variable costs per unit by 25% (or $3.00). However, to process the new raw material, fixed operating costs will increase by $150,000. Management feels that one half of the Declines in the variable costs per unit should be passed on to customers in the form of a sales price reduction. The marketing department expects that this sales price reduction will result in a 5% increase in the number of units sold.

        Instructions

        Prepare a projected CVP income statement for 2014

        (a) Assuming the changes have not been made, and

        (b) Assuming that changes are made as described.

        hardwood inc produces wooden crates used for shipping products 274413

        Hardwood Inc. produces wooden crates used for shipping products by ocean liner. In 2011, Hardwood incurred the following costs.

        Wood used in crate production ………………………………….$54,000

        Nails (considered insignificant and a variable expense) ………….$ 340

        Direct labor ………….………….………….………….………….$37,000

        Utilities for the plant:

        $2,000 each month, plus $0.45 for each kilowatt hour used

        each month Rent expense for the plant for the year ….………….$21,400

        Assume Hardwood used an average 500 kilowatt hours each month over the past year.

        Instructions

        (a) What is Hardwood’s total manufacturing cost if it uses a variable costing approach?

        (b) What is Hardwood’s total manufacturing cost if it uses an absorption costing approach?

        (c) What accounts for the difference in manufacturing costs between these two costing approaches?

        accounting 422461

        Grissom Products installs standard and deluxe storage sheds. Most of the installation process of the sheds is done using direct labor. There are a maximum of 24,000 direct labor hours available each year.

        Selected data related to each product is as follows:

        Standard

        Deluxe

        Sales price per unit

        $2,000

        $4,000

        Direct materials per unit

        350

        600

        Direct labor per unit

        250

        350

        Variable overhead per unit

        100

        200

        Direct labor hours per unit

        4

        6

        The company believes that there is sufficient demand for the sale and installation of up to 4,000 standard and 2,500 deluxe sheds each year.

        Question: How many of each type should be installed in order for the company to maximize profits?

        hansen 422534

        Hanson and ICI (United Kingdom)

        In May 1991, Hanson, the United Kingdom’s most notoriously acquisitive corporation, purchased a 2.8 percent stake in ICI, the United Kingdom’s largest manufacturer and the world’s fourth largest chemical corporation. Amid speculation about the possibility of a takeover bid, the comparative performance of the two companies was a significant issue because of the claims of the respective management concerning their relative efficiency and success.

        From an accounting perspective, it is possible to assess performance in terms of both U.S. and U.K. GAAP because Hanson and ICI are listed in the United States and are required by the SEC, under Form 20 F, to provide reconciliation data. The comparative data below show net income and shareholders’ equity data for the period 1998’2002 in accordance with both U.K. and U.S. GAAP, together with the data for long term debt.

        Questions

        1. Calculate the “conservatism” index and returns on equity for Hanson and ICI for the period 1998’2002 under both U.K. and U.S. GAAP.

        2. Does it appear that U.S. GAAP is more or less conservative than U.K. GAAP? What could be the main reasons for this?

        3. To what extent do the results affect your assessments of comparative corporate performance?

        4. Calculate the debt equity (leverage or gearing) ratio for both corporations under both U.K. and U.S. GAAPs.

        5. To what extent are the results likely to affect your assessment of the comparative riskiness of investing in Hanson and ICI?

        ICI and Hanson: Comparative Data Under U.K. and U.S. GAAP

        (in A??L) 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 ICI Net Income U.K. GAAP 83,000,000 252,000,000 (228,000,000) 80,000,000 179,000,000 U.S. GAAP (44,000,000) 53,000,000 (456,000,000) 13,000,000 9,000,000 Shareholders’ Equity U.K. GAAP 149,000,000 244,000,000 (216,000,000) (364,000,000) 499,000,000 U.S. GAAP 3,557,000,000 3,373,000,000 2,828,000,000 2,568,000,000 2,805,000,000 Long term Debt 3,144,000,000 1,503,000,000 1,616,000,000 1,304,000,000 1,709,000,000 Hanson Net Income U.K. GAAP 338,500,000 302,200,000 236,400,000 278,800,000 187,400,000 U.S. GAAP 365,100,000 317,900,000 256,700,000 302,300,000 (628,600,000) Shareholders’ Equity U.K. GAAP 1,592,300,000 1,847,000,000 2,420,600,000 2,720,800,000 2,660,200,000 U.S. GAAP 2,520,600,000 2,733,200,000 3,369,000,000 3,556,500,000 2,605,800,000 Long term Debt 1,007,000,000 1,005,700,000 1,634,100,000 1,599,300,000 972,300,000

        accounting homework help please explain 422576

        Harmon Household Products, Inc., manufactures a number of consumer items for general household use. One of these products, a chopping board, requires an expensive hardwood. During a recent month, the company manufactured 3,800 chopping boards using 2,850 board feet of hardwood. The hardwood cost the company $24,510.

        The company’s standards for one chopping board are 0.68 board feet of hardwood, at a cost of $9.00 per board foot.

        2.

        Break down the difference computed in (1) above into a materials price variance

        work in process painting 5 1 balance 4 360 5 31 transferred out 5 31 materials 5 430 422580

        Work in Process—Painting
        5/1 Balance 4,360 5/31 Transferred out ?
        5/31 Materials 5,430
        5/31 Labor 4,470
        5/31 Overhead 1,510
        5/31 Balance ?

        Production records show that there were430units in the beginning inventory, 30% complete,1,560units started, and1,480units transferred out. The beginning work in process had materials cost of $2,680and conversion costs of $1,680. The units in ending inventory were 40% complete. Materials are entered at the beginning of the painting process.

        (a), (b) and (c)
        Your answer is incorrect. Try again.

        (a)How many units are in process at May 31?

        Work in process, May 31 units

        (b)What is the unit materials cost for May?(Round unit costs to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.25.)

        The unit materials cost for May $

        (c)What is the unit conversion cost for May?(Round unit costs to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.25.)

        The unit conversion cost for May $

        LINK TO TEXTLINK TO TEXT

        ethical responsibilities financial accounting 422582

        Harriet Moore is an accountant for New World Pharmaceuticals. Her duties include tracking research and development spending in the new product development division. Over the course of the past six months, Harriet notices that a great deal of funds have been spent on a particular project for a new drug. She hears “through the grapevine” that the company is about to patent the drug and expects it to be a major advance in antibiotics. Harriet believes that this new drug will greatly improve company performance and will cause the company’s stock to increase in value. Harriet decides to purchase shares of New World in order to benefit from this expected increase. <?XML:NAMESPACE PREFIX = O />

        1. What are Harriet’s ethical responsibilities with respect to the information she has learned through her duties as an accountant for New World?

        2. What are the implications to her planned purchase of New World shares?

        help for an assignment 274006

        ACC 306 – Microcomputer Applications for Accountants © 2012 Strayer University. All Rights Reserved. This document contains Strayer University Confidential and Proprietary information and may not be copied, further distributed, or otherwise disclosed in whole or in part, without the expressed written permission of Strayer University.

        Document Preview:

        ACC 306 – Microcomputer Applications for Accountants (Prerequisite: ACC 100) COURSE DESCRIPTION This course covers the use of Peachtree Complete Accounting for Windows, Microsoft Excel, and the interface between the two software packages, as well as the functions and applications available under Peachtree and Excel. INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIALS Required Resources O’Leary, T. J., & O’Leary, L. (2011). Microcomputer applications for accounting: Excel 2010 custom edition (1st ed.). Boston, MA: McGraw Hill. Estes, J., & Savich, R. S. (2011). A Comparison of Financial Analysis Software for Use in Financial Planning for Small Businesses. Journal of Financial Service Professionals, 65(2), 48 55. Excel (Version 2010) {Computer software}.Redmond, Washington: Microsoft. Excel data files to complete Excel homework – Student will need to download the Excel student data files as indicated by the professor from the textbook Website. Moorthy, M. K, Ong O. V., Samsuri, C. A. S. B., Gopalan, M., & King Tak, Y. (2012) Application of Information Technology in Management Accounting Decision Making. International Journal of Academic Research in Business & Social Sciences, 2(3), 1 16. Peachtree Complete Accounting 2012 – included with the Peachtree textbook. Yacht, C. (2013). Computer accounting with peachtree by sage complete accounting 2012 (16th ed.). Boston, MA: McGraw Hill Supplemental Resources Convery, S. P., & Swaney, A. M. (2012). a y e e With Excel: The Case of Superior Log Cabins, Inc. Issues in Accounting Education, 27(1), 141 156. Jelen, B. (2012). VLOOKUP Variations. Strategic Finance, 93(11), 60 61. Lenning, J. (2011). Pivotal Advance Boosts Excel’s Power. Journal of Accountancy, 212(3), 40 44. Mason Jr., J. O. (2011). A Couple of Capital Budgeting Techniques using Microsoft Excel. Advances in Management 4(4), 23 27. COURSE LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Create and update spreadsheets with Microsoft…

        Attachments:

        young coopers and touche yct is a tax services firm 274010

        Young, Coopers, and Touche (YCT) is a tax services firm. The firm is located in San Diego and employs 10 professionals and eight staff. The firm does tax work for small businesses and well to do individuals. The following data are provided for the last fiscal year. (YCT’s fiscal year runs from July 1 through June 30.)

        Returns processed ……………………………………. 2,000

        Returns in process, beginning of year ………………..$ 78,000

        Returns in process, end of year ……………………… 134,000

        Cost of services sold …………………………………. 890,000

        Beginning direct materials inventory ………………… 20,000

        Purchases, direct materials …………………………… 40,000

        Direct labor …………………………………………… 800,000

        Overhead ……………………………………………… 100,000

        Administrative ………………………………………… 69,000

        Selling ………………………………………………… 53,000

        Required:

        1. Prepare a statement of cost of services sold.

        2. Refer to the statement prepared in Requirement 1. What is the dominant cost? Will this always be true of service organizations? If not, provide an example of an exception.

        3. Assuming that the average fee for processing a tax return is $650, prepare an income statement for YCT.

        4. Discuss three differences between services and tangible products. Calculate the average cost of preparing a tax return for last year. How do the differences between services and tangible products affect the ability of YCT to use the last year’s average cost of preparing a tax return in budgeting the cost of tax return services to be offered next year?

        1 a 2 00 increase in a product s variable expense per 274020

        1. A $2.00 increase in a product’s variable expense per unit accompanied by a $2.00 increase in its selling price per unit will:

        A. Decrease the degree of operating leverage

        B. Decrease the contribution margin

        C. Have no effect on the break even volume

        D. Have no effect on the contribution margin ratio?2. The break even point in unit sales is found by dividing total fixed expenses by

        A. The contribution margin ratio

        b. The variable expenses per unit

        C. The sales price per unit

        d. The contribution margin per unit

        3. Which of the following would not affect the break even point?

        a. Number of units sold

        b. Variable expense per unit

        c. Total fixed expenses

        d. Selling price per unit

        4. If a company increases its selling price by $2 per unit due to an increase in its variable labor cost of $2 per unit, the break even point in units will:

        a. Decrease

        b. Increase

        c. Not change

        d. Change but direction cannot be determined

        5. To obtain the dollar sales volume necessary to attain a given target profit, which of the following formulas should be used?

        a. (Fixed expenses+ Target net profit)/Total contribution margin

        b. (fixed expenses+ Target net profit)/Contribution margin ratio

        c. Fixed expenses/Contribution margin per unit

        d. Target net profit/Contribution margin ratio

        1 if the variable cost per unit goes up contribution 274022

        1. If the variable cost per unit goes up, Contribution margin Break even point

        a. Increases increases.

        b. Increases decreases.

        c. Decreases decreases.

        d. Decreases increases.

        e. Decreases remains unchanged.

        2. The amount of revenue required to earn a targeted profit is equal to

        a. Fixed cost divided by contribution margin.

        b. Fixed cost divided by contribution margin ratio.

        c. Fixed cost plus targeted profit divided by contribution margin ratio.

        d. Targeted profit divided by contribution margin ratio.

        e. Targeted profit divided by variable cost ratio.

        3. Break even revenue for the multiple product firm can

        a. Be calculated by dividing total fixed cost by the overall contribution margin ratio.

        b. Be calculated by dividing segment fixed cost by the overall contribution margin ratio.

        c. Be calculated by dividing total fixed cost by the package contribution margin.

        d. Be calculated by multiplying total fixed cost by the contribution margin ratio.

        e. Not be calculated; break even revenue can only be computed for a single product firm.

        4. In the cost volume profit graph,

        a. The break even point is found where the total revenue curve crosses the x axis.

        b. The area of profit is to the left of the break even point.

        c. The area of loss cannot be determined.

        d. Both the total revenue curve and the total cost curve appear.

        e. Neither the total revenue curve nor the total cost curve appear.

        5. An important assumption of cost volume profit analysis is that

        a. Both costs and revenues are linear functions.

        b. All cost and revenue relationships are analyzed within the relevant range.

        c. There is no change in inventories.

        d. Sales mix remains constant.

        e. All of the above are assumptions of cost volume profit analysis.

        6. The use of fixed costs to extract higher percentage changes in profits as sales activity changes involves

        a. Margin of safety.

        b. Operating leverage.

        c. Degree of operating leverage.

        d. Sensitivity analysis.

        e. Variable cost reduction.

        7. If the margin of safety is 0, then

        a. The company is operating at a loss.

        b. The company is precisely breaking even.

        c. The company is earning a small profit.

        d. The margin of safety cannot be less than or equal to 0; it must be positive.

        e. None of the above is true.

        8. The contribution margin is the

        a. Amount by which sales exceed fixed costs.

        b. Difference between sales and total expenses.

        c. Difference between sales and operating income.

        d. Difference between sales and total variable expense.

        e. Difference between variable expense and fixed expense.

        Use the following information for 4 9 and 4 10.

        Corleone Company produces a single product with a price of $15, variable costs per unit of $12, and fixed costs of $9,000.

        9. Corleone’s break even point in units

        a. Is 600.

        b. Is 750.

        c. Is 9,000.

        d. Is 3,000.

        e. cannot be determined from the information given.

        10. The variable cost ratio and the contribution margin ratio for Corleone are Variable cost ratio Contribution margin ratio

        a. 80% 80%.

        b. 20% 80%.

        c. 20% 20%.

        d. 80% 20%.

        e. The contribution margin ratio cannot be determined from the information given.

        11. If a company’s fixed costs rise by $10,000, which of the following will be true?

        a. The break even point will decrease.

        b. The variable cost ratio will increase.

        c. The break even point will be unchanged.

        d. The variable cost ratio will decrease.

        e. The contribution margin ratio will be unchanged.

        12. Solemon Company has fixed costs of $15,000, variable cost per unit of $5, and a price of $8. If Solemon wants to earn a targeted profit of $3,600, how many units must be sold?

        a. 6,200

        b. 5,000

        c. 1,200

        d. 3,720

        e. 1,875

        1 poor quality materials could have an unfavorable effect on 274024

        1. Poor quality materials could have an unfavorable effect on which of the following variances?

        Lab efficiency variance Materials quantity Variance

        A Yes Yes

        b Yes No

        c No Yes

        d No No

        2. Which of the following statements concerning ideal standards is incorrect?

        A. Ideal standards generally do not provide the best motivation for workers.

        B. Ideal standards do not make allowances for waste, spoilage, and machine breakdowns.

        C. Ideal standards are better suited for cash budgeting than practical standards.

        D. Ideal standards may be better than practical standards when managers seek continual improvement.

        3. Under traditional standard costing, which of the following would commonly be included when setting a standard quantity for direct material?

        An allowance for material An allowance for material rejected

        wasted during production during production

        a YES YES

        b YES NO

        c NO YES

        d NO NO

        4. When computing standard cost variances, the difference between actual and standard price multiplied by actual quantity yields a(n)

        a Combined price and quantity variance

        b Efficiency variance

        d Quantity variance

        5. Which of the following would produce a materials price variance?

        a An excess quantity of materials used

        b An excess number of direct labor hours worked in completing a job

        c Shipping materials to the plant by air freight rather than by truck

        d Breakage of materials in production

        a cvp graph such as the one shown below is 274026

        A CVP graph such as the one shown below is a useful technique for showing relationships among an organization’s costs, volume, and profits.

        ?

        Required:

        1. Identify the numbered components in the CVP graph.

        2. State the effect of each of the following actions on line 3, line 9, and the break even point. For line 3 and line 9, state whether the action will cause the line to:

        Remain unchanged.

        Shift upward.

        Shift downward.

        Have a steeper slope (i.e., rotate upward).

        Have a flatter slope (i.e., rotate downward).

        Shift upward and have a steeper slope.

        Shift upward and have a flatter slope.

        Shift downward and have a steeper slope.

        Shift downward and have a flatter slope.

        In the case of the break even point, state whether the action will cause the break even point to:

        Remain unchanged.

        Increase.

        Decrease.

        Probably change, but the direction is uncertain.

        Treat each case independently.

        x. Example. Fixed costs are reduced by $5,000 per period.

        Answer (see choices above): Line 3: Shift downward.

        Line 9: Remain unchanged.

        Break even point: Decrease.

        a. The unit selling price is increased from $18 to $20.

        b. Unit variable costs are decreased from $12 to $10.

        c. Fixed costs are increased by $3,000 per period.

        d. Two thousand more units arc sold during the period than were budgeted.

        e. Due to paying salespersons a commission rather than a flat salary, fixed costs are reduced by $8,000 per period and unit variable costs arc increased by $3.

        f. Due to an increase in the cost of materials, both unit variable costs and the selling price are increased by $2.

        g. Advertising costs are increased by $10,000 per period, resulting in a 10% increase in the number of units sold.

        h. Due to automating an operation previously done by workers, fixed costs are increased by $12,000 per period and unit variable costs are reduced by$4.

        a department of alpha co incurred the following costs for 274027

        A department of Alpha Co. incurred the following costs for the month of September. Variable costs, and the variable portion of mixed costs, are a function of the number of units of activity:

        Activity level in units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,000

        Variable costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $10,000

        Fixed costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,000

        Mixed costs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,000

        Total costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $60,000

        During October the activity level was 8,000 units, and the total costs incurred were $70,500.

        Required:

        a. Calculate the variable costs, fixed costs, and mixed costs incurred during October.

        b. Use the high–low method to calculate the cost formula for mixed cost.